Preface Introduction Functions

SIPROTEC
Mounting and Commissioning

Distance Protection 7SA522

V4.3

Technical Data Appendix Literature

1 2 3 4 A

Manual

Glossary Index

C53000-G1140-C155-3

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Disclaimer of liability We have checked the text of this manual against the hardware and software described. However, deviations from the description cannot be completely ruled out, so that no liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions contained in the information given. The information in this manual is checked periodically, and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. We appreciate any suggested improvements. We reserve the right to make technical improvements without notice. Copyright Copyright Siemens AG 2004. All rights reserved. Dissemination or reproduction of this document, or evaluation and communication of its contents, is not authorized except where expressly permitted. Violations are liable for damages. All rights reserved, particularly for the purposes of patent application or trademark registration.

Registered Trademarks SIPROTEC, SINAUT, SICAM and DIGSI are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG. Other designations in this manual may be trademarks that if used by third parties for their own purposes may violate the rights of the owner. Release 4.30.03

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Preface
Purpose of this Manual This manual describes the functions, operation, installation, and placing into service of device 7SA522. In particular: Function and setting descriptions; Mounting and commissioning instructions; Technical specifications; Other significant data for experienced users in the Appendix. General information about design, configuration, and operation of SIPROTEC 4 devices are laid down in the SIPROTEC System Description. Target Audience Protection engineers, commissioning engineers, personnel concerned with adjustment, checking, and service of selective protective equipment, automation and substation and power plant personnel. This manual is valid for the SIPROTEC 4 Distance Protection 7SA522; FirmwareVersion V4.3
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive 89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 73/23 EEC). This conformity is proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance with Article 10 of the Council Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN 50081 and EN 61000-6-2 for EMC directive, and with the standard EN 60255-6 for the low-voltage directive. The product conforms with the international standard of the series IEC 60255 and the German standard VDE 0435.

Applicability of this Manual Indication of Conformity

Further Standards

IEEE Std C37.90-*

This product is UL-certified according to the Technical Data:

Additional Support

Should further information on the SIPROTEC 4 system be desired or particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purpose, the matter should be referred to the local Siemens representative.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Preface

Training Courses

Individual course offerings can be found in our Training Catalogue, or questions can be directed to our training centre in Nuremberg.

Instructions and Warnings

The warnings and notes contained in this manual serve for your own safety and for an appropriate lifetime of the device. Please observe them! The following indicators and standard definitions are used: DANGER! indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken. Warning indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. This particularly applies to damage on or in the device itself and consequential damage. Note indicates information about the device or respective part of the instruction manual which is essential to highlight.

WARNING!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Failure to observe these precautions can result in death, personal injury, or serious material damage. Only qualified personnel shall work on and in the vicinity of this equipment. The personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all warnings and maintenance procedures of this manual as well as the safety regulations. Successful and safe operation of the device is dependent on proper transportation, storage, mounting and assembly and the observance of the warnings and instructions of the unit manual. Of particular importance are the general installation and safety regulations for work in a high-voltage environment (for example, IEEE, ANSI, VDE, IEC, EN, DIN, or other national and international regulations). These regulations must be observed.

Definition

QUALIFIED PERSONNEL Prerequisites to proper and safe operation of this product are proper transport, proper storage, setup, installation, operation, and maintenance of the product, as well as careful operation and servicing of the device within the scope of the warnings and instructions of this manual. Training and authorization to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety practices. Training and instruction (or other qualification) for switching, grounding, and designating devices and systems. First aid training.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Preface

Typographic and Graphical Conventions

To designate terms which refer in the text to information of the device or for the device, the following fonts are used: Parameter names Designators of configuration or function parameters which may appear word-forword in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal computer (with operation software DIGSI), are marked in bold letters of a monospace type style. This also applies to header bars for selection menus. 1234A Parameter addresses have the same character style as parameter names. Parameter addresses contain the suffix A in the overview tables if the parameter can only be set in DIGSI via the option Display additional settings. Parameter Conditions possible settings of text parameters, which may appear word-for-word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal computer (with operation software DIGSI), are additionally written in italics. This also applies to header bars for selection menus. Annunciations Designators for information, which may be output by the relay or required from other devices or from the switch gear, are marked in a monospace type style in quotation marks. Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables when the type of designator can be obviously derived from the illustration. The following symbols are used in drawings: device-internal logical input signal device-internal (logical) output signal internal input signal of an analog quantity external binary input signal with number (binary input, input indication) external binary output signal with number (device indication) external binary output signal with number (device indication) used as input signal Example of a parameter switch designated FUNCTION with the address 1234 and the possible settings ON and OFF

Besides these, graphical symbols are used according to IEC 60617-12 and IEC 60617-13 or symbols derived from these standards. Some of the most frequently used are listed below:

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Preface

Input signal of an analog quantity AND gate

OR gate ExclusiveOR gate (antivalence): output is active, if only one of the inputs is active Equivalence: output is active, if both inputs are active or inactive at the same time Dynamic inputs (edgetriggered) above with positive, below with negative edge Formation of one analog output signal from a number of analog input signals Limit element with setting address and parameter designator (name) Timer (pickup delay T, example adjustable) with setting address and parameter designator (name)

Timer (dropout delay T, example non-adjustable)

Dynamic triggered pulse timer T (monoflop)

Static memory (RS-flipflop) with setting input (S), resetting input (R), output (Q) and inverted output (Q)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Contents
1 1.1 1.2 1.3 2 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.1.1 2.1.1.2 2.1.1.3 2.1.2 2.1.2.1 2.1.2.2 2.1.2.3 2.1.2.4 2.1.2.5 2.1.3 2.1.3.1 2.1.3.2 2.1.4 2.1.4.1 2.1.4.2 2.1.4.3 2.1.4.4 2.1.5 2.1.5.1 2.1.5.2 2.1.5.3 2.1.6 2.1.6.1 2.1.6.2 2.1.6.3 2.1.6.4 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Overall Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Application Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Functional Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration of the Functional Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device, General Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trip Dependent Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spontaneous Fault Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 34 35 37 39 39 39 39 40 40

Power System Data 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Change Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of the Setting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power System Data 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oscillographic Fault Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 47 48 48 48 49 49 59 60 62 62 62 63 63

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Contents

2.2 2.2.1 2.2.1.1 2.2.1.2 2.2.1.3 2.2.1.4 2.2.1.5 2.2.2 2.2.2.1 2.2.2.2 2.2.2.3 2.2.3 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 2.2.3.3 2.2.4 2.2.4.1 2.2.4.2 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.6 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.6.4 2.6.5 2.6.6 2.6.7 2.6.8 2.6.9 2.6.10 2.6.11 2.6.12

Distance Protection 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Distance Protection 21, General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculation of the Impedances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance Protection with Quadrilateral Characteristic 21 (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 64 67 74 77 79 81 81 87 92

Distance Protection with MHO Characteristic 21 (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Tripping Logic of the Distance Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Power Swing Detection 68 (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Function Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Protection Data Interfaces and Communication Topology (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Function Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Remote Signals via Protection Data Interface (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Pilot Protection for Distance Protection 85-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip with Zone Acceleration Z1B (PUTT) . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Direct (Underreach) Transfer Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip (POTT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Directional Unblocking Scheme. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Directional Blocking Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Transient Blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Measures for Weak and Zero Infeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

10

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Contents

2.7 2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.3 2.7.4 2.8 2.8.1 2.8.2 2.8.3 2.8.4 2.8.5 2.8.6 2.8.7 2.8.8 2.8.9 2.9 2.9.1 2.9.1.1 2.9.1.2 2.9.2 2.9.2.1 2.9.2.2 2.9.3 2.9.3.1 2.10 2.10.1 2.10.2 2.10.3 2.10.4 2.11 2.11.1 2.11.2 2.11.3 2.11.4 2.11.5 2.12 2.12.1 2.12.2 2.12.3 2.12.4

Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/ 51N/ 67N (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Pilot Protection for Ground Fault Protection 85-67N (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Directional Comparison Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Directional Unblocking Scheme. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Directional Blocking Scheme. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Transient Blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Measures for Weak or Zero Infeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Weak-Infeed Tripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Classical Tripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Tripping According to French Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 External Direct and Remote Tripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Overcurrent Protection 50/51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection (SOTF) 50HS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

11

Contents

2.13 2.13.1 2.13.2 2.13.3 2.13.4 2.14 2.14.1 2.14.2 2.14.3 2.14.4 2.15 2.15.1 2.15.2 2.15.3 2.15.4 2.15.5 2.16 2.16.1 2.16.2 2.16.3 2.16.4 2.17 2.17.1 2.17.2 2.17.3 2.17.4 2.18 2.18.1 2.18.2 2.18.3 2.18.4

Automatic Reclosure Function 79 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Synchronism and Voltage Check 25 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Undervoltage and Overvoltage Protection 27/59 (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Overvoltage Protection 59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Undervoltage Protection (27). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Frequency Protection 81 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Fault Locator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

12

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Contents

2.19 2.19.1 2.19.1.1 2.19.1.2 2.19.1.3 2.19.1.4 2.19.1.5 2.19.1.6 2.19.1.7 2.19.2 2.19.2.1 2.19.2.2 2.19.2.3 2.19.2.4 2.20 2.20.1 2.20.1.1 2.20.1.2 2.20.1.3 2.20.1.4 2.20.1.5 2.20.1.6 2.20.2 2.20.2.1 2.20.2.2 2.20.2.3

Monitoring Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Measurement Supervision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Hardware Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Software Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 External Transformer Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Malfunction Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Trip Circuit Supervision 74TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Energization Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detection of the Circuit Breaker Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Pole Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pickup Logic for the Entire Device ....................................... Tripping Logic of the Entire Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Breaker Trip Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 322 325 325 325 327 327 330 333 334 335 341 341 341 343 343

Function Control and Circuit Breaker Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

13

Contents

2.21 2.21.1 2.21.1.1 2.21.2 2.21.2.1 2.21.2.2 2.21.2.3 2.21.3 2.21.3.1 2.21.3.2 2.21.4 2.21.4.1 2.21.4.2 2.21.4.3 2.21.4.4 2.21.5 2.21.5.1 2.21.5.2 2.21.5.3 2.21.5.4 2.21.6 2.21.6.1 2.21.6.2 2.21.6.3 2.21.7 2.21.7.1 2.21.7.2 2.21.7.3 2.22 2.22.1 2.22.1.1 2.22.1.2 2.22.1.3 2.22.1.4 2.22.2 2.22.2.1 2.22.3 2.22.3.1 2.22.3.2 2.22.4 2.22.4.1

Auxiliary Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Message Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 347 348 348

Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Demand Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Long-term Average Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Min/Max Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Points (Measured Values) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limit Value Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Types ..................................................... Sequence in the Command Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switchgear Interlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 352 352 353 353 353 353 354 354 354 356 356 356 356 357 357 358 358 359 359 360 361 364

Command Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Control Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

14

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Contents

3 3.1 3.1.1

Mounting and Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Mounting and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Configuration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Hardware Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching Elements on Printed Circuit Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel Flush Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rack Mounting and Cubicle Mounting . Panel Surface Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 372 374 377 382 387 387 387 389 391

3.1.2 3.1.2.1 3.1.2.2 3.1.2.3 3.1.2.4 3.1.2.5 3.1.3 3.1.3.1 3.1.3.2 3.1.3.3 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 3.3.7 3.3.8 3.3.9 3.3.10 3.3.11 3.3.12 3.3.13 3.3.14 3.3.15 3.3.16 3.3.17 3.3.18 3.3.19 3.4

Checking Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Checking Data Connections of Serial Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Checking the Protection Data Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Checking System Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Test Mode / Transmission Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Checking Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Testing the System Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Checking the Binary Inputs and Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Checking the Communication Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Testing the Circuit Breaker Failure Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Current, Voltage, and Phase Rotation Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Direction Check with Load Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Polarity Check for the Voltage Input V4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 Polarity Check for the Current Measuring Input I4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Measuring the Operating Time of the Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Testing the Pilot Protection for Distance Protection 8521 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Testing the Pilot Protection for Ground Fault Protection 8567N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Checking the Pilot Protection for Breaker Failure Protection and/or End Fault Protection 422 Checking the Pilot Protection for Internal and External Remote Tripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Testing User-defined Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Trip and Close Test with the Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Trip/Close Tests for the Configured Operating Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Triggering Oscillographic Recording for Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Final Preparation of the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

15

Contents

4 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.1.7 4.1.8 4.1.9 4.1.10 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15 4.16 4.17 4.18 4.19 4.20 4.21 4.22

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 General Device Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Analog Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Auxiliary Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Binary Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Communication Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Electrical Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Mechanical Stress Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Climatic Stress Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Service Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Distance Protection 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Power Swing Detection 68 (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Pilot Protection for Distance Protection 85-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Pilot Protection for Ground Fault Protection 8567N (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Weak-Infeed Tripping (classic) 27WI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Weak-Infeed Tripping (French specification) 27WI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Protection Data Interfaces and Communication Topology (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 External Direct and Remote Tripping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 Time Overcurrent Protection 50(N) / 51(N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection 50HS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Automatic Reclosure Function 79 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Synchronism and Voltage Check 25 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Voltage Protection 27/59 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Frequency Protection 81 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Fault Locator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection 50BF (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Monitoring Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Transmission of Binary Information (optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 User Defined Functions (CFC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Auxiliary Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

16

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Contents

4.23 4.23.1 4.23.2 4.23.3 4.23.4 A A.1 A.1.1 A.1.1.1 A.1.2 A.2 A.2.1 A.2.2 A.3 A.3.1 A.3.2 A.4 A.4.1 A.4.2 A.4.3 A.4.4 A.4.5 A.4.6 A.5 A.6 A.7 A.8 A.9 A.10

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size 1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size 1/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Panel Surface Mounting (Housing Size 1/2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Panel Surface Mounting (Housing Size 1/1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Ordering Information and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Ordering Code (MLFB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Terminal Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Housing for panel surface and cubicle mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Housing for Panel Surface Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 Connection Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Current Transformer Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Voltage Transformer Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Binary Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Binary Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Default Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Pre-defined CFC Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Protocol-dependent Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 Functional Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 Group Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570 Measured Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 Literature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

17

Contents

18

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Introduction

1
The SIPROTEC 4 7SA522 is introduced in this chapter. The device is presented in its application, characteristics, and scope of functions.

1.1 1.2 1.3

Overall Operation Application Scope Characteristics

20 23 26

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

19

1 Introduction

1.1

Overall Operation
The digital Distance Protection SIPROTEC 4 7SA522 is equipped with a powerful microprocessor system. This provides complete numerical processing of all functions in the device, from the acquisition of the measured values up to the output of commands to the circuit breakers. Figure1-1 shows the basic structure of the 7SA522.

Analog Inputs

The measuring inputs (MI) convert the currents and voltages coming from the transformers and adapt them to the level appropriate for the internal processing. The device has 4 current and 4 voltage inputs. Three current inputs are provided to measure the phase currents, an additional measuring input (I4) can be configured to measure the ground current (residual current from the current transformer neutral), the ground current of a parallel line (for parallel line compensation) or the neutral current of a power transformer (for ground fault direction determination).

Figure 1-1

Hardware structure of the digital Distance Protection 7SA522

A voltage measuring input is provided for each phase-ground voltage. Additionally a voltage input (V4) can optionally be used to measure either the delta voltage, for a bus voltage (for synchronism and voltage check) or any other voltage Vx (for overvoltage protection). The analog values are transferred further to the IA input amplifier group.

20

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

1.1 Overall Operation

The input amplifier group IA provides high-resistance termination for the analog input quantities. It consists of filters that are optimized for measured value processing with regard to bandwidth and processing speed. The AD analog digital converter group contains analog/digital converters and memory components for data transfer to the microcomputer system. Microcomputer System Apart from processing the measured values, the microcomputer system C also executes the actual protection and control functions. They especially consist of: Filtering and conditioning of the measured signals, Continuous monitoring of the measured quantities Monitoring of the pickup conditions for the individual protective functions Querying of limit values and time sequences, Control of signals for logical functions, Trip and close command decisions, Stocking messages, fault data and fault values for fault analysis purposes, Administration of the operating system and its functions, e.g. data storage, realtime clock, communication, interfaces, etc. The information is provided via output amplifier OA. Binary Inputs and Outputs Binary inputs and outputs from and to the computer system are routed via the I/O modules (inputs and outputs). The computer system obtains the information from the system (e.g remote resetting) or the external equipment (e.g. blocking commands). Additional outputs are mainly commands that are issued to the switching devices and messages for remote signalling of events and states. LEDs and an LC display provide information on the function of the device and indicate events, states and measured values. Integrated control and numeric keys in conjunction with the LCD facilitate local interaction with the local device. All information of the device can be accessed using the integrated control and numeric keys. The information includes protective and control settings, operating and fault messages, and measured values (see also Chapter 2 and SIPROTEC 4 System Description /1/). Devices with control functions also allow station control on the front panel. Serial Interfaces Via the serial interface in the front panel the communication with a personal computer using the operating program DIGSI is possible. This facilitates a comfortable handling of all device functions. The service interface can also be used for communication with a personal computer using DIGSI. This interface is especially well suited for the fixed wiring of the devices to the PC or operation via a modem. Via the serial system interface all device data can be transferred to a central evaluation unit or to a control centre. This interface may be provided with various protocols and physical transmission schemes to suit the particular application. A further interface is provided for time synchronization of the internal clock through external synchronization sources. Further communication protocols can be realized via additional interface modules.

Front Elements

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

21

1 Introduction

Protection Data Interface (optional)

Depending on the version there are one or two protection data interfaces. Via these interfaces the data for the pilot protection scheme and further information such as closing the local circuit breaker, other external trip commands coupled via binary inputs and binary information can be transmitted to other ends. These described functional units are supplied by a power supply PS with the necessary power in the different voltage levels. Brief supply voltage dips which may occur on short circuits in the auxiliary voltage supply of the power system are usually bridged by a capacitor (see also Technical Data, Subsection 4.1).

Power Supply

22

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

1.2 Application Scope

1.2

Application Scope
The digital distance protection 7SA522 is a selective and quick protection for overhead lines and cables with single- and multi-ended infeeds in radial, ring or any type of networked systems of any voltage levels. The network neutral can be grounded, compensated or isolated. The device incorporates the functions which are normally required for the protection of an overhead line feeder. It may also be applied as time-graded backup protection to all types of comparison protection schemes used on lines, transformers, generators, motors and bus protection at all voltage levels. The devices located at the ends of the protected zone exchange measuring information via pilot protection functions with conventional connections (contacts) or via optional protection data interfaces using dedicated communication links (usually fibre optic cables) or a communication network. If the 7SA522 devices are equipped with a protection data interface, they can be used for a protection object with 2 ends. Lines with three terminals (teed feeders) require at least one device with two protection data interfaces.

Protective Elements

The basic function of the device is the recognition of the distance to the fault with distance protection measurement. In particular for complex multiphase faults, the distance protection has a non-switched 6-impedance-loops design (full scheme). Different pickup schemes enable a good adaption to system conditions and the user philosophy. The network neutral can be isolated, compensated or grounded (with or without ground current limiting). The use on long, heavily loaded lines is possible with or without series compensation. The distance protection may be supplemented by pilot protection using various signal transmission schemes (for fast tripping on 100% of the line length). In addition, a ground fault protection for high resistance ground faults (ordering option) is available, which may be directional, non-directional and may also be incorporated in signal transmission. On lines with weak or no infeed at one line end, it is possible to achieve fast tripping at both line ends by means of the signal transmission schemes. Subsequent to energizing the line onto a fault, it is possible to achieve a non-delayed trip signal. In the event the measured voltages fail due to a fault in the secondary circuits (e.g. trip of the voltage transformer fuse) the device can automatically revert to emergency operation with an integrated overcurrent protection, until the measured voltage is restored. This time overcurrent protection has three definite-time overcurrent elements and one inverse-time element; a number of curves based on various standards is available for the inverse-time element. The elements can be combined in any way. Alternatively, the time delayed overcurrent protection may be used as back-up time delayed overcurrent protection. It functions independently and parallel to the distance protection. Depending on the relay version, most fault protection functions may also trip singlepole. They can work in co-operation with an integrated automatic recloser (available as an option) which enables single-pole, three-pole or single and three-pole automatic reclosure as well as several interrupt cycles on overhead lines. The device can check the validity of the reclosure through voltage and/or synchronism check (can be ordered optionally) after three-pole tripping. An external automatic recloser and/or synchronism check as well as double protection with one or two automatic reclose functions can also be connected.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

23

1 Introduction

Apart from the mentioned fault protection functions, additional protection functions are available, such as multi-element overvoltage, undervoltage and frequency protection, circuit breaker failure protection and protection against power swings (simultaneously active as power swing blocking for the distance protection). For the rapid location of the damage to the line after a fault, a fault locator is integrated which also may compensate the influence of parallel lines. Digital Transmission of Protection Data (optional) If the distance protection is to be complemented by digital pilot protection schemes, the data required for this purpose can be transmitted via the protection data interface by employing a digital communication link. Communication via the protection data interfaces can be used for transmitting further information. Besides measured values also binary commands or other information can be transmitted. With more than two devices (= ends of the protected object) the communication can be built up as a ring. This enables a redundant operation in case one communication line fails. The devices will automatically find the remaining healthy communication lines. But even with two ends, communication lines can be doubled to create redundancies. Control Functions The device provides control functions which can be accomplished for activating and deactivating switchgear via the integrated operator panel, the system interface, binary inputs and a personal computer with the operating software DIGSI. The status of the primary equipment can be transmitted to the device via auxiliary contacts connected to binary inputs. The current status (or position) of the primary equipment can be read out at the device, and used for interlocking or plausibility monitoring. The number of the operating equipment to be switched is limited by the binary inputs and outputs available in the device or the binary inputs and outputs allocated for the switch position indications. Depending on the equipment used one (single point indication) or two (double point indication) binary inputs may be used. The capability of switching primary equipment can be restricted by a setting associated with the switching authority (remote or local), and by the operating mode (interlocked/non-interlocked, with or without password request). Processing of interlocking conditions for switching (e.g. switching error protection) can be established with the aid of integrated, user-configurable logic functions. The operating messages provide information about conditions in the power system and the device. Measurement quantities and values that are calculated can be displayed locally and communicated via the serial interfaces. Device messages can be assigned to a number of LEDs on the front cover (allocatable), can be externally processed via output contacts (allocable), linked with user-definable logic functions and/or issued via serial interfaces (see Communication below). During a fault (fault in the system) important events and status changes are stored in the fault logs. Instantaneous fault values are also saved in the device and may be analysed subsequently. Communication Serial interfaces are available for the communication with operating, control and memory systems. A 9-pin DSUB socket on the front cover is used for local communication with a personal computer. By means of the SIPROTEC operating software DIGSI 4, all operational and evaluation tasks can be executed via this operating interface, such as specifying and modifying configuration parameters and settings, configuration of userspecific logic functions, retrieving operational messages and measured values, inquiring device conditions and measured values, issuing control commands.

Messages and Measured Values; Fault Recording

24

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

1.2 Application Scope

To establish an extensive communication with other digital operating, control and memory components the device may be provided with further interfaces depending on the order variant. The service interface can be operated through data lines. Also, a modem can be connected to this interface. For this reason, remote operation is possible via personal computer and the DIGSI operating software, e.g. to operate several devices via a central PC. The system interface is used for central communication between the device and a control centre. It can be operated through data cables or optical fibres. Several standardized protocols are available for data transmission. Another interface is provided for the time synchronization of the internal clock via external synchronization sources (IRIG-B or DCF77). Other interfaces provide for communication between the devices at the ends of the protected object. These protection data interfaces have been mentioned above in the protection functions. The operator and service interface allow to operate the device remotely or locally, using a standard browser. This is possible during commissioning, checking and also during operation of the devices at all ends of the protected object, using a communication network. For this a special commissioning tool, the WEB monitor, is provided, which has been optimized for the differential protection system, but upgraded for the needs of the distance protection.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

25

1 Introduction

1.3

Characteristics
Powerful 32-bit microprocessor system Complete digital processing of measured values and control, from the sampling of the analog input values up to the closing and tripping commands to the circuit breakers Complete galvanic and reliable separation between internal processing circuits from the measurement, control, and power supply circuits by analog input transducers, binary inputs and outputs and the DC/DC or AC/DC converters Complete scope of functions which are normally required for the protection of a line Digital protection data transmission, may be used for pilot protection with permanent monitoring of disturbance, fault or transfer time deviations in the communication network with automatic runtime re-adjustment Distance protection system realizable for 3 ends Simple device operation using the integrated operator panel or a connected personal computer with operator guidance Storage of fault indications as well as instantaneous values for fault recording

General Features

Distance Protection 21

Protection for all types of faults in systems with grounded, compensated or isolated starpoint. Selectable polygonal or MHO-circle characteristic; Reliable differentiation between load and fault conditions including long, highloaded lines High sensitivity in the case of a weakly loaded system, extreme stability against load surges and power jumps Optimum adaption to the line parameters by means of the tripping characteristic with diverse configuration parameters and load trapezoid (elimination of the possible load impedances); Six measuring systems for each distance zone (full scheme) Six distance zones, selectable as forward, reverse or non-directional reaching, one may be used as an overreach zone Nine time elements for the distance zones Direction determination (with polygon) or polarization (with MHO-circle) is done with unfaulted loop (quadrature) voltages and voltage memory, thereby achieving unlimited directional sensitivity, and not affected by capacitive voltage transformer transients Suitable for lines with series compensation Insensitive to current transformer saturation Compensation against the influence of a parallel line Shortest tripping time is approx. 17 ms (for fN = 50 Hz) or 15 ms (for fN = 60 Hz) with regular contacts. Phase segregated tripping (in conjunction with single-pole or single- and three-pole auto-reclosure) Non-delayed tripping following switch onto fault

26

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

1.3 Characteristics

Two sets of ground impedance (residual) compensation factors Power Swing Supplement 68 (optional) Power swing detection with dZ/dt measurement with three measuring systems Power swing detection up to a maximum of 7 Hz swing frequency; In service also during single-pole dead times Settable power swing programs Prevention of undesired tripping by the distance protection during power swings Tripping for out-of-step conditions can also be configured Pilot Protection for Distance Protection 8521 Different procedures can be set: Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip = PUTT (via a separately settable overreach zone); Comparison schemes (Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip = POTT or blocking schemes, with separate overreach zone); Suitable for lines with two or three ends Phase segregated transmission possible in lines with two ends Optionally, signal exchange of the devices via dedicated communication links (in general optical fibres) or a communication network, in this case a phase-segregated transmission with two or three line ends and continuous monitoring of the communication paths and the signal propagation delay with automatic re-adjustment. Ground Fault Protection 50N, 51N, 67N (optional) Time overcurrent protection with maximally three definite time elements (50N) and one inverse time element (51N) for high resistance ground faults in grounded systems For inverse time protection a selection from various characteristics based on several standards can be made The inverse time element can also be set as fourth definite time element High sensitivity (depending on the version from 3 mA); Phase current stabilization against fault currents during current transformer saturation Second harmonic inrush restraint Optionally ground fault protection with zero sequence voltage tripping time or inverse time tripping Each element can be set non-directional or directional in the forward or reverse direction Single-pole tripping enabled by integrated phase selector Direction determination with automatic selection of the larger of zero sequence voltage or negative sequence voltage (V0, I0 or V2), with zero sequence system quantities (I0, V0), with zero sequence current and transformer neutral current (I0, Ig). or with negative sequence system quantities (I2, V2) or with zero sequence power (3I0 3V0); One or more elements may function in conjunction with a signal transmission supplement; also suited for lines with three ends Instantaneous tripping by any element when switching onto a fault

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

27

1 Introduction

Transmission of Information (only with numerical protection data transmission) Tripping at Line Ends with no or Weak Infeed

Transmission of the measured values from all ends of the protected object Transmission of four commands to all ends Transmission of 24 additional binary signals to all ends

Used in conjunction with pilot protection schemes Allows fast tripping at both line ends, even if there is no or only weak infeed available at one line end Phase segregated tripping and single-pole automatic reclosure (version with singlepole tripping)

External Direct and Remote Tripping

Tripping at the local end from an external device via a binary input Tripping of the remote end by internal protection functions or an external device via a binary input (with pilot protection) Selectable as emergency function in the case of measured voltage failure, or as backup function independent of the measured voltage Maximally two definite time elements (50) and one inverse time element (51), each for phase currents and ground current For inverse time protection a selection from various characteristics based on several standards is possible Blocking capability e.g. for reverse interlocking with any element Instantaneous tripping by any element when switching onto a fault Stub fault protection: Additional element for fast tripping of faults between the current transformer and line isolation switch (when the isolation switch status feedback is available); particularly suited to substations with breaker and half arrangements.

Time Overcurrent Protection 50/51

Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection 50HS Automatic Reclose Function 79 (optional)

Fast tripping for all faults on total line length Selectable for manual closing or following each closing of the circuit breaker With integrated line energization detection For reclosing after single-pole, three-pole or single-pole and three-pole tripping Single or multiple reclosing (up to 8 reclose attempts) With separate action times for every reclose attempt, optionally without action times With separate dead times after single-pole and three-pole tripping, separate for the first four reclose attempts Controlled optionally by protection pickup with separate dead times after single, two-pole and three-pole pickup Optionally with adaptive dead time, reduced dead time and dead line check.

Synchronism and Voltage Check 25 (optional)

Verification of the synchronous conditions before reclosing after three-pole tripping Fast measuring of voltage difference VDiff, phase angle difference Diff and frequency difference fDiff

28

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

1.3 Characteristics

Alternatively, check of the de-energized state before reclosing Closing at asynchronous system conditions with prediction of the synchronization time Settable minimum and maximum voltage Verification of the synchronous conditions or de-energized state also possible before the manual closing of the circuit breaker, with separate limit values Phase angle correction for voltage measurement behind a power transformer Measuring voltages optionally phase-phase or phase-ground Voltage Protection 27/59 (optional) Overvoltage and undervoltage detection with different elements Two overvoltage elements for the phase-ground voltages, with common time delay Two overvoltage elements for the phase-phase voltages, with common time delay Two overvoltage elements for the positive sequence voltage, with a time delay each, optionally with compounding Two overvoltage elements for the negative sequence voltage, with a time delay each Two overvoltage elements for the zero sequence voltage or any other single-phase voltage, with a time delay each Settable dropout to pickup ratios for the overvoltage protection functions Two undervoltage elements for the phase-ground voltages, with common time delay Two undervoltage elements for the phase-phase voltages, with common time delay Two undervoltage elements for the positive sequence voltage, with a time delay each Settable current criterion for undervoltage protection functions Frequency Protection 81 (optional) Monitoring on underfrequency (f<) and/or overfrequency (f>) with 4 frequency limits and delay times that are independently adjustable Very insensitive to phase angle changes Large frequency range (approx. 25 Hz to 70 Hz) Fault Location Initiated by trip command or reset of the pickup Computation of the distance to fault with dedicated measured value registers Fault location output in ohms, kilometers or miles and % of line length Parallel line compensation can be selected Taking into consideration the load current in case of single-phase ground faults fed from both sides (settable) Circuit Breaker Failure Protection 50 BF (optional) With definite time current elements (50BF) for monitoring current flow through every pole of the circuit breaker With definite time monitoring time steps for single-pole and three-pole tripping Start by trip command of every internal protection function

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

29

1 Introduction

Start by external trip functions possible Single-element or dual-element Short dropout and overshoot times User-defined Functions Fully programmable combination of internal and external signals for the implementation of user-defined logic functions; All common logic functions Time delays and set point interrogation Commissioning; Operation (only with digital transmission of protection data) Command Processing Display of magnitude and phase angle of local and remote measured values Display of measured values of the communication link, such as runtime and availability

Switchgear equipment can be energized and de-energized manually via local control keys, the programmable function keys on the front panel, via the system interface (e.g. by SICAM or LSA), or via the operating interface using a personal computer and the operating software DIGSI) Feedback on switching states via the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (for commands with feedback) Plausibility monitoring of the circuit breaker position and monitoring of interlocking conditions for switching operations

Monitoring Functions

Availability of the device is greatly increased by monitoring of the internal measurement circuits, auxiliary power supply, hardware, and software Current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits are monitored using summation and symmetry check techniques Trip circuit supervision Checking for the load impedance, the measured direction and the phase sequence Monitoring the signal transmission of the optional digital communication path

Additional Functions

Battery buffered real time clock, which may be synchronized via a synchronization signal (e.g. DCF77, IRIGB via satellite receiver), binary input or system interface: Continuous calculation and display of measured quantities on the front display. Indication of measured values of the remote end or of all ends (for devices with protection data interfaces); Fault event memory (trip log) for the last 8 network faults (faults in the power system), with real time stamps Fault recording and data transfer for fault recording for a maximum time range of 15 s Statistics: Counter with the trip commands issued by the device, as well as recording of the fault current data and accumulation of the interrupted fault currents

30

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

1.3 Characteristics

Communication with central control and memory components possible via serial interfaces (depending on the individual ordering variant), optionally via RS485-link, modem or fibre optic cable Commissioning aids such as connection and direction checks as well as circuit breaker test functions

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

31

1 Introduction

32

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Functions

2
This chapter describes the various functions of the SIPROTEC 4 device 7SA522. It shows the setting options to each function in maximum configuration and provides information on how to determine the setting values and, if required, formulas. The following information also allows you to specify which of the available functions to use.

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13 2.14 2.15 2.16 2.17 2.18 2.19 2.20 2.21 2.22

General Distance Protection 21 Power Swing Detection 68 (optional) Protection Data Interfaces and Communication Topology (optional) Remote Signals via Protection Data Interface (optional) Pilot Protection for Distance Protection 85-21

34 64 110 117 126 129

Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N (optional) 153 Pilot Protection for Ground Fault Protection 85-67N (optional) Weak-Infeed Tripping External Direct and Remote Tripping Overcurrent Protection 50/51 178 198 208 210

Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection (SOTF) 50HS225 Automatic Reclosure Function 79 (optional) Synchronism and Voltage Check 25 (optional) Undervoltage and Overvoltage Protection 27/59 (optional) Frequency Protection 81 (optional) Fault Locator Breaker Failure Protection 50BF (optional) Monitoring Function Function Control and Circuit Breaker Test Auxiliary Functions Command Processing 228 257 268 286 292 296 311 327 344 359

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

33

2 Functions

2.1

General
A few seconds after the 7SA522 is switched on, the initial display appears on the LCD. Configuration of the device functions is made via the DIGSI software from your PC. The procedure is described in detail in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description. For changing configuration parameters in the device, password no.7 is required (for parameter set). Without the password, the settings may be read, but cannot be modified and transmitted to the device. The function parameters, i.e. settings of function options, threshold values, etc., can be entered via the keypad and displayed on the front of the device, or by means of a personal computer connected to the front or service interface of the device using the DIGSI software package. The level 5 password (individual parameters) is required. The default password is 000000.

2.1.1
2.1.1.1

Functional Scope
Configuration of the Functional Scope The 7SA522 device contains a series of protective and additional functions. The scope of hardware and firmware is matched to these functions. In addition, the command functions can be matched to the system conditions. In addition, individual functions may be enabled or disabled during configuration, or interaction between functions may be adjusted. Example for the configuration of scope of functions: A substation has feeders with overhead lines and transformers. Fault location is to be performed on the overhead lines only. In the devices for the transformer feeders this function is therefore Disabled. The available protective and additional functions can be configured as Enabled or Disabled. For some functions, a choice may be presented between several options which are explained below. Functions configured as Disabled are not processed by the 7SA522. There are no indications, and corresponding settings (functions, limit values) are not displayed during setting.

Note The functions and default settings available depend on the order variant of the device.

34

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.1 General

2.1.1.2

Setting Notes The scope of functions with the available options is set in the Device Configuration dialog box to match plant requirements. Most settings are self-explanatory. The special cases are described below.

Configuration of Function Scope

Special Cases

Most settings are self-explanatory. The special cases are described below. For communication of the protection signal each device may feature one or two protection data interfaces (depending on the ordered version). Determine at address 145 whether to use protection data interface STATE PROT I 1 or at address 146 the setting STATE PROT I 2. A protected object with two ends requires at least one protection data interface for each relay. If there is more than one end, it must be ensured that all associated devices are connected directly or indirectly (via other devices). Section 2.4 Communication Topology provides more information. If use of the setting group change function is desired, address 103 Grp Chge OPTION should be set to Enabled. In this case, up to four different groups of settings may be changed quickly and easily during device operation (see also Section 2.1.4). Only setting group A is selected and used if the setting is Disabled. Address 110 Trip mode is only valid for devices that trip single-pole or three-pole. Set 1-/3pole to enable also single-pole tripping i.e., if you want to use single-pole or single-pole / multi-pole automatic reclosure. This requires an internal automatic reclosing function to be available or an external reclosing device. Furthermore, the circuit breaker must be capable of single pole tripping.

Note If you have changed address 110, save your changes first via OK and reopen the dialog box since the other setting options depend on the selection in address 110. Depending on the model of the distance protection, you can select the tripping characteristic it should use at address 112 for the phase-to-phase measuring systems 21 Phase Dist. and at address 113 for the phase-to-ground measuring systems 21G Ground Dist. You can select between the polygonal tripping characteristic Quadrilateral and the MHO-circle characteristic MHO. Subsection 2.2.3 and 2.2.2 provide a detailed overview of the characteristics and measuring methods. The two addresses can be set separately and differently. If you want to use the relay only for phase-to-ground loops, the function not required is set Disabled. If the relay features only one of the characteristics, the corresponding addresses are not visible. To complement the distance protection by pilot protection schemes, you can select the desired scheme at address 121 85-21 PilotDist. You can select the underreach transfer trip with overreach zone PUTT (Z1B), the pilot protection scheme POTT, the unblocking scheme UNBLOCKING and the blocking scheme BLOCKING. If the device features a protection data interface for communication via a digital transmission lines, set SIGNALv.ProtInt here. The procedures are described in detail in Subsection 2.6. If you do not want to use pilot protection in conjunction with distance protection set Disabled. The power swing supplement (see also Section 2.3) is activated by setting address 120 68 Power Swing = Enabled. With address 125 Weak Infeed you can select a supplement to the pilot protection schemes. Set Enabled to apply the classic scheme for echo and weak infeed tripping.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

35

2 Functions

The setting Logic no. 2 switches this function to the French specification. This setting is available in the device variants for the region France (only version 7SA522***D** or 10th digit of order number = D). At address 126 50(N)/51(N) O/C you can select the type of characteristic which the time overcurrent protection uses for operation. In addition to the definite time overcurrent protection, an inverse time overcurrent protection may be configured depending on the ordered version. The latter operates according to an ANSI-characteristic (TOC ANSI). For the characteristics please refer to the Technical Data. You can also disable the time overcurrent protection (Disabled). At address 131 50N/51N Gnd.O/C you can select the type of characteristic which the ground fault protection uses for operation. In addition to the definite time overcurrent protection, which covers up to three phases, an inverse-time ground fault protection function may be configured depending on the ordered version. The latter operates according to an ANSI characteristic (TOC ANSI). If an inverse-time characteristic is not required, the element usually designated inverse time can be used as the fourth definite-time element (Definite Time). Alternatively, it is possible to select a ground fault protection with inverse-time characteristic (only for region German, 10th digit of the ordering code = A) or a zero-sequence power protection (only for region French, 10th digit of ordering code = D). For the characteristics please refer to the Technical Data. You can also disable the ground fault protection (Disabled). When using the ground fault protection, it can be complemented by pilot protection schemes. Select the desired scheme at address 132 85-67N PilotGnd. You can select the direction comparison scheme Dir.Comp.Pickup, the unblocking scheme UNBLOCKING and the blocking scheme BLOCKING. The procedures are described in detail in Section 2.8. If the device features a protection data interface for communication via a digital link, set SIGNALv.ProtInt here. If you do not want to use pilot protection in conjunction with ground fault protection set Disabled. Address 145 P. INTERFACE 1 and, where required, address 146 STATE PROT I 2 are also valid for communication of the pilot protection for ground fault protection via pilot protection interface, as described above. If the device features an automatic reclosing function, address 133 and 134 are of importance. Automatic reclosure is only permitted for overhead lines. It must not be used in any other case. If the protected object consists of a combination of overhead lines and other equipment (e.g. overhead line in unit with a transformer or overhead line/cable), reclosure is only permissible if it can be ensured that it can only take place in the event of a fault on the overhead line. If no automatic reclosing function is desired for the feeder at which 7SA522 operates, or if an external device is used for reclosure, set address 133 79 Auto Recl. to Disabled. Otherwise set the number of desired reclosing attempts there. You can select 1 ARcycle to 8 AR-cycles. You can also set ADT (adaptive dead times). In this case the behavior of the automatic reclosing function is determined by the cycles of the remote end. The number of cycles must however be configured at least in one of the line ends which must have a reliable infeed. The other end - or other ends, if there are more than two line ends - may operate with adaptive dead time. Section 2.13 provides detailed information on this topic. The AR control mode at address134 allows a maximum of four options. Firstly, it can be determined whether the auto-reclose cycles are carried out according to the fault type detected by pickup of the starting protective function(s) (only three-pole tripping), or according to the type of trip command. Secondly, the automatic reclosing function can be operated with or without action time. The setting Trip w/ActionT. / Trip w/oActionT ... (default setting = Trip w/ActionT....) is preferred if single-pole or single-pole/three-pole auto-reclose cycles

36

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.1 General

are provided for and possible. In this case, different dead times after single-pole tripping on the one hand and after three-pole tripping, on the other hand, are possible (for every reclose cycle). The protective function that issues the trip command determines the type of trip: single-pole or three-pole. Depending on the latter the dead time is selected. The setting PU w/ActionTime / PU w/o ActionT. ... (Pickup with T-action ...) is only possible and visible if only three-pole tripping is desired. This is the case when either the ordering number of the device model indicates that it is only suited for three-pole tripping, or when three-pole tripping is solely configured (address 110 Trip mode = 3pole only, see above). In this case you can set different dead times for the auto-reclose cycles following single-pole, two-pole and three-pole faults. Decisive here is the pickup situation of the protective functions at the instant the trip command disappears. This control mode enables also the dead times to be made dependent on the type of fault in the case of three-pole reclosure cycles. Tripping is always three-pole. The setting Trip w/ActionT. provides an action time for each reclose cycle. The action time is started by a general pickup of all protection functions. If no trip command is present before the action time expires, the corresponding reclose cycle is not carried out. Section 2.13 provides detailed information on this topic. This setting is recommended for time-graded protection. If the protection function which is to operate with automatic reclosure, does not have a general pickup signal for starting the action times, select ... Trip w/o ActionT. Address 137 27/59 allows to activate the voltage protection function with a variety of undervoltage and overvoltage protection elements. In particular, the overvoltage protection with the positive sequence system of the measuring voltages provides the option to calculate the voltage at the other, remote line end via integrated compounding. This is particularly useful for long transmission lines where no-load or low-load conditions prevail and an overvoltage at the other line end (Ferranti effect) is to cause tripping of the local circuit breaker. In this case set address 137 27/59 to Enabl. w. comp. (available with compounding). Do not use compounding in lines with series capacitors! The fault location can be set at address 138 Fault Locator to Enabled or Disabled. For the trip circuit supervision set at address 140 74 Trip Ct Supv the number of trip circuits to be monitored: 1 trip circuit, 2 trip circuits or 3 trip circuits, unless you omit it (Disabled). 2.1.1.3
Addr. 103 110 112

Settings
Parameter Grp Chge OPTION Trip mode 21 Phase Dist. Setting Options Disabled Enabled 3pole only 1-/3pole Quadrilateral MHO Disabled Quadrilateral MHO Disabled Default Setting Disabled 3pole only Quadrilateral Comments Setting Group Change Option Trip mode 21 Phase Distance

113

21G Ground Dist

Quadrilateral

21G Ground Distance

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

37

2 Functions

Addr. 120 121

Parameter 68 Power Swing 85-21 PilotDist

Setting Options Disabled Enabled PUTT (Z1B) POTT UNBLOCKING BLOCKING SIGNALv.ProtInt Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Logic no. 2 Disabled TOC ANSI Disabled TOC ANSI Definite Time Dir.Comp.Pickup SIGNALv.ProtInt UNBLOCKING BLOCKING Disabled 1 AR-cycle 2 AR-cycles 3 AR-cycles 4 AR-cycles 5 AR-cycles 6 AR-cycles 7 AR-cycles 8 AR-cycles ADT Disabled PU w/ActionTime PU w/o ActionT. Trip w/ActionT. Trip w/oActionT Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabl. w. comp. Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled 1 trip circuit 2 trip circuits 3 trip circuits

Default Setting Disabled Disabled

Comments 68 Power Swing detection 85-21 Pilot Protection for Distance prot

122 124 125

DTT Direct Trip 50HS SOTF Weak Infeed

Disabled Disabled Disabled

DTT Direct Transfer Trip 50HS Instantaneous High Speed SOTF Weak Infeed (Trip and/or Echo)

126 131

50(N)/51(N) O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C

TOC ANSI Disabled

50(N)/51(N) Backup OverCurrent 50N/51N Ground OverCurrent

132

85-67N PilotGnd

Disabled

85-67N Pilot Protection Gnd. OverCurrent

133

79 Auto Recl.

Disabled

79 Auto-Reclose Function

134

AR control mode

Trip w/ActionT.

Auto-Reclose control mode

135 136 137

25 Sync. Check 81 O/U 27/59

Disabled Disabled Disabled

25 Synchronism and Voltage Check 81 Over/Underfrequency Protection 27, 59 Under/Overvoltage Protection Fault Locator 50BF Breaker Failure Protection 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision

138 139 140

Fault Locator 50BF 74 Trip Ct Supv

Enabled Disabled Disabled

38

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.1 General

Addr. 145 146 147

Parameter P. INTERFACE 1 P. INTERFACE 2 NUMBER OF RELAY

Setting Options Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled 2 relays 3 relays

Default Setting Enabled Disabled 2 relays

Comments Protection Interface 1 (Port D) Protection Interface 2 (Port E) Number of relays

2.1.2

Device, General Settings

The device requires some general information. This may be, for example, the type of annunciation to be issued in the event a power system fault occurs.

2.1.2.1

Trip Dependent Messages The storage of messages masked to local LEDs, and the availability of spontaneous messages, can be made dependent on whether the device has issued a trip signal. The information is not output if one or more protection functions have picked up due to a fault, but the 7SA522 has not initiated the tripping because the fault was cleared by another device (e.g. on another line). These messages are then limited to faults on the protected line. The following figure illustrates the creation of the reset command for stored messages. When the relay drops out, stationary conditions (fault display Target on PU / Target on TRIP; Trip / No Trip) decide whether the new fault will be stored or reset.

Figure 2-1

Creation of the reset command for the latched LED and LCD messages

2.1.2.2

Spontaneous Fault Display You can determine whether or not the most important data of a fault event is displayed automatically after the fault has occurred (see also Fault Annunciations in Section 2.21.1 Auxiliary Functions).

2.1.2.3

Setting Notes Pickup of a new protective function generally turns off any previously lit LEDs, so that only the latest fault is displayed at any time. It can be selected whether the stored LED displays and the spontaneous annunciations on the display appear upon renewed pickup, or only after a renewed trip signal is issued. In order to enter the desired type of display, select the submenu General Device Settings in the SETTINGS menu. At

Fault Annunciations

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

39

2 Functions

address 610 FltDisp.LED/LCD the two alternatives Target on PU and Target on TRIP (No trip - no flag) are offered. After startup of a device featuring a 4-line display, measured values are displayed by default. Use the arrow keys on the device front to select the different representations of the measured values for the so-called default display. The start page of the default display, which is displayed after startup of the device, can be selected via parameter 640 Start image DD. The available representation types for the measured values are listed in the appendix . 2.1.2.4
Addr. 610 640

Settings
Parameter FltDisp.LED/LCD Start image DD Setting Options Target on PU Target on TRIP image 1 image 2 image 3 image 4 image 5 Default Setting Target on PU image 1 Comments Fault Display on LED / LCD Start image Default Display

2.1.2.5
No. 1 2 3 5 11 12 13 14 15 16 51 52 55 56 60

Information List
Information Test mode DataStop SynchClock >Light on HWTestMod Error FMS1 Error FMS2 Brk OPENED Feeder gnd Not configured Non Existent >Time Synch >Reset LED >Annunc. 1 >Annunc. 2 >Annunc. 3 >Annunc. 4 >Test mode >DataStop Device OK ProtActive Reset Device Initial Start Reset LED Type of Information IntSP IntSP IntSP_Ev SP IntSP OUT OUT IntSP IntSP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP OUT IntSP OUT OUT OUT_Ev Test mode Stop data transmission Clock Synchronization >Back Light on Hardware Test Mode Error FMS FO 1 Error FMS FO 2 Breaker OPENED Feeder GROUNDED No Function configured Function Not Available >Synchronize Internal Real Time Clock >Reset LED >User defined annunciation 1 >User defined annunciation 2 >User defined annunciation 3 >User defined annunciation 4 >Test mode >Stop data transmission Device is Operational and Protecting At Least 1 Protection Funct. is Active Reset Device Initial Start of Device Reset LED Comments

40

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.1 General

No. 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 110 113 125 126 127 128 140 144 160 177 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 4051 Resume

Information

Type of Information OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT_Ev OUT OUT IntSP IntSP IntSP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT IntSP Resume

Comments

Clock SyncError DayLightSavTime Settings Calc. Settings Check Level-2 change Local change Event Lost Flag Lost Chatter ON ProtON/OFF 79 ON/OFF PilotONoff Error Sum Alarm Error 5V Alarm Sum Event Fail Battery Error A/D-conv. Alarm Clock Error Board 1 Error Board 2 Error Board 3 Error Board 4 Error Board 5 Error Board 6 Error Board 7 Error Board 0 Error Offset Error1A/5Awrong Alarm adjustm. Error neutralCT Pilot ON

Clock Synchronization Error Daylight Saving Time Setting calculation is running Settings Check Level-2 change Local setting change Event lost Flag Lost Chatter ON Protection ON/OFF (via system port) 79 ON/OFF (via system port) Pilot Prot. ON/OFF (via system port) Error with a summary alarm Error 5V Alarm Summary Event Failure: Battery empty Error: A/D converter Alarm: Real Time Clock Error Board 1 Error Board 2 Error Board 3 Error Board 4 Error Board 5 Error Board 6 Error Board 7 Error Board 0 Error: Offset Error:1A/5Ajumper different from setting Alarm: Analog input adjustment invalid Error: Neutral CT different from MLFB Pilot Prot. is switched ON

2.1.3

Power System Data 1

The device requires some plant and power system data in order to be able to adapt its functions accordingly, dependent on the actual application. This comprises, e.g., nominal system data, nominal data of transformers, polarity ratios and their physical connections, in certain cases circuit breaker properties, and similar. Furthermore, there are a number of settings associated with all functions rather than a specific protection, control or monitoring function. These data can only be changed from a PC running DIGSI and are discussed in this section.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

41

2 Functions

2.1.3.1 General

Setting Notes In DIGSI double-click Settings to display the available data. A dialog box with tabs CT's, VT's, Power System and Breaker will open under Power System Data 1 in which you can configure the individual parameters. Thus, the following subsections are structured accordingly. In address 201 CT Starpoint, the polarity of the wye-connected current transformers is specified (the following figure also goes for only two current transformers). This setting determines the measuring direction of the device (forwards = line direction). A change in this setting also results in a polarity reversal of the ground current inputs IN or INS. The polarity of the CT's is always assumed as on the other side of the starpoint.

Current Transformer Polarity

Figure 2-2

Polarity of current transformers

Nominal Values of the Transformers

In addresses 203 Vnom PRIMARY and 204 Vnom SECONDARY the device obtains information on the primary and secondary rated voltage (phase-to-phase voltage) of the voltage transformers. It is important to ensure that the rated secondary current of the current transformer matches the rated current of the device, otherwise the device will incorrectly calculate primary amperes. The correct primary data are required for the calculation of the proper primary information of the operational measured values. If the settings of the device are performed with primary values using DIGSI, these primary data are an indispensable requirement for the fault-free operation of the device.

42

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.1 General

Voltage Connection

The device contains four voltage measuring inputs, three of which are connected to the set of voltage transformers. Various possibilities exist for the fourth voltage input V4 : Connection of the V4 input to the broken delta winding of the voltage transformer set: Address 210 is then set to: V4 transformer = Vdelta transf.. When connected to the broken delta winding of a set of voltage transformers, the voltage transformation ratio of the voltage transformers is usually:

The factor Vph/Vdelta (secondary voltage, address 211 Vph / Vdelta) must be set to 3/3 = 3 1.73. For other transformation ratios, i.e. the formation of the displacement voltage via an interconnected transformer set, the factor must be corrected accordingly. This factor is of importance if the 3V0> protective element is used and for the monitoring of the measured values and the scaling of the measurement and disturbance recording signals. Connection of the V4 input to the busbar voltage in order to perform the synchronism check: Address 210 is then set to: V4 transformer = Vsync transf.. If the transformation ratio differs from that of the line voltage transformers this can be adapted with the setting in address 215 V-line / Vsync. In address 212 Vsync connect., the type of voltage used by the busbar for synchronism check is configured. The device then selects automatically the appropriate feeder voltage. If the two measuring points used for synchronism check - i.e. feeder voltage transformer and busbar voltage transformer - are not separated by devices that cause a relative phase shift, then the parameter in address 214 Angle VsynVline is not required. This parameter can only be altered with DIGSI under Additional Settings. If however a power transformer is switched in between, its vector group must be adapted. The phase angle from VLine to V2bus is evaluated positively. Example: (see also Figure 2-3) Busbar Feeder Transformer 500 kV primary, 120 V secondary, 230 kV primary, 115 V secondary, 500 kV / 230 kV, vector group Dy(n) 5 Vector group Yd(n)11= High Lags Low by 30 The transformer vector group is defined from the high side to the low side. In this example, the feeder voltage is connected to the low voltage side of the transformer. If Vsync (busbar or high voltage side) is placed at zero degrees, then Vline is at 11 x 30 (according to the vector group) in the clockwise direction, i.e. at 330. A positive angle is obtained by adding 360: Address 214: Angle VsynVline = 360 - 330 = 30. The busbar transformers supply 120 V secondary for primary operation at nominal value while the feeder transformer supplies 115 V secondary. Therefore, this difference must be balanced: Address 215: V-line / Vsync = 115 V/120 V = 0.916.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

43

2 Functions

Figure 2-3

Busbar voltage measured via transformer

Connection of the V4 input to any other voltage signal VX, which can be processed by the overvoltage protection function: Address 210 is then set to: V4 transformer = Vx transformer. If the input V4 is not required, set: Address 210 V4 transformer = Not connected. Also in this case the factor Vph / Vdelta (address 211, see above) is of importance, since it is used for scaling of the measurement and disturbance recording data. Current Connection The device has four measured current inputs, three of which are connected to the current transformers set. Various possibilities exist for the fourth current input I4: Connection of the I4 input to the ground current in the neutral of the set of current transformers on the protected feeder (normal connection): Address 220 is then set to: I4 transformer = In prot. line and address 221 I4/Iph CT = 1. Connection of the I4 input to a separate ground current transformer on the protected feeder (e.g. a summation CT or core balance CT): Address 220 is then set to: I4 transformer = In prot. line and address 221 I4/Iph CT is set:

This is independent of whether the device has a normal current input for I4 or a sensitive current input. Example: Phase current transformers 500 A/5 A Core balance CT 300 A / 5AI4/IphCT = 300/500 = 0.6

44

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.1 General

Connection of the I4 input to the ground current of the parallel line (for parallel line compensation of the distance protection and/or fault location): Address 220 is then set to: I4 transformer = In paral. line and usually address 221 I4/Iph CT = 1. If the set of current transformers on the parallel line however has a different transformation ratio to those on the protected line, this must be taken into account in address 221: Address 220 is then set to: I4 transformer = In paral. line and address 221 I4/Iph CT = IN paral. line / IN prot. line Example: Current transformers on protected line 1200/5 A Current transformers on parallel line 1500/5 A

Connection of the I4 input to the neutral current of a transformer; this connection is occasionally used for the polarization of the directional ground fault protection (67N): Address 220 is then set to: I4 transformer = Ig starpoint, and address 221 I4/Iph CT is according to transformation ratio of the neutral transformer to the transformer set of the protected line. If the input I4 is not required, set: Address 220 I4 transformer = Not connected, Address 221 I4/Iph CT is then irrelevant. In this case, the neutral current is calculated by summing the phase currents. Nominal Frequency The nominal frequency of the system is set in address 230 Rated Frequency. The presetting according to the ordering code (MLFB) only needs to be changed if the device is applied in a region different to the one indicated when ordering. You can set 50 Hz or 60 Hz. The manner in which the system grounding is done must be considered for the correct processing of ground faults and double ground faults. Accordingly, set for address 207 SystemStarpoint = Solid Grounded, Peterson-C.Gnd. or Isolated. For low-resistant grounded systems set Solid Grounded. Use address 235 PHASE SEQ. to change the default setting (A B C for clockwise rotation) if your power system has a permanent anti-clockwise phase sequence (A C B). Address 236 Distance Unit allows to determine the unit of length (km or Miles) for the fault location indications. If the compounding function of the voltage protection is used, the overall line capacitance is calculated from the line length and the capacitance per unit length. If compounding is not used and fault location is not available, this parameter is of no consequence. Changing the length unit will not result in an automatic conversion of the setting values which depend on this length unit. They have to be re-entered into their corresponding valid addresses.

System Grounding

Phase Rotation

Distance Unit

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

45

2 Functions

Mode of Ground Impedance (Residual) Compensation

Setting of the ground to line impedance ratio is an essential prerequisite for the accurate measurement of the fault distance (distance protection, fault locator) during ground faults. In address 237 Format Z0/Z1 the format for entering the residual compensation is determined. It is possible to either use the ratio RG/RL, XG/XL or to enter the complex ground (residual) impedance factor K0. The setting of the ground (residual) impedance factors is done in the power system data 2 (refer to Section 2.1.5). The circuit breaker closing time 52 closing time at address 239 is required if the device is to close also under asynchronous system conditions, no matter whether for manual closing, for automatic reclosing after three-pole tripping, or both. The device will then calculate the time for the close command such that the voltages are phasesynchronous the instant the breaker poles make contact. In address 240 the minimum trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD is set. This applies to all protection and control functions which may issue a trip command. It also determines the duration of the trip pulse when a circuit breaker trip test is initiated via the device. This parameter can only be altered with DIGSI under Additional Settings. In address 241 the maximum close command duration TMax CLOSE CMD is set. This applies to all close commands issued by the device. It also determines the length of the close command pulse when a circuit breaker test cycle is issued via the device. It must be set long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker has securely closed. There is no risk in setting this time too long, as the close command will in any event be terminated following a new trip command from a protection function. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at "Display Additional Settings".

Operating Time of the Circuit Breaker

Command Durations

Circuit Breaker Test

7SA522 allows a circuit breaker test during operation by means of a tripping and a closing command entered on the front panel or via DIGSI. The duration of the trip command is set as explained above. Address 242 T-CBtest-dead determines the duration from the end of the trip command until the start of the close command for this test. It should not be less than 0.1s.

2.1.3.2

Settings Addresses which have an appended "A" can only be changed with DIGSI, under "Display Additional Settings".

Addr. 201 203 204 205 206 207

Parameter CT Starpoint Vnom PRIMARY Vnom SECONDARY CT PRIMARY CT SECONDARY SystemStarpoint

Setting Options towards Line towards Busbar 1.0 .. 1200.0 kV 80 .. 125 V 10 .. 5000 A 1A 5A Solid Grounded Peterson-C.Gnd. Isolated

Default Setting towards Line 400.0 kV 115 V 1000 A 5A Solid Grounded

Comments CT Starpoint Rated Primary Voltage Rated Secondary Voltage (PhPh) CT Rated Primary Current CT Rated Secondary Current System Starpoint is

46

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.1 General

Addr. 210

Parameter V4 transformer

Setting Options Not connected Vdelta transf. Vsync transf. Vx transformer 0.10 .. 9.99 A-G B-G C-G A-B B-C C-A 0 .. 360 0.50 .. 2.00 Not connected In prot. line In paral. line Ig starpoint 0.010 .. 5.000 50 Hz 60 Hz ABC ACB km Miles RG/RL, XG/XL K0 0.01 .. 0.60 sec 0.02 .. 30.00 sec 0.01 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 .. 30.00 sec

Default Setting Not connected

Comments V4 voltage transformer is

211 212

Vph / Vdelta Vsync connect.

1.73 A-B

Matching ratio Phase-VT To Open-Delta-VT VT connection for sync. voltage

214A 215 220

Angle VsynVline V-line / Vsync I4 transformer

0 1.00 In prot. line

Angle adjustment Vsync-Vline Matching ratio U-line / Usync I4 current transformer is

221 230 235 236 237 239 240A 241A 242

I4/Iph CT Rated Frequency PHASE SEQ. Distance Unit Format Z0/Z1 52 closing time TMin TRIP CMD TMax CLOSE CMD T-CBtest-dead

1.000 60 Hz ABC Miles RG/RL, XG/XL 0.06 sec 0.10 sec 0.10 sec 0.10 sec

Matching ratio I4/Iph for CT's Rated Frequency Phase Sequence Distance measurement unit Setting format for zero seq.comp. format Closing (operating) time of 52 (CB) Minimum TRIP Command Duration Maximum Close Command Duration Dead Time for CB test-autoreclosure

2.1.4
2.1.4.1

Change Group
Purpose of the Setting Groups Up to four independent setting groups can be created for establishing the device's function settings. During operation, the user can locally switch between setting groups using the operator panel, binary inputs (if configured), the operator and service interface per PC, or via the system interface. For reasons of safety it is not possible to change between setting groups during a power system fault.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

47

2 Functions

A setting group includes the setting values for all functions that have been selected as Enabled during configuration (see Subsection 2.1.1.2). In relays 7SA522 four independent setting groups (A to D) are available. Whereas setting values and options may vary, the selected scope of functions is the same for all groups. Setting groups enable the user to save the corresponding settings for each application. When they are needed, settings may be loaded quickly. All setting groups are stored in the relay. Only one setting group may be active at a given time. 2.1.4.2 General Setting Notes If multiple setting groups are not required, Group A is the default selection. Then, the rest of this section is not applicable. If multiple setting groups are desired, the setting group change option must be set to Grp Chge OPTION = Enabled in the Device Configuration (Section 2.1.1.2, address 103). For the setting of the function parameters, you can configure each of the required setting groups A to D, one after the other. A maximum of 4 is possible. To find out how to proceed, how to copy and to reset settings groups, and how to switch between setting groups during operation, please refer to the SIPROTEC 4 System Description. Two binary inputs enable changing between the 4 setting groups from an external source. 2.1.4.3
Addr. 302

Settings
Parameter CHANGE Setting Options Group A Group B Group C Group D Binary Input Protocol Default Setting Group A Comments Change to Another Setting Group

2.1.4.4
No. 7 8

Information List
Information Group A Group B Group C Group D >Set Group Bit0 >Set Group Bit1 Type of Information IntSP IntSP IntSP IntSP SP SP Group A Group B Group C Group D >Setting Group Select Bit 0 >Setting Group Select Bit 1 Comments

48

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.1 General

2.1.5

Power System Data 2

The general protection data (P.System Data 2) include settings associated with all functions rather than a specific protection, monitoring or control function. In contrast to the P.System Data 1 as discussed before, they can be changed over with the setting groups and set on the operator panel of the device.

2.1.5.1

Setting Notes The rated primary voltage (phase-to-phase) and rated primary current (phases) of the protected equipment are entered in the address 1103 FullScaleVolt. and 1104 FullScaleCurr.. These settings are required for indication of operational measured values in percent. If these rated values match the primary VT's and CT's, they correspond to the settings in address 203 and 205 (Subsection 2.1.3.1). The settings of the line data in this case refers to the common data and is not dependent of the actual distance protection grading. The line angle (address 1105 Line Angle) may be derived from the line parameters. The following applies:

Rating of the Protected Object

General Line Data

where RL is being the resistance and XL the reactance of the protected feeder. The line parameters may either apply to the entire line length, or be per unit of line length as the quotient is independent of length. Furthermore it makes no difference if the quotients are calculated with primary or secondary values. The line angle is of major importance e.g. for ground impedance matching according to magnitude and angle or for compounding in overvoltage protection. Calculation Example: 115 kV overhead line with the following data: R'1 = 0.19 /mile X'1 = 0.42 /mile The line angle is computed as follows

In address 1105 the setting Line Angle = 66 is entered. Address 1211 Distance Angle specifies the angle of inclination of the R sections of the distance protection polygons. For devices with MHO characteristic, this angle specifies the inclination of the MHO circles. Usually you can also set the line angle here as in address 1105. The directional values (power, power factor, work and related min., max., mean and setpoint values), calculated in the operational measured values, are usually defined with positive direction towards the protected object. This requires that the connection

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

49

2 Functions

polarity for the entire device was configured accordingly in the Power System Data 1 (compare also Polarity of Current Transformers, address 201). But it is also possible to define by setting the forward direction for the protection functions and the positive direction for the power etc. differently, e.g so that the active power flow from the line to the busbar is indicated in the positive sense. Set under address 1107 P,Q sign the option reversed. If the setting is not reversed (default), the positive direction for the power etc. corresponds to the forward direction for the protection functions. The reactance value X' of the protected line is entered as reference value x' at address 1110 in /km if the distance unit was set as kilometer (address 236, see Section 2.1.3.1 at Distance Unit), or at address 1112 in /mile if mile was selected as distance unit. The corresponding line length is entered in address 1111 Line Length in kilometers or under address 1113 in miles. If the unit of line length is changed in address 236 after the reactance per unit or the unit of length have already been entered, the line data must be re-entered for the revised distance unit (addresses 1110 or 1112 and 1111 or 1113. The capacitance value C' of the protected line is required for compounding in overvoltage protection. Without compounding it is of no consequence. It is entered as value c' at address 1114 in F/km if the distance unit was set to kilometer (address 236, see Subsection 2.1.3.1 at Distance Unit), or at address 1115 in F/mile if mile was set as distance unit. If the unit of line length is changed in address 236, after the capacitance per unit of the line length have already been entered, the line data must be re-entered for the revised distance unit (addresses 1114 or 1115 and 1111 or 1113). When entering the parameters with a personal computer and DIGSI the values may optionally also be entered as primary values. If the nominal quantities of the primary transformers (V, I) are set to minimum, primary values allow only a rough setting of the value parameters. In such cases it is preferable to set the parameters in secondary quantities. For conversion of primary values to secondary values the following applies in general:

Likewise, the following goes for the reactance setting of a line:

where NCT NVT = Current transformer ratio = Transformation ratio of voltage transformer

The following applies for the capacitance per distance unit:

Calculation Example:

50

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.1 General

115 kV overhead line as above R'1 X'1 C' = 0.19 /mile = 0.42 /mile = 0.008 F/mile 3000 A/5 A 115 kV / 0.115 kV

Current Transformer Voltage transformer

The secondary per distance unit reactance is therefore:

In address 1112 the setting x' = 0.252 /mile is entered. The secondary per distance unit capacitance is therefore:

In address 1115 the setting c' = 0.013 F/mile is entered. Ground Impedance (Residual) Compensation Setting of the ground to line impedance ratio is an essential prerequisite for the accurate measurement of the fault distance (distance protection, fault locator) during ground faults. This compensation is either achieved by entering the resistance ratio RG/RL and the reactance ratio XG/XL or by entry of the complex ground (residual) compensation factor K0. Which of these two entry options applies was determined by the setting in address 237 Format Z0/Z1 (refer to Section 2.1.3.1). Only the addresses applicable for this setting will be displayed. When entering the resistance ratio RG/RL and the reactance ratio XG/XL the addresses 1116 to 1119 apply. They are calculated separately, and do not correspond to the real and imaginary components of ZG/ZL. No computation with complex numbers is therefore required! The ratios are obtained from system data using the following formulas:
Resistance ratio: Reactance ratio:

Ground Impedance (Residual) Compensation with Scalar Factors RG/RL and XG/XL

Where R0 X0 R1 X1 = Zero sequence resistance of the line = Zero sequence reactance of the line = Positive sequence resistance of the line = Positive sequence reactance of the line

These values may either apply to the entire line length or be based on a per unit of line length, as the quotients are independent of length. Furthermore it makes no difference if the quotients are calculated with primary or secondary values.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

51

2 Functions

Calculation Example: 115 kV overhead line with the following data: R1/s X1/s R0/s X0/s (where s = 0.19 /mile positive sequence impedance = 0.42 /mile positive sequence impedance = 0.53 /mile zero sequence impedance = 1.19 /mile zero sequence impedance = line length)

For ground impedance ratios, the following emerge:

The ground impedance (residual) compensation factor setting for the first zone Z1 may be different from that of the remaining zones. This allows the setting of the exact values for the protected line, while at the same time the setting for the back-up zones may be a close approximation even when remote lines have substantially different ground impedance ratios (e.g. cable after an overhead line). Accordingly, the settings for the address 1116 RG/RL(Z1)and 1117 XG/XL(Z1) are determined with the data of the protected line while the addresses 1118 RG/RL(Z1B...Z5) and 1119 XG/XL(Z1B...Z5) apply to the remaining zones Z1B and Z2 up to Z5 (as seen from the relay location). Ground Impedance (Residual) Compensation with Magnitude and Angle (K0Factor) When the complex ground impedance (residual) compensation factor K0 is set, the addresses 1120 to 1123 apply. In this case it is important that the line angle is set correctly (see address 1105, see paragraph General Line Data) as the device needs the line angle to calculate the compensation components from the K0. These ground impedance compensation factors are defined with their magnitude and angle which may be calculated with the line data using the following equation:

Where Z0 Z1 = (complex) zero sequence impedance of the line = (complex) positive sequence impedance of the line

These values may either apply to the entire line length or be based on a per unit of line length, as the quotients are independent of length. Furthermore it makes no difference if the quotients are calculated with primary or secondary values. For overhead lines it is generally possible to calculate with scalar quantities as the angle of the zero sequence and positive sequence system only differ by an insignificant amount. With cables however, significant angle differences may exist as illustrated by the following example. Calculation Example:

52

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.1 General

115 kV single-conductor oil-filled cable 3 185 mm2 (365 kcmil)Cu with the following data Z1/s Z0/s (where s = 0.656 ej73 /mile positive sequence impedance = 1.017 ej18.4 /mile zero sequence impedance = line length)

The calculation of the ground impedance (residual) compensation factor K0results in:

The magnitude of K0 is therefore

When determining the angle, the quadrant of the result must be considered. The following table indicates the quadrant and range of the angle which is determined by the signs of the calculated real and imaginary part of K0.
Table 2-1 Real part + + Quadrants and ranges of the angle K0 Imaginary part + + tan (K0) + + I IV III II Quadrant/range 0 ... +90 90 ... 0 90 ... 180 +90 ... +180 Calculation arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) 180 arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) +180

In this example the following result is obtained:

The magnitude and angle of the ground impedance (residual) compensation factors setting for the first zone Z1 and the remaining zones of the distance protection may be different. This allows the setting of the exact values for the protected line, while at the same time the setting for the back-up zones may be a close approximation even when the remote lines have substantially different ground impedance factors (e.g. cable after an overhead line). Accordingly, the settings for the address 1120 K0 (Z1)and 1121 Angle K0(Z1) are determined with the data of the protected line while the addresses 1122 K0 (> Z1) and 1123 AngleI K0(> Z1) apply to the remaining zones Z1B and Z2 up to Z5 (as seen from the relay mounting location).

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

53

2 Functions

Note If a combination of values is set which is not recognized by the device, it operates with preset values K0 = 1 e0. The information 21 Error K0(Z1) (no. 3654) or 21 ErrorK0(>Z1) (no. 3655) appears in the event logs.

Parallel Line Mutual Impedance (optional)

If the device is applied to a double circuit line (parallel lines) and parallel line compensation for the distance and/or fault location function is used, the mutual coupling of the two lines must be considered. A prerequisite for this is that the ground (residual) current of the parallel line has been connected to the measuring input I4 of the device and that this was configured with the power system data (Section 2.1.3.1) by setting the appropriate parameters. The coupling factors may be determined using the following equations:
Resistance ratio: Reactance ratio:

where R0M X0M R1 X1 = Mutual zero sequence resistance (coupling resistance) of the line = Mutual zero sequence reactance (coupling reactance) of the line = Positive sequence resistance of the line = Positive sequence reactance of the line

These values may either apply to the entire double circuit line length or be based on a per unit of line length, as the quotient is independent of length. Furthermore it makes no difference whether the quotients are calculated with primary, or secondary values. These setting values only apply to the protected line and are entered in the addresses 1126 RM/RL ParalLine and 1127 XM/XL ParalLine. For ground faults on the protected feeder there is in theory no additional distance protection or fault locator measuring error when the parallel line compensation is used. The setting in address 1128 RATIO Par. Comp is therefore only relevant for ground faults outside the protected feeder. It provides the current ratio IG/IGP for the ground current balance of the distance protection (in Figure 2-4 for the device at location II), above which compensation should take place. In general, a presetting of 85 % is sufficient. A more sensitive (larger) setting has no advantage. In the case of a severe system asymmetry, or a very small coupling factor (XM/XL below approximately 0.4), a smaller setting may be useful. A more detailed explanation of parallel line compensation can be found in Section 2.2.1 under distance protection.

54

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.1 General

Figure 2-4

Reach with parallel line compensation at II

The current ratio may also be calculated from the desired reach of the parallel line compensation and vice versa. The following applies (refer to Figure 2-4):

Current Transformer Saturation

7SA522 contains a saturation detector which largely detects the measuring errors resulting from the saturation of the current transformers and initiates a switchover to distance measurement. The threshold above which it picks up can be set in address 1140 I-CTsat. Thres.. This is the current level above which saturation may be present. The setting disables the saturation detector. This parameter can only be altered with DIGSI under Additional Settings.

PN Pi P' n Circuit Breaker Status

= Nominal CT burden [VA] = Internal CT burden [VA] = Actual connected burden (protection device + connection cable) = Nominal CT accuracy limiting factor (for C-class CT's n=20)

Information regarding the circuit breaker position is required by various protection and supplementary functions to ensure their optimal functionality. The device has a circuit breaker status recognition which processes the status of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and contains also a detection based on the measured currents and voltages (see also Section 2.20.1). In address 1130 the residual current is set PoleOpenCurrent, which will definitely not be exceeded when the circuit breaker pole is open. If nuisance currents (e.g. through induction) can be excluded when the circuit breaker is open, this setting may be very sensitive. Otherwise this setting must be increased correspondingly. Usually the presetting is sufficient. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

55

2 Functions

The remaining voltage 1131, which will definitely not be exceeded when the circuit breaker pole is open, is set in address PoleOpenVoltage. Voltage transformers must be on the line side. The setting should not be too sensitive because of possible nuisance voltages (e.g. due to capacitive coupling). It must in any event be set below the smallest phase-ground voltage which may be expected during normal operation. Usually the presetting is sufficient. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. The seal-in time SI Time all Cl. (address 1132) determines the activation period for enabling protection functions following each energization of the line (e.g. fast tripping high-current element). This time is started by the internal circuit breaker switching detection once it recognizes an energized line or by the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts, if these are connected to the device via binary input to provide information that the circuit breaker has closed. The time should be set greater than: CB CLOSE Operating Time + Protective Function Operating Time + CB OPEN Operating Time. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. In address 1134 Line Closure the criteria for the internal recognition of line energization are determined. Manual CLOSE means that only the manual close signal via binary input or the integrated control is evaluated as closure. I OR V or ManCl implies that in addition, the measured current or voltage are used to determine closure of the circuit breaker, whereas 52a OR I or M/C means that , either CB auxiliary contact status or measured current are used to detect line closure. If the voltage transformer are not situated on the line side, the setting 52a OR I or M/C must be used. In the case of I or Man.Close only the currents or the manual close signals are used to recognize closing of the circuit breaker. Address 1135 Reset Trip CMD determines under which conditions a trip command is reset. If CurrentOpenPole is set, the trip command is reset as soon as the current disappears. It is important that the value set in address 1130 PoleOpenCurrent(see above) is undershot. If Current AND 52a is set, the circuit breaker auxiliary contact must send a message that the circuit breaker is open. It is a prerequisite for this setting that the position of the auxiliary contacts is allocated via a binary input. While the time SI Time all Cl. (address 1132, refer above) is activated following each recognition of line energization, SI Time Man.Cl (address 1150) is the time following manual closure during which special influence of the protection functions is activated (e.g. increased reach of the distance protection). This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.

Note For CB Test and automatic reclosure the CB auxiliary contact status derived with the binary inputs 52-a Bkr.1... (No. 366 to 371, 410 and 411) are relevant for the circuit breaker test and for the automatic reclosure to indicate the CB switching status. The other binary inputs 52-a... (No. 351 to 353, 379 and 380) are used for detecting the status of the line (address 1134) and for reset of the trip command (address 1135). Address 1135 is also used by other protection functions, e.g. by the echo function, energization in case of overcurrent etc. For use with one circuit breaker only, both binary input functions, e.g. 366 and 351, can be allocated to the same physical input. For one-and-a-half or ringbus schemes the binary inputs >52-a Bkr.1... (must be adapted to one appropriate circuit breaker. The >52-a... inputs must then get the correct signals to determine the line status. An additional CFC logic may be advantageous For manual closure of the circuit breaker via binary inputs, it can be specified in address 1151 Man. Close whether the integrated manual CLOSE detection checks

56

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.1 General

the synchronism between the busbar voltage and the voltage of the switched feeder. This setting does not apply for a close command via the integrated control functions. If the synchronism check is desired the device must either feature the integrated synchronism check function or an external device for synchronism check must be connected. In the former case the synchronism check function must be configured as available, a busbar voltage must be connected to the device and correctly set in the power system data (Subsection 2.1.3.1, address 210 V4 transformer = Vsync transf., as well as the associated factors). If no synchronism check is required when closing manually, set Man. Close = w/o Sync-check. If a check is desired, set with Sync-check. To not use the MANUAL CLOSE function of the device at, set Man. Close to NO. This may be reasonable if the close command is output to the circuit breaker without involving the 7SA522 and the relay itself is not desired to issue a close command. For commands via the integrated control (local control, DIGSI, serial interface) address 1152 Man.Clos. Imp. determines whether a particular close command via the integrated control function should be treated by the protection (like instantaneous re-opening when switching onto a fault) like a MANUAL CLOSE command via binary input. This address also tells the device for which switchgear this applies. You can select from the switching devices which are available for the integrated control. Choose that circuit breaker which usually operates for manual closure and, if required, for automatic reclosure (usually Q0). If none is set here, a CLOSE command via the control will not generate a MANUAL CLOSE impulse for the protection function. Three-pole Coupling Three-pole coupling is only relevant if single-pole auto-reclosures are carried out. If not, tripping is always three-pole. The remainder of this margin heading section can be skipped in this case. Address 1155 3pole coupling determines whether any multi-phase pickup leads to a three-pole tripping command, or whether only multi-pole tripping decisions result in a three-pole tripping command. This setting is only relevant with one- and three-pole tripping and therefore only available in this version. More information on this functions is also contained in Subsection 2.20.1 Pickup Logic for the Entire Device. With the setting with PICKUP every fault detection in more than one phase leads to three-pole coupling of the trip outputs, even if only a single-phase ground fault is situated within the tripping region, and further faults only affect the higher zones, or are located in the reverse direction. Even if a single-phase trip command has already been issued, each further fault detection will lead to three-pole coupling of the trip outputs. If, on the other hand, this address is set to with TRIP, three-pole coupling of the trip output (three-pole tripping) only occurs when more than one pole is tripped. Therefore if a single-phase fault is located within the zone of tripping, and a further arbitrary fault is outside the tripping zone, single-phase tripping is possible. Even a further fault during the single-pole tripping will only cause three-pole coupling if it is located within the tripping zone. This parameter is valid for all protection functions of 7SA522 which are capable of single-pole tripping. The difference is noticeable when multiple faults occur, which means faults that nearly occur at the same time at different places in the system. If, for example, two single-phase ground faults occur on different lines - these may also be parallel lines - (Figure 2-5), the protective relays of all four line ends detect a fault A-B-G, i.e. the pickup image is consistent with a two-phase ground fault. If single pole tripping and reclosure is employed, it is therefore desirable that each line only trips and

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

57

2 Functions

recloses single pole. This is possible with setting 1155 3pole coupling = with TRIP. In this manner each of the four relays at the four line ends recognizes that single pole tripping for the fault on the respective line is required.

Figure 2-5

Multiple fault on a double-circuit line

In some cases, however, a three-pole tripping would be preferable for this fault scenario, for example in the event that the double-circuit line is located in the vicinity of a large generator unit (Figure 2-6). This is because the generator considers the two single-phase to ground faults as one double-phase ground fault, with correspondingly high dynamic load on the turbine shaft. With the setting 1155 3pole coupling = with PICKUP, the two lines are switched off three-pole, since each device picks up as with A-B-G, i.e. as with a multi-phase fault.

Figure 2-6

Multiple fault on a double-circuit line next to a generator

Address 1156 Trip2phFlt determines that the short-circuit protection functions perform only a single-pole trip in case of isolated two-phase faults (clear of ground), provided that single-pole tripping is possible and permitted. This allows a single-pole automatic reclosure cycle for this kind of fault. Thereby you can specify whether the leading phase (1pole leading ), or the lagging phase 1pole lagging ) is tripped. The parameter is only available in versions with single-pole and three-pole tripping. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. If this option is used, the user must set the phase selection the same throughout the entire network and that it must be the same at all ends of one line. More information on this functions is also contained in Subsection 2.20.1 Pickup Logic for the Entire Device. Usually the presetting 3pole is used here.

58

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.1 General

2.1.5.2

Settings Addresses which have an appended "A" can only be changed with DIGSI, under "Display Additional Settings". The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding secondary nominal current of the current transformer.

Addr. 1103 1104 1105 1107 1110

Parameter FullScaleVolt. FullScaleCurr. Line Angle P,Q sign x'

Setting Options 1.0 .. 1200.0 kV 10 .. 5000 A 30 .. 89 not reversed reversed

Default Setting 400.0 kV 1000 A 85 not reversed 0.1500 /km 0.0300 /km 100.0 km 0.2420 /mi 0.0484 /mi 62.1 Miles 0.010 F/km 0.050 F/km 0.016 F/mi 0.080 F/mi 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.000 0.00 1.000 0.00 0.00 0.00

Comments Measurement: Full Scale Voltage (100%) Measurement: Full Scale Current (100%) Line Angle P,Q operational measured values sign x' - Line Reactance per length unit Line Length x' - Line Reactance per length unit Line Length c' - capacit. per unit line len. F/km c' - capacit. per unit line len. F/mile Zero seq. comp. factor RG/RL for Z1 Zero seq. comp. factor XG/XL for Z1 Zero seq. comp.factor RG/RL for Z1B...Z5 Zero seq. comp.factor XG/XL for Z1B...Z5 Zero seq. comp. factor K0 for zone Z1 Zero seq. comp. angle for zone Z1 Zero seq.comp.factor K0,higher zones >Z1 Zero seq. comp. angle, higher zones >Z1 Mutual Parallel Line comp. ratio RM/RL Mutual Parallel Line comp. ratio XM/XL

1A 5A

0.0050 .. 9.5000 /km 0.0010 .. 1.9000 /km 0.1 .. 1000.0 km

1111 1112

Line Length x' 1A 5A

0.0050 .. 15.0000 /mi 0.0010 .. 3.0000 /mi 0.1 .. 650.0 Miles

1113 1114

Line Length c' 1A 5A

0.000 .. 100.000 F/km 0.000 .. 500.000 F/km 0.000 .. 160.000 F/mi 0.000 .. 800.000 F/mi -0.33 .. 7.00 -0.33 .. 7.00 -0.33 .. 7.00 -0.33 .. 7.00 0.000 .. 4.000 -135.00 .. 135.00 0.000 .. 4.000 -135.00 .. 135.00 0.00 .. 8.00 0.00 .. 8.00

1115

c'

1A 5A

1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1126 1127

RG/RL(Z1) XG/XL(Z1) RG/RL(Z1B...Z5) XG/XL(Z1B...Z5) K0 (Z1) Angle K0(Z1) K0 (> Z1) AngleI K0(> Z1) RM/RL ParalLine XM/XL ParalLine

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

59

2 Functions

Addr. 1128 1130A

Parameter RATIO Par. Comp PoleOpenCurrent

Setting Options 50 .. 95 %

Default Setting 85 % 0.10 A 0.50 A 30 V 0.05 sec only with ManCl

Comments Neutral current RATIO Parallel Line Comp Pole Open Current Threshold Pole Open Voltage Threshold Seal-in Time after ALL closures Recognition of Line Closures with

1A 5A

0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.25 .. 5.00 A 2 .. 70 V 0.01 .. 30.00 sec only with ManCl I OR V or ManCl 52a OR I or M/C I or Man.Close CurrentOpenPole Current AND 52a

1131A 1132A 1134

PoleOpenVoltage SI Time all Cl. Line Closure

1135 1140A

Reset Trip CMD I-CTsat. Thres. 1A 5A

CurrentOpenPole 20.0 A 100.0 A 0.30 sec NO

RESET of Trip Command CT Saturation Threshold

0.2 .. 50.0 A; 1.0 .. 250.0 A; 0.01 .. 30.00 sec with Sync-check w/o Sync-check NO (Setting options depend on configuration) with PICKUP with TRIP 3pole 1pole leading 1pole lagging 30 .. 90

1150A 1151

SI Time Man.Cl Man. Close

Seal-in Time after MANUAL closures Manual CLOSE COMMAND generation MANUAL Closure Impulse after CONTROL 3 pole coupling Trip type with 2phase faults Angle of inclination, distance charact.

1152 1155 1156A

Man.Clos. Imp. 3pole coupling Trip2phFlt

None with TRIP 3pole

1211

Distance Angle

85

2.1.5.3
No. 301 302 303 351 352 353 356 357 361 362 366

Information List
Information Pow.Sys.Flt. Fault Event Sens Gnd flt >52-a A >52-a B >52-a C >Manual Close >Close Cmd. Blk >FAIL:Feeder VT >FAIL:Bus VT >52a Bkr1 A Type of Information OUT OUT OUT SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP Power System fault Fault Event Sensitive Ground fault >52-a Phase A (Position Contact=Breaker) >52-a Phase B (Position Contact=Breaker) >52-a Phase C (Position Contact=Breaker) >Manual close signal >Block all Close commands from external >Failure: Feeder VT (MCB tripped) >Failure: Busbar side VT MCB tripped >52-a Bkr.1 Ph A (for AR,CB-Test) Comments

60

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.1 General

No. 367 368 371 378 379 380 381 382 383 385 386 410 411 501 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 530 533 534 535 536 545 546 560 561 562 563 590 591 592 593

Information >52a Bkr1 B >52a Bkr1 C >Bkr1 Ready >52 faulty >52a 3p Closed >52b 3p Open >1p Trip Perm >Only 1ph AR >Enable ARzones >Lockout SET >Lockout RESET >52a Bkr1 3p Cl >52b Bkr1 3p Op Relay PICKUP Relay PICKUP A Relay PICKUP B Relay PICKUP C Relay PICKUP G Relay TRIP A Relay TRIP B Relay TRIP C Relay CLOSE Relay TRIP Relay TRIP 1p.A Relay TRIP 1p.B Relay TRIP 1p.C Relay TRIP 3ph. LOCKOUT Ia = Ib = Ic = Definitive TRIP PU Time TRIP Time Trip Coupled 3p Man.Clos.Detect Man.Close Cmd CB Alarm Supp Line closure 1pole open A 1pole open B 1pole open C

Type of Information SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT IntSP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

Comments >52-a Bkr.1 Ph B (for AR,CB-Test) >52-a Bkr.1 Ph C (for AR,CB-Test) >Breaker 1 READY (for AR,CB-Test) >52 Breaker faulty (for 50BF) >52a Bkr. aux. contact (3pole closed) >52b Bkr. aux. contact (3pole open) >Single-phase trip permitted from ext.AR >External AR programmed for 1phase only >Enable all AR Zones / Elements >Lockout SET >Lockout RESET >52a Bkr1 aux. 3pClosed (for AR,CB-Test) >52b Bkr1 aux. 3p Open (for AR,CB-Test) Relay PICKUP Relay PICKUP Phase A Relay PICKUP Phase B Relay PICKUP Phase C Relay PICKUP GROUND Relay TRIP command Phase A Relay TRIP command Phase B Relay TRIP command Phase C Relay GENERAL CLOSE command Relay GENERAL TRIP command Relay TRIP command - Only Phase A Relay TRIP command - Only Phase B Relay TRIP command - Only Phase C Relay TRIP command Phases ABC LOCKOUT is active Primary fault current Ia Primary fault current Ib Primary fault current Ic Relay Definitive TRIP Time from Pickup to drop out Time from Pickup to TRIP Single-phase trip was coupled 3phase Manual close signal detected CB CLOSE command for manual closing CB alarm suppressed Line closure detected Single pole open detected in Phase A Single pole open detected in Phase B Single pole open detected in Phase C

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

61

2 Functions

2.1.6
2.1.6.1

Oscillographic Fault Records

Description The 7SA522 distance protection is equipped with a fault recording function. The instantaneous values of the measured quantities iA, iB, iC, iN or iNS, ip, ig and va, vb, vc, vdelta or vsync or vx or 3v0 (voltages in accordance with connection) are sampled at intervals of 0.83 ms for 60 Hz and 1.0 ms for 50Hz and stored in a circulating buffer (20 samples per cycle). For a fault, the data are stored for an adjustable period of time, but no more than 5 seconds per fault. A total of 8 records can be saved within 15 s. The fault record memory is automatically updated with every new fault, so no acknowledgment is required. The storage of fault values can also be started by pickup of a protection function, via binary input and via the serial interface. The data can be retrieved via the serial interfaces by means of a personal computer and evaluated with the protection data software DIGSI and the graphic analysis software SIGRA 4. The latter graphically represents the data recorded during the system fault and calculates additional information such as the impedance or RMS values from the measured values. Currents and voltages can be presented as desired as primary or secondary values. Binary signal traces (marks) of particular events e.g. fault detection, tripping are also represented. If the device has a serial system interface, the fault recording data can be passed on to a central device via this interface. Data are evaluated by appropriate programs in the central device. Currents and voltages are referred to their maximum values, scaled to their rated values and prepared for graphic presentation. Binary signal traces (marks) of particular events e.g. fault detection, tripping are also represented (configurable). In the event of transfer to a central device, the request for data transfer can be executed automatically and can be selected to take place after each fault detection by the protection, or only after a trip.

2.1.6.2 General

Setting Notes Other settings pertaining to fault recording (waveform capture) are found in the submenu Oscillographic Fault Records of the Settings menu. Waveform capture makes a distinction between the trigger instant for an oscillographic record and the criterion to save the record (address 402 WAVEFORMTRIGGER). This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. Normally the trigger is the pickup of a protective element, i.e. the time 0 is defined as the instant the first protection function picks up. The criterion for saving may be both the device pickup (Save w. Pickup) or the device trip (Save w. TRIP). A trip command issued by the device can also be used as trigger instant (Start w. TRIP); in this case it is also the saving criterion. Recording of an oscillographic fault record starts with the pickup or trip by a protective function and ends with the dropout of the last pickup of a protective function. Usually this is also the extent of a fault recording (address 403 WAVEFORM DATA = Fault event). If automatic reclosure is implemented, the entire system disturbance - possibly with several reclose attempts - up to the ultimate fault clearance can be stored (address 403 WAVEFORM DATA = Pow.Sys.Flt.). This facilitates the representation of the entire system fault history, but also consumes storage capacity during the auto-

62

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.1 General

reclosure dead time(s). This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. The actual storage time encompasses the pre-fault time PRE. TRIG. TIME (address 411) ahead of the reference instant, the normal recording time and the post-fault time POST REC. TIME (address 412) after the storage criterion has reset. The maximum length of time of a fault record MAX. LENGTH is entered in address 410. The fault recording can also be triggered via a binary input, via the keypad on the front of the device or with a PC via the operation or service interface. The storage is then dynamically triggered. The length of the fault recording is set in address 415 BinIn CAPT.TIME (maximum length however is MAX. LENGTH, address 410). Pre-fault and post-fault times will be included. If the binary input time is set for , then the length of the record equals the time that the binary input is activated (static), or the MAX. LENGTH setting in address 410, whichever is shorter. 2.1.6.3 Settings Addresses which have an appended "A" can only be changed with DIGSI, under "Display Additional Settings".
Addr. 402A Parameter WAVEFORMTRIGGE R WAVEFORM DATA MAX. LENGTH PRE. TRIG. TIME POST REC. TIME BinIn CAPT.TIME Setting Options Save w. Pickup Save w. TRIP Start w. TRIP Fault event Pow.Sys.Flt. 0.30 .. 5.00 sec 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.10 .. 5.00 sec; Default Setting Save w. Pickup Comments Waveform Capture

403A 410 411 412 415

Fault event 2.00 sec 0.25 sec 0.10 sec 0.50 sec

Scope of Waveform Data Max. length of a Waveform Capture Record Captured Waveform Prior to Trigger Captured Waveform after Event Capture Time via Binary Input

2.1.6.4
No. 4 203

Information List
Information FltRecSta >Trig.Wave.Cap. Wave. deleted Type of Information IntSP SP OUT_Ev Fault Recording Start >Trigger Waveform Capture Waveform data deleted Comments

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

63

2 Functions

2.2

Distance Protection 21
Distance protection is the main function of the device. It is characterized by high measuring accuracy and the ability to adapt to the given system conditions. It is supplemented by a number of additional functions.

2.2.1
2.2.1.1

Distance Protection 21, General Settings

Ground Fault Detection Validation of fault loops for fault distance measurement and the shape of the zone characteristics substantially depend on whether the fault at hand is a ground fault or not. The 7SA522 has a stabilized ground current measurement, a zero sequence current/negative sequence current comparison as well as a displacement voltage measurement. Furthermore, special measures are taken to avoid a pickup for single ground faults in an isolated or resonant-grounded system.

Functional Description

Ground Current 3I0

For ground current measurement, the fundamental of the summated numerically filtered phase currents is monitored to detect if it exceeds the set value (parameter 3I0 Threshold). It is stabilized against over-operation resulting from asymmetrical operating currents and error currents in the secondary circuits of the current transformer due to different degrees of current transformer saturation during faults without ground: the actual pickup threshold automatically increases as the phase current increases (Figure 2-7). The dropout threshold is approximately 95% of the pickup threshold.

Figure 2-7

Ground current element: pickup characteristic

Negative Sequence Current 3I2

On long, heavily loaded lines, large currents could cause excessive restraint of the ground current measurement (ref. Figure 2-7). To ensure secure detection of ground faults in this case, a negative sequence comparison element is additionally provided. In the event of a single-phase fault, the negative sequence current I2 has approximate-

64

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

ly the same magnitude as the zero sequence current I0. When the ratio zero sequence current / negative sequence current exceeds a preset ratio, this element picks up. For this element, too, parabolic characteristic provides restraint in the event of large negative sequence currents. Figure 2-8 illustrates this relationship. A release by means of the negative sequence current comparison requires a current of at least0.2 INom for 3I0 and 3I2.

Figure 2-8

Characteristic of the I0/I2 element

Displacement Voltage 3V0

For the neutral displacement voltage recognition the displacement voltage (3V0) is numerically filtered and the fundamental frequency is monitored to recognize whether it exceeds the set threshold. The dropout threshold is approximately 95 % of the pickup threshold. In grounded systems (3V0 Threshold) it can be used as an additional criterion for ground faults. For grounded systems, the V0criterion may be disabled by applying the setting. The current and voltage criteria supplement each other, as the displacement voltage increases when the zero sequence to positive sequence impedance ratio is large, while the ground current increases when the zero sequence to positive sequence impedance ratio is smaller. The current and voltage criteria are logically combined with an OR-function for grounded systems. It is however also possible to establish an AND gate of the two criteria (see Figure 2-9). If detection of the displacement voltage has been disabled by setting 3V0 Threshold to infinite, ground fault detection using the current criterion is still possible in case of no CT saturation. If the relay detects current transformer saturation in any of the phase currents, the voltage criterion is however an indispensable prerequisite for detection of a ground fault since unequal current transformer saturation may cause a faulted secondary zero-sequence current without a primary zero-sequence current flowing in the first place. The ground fault recognition alone does not cause a general pickup of the distance protection, but merely controls the further fault detection modules and alarms only in case of a general fault detection.

Logical Combination for Grounded Systems

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

65

2 Functions

Figure 2-9

Logic of the ground fault detection

Ground Fault Recognition during Single-Pole Open Condition

In order to prevent undesired pickup of the ground fault detection, caused by load currents during single-pole open condition, a modified ground fault detection is used during single-pole open condition in grounded power systems (Figure 2-10). In this case, the magnitudes of the currents and voltages are monitored in addition to the angles between the currents.

Figure 2-10

Ground fault detection during single-pole open condition

Logical Combination for Nongrounded Systems

In non-grounded systems (isolated system neutral or resonant-grounded by means of a Peterson coil) the measured displacement voltage is not used for fault detection. Furthermore, in these systems a simple ground fault is assumed initially in case of a single-phase fault and the fault detection is suppressed in order to avoid an erroneous pickup as a result of the ground fault initiation transients. After a time delay T3I0 1PHAS which can be set, the fault detection is released again; this is necessary for the distance protection to still be able to detect a double ground fault with one base point on a dead-end feeder. If, however, a ground fault is already present in the system, it is detected by the displacement voltage detection (3V0> COMP/ISOL.). In this case, there is no delay time: a ground fault occurring now in a different phase can only be a double ground fault. If, apart from the displacement measurement (3V0> COMP/ISOL.), there is a fault detection in more than one phase, this is also rated as a double ground fault. In this way, double ground faults can be detected even if no or only little ground current flows via the measuring point.

66

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

2.2.1.2

Calculation of the Impedances A separate measuring system is provided for each of the six possible impedance loops A-G, B-G, C-G, A-B, B-C, C-A. The phase-ground loops are evaluated when a ground fault detection is recognized and the phase current exceeds a settable minimum value Minimum Iph. The phase-phase loops are evaluated when the phase current in both of the affected phases exceeds the minimum value Minimum Iph. A jump detector synchronizes all the calculations with the fault inception. If another fault occurs during the evaluation, the new measured values are immediately used for the calculation. The fault evaluation is therefore always done with the measured values of the current fault condition.

PhasePhase Loops

To calculate the phase-phase loop, for instance during a two-phase short circuit A-B (Figure 2-11), the loop equation is: IA ZL IB ZL = VA-G VB-G with V, I Z = R + jX the (complex) measured quantities and the (complex) line impedance.

The line impedance is computed to be

Figure 2-11

Short-circuit of a phase-phase loop

The calculation of the phase-phase loop does not take place as long as one of the affected phases is isolated (during single-pole dead time), to avoid an incorrect measurement with the undefined measured values existing during this state. A state recognition (refer to Subsection 2.20.1) provides the corresponding block signal. A logic block diagram of the phase-phase measuring system is shown in Figure 2-12.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

67

2 Functions

Figure 2-12

Logic of the phase-phase measuring system

PhaseGround Loops

For the calculation of the phase-ground loop, for example during a C-G short-circuit (Figure 2-13) it must be noted that the impedance of the ground return path does not correspond to the impedance of the phase. In the loop equation IC ZL IG ZG = VC-G ZG is replaced by (ZG/ZL) ZL yielding:

From this the line impedance can be extracted

Figure 2-13

Short-circuit of a phase-ground loop

The factor ZG/ZL is only dependent upon the line parameters and not on the fault distance. The evaluation of the phase-ground loop does not take place as long as the affected phase is isolated (during single-pole dead time), to avoid an incorrect measurement with the undefined measured values existing in this state. A state recognition provides the corresponding block signal. A logic block diagram of the phase-ground measuring system is shown in Figure 2-14.

68

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

Figure 2-14

Logic of the phase-ground measuring system

Unfaulted Loops

The above considerations apply to the relevant faulted loop. All six loops are calculated for the impedance pickup; the impedances of the unfaulted loops are also influenced by the fault currents and voltages in the faulted phases. During an A-G fault for example, the fault current in phase A also appears in the measuring loops A-B and CA, the ground current is also measured in the loop B-G and C-G. Combined with load currents which may flow, the unfaulted loops produce the so-called apparent impedances, which have nothing to do with the actual fault distance. These apparent impedances in the unfaulted loops are usually larger than the shortcircuit impedance of the faulted loop because the unfaulted loop only carries a part of the fault current and always has a larger voltage than the faulted loop. For the selectivity of the zones, they are usually of no consequence. Apart from the zone selectivity, the phase selectivity is also important to achieve correct identification of the faulted phases, required to alarm the faulted phase and especially to enable single-pole automatic reclosure. Depending on the infeed conditions, close-in short circuits may cause unfaulted loops to see the fault further away than the faulted loop, but still within the tripping zone. This would cause three-pole tripping and therefore void the possibility of single-pole automatic reclosure. As a result power transfer via the line would be lost. In the 7SA522 this is avoided by the implementation of a loop verification function which operates in two steps: Initially, the calculated loop impedances and its components (phase and/or ground) are used to simulate a replica of the line impedance. If this simulation returns a plausible line image, the corresponding loop pickup is designated as a definitely valid loop. If the impedances of more than one loop are now located within the range of the zone, the smallest is still declared to be a valid loop. Furthermore, all loops that have an impedance which does not exceed the smallest loop impedance by more than 50% are declared as being valid. Loops with larger impedance are eliminated. Those loops which were declared as being valid in the initial element, cannot be eliminated by this element, even if they have larger impedances. In this manner unfaulted apparent impedances are eliminated on the one hand, while on the other hand, unsymmetrical multi-phase faults and multiple short circuits are recognized correctly. The loops that were designated as being valid are converted to phase information so that the fault detection correctly alarms the faulted phases.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

69

2 Functions

Double Faults in Effectively Grounded Systems

In systems with an effectively or low-resistant grounded neutral, each connection of a phase with ground results in a short-circuit condition which must be isolated immediately by the closest protection systems. Fault detection occurs in the faulted loop associated with the faulted phase. With double ground faults, fault detection is generally in two phase-ground loops. If both ground loops are in the same direction, a phase-phase loop may also pick up. It is possible to restrict the fault detection to particular loops in this case. It is often desirable to block the phase-ground loop of the leading phase, as this loop tends to overreach when there is infeed from both ends to a fault with a common ground fault resistance (Parameter 1221 2Ph-G faults = Block leading ). Alternatively, it is also possible to block the lagging phase-ground loop (Parameter 2Ph-G faults = Block lagging ). All the affected loops can also be evaluated (Parameter 2PhG faults = All loops), or only the phase-phase loop (Parameter 2Ph-G faults = - loops only) or only the phase-ground loops (Parameter 2Ph-G faults = -G loops only). A prerequisite for these restrictions is that the relevant loops indicate fault locations which are close together and within the reach of the first zone Z1. The loops are considered to be close together when they have the same direction and have both been observed in zone Z1. The loops are considered to be close together when they do not differ by more than a factor 1.5 (largest to smallest impedance). This prevents the elimination, during multiple faults at different locations, of the loop relating to the closer fault location by the set restriction. Furthermore a phase-to-phase measurement can only be performed if two ground faults as described above are located close to one another. In Table 2-2 the measured values used for the distance measurement in grounded systems during double ground faults are shown.
Table 2-2 Evaluation of the measured loops for double loop faults in a grounded system in case both ground faults are close to each other Evaluated loop(s) B-G, A-B C-G, B-C A-G, C-A A-G, A-B B-G, B-C C-G, C-A A-G, B-G, A-B B-G, C-G, B-C A-G, C-G, C-A A-B B-C C-A A-G, B-G B-G, C-G A-G, C-G Setting of parameter 1221 2Ph-G faults = Block leading

Loop pickup A-G, B-G, A-B B-G, C-G, B-C A-G, C-G, C-A A-G, B-G, A-B B-G, C-G, B-C A-G, C-G, C-A A-G, B-G, A-B B-G, C-G, B-C A-G, C-G, C-A A-G, B-G, A-B B-G, C-G, B-C A-G, C-G, C-A A-G, B-G, A-B B-G, C-G, B-C A-G, C-G, C-A

2Ph-G faults = Block lagging

2Ph-G faults = All loops

2Ph-G faults = - loops only

2Ph-G faults = -G loops only

During three phase faults the fault detection of all three phase-phase loops usually occurs. In this case the three phase-phase loops are evaluated. If ground fault detection also occurs, the phase-ground loops are also evaluated. Double Ground Faults in Nongrounded Systems In isolated or resonant-grounded networks a single ground fault does not result in a short circuit current flow. There is only a displacement of the voltage triangle (Figure 2-15). For the system operation this state is no immediate danger. The distance pro-

70

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

tection must not pick up in this case even though the voltage of the phase with the ground fault is equal to zero in the whole galvanically connected system. Any load currents will result in an impedance value that is equal to zero. Therefore a single-phase pickup phase-ground without ground current pickup is avoided in the 7SA522.

Figure 2-15

Ground fault in non-grounded neutral system

With the occurrence of ground faults - especially in large resonant-grounded systems - large fault inception transient currents can appear that may evoke the ground current pickup. In case of an overcurrent pickup there may also be a phase current pickup. 7SA522 provides special measures against such undesirable pickups. With the occurrence of a double ground fault in isolated or resonant-grounded systems it is sufficient to isolate one of the faults. The second fault may remain in the system as a simple ground fault. Which of the faults is isolated depends on the double ground fault preference which is set the same in the whole galvanically-connected system. With 7SA522 the following double ground fault preferences (Parameter 1220 PHASE PREF.2phg) can be selected:
Acyclic C before A before B Acyclic A before C before B Acyclic B before A before C Acyclic A before B before C Acyclic C before B before A Acyclic B before C before A Cyclic C before A before B before C Cyclic A before C before B before A all loops are measured C (A) ACYCLIC A (C) ACYCLIC B (A) ACYCLIC A (B) ACYCLIC C (B) ACYCLIC B (C) ACYCLIC C (A) CYCLIC A (C) CYCLIC All loops

In all eight preference options, one ground fault is isolated according to the preference scheme. The second fault can remain in the system as a simple ground fault. It can be detected with the Ground Fault Detection in Non-grounded Systems (optional). The 7SA522 also enables the user to isolate both fault locations of a double ground fault. Set the double ground fault preference to All loops. Table 2-3 lists all measured values used for the distance measuring in isolated or resonant-grounded systems.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

71

2 Functions

Table 2-3 Loop pickup

Evaluation of the Measuring Loops for Multi-phase Pickup in the Non-grounded Network Evaluated loop(s) A-G C-G C-G A-G C-G A-G B-G B-G A-G A-G B-G A-G B-G C-G C-G B-G B-G C-G A-G B-G C-G B-G C-G A-G A-G, B-G B-G, C-G C-G; A-G Setting of parameter 1220 PHASE PREF.2phg = C (A) ACYCLIC

A-G, B-G, (A-B) B-G, C-G, (B-C) A-G, C-G, (C-A) A-G, B-G, (A-B) B-G, C-G, (B-C) A-G, C-G, (C-A) A-G, B-G, (A-B) B-G, C-G, (B-C) A-G, C-G, (C-A) A-G, B-G, (A-B) B-G, C-G, (B-C) A-G, C-G, (C-A) A-G, B-G, (A-B) B-G, C-G, (B-C) A-G, C-G, (C-A) A-G, B-G, (A-B) B-G, C-G, (B-C) A-G, C-G, (C-A) A-G, B-G, (A-B) B-G, C-G, (B-C) A-G, C-G, (C-A) A-G, B-G, (A-B) B-G, C-G, (B-C) A-G, C-G, (C-A) A-G, B-G, (A-B) B-G, C-G, (B-C) A-G, C-G, (C-A)

PHASE PREF.2phg = A (C) ACYCLIC

PHASE PREF.2phg = B (A) ACYCLIC

PHASE PREF.2phg = A (B) ACYCLIC

PHASE PREF.2phg = C (B) ACYCLIC

PHASE PREF.2phg = B (C) ACYCLIC

PHASE PREF.2phg = C (A) CYCLIC

PHASE PREF.2phg = A (C) CYCLIC

PHASE PREF.2phg = All loops

Parallel Line Measured Value Correction (optional)

During ground faults on parallel lines, the impedance values calculated by means of the loop equations are influenced by the coupling of the zero sequence impedance of the two conductor systems (Figure 2-16). This causes measuring errors in the result of the impedance computation unless special measures are taken. A parallel line compensation may therefore be activated. In this manner the ground current of the parallel line is taken into consideration by the line equation and thereby allows for compensation of the coupling influence. The ground current of the parallel line must be connected to the device for this purpose. The loop equation is then modified as shown below, refer also to Figure 2-13. IC ZL IG ZG IGP ZM = VC-G

where IGP is the ground current of the parallel line and the ratio ZM/ZL is a constant line parameter, resulting from the geometry of the double circuit line and the nature of the ground below the line. These line parameters are input to the device - along with all the other line data - during the parameterization of the device. The line impedance is calculated with the equation below similar to the calculation shown earlier.

72

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

Figure 2-16

Ground fault on a double circuit line

Without parallel line compensation, the ground current on the parallel line will in most cases cause the reach threshold of the distance protection to be shortened (underreach of the distance measurement). In some cases - for example when the two lines are terminated to different busbars, and the location of the ground fault is on one of the remote busbars (at B in Figure 2-16) - it is possible that an overreach may occur. The parallel line compensation only applies to faults on the protected feeder. For faults on the parallel line, the compensation may not be carried out, as this would cause severe overreach. The relay located in position II in Figure 2-16 may therefore not be compensated. Ground current balance is therefore additionally provided in the device, which carries out a cross comparison of the ground currents in the two lines. The compensation is only applied to the line end where the ground current of the parallel line is not substantially larger than the ground current in the line itself. In example in Figure 2-16, the current IG is larger than IGP: compensation is applied at I in that ZM IGP is included in the evaluation; at II compensation is not applied. Switching onto a Fault When the circuit breaker is switched onto a dead fault with a manual close command, fast tripping by the distance protection is possible. By setting parameters it may be determined which zone(s) is/are picked up following a manual close (refer to Figure 217). The line energization information (input Line closure) are derived from the line energization recognition.

Figure 2-17

Circuit breaker closure onto a fault

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

73

2 Functions

Note When switching onto a three-pole fault with the MHO circle, there will be no voltage in the memory or unfaulted loop voltage available. To ensure fault clearance when switching onto three-pole close-up faults, please make sure that in conjunction with the configured MHO characteristic the Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection (SOTF) 50HS is always enabled.

2.2.1.3

Setting Notes At address 1201 FCT 21 the distance protection function can be switched ON or OFF.

Minimum Current

The minimum current for fault detection Minimum Iph (address 1202) is set somewhat (approx. 10 %) below the minimum short-circuit current that may occur. In systems with grounded starpoint, the setting 3I0 Threshold (address 1203) is set somewhat below the minimum expected ground fault current. 3I0 is defined as the sum of the phase currents |IA + IB + IC|, which equals the neutral current of the set of current transformers. In non-grounded systems the setting value is recommended to be below the ground current value for double ground faults. The preset value 3I0>/ Iphmax = 0.10 (address 1207) usually is recommended for the slope of the 3I0 characteristic. This setting can only be changed via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. Addresses 1204 and 1209 are only relevant for grounded power systems. In nongrounded systems this setting is not relevant and therefore not accessible. When setting 3V0 Threshold (address 1204), care must be taken that operational asymmetries do not cause a pickup. 3V0 is defined as the sum of the phase-ground voltages |VA-G + VB-G + VC-G|. If the V0 criterion is not required, address 1204 is set to . In grounded power systems the ground fault detection can be complemented by a zero sequence voltage detection function. You can determine whether a ground fault is detected when a zero sequence current or a zero sequence voltage threshold is surpassed or when both criteria are met. Address 1209 Gnd fault recog is set 3I0> OR 3V0> if only one of the two criteria is valid. Select 3I0> AND 3V0> to activate both criteria for ground-fault detection. This setting can only be changed via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. If you want to detect only the ground current, set 3I0> OR 3V0> and also 3V0 Threshold (address 1204) to . Note Do under no circumstances set address 1204 3V0 Threshold to , if you have set address 1209 Gnd fault recog = 3I0> AND 3V0> since ground fault detection will then no longer be possible. If in isolated or resonant grounded systems the ground fault detection threatens to pick up due to fault inception transients following the occurrence of a single ground fault, the detection can be delayed with setting address 1206 T3I0 1PHAS. Set parameter T3I0 1PHAS to if the ground current threshold can also be exceeded during steady-

Ground Fault Detection

74

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

state conditions. Then, even with high ground current, single-phase pickup is no longer possible. Double ground faults are however correctly detected and measured according to the preference program (also see Subsection 2.2.1 at margin heading Double Ground Faults in Non-grounded Systems). Application with Series-Compensated Lines If the distance protection device is applied close to or on a series-compensated line, set address 1208 SER-COMP. to YES to ensure that the direction determination works correctly in all cases. The effect of series capacitors on direction determination is described in Section 2.2.2 under margin heading Direction Determination on Seriescompensated Lines. As was mentioned in the description of the measuring technique, each distance zone generates an output signal which is associated with the zone and the affected phase. The zone logic combines these zone fault detections with possible further internal and external signals The delay times for the distance zones can be started either all together on general fault detection by the distance protection function, or individually at the moment the fault enters the respective distance zone. Parameter 21 Start Timers (address 1210) is set by default to on Dis. Pickup. This setting ensures that all delay times continue to run together even if the type of fault or the selected measuring loop changes, e.g. because an intermediate infeed is switched off. This is also the preferred setting in the case of other distance protection relays in the power system working with this start timing. Where grading of the delay times is especially important, for instance if the fault location shifts from zone Z3 to zone Z2, the setting on Zone Pickup should be chosen. The graph of the tripping characteristics is determined, among others, by the inclination angle Distance Angle (address 1211). Details about the tripping characteristics can be found in Section 2.2.2 and 2.2.3). Usually the line angle is set here i.e. the same value as at address 1105 Line Angle (Section 2.1.5.1). Irrespective of the line angle it is, however, possible to select a different inclination angle of the tripping characteristic. The mutual coupling between the two lines of a double-circuit configuration is only relevant to the 7SA522 when it is applied on a double-circuit line and when it is intended to implement parallel line compensation. A prerequisite is that the ground current of the parallel line is connected to the I4 measuring input of the device and this is entered in the Power System Data 1 settings. In this case, address 1215 Paral.Line Comp has to be set to YES (default setting). The coupling factors were already set as part of the general protection data (Section 2.1.5.1), as was the reach of the parallel line compensation. Double Ground Faults in Effectively Grounded Systems The loop selection for double ground faults is set in address 1221 2Ph-G faults (PhasePhaseGroundfault detection). This setting is only possible via DIGSI at "Display Additional Settings". In most cases, Block leading (blocking of the leading phase, default setting) is favorable because the leading phase-ground loop tends to overreach, especially in conjunction with large ground fault resistance. In certain cases (fault resistance phase-phase larger than phase-ground) the setting Block lagging (blocking of the lagging phase) may be more favorable. The evaluation of all affected loops with the setting All loops allows a maximum degree of redundancy. It is also possible to evaluate as loop - loops only. This ensures the most accuracy for two phase to ground faults. Ultimately it is possible to declare the phase-to-ground loops as valid (setting -G loops only).

Start of Delay Times

Angle of Inclination of the Tripping Characteristic

Parallel Line Measured Value Correction (optional)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

75

2 Functions

Double Ground Faults in Nongrounded Systems

In isolated or resonant-grounded systems it must be guaranteed that the preference for double ground faults in whole galvanically-connected systems is consistent. The double ground fault preference is set in address 1220 PHASE PREF.2phg. 7SA522 enables the user to detect all foot points of a multiple ground fault. PHASE PREF.2phg = All loops means that each ground fault point on a protected line is isolated independent of the preference. It can also be combined with a different preference. For a transformer feeder, for example, any foot point can be switched off following occurrence of a double ground fault, whereas A (C) ACYCLIC is consistently valid for the remainder of the system. If the ground fault detection threatens to pick up due to fault inception transients following the occurrence of a single ground fault, the detection can be delayed via parameter T3I0 1PHAS (address 1206). Usually the presetting (0.04 s) is sufficient. For large resonant-grounded systems the time delay should be increased. Set parameter T3I0 1PHAS to if the ground current threshold can also be exceeded during steadystate conditions. Then, even with high ground current, no single-phase pickup is possible anymore. Double ground faults are, however, detected correctly and evaluated according to the preference mode. If a double ground fault occurs right after a single ground fault, it is detected and evaluated according to the preference scheme. The already existing ground fault is detected by the zero-sequence voltage (address 1205 3V0> COMP/ISOL.). Please note that triple zero-sequence voltage 3V0 is relevant here. With a full displacement its value will be 3 times the phase-to-phase voltage. Afterwards the delay T3I0 1PHAS is not active anymore: a ground fault occurring now in a different phase can only be a double ground fault.

Switching onto a Fault

To determine the reaction of the distance protection during closure of the circuit breaker onto a dead fault, the parameter in address 1232 SOTF zone is used. The setting Inactive specifies that there is no special reaction, i.e. all distance elements operate according to their set zone parameters. The setting Zone Z1B causes all faults inside the overreaching zone Z1B (in the direction specified for these zones) to be cleared without delay following closure of the circuit breaker. If Z1B undirect. is set, the zone Z1B is relevant, but it acts in both directions, regardless of the operating direction set in address 1351 or 1451 Op. mode Z1B. The setting PICKUP implies that the non-delayed tripping following line energization is activated for all recognized faults in any zone (i.e. with general fault detection of the distance protection). On long heavily loaded lines, the risk of load impedance into the tripping characteristic of the distance protection may exist. To prevent unwanted load fault detection by the distance protection during heavy load flow, a load characteristic may be set for tripping characteristics with large R-reaches, which excludes such unwanted fault detection. This load area is considered in the description of the tripping characteristics (see also Subsection 2.2.2 and Subsection 2.2.3). The R-value R load (-G) (address 1241) refers to the phase-ground loops, R load (-) (address 1243) to the phase-phase loops. The values are set somewhat (approx. 10 %) below the minimum expected load impedance. The minimum load impedance results when the maximum load current and minimum operating voltage exist. Calculation Example: 115 kV overhead line with the following data: maximum transmittable power Pmax = 100 MVA corresponds to

Load Area

76

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

Imax minimum operating voltage Vmin Current Transformer Voltage Transformer

= 502 A = 0,9 VNom 600 A / 5 A 115 kV / 0.115 kV

The resulting minimum load impedance is therefore:

This value can be entered as a primary value when parameterizing with a personal computer and DIGSI. The conversion to secondary values is

when applying a security margin of 10 % the following is set: primary: R load (-) = 107.14 or secondary: R load (-) = 12.85 . The angle of the load encroachment area load (-G) (address 1242) and load (-) (address 1244) must be greater (approx. 5) than the maximum load angle (corresponding to the minimum power factor cos). Calculation Example: Minimum power factor cos min max = 0.63 = 51

Setting value load (-) = max + 5 = 56. 2.2.1.4 Settings Addresses which have an appended "A" can only be changed with DIGSI, under "Display Additional Settings". The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding secondary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. 1201 1202 Parameter FCT 21 Minimum Iph 1A 5A 1203 3I0 Threshold 1A 5A C ON OFF 0.05 .. 4.00 A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 0.25 .. 20.00 A Setting Options Default Setting ON 0.10 A 0.50 A 0.10 A 0.50 A Comments 21 Distance protection is Phase Current threshold for dist. meas. 3I0 threshold for neutral current pickup

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

77

2 Functions

Addr. 1204 1205 1206 1207A 1208 1209A 1210 1211 1215 1220

Parameter 3V0 Threshold 3V0> COMP/ISOL. T3I0 1PHAS 3I0>/ Iphmax SER-COMP. Gnd fault recog 21 Start Timers Distance Angle Paral.Line Comp PHASE PREF.2phg

Setting Options 1 .. 100 V; 10 .. 200 V 0.00 .. 0.50 sec; 0.05 .. 0.30 NO YES 3I0> OR 3V0> 3I0> AND 3V0> on Dis. Pickup on Zone Pickup 30 .. 90 NO YES C (A) ACYCLIC A (C) ACYCLIC B (A) ACYCLIC A (B) ACYCLIC C (B) ACYCLIC B (C) ACYCLIC C (A) CYCLIC A (C) CYCLIC All loops Block leading Block lagging All loops - loops only -G loops only PICKUP Zone Z1B Inactive Z1B undirect.

Default Setting 5V 40 V 0.04 sec 0.10 NO 3I0> OR 3V0> on Dis. Pickup 85 YES C (A) ACYCLIC

Comments 3V0 threshold zero seq. voltage pickup Pickup 3V0 (comp/ isol. star-point) Delay 1ph-faults (comp/isol. star-point) 3I0>-pickup-stabilisation (3I0>/ Iphmax) Series compensated line Criterion of ground fault recognition 21 Condition for zone timer start Angle of inclination, distance charact. Mutual coupling parall.line compensation Phase preference for 2phg faults

1221A

2Ph-G faults

Block leading

Loop selection with 2Ph-G faults

1232

SOTF zone

Inactive

Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault

1241

R load (-G)

1A 5A

0.100 .. 600.000 ; 0.020 .. 120.000 ; 20 .. 60

45 45 0.00 sec 0.00 sec

R load, minimum Load Impedance (ph-g) PHI load, maximum Load Angle (ph-g) R load, minimum Load Impedance (ph-ph) PHI load, maximum Load Angle (ph-ph) T1-1phase, delay for single phase faults T1multi-ph, delay for multi phase faults

1242 1243

load (-G) R load (-) 1A 5A

0.100 .. 600.000 ; 0.020 .. 120.000 ; 20 .. 60 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec;

1244 1305 1306

load (-) T1-1phase T1-multi-phase

78

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

Addr. 1315 1316 1317A 1325 1335 1345 1355 1356 1357

Parameter T2-1phase T2-multi-phase Trip 1pole Z2 T3 DELAY T4 DELAY T5 DELAY T1B-1phase T1B-multi-phase 1st AR -> Z1B

Setting Options 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; NO YES 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; NO YES

Default Setting 0.30 sec 0.30 sec NO 0.60 sec 0.90 sec 0.90 sec 0.00 sec 0.00 sec YES

Comments T2-1phase, delay for single phase faults T2multi-ph, delay for multi phase faults Single pole trip for faults in Z2 T3 delay T4 delay T5 delay T1B-1phase, delay for single ph. faults T1B-multi-ph, delay for multi ph. faults Z1B enabled before 1st AR (int. or ext.)

2.2.1.5
No. 3603 3611 3613 3617 3618 3619 3620 3651 3652 3653 3654 3655 3671 3672 3673 3674 3675 3681 3682 3683 3684 3685 3686 3687 3688

Information List
Information >BLOCK 21 Dist. >ENABLE Z1B >ENABLE Z1Binst >BLOCK Z4-Trip >BLOCK Z5-Trip >BLOCK Z4 Ph-G >BLOCK Z5 Ph-G 21 Dist. OFF 21 Dist. BLOCK 21 Dist. ACTIVE 21 Error K0(Z1) 21 ErrorK0(>Z1) 21 PICKUP 21 Pickup A 21 Pickup B 21 Pickup C 21 Pickup G 21 Pickup 1p.A 21 Pickup AG 21 Pickup 1p.B 21 Pickup BG 21 Pickup AB 21 Pickup ABG 21 Pickup 1p.C 21 Pickup CG Type of Information SP SP SP SP SP SP SP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT >BLOCK 21 Distance >ENABLE Z1B (with setted Time Delay) >ENABLE Z1B instantanous (w/o T-Delay) >BLOCK Z4-Trip >BLOCK Z5-Trip >BLOCK Z4 for ph-g loops >BLOCK Z5 for ph-g loops 21 Distance is switched OFF 21 Distance is BLOCKED 21 Distance is ACTIVE 21 Setting error K0(Z1) or Angle K0(Z1) 21 Setting error K0(>Z1)or Angle K0(>Z1) 21 PICKED UP 21 PICKUP Phase A 21 PICKUP Phase B 21 PICKUP Phase C 21 PICKUP GROUND 21 Pickup Phase A (only) 21 Pickup AG 21 Pickup Phase B (only) 21 Pickup BG 21 Pickup AB 21 Pickup ABG 21 Pickup Phase C (only) 21 Pickup CG Comments

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

79

2 Functions

No. 3689 3690 3691 3692 3693 3694 3701 3702 3703 3704 3705 3706 3707 3708 3709 3710 3711 3712 3713 3714 3715 3716 3717 3718 3719 3720 3741 3742 3743 3744 3745 3746 3747 3748 3749 3750 3751 3752 3755 3758 3759 3760 3771 3774 3777 3778

Information 21 Pickup CA 21 Pickup CAG 21 Pickup BC 21 Pickup BCG 21 Pickup ABC 21 Pickup ABCG 21 Loop AG forw 21 Loop BG forw 21 Loop CG forw 21 Loop AB forw 21 Loop BC forw 21 Loop CA forw 21 Loop AG rev. 21 Loop BG rev. 21 Loop CG rev. 21 Loop AB rev. 21 Loop BC rev. 21 Loop CA rev. 21 Loop AG <-> 21 Loop BG <-> 21 Loop CG <-> 21 Loop AB <-> 21 Loop BC <-> 21 Loop CA <-> 21 PU forward 21 PU reverse 21 PU Z1 AG 21 PU Z1 BG 21 PU Z1 CG 21 PU Z1 AB 21 PU Z1 BC 21 PU Z1 CA 21 PU Z1B AG 21 PU Z1B BG 21 PU Z1B CG 21 PU Z1B AB 21 PU Z1B BC 21 PU Z1B CA 21 PU Z2 21 PU Z3 21 PU Z4 21 PU Z5 21 Time Out T1 21 Time Out T2 21 Time Out T3 21 Time Out T4

Type of Information OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 21 Pickup CA 21 Pickup CAG 21 Pickup BC 21 Pickup BCG 21 Pickup ABC 21 Pickup ABCG

Comments

21 Selected Loop AG forward 21 Selected Loop BG forward 21 Selected Loop CG forward 21 Selected Loop AB forward 21 Selected Loop BC forward 21 Selected Loop CA forward 21 Selected Loop AG reverse 21 Selected Loop BG reverse 21 Selected Loop CG reverse 21 Selected Loop AB reverse 21 Selected Loop BC reverse 21 Selected Loop CA reverse 21 Selected Loop AG non-directional 21 Selected Loop BG non-directional 21 Selected Loop CG non-directional 21 Selected Loop AB non-directional 21 Selected Loop BC non-directional 21 Selected Loop CA non-directional 21 Picked up FORWARD 21 Picked up REVERSE 21 Pickup Z1, Loop AG 21 Pickup Z1, Loop BG 21 Pickup Z1, Loop CG 21 Pickup Z1, Loop AB 21 Pickup Z1, Loop BC 21 Pickup Z1, Loop CA 21 Pickup Z1B, Loop AG 21 Pickup Z1B, Loop BG 21 Pickup Z1B, Loop CG 21 Pickup Z1B, Loop AB 21 Pickup Z1B, Loop BC 21 Pickup Z1B, Loop CA 21 Pickup Z2 21 Pickup Z3 21 Pickup Z4 21 Pickup Z5 21 Time Out T1 21 Time Out T2 21 Time Out T3 21 Time Out T4

80

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

No. 3779 3780 3801 3802 3803 3804 3805 3811 3813 3816 3817 3818 3821 3822 3823 3824 3825 3826 3850

Information 21 Time Out T5 21 Time Out T1B 21 TRIP 21 TRIP 1p. A 21 TRIP 1p. B 21 TRIP 1p. C 21 TRIP ABC 21 TRIP 1p. Z1 21 TRIP 1p. Z1B 21 TRIP 1p. Z2 21 TRIP 3p. Z2 21 TRIP 3p. Z3 21 TRIP 3p. Z4 21 TRIP 3p. Z5 21 TRIP3p. Z1sf 21 TRIP3p. Z1mf 21 TRIP3p.Z1Bsf 21 TRIP3p Z1Bmf 21 TRIP Z1B Pil

Type of Information OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 21 Time Out T5 21 Time Out T1B

Comments

21 Distance General TRIP command 21 TRIP command - Only Phase A 21 TRIP command - Only Phase B 21 TRIP command - Only Phase C 21 TRIP command Phases ABC 21 TRIP single-phase Z1 21 TRIP single-phase Z1B 21 TRIP single-phase Z2 21 TRIP 3phase in Z2 21 TRIP 3phase in Z3 21 TRIP 3phase in Z4 21 TRIP 3phase in Z5 21 TRIP 3phase in Z1 with single-ph Flt. 21 TRIP 3phase in Z1 with multi-ph Flt. 21 TRIP 3phase in Z1B with single-ph Flt 21 TRIP 3phase in Z1B with multi-ph Flt. 21 TRIP Z1B with Pilot Protection scheme

2.2.2

Distance Protection with Quadrilateral Characteristic 21 (optional)

The 7SA522 distance protection may optionally be provided with polygonal tripping characteristic or with a MHO circle characteristic, or with both depending on which version was ordered. If both characteristics are available, they may be selected separately for phase-phase loops and phase-ground loops. If only the MHO circle characteristic is desired, please continue with the following Section.

2.2.2.1

Method of Operation In total there are five independent and one additional controlled zone for each fault impedance loop. Figure 2-18 shows the shape of the polygons as example. The first zone is shaded and forward directional. The third zone is reverse directional. In general, the polygon is defined by means of a parallelogram which intersects the axes with the values R and X as well as the tilt Dist. A load encroachment area with the setting RLoad and Load may be used to cut the area of the load impedance out of the polygon. The axial coordinates can be set individually for each zone; Dist, RLoad and Load are common for all zones. The parallelogram is symmetrical with respect to the origin of the RXcoordinate system; the directional characteristic however limits the tripping range to the desired quadrants (refer to Determination of Direction below). The R-reach may be set separately for the phasephase faults and the phaseground faults to achieve a larger fault resistance coverage for ground faults if this is desired. For the first zone Z1 an additional settable tilt exists, which may be used to prevent overreach resulting from angle variance and/or two ended infeed to faults with fault resistance. For Z1B and the higher zones this tilt does not exist.

Operating Polygons

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

81

2 Functions

Figure 2-18

Polygonal characteristic (setting values are marked by dots)

Determination of Direction

For each loop an impedance vector is also used to determine the direction of the shortcircuit. Usually similar to the distance calculation, ZL is used. However, depending on the quality of the measured values, different computation techniques are used. Immediately after fault inception, the short-circuit voltage is disturbed by transients. The voltage memorized prior to fault inception is therefore used in this situation. If even the steady-state short-circuit voltage (during a close-up fault) is too small for direction determination, an unfaulted voltage is used. This voltage is in theory quadrilateral to the actual short-circuit voltage for both phase-ground loops as well as for phase-phase loops (refer to Figure 2-19). This is taken into account when computing the direction vector by means of a 90 rotation. In Table 2-4 the allocation of the measured values to the six fault loops for the determination of the fault direction is shown.

82

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

Figure 2-19

Direction determination with quadrature voltages

Table 2-4 Loop

Voltage and Current Values for the Determination of Fault Direction Measuring Current (Direction) PIA PIB PIC IA - k0 IN1) IB - k0 IN1) IC - k0 IG1) IA - IB IB - IC IC - IA Actual short-circuit voltage VA-G VB-G VC-G VA-G VB-G VC-G VA - VB VB - VC VC - VA Quadrature voltage

A-G B-G C-G A-G1) B-G1) C-G1) A-B B-C C-A

1)

VB - VC VC - VA VA - VB VB - VC VC - VA VA - VB VB-C - VC-A VC-A - VA-B VA-B - VB-C

k0 = ZG/ZL; if only one phase-ground loop picks up, the ground current IN is taken into account.

If there is neither a present measured voltage nor a memorized voltage available which is sufficient for measuring the direction, the relay selects the Forward direction. In practice this can only occur when the circuit breaker closes onto a de-energized line, and there is a fault on this line (e.g. closing onto a grounded line). Figure 2-20 shows the theoretical steady-state characteristic. In practice, the position of the directional characteristic when using memorized voltages is dependent on both the source impedance as well as the load transferred across the line prior to fault inception. Accordingly the directional characteristic includes a safety margin with respect to the limits of the first quadrant in the RX diagram (Figure 2-20).

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

83

2 Functions

Figure 2-20

Directional characteristic in the R-X-diagram

Since each zone can be set to Forward, Reverse or Non-Directional, different (centrically mirrored) directional characteristics are available for Forward and Reverse. A non-directional zone has no directional characteristic. The entire tripping region applies here. Characteristics of the Directional Measurement The theoretical steady-state directional characteristic shown in Figure 2-20 applies to faulted loop voltages. In the case of quadrature voltages or memorized voltage, the position of the directional characteristic is dependant on both the source impedance as well as the load transferred across the line prior to fault inception. Figure 2-21 shows the directional characteristic using quadrature or memorized voltage as well as taking the source impedance into account (no load transfer). As these voltages are equal to the corresponding generator voltage E and they do not change after fault inception, the directional characteristic is shifted in the impedance diagram by the source impedance ZS1 = E1/I1. For the fault location F1 (Figure 2-21a) the short-circuit location is in the forward direction and the source impedance is in the reverse direction. For all fault locations, right up to the device location (current transformers), a definite Forward decision is made (Figure 2-21b). If the current direction is reversed, the position of the directional characteristic changes abruptly (Figure 221c). A reversed current I2 now flows via the measuring location (current transformer) which is determined by the source impedance ZS2 + ZL. When load is transferred across the line, the directional characteristic may additionally be rotated by the load angle.

84

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

Figure 2-21

Directional characteristic with quadrature or memorized voltages

Determination of Direction in Case of Series-compensated Lines

The directional characteristics and their displacement by the source impedance apply also for lines with series capacitors. If a short-circuit occurs behind the local series capacitors, the short-circuit voltage, however, reverses its direction until the protective spark gap has picked up (see Figure 2-22).

Figure 2-22

Voltage characteristic while a fault occurs after a series capacitor.

a) without pickup of the protective spark gap PSG b) with pickup of the protective spark gap PSG

The distance protection function would thus detect a wrong fault direction. The use of memorized voltages however ensures that the direction is correctly detected (see Figure 2-23a). Since the voltage prior to the fault is used for determining the direction, the zeniths of the directional characteristics in dependence of the source impedance and infeed conditions before the fault are thus far displaced that the capacitor reactance - which is

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

85

2 Functions

always smaller than the series reactance - does not cause the apparent direction reversal (Figure 2-23b). If the short-circuit is located before the capacitor, from the relay location (current transformer) in reverse direction, the zeniths of the directional characteristics are shifted to the other direction (Figure 2-23c). A correct determination of the direction is thus also ensured in this case.

Figure 2-23

Determination of direction in case of series-compensated lines

Assignment to the Polygons and Zone Pickup

The loop impedances calculated according to Subsection 2.2.1 are assigned to the set characteristics of each distance zone. To avoid unstable signals at the boundaries of a polygon, the characteristics have a hysteresis of approximately 5 %. As soon as it has been determined that the fault impedance lies within a polygon, the boundaries are increased by 5 % in all directions. As soon as the fault impedance of any loop is definitely within the operating polygon of a distance zone, the affected loop is designated as picked up. Pickup signals are generated for each zone and converted into phase information, e.g. Dis.Z1 A (internal message) for zone Z1 and phase A. This means that each phase and each zone is provided with separate pickup information. The information is then processed in the zone logic and by additional functions (e.g. pilot protection logic, Section 2.6). The loop information is also converted to phase-segregated information. Further conditions for pickup of a zone are that the direction corresponds to the set direction for the zone, and that the zone is not blocked by the power swing blocking (refer to Section 2.3). Furthermore the distance protection may not be blocked or switched off completely. Figure 2-24 shows these conditions.

86

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

Figure 2-24

Release logic for one zone (example for Z1)

In total, the following zones are available: Independent zones: 1st zone (fast tripping zone) Z1 with X(Z1); R(Z1) -, RG(Z1) -G; delayable with T1-1phase or T1-multi-phase, 2nd zone (backup zone) Z2 with X(Z2); R(Z2) -, RG(Z2) -G; may be delayed by T2-1phase or T2-multi-phase, 3rd zone (backup zone) Z3 with X(Z3); R(Z3) -, RG(Z3) -G; may be delayed by T3 DELAY, 4th zone (backup zone) Z4 with X(Z4); R(Z4) -, RG(Z4) -G; may be delayed by T4 DELAY, 5th zone (backup zone) Z5 with X(Z5)+ (forward) and X(Z5)- (reverse); R(Z5) -, RG(Z5) -G, may be delayed with T5 DELAY. Dependent (controlled) zone: Overreaching zone Z1B with X(Z1B); R(Z1B) -, RG(Z1B) -G; may be delayed by T1B-1phase or T1B-multi-phase. 2.2.2.2 Setting Notes It is recommended to initially create a grading coordination chart for the entire interconnected system. This diagram should reflect the line lengths with their primary reactances X in /per length unit. For the reach of the distance zones, the reactances X are the deciding quantity. The first zone Z1 is usually set to cover 85 % of the protected line without any trip time delay (i.e. T1 = 0.00 s). The protection clears faults in this range without additional time delay, i.e. the tripping time is the relay basic operating time. The tripping time of the higher zones is sequentially increased by one time grading interval. The grading margin must take into account the circuit breaker operating time including the spread of this time, the resetting time of the protection equipment as well as the spread of the protection delay timers. Typical values are 0.2 s to 0.4 s. The reach is selected to cover up to approximately 80% of the zone with the same set time delay on the shortest neighboring feeder.

Grading Coordination Chart

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

87

2 Functions

When using a personal computer and DIGSI to apply the settings, these can be optionally entered as primary or secondary values. If settings are made with secondary quantities, the values derived from the grading coordination chart must be converted to the secondary side of the current and voltage transformers. In general:

Accordingly, the reach for any distance zone can be specified as follows:

where NCT NVT = Current transformer ratio = Transformation ratio of voltage transformer

Calculation Example: 115 kV overhead line with the following data: s (length) R1/s X1/s R0/s X0/s = 35 miles = 0.19 /mile = 0.42 /mile = 0.53 /mile = 1.19 /mile 600 A/5 A 115 kV / 0.115 kV

Current Transformer Voltage transformer

The following line data is calculated: RL = 0.19 /mile 35 miles = 6.65 XL = 0.42 /mile 35 miles = 14.70 For the first zone, a setting of 85 % of the line length should be applied, which results in primary: X1prim = 0.85 XL = 0.85 14.70 = 12.49 or secondary:

Resistance Tolerance

The resistance setting R provides a reserve margin for fault resistance which appears as an additional resistance at the fault location and is added to the impedance of the line conductors. It consists of Arc resistance, the ground distribution resistance of ground points and others. The setting must consider these fault resistances, but should at the same time not be larger than necessary. On long heavily loaded lines,

88

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

the setting may extend into the load impedance range. Fault detection due to overload conditions is then prevented with the load encroachment area. Refer to margin heading Load Area in Subsection 2.2.1. The resistance tolerance may be separately set for the phase-phase faults on the one hand and the phase-ground faults on the other hand. It is therefore possible to allow for a larger fault resistance for ground faults for example. When setting the tolerance it is important on overhead lines to use the fault Arc resistance. In cables on the other hand, an appreciable arc can not exist. On very short cables, care must however be taken that an arc fault on the local cable termination is inside the set resistance of the first zone. The resistance of the line itself does not have to be considered since it is accounted for through the shape of the polygon provided that the line angle is at least as large as the inclination angle Distance Angle (address 1211) of the polygon. Example: A maximum arc voltage of 8kV is assumed for phasephase faults (line data as above). If the minimum primary short-circuit current is assumed to be 1000 A this corresponds to 8 primary. For the resistance setting of the first zone this implies primary:

or secondary:

Only half the arc resistance was applied in the equation, as it is added to the loop impedance and therefore only half the arc resistance appears in the per phase impedance. A separate resistance tolerance can be set for ground faults. An arc resistance of 6 and a tower footing resistance of 12 is assumed. This results in the following primary:

or secondary:

In this case the least favorable condition was assumed, whereby the ground current does not return via the measuring point. If all the ground current, or a portion of the ground current flows via the measuring point, the measured resistance decreases. When there is an infeed from the remote end, the measured resistance may be increased.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

89

2 Functions

Independent Zones Z1 up to Z5

By means of the parameter MODE = Forward or Reverse or Non-Directional each zone can be set (address 1301 Op. mode Z1, 1311 Op. mode Z2, 1321 Op. mode Z3, 1331 Op. mode Z4 and 1341 Op. mode Z5). This allows any combination of graded zones - forward, reverse or non-directional -, for example on transformers, generators or bus couplers. In the fifth zone different reach in the X direction can be set for forward or reverse. Zones that are not required are set Inactive. The values derived from the grading coordination chart are set for each of the required zones. The setting parameters are grouped for each zone. For the first zone these are the parameters R(Z1) - (address 1302) for the R intersection of the polygon applicable to phase-phase faults, X(Z1) (address 1303) for the X intersection (reach), RG(Z1) -G (address 1304) for the R intersection applicable to phase-ground faults and delay time settings. For the first zone, Z1, an additional tilt can be set by means of the parameter in address 1307 Zone Reduction. This setting is required if short circuits with a large fault resistance (e.g. overhead lines without ground wire) are expected on lines with an infeed at both ends and load transfer in the direction of the line (export). Different delay times can be set for single- and multiple-phase faults in the first zone: T1-1phase (address 1305) and T1-multi-phase (address 1306). The first zone is typically set to operate without additional time delay. For the remaining zones the following correspondingly applies: X(Z2) (address 1313), R(Z2) - (address 1312), RG(Z2) -G (address 1314); X(Z3) (address 1323), R(Z3) - (address 1322), RG(Z3) -G (address 1324); X(Z4) (address 1333), R(Z4) - (address 1332), RG(Z4) -G (address 1334); X(Z5)+ (address1343) for forward direction, X(Z5)- (address 1346) for reverse direction, R(Z5) - (address 1342), RG(Z5) -G (address 1344). For the second zone it is also possible to set separate delay times for single- and multiphase faults. In general the delay times are set the same. If stability problems are expected during multiple-phase faults a shorter delay time can be considered for T2multi-phase (address 1316) while a higher setting for single phase faults may be tolerated T2-1phase (address 1315). The zone timers for the remaining zones are set with the parameters T3 DELAY (address 1325), T4 DELAY (address 1335) and T5 DELAY (address 1345). If the device is provided with the capability to trip single-pole, single-pole tripping is then possible in the zones Z1 and Z2. While single-pole tripping usually applies to single-phase faults in Z1 (if the remaining conditions for single-pole tripping are satisfied), this may also be selected for the second zone with address 1317 Trip 1pole Z2. Single pole tripping in zone 2 is only possible if this address is set to YES. The default setting is NO.

90

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

Note For instantaneous tripping (undelayed) in the forward direction, the first zone Z1 should always be used, as only the Z1 and Z1B are guaranteed to trip with the shortest operating time of the device. The further zones should be used sequentially for grading in the forward direction. If instantaneous tripping (undelayed) is required in the reverse direction, the zone Z3 should be used for this purpose, as only this zone is ensures instantaneous pickup with the shortest device operating time for faults in the reverse direction. This setting is also recommended in pilot protection BLOCKING schemes.

Controlled Zone Z1B

The overreaching zone Z1B is a controlled zone. The normal zones Z1 to Z5 are not influenced by Z1B. There is therefore no zone switching, but rather the overreaching zone is activated or deactivated by the corresponding criteria. At address 1351 Op. mode Z1B = Forward, it can also be switched Reverse or Non-Directional. If this element is not required, it is set to Inactive in address 1351. The setting options are similar to those of zone Z1: Address 1352 R(Z1B) -, address 1353 X(Z1B), address 1354 RG(Z1B) -G. The delay times for single-phase and multiple-phase faults can again be set separately: T1B-1phase (address 1355) and T1B-multiphase (address 1356). If parameter Op. mode Z1B is set to Forward or Reverse, a non-directional trip is also possible in case of closure onto a fault if parameter 1232 SOTF zone is set to Z1B undirect. (see also Subsection 2.2.1.3). Zone Z1B is usually used in combination with automatic reclosing and/or pilot protection schemes. It can be activated internally by the pilot protection functions (see also Section 2.6) or the integrated automatic reclosure (if available, see also Section 2.13) or externally by a binary input. It is generally set to at least 120 % of the line length. On three-terminal line applications, it must be set to securely reach beyond the longest line section, even when there is additional infeed. The delay times are set in accordance with the type of application, usually to zero or very small. When used in conjunction with pilot protection comparison schemes, the dependence on the fault detection must be considered (refer to margin heading Distance Protection Prerequisites in Subsection 2.6.10. If the distance protection is used in conjunction with an automatic recloser, it can be determined in address 1357 1st AR -> Z1B which distance zones are released prior to a rapid automatic reclosure. Usually the overreaching zone Z1B is used for the first cycle (1st AR -> Z1B = YES). This may be suppressed by changing the setting of 1st AR -> Z1B to NO. In this case the overreaching zone Z1B is not released before and during the 1st automatic reclose cycle. Zone Z1 is always released. The setting only has an effect when the service condition of an external automatic reclose function is input to the device via binary input >Enable ARzones (No. 383). The zones Z4 and Z5 can be blocked using a binary input message 3619 >BLOCK Z4 Ph-G or 3620 >BLOCK Z5 Ph-G for phase-ground loops. To block these zones permanently for phase-ground loops, said binary inputs must be set to the logic value of 1 via CFC.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

91

2 Functions

2.2.2.3

Settings Addresses which have an appended "A" can only be changed with DIGSI, under "Display Additional Settings". The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding secondary nominal current of the current transformer.

Addr. 1301

Parameter Op. mode Z1

Setting Options Forward Reverse Non-Directional Inactive

Default Setting Forward

Comments Operating mode Z1

1302

R(Z1) -

1A 5A

0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0 .. 45 Forward Reverse Non-Directional Inactive

1.250 0.250 2.500 0.500 2.500 0.500 0.00 sec 0.00 sec 0 Forward

R(Z1), Resistance for phph-faults X(Z1), Reactance

1303

X(Z1)

1A 5A

1304

RG(Z1) -G

1A 5A

RG(Z1), Resistance for ph-gnd faults T1-1phase, delay for single phase faults T1multi-ph, delay for multi phase faults Zone Reduction Angle (load compensation) Operating mode Z2

1305 1306 1307 1311

T1-1phase T1-multi-phase Zone Reduction Op. mode Z2

1312

R(Z2) -

1A 5A

0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; NO YES Forward Reverse Non-Directional Inactive

2.500 0.500 5.000 1.000 5.000 1.000 0.30 sec 0.30 sec NO Reverse

R(Z2), Resistance for phph-faults X(Z2), Reactance

1313

X(Z2)

1A 5A

1314

RG(Z2) -G

1A 5A

RG(Z2), Resistance for ph-gnd faults T2-1phase, delay for single phase faults T2multi-ph, delay for multi phase faults Single pole trip for faults in Z2 Operating mode Z3

1315 1316 1317A 1321

T2-1phase T2-multi-phase Trip 1pole Z2 Op. mode Z3

1322

R(Z3) -

1A 5A

0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000

5.000 1.000

R(Z3), Resistance for phph-faults

92

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

Addr. 1323 X(Z3)

Parameter

C 1A 5A

Setting Options 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; Forward Reverse Non-Directional Inactive

Default Setting 10.000 2.000 10.000 2.000 0.60 sec Non-Directional

Comments X(Z3), Reactance

1324

RG(Z3) -G

1A 5A

RG(Z3), Resistance for ph-gnd faults T3 delay Operating mode Z4

1325 1331

T3 DELAY Op. mode Z4

1332

R(Z4) -

1A 5A

0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; Forward Reverse Non-Directional Inactive

12.000 2.400 12.000 2.400 12.000 2.400 0.90 sec Inactive

R(Z4), Resistance for phph-faults X(Z4), Reactance

1333

X(Z4)

1A 5A

1334

RG(Z4) -G

1A 5A

RG(Z4), Resistance for ph-gnd faults T4 delay Operating mode Z5

1335 1341

T4 DELAY Op. mode Z5

1342

R(Z5) -

1A 5A

0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.00 .. 30.00 sec;

12.000 2.400 12.000 2.400 12.000 2.400 0.90 sec 4.000 0.800 Forward

R(Z5), Resistance for phph-faults X(Z5)+, Reactance for Forward direction RG(Z5), Resistance for ph-gnd faults T5 delay X(Z5)-, Reactance for Reverse direction Operating mode Z1B (overrreach zone)

1343

X(Z5)+

1A 5A

1344

RG(Z5) -G

1A 5A

1345 1346

T5 DELAY X(Z5)1A 5A

0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 Forward Reverse Non-Directional Inactive

1351

Op. mode Z1B

1352

R(Z1B) -

1A 5A

0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.00 .. 30.00 sec;

1.500 0.300 3.000 0.600 3.000 0.600 0.00 sec

R(Z1B), Resistance for phph-faults X(Z1B), Reactance

1353

X(Z1B)

1A 5A

1354

RG(Z1B) -G

1A 5A

RG(Z1B), Resistance for ph-gnd faults T1B-1phase, delay for single ph. faults

1355

T1B-1phase

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

93

2 Functions

Addr. 1356 1357

Parameter T1B-multi-phase 1st AR -> Z1B

Setting Options 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; NO YES

Default Setting 0.00 sec YES

Comments T1B-multi-ph, delay for multi ph. faults Z1B enabled before 1st AR (int. or ext.)

2.2.3

Distance Protection with MHO Characteristic 21 (optional)

The 7SA522 may optionally be provided with polygonal tripping characteristic or with a MHO characteristic, or with both depending on which version was ordered. If both characteristics are available, they may be selected separately for phase-phase loops and phase-ground loops. If only the polygonal tripping characteristic is used, please read Section 2.2.2.

2.2.3.1

Functional Description One MHO circle is defined for each distance zone, which represents the tripping characteristic of the corresponding zone. In total there are five independent and one additional controlled zone for each fault impedance loop. The basic shape of a MHO circle for one zone is shown in Figure 2-25 as an example. The MHO circle is defined by the line of its diameter which intersects the origin of the coordinate system and the magnitude of the diameter which corresponds to the impedance Zr which determines the reach, and by the angle of inclination. The angle of inclination is set in address 1211 Distance Angle and corresponds normally to the line angle Line. A load trapezoid with the setting RLoad and Load may be used to cut the area of the load impedance out of the circle. The reach Zr may be separately set for each zone; the inclination angle Dist as well as the load impedance parameters RLoad, and Load are common to all zones. As the circle intersects the origin of the coordinate system, a separate directional characteristic is not required.

Basic Circle

94

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

Figure 2-25

Basic shape of an MHO characteristic

Polarized MHO Circle

As is the case with all characteristics that pass through the origin of the coordinate system, the MHO circle boundary around the origin itself is also not defined as the measured voltage is zero or too small to be evaluated in this case. For this reason, the MHO circle is polarized. The polarization determines the lower zenith of the circle, i.e. the lower intersection of the diameter line with the circle. The upper zenith which is determined by the reach setting Zr remains unchanged. Immediately after fault inception, the short-circuit voltage is disturbed by transients; the voltage memorized prior to fault inception is therefore used for polarization. This causes a displacement of the lower zenith by an impedance corresponding to the memorized voltage (refer to Figure 226). When the memorized short-circuit voltage is too small, an unfaulted voltage is used. In theory this voltage is perpendicular to the voltage of the faulted loop for both phase-ground loops as well as phase-phase loops. This is taken into account by the calculation by means of a 90 rotation. The unfaulted loop voltages also cause a displacement of the lower zenith of the MHO circle.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

95

2 Functions

Figure 2-26

Polarized MHO circle

Characteristics of the MHO Circle

As the quadrature or memorized voltage (without load transfer) equals the corresponding generator voltage E and does not change after fault inception (refer also to Figure 2-27), the lower zenith is shifted in the impedance diagram by the polarizing quantity kZV1 = kE1/I1. The upper zenith is still defined by the setting value Zr. For the fault location F1 (Figure 2-27a) the short-circuit location is in the forward direction and the source impedance is in the reverse direction. All fault locations, right up to the device mounting location (current transformers) are clearly inside the MHO circle (Figure 2-27b). If the current is reversed, the zenith of the circle diameter changes abruptly (Figure 2-27c). A reversed current I2 now flows via the measuring location (current transformer) which is determined by the source impedance ZS2 + ZL. The zenith Zr remains unchanged; it now is the lower boundary of the circle diameter. In conjunction with load transport via the line, the zenith vector may additionally be rotated by the load angle.

96

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

Figure 2-27

Polarized MHO circle with quadrature or memorized voltages

Selecting Polarization

False directional decisions may be made (tripping or blocking in spite of a reverse fault) in short lines the zone reach of which must be very small and in small loop voltages the phase angle comparison of which becomes inaccurate between difference voltage and loop voltage. If phase angle comparison is performed using a polarization voltage consisting of a loop voltage component recorded before the fault and a component of the current loop voltage, these problems may be avoided. The following equation shows the polarization voltage VP for a Ph-G loop: VP = (1 kPre) VPh-G + kPre VPh-GMemorized The evaluation (factor kPre) of the prefault voltage may be set separately for Ph-G and Ph-Ph loops. In general the factor is set to 15 %. The memory polarization is only performed if the RMS value of the corresponding memorized voltage for Ph-G loops is greater than a 40 % of the nominal voltage VNom (address 204) and greater than a 70 % of VNom for Ph-Ph loops. If there is no prefault voltage due to a sequential fault or energization onto a fault, the memorized voltage can only be used for a limited time. For single-pole faults and twopole faults without ground path component a voltage which is not involved in the fault may be used for polarization. This voltage is rotated by 90 in comparison with the fault-accurate voltage (cross polarization). The polarization voltage VP is a mixed voltage which consists of the valid voltage and the corresponding unfaulted voltages. The following equation shows the polarization voltage VP for a Ph-G loop: VP = (1 kCross) VPh-G + kCross VPh-GUnfaulted The cross polarization is used if there is no memorized voltage available. The evaluation (factor kCross) of the voltage may be set separately for Ph-G and Ph-Ph loops. In general the factor is set to 15 %.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

97

2 Functions

Note When switching onto a three-pole fault with the MHO circle, there will be no voltage in the memory or unfaulted loop voltage available. To ensure fault clearance when switching onto three-pole close-up faults, please make sure that in conjunction with the configured MHO characteristic the high-current switch-onto-fault protection (SOTF) 50HS is always enabled.

Assignment to Tripping Zones and Zone Pickup

The assignment of measured values to the tripping zones of the MHO circle is done for each zone by determining the angles between two difference phasors Z1 and Z2 (Figure 2-28). These phasors result from the difference between the two zeniths of the circle diameter and the fault impedance. The zenith Zr corresponds to the set value for the zone under consideration (Zr and MHO as shown in Figure 2-25), the zenith kZV corresponds to the polarizing magnitude. Therefore the difference phasors are Z1 = ZF Zr Z2 = ZF k ZS In the limiting case, ZF is located on the perimeter of the circle. In this case the angle between the two difference phasors is 90 (Thales-theorem). Inside the circle the angle is greater than 90 and outside the circle it is less than 90.

Figure 2-28

Phasor diagram of the MHO circle measured values

98

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

For each distance zone a MHO circle can be defined by means of the parameter Zr. For each zone it may also be determined whether it operates forwards or reverse. In reverse direction the MHO characteristic is mirrored in the origin of the coordinate system. As soon as the fault impedance of any loop is confidently measured inside the MHO circle of a distance zone, the affected loop is designated as picked up. The loop information is also converted to phase-segregated information. Further conditions for the pickup of a zone is that the zone may not be blocked by the power swing blocking. Furthermore, the distance protection may not be blocked or switched off completely. Figure 2-29 shows these conditions. The zones and phases of such a valid pickup, e.g. Dis. Z1 A for zone Z1 and phase A are processed by the zone logic and the supplementary functions (e.g. pilot protection logic).

Figure 2-29 *)

Release logic of a zone (example for Z1)

forward and reverse only affect the measured quantities and not the logic

In total, the following zones are available: Independent zones: 1st zone (fast tripping zone) Z1 with ZR(Z1); may be delayed by T1-1phase and T1-multi-phase, 2nd zone (backup zone) Z2 with ZR(Z2); may be delayed by T2-1phase and T2multi-phase, 3rd zone (backup zone) Z3 with ZR(Z3); may be delayed by T3 DELAY, 4th zone (backup zone) Z4 with ZR(Z4); may be delayed by T4 DELAY, 5th zone (backup zone) Z5 with ZR(Z5); may be delayed by T5 DELAY. Dependent (controlled) zone: Overreaching zone Z1B with ZR(Z1B); may be delayed by T1B-1phase and / or T1B-multi-phase. 2.2.3.2 General Setting Notes The function parameters for the MHO circle only apply if during the configuration of the scope of functions the MHO circle selected for phase-phase measurement (address 112) and/or phase-ground measurement (address 113)). It is recommended to initially create a grading coordination chart for the entire interconnected system. This diagram should reflect the line lengths with their primary im-

Grading Coordination Chart

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

99

2 Functions

pedances Z in /mile. For the reach of the distance zones, the impedances Z are the deciding quantities. The first zone Z1 is usually set to cover 85 % of the protected line without any trip time delay (i.e. T1 = 0.00 s). The protection clears faults in this range without additional time delay, i.e. the tripping time is the relay basic operating time. The tripping time of the higher zones is sequentially increased by one time grading interval. The grading margin must take into account the circuit breaker operating time including the spread of this time, the resetting time of the protection equipment as well as the spread of the protection delay timers. Typical values are 0.2 s to 0.4 s. The reach is selected to cover up to approximately 80 % of the zone with the same set time delay on the shortest neighboring feeder. When using a personal computer and DIGSI to apply the settings, these can be optionally entered as primary or secondary values. In the case of parameterization with secondary quantities, the values derived from the grading coordination chart must be converted to the secondary side of the current and voltage transformers. In general:

Accordingly, the reach for any distance zone can be specified as follows:

with NCT NVT = Current transformer ratio = Transformation ratio of voltage transformer

On long, heavily loaded lines, the MHO characteristic may extend into the load impedance range. This is of no consequence as the pickup by overload is prevented by the encroachment area. Refer to margin heading Load Area in Section 2.2.1. Calculation Example: 115 kV overhead line with the following data: s (length) R1/s X1/s R0/s X0/s = 35 miles = 0.19 /mile = 0.42 /mile = 0.53 /mile = 1.19 /mile 600 A / 5 A 115 kV / 0.115 kV

Current Transformer Voltage Transformer

The following line data is calculated: RL = 0.19 /mile 35 mile = 6.65 XL = 0.42 /mile 35 mile = 14.70

100

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

For the first zone, a setting of 85 % of the line length should be applied, which results in primary: X1prim = 0.85 XL = 0.85 14.70 = 12.49 or secondary:

Independent Zones Z1 up to Z5

Each zone can be set using the parameter MODE Forward or Reverse (address 1401 Op. mode Z1, 1411 Op. mode Z2, 1421 Op. mode Z3, 1431 Op. mode Z4 and 1441 Op. mode Z5). This allows any combination of forward or reverse graded zones. Zones that are not required, are set Inactive. The values derived from the grading coordination chart are set for each of the required zones. The setting parameters are grouped for each zone. For the first zone these are the parameters ZR(Z1) (address 1402) specifying the impedance of the upper zenith of the MHO circle from the origin (reach), as well as the relevant delay time settings. For the first zone the delay times for single-phase and multiple-phase faults can be set separately: T1-1phase (address 1305) and T1-multi-phase (address 1306). The first zone is typically set to operate without additional time delay. For the remaining zones the following correspondingly applies: ZR(Z2) (address 1412); ZR(Z3) (address 1422); ZR(Z4) (address 1432); ZR(Z5) (address 1442); For the second zone it is also possible to set separate delay times for single- and multiphase faults. In general the delay times are set the same. If stability problems are expected during multiple-phase faults a shorter delay time can be considered for T2multi-phase (address 1316) while a higher setting for single phase faults may be tolerated T2-1phase (address 1315). The zone timers for the remaining zones are set with the parameters T3 DELAY (address 1325), T4 DELAY (address 1335) and T5 DELAY (address 1345). If the device is provided with the capability to trip single-pole, single-pole tripping is then possible in the zones Z1 and Z2. While single-pole tripping usually applies to single-phase faults in Z1 (if the remaining conditions for single-pole tripping are satisfied), this may also be selected for the second zone with address 1317 Trip 1pole Z2. Single pole tripping in zone 2 is only possible if this address is set to Yes. The presetting is No.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

101

2 Functions

Note For instantaneous tripping (undelayed) in the forward direction, the first zone Z1 should always be used, as only the Z1 and Z1B are guaranteed to trip with the shortest operating time of the device. The further zones should be used sequentially for grading in the forward direction. If instantaneous tripping (undelayed) is required in the reverse direction, the zone Z3 should be used for this purpose, as only this zone is ensures instantaneous pickup with the shortest device operating time for faults in the reverse direction. This setting is also recommended in pilot protection BLOCKING schemes. With binary input indications 3619 >BLOCK Z4 Ph-G and 3620 >BLOCK Z5 PhG zones Z4 and Z5 for phase-ground loops may be blocked. To block these zones permanently for phase-ground loops, said binary inputs must be set to the logic value of 1 via CFC. Controlled Zone Z1B The overreaching zone Z1B is a controlled zone. The normal zones Z1 to Z5 are not influenced by Z1B. There is therefore no zone switching, but rather the overreaching zone is activated or deactivated by the corresponding criteria. It can also be set 1451 = Op. mode Z1B at address Forward or Reverse. If this element is not required, it is set to Inactive in address 1451. The setting options are similar to those of zone Z1: Address 1452 ZR(Z1B). The delay times for single-phase and multiple-phase faults can again be set separately: T1B-1phase (address 1355) and T1B-multiphase (address 1356). Zone Z1B is usually used in combination with automatic reclosure and/or pilot protection schemes. It can be activated internally by the pilot protection functions (see also Section 2.6) or the integrated automatic reclosure (if available, see also Section 2.13) or externally by a binary input. It is generally set to at least 120 % of the line length. On three-terminal line applications, it must be set to securely reach beyond the longest line section, even when there is additional infeed. The delay times are set in accordance with the type of application, usually to zero or a very small delay. When used in conjunction with pilot protection comparison schemes, the dependence on the fault detection must be considered (refer to margin heading Distance Protection Prerequisites in Subsection 2.6.10. If the distance protection is used in conjunction with an automatic recloser, it may be determined in address 1357 1st AR -> Z1B which distance zones are released prior to a rapid automatic reclosure. Usually the overreaching zone Z1B is used for the first cycle (1st AR -> Z1B = YES). This may be suppressed by changing the setting of 1st AR -> Z1B to NO. In this case the overreaching zone Z1B is not released before and during the 1st automatic reclose cycle. Zone Z1 is always released. The setting only has an effect when the service condition of an external automatic reclose function is input to the device via binary input >Enable ARzones (No. 383). Polarization The degree of polarization with a fault-accurate memory voltage and be set in address 1471 Mem.Polariz.PhG for Ph-G loops, and in address 1473 Mem.Polariz.P-P for Ph-Ph loops. With an unfaulted valid voltage (cross-polarization), the evaluation factor can be set separately for Ph-G and Ph-Ph in address 1472 CrossPolarizPhG and 1474 CrossPolarizP-P. This setting can only be changed via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. These parameters have an impact on the expansion of the circles depending on the source impedance. If the parameter is set to zero, the basic circle is displayed without expansion.

102

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

2.2.3.3

Settings Addresses which have an appended "A" can only be changed with DIGSI, under "Display Additional Settings". The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding secondary nominal current of the current transformer.

Addr. 1305 1306 1315 1316 1317A 1325 1335 1345 1355 1356 1357 1401

Parameter T1-1phase T1-multi-phase T2-1phase T2-multi-phase Trip 1pole Z2 T3 DELAY T4 DELAY T5 DELAY T1B-1phase T1B-multi-phase 1st AR -> Z1B Op. mode Z1

Setting Options 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; NO YES 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; NO YES Forward Reverse Inactive

Default Setting 0.00 sec 0.00 sec 0.30 sec 0.30 sec NO 0.60 sec 0.90 sec 0.90 sec 0.00 sec 0.00 sec YES Forward

Comments T1-1phase, delay for single phase faults T1multi-ph, delay for multi phase faults T2-1phase, delay for single phase faults T2multi-ph, delay for multi phase faults Single pole trip for faults in Z2 T3 delay T4 delay T5 delay T1B-1phase, delay for single ph. faults T1B-multi-ph, delay for multi ph. faults Z1B enabled before 1st AR (int. or ext.) Operating mode Z1

1402

ZR(Z1)

1A 5A

0.050 .. 200.000 0.010 .. 40.000 Forward Reverse Inactive

2.500 0.500 Forward

ZR(Z1), Impedance Reach

1411

Op. mode Z2

Operating mode Z2

1412

ZR(Z2)

1A 5A

0.050 .. 200.000 0.010 .. 40.000 Forward Reverse Inactive

5.000 1.000 Reverse

ZR(Z2), Impedance Reach

1421

Op. mode Z3

Operating mode Z3

1422

ZR(Z3)

1A 5A

0.050 .. 200.000 0.010 .. 40.000 Forward Reverse Inactive

5.000 1.000 Forward

ZR(Z3), Impedance Reach

1431

Op. mode Z4

Operating mode Z4

1432

ZR(Z4)

1A 5A

0.050 .. 200.000 0.010 .. 40.000

10.000 2.000

ZR(Z4), Impedance Reach

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

103

2 Functions

Addr. 1441

Parameter Op. mode Z5

Setting Options Forward Reverse Inactive

Default Setting Inactive

Comments Operating mode Z5

1442

ZR(Z5)

1A 5A

0.050 .. 200.000 0.010 .. 40.000 Forward Reverse Inactive

10.000 2.000 Forward

ZR(Z5), Impedance Reach

1451

Op. mode Z1B

Operating mode Z1B (extended zone) ZR(Z1B), Impedance Reach Voltagememory polarization (phase-gnd) Cross polarization (phasegnd) Voltagememory polarization (phase-phase) Cross polarization (phasephase)

1452

ZR(Z1B)

1A 5A

0.050 .. 200.000 0.010 .. 40.000 0.0 .. 100.0 % 0.0 .. 100.0 % 0.0 .. 100.0 % 0.0 .. 100.0 %

3.000 0.600 15.0 % 15.0 % 15.0 % 15.0 %

1471A 1472A 1473A 1474A

Mem.Polariz.PhG CrossPolarizPhG Mem.Polariz.P-P CrossPolarizP-P

2.2.4
2.2.4.1

Tripping Logic of the Distance Protection

Functional Description As soon as any one of the distance zones has determined with certainty that the fault is inside its tripping range, the signal 21 PICKUP (general fault detection of the distance protection) is generated. This signal is alarmed and made available for the initialization of internal and external supplementary functions. (e.g. pilot protection signal transmission, automatic reclosure). As was mentioned in the description of the measuring technique, each distance zone generates an output signal which is associated with the zone and the affected phase. The zone logic combines these zone fault detections with possible further internal and external signals. The delay times of the distance zones can be started either together by a general pickup of the distance protection function or individually upon entry into the corresponding distance zone. Parameter 21 Start Timers (address 1210) is set to on Dis. Pickup by default. This setting ensures that all delay times continue even when changing the fault type or the measuring loop selection, for example when an intermediate infeed is switched off. This setting is also preferable if other distance protection relays in the network employ this time start scheme. If particular importance is attached to the time grading, for example when the fault location changes from zone Z3 to zone Z2, the setting on Zone Pickup should be selected. The simplified zone logic is shown in Figure 2-30 using for zone 1, Figure 2-31 for zone 2 and Figure 2-32 for Zone Z3. Zones Z4 and Z5 function according to Figure 2-33. In the case of zones Z1, Z2 and Z1B single-pole tripping is possible for single-phase faults, if the device version includes the single-pole tripping option. Therefore the event output in these cases is provided for each pole. Different trip delay times can be

General Device Pickup

Zone Logic of the Independent Zones Z1 up to Z5

104

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

set for single-phase and multiple-phase faults in these zones. For multiple-phase faults and faults in the other zones, the tripping is always three pole.

Note Binary input >1p Trip Perm (No. 381) must be activated to achieve single-pole tripping. The internal automatic reclosing function may also grant the single-pole permission. The binary input is usually controlled by an external automatic reclosure device. The trip delay times of the zones (except for Z1 which is usually always set without delay) can be bypassed. The grading times are started either via zone pickup or general pickup of the distance protection function. The undelayed release results from the line energization logic, which may be externally initiated via the circuit breaker close signal derived from the circuit breaker control switch or from an internal line energization detection. Zones Z4 and Z5 may be blocked by external criteria (No. 3617 >BLOCK Z4-Trip, No. 3618 >BLOCK Z5-Trip).

Figure 2-30

Tripping logic for the 1st zone

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

105

2 Functions

Figure 2-31

Tripping logic for the 2nd zone

Figure 2-32

Tripping logic for the 3rd zone

Figure 2-33

Tripping logic for the 4th and 5th zone, shown for Z4

106

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

Zone Logic of the Controlled Zone Z1B

The controlled zone Z1B is usually applied as an overreaching zone. The logic is shown in Figure 2-34. It may be activated via various internal and external functions. The binary inputs for external activation of Z1B of the distance protection are >ENABLE Z1B and >Enable ARzones. The former can for example be from an external pilot protection device, and only affects Z1B of the distance protection. The latter can also be controlled e.g. by an external automatic recloser. In addition, it is possible to use the zone Z1B as a rapid autoclosure element that only operates for single-pole faults, if for example only single-pole automatic reclose cycles are executed. It is possible for the 7SA522 to trip single-pole during two-phase faults without groundconnection in the overreaching zone when single-pole automatic reclosure is used. Because the device has an integrated pilot protection function, release signals from this function may activate the zone Z1B, provided that the internal pilot protection signal transmission function has been configured to one of the available techniques with parameter 121 85-21 PilotDist i.e., the function has not been set to Disabled.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

107

2 Functions

Figure 2-34

Tripping logic for the controlled zone Z1B

108

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.2 Distance Protection 21

Tripping Logic

The output signals generated by the individual zones are logically connected to the output signals 21 TRIP, 21 TRIP 1p. A, 21 TRIP 1p. B, 21 TRIP 1p. C, 21 TRIP ABC in the actual tripping logic. The single-pole information implies that tripping will take place single-pole only. Furthermore, the zone that initiated the tripping is identified; if single-pole tripping is possible, it is also alarmed, as shown in the zone logic diagrams (Figures 2-30 up to 2-34). The actual generation of the commands for the tripping (output) relay is executed within the tripping logic of the entire device.

2.2.4.2

Setting Notes The trip delay times of the distance elements and intervention options which are also processed in the tripping logic of the distance protection were already considered with the zone settings. Further setting options which affect the tripping are described as part of the tripping logic of the device.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

109

2 Functions

2.3

Power Swing Detection 68 (optional)

The 7SA522 has an integrated power swing supplement which allows both trip blocking by the distance protection during power swings (power swing blocking) and the calculated tripping during unstable power swings (out-of-step tripping). To avoid uncontrolled tripping, the distance protection devices are supplemented with power swing blocking functions. At specific locations in the system, out-of-step tripping devices are also applied to split the system into islanded networks at selected locations, when system stability (synchronism) is lost due to severe (unstable) power swings.

2.3.1

Function Description
After a dynamic event such as load jump, short-circuit, reclose dead time or switching operations it is possible that the generators must realign in an oscillatory manner, with the new load balance of the system. The distance protection registers large transient currents during a power swing and low voltages (Figure 2-35). Low voltages with simultaneous high currents imply small impedances, which lead to distance protection tripping. In expansive networks with large transferred power, even the stability of the energy transfer could be endangered by such power swings.

Figure 2-35

Power swing

System power swings are three phase symmetrical processes. Therefore in general a certain degree of symmetry may be assumed. System power swings may also occur during unsymmetrical processes, e.g. during two-phase faults or during single-pole dead times. The power swing detection in the 7SA522 is therefore based on three measuring systems. A dedicated measuring system is available for each phase. Should a fault occur after a power swing is detected, the power swing block will be cancelled in the affected phases thus allowing distance protection tripping. To detect a power swing, the rate of change of the impedance vectors is measured. The message is triggered when the impedance vector enters the power swing measuring range PPOL (refer to Figure 2-36) and the other criteria of power swing detection are met. The fault detection range APOL is made up of the largest set values for R and X (polygon characteristic) or of the largest set value for ZR (MHO characteristic) of all the activated zones. The power swing zone has a minimum distance ZDiff of 5 (at INom = 1 A) or 1 (at INom = 5 A) in all directions from the fault detection zone. In the event of a short-circuit (1), the impedance vector abruptly changes from the load condition into this fault detection range. However, in the event of a power swing, the apparent impedance vector initially enters the power swing range PPOL and only later enters the fault detection range APOL (2). It is also possible that a power swing vector

110

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.3 Power Swing Detection 68 (optional)

will enter the area of the power swing range and leave it again without coming into contact with the fault detection range (3). If the vector enters the power swing polygon and passes through it leaving on the opposite side, then the sections of the network seen from the relay location have lost synchronism (4): the power transfer is unstable.

Figure 2-36

Pickup characteristic of the power swing detection for a polygon.

The same applies to the MHO circle characteristic (refer to Figure 2-37). The power swing circle also has a distance ZDiff of 5 (at INom = 1 A) or 1 (at INom = 5 A) from the largest zone circle. If one or more reversed zones are set, impedance (Zdiff) is maintained for each zone. The rate of change of the 3 impedance vectors is monitored in 1/4 cycle intervals.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

111

2 Functions

Figure 2-37

Pickup characteristic of the power swing detection for the MHO characteristic

Figure 2-38

Impedance vector during power swing

Trajectory Continuity and Monotony

The rate of change of the impedance vector is very important for the differentiation between faults and power swing conditions. This is shown in Figure 2-38. During the power swing the measured impedance from one sample to the next has a defined change in R and X, referred to as dR(k) and dX(k). Important is also the fact that from one sample to the next the difference is small: i.e. |dR(k) dR(k+1)| < threshold. During a fault entry there is a rapid change that will not cause the power swing detection to pick up.

112

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.3 Power Swing Detection 68 (optional)

Trajectory Stability

When the impedance vector enters the impedance characteristic during a power swing this is in a point of the elliptical curve that corresponds to steady state instability. For release of the power swing detection a further criterion is therefore used. In Figure 2-39 the range for steady state instability is shown. This range is detected in 7SA522. This is done by calculating the center of the ellipse and checking if the actual measured X value is less than this value.

Figure 2-39

Steady state instability range

Trajectory Symmetry

In addition to these measures, a comparison of the three phases is done to ensure that they are symmetrical. During a power swing condition in the single pole open condition, only two of the three phases will have an impedance trajectory. In this case only these 2 remaining phase trajectories are checked to ensure that they are symmetrical. To ensure stable and secure operation of the power swing detection without risking unwanted power swing blocking during power system faults, a logical combination of a number of measuring criteria are used.

Power Swing Detection

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

113

2 Functions

Figure 2-40

Logic diagram of power swing detection

In Figure 2-40 a simplified logic diagram for the power swing function is given. This measurement is done on a per phase basis although 2-40 only shows the logic for one phase. Before a power swing detected signal is generated, the measured impedance must be inside the power swing polygon (PPOL). In the following 4 measuring criteria are listed: Trajectory continuity The calculated R and X values must create a constant line. There must be no jump from one measured value to the next. Refer to Figure 2-38. The impedance trajectory must initially not change Rdirection. Refer to Figure 2-38. The trajectory of each phase is evaluated. If no fault is present these 3 trajectories must be symmetrical. During single pole open conditions the remaining 2 trajectories must be symmetrical. When the impedance trajectory enters the PPOL during a swing condition, the system must be in the area of steady state instability. In Figure 2-39 this corresponds to the lower half of the circle.

Trajectory monotony Trajectory symmetry

Trajectory stability

All these conditions must be true for the generation of a power swing block condition. Once the power swing block condition is set it will remain picked up until the impedance vector leaves the power swing polygon (PPOL). This is unless a fault occurs during this phase. The detection of a jump in the trajectory or asymmetry of the trajectories will reset the power swing blocking condition. The power swing detection can be blocked via a binary input.

114

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.3 Power Swing Detection 68 (optional)

Power Swing Blocking

The power swing blocking affects the distance protection. If the criteria for power swing detection have been fulfilled in at least one phase, the following reactions are possible in relation to the power swing blocking function (set in address 2002 P/S Op. mode): Blocking of all zones (All zones block): All zones of the distance protection are blocked during a power swing. Blocking of the first zone only (Z1/Z1B block): The first zone (Z1) and the overreaching zone (Z1B) are blocked during a power swing. Faults in other zones are tripped with the associated grading time. Blocking of the higher zone only (Z2 to Z5 block): The higher zones (Z2 to Z5) are blocked during a power swing. Only the first and the overreaching zone (Z1 and Z1B) remain active. Blocking of the first two zones only (Z1,Z1B,Z2 block): The first and second zone (Z1 and Z2) and the overreaching zone (Z1B) are blocked during a power swing. The higher zones Z3 to Z5 remain active. Only the phases in the configured zones are blocked in which power swings were detected. The associated measures apply to all phases when power swing has been detected. They are active for as long as the measured impedance vector is inside the power swing range PPOL, or if an abrupt change of the associated impedance vector no longer satisfies the power swing criteria. But the influence of the power swing block on the distance protection relay will be prolonged for a defined time (address 2007 68 Trip DELAY). Thus transient states (e.g. switching operations) are compensated, which occur during a power swing and cause a jump in the measured quantities. It is possible with No. 4160 >68 P/Swing BLK to block the power swing detection via a binary input.

Out-of-Step Tripping

If out-of-step tripping in the event of an unstable power swing is desired, the parameter 68T P/S trip = YES is set. If the criteria for power swing detection are satisfied, the distance protection is initially blocked according to the configured program for power swing blocking, to avoid tripping by the distance protection. When the impedance vectors identified by the power swing detection exit the power swing characteristic PPOL, the sign of the R components in the vectors are checked to see if they are the same on exiting and entering the pickup polygon. If this is the case, the power swing process is inclined to stabilize. Otherwise, the vector passed through the power swing characteristic (loss of synchronism, case (4) in Figure 2-36). Stable power transmission is then no longer possible. . The device outputs an alarm to that effect (No. 4163 68 P/Swing unst), provided that the parameter in address 2006 68T P/S trip is set to NO. The alarm No. 4163 68 P/Swing unst is a pulse with a duration of approx. 50 ms, which can also be processed further via output relay, e.g. for a cycle counter or a pulse counter. Once instability is detected, the device issues a three-pole trip command, thereby isolating the two system segments from each other. Power swing tripping is alarmed. As the operating range of the power swing supplement depends on the distance protection settings, the power swing tripping can only be active when the distance protection has been activated.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

115

2 Functions

2.3.2

Setting Notes
The power swing supplement is only active if it has been set to 68 Power Swing = Enabled (address 120) during the configuration. For 68 Power Swing no other parameters have to be set. The four possible programs may be set in address 2002 P/S Op. mode, as described in Subsection 2.3: All zones block, Z1/Z1B block, Z2 to Z5 block or Z1,Z1B,Z2 block. Additionally the tripping function for unstable oscillations (out-of-step condition, loss of system synchronism) can be set with parameter 68T P/S trip (address 2006), which should be set to YES if required (presetting is NO). In the event of power swing tripping it is recommended to set P/S Op. mode = All zones block for the power swing blocking, to avoid premature tripping by the distance protection. The tripping delay at least effective and following a power swing blocking can be set at address 2007 68 Trip DELAY.

2.3.3
Addr. 2002

Settings
Parameter P/S Op. mode Setting Options All zones block Z1/Z1B block Z2 to Z5 block Z1,Z1B,Z2 block NO YES 0.08 .. 5.00 sec; 0 Default Setting All zones block Comments Power Swing Operating mode

2006 2007

68T P/S trip 68 Trip DELAY

NO 0.08 sec

68T Power swing trip 68 Trip delay after Power Swing Blocking

2.3.4
No. 4160 4163 4164 4166 4167 4168 4169

Information List
Information >68 P/Swing BLK 68 P/Swing unst 68 Power Swing 68T Pswing TRIP 68 P/Swing A 68 P/Swing B 68 P/Swing C Type of Information SP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT Comments >BLOCK 68 Power Swing detection 68 Power Swing unstable 68 Power Swing detected 68T Power Swing TRIP command 68 Power Swing detected, Phase A 68 Power Swing detected, Phase B 68 Power Swing detected, Phase C

116

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.4 Protection Data Interfaces and Communication Topology (optional)

2.4

Protection Data Interfaces and Communication Topology (optional)

When using pilot protection schemes to achieve 100 % instantaneous protection (Section 2.6), digital communication channels can be used for data transmission between the devices. In addition to the protection data, other data can be transmitted and thus be made available at the line ends. This data includes synchronization and topology data, as well as remote trip signals, remote annunciation signals and measured values. The topology of the protection data communication system is constituted by the allocation of devices to the ends of the protected object and by the allocation of communication paths to the protection data interfaces of the devices.

2.4.1

Function Description
A standard line layout with two ends requires one protection data interface for each device. The protection data interface is named PDI (see also Figure 2-41241). The corresponding protection data interface must be set to Enabled during configuration of the scope of functions (refer to Section 2.1.1). In addition, indices must be assigned to the devices (refer to Section 2.4.2 under margin heading Communication Topology). Using two 7SA522 relays it is possible to connect both protection data interfaces with each other provided the two devices are equipped with two protection data interfaces each the necessary means for transmission are available. This yields 100% redundancy as for the transmission channel (Figure 2422-42). The devices autonomously search for the fastest communication link. If this link fails, the devices automatically switch over to the other link which is used until the faster one is healthy again.

Communication Topology

Figure 2-41

Distance protection for two ends with two 7SA522 devices with one protection data interface each (transmitter/ receiver)

Figure 2-42

Distance protection for two ends with two 7SA522 devices with two protection data interface each (transmitter/ receiver)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

117

2 Functions

Using three ends, at least one 7SA522 device with two protection data interfaces is required. Thus a communication chain can be formed. The number of devices (address 147 NUMBER OF RELAY) must correspond to the number of ends of the protected object. The line in Figure 2-43, for instance, has three ends and three devices. It is limited by three current transformer sets. The communication chain begins at the device with index 1 at its protection data interface P. INTERFACE 1, continues to the device with index 3 at PI2, runs from device with index 3 from P. INTERFACE 1 to the device with index 2 at P. INTERFACE 1. The example shows that the indexing of the devices must not necessarily have to correspond to the arrangement of the communication chain. Furthermore, it is not relevant which protection data interfaces are connected to each other.

Figure 2-43

Distance protection for three ends with three 7SA522, chain topology

Communication Media

Communication is accomplished via direct optical fibre connections or communication networks. It depends on the distance and the transmission means what media is used. For shorter distances a direct connection via optical fibres with a transmission rate of 512 kBit/s is possible. Otherwise we recommend communication converters. A transmission via modem and communication networks can also be realized. Please take into consideration that the response times of the protection data communication depend on the transmission quality and increase in case of a reduced transmission quality and /or an increased transmission time. Figure 2-44shows some examples for communication connections. In case of a direct connection the distance depends on the type of the optical fibre. Table 2-5lists the options available. Different types of modules can be installed in the device. For ordering information see Appendix, Section Accessories.

118

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.4 Protection Data Interfaces and Communication Topology (optional)

Table 2-5 Module in the Device FO5 FO6 FO7 FO8 Connector Type ST ST ST FC

Communication via direct connection Optical Wavelength 820 nm 820 nm 1300 nm 1300 nm Permitted Path Attenuation 8 dB 16 dB 7 dB 18 dB Maximum Length Optical Fibre 1.5 km / 0.95 miles 3.5 km / 2.2 miles 10 km / 6.25 miles 35 km / 22 miles

Fibre Type Multimode 62.5/125 m Multimode 62.5/125 m Monomode 9/125 m Monomode 9/125 m

If a communication converter is used, the device and the communication converter are linked with a FO5 module via optical fibres. The converter itself is equipped with different interfaces for the connection to the communication network. For ordering information see Appendix, Subsection Accessories.

Figure 2-44

Examples for communication connections

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

119

2 Functions

Note The redundancy of different communication connections (for ring topology) requires a consequent separation of the devices connected to the communication network. For example, different communication routes should not be conducted via the same multiplexer card, since there is no alternative in case the multiplexer card should fail.

Functional Logout

In an overall topology with up to 3 devices using pilot protection, it is possible to take out one device, e.g. for maintenance purposes, from the protection function Pilot Protection without having to re-parameterize the device. A logged out device (in the Functional Logout) no longer participates in the pilot protection, but still sends and receives remote indications and commands (see Section 2.4.2 under Communication Topology). Communication is continuously monitored by the devices. Single faulty data messages are not a direct risk if they occur only occasionally. They are recognized and counted in the device and can be read out as statistical information. If several faulty messages or no data messages at all are received, this is considered a disturbance as soon as a time delay (default setting 100 ms, can be altered) is exceeded. A corresponding alarm is output. When the system offers no alternative way of communication (as for the ring topology), the pilot protection scheme is disabled. As soon as the data transmission resumes full operation, the devices will automatically switch back to the pilot protection scheme. Transmission time jumps that, for example, can occur in case of switching in the communication network can be recognized and corrected by the device. After at most 2 seconds the transmission times are measured again. If communication is interrupted permanently (which is longer than a settable time period), this can be regarded as a communication failure of the communication. A corresponding alarm is output. Otherwise the same reactions apply as for the data disturbance.

Disturbance and Communication Failure

2.4.2
General

Setting Notes
Protection data interfaces connect the devices with the communication media. The communication is permanently monitored by the devices. Address 4509 TD-DATA DISTURB defines after which delay time the user is informed about a faulty or missing message. Address 4510 TD-DATAFAIL is used to set the time after which an alarm is output indicating total transmission failure. The protection data interface STATE PROT I 1 can be turned ON or OFF at address 4501 STATE PROT I 1. If it is switched OFF, this corresponds to a transmission failure. In case of a ring topology, pilot protection can continue, but not in case of a chain topology. In address 4502 CONNEC. 1 VIA, set the transmission media that you want to connect to protection data interface P. INTERFACE 1. The following selection is possible: F.optic direct, i.e. communication directly by fibre-optic cable with 512 kBit/s, Com conv 64 kB, i.e. via communication converters with 64 kBit/s (G703.1 or X.21),

Protection Data Interface 1

120

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.4 Protection Data Interfaces and Communication Topology (optional)

Com conv 128 kB, i.e. via communication converters with 128 kBit/s (X.21, copper cable, bidirectional), Com conv 512 kB, i.e. via communication converters with 512 kBit/s (X.21). The possibilities may vary for the different device versions. The data must be identical at both ends of a communication route. The devices measure and monitor the transmission times. Deviations are corrected, as long as they are within the permissible range. These permissible ranges are set at address 4505 and 4605 and can generally be left at their default values. The maximum permissible signal propagation delay (address 4505 PROT 1 TDELAY) is set to a value that does not exceed the usual value of communication media. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. If it is exceeded during operation (e.g. because of switchover to a different way of transmission), the message PI1 TD alarm will be issued. Once a fault has been detected in the communication of the protection data interface, the time at address 4511 Td ResetRemote is started for resetting the remote signals. Please note that only the time of the device is considered whose remote end has failed. Thus the same time is valid for all devices following in a chain. Protection Data Interface 2 If protection data interface STATE PROT I 2 exists and is in use, the same options are available as for the protection data interface STATE PROT I 1. The corresponding parameters are available at address 4601 STATE PROT I 2 (ON or OFF), 4602 CONNEC. 2 VIA and 4605 PROT 2 T-DELAY. The last parameter can only be modified using DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. First of all, define your communication topology: number the devices consecutively. This numbering is a serial device index that serves for your own overview. It starts for each distance protection system (i.e. for each protected object) with 1. For the distance protection system the device with index 1 is always the absolute-time master, i.e. the absolute time management of all devices which belong together depends on the absolute time management of this device. As a result the time information of all devices is comparable at all times. The device index serves for unique definition of the devices within the distance protection system (i.e. for one protected object). An ID number must also be assigned to each device (device-ID). The deviceID is used by the communication system to identify each device. It must be between 1 and 65534 and must be unique within the communication system. The ID number identifies the devices in the communication system since the exchange of information between several distance protection systems (thus also for several protected objects) can be executed via the same communication system. Please make sure that the possible communications links and the existing interfaces are in accordance with each other. If not all devices are equipped with two protection data interfaces, those with only one protection data interface must be located at the ends of the communication chain. A ring topology is only possible if all devices in a distance protection system are equipped with two protection data interfaces. If you work with different physical interfaces and communications links, please make sure that every protection data interface corresponds to the projected communication link. For a protected object with two ends (e.g. a line) the addresses 4701 ID OF RELAY 1 and 4702 ID OF RELAY 2 are set, e.g. for device 1 the device-ID 1 and for device 2 the device-ID 2 (Figure 2-45). The indices of the devices and the device-IDs do not have to match here, as mentioned above.

Communication Topology

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

121

2 Functions

Figure 2-45

Distance protection topology for 2 ends with 2 devices - example

For a protected object with more than two ends (and corresponding devices), the third end is allocated to its device ID at parameter addresses 4703 ID OF RELAY 3. A maximum of 3 line ends is possible with 3 devices. Figure 2-46 gives an example with 3 relays. During the configuration of the protection functions the number of devices required for the relevant case of application was set in address 147 NUMBER OF RELAY. Device IDs can be entered for as many devices as were configured under that address, no further IDs are offered during setting.

122

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.4 Protection Data Interfaces and Communication Topology (optional)

Figure 2-46

Distance protection topology for 3 ends with 3 devices - example

In address 4710 LOCAL RELAY you finally indicate the actual local device. Enter the index for each device (according to the consecutive numbering used). Each index from 1 to the entire number of devices must be used once, but may not be used twice. Make sure that the parameters of the distance protection topology for the distance protection system are conclusive: Each device index can only be used once; Each device index must be allocated unambiguously to one device ID; Each device-index must be the index of a local device once; The device with index 1 is the source for the absolute time management (absolute time master). During startup of the protection system, the above listed conditions are checked. If one out of these conditions is not fulfilled, no protection data can be transmitted. The device signals DT inconsistent (Device table inconsistent). Device Logout A device can be removed from the topology via the receive signal 3484 Logout so that the remaining relays can still assume their protection function. If a device logs out functionally (Functional Logout), the number of active protection devices reduces. In this case the pilot protection schemes are automatically switched from 3 to 2 ends. If no remote end is available, 85-21 Carr.Fail is signalled.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

123

2 Functions

2.4.3

Settings
Addresses which have an appended "A" can only be changed with DIGSI, under "Display Additional Settings".

Addr. 4501 4502

Parameter STATE PROT I 1 CONNEC. 1 VIA ON OFF

Setting Options

Default Setting ON F.optic direct

Comments State of protection interface 1 Connection 1 via

F.optic direct Com conv 64 kB Com conv 128 kB Com conv 512 kB 0.1 .. 30.0 ms 0.05 .. 2.00 sec 0.0 .. 60.0 sec 0.00 .. 300.00 sec; ON OFF F.optic direct Com conv 64 kB Com conv 128 kB Com conv 512 kB 0.1 .. 30.0 ms 1 .. 65534 1 .. 65534 1 .. 65534 relay 1 relay 2 relay 3

4505A 4509 4510 4511 4601 4602

PROT 1 T-DELAY TD-DATA DISTURB TD-DATAFAIL Td ResetRemote STATE PROT I 2 CONNEC. 2 VIA

30.0 ms 0.10 sec 6.0 sec 0.00 sec ON F.optic direct

Prot 1: Maximal permissible delay time Time delay for data disturbance alarm Time delay for transmiss. failure alarm Remote signal RESET DELAY for comm.fail State of protection interface 2 Connection 2 via

4605A 4701 4702 4703 4710

PROT 2 T-DELAY ID OF RELAY 1 ID OF RELAY 2 ID OF RELAY 3 LOCAL RELAY

30.0 ms 1 2 3 relay 1

Prot 2: Maximal permissible delay time Identification number of relay 1 Identification number of relay 2 Identification number of relay 3 Local relay is

2.4.4
No. 3196 3215 3217 3218 3227 3228 3229 3230

Information List
Information local Teststate Wrong Firmware PI1 Data reflec PI2 Data reflec >PI1 Tx off >PI2 Tx off PI1 Data fault PI1 Datafailure Type of Information IntSP OUT OUT OUT SP SP OUT OUT Local relay in Teststate Incompatible Firmware Version Prot Int 1: Own Data received Prot Int 2: Own Data received >Prot Int 1: Tx is switched off >Prot Int 2: Transmitter is switched off Prot Int 1: Reception of faulty data Prot Int 1: Total receiption failure Comments

124

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.4 Protection Data Interfaces and Communication Topology (optional)

No. 3231 3232 3233 3234 3235 3236 3239 3240 3243 3244 3457 3458 3464 3475 3476 3477 3484 3487 3491 3492 3493

Information PI2 Data fault PI2 Datafailure DT inconsistent DT unequal Par. different PI1<->PI2 error PI1 TD alarm PI2 TD alarm PI1 conn. w/ ID PI2 conn. w/ ID Ringtopology Chaintopology Topol complete Rel1Logout Rel2Logout Rel3Logout Logout Equal IDs Rel1 Login Rel2 Login Rel3 Login

Type of Information OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT IntSP IntSP IntSP IntSP OUT OUT OUT OUT

Comments Prot Int 2: Reception of faulty data Prot Int 2: Total receiption failure Device table has inconsistent numbers Device tables are unequal Differences between common parameters Different PI for transmit and receive Prot Int 1: Transmission delay too high Prot Int 2: Transmission delay too high Prot Int 1: Connected with relay ID Prot Int 2: Connected with relay ID System operates in closed ring topology System operates in open chain topology Communication topology is complete Relay 1 in Logout state Relay 2 in Logout state Relay 3 in Logout state Local activation of Logout state Equal IDs in constellation Relay 1 in Login state Relay 2 in Login state Relay 3 in Login state

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

125

2 Functions

2.5
2.5.1

Remote Signals via Protection Data Interface (optional)

Description
Up to 28 additional bits of binary information can be transmitted from one relay to the others provided they use protection data transmission via digital communication links at the ends. Four of 28 information items are transmitted like protection signals with high priority, i.e. very fast, and are therefore especially suitable for the transmission of external protection and trip signals which are generated outside of 7SA522. The other 24 are transmitted in the background and are therefore suitable for any information that does not depend on high-speed transmission, such as information on the events taking place in a substation which may also be useful in other substations. The information is injected into the device via binary inputs and can be output at the other ends again via binary outputs. The integrated user-defined CFC logic allows to perform on both the transmitting and the receiving side logical operations on the signals and on other information from the protection and monitoring functions of the devices. The binary outputs and the binary inputs to be used must be allocated appropriately during the configuration of the input and output functions (see SIPROTEC 4 System Description). The 4 high-priority signals are injected into the device via the binary inputs >Remote Trip1 to >Remote Trip4, transmitted to the devices at the other ends and can be processed at each receiving side with the output functions RemoteTrip1 Rx to RemoteTrip4 Rx. If the remote signals are to be used for direct remote tripping, they must be allocated at the send side via CFC with the function that is to perform the transfer trip at the opposite side, and at the receiving side, also via CFC, with the >Ext. TRIP ... input signals. The other 24 items of information reach the device via the binary inputs >Rem. Signal 1 to >Rem.Signal24 and are available under Rem.Sig 1 Rx etc. at the receiving side. For the transmission of binary information no settings are required. Each device sends the injected information to all other devices at the ends of the protected object, although the protection data topology is incomplete. Where selection is necessary, it will have to be carried out by appropriate allocation and, if necessary, by a link at the receiving side. Even devices that have logged out functionally (Functional Logout) can send and receive remote signals and commands. The annunciations Dev x available of the topology detection function can be used to determine whether the signals of the sending devices are still available. They are issued if device x is actively involved in the communication topology and this state is stable. Once a fault has been detected in the communication of the protection data interface, the time at address 4511 Td ResetRemote is started for resetting the remote signals.

126

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.5 Remote Signals via Protection Data Interface (optional)

2.5.2
No. 3541 3542 3543 3544 3545 3546 3547 3548 3549 3550 3551 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 3557 3558 3559 3560 3561 3562 3563 3564 3565 3566 3567 3568 3569 3570 3571 3572 3573 3574 3575 3576 3577 3578 3579 3580 3581 3582 3583 3584

Information List
Information >Remote Trip1 >Remote Trip2 >Remote Trip3 >Remote Trip4 RemoteTrip1 Rx RemoteTrip2 Rx RemoteTrip3 Rx RemoteTrip4 Rx >Rem. Signal 1 >Rem.Signal 2 >Rem.Signal 3 >Rem.Signal 4 >Rem.Signal 5 >Rem.Signal 6 >Rem.Signal 7 >Rem.Signal 8 >Rem.Signal 9 >Rem.Signal10 >Rem.Signal11 >Rem.Signal12 >Rem.Signal13 >Rem.Signal14 >Rem.Signal15 >Rem.Signal16 >Rem.Signal17 >Rem.Signal18 >Rem.Signal19 >Rem.Signal20 >Rem.Signal21 >Rem.Signal22 >Rem.Signal23 >Rem.Signal24 Rem.Sig 1 Rx Rem.Sig 2 Rx Rem.Sig 3 Rx Rem.Sig 4 Rx Rem.Sig 5 Rx Rem.Sig 6 Rx Rem.Sig 7 Rx Rem.Sig 8 Rx Rem.Sig 9 Rx Rem.Sig 10 Rx Rem.Sig 11 Rx Rem.Sig 12 Rx Type of Information SP SP SP SP OUT OUT OUT OUT SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT Comments >Remote Trip 1 signal input >Remote Trip 2 signal input >Remote Trip 3 signal input >Remote Trip 4 signal input Remote Trip 1 received Remote Trip 2 received Remote Trip 3 received Remote Trip 4 received >Remote Signal 1 input >Remote Signal 2 input >Remote Signal 3 input >Remote Signal 4 input >Remote Signal 5 input >Remote Signal 6 input >Remote Signal 7 input >Remote Signal 8 input >Remote Signal 9 input >Remote Signal 10 input >Remote Signal 11 input >Remote Signal 12 input >Remote Signal 13 input >Remote Signal 14 input >Remote Signal 15 input >Remote Signal 16 input >Remote Signal 17 input >Remote Signal 18 input >Remote Signal 19 input >Remote Signal 20 input >Remote Signal 21 input >Remote Signal 22 input >Remote Signal 23 input >Remote Signal 24 input Remote signal 1 received Remote signal 2 received Remote signal 3 received Remote signal 4 received Remote signal 5 received Remote signal 6 received Remote signal 7 received Remote signal 8 received Remote signal 9 received Remote signal 10 received Remote signal 11 received Remote signal 12 received

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

127

2 Functions

No. 3585 3586 3587 3588 3589 3590 3591 3592 3593 3594 3595 3596

Information Rem.Sig 13 Rx Rem.Sig 14 Rx Rem.Sig 15 Rx Rem.Sig 16 Rx Rem.Sig 17 Rx Rem.Sig 18 Rx Rem.Sig 19 Rx Rem.Sig 20 Rx Rem.Sig 21 Rx Rem.Sig 22 Rx Rem.Sig 23 Rx Rem.Sig 24 Rx

Type of Information OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

Comments Remote signal 13 received Remote signal 14 received Remote signal 15 received Remote signal 16 received Remote signal 17 received Remote signal 18 received Remote signal 19 received Remote signal 20 received Remote signal 21 received Remote signal 22 received Remote signal 23 received Remote signal 24 received

128

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.6 Pilot Protection for Distance Protection 85-21

2.6
2.6.1

Pilot Protection for Distance Protection 85-21

General
Faults that occur on the protected line, beyond the first distance zone, can only be cleared selectively by the distance protection after a delay time. Faults cannot be cleared (selectively) instantaneously on line sections that are shorter than the smallest sensible distance setting. To achieve non-delayed and selective tripping on 100% of the line length for all faults by the distance protection, the distance protection can exchange and process information with the opposite line end by means of signal transmission schemes. For this purpose, the device has signal send outputs and receive inputs as well as associated logic functions. This can be done in a conventional way using send and receive contacts. As an alternative, digital communication lines can be used for signal transmission (ordering option).

Purpose of Pilot Protection

Pilot Protection Schemes

A distinction is made between underreach and overreach schemes. In underreach schemes, the protection is set with a normal grading characteristic. If a trip command occurs in the first zone, the other line end receives this information via a transmission channel. There the received signal initiates a trip, either by activation of overreach zone Z1B or via a direct trip command. 7SA522 allows: Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip with Zone Acceleration Z1B (PUTT), Direct (Underreach) Transfer Trip In overreach schemes, the protection works from the start with a fast overreaching zone. This zone, however, can only cause a trip if the opposite end also detects a fault in the overreaching zone. A release (unblock) signal or a block signal can be transmitted. The following pilot protection schemes are available: Permissive (release) schemes: Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip (POTT) (with overreaching zone Z1B) Unblocking with overreaching zone Z1B. Blocking scheme: Unblocking with overreaching zone Z1B. As the distance zones Z1 ... Z5 (without Z1B) function independently, an instantaneous trip in Z1 without a release or blocking signal is always possible. If fast tripping in Z1 is not required (e.g. on very short lines), then Z1 must be delayed with T1.

Transmission Channels

For the signal transmission, one channel in each direction is required. For example, fibre optic connections or voice frequency modulated high frequency channels via pilot cables, power line carrier or microwave radio links can be used for this purpose. If the device is equipped with an optional protection data interface, digital communication can be used for signal transmission; these include: e.g.: Fibre optic cables, communication networks or dedicated cables. The following signal transmission schemes are suited for these kinds of transmission: Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip with Zone Acceleration Z1B (PUTT), Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip (POTT) (with overreaching zone Z1B).

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

129

2 Functions

7SA522 allows also the transmission of phase-selective signals. This presents the advantage that single-pole automatic reclosure can be carried out even when two singlephase faults occur on different lines in the system. Where the digital protection data interface is used, the signal transmission is always phase segregated. The signal transmission schemes are also suited to three terminal lines. In this case, a signal is transmitted from each of the three ends to each of the others in both directions. Phase segregated transmission is only possible for three terminal line applications if digital communication channels are used. During disturbances in the transmission path, the pilot protection supplement may be blocked without affecting the normal time graded distance protection. The measuring reach control (enable zone Z1B) can be obtained via the binary input >Enable ARzones from an external reclosure device or from the internal automatic reclose function. With conventional signal transmission schemes, the disturbance is signalled by a binary input, with digital communication it is detected automatically by the protection device.

2.6.2

Method of Operation
The pilot protection function can be switched on and off by means of the parameter 2101 FCT 85-21, via the system interface (if available) or via binary input (if allocated). The switched state is saved internally (refer to Figure 2-47) and secured in the event the power supply is lost. It is only possible to switch on from the source where previously it had been switched off. To be active, it is necessary that the function is switched on from all three switching sources.

Activation and Deactivation

Figure 2-47

Activation and deactivation of the signal transmission logic

2.6.3

Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip with Zone Acceleration Z1B (PUTT)

The following procedure is suited for both conventional and digital transmission media.

Principle

Figure 2-48 shows the operation scheme with zone acceleration for PUTT scheme. In the case of a fault inside zone Z1, the transfer trip signal is sent to the opposite line end. The signal received there causes tripping if the fault is detected inside the zone Z1B in the set direction. The transmit signal can be maintained by TS (settable at

130

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.6 Pilot Protection for Distance Protection 85-21

address 2103 Send Prolong.), to compensate for possible differences in the pickup time at the two line ends. The distance protection is set such that the first zone reaches up to approximately 85% of the line length, the overreaching zone however is set to reach beyond the opposite substation (approximately 120% of the line length). On three terminal lines Z1 is also set to approximately 85% of the shorter line section, but at least beyond the three-line tap point presuming that Z1 will then not reach over one of the two other line ends. Z1B must securely reach beyond the longer line section, even when additional infeed is possible via the tap point on three line terminals. For this procedure, transmission via a protection data interface (if provided) is offered. In protective relays equipped with a protection data interface, address 121 85-21 PilotDist allows to set SIGNALv.ProtInt. At address 2101 FCT 85-21 PUTT (Z1B) can be set.

Figure 2-48

Operation scheme of the PUTT method via Z1B

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

131

2 Functions

Sequence

Figure 2-49

Logic diagram of the permissive underreach transfer trip (PUTT) scheme using Z1B (one line end)

132

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.6 Pilot Protection for Distance Protection 85-21

The permissive transfer trip only functions for faults in the forward direction. Accordingly, the first zone Z1 and the overreach zone Z1B of the distance protection must definitely be set to Forward in addresses 1301 Op. mode Z1 and 1351 Op. mode Z1B, refer also to Subsection 2.2.2 under the margin heading Independent Zones Z1 up to Z5. On two terminal lines, the signal transmission may be phase segregated. Send and receive circuits in this case are built up for each phase. On three terminal lines, the transmit signal is sent to both opposite line ends. The receive signals are then combined with an OR logic function. If the parameter 85-21 PilotDist (address 121) is set to SIGNALv.ProtInt and the parameter NUMBER OF RELAY (address 147) is set to 3 relays, the device is informed that it has two remote ends. The default setting is 2 relays, which corresponds to one remote end. If digital protection transmission is applied and the protection data interface is used, signals will always be transmitted phase-selectively. If conventional transmission is used, the parameter Type of Line (address 2102) informs the device whether it has one or two opposite line ends. During disturbance of the signal transmission path, the overreaching zone Z1B may be activated from the internal automatic reclosure by setting address 1st AR -> Z1B and from the external automatic reclosure via the binary input >Enable ARzones. If at one line end there is weak or zero infeed, so that the distance protection does not pick up, the circuit breaker can still be tripped. This Weak-infeed tripping is referred to in Section 2.9.1.

2.6.4

Direct (Underreach) Transfer Trip

The following scheme is suited for conventional transmission media.

Principle

As is the case with PUTT (pickup) or PUTT with zone acceleration, Direct Transfer Trip (DTT) transmits a signal to the opposite line end for a fault in zone Z1. The signal received there causes a trip without further queries after a short security margin Tv (settable at address 2202 Trip Time DELAY) (Figure 2-50). The transmit signal can be prolonged by TS (settable at address 2103 Send Prolong.), to compensate for possible differences in the pickup time at the two line ends. The distance protection is set such that the first zone reaches up to approximately 85% of the line length. On three terminal lines Z1 is also set to approximately 85% of the shorter line section, but at least beyond the tap point. The overreaching zone Z1B is not required here. It may however be activated by internal automatic reclosure or external criteria via the binary input >Enable ARzones. The advantage compared to the permissive underreach transfer trip with zone acceleration lies in the fact that both line ends are tripped, even if only one line end has no infeed. There is however no further supervision of the trip signal at the receiving end. The DTT application is not provided by its own selectable pilot protection scheme setting, but implemented by setting the pilot protection supplement to operate in the permissive underreach transfer trip scheme (address 121 85-21 PilotDist = PUTT (Z1B)), and using the binary inputs for direct external trip at the receiving end. Correspondingly, the transmit circuit in Subsection Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip with Zone Acceleration Z1B (PUTT) (Figure 2-49) applies. For the receive circuit the logic of the external trip as described in Section 2.10 applies.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

133

2 Functions

On two terminal lines, the signal transmission may be phase segregated. On three terminal lines, the transmit signal is sent to both opposite line ends. The receive signals are then combined with a logical OR function.

Figure 2-50

Function diagram of the DTT scheme

2.6.5

Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip (POTT)

The following procedure is suited for both conventional and digital transmission media.

Principle

The permissive overreach transfer trip scheme uses a permissive release principle. The overreaching zone Z1B, set beyond the opposite station, is decisive. This mode can also be used on extremely short lines where a setting of 85% of line length for zone Z1 is not possible and accordingly selective non-delayed tripping cannot be achieved. In this case however zone Z1 must be delayed by T1, to avoid non selective tripping by zone Z1 (Figure 2-51). If the distance protection recognizes a fault inside the overreaching zone Z1B, it initially sends a release signal to the opposite line end. If a release signal is received from the opposite end, a trip signal is forwarded to the trip logic. A prerequisite for fast tripping is therefore that the fault is recognized inside Z1B in the forward direction at both line ends. The distance protection is set such that the overreaching zone Z1B reaches beyond the opposite station (approximately 120% of line length). On three terminal lines, Z1B must be set to reliably reach beyond the longer line section, even if there is an additional infeed via the tap point. The first zone is set in accordance with the usual grading scheme, i.e. approximately 85% of the line length; on three terminal lines at least beyond the tee point presuming that then Z1 will not reach over one of the two other line ends. . The transmit signal can be prolonged by TS (settable under address 2103 Send Prolong.). The prolongation of the send signal only comes into effect if the protection has already issued a trip command. This ensures release of the opposite line end even when the short circuit has been switched off rapidly by the independent zone Z1. For all zones except Z1B, tripping results without release from the opposite line end, allowing the protection to function with the usual grading characteristic independent of the signal transmission. For this procedure, transmission via a protection data interface (if provided) is offered.

134

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.6 Pilot Protection for Distance Protection 85-21

In protective relays equipped with a protection data interface, address 121 85-21 PilotDist allows to set SIGNALv.ProtInt. At address 2101 FCT 85-21 POTT can be set.

Figure 2-51

Function diagram of the POTT method

Sequence

The POTT scheme only functions for faults in the forward direction. Accordingly, the first overreach zone ZB1 of the distance protection must definitely be set to Forward in addresses 1351 Op. mode Z1B, refer also to Subsection 2.2.2 under the margin heading Controlled Zone ZB1. On two terminal lines, the signal transmission may be phase segregated. Send and receive circuits in this case are applied to each phase. On three terminal lines, the transmit signal is sent to both opposite line ends. The receive signals are then combined with a logical AND gate, as all three line ends must transmit a send signal during an internal fault. If parameter 85-21 PilotDist (address 121) is set to SIGNALv.ProtInt and parameter NUMBER OF RELAY (address 147) to 3 relays, the device is informed about two remote ends. The default setting is 2 relays, which corresponds to one remote end. In protective relays equipped with one protection data interface, signal transmission is always phase segregated (Figure 2-53 and 2-54). If conventional transmission is used, parameter Type of Line (address 2102) informs the device whether it has one or two opposite line ends (Figure 2-52). During disturbance of the signal transmission path, the overreaching zone Z1B may be activated from the internal automatic reclosure by setting address 1st AR -> Z1B and from an external automatic reclosure via the binary input >Enable ARzones. The occurrence of erroneous signals resulting from transients during clearance of external faults or from direction reversal resulting during the clearance of faults on parallel lines, is filtered by the Transient Blocking. On lines with single-sided infeed, the line end with no infeed cannot generate a release signal, as no fault detection occurs there. To achieve tripping by the permissive overreach transfer scheme even in this case, the device contains a special function. This Weak Infeed Function (echo function) is referred to in Subsection Measures for Weak and Zero Infeed. It is activated when a signal is received from the opposite line end - in the case of three terminal lines from at least one of the opposite line ends without the device having detected a fault.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

135

2 Functions

The circuit breaker can also be tripped at the line end with no or only weak infeed. This Weak-infeed tripping is referred to in Subsection 2.9.1.

Figure 2-52

Logic diagram of the permissive overreach transfer trip (POTT) scheme (one line end, conventional, no protection data interface)

136

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.6 Pilot Protection for Distance Protection 85-21

Figure 2-53

Logic diagram of the permissive overreach transfer trip (POTT) scheme (one line end, with protection data interface)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

137

2 Functions

Figure 2-54

Logic diagram of the permissive overreach transfer trip (POTT) scheme with protection data interface - continued

2.6.6

Directional Unblocking Scheme

The following scheme is suited for conventional transmission media.

Principle

The unblocking method is a permissive release scheme. It differs from the permissive overreach transfer scheme in that tripping is possible also when no release signal is received from the opposite line end. Here, a special unblocking logic takes effect. The scheme functionality is shown in Figure 2-55. Two signal frequencies which are keyed by the transmit output of the 7SA522 are required for the transmission. If the transmission device has a channel monitoring, then the monitoring frequency f0 is keyed over to the unblock frequency fU (unblocking frequency). When the protection recognizes a ground fault inside the overreaching zone Z1B, it initiates the transmission of the unblock frequency fU. During the quiescent state or during a fault outside Z1B, or in the reverse direction, the monitoring frequency f0 is transmitted. If the release frequency is received also from the opposite end, a trip signal is forwarded to the trip logic. Accordingly, it is a prerequisite for fast tripping, that the fault is recognized inside Z1B in the forward direction at both line ends. The distance protection

138

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.6 Pilot Protection for Distance Protection 85-21

is set such that the overreaching zone Z1B reaches beyond the opposite station (approximately 120% of line length). On three terminal lines, Z1B must be set to reliably reach beyond the longer line section, even if there is an additional infeed via the tap point. The first zone is set in accordance with the usual grading scheme, i.e. approximately 85% of the line length; on three terminal lines at least beyond the tap point. The transmit signal can be prolonged by TS (settable under address 2103 Send Prolong.). The prolongation of the send signal only comes into effect if the protection has already issued a trip command. This ensures release of the opposite line end even when the short circuit has been switched off rapidly by the independent zone Z1.

Figure 2-55

Function diagram of the directional unblocking method

For all zones except Z1B, tripping results without release from the opposite line end, allowing the protection to function with the usual grading characteristic independent of the signal transmission. Sequence Figure 2-56 shows the logic diagram of the unblocking scheme for one line end. The unblock scheme only functions for faults in the forward direction. Accordingly, the overreaching zone Z1B of the distance protection must definitely be set to Forward in Address 1351 Op. mode Z1B, see also Subsection 2.2.1 at margin heading Controlled Zone Z1B. On two terminal lines, the signal transmission may be phase segregated. Send and receive circuits in this case are applied to each phase. On three terminal lines the send signal is transmitted to both opposite ends. The receive signals are then combined with a logical AND gate, as all three line ends must transmit a send signal during an internal fault. With the setting parameter Type of Line (address 2102) the device is informed as to whether it has one or two opposite line ends. An unblock logic is inserted before the receive logic, which in essence corresponds to that of the permissive overreach transfer scheme, see Figure 2-57. If an interference free unblock signal is received, a receive signal e.g. >85-21 UB ub 1, appears and the blocking signal e.g. >85-21 UB bl 1 disappears. The internal signal Un-

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

139

2 Functions

block 1 is passed on to the receive logic, where it initiates the release of the overreaching zone Z1B of the distance protection (when all remaining conditions have been fulfilled). If the transmitted signal does not reach the other line end because the fault on the protected line causes too much attenuation or reflection of the transmitted signal, neither the unblocking signal e.g., >85-21 UB ub 1, nor the blocking signal >85-21 UB bl 1 will appear on the receiving side. In this case, the release Unblock A is issued after a security delay time of 20 ms and passed onto the receive logic. This release is however removed after a further 100 ms via the timer element 100/100 ms. When the transmission is functional again, one of the two receive signals must appear again, either >85-21 UB ub 1 or >85-21 UB bl 1; after an additional 100 ms (dropout delay of the timer element 100/100 ms) the quiescent state is reached again i.e. the direct release path to the signal Unblock A and thereby the usual release is possible. If none of the signals is received for a period of more than 10 s the alarm 85-21 UB Fail1 is generated. During disturbance of the signal transmission path, the overreaching zone Z1B may be activated by an automatic reclosure (internal or external) via the binary input >Enable ARzones. The occurrence of erroneous signals resulting from transients during clearance of external faults or from direction reversal resulting during the clearance of faults on parallel lines, is filtered by the Transient Blocking. On lines with single infeed, the line end with no infeed cannot generate a release signal, as no fault detection occurs there. To achieve tripping by the permissive overreach transfer scheme even in this case, the device contains a special function. This Weak-infeed tripping (echo function) is referred to in Subsection Measures for Weak and Zero Infeed. It is activated when a signal is received from the opposite line end in the case of three terminal lines from at least one of the opposite line ends - without the device having detected a fault. The circuit breaker can also be tripped at the line end with no or only weak infeed. This Weak-infeed tripping is referred to in Section 2.9.1.

140

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.6 Pilot Protection for Distance Protection 85-21

Figure 2-56

Logic diagram of the unblocking scheme (one line end)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

141

2 Functions

Figure 2-57

Unblock logic

2.6.7

Directional Blocking Scheme

The following scheme is suited for conventional transmission media.

Principle

In the case of the blocking scheme, the transmission channel is used to send a block signal from one line end to the other. The signal can be sent directly after fault inception (jump detector above dotted line in Figure 2-58), and stopped immediately, as soon as the distance protection detects a fault in the forward direction. Alternatively the signal is only sent when the distance protection detects the fault in the reverse direction. It is stopped immediately as soon as the distance protection detects a fault in forward direction. Tripping is possible with this scheme even if no signal is received from the opposite line end.

142

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.6 Pilot Protection for Distance Protection 85-21

The scheme functionality is shown in Figure 2-58. Faults inside the overreaching zone Z1B, which is set to approximately 120% of the line length, will initiate tripping if a blocking signal is not received from the other line end. On three terminal lines, Z1B must be set to reliably reach beyond the longer line section, even if there is an additional infeed via the tap point. Due to possible differences in the pickup times of the devices at both ends of the line and due to the signal transmission time delay, the tripping must be somewhat delayed by TV in this case. To avoid signal race conditions, a transmit signal can be prolonged by the settable time TS once it has been initiated.

Figure 2-58

Function diagram of the blocking scheme

Sequence

Figure 2-59 shows the logic diagram of the blocking scheme for one line end. The overreach zone Z1B is blocked which is why it must be set to Forward (address 1351 Op. mode Z1B, see also Subsection 2.2.1 at margin heading Controlled Zone Z1B). On two terminal lines, the signal transmission may be phase segregated. Send and receive circuits in this case are applied to each phase. On three terminal lines, the transmit signal is sent to both opposite line ends. The receive signal is then combined with a logical OR gate as no blocking signal must be received from any line end during an internal fault. With the setting parameter Type of Line (address 2102) the device is informed as to whether it has one or two opposite line ends.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

143

2 Functions

Figure 2-59

Logic diagram of the blocking scheme (one line end)

144

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.6 Pilot Protection for Distance Protection 85-21

As soon as the distance protection has detected a fault in the reverse direction, a blocking signal is transmitted (e.g. 85-21 SEND, FNo 4056). The transmitted signal may be prolonged by setting address 2103 accordingly. The blocking signal is stopped if a fault is detected in the forward direction (e.g. 85-21 BL STOP, FNo 4070). Very rapid blocking is possible by transmitting also the output signal of the jump detector for measured values. To do so, the output 85-21 JumpBlock (FNo 4060) must also be allocated to the transmitter output relay. As this jump signal appears at every measured value jump, it should only be used if the transmission channel can be relied upon to respond promptly to the disappearance of the transmitted signal. If there is a disturbance in the signal transmission path the overreaching zone can be blocked via a binary input. The distance protection operates with the normal time grading characteristic (non delayed trip in Z1). The overreach zone Z1B may however be activated by internal automatic reclosure or external criteria via the binary input >Enable ARzones. The occurrence of erroneous signals resulting from transients during clearance of external faults or from direction reversal resulting during the clearance of faults on parallel lines, is filtered by the Transient Blocking. It prolongs the blocking signal by the transient blocking time TrBlk BlockTime (address 2110), if it has been present for the minimum duration equal to the waiting time TrBlk Wait Time (address 2109). It lies in the nature of the blocking scheme that single end fed short circuits can also be tripped rapidly without any special measures, as the non feeding end cannot generate a blocking signal.

2.6.8

Transient Blocking
In the overreach schemes, transient blocking provides additional security against erroneous signals due to transients during clearance of an external fault or by fault direction reversal during clearance of a fault on a parallel line. The principle of transient blocking scheme is that following the incidence of an external fault, the formation of a release signal is prevented for a certain (settable) time. In the case of permissive schemes, this is achieved by blocking of the transmit and receive circuit. Figure 2-60 shows the principle of the transient blocking for a directional comparison and for a permissive scheme. If, following fault detection, a non-directional fault or a fault in the reverse direction is determined within the waiting time TrBlk Wait Time (address 2109), the transmit circuit and the release of the overreaching zone Z1B are prevented. This blocking is maintained for the duration of the transient blocking time TrBlk BlockTime (address 2110) even after the blocking criterion is reset. But if a trip command is already present in Z1, the transient blocking time TrBlk BlockTime is terminated and thus the blocking of the signal transmission scheme in the event of an internal fault is prevented. In the case of the blocking scheme, the transient blocking extends the received block signal as shown in the logic diagram Figure 2-60.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

145

2 Functions

Figure 2-60

Transient blocking for permissive schemes

2.6.9

Measures for Weak and Zero Infeed

In cases where there is weak or no infeed present at one line end, the distance protection will not pick up. Neither a trip nor a send signal can therefore be generated there. With the comparison schemes, using a permissive signal, fast tripping could not even be achieved at the line end with strong infeed without special measures, as the end with weak infeed does not transmit a permissive release signal. To achieve fast tripping at both line ends in such cases, the distance protection provides special supplements for feeders with weak infeed. To enable the line end with the weak infeed condition to trip independently, 7SA522 has a special tripping function for weak infeed conditions. This is a separate protection function with a dedicated trip command, and is described in a separate section (refer to Subsection 2.9.1).

Echo Function

Figure 2-61 shows the method of operation of the echo function. At address 2501 FCT Weak Infeed (Weak Infeed FunCTion) can be activated (ECHO only) or deactivated (OFF). By means of this switch the weak infeed tripping function can also be activated (ECHO and TRIP, refer also to Section 2.9.1). This setting is common to the pilot protection function for the distance protection and for the ground fault protection. If there is no fault detection, the echo function causes the received signal to be sent back to the other line end as an echo, where it is used to initiate permissive tripping. The detection of the weak infeed condition and accordingly the requirement for an echo are combined in an AND gate. The distance protection must neither be switched off nor blocked, as it would otherwise always produce an echo due to the lack of fault detection. If however the time delayed overcurrent protection is used as an emergency function, an echo is possible when the distance protection is out of service, because the fault detection of the emergency overcurrent protection replaces the distance protection fault detection. During this mode of operation, the emergency overcurrent protection must not be blocked or switched off. Even when the emergency overcurrent protection does not pick up an echo is created for permissive release scheme during emergency function. The time overcurrent protection at the weaker end must operate with more sensitivity than the distance protection at the end with high infeed. Otherwise the selectivity concerning 100% of the line length is not given. An essential condition for an echo is the absence of distance protection or overcurrent protection fault detection with the simultaneous reception of a signal from the pilot protection scheme logic, as shown in the corresponding logic diagrams (Figure 2-53 or 256).

146

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.6 Pilot Protection for Distance Protection 85-21

In case of single- or two-pole pickup of the distance protection, it is nevertheless possible to send an echo if measurement of the phases that have not picked up recognizes a weak-infeed condition. To avoid an incorrect echo after the line opens and the fault detection resets, the RS flip-flop in Figure 2-61 latches the fault detection condition until the signal receive condition resets, thereby preventing the release of an echo. The echo can in any event be blocked via the binary input >85-21 BlkEcho. If the conditions for an echo signal are met, a short delay Trip/Echo DELAY is initially activated. This delay is necessary to avoid transmission of the echo if the protection at the weak line end has a longer fault detection time during reverse faults or if it picks up a little later due to unfavorable fault current distribution. If however the circuit breaker at the non-feeding line end is open, this delay of the echo signal is not required. The echo delay time may then be bypassed. The circuit breaker position is provided by the central information control functions. (refer to Section 2.20.1). The echo impulse is then transmitted (alarm output ECHO SIGNAL), the duration of which can be set with the parameter Trip EXTENSION. The ECHO SIGNAL must be allocated separately to the output relay(s) for transmission, as it is not contained in the transmit signals 85-21 SEND or Dis.T.SEND L*.

Note The ECHO SIGNAL (no 4246) must be allocated separately to the output relays for the transmitter actuation, as it is not contained in the transmit signals of the transmission functions. On the digital protection data interface with permissive overreach transfer trip mode, the echo is transmitted as a separate signal without taking any special measures (Figure 2-53). After output of the echo pulse or during the transmission signal of the distance protection, a new echo can not be sent for a minimum of 50 ms (default setting). This prevents echo repetition after the line has been switched open. In the case of the blocking scheme and the direct transfer trip scheme, the echo function is not required and therefore ineffective.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

147

2 Functions

Figure 2-61

Logic diagram of the echo function with distance protection with pilot protection

2.6.10 Setting Notes

General The pilot protection supplement of distance protection is only in service if it is set during the configuration to one of the possible operating modes in address 121. Depending on this configuration, only those parameters which are applicable to the selected mode appear here. If the pilot protection is not required set address 121 to 8521 PilotDist = Disabled. The following modes are available with conventional transmission links (as described in Section 2.6): DTT PUTT (Z1B) POTT UNBLOCKING BLOCKING Remote trip without any pickup, Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip with Zone Acceleration Z1B (PUTT) Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip (POTT), Directional Unblocking scheme, Directional Blocking scheme.

Conventional Transmission

At address 2101 FCT 85-21 the use of a pilot protection scheme can be turned ON or OFF. If the pilot protection has to be applied to a three terminal line the setting in address 2102 must be Type of Line = Three terminals, if not, the setting remains Two Terminals.

148

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.6 Pilot Protection for Distance Protection 85-21

Digital Transmission

The following modes are possible with digital transmission using the protection data interface (described in Subsection 2.6): PUTT (Z1B) POTT Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip with Zone Acceleration Z1B (PUTT) via protection interface, Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip (POTT).

The desired mode is selected in address 2101 FCT 85-21. The use of a pilot protection scheme can also be turned ON or OFF here. Address 147 NUMBER OF RELAY indicates the number of ends and must be set identically in all devices. The distance protection scheme via the protection data interface is only active if parameter 121 8521 PilotDist was set to SIGNALv.ProtInt for all devices in a constellation. Distance Protection Prerequisites For all applications of pilot protection schemes (except PUTT), the user must ensure that the fault detection of the distance protection in the reverse direction has a greater reach than the overreaching zone of the opposite line end (refer to the shaded areas in Figure 2-62 on the right hand side)! To this end, at least one of the distance elements must be set to Reverse or Non-Directional. During a fault in the shaded area (in the left section of the picture), this fault would be in zone Z1B of the protection at B as zone Z1B is set incorrectly. The distance protection at A would not pick up and therefore the protection in B would interpret this as a fault with single end infeed from B (echo from A or no block signal at A). This would result in a false trip! The blocking scheme needs furthermore a fast reverse element to generate the blocking signal. Apply zone 3 with non-delayed setting to this end.

Figure 2-62

Distance protection setting with permissive overreach schemes

Time Settings

The send signal prolongation Send Prolong.(address 2103) must ensure that the send signal reliably reaches the opposite line end, even if there is very fast tripping at the sending line end and/or the signal transmission time is relatively long. In the case of the permissive overreaching schemes POTT and UNBLOCKING this signal prolongation time is only effective if the device has already issued a trip command. This ensures the release of the other line ends even if the fault has been cleared very rapidly by the instantaneous zone Z1. In the case of the blocking scheme BLOCKING the transmit signal is always extended by this time. In this case it corresponds to a transient blocking following a reverse fault. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. In order to detect steady-state line faults such as open circuits, a monitoring time Delay for alarm is started when a fault is detected (address 2107). Upon expiration of this time the fault is considered a permanent failure. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. With the release delay Release Delay (address 2108) the release of the zone Z1B can be delayed. This is only required for the blocking scheme BLOCKING to allow sufficient transmission time for the blocking signal during external faults. This delay only

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

149

2 Functions

has an effect on the receive circuit of the pilot protection; conversely the permissive signal is not delayed by the set time delay T1B of the overreaching zone Z1B. Transient Blocking The parameters TrBlk Wait Time and TrBlk BlockTime serve the transient blocking with the permissive overreaching schemes POTT and UNBLOCKING. With permissive underreach transfer trip they are of no consequence. The time TrBlk Wait Time (address 2109) is a waiting time prior to transient blocking. Once the distance protection recognizes a reverse fault inside this time after fault detection, the transient blocking becomes activated in the permissive overreach transfer schemes. In the case of the blocking scheme, the waiting time prevents transient blocking in the event that the blocking signal reception from the opposite line end is very fast. With the setting there is no transient blocking. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. The transient blocking time TrBlk BlockTime (address 2110) must be definitely longer than the duration of severe transients resulting from the inception or clearance of external faults. The send signal is delayed by this time with the permissive overreach schemes POTT and UNBLOCKING if the protection had initially detected a reverse fault. In the case of the blocking scheme BLOCKING the received (blocking) signal is extended by this time. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. The default value should be sufficient in most cases. Echo Function In the case of lines with weak infeed, the echo function is suggested in conjunction with permissive overreach transfer schemes POTT and UNBLOCKING with release signal, so that the strong end is also released. The setting lists concerning the weak infeed are listed in Subsection 2.9.2.2. The echo function at address 2501 FCT Weak Infeed can be activated (ECHO only or deactivated (OFF). By means of this switch the weak infeed tripping function can also be activated (ECHO and TRIP, refer also to Section 2.9.1). Please observe the setting notes for the distance protection elements at margin heading Distance Protection Prerequisites. The echo delay time Trip/Echo DELAY (address 2502) must be set long enough to avoid incorrect echo signals resulting from the difference in fault detection pick-up time of the distance protection functions at all ends of the line during external faults (through-fault current). Typical setting is approx. 40 ms (presetting). This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. The echo impulse duration Trip EXTENSION (address 2503) may be matched to the configuration data of the signal transmission equipment. It must be long enough to ensure that the receive signal is recognized even with different pickup times by the protection devices at the line ends and different response times of the transmission equipment. In most cases approx. 50 ms (presetting) is sufficient. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. An endless echo signal between the line ends can be avoided (e.g. interference coupling in the signal path) by blocking a new echo for a certain time Echo BLOCK Time (address 2504) after each output of an echo signal. The typical setting is approx. 50 ms. After the distance protection signal was sent, the echo is equally blocked for the time Echo BLOCK Time. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. If the distance protection and ground fault protection use a common transmission channel, spurious tripping may occur when the distance protection and the ground

150

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.6 Pilot Protection for Distance Protection 85-21

fault protection create an echo independently of each other. For this scenario, parameter Echo:1channel (address 2509) must be set to YES. The default setting is NO.

Note The ECHO SIGNAL (no. 4246) must be allocated separately to the output relays for the transmitter actuation since it is not contained in the send signals of the transmission functions. On the digital protection data interface with permissive overreach transfer trip mode, the echo is transmitted as a separate signal without taking any special measures. The echo function settings are common to all weak infeed measures and listed in the table in Section 2.9.1.

2.6.11 Settings
Addresses which have an appended "A" can only be changed with DIGSI, under "Display Additional Settings".
Addr. 2101 Parameter FCT 85-21 Setting Options ON PUTT (Z1B) POTT OFF Two Terminals Three terminals 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.000 .. 30.000 sec 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec Default Setting ON Comments 85-21 Pilot Prot. for Distance prot.

2102 2103A 2107A 2108 2109A 2110A

Type of Line Send Prolong. Delay for alarm Release Delay TrBlk Wait Time TrBlk BlockTime

Two Terminals 0.05 sec 10.00 sec 0.000 sec 0.04 sec 0.05 sec

Type of Line Time for send signal prolongation Time Delay for Alarm Time Delay for release after pickup Transient Block.: Duration external flt. Transient Block.: Blk.T. after ext. flt.

2.6.12 Information List

No. 4001 4002 4003 4005 4006 4007 4008 4009 Information >85-21 Pilot ON >85-21 PilotOFF >85-21 PilotBlk >85-21 RecFail >85-21 Rec.Ch1 >85-21 RecCh1A >85-21 RecCh1B >85-21 RecCh1C Type of Information SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP Comments >85-21 Pilot Prot. Distance ON >85-21 Pilot Prot. Distance OFF >85-21 Pilot Prot. Distance BLOCK >85-21 Carrier faulty >85-21 Carrier RECEPTION, Channel 1 >85-21 Carrier RECEPTION, Channel 1,Ph A >85-21 Carrier RECEPTION, Channel 1,Ph B >85-21 Carrier RECEPTION, Channel 1,Ph C

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

151

2 Functions

No. 4010 4030 4031 4032 4033 4034 4035 4036 4040 4050 4052 4054 4055 4056 4057 4058 4059 4060 4068 4070 4080 4081 4082 4083 4084 4085 4086 4087 4088 4089 4090 4091 4092 4093

Information >85-21 Rec.Ch2 >85-21 UB ub 1 >85-21 UB bl 1 >85-21 UB ub1A >85-21 UB ub1B >85-21 UB ub1C >85-21 UB ub 2 >85-21 UB bl 2 >85-21 BlkEcho 85-21on/off BIN 85-21 Pilot OFF 85-21 Carr.rec. 85-21 Carr.Fail 85-21 SEND 85-21 SEND A 85-21 SEND B 85-21 SEND C 85-21 JumpBlock 85-21 Trans.Blk 85-21 BL STOP 85-21 UB Fail1 85-21 UB Fail2 85-21 BL STOPA 85-21 BL STOPB 85-21 BL STOPC 85-21 Rx.A Dev1 85-21 Rx.B Dev1 85-21 Rx.C Dev1 85-21 Rx.A Dev2 85-21 Rx.B Dev2 85-21 Rx.C Dev2 85-21 Rx.A Dev3 85-21 Rx.B Dev3 85-21 Rx.C Dev3

Type of Information SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP IntSP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

Comments >85-21 Carrier RECEPTION, Channel 2 >85-21 Unblocking: UNBLOCK, Channel 1 >85-21 Unblocking: BLOCK, Channel 1 >85-21 Unblocking: UNBLOCK, Ch. 1, Ph A >85-21 Unblocking: UNBLOCK, Ch. 1, Ph B >85-21 Unblocking: UNBLOCK, Ch. 1, Ph C >85-21 Unblocking: UNBLOCK, Channel 2 >85-21 Unblocking: BLOCK, Channel 2 >85-21 BLOCK Echo Signal 85-21 Pilot Prot. ON/OFF via BI 85-21 Pilot Prot. is switched OFF 85-21 Carrier signal received 85-21 Carrier CHANNEL FAILURE 85-21 Carrier SEND signal 85-21 Carrier SEND signal, Phase A 85-21 Carrier SEND signal, Phase B 85-21 Carrier SEND signal, Phase C 85-21 Blocking: Send signal with jump 85-21 Transient Blocking 85-21 Blocking: carrier STOP signal 85-21 Unblocking: FAILURE Channel 1 85-21 Unblocking: FAILURE Channel 2 85-21 Blocking: carrier STOP signal,Ph A 85-21 Blocking: carrier STOP signal,Ph B 85-21 Blocking: carrier STOP signal,Ph C 85-21 RECEPTION, Ph A, Device1 85-21 RECEPTION, Ph B, Device1 85-21 RECEPTION, Ph C, Device1 85-21 RECEPTION, Ph A, Device2 85-21 RECEPTION, Ph B, Device2 85-21 RECEPTION, Ph C, Device2 85-21 RECEPTION, Ph A, Device3 85-21 RECEPTION, Ph B, Device3 85-21 RECEPTION, Ph C, Device3

152

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.7 Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N (optional)

2.7

Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N (optional)

In grounded systems, where extremely large fault resistances may exist during ground faults (e.g. overhead lines without ground wire, sandy soil) the fault detection of the distance protection will often not pick up because the resulting ground fault impedance could be outside the fault detection characteristic of the distance protection. The 7SA522 distance protection features protection functions for high-resistance ground faults in grounded power systems. These options are available - depending on the ordered model: Three overcurrent elements with definite time tripping characteristic (50N) , One overcurrent element with inverse time characteristic (51N) or One zero sequence voltage element with inverse time characteristic One zero sequence power element with inverse time characteristic The elements may be configured independently of each other and combined according to the user's requirements. If the fourth current-, voltage or power-dependent element is not required, it may be employed as a fourth definite time element. Each element may be set to nondirectional or directional - forward or reverse. A signal transmission may be combined with these four elements. For each element it may be determined if it should coordinate with the pilot protection function. If the protection is applied in the proximity of transformers, an inrush restraint can be activated. Furthermore, blocking by external criteria is possible via binary inputs (e.g. for reverse interlocking or external automatic reclosure). During energization of the protected feeder onto a dead fault it is also possible to release any element, or also several, for non-delayed tripping. Elements that are not required, are set inactive.

2.7.1

Functional Description
The zero-sequence current is used as measured variable. According to its definition equation it is obtained from the sum of the three phase currents, i.e. 3I0 = IA + IB + IC. Depending on the version ordered, and the configured application for the fourth current input I4 of the device, the zero-sequence current can be measured or calculated. If the input I4 is connected in the neutral of the set of current transformers or to a separate ground current transformer, on the protected feeder, the ground current is directly available as a measured value. If the device is fitted with the highly sensitive current input for I4, this current I4 is used with the factor I4/Iph CT (address 221, refer to Section 2.1.3.1). As the linear range of this measuring input is severely restricted in the high range, this current is only evaluated up to an amplitude of approx. 1.6A. In the event of larger currents, the device automatically switches over to the evaluation of the zero sequence current derived from the phase currents. Naturally, all three phase currents obtained from a set of three wye-connected current transformers must be available and connected to the device. Processing of the ground current is then also possible if very small as well as large ground fault currents occur. If the fourth current input I4 is otherwise used, e.g. for a transformer neutral current or for the ground current of a parallel line, the device calculates the zero-sequence

Measured Quantities

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

153

2 Functions

current from the phase currents. All three phase currents derived from a set of three wyeconnected current transformers must be available and connected to the device. The zero sequence voltage is determined by its definition formula 3 V0 = VA-G + VBG + VC-G Depending on the application for the fourth voltage input V4 of the device, the zero sequence voltage can be measured or calculated. If the fourth voltage input is connected to the broken delta winding Vdelta of a voltage transformer set and if it is configured accordingly (address 210 V4 transformer = Vdelta transf., see Section 2.1.3.1), this voltage is used with the factor Vph / Vdelta (address 211, see Section 2.1.3.1). If not, the device calculates the zero-sequence voltage from the phase voltages. Naturally, all three phase-to-ground voltages from a set of three wyeconnected voltage transformers must be available and connected to the device. Definite Time Very High Set Current Element 50N-1 The triple zero-sequence current 3I0is passed through a numerical filter and then compared with the set value 50N-1 PICKUP. If this value is exceeded an alarm is issued. After the corresponding delay time 50N-1 TimeDELAY has expired, a trip signal is issued which is also alarmed. The reset threshold is approximately 95 % of the pickup threshold. Figure 2-63shows the logic diagram of the 50N-1 element. The function modules direction determination, permissive pilot protection, switch onto fault, and inrush stabilization are common to all elements and described below. They may, however, affect each element individually. This is accomplished with the following setting parameters: 50N-1 Op. Mode, determines the operating direction of the element: Forward, Reverse, Non-Directional or Inactive, 50N-1 Pilot/BI determines whether a non-delayed trip with the pilot protection scheme or via binary input 1310 >50/1N InstTRIP is possible (YES) or not (NO), 50N-1 SOTF-Trip, determines whether during energization of the line onto a fault tripping with this element is non-delayed (YES) or not (NO) and 50N-1 InrushBlk is used to switch the inrush stabilization (rush blocking) on (YES) or off (NO).

154

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.7 Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N (optional)

Figure 2-63

Logic diagram of the 50N-1 element

Definite Time High Set Current Element 50N-2 Definite Time Overcurrent Element 50N-3

The logic of the high set current element 50N-2 is the same as that of the 50N-1 element. In all references 50N-1 PICKUP must merely be replaced with 50N-2 PICKUP. In all other respects Figure applies. The logic of the overcurrent element 50N-3, too, is the same as that of the 50N1 element. In all references 50N-1 PICKUP must merely be replaced with 50N-3 PICKUP. In all other respects Figure 2-63applies. This element operates with a specially optimized digital filter that completely suppresses all harmonic components beginning with the 2nd harmonic. Therefore it is particularly suited for a highly-sensitive ground fault detection. A fourth, definite time element can be implemented by setting the inverse-time element (refer to the next paragraph) to a definite-time element.

Inverse Time Overcurrent Element 51N

The logic of the elements with inverse time delay operate the same as the remaining elements. This element operates with a specially optimized digital filter that completely suppresses all harmonic components beginning with the 2nd harmonic. Therefore it is particularly suited for a highly-sensitive ground fault detection. However, the time delay is calculated here based on the type of the set characteristic, the intensity of the

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

155

2 Functions

ground current and a time multiplier 51N Time Dial (IEC characteristic, Figure 264) or a time multiplier 51N-B Time Dial (ANSI characteristic). A pre-selection of the available characteristics was already carried out during the configuration of the protection functions. Furthermore, an additional fixed delay Add.T-DELAY may be selected. The characteristics are shown in the Technical Data. Fig. 2-64 shows the logic diagram. The setting addresses of the IEC characteristics are shown by way of an example. In the setting information the different setting addresses are described in detail. It is also possible to implement this element equally with a definite time delay. In this case 51N PICKUP is the pickup threshold and Add.T-DELAY the definite time delay. The inverse time characteristic is then effectively bypassed.

Figure 2-64

Logic diagram of the 51N element (inverse time overcurrent protection), for example ANSI curves

156

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.7 Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N (optional)

Inverse Time Overcurrent Element with Logarithmic Inverse Characteristic

The inverse logarithmic characteristic differs from the other inverse characteristics mainly by the fact that the shape of the curve can be influenced by a number of parameters. The slope and a time shift 51N Max.T-DELAY which directly affect the curve, can be changed. The characteristics are shown in the Technical Data. Figure 2-65 shows the logic diagram. In addition to the curve parameters, a minimum time 51N Min.T-DELAY can be determined; below this time no tripping can occur. Below a current factor of 51N Startpoint, which is set as a multiple of the basic setting 51N PICKUP, no tripping can take place. Further information regarding the effect of the various parameters can be found in the setting information of the function parameters in Subsection 2.7.2. The remaining setting options are the same as for the other curves.

Figure 2-65

Logic diagram of the 51N element for the inverse logarithmic curve

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

157

2 Functions

Zero Sequence Voltage Time Protection (V0-inverse)

The zero sequence voltage time protection operates according to a voltage-dependent trip time characteristic. It can be used instead of the time overcurrent element with inverse time delay.t The voltage/time characteristic can be displaced in voltage direction for a determined constant voltage V0inv. minimum, valid for t and in time direction by a determined constant time T forw. (V0inv)). The characteristics are shown in the Technical Data. Figure 2-66shows the logic diagram. The tripping time depends on the level of the zero sequence voltage V0. For networked grounded systems the zero sequence voltage increases towards the ground fault location. The inverse characteristic results in the shortest command time for the relay closest to the fault. The other relays then reset.

Figure 2-66

Directional zero-sequence voltage time protection with non-directional backup element

158

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.7 Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N (optional)

A further time element T rev. (V0inv) provokes non-directional tripping with a voltage-independent delay. This element can be set above the directional element. When tripping with this element it is, however, a prerequisite that the time of the voltage-controlled element has already expired (without directional check). In case the zero voltage is too low or the voltage transformer circuit breaker is tripped, this element is also disabled. Zero Sequence Power Protection The zero sequence power protection operates according to a power-dependent trip time characteristic. It can be used instead of an inverse time overcurrent element. The power is calculated from the zero sequence voltage and the zero sequence current. The component Sr is decisive in direction of a configurable compensation angle comp, which is also referred to as compensated zero sequence power i.e., Sr = 3I0 3V0 cos( Comp) where = (V0; I0). Comp thus determines the direction of the maximum sensitivity (cos( Comp) = 1 if = Comp). Due to its sign information the power calculation automatically includes the direction. The power for the reverse direction can be determined by reversing the sign. The power-time characteristic can be displaced in power direction via a reference value Sref (= basic value for the inverse characteristic for = comp) and in time direction by a factor k. Figure 2-67 shows the logic diagram. The tripping time depends on the level of the compensated zero sequence power Sr as defined above. For networked grounded systems the zero sequence voltage and the zero sequence current increase towards the ground fault location. The inverse characteristic results in the shortest command time for the relay closest to the fault. The other relays then reset.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

159

2 Functions

Figure 2-67

Zero-sequence power protection

Phase Current Stabilization

Non-symmetrical load conditions in multiple-grounded systems or different current transformer errors can result in a zero sequence current. This zero sequence current could cause faulty pickup of the ground current elements if low pickup thresholds are set. To avoid this, the ground current elements are stabilized by the phase current: As the phase currents increase, the pickup thresholds are increased (Figure 2-68). The stabilization factor (= slope) may be changed by means of the parameter Iph-STAB. Slope (address 3104). It applies to all elements.

160

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.7 Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N (optional)

Figure 2-68

Phase current stabilization

Inrush Stabilization

If the device is connected to a transformer feeder, large inrush currents can be expected when the transformer is energized. The inrush current may be a multiple of the rated current and flow for several tens of milliseconds up to several minutes. Although the fundamental current is evaluated by filtering of the measured current, an incorrect trip during energization of the transformer may result if very short delay times are set. The inrush current has a substantial portion of fundamental current depending on the type and size of the transformer that is being energized. The inrush stabilization blocks tripping of all those elements for which it has been activated, as long as the inrush current is recognized. The inrush current contains a relatively large second harmonic component (twice the nominal frequency) which is nearly absent during a fault current. Numerical filters that carry out a Fourier analysis of the current are used for the frequency analysis. As soon as the harmonic content is greater than the set value (2nd InrushRest), the affected element is blocked.

Direction Determination with ZeroSequence System

Direction determination is carried out with the measured current IN (= 3I0), which is compared to the reference voltage VP. The voltage required for direction determination VP may also be calculated from the neutral current Ig of a grounded transformer (source transformer), provided that the transformer is available. It is furthermore possible to polarize with the zero sequence voltage 3V0 as well as with the neutral current Ig of a grounded transformer. The reference value VP then is the sum of the zero sequence voltage 3V0 and a value which is proportional to the neutral current Ig. This value is about 20 V for rated current (Figure 2-69269). The directional polarization using the transformer neutral current is independent of voltage transformers and therefore also functions reliably during a fault in the voltage transformer secondary circuit faults. It is, however, a requirement that at least a substantial amount of the ground fault current flows via the transformer that is measured. Determination of direction requires a minimum current 3I0 and a minimum displacement voltage which can be set as 67N (3Vo). If the displacement voltage is too small, the direction can only be determined if it is polarized with the transformer neutral current exceeding a minimum value corresponding to the setting 67N (Ig). The direction determination with 3V0 is inhibited if a trip of the voltage transformer mcb is reported via binary input.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

161

2 Functions

Figure 2-69

Directional characteristic of the ground fault protection

Direction Determination with Negative Phase-Sequence System

It is advantageous to use negative sequence system values for the direction determination if the resulting zero sequence voltages during ground faults are too small for an accurate measurement or when the zero sequence values are subject to interference by for example mutual coupling from a parallel line. It can also be used if the zero sequence voltage is not available at the device. Otherwise this function operates the same as the direction determination with zero sequence current and zero sequence voltage. Instead of 3 I0 and 3 V0 the negative sequence signals 3 I2 and 3 V2 are simply used for the measurement. These signals must also have a minimum magnitude of 67N (3I2) or 67N (3V2). It is also possible to determine the direction with a zero sequence system or a negative sequence system. In this case the device determines whether the zero sequence quantity (VP according to Figure 2-69) is larger, or the negative sequence voltage. The direction is determined by the larger of the two values.

Direction Determination with Compensated Zero Sequence System Power

The zero-sequence power may also be used for direction determination. In this case the sign of the compensated zero-sequence power is decisive. This is the zero-sequence power component as mentioned in the above paragraph Zero-Sequence Power Sr in direction of a configurable compensation angle comp, i.e. Sr = 3I0 3V0 cos( Comp) The direction determination yields forward if Sr is positive and Sr > S FORWARD, reverse if Sr is negative and |Sr| > S REVERSE. Direction determination requires a minimum current 3I0 and a minimum displacement voltage which can be set as 67N (3Vo). The prerequisite is still that the compensated zero-sequence power has a configurable minimum magnitude. The direction determination is also inhibited when a trip of the voltage transformer mcb is reported via binary input. Figure 2-70 gives an example for the directional characteristic.

162

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.7 Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N (optional)

Figure 2-70

Directional characteristic with zero sequence power, example Sr = setting value S FORWARD

Selection of the Faulted Phase

Since the ground fault protection employs the quantities of the zero sequence system and the negative sequence system, the faulted phase cannot be determined directly. To enable single-pole automatic reclosure in case of high-resistance ground faults, the ground fault protection function features a phase selector. By means of the distribution of the currents and voltages it detects whether a fault is single-phase or multiplephase. If the fault is single-phase, it locates the faulted phase. Once a multi-phase fault has been detected, a three-pole trip command is generated. Three-pole tripping is also initiated if single-pole tripping is not permitted (due to the setting or three-pole coupling of other internal extra functions or external devices via binary input e.g., reclosing device). The phase selector evaluates the phase-to-ground voltages, the phase currents and the symmetrical components of the currents. If a single-phase fault can be detected with certainty due to a considerable voltage collapse or a high overcurrent, the trip is initiated in the concerned phase. Three-pole tripping is initiated accordingly if the currents and/or voltages indicate a multi-phase fault. If methods described cannot detect the fault type beyond doubt, the negative sequence system and the zero sequence system are ultimately filtered out of the phase currents. The phase angle between negative sequence current and zero sequence current is used to determine the fault type i.e. whether the fault is single-phase or multi-phase. To this end, the phase currents are also evaluated to rectify the load current if necessary. This method relies on the fact that in the event of a single phase fault the fault-free phases can conduct either no fault currents at all or only such fault currents that are approximately in phase. The phase selector has an action time of approximately 40 ms. If the phase selector has not made a decision during this time, three-pole tripping is initiated. Three-pole tripping is initiated anyway as soon as a multi-pole fault has been detected, as described above. Figure 2-71 shows the logic diagram. The phase determined by the phase selector can be processed selectively for each phase, for example the internal information 85 67NPickupA etc. is used for phase-selective signal transmission.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

163

2 Functions

External signaling of the phase-selective pickup is accomplished via the information 50N/51N A sel. etc. They appear only if the phase was clearly detected. Single-pole tripping requires of course the general prerequisites to be fulfilled (device must be suited for single-pole tripping, single-pole tripping allowed).

Figure 2-71

Logic diagram of single-pole tripping with phase selector

Blocking

Tripping of the ground fault protection can be blocked by the distance protection. If then the distance protection detects a fault, the ground fault protection will not be tripped. This gives the selective fault clearance by the distance protection preference over tripping by the ground fault protection. The blocking can be restricted by configuration to single-phase or multi-phase faults and to faults in distance zone Z1 or Z1/Z1B. The blocking only affects the time sequence and tripping by the ground fault protection function and after the cause of the blocking has been cleared, it is maintained for approximately 40 ms to prevent signal race conditions. It is issued as fault indication 50N/51N TripBLK (no. 1335). The ground fault protection can also be blocked during the single-pole dead time of an automatic reclose cycle. This prevents an incorrect measurement resulting from the zero sequence current and voltage signals arising in this state. The blocking affects the entire protection function and is maintained for approximately 40 ms after reclosure to prevent signal race conditions. It is issued as fault indication 50N/51N BLOCK (no. 1332).

164

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.7 Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N (optional)

If the device is combined with an external automatic reclose device or if single-pole tripping can result from a separate (parallel tripping) protection device, the ground fault protection must be blocked via binary input during the single-pole open condition. Switching onto a Ground Fault The line energization detection can be used to achieve quick tripping when energizing the circuit breaker in case of a ground fault. The ground fault protection can then trip three-pole without delay. Parameters can be set to determine for which element(s) the non-delayed tripping following energization apply (see also logic diagrams from Figure 2-63263 to Figure 265). The non-delayed tripping in case of line energization detection is blocked as long as the inrush-stabilization recognizes a rush current. This prevents instantaneous tripping by an element which, under normal conditions, is sufficiently delayed during energization of a transformer.

2.7.2
General

Setting Notes
During configuration of the device scope of functions (refer to Section 2.1.1, address 131 50N/51N Gnd.O/C) it was determined which group of characteristics are available. Only those parameters that apply to the available characteristics, according to the selected configuration and the version of the device, are accessible in the procedures described below. Parameter 3101 FCT 50N/51N Gnd can be used to switch the ground fault protection ON or OFF. This refers to all functions of the ground fault protection. If not required, each of the four elements can be deactivated by setting its MODE... to Inactive (see below).

Blocking

The ground fault protection can be blocked by the distance protection to give preference to the selective fault clearance by the distance protection over tripping by the ground fault protection. Address 3102 BLOCK for Dist. determines whether blocking is done during each fault detection of the distance protection (every PICKUP) or only during single-phase fault detection by the distance protection (1phase PICKUP) or only during multiple-phase fault detection by the distance protection (multiph. PICKUP). If blocking is not desired, set NO. It is also possible to block the ground-fault protection trip only for pickup of the distance protection on the protected line section. To block the ground fault protection for faults occurring within zone Z1, set address 3174 BLK for DisZone to in zone Z1. To block the ground fault protection for faults occurring within zone Z1 or Z1B, set address 3174 BLK for DisZone to in zone Z1/Z1B. If, however, blocking of the ground fault protection by the distance protection is to take effect regardless of the fault location, set address 3174 BLK for DisZone to in each zone. Address 3102 thus refers to the fault type and address 3174 to the fault location. The two blocking options create an AND condition. To block the ground fault protection only for single-phase faults occurring within zone Z1, set address 3102 BLOCK for Dist. = 1phase PICKUP and 3174 BLK for DisZone = in zone Z1. To block the ground fault protection for any fault type (any distance protection pickup) occurring within zone Z1, the setting 3102 BLOCK for Dist. = every PICKUP and 3174 BLK for DisZone = in zone Z1 applies. The ground fault protection must be blocked during single-pole automatic reclose dead time, to avoid pickup with the false zero sequence values and, if applicable, the negative sequence values arising during this state (address 3103 BLOCK

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

165

2 Functions

1pDeadTim). The setting YES (default setting for devices with single-pole tripping) is required if single-pole automatic reclosure is to be carried out. Otherwise set NO. Setting parameter 3103 BLOCK 1pDeadTim to YES completely blocks the ground fault protection if the Open-Pole Detector has recognized a single-pole dead time. If no single-pole tripping is carried out in the protected network, it is absolutely necessary to set this parameter to NO. Regardless of how parameter address 3103 BLOCK 1pDeadTim is set, the ground fault protection will always be blocked during the single-pole dead time, if it has issued a trip command itself. This is necessary because otherwise the picked up ground fault protection cannot drop out if the fault current was caused by load current. Trip Address 3109 50N/51N Trip 1p specifies that the ground fault protection trips single pole, provided that the faulted phase can be determined with certainty. This address is only valid for devices that have the option to trip single-pole. If you are using single-pole automatic reclosure, the setting YES (default setting) remains valid. Otherwise set NO. The mode for each element is set: address 3110 50N-1 Op. Mode, address 3120 50N-2 Op. Mode and address 3130 50N-3 Op. Mode. Each element can be set to operate Forward (usually towards line), Reverse (usually towards busbar) or Non-Directional (in both directions). If a single element is not required, set its mode to Inactive. The definite time elements 50N-1 PICKUP (address 3111), 50N-2 PICKUP (address 3121) and 50N-3 PICKUP (address 3131) can be used for a three-element definite time overcurrent protection. They can also be combined with the inverse time element 51N PICKUP (address 3141, see below). The pickup thresholds should in general be selected such that the most sensitive element picks up with the smallest expected ground fault current. The 50N-2 and 50N1 elements are best suited for fast tripping elements (instantaneous), as these elements use an abridged filter with shorter response time. On the other hand, the elements 50N-3 and 51N are best suited for very sensitive ground fault detection due to their effective method of suppressing harmonics. If no inverse time element but rather a fourth definite time element is required, the inverse time element can be implemented as a definite time element. This must already be taken into account during the configuration of the protection functions (refer to Subsection 2.1.1.2, address 131 50N/51N Gnd.O/C = Definite Time). For this element, the address 3141 51N PICKUP then determines the current pickup threshold and address 3147 Add.T-DELAY the definite time delay. The values for the time delay settings 50N-1 TimeDELAY (address 3112), 50N-2 TimeDELAY (address 3122) and 50N-3 TimeDELAY (address 3132) are derived from the ground fault grading coordination diagram of the system. During the selection of the current and time settings, the user must consider whether an element should be directional and whether it uses pilot protection. Refer also to the margin headings Determination of Direction and Pilot Protection with Ground Fault Protection. The set time delays are additional delays, which do not include the operating time (measuring time).

Definite Time Elements

166

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.7 Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N (optional)

Inverse Time Element IEC Characteristic

Also for the inverse time overcurrent element the operating mode is initially set: address 3140 51N Op. Mode. The element can be set to operate Forward (usually towards line), Reverse (usually towards busbar) or Non-Directional (in both directions). If the element is not required, set its mode to Inactive. For the inverse time overcurrent element 51N it is possible to select from a variety of characteristics depending on the version and the configuration of the relay (Section 2.1.1.2, address 131) that was selected. If an inverse overcurrent element is not required, set address 131 50N/51N Gnd.O/C = Definite Time. The 51N element can then be used as a fourth definite time element (refer to Definite Time Elements above) or deactivated. With the IEC characteristics (address 131 50N/51N Gnd.O/C = ) the following options are available at address 3151 IEC Curve: Normal Inverse (inverse, type A according to IEC 602553), Very Inverse (very inverse, type B according to IEC 602553), Extremely Inv. (extremely inverse, type C according to IEC 602553), and LongTimeInverse (longtime, type B according to IEC 602553). The characteristics and equations they are based on are listed in the Technical Data. The setting of the pickup threshold 51N PICKUP (address 3141) is similar to the setting of definite time elements (see above). In this case it must be noted that a safety margin between the pickup threshold and the set value has already been incorporated. Pickup only occurs at a current which is approximately 10 % above the set value. The time multiplier setting 51N Time Dial (address 3143) is derived from the grading coordination chart which was set up for ground faults in the system. In addition to the inverse current time delay, a constant (fixed length) time delay can also be set if required. The setting Add.T-DELAY (address 3147) is added to the time of the set curve. During the selection of the current and time settings, regard must be taken as to whether an element should be directional and whether it uses pilot protection. Refer also to the margin headings Determination of Direction and Pilot Protection with Ground Fault Protection.

Inverse Time Element with ANSI Characteristic

Also for the inverse time overcurrent element the operating mode is set first: address 3140 51N Op. Mode. The element can be set to operate Forward (usually towards line), Reverse (usually towards busbar) or Non-Directional (in both directions). If the element is not required, set its mode to Inactive. For the inverse time overcurrent element 51N it is possible to select from a variety of characteristics depending on the version of the relay and the configuration (Section 2.1.1, address 131) that was selected. If an inverse overcurrent element is not required, set address 131 50N/51N Gnd.O/C = Definite Time. The 51N element can then be used as a fourth definite time element (refer to Definite Time Elements above). With the ANSI characteristics (address 131 50N/51N Gnd.O/C = TOC ANSI) the following is made available in address 3152 ANSI Curve: Inverse, Short Inverse, Long Inverse, Moderately Inv., Very Inverse, Extremely Inv.,

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

167

2 Functions

Definite Inv.. The characteristics and equations are listed in the Technical Data. The setting of the pickup threshold 51N PICKUP (address 3141) is similar to the setting of definite time elements (see above). In this case it is considered that a safety margin between the pickup threshold and the set value has already been incorporated. Pickup only occurs at a current which is approximately 10 % above the set value. The time multiplier setting 51N Time Dial (address 3144) is derived from the grading coordination chart which was set up for ground faults in the system. In addition to the inverse time delay, a constant (fixed length) time delay can also be set if this is required. The setting Add.T-DELAY (address 3147) is added to the time of the set curve. During the selection of the current and time settings, it must be considered whether an element should be directional and whether it uses pilot protection. Refer also to the margin headings Determination of Direction and Pilot Protection with Ground Fault Protection. Inverse Time Element with Logarithmic Inverse Characteristic If you have configured the inverse time overcurrent element with the logarithmic inverse characteristic (address 131 50N/51N Gnd.O/C = ), the operating mode is set first: address 3140 51N Op. Mode. The element can be set to operate Forward (usually towards line), Reverse (usually towards busbar) or Non-Directional (in both directions). If the element is not required, set its mode to Inactive. For the logarithmic inverse characteristic (address 131 50N/51N Gnd.O/C = ) the setting of address is 3153 ANSI Curve = Log. inverse. The characteristics and equations are listed in the Technical Data. Figure 2-72illustrates the influence of the most important setting parameters on the curve. 51N PICKUP (address 3141) is the reference value for all current values, while 51N Startpoint (address 3154) determines the beginning of the curve, i.e. the lowest operating range on the current axis (referred to 51N PICKUP). The timer setting 51N Max.T-DELAY (address 3146) determines the starting point of the curve (for 51N = 51N PICKUP). The time factor 51N Time Dial (address 3145) changes the slope of the curve. For large currents, 51N Min.T-DELAY (address 3142) determines the lower limit on the time axis. For currents larger than 30 51N PICKUP the operating time no longer decreases. Finally in address 3147 Add.T-DELAY a fixed time delay can be set as for other curves. During the selection of the current and time settings, it must be considered whether an element should be directional and whether it uses pilot protection. Refer also to the margin headings Determination of Direction and Pilot Protection with Ground Fault Protection.

168

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.7 Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N (optional)

Figure 2-72

Curve parameters in the logarithmicinverse characteristic

Zero Sequence Voltage Element with Inverse Characteristic

If you have configured the zero sequence voltage element (address 131 50N/51N Gnd.O/C = ), the operating mode is set first: address 3140 51N Op. Mode. The element can be set to operate Forward (usually towards line), Reverse (usually towards busbar) or Non-Directional (in both directions). If the element is not required, set its mode to Inactive. Address 3141 51N PICKUP indicates the minimum current value above which this element is required to operate. The value must be exceeded by the minimum ground fault current value. The voltage-controlled characteristic is based on the following formula:

V0 is the actual zero sequence voltage. V0 min is the setting value V0inv. minimum (address 3183). Please take into consideration that the formula is based on the zero sequence voltage V0, not on 3V0. The function is illustrated in the Technical Data. Figure 2-73 shows the most important parameters. V0inv. minimum displaces the voltage-controlled characteristic in direction of 3V0. The set value is the asymptote for this characteristic (t ). In Figure 2-73, a' shows an asymptote that belongs to the characteristic a. The minimum voltage 59G-V0inv 3V0> (address 3182) is the lower voltage threshold. It corresponds to the line c in Figure 2-73. In characteristic b (asymptote not drawn) the curve is cut by the minimum voltage 59G-V0inv 3V0> (line c). An additional time 3184 can be set for directional-controlled tripping at address T forw. (V0inv) that is added to the voltage-controlled characteristic. With the non-directional time T rev. (V0inv) (address 3185) a non-directional back-up element can be generated.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

169

2 Functions

Figure 2-73

Characteristic settings of the zero-sequence voltage time element - without additional times

Zero-Sequence Power Element

If you have configured the fourth element as zero-sequence power element (address 131 50N/51N Gnd.O/C = ), set the mode first: address 3140 51N Op. Mode. This element can be set to operate Forward (usually towards line) or Reverse (usually towards busbar) or Non-Directional (in both directions). If the element is not required, set its mode to Inactive. The zero-sequence power protection is to operate always in line direction. Address 3141 51N PICKUP indicates the minimum current value above which this element is required to operate. The value must be exceeded by the minimum ground fault current value. The zero-sequence power Sr is calculated according to the formula: Sr = 3I0 3V0 cos( Comp) The angle Comp is set as maximum-sensitivity angle at address 3168 PHI comp. It refers to the zero-sequence voltage in relation to the zero-sequence current. The default setting 255 thus corresponds to a zero sequence impedance angle of 75 (255 180). Refer also to margin heading Zero Sequence Power Protection. The trip time depends on the zero sequence power according to the following formula:

Where Sr is the compensated power according to above formula. Sref is the setting value S ref (address 3156) that indicates the pickup value of the element at = comp. Factor k (address 3155) can be set to displace the zero sequence time characteristic in time direction, the reference value S ref can be set for displacement in power direction. The time setting Add.T-DELAY (address 3147) allows an additional power-independent delay time to be set.

170

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.7 Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N (optional)

Determination of Direction

The direction of each required element was already determined when setting the different element. According to the requirements of the application, the directionality of each element is individually selected. If, for instance, a directional ground fault protection with a nondirectional back-up element is required, this can be implemented by setting the 50N 2 element directional with a short or no delay time and the 50N3 element with the same pickup threshold, but a longer delay time as directional backup element. The 50N1 element could be applied as an additional high set instantaneous element. If an element is to operate with pilot protection according to Section 2.8, it may operate without delay in conjunction with a permissive scheme. In the blocking scheme, a short delay equal to the signal transmission time, plus a small reserve margin of approx. 20 ms is sufficient. Direction determination of the overcurrent elements usually uses the ground current as measured quantity IN = 3I0, whose angle is compared with a reference quantity. The desired reference quantity is set in 67N POLARIZAT. (address 3160): The default setting Vo + Ig or V2 is universal. The device then selects automatically whether the reference quantity is composed of the zero sequence voltage plus the transformer neutral current, or whether the negative-sequence voltage is used, depending on which quantity prevails. You can even apply this setting when no transformer neutral current Ig is connected to the device since an unconnected current does not have any effect. The setting Vo + Ig can also be applied with or without transformer neutral current connected. If the direction determination must be carried out using only Ig as reference signal, apply the setting with Ig only. This makes sense if a reliable transformer starpoint current Ig is always available at the device input I4. The direction determination is then not influenced by disturbances in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformers. This presupposes that the device is equipped with a current input I4 of normal sensitivity and that the current from the transformer neutral infeed is connected to I4. If direction determination is to be carried out using exclusively the negative sequence system signals 3I2 and 3V2, the setting with V2 and I2 is applied. In this case, only the negative-sequence signals calculated by the device are used for direction determination. In that case, the device does not require any zero-sequence signals for direction determination. If you are using the zero-sequence power protection (address 131 50N/51N Gnd.O/C = ), it is reasonable to conduct the direction determination also via the zerosequence power. In this case apply the option zero seq. power for 67N POLARIZAT.. Finally, the threshold values of the reference quantities must be set. 67N (3Vo) (address 3164) determines the minimum operating voltage for direction determination with V0. If V0 is not used for the direction determination, this setting is of no consequence. The set threshold should not be exceeded by asymmetries in the operational measured voltage. The setting value relates to the triple zero-sequence voltage, that is 3V0 = |VA + VB + VC| If the voltage dependent characteristic (V0 inverse) is used as directional element, it is recommended for the minimum polarizing voltage to use a value that is equal to or below the minimum voltage of the voltage-controlled characteristic (address 3182). Only if you have set in the P.System Data 1 (see Section 2.1.3.1) the connection of the fourth current transformer I4 transformer (address 220) = Ig starpoint, address 3165 67N (Ig) will appear. It is the lower threshold for the current measured

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

171

2 Functions

in the neutral of a source transformer. A relatively sensitive setting can be applied for this value, as the measurement of the neutral current is quite accurate by nature. If the direction determination must be done with the negative sequence system signals, the setting values 67N (3V2) (address 3166) and 67N (3I2) (address 3167) are decisive for the lower limit of the direction determination. The setting values must in this case also be selected such that operational asymmetry in the system does not lead to a pickup. If you are using the zero-sequence power protection and the fault direction is determined on the basis of the zero-sequence power, address 3169 S forward indicates the value of the compensated zero-sequence power above which the direction is recognized as forward. This value should be smaller than the reference power S ref (address 3156, see above paragraph at Zero-Sequence Power Element). This ensures the availability of direction determination even with smaller zero-sequence power conditions. The position of the directional characteristic can be changed in dependence of the selected method of direction determination (address 3160 67N POLARIZAT., see above). All methods based on angle measurement between measured signal and reference signal (i.e. all methods except 67N POLARIZAT. = zero seq. power), allow the angle range of the direction determination to be changed with the setting angles 67N ALPHA and 67N BETA (addresses 3162 and 3163). This parameter can only be altered with DIGSI under Display Additional Settings. As these set values are not critical, the presettings may be left unchanged. If you want to change these values, refer to margin heading Direction Determination with Zero-Sequence System for the angle determination. The direction determination 67N POLARIZAT. with zero seq. power determines the directional characteristic by means of the compensation angle PHI comp (address 3168) which indicates the symmetry axis of the directional characteristic. This value is also not critical for direction determination. For information on the angle definition, refer to margin heading Direction Determination with Zero-Sequence Power. This angle determines at the same time the maximum sensitivity of the zero-sequence power element thus also affecting indirectly the trip time as described above (margin heading Zero-Sequence Power Element). Pilot Protection with Ground Fault Protection The ground fault protection in the 7SA522 may be expanded to a directional comparison protection using the integrated pilot protection logic. Additional information regarding the available pilot protection schemes and their mode of operation may be obtained from Section 2.8. If this is to be used, certain preconditions must be observed when setting the ground current element. Initially, it must be determined which element must interact with the pilot protection. This element must be set directional in the line direction. If, for example, the 50N> element should operate as directional comparison, set address 3130 50N-3 Op. Mode = Forward (see above Definite Time Elements). Furthermore, the device must be informed that the applicable element has to function together with the pilot protection to allow undelayed release of the tripping during internal faults. For the 50N3 element this means that address 3133 50N-3 Pilot/BI is set to YES. The time delay set for this element 50N-3 TimeDELAY (address 3132) then functions as a back-up element, e.g. during failure of the signal transmission. For the remaining elements the corresponding setting parameter is set to NO, therefore, in this example: Address 3123 50N-2 Pilot/BI for element 50N-2, address 3113 50N-1 Pilot/BI for element 50N-1, address 3148 51N Pilot/BI for element 51N (if used).

172

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.7 Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N (optional)

If the echo function is used in conjunction with the pilot protection scheme, or if the weak-infeed tripping function should be used, the additional pilot protection element 3I0Min Pilot P. (address 3105) must be set to avoid non-selective tripping during through-fault ground current measurement. For further information refer to Section 2.8, margin heading Ground Fault Protection Prerequisites. Switching onto a Fault It is possible to determine with a setting which element trips without delay following closure onto a dead fault. The parameters 50N-1 SOTF-Trip (address 3114), 50N2 SOTF-Trip (address 3124), 50N-3 SOTF-Trip (address 3134) and if necessary 51N SOTF-Trip (address 3149) are available for the elements, which can be set to YES or NO for each element. Selection of the most sensitive element is usually not reasonable as a solid fault may be assumed following switching onto a fault, whereas the most sensitive element often also has to detect high resistance faults. It is important to avoid that the selected element picks up in a transient way during line energization. On the other hand, it does not matter if a selected element picks up on inrush conditions on transformers. The switch-onto-fault tripping of an element is blocked by the inrush stabilization even if it is set as instantaneous switch-onto-fault element for manual closure. To avoid a spurious pickup due to transient overcurrents, the delay SOTF Time DELAY (address 3173) can be set. Usually, the default setting 0 can be retained. In the case of long cables, where large peak inrush currents can occur, a short delay may be useful. The time delay depends on the severity and duration of the transient overcurrents as well as on which elements were selected for the fast switch onto fault clearance. With the parameter SOTF Op. Mode (address 3172) it is finally possible to determine whether the fault direction must be checked (PICKUP+DIRECT.) or not (PICKUP), before a switch-onto-fault tripping is generated. It is the direction setting for each element that applies for this direction check. Phase Current Stabilization To avoid a faulty pickup of the elements in the case of asymmetrical load conditions or varying current transformer measuring errors in grounded systems, the ground current elements are stabilized by the phase currents: As the phase currents increase, the pickup thresholds are increased. By means of the setting in address 3104 IphSTAB. Slope the preset value of 10 % for all elements can be jointly changed for all elements. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at "Display Additional Settings". The inrush stabilization is only required if the device is applied to transformer feeders or on lines that connect to a transformer; in this case also only for such elements that have a pickup threshold below the inrush current and have a very short or zero delay. The parameters 50N-1 InrushBlk (address 3115), 50N-2 InrushBlk (address 3125), 50N-3 InrushBlk (address 3135) and 51N InrushBlk (address 3150) can be set to YES (inrush stabilization active) or NO (inrush stabilization inactive) for each element. If the inrush stabilization has been disabled for all elements, the following parameters are of no consequence. For the recognition of the inrush current, the portion of second harmonic current content referred to the fundamental current component can be set in address 3170 2nd InrushRest. Above this threshold the inrush blocking is effective. The preset value (15 %) should be sufficient in most cases. Lower values imply higher sensitivity of the inrush blocking (smaller portion of second harmonic current results in blocking). In applications on transformers or lines that connect to transformers it may be assumed that, if very large currents occur, a fault has occurred in front of the transformer. In the event of such large currents, the inrush stabilization is inhibited. This

Inrush Stabilization

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

173

2 Functions

threshold value which is set in the address 3171 Imax InrushRest, should be larger than the maximum expected inrush current (RMS value).

2.7.3

Settings
Addresses which have an appended "A" can only be changed with DIGSI, under "Display Additional Settings". The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding secondary nominal current of the current transformer.

Addr. 3101 3102

Parameter FCT 50N/51N Gnd BLOCK for Dist.

C ON OFF

Setting Options

Default Setting ON every PICKUP

Comments 50N/51N Ground Overcurrent is Block 50N/51N for Distance protection

every PICKUP 1phase PICKUP multiph. PICKUP NO YES NO 0 .. 30 % 1A 5A 0.01 .. 1.00 A 0.05 .. 5.00 A 0.003 .. 1.000 A 0.015 .. 5.000 A YES NO Forward Reverse Non-Directional Inactive 1A 5A 0.05 .. 25.00 A 0.25 .. 125.00 A 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; NO YES NO YES NO YES Forward Reverse Non-Directional Inactive 1A 5A 0.05 .. 25.00 A 0.25 .. 125.00 A

3103 3104A 3105

BLOCK 1pDeadTim Iph-STAB. Slope 3I0Min Pilot P.

YES 10 % 0.50 A 2.50 A 0.500 A 2.500 A YES Inactive

Block 50N/51N for 1pole Dead time Stabilisation Slope with Iphase 3I0-Min threshold for Pilot Prot.schemes 3I0-Min threshold for PilotProt. schemes Single pole trip with ground flt.prot. Operating mode

3105

3I0Min Pilot P.

1A 5A

3109 3110

50N/51N Trip 1p 50N-1 Op. Mode

3111

50N-1 PICKUP

4.00 A 20.00 A 0.30 sec NO NO NO Inactive

Pickup

3112 3113 3114 3115 3120

50N-1 TimeDELAY 50N-1 Pilot/BI 50N-1 SOTF-Trip 50N-1 InrushBlk 50N-2 Op. Mode

Time Delay Instantaneous trip via Pilot Prot./BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault Inrush Blocking Operating mode

3121

50N-2 PICKUP

2.00 A 10.00 A

Pickup

174

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.7 Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N (optional)

Addr. 3122 3123 3124 3125 3130

Parameter 50N-2 TimeDELAY 50N-2 Pilot/BI 50N-2 SOTF-Trip 50N-2 InrushBlk 50N-3 Op. Mode

Setting Options 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; NO YES NO YES NO YES Forward Reverse Non-Directional Inactive

Default Setting 0.60 sec NO NO NO Inactive

Comments Time Delay Instantaneous trip via Pilot Prot./BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault Inrush Blocking Operating mode

3131

50N-3 PICKUP

1A 5A

0.05 .. 25.00 A 0.25 .. 125.00 A 0.003 .. 25.000 A 0.015 .. 125.000 A 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; NO YES NO YES NO YES Forward Reverse Non-Directional Inactive

1.00 A 5.00 A 1.000 A 5.000 A 0.90 sec NO NO NO Inactive

Pickup

3131

50N-3 PICKUP

1A 5A

Pickup

3132 3133 3134 3135 3140

50N-3 TimeDELAY 50N-3 Pilot/BI 50N-3 SOTF-Trip 50N-3 InrushBlk 51N Op. Mode

Time Delay Instantaneous trip via Pilot Prot./BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault Inrush Blocking Operating mode

3141

51N PICKUP

1A 5A

0.05 .. 25.00 A 0.25 .. 125.00 A 0.003 .. 25.000 A 0.015 .. 125.000 A 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.05 .. 3.00 sec; 0.50 .. 15.00 ; 0.05 .. 15.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; NO YES NO YES NO YES

1.00 A 5.00 A 1.000 A 5.000 A 1.20 sec 0.50 sec 5.00 1.35 sec 5.80 sec 1.20 sec NO NO NO

Pickup

3141

51N PICKUP

1A 5A

Pickup

3142 3143 3144 3145 3146 3147 3148 3149 3150

51N Min.T-DELAY 51N Time Dial 51N Time Dial 51N Time Dial 51N Max.T-DELAY Add.T-DELAY 51N Pilot/BI 51N SOTF-Trip 51N InrushBlk

Minimum Time Delay Time Dial Time Dial Time Dial Maximum Time Delay Additional Time Delay Instantaneous trip via Pilot Prot./BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault Inrush Blocking

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

175

2 Functions

Addr. 3151

Parameter IEC Curve

Setting Options Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inv. LongTimeInverse Inverse Short Inverse Long Inverse Moderately Inv. Very Inverse Extremely Inv. Definite Inv. Log. inverse 1.0 .. 4.0 0.00 .. 3.00 sec

Default Setting Normal Inverse

Comments IEC Curve

3152

ANSI Curve

Inverse

ANSI Curve

3153 3154 3155 3156

LOG Curve 51N Startpoint k S ref 1A 5A

Log. inverse 1.1 0.50 sec 10 VA 50 VA Vo + Ig or V2

LOGARITHMIC Curve 51N Start point of inverse charact. k-factor for Sr-characteristic S ref for Sr-characteristic

1 .. 100 VA 5 .. 500 VA Vo + Ig or V2 Vo + Ig with Ig only with V2 and I2 zero seq. power 0 .. 360 0 .. 360 0.5 .. 10.0 V

3160

67N POLARIZAT.

Polarization

3162A 3163A 3164 3165

67N ALPHA 67N BETA 67N (3Vo) 67N (Ig) 1A 5A

338 122 0.5 V 0.05 A 0.25 A 0.5 V 0.05 A 0.25 A 255 0.3 VA 1.5 VA 15 % 7.50 A 37.50 A PICKUP+DIRECT. 0.00 sec

ALPHA, lower angle for forward direction BETA, upper angle for forward direction Min. zero seq.voltage 3Vo for polarizing Min. ground current Ig for polarizing Min. neg. seq. polarizing voltage 3V2 Min. neg. seq. polarizing current 3I2 Compensation angle PHI comp. for Sr Forward direction power treshold 2nd harmonic ratio for inrush restraint Max.Current, overriding inrush restraint Instantaneous mode after SwitchOnToFault Trip time delay after SOTF

0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.25 .. 5.00 A 0.5 .. 10.0 V

3166 3167

67N (3V2) 67N (3I2) 1A 5A

0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.25 .. 5.00 A 0 .. 360

3168 3169

PHI comp S forward 1A 5A

0.1 .. 10.0 VA 0.5 .. 50.0 VA 10 .. 45 %

3170 3171

2nd InrushRest Imax InrushRest 1A 5A

0.50 .. 25.00 A 2.50 .. 125.00 A PICKUP PICKUP+DIRECT. 0.00 .. 30.00 sec

3172 3173

SOTF Op. Mode SOTF Time DELAY

176

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.7 Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N (optional)

Addr. 3174

Parameter BLK for DisZone

Setting Options in zone Z1 in zone Z1/Z1B in each zone 1.0 .. 10.0 V 0.1 .. 5.0 V 0.00 .. 32.00 sec 0.00 .. 32.00 sec

Default Setting in each zone

Comments Block 50N/51N for Pickup 21 Setpoint 3V0> Minimum voltage V0min for T->oo Forward Time delay (V0inv) Reverse Time delay (V0inv)

3182 3183 3184 3185

59G-V0inv 3V0> V0inv. minimum T forw. (V0inv) T rev. (V0inv)

5.0 V 0.2 V 0.90 sec 1.20 sec

2.7.4
No. 1305 1307 1308 1309 1310 1331 1332 1333 1335 1336 1337 1338 1345 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370

Information List
Information >BLOCK 50N-1 >BLOCK 50N-2 >BLOCK 50N-3 >BLOCK 51N >50/1N InstTRIP 50N/51N OFF 50N/51N BLOCK 50N/51N ACTIVE 50N/51N TripBLK 50N/51N A sel. 50N/51N B sel. 50N/51N C sel. 50N/51N Pickup 50N-1 Pickup 50N-2 Pickup 50N-3 Pickup 51N Pickup 67N PU forward 67N PU reverse 50N/51N TRIP 50N/51N Trip A 50N/51N Trip B 50N/51N Trip C 50N/51N Trip 3p 50N-1 TRIP 50N-2 TRIP 50N-3 TRIP 51N TRIP 50/1N InrushPU Type of Information SP SP SP SP SP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT Comments >BLOCK 50N-1 Ground O/C >BLOCK 50N-2 Ground O/C >BLOCK 50N-3 Ground O/C >BLOCK 51N Ground O/C >50N/51N Instantaneous trip 50N / 51N Ground O/C is switched OFF 50N / 51N Ground O/C is BLOCKED 50N / 51N Ground O/C is ACTIVE 50N / 51N Ground O/C trip is BLOCKED 50N / 51N phase selector Ph.A selected 50N / 51N phase selector Ph.B selected 50N / 51N phase selector Ph.C selected 50N / 51N PICKED UP 50N-1 PICKED UP 50N-2 PICKED UP 50N-3 PICKED UP 51N PICKED UP 67N picked up FORWARD 67N picked up REVERSE 50N / 51N General TRIP command 50N / 51N: Trip 1pole Ph.A 50N / 51N: Trip 1pole Ph.B 50N / 51N: Trip 1pole Ph.C 50N / 51N: Trip 3pole 50N-1 TRIP 50N-2 TRIP 50N-3 TRIP 51N TRIP 50N/51N Inrush picked up

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

177

2 Functions

2.8
2.8.1

Pilot Protection for Ground Fault Protection 85-67N (optional)

General
With the aid of the integrated comparison logic, the directional ground fault protection according to Section 2.7 can be expanded to a directional comparison protection scheme.

Transmission Modes

One of the elements which must be directional Forward is used for the directional comparison. This element can only trip fast if a fault is also recognized in the forward direction at the other line end. A release (unblock) signal or a block signal can be transmitted. The following permissive schemes exist: Directional comparison, Directional unblock scheme and blocking scheme: Blocking of the directional element. Further elements may be implemented as directional and/or nondirectional backup elements.

Transmission Channels

For the signal transmission, one channel in each direction is required. Fibre optic connections or voice frequency modulated high frequency channels via pilot cables, power line carrier or microwave radio links can be used for this purpose. If the same transmission channel is used as by the distance protection, the transmission mode must also be the same! If the device is equipped with an optional protection data interface, digital communication lines can be used for signal processing; these include: Fibre optic cables, communication networks or dedicated lines. The following pilot protection scheme is suited for these kinds of transmission: Directional comparison 7SA522 allows also the transmission of phase-selective signals. This presents the advantage that single-pole automatic reclosure can be carried out even when two singlephase faults occur on different lines in the system. Where the digital protection data interface is used, the signal transmission is always phase segregated. If no singlephase fault is recognized, the signals are transmitted for all three phases. Phase-segregated transmission for the ground fault protection is only reasonable if the faulted phase is detected by the phase selector (address 3109 50N/51N Trip 1p set to YES, see also Section 2.7 at Tripping). The pilot protection schemes are also suited to three terminal lines. In this case, signal transmission channels are required from each of the three ends to each of the others in both directions. Phase segregated transmission is only possible for three terminal line applications if digital communication channels are used. During disturbances on the transmission path, the pilot protection supplement may be blocked. With conventional signal transmission schemes, the disturbance is signalled by a binary input, with digital communication it is detected automatically by the protection device.

178

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.8 Pilot Protection for Ground Fault Protection 85-67N (optional)

Activation and Deactivation

The comparison function can be switched on and off by means of the parameter 3201 FCT 85-67N, via the system interface (if available) and via binary input (if allocated). The switched state is saved internally (refer to Figure 2-74) and secured against loss of auxiliary supply. It is only possible to switch on from the source where previously it switched off. To be active, it is necessary that the function is not switched off from one of the three switching sources.

Figure 2-74

Activation and deactivation of the signal transmission logic

2.8.2

Directional Comparison Pickup

The following procedure is suited for both conventional and digital transmission media.

Principle

The directional comparison scheme is a permissive (release scheme). The scheme functionality is shown in Figure 2-75. When the ground fault protection recognizes a fault in the forward direction, it initially sends a permissive signal to the opposite line end. If a permissive signal is also received from the opposite end, a trip signal is routed to the trip logic. Accordingly it is a prerequisite for fast tripping that the fault is recognized in the forward direction at both line ends. The send signal can be extended by TS (settable). The prolongation of the send signal only comes into effect if the protection has already issued a trip command. This ensures that the permissive signal releases the opposite line end even if the ground fault is very rapidly cleared by a different independent protection.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

179

2 Functions

Figure 2-75

Operation scheme of the directional comparison pickup

Sequence

Figure 2-76 shows the logic diagram of the directional comparison scheme for one line end. The directional comparison only functions for faults in the forward direction. Accordingly the overcurrent element intended for operation in the direction comparison mode must definitely be set to Forward (3I0... DIRECTION); refer also to Subsection 2.7 at the margin heading Pilot Protection with Ground Fault Protection. On two terminal lines, the signal transmission may be phase segregated. Send and receive circuits in this case are applied to each phase. On three terminal lines, the transmit signal is sent to both opposite line ends. The receive signals are then combined with a logical AND gate, as all three line ends must transmit a send signal during an internal fault. With the setting parameter Line Config. (address 3202) the device is informed as to whether it has one or two opposite line ends. If the parameter 85-67N PilotGnd (address 132) is set to SIGNALv.ProtInt and the parameter NUMBER OF RELAY (address 147) is set to 3 relays, the device is informed about two remote ends. The default setting is 2 relays, which corresponds to one remote end. The occurrence of erroneous signals resulting from transients during clearance of external faults or from direction reversal resulting during the clearance of faults on parallel lines, is filtered by the Transient Blocking (see margin heading Transient Blocking). On lines where there is only a single infeed or where the neutral is only grounded behind one line end, the line end without zero sequence current cannot generate a permissive signal, as fault detection does not take place there. To also ensure tripping by the directional comparison in this case the device has special features. This Weakinfeed tripping (echo function) is referred to at margin heading Echo Function. It is activated when a signal is received from the opposite line end - in the case of three terminal lines from at least one of the opposite line ends - without the device having detected a fault. The circuit breaker can also be tripped at the line end with no or only weak infeed. This Weak-infeed tripping is referred to in Subsection 2.9.1.

180

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.8 Pilot Protection for Ground Fault Protection 85-67N (optional)

Figure 2-76

Logic diagram of the directional comparison scheme (one line end)

Figure 2-77 and 2-78 shows the logic diagram of the directional comparison scheme for one line end with protection interface. For ground fault protection, only directional comparison pickup is offered for transmission via protection interface. The directional comparison pickup scheme is only effective if the parameter 132 85-67N PilotGnd was set to SIGNALv.ProtInt in all devices of the setup. In the event of a fault, the indication Par. different is output.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

181

2 Functions

Figure 2-77

Logic diagram of the directional comparison scheme with protection data interface (for one device)

182

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.8 Pilot Protection for Ground Fault Protection 85-67N (optional)

Figure 2-78

Logic diagram of the directional comparison scheme with protection data interface (for one device) - continued

2.8.3

Directional Unblocking Scheme

The following scheme is suited for conventional transmission media.

Principle

The unblocking method is a permissive scheme. It differs from the directional comparison scheme in that tripping is possible also when no release signal is received from the opposite line end. It is therefore mainly used for long lines when the signal must be transmitted across the protected feeder by means of power line carrier (PLC) and the attenuation of the transmitted signal at the fault location may be so severe that reception at the other line cannot necessarily be guaranteed. The scheme functionality is shown in Figure 2-79. Two signal frequencies which are keyed by the transmit output of the 7SA522 are required for the transmission. If the transmission device has a channel monitoring, then the monitoring frequency f0 is keyed over to the working frequency fU (unblocking frequency). When the protection recognizes a ground fault in the forward direction, it initiates the transmission of the unblock frequency fU. During the quiescent state or during a ground fault in the reverse direction, the monitoring frequency f0 is transmitted.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

183

2 Functions

If the unblock frequency is received from the opposite end, a signal is routed to the trip logic. A pre-condition for fast fault clearance is therefore that the ground fault is recognized in the forward direction at both line ends. The send signal can be prolonged by TS (settable). The prolongation of the send signal only comes into effect if the protection has already issued a trip command. This ensures that the permissive signal releases the opposite line end even if the ground fault is very rapidly cleared by a different independent protection.

Figure 2-79

Operation scheme of the directional unblocking method

Sequence

Figure 2-80 shows the logic diagram of the unblocking scheme for one line end. The directional unblocking scheme only functions for faults in the forward direction. Accordingly the overcurrent element intended for operation in the directional unblocking scheme must definitely be set to Forward (3I0... DIRECTION); refer also to Subsection 2.7 at the margin heading Pilot Protection with Ground Fault Protection. On two terminal lines, the signal transmission may be phase segregated. Send and receive circuits in this case are applied to each phase. On three terminal lines, the transmit signal is sent to both opposite line ends. The receive signals are then combined with a logical AND gate, as all three line ends must transmit a send signal during an internal fault. With the setting parameter Line Config. (address 3202) the device is informed as to whether it has one or two opposite line ends. An unblock logic is inserted before the receive logic, which in essence corresponds to that of the directional comparison scheme, see Figure 2-81. If an interference free unblock signal is received, a receive signal e.g. >85-67N UB ub 1, appears and the blocking signal e.g. >85-67N UB bl 1 disappears. The internal signal Unblock 1 is forwarded to the receive logic where it initiates the release of the tripping (when all remaining conditions have been fulfilled). If the transmitted signal does not reach the other line end because the fault on the protected feeder causes too much attenuation or reflection of the transmitted signal, the unblock logic takes effect: Neither the unblocking signal >85-67N UB ub 1 nor the monitoring signal >85-67N UB bl 1 are received. In this case, the release Unblock 1 is issued after a security delay time of 20 ms and passed onto the receive logic. This release is however removed after an additional 100 ms via the timer element 100/100 ms. If the interference signal disappears again, one of the two receive signals must appear again, either >85-67N UB ub 1 or >85-67N UB

184

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.8 Pilot Protection for Ground Fault Protection 85-67N (optional)

bl 1; after a further 100 ms (dropout delay of the timer element 100/100 ms) the quiescent state is reached again i.e. the direct release path to the signal Unblock A and thereby the usual release is possible. On three terminal lines, the unblock logic can be controlled via both receive channels. If none of the signals is received for a period of more than 10 s the alarm 85-67N UB Fail1 is generated. The occurrence of erroneous signals resulting from transients during clearance of external faults or from direction reversal resulting during the clearance of faults on parallel lines, is filtered by the Transient Blocking. On lines where there is only a single infeed or where the neutral is only grounded behind one line end, the line end without zero sequence current cannot generate a permissive signal, as fault detection does not take place there. To also ensure tripping by the directional comparison in this case the device has special features. The Weakinfeed tripping (echo function) is referred to in Subsection Measures for Weak and Zero Infeed. It is activated when a signal is received from the opposite line end (two terminal) or from at least one of the opposite ends (three terminal) - without the device recognizing a ground fault. The circuit breaker can also be tripped at the line end with no or only weak infeed. This Weak-infeed tripping is referred to in Subsection 2.9.1.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

185

2 Functions

Figure 2-80

Logic diagram of the unblocking scheme (one line end)

186

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.8 Pilot Protection for Ground Fault Protection 85-67N (optional)

Figure 2-81

Unblock logic

2.8.4

Directional Blocking Scheme

The following scheme is suited for conventional transmission media.

Principle

In the case of the blocking scheme, the transmission channel is used to send a block signal from one line end to the other. The signal may be sent directly after fault inception (jump detector above dotted line), and stopped immediately, as soon as the distance protection detects a fault in the forward direction, alternatively the signal is only sent when the distance protection detects the fault in the reverse direction. It is stopped immediately as soon as the ground fault protection detects a ground fault in forward direction. Tripping is possible with this scheme even if no signal is received from the opposite line end. It is therefore mainly used for long lines when the signal

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

187

2 Functions

must be transmitted across the protected feeder by means of power line carrier (PLC) and the attenuation of the transmitted signal at the fault location may be so severe that reception at the other line cannot necessarily be guaranteed. The scheme functionality is shown in Figure 2-82. Ground faults in the forward direction cause tripping if a blocking signal is not received from the opposite line end. Due to possible differences in the pickup time delays of the devices at both line ends and due to the signal transmission time delay, the tripping must be delayed by TV in these cases. To avoid signal race conditions, a transmit signal can be extended by the settable time TS once it has been initiated.

Figure 2-82

Operation scheme of the directional blocking method

Sequence

Figure 2-83 shows the logic diagram of the blocking scheme for one line end. The element to be blocked must be set to Forward (3I0... DIRECTION); refer also to Subsection 2.7 at the margin heading Pilot Protection with Ground Fault Protection. On two terminal lines, the signal transmission may be phase segregated. Send and receive circuits in this case are applied to each phase. On three terminal lines, the transmit signal is sent to both opposite line ends. The receive signal is then combined with a logical OR gate as no blocking signal must be received from any line end during an internal fault. With the setting parameter Line Config. (address 3202) the device is informed as to whether it has one or two opposite line ends.

188

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.8 Pilot Protection for Ground Fault Protection 85-67N (optional)

Figure 2-83

Logic diagram of the blocking scheme (one line end)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

189

2 Functions

As soon as the ground fault protection has detected a fault in the reverse direction, a blocking signal is transmitted (e.g. 85-67N SEND, No. 1384). The transmitted signal may be prolonged by setting address 3203 accordingly. The blocking signal is stopped if a fault is detected in the forward direction (e.g. 85-67N BL STOP, No. 1389). Very rapid blocking is possible by transmitting also the output signal of the jump detector for measured values. To do so, the output85-67N BL Jump (No. 1390) must also be allocated to the transmitter output relay. As this jump signal appears at every measured value jump, it should only be used if the transmission channel can be relied upon to respond promptly to the disappearance of the transmitted signal. The occurrence of erroneous signals resulting from transients during clearance of external faults or from direction reversal resulting during the clearance of faults on parallel lines, is filtered by the Transient Blocking. It prolongs the blocking signal by the transient blocking time TrBlk BlockTime (address 3210), if it has been present for the minimum duration equal to the waiting time TrBlk Wait Time (address 3209). It lies in the nature of the blocking scheme that single end fed faults can also be tripped rapidly without any special measures, as the non feeding end cannot generate a blocking signal.

2.8.5

Transient Blocking
Transient blocking provides additional security against erroneous signals due to transients caused by clearance of an external fault or by fault phase reversal. The principle of transient blocking scheme is that following the incidence of an external fault, a release signal is prevented for a certain (settable) time. In the case of permissive schemes, this is achieved by blocking of the transmit and receive circuit. Figure 2-84 shows the principle of the transient blocking for a directional comparison and directional unblocking scheme. If, following fault detection, a non-directional fault or a fault in the reverse direction is determined within the waiting time TrBlk Wait Time (address 3209), the transmit circuit and the trip release are prevented. This blocking is maintained for the duration of the transient blocking time TrBlk BlockTime (address 3210) also after the reset of the blocking criterion. In the case of the blocking scheme, the transient blocking prolongs the received blocking signal as shown in the logic diagram Figure 2-83.

Figure 2-84

Transient blocking for a directional comparison and directional unblocking schemes

190

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.8 Pilot Protection for Ground Fault Protection 85-67N (optional)

2.8.6

Measures for Weak or Zero Infeed

On lines where there is only a single infeed or where the neutral is only grounded behind one line end, the line end without zero sequence current cannot generate a permissive signal, as fault detection does not take place. With the comparison schemes, using a permissive signal, fast tripping could not even be achieved at the line end with strong infeed without special measures, as the end with weak infeed does not transmit a permissive release signal. To achieve rapid tripping at both line ends under these conditions, the device has a special supplement for lines with weak zero sequence infeed. To enable even the line end with the weak infeed to trip, 7SA522 provides a weak infeed tripping supplement. This is a separate protection function with a dedicated trip command, and is described separately in Subsection 2.9.1.

Echo Function

Figure 2-85 shows the method of operation of the echo function. At address 2501 FCT Weak Infeed (Weak Infeed FunCTion) can be activated (ECHO only) or deactivated (OFF). By means of this switch the weak infeed tripping function can also be activated (ECHO and TRIP, refer also to Subsection 2.9.1). This setting is common to the pilot protection function for the distance protection and for the ground fault protection. The received signal at the line end that has no ground current is returned to the other line end as an echo by the echo function. The received echo signal at the other line end enables the release of the trip command. The detection of the weak infeed condition and accordingly the requirement for an echo are combined in an AND gate. The ground fault protection must neither be switched off nor blocked, as it would otherwise produce an echo due to lack of fault detection. The essential condition for an echo is the absence of a ground current (current element 3I0Min Pilot P.) with simultaneous receive signal from the pilot protection logic, as shown in the corresponding logic diagrams (Figure 2-76 or 2-80). To prevent the generation of an echo signal after the line has been tripped and the ground current element 3I0Min Pilot P. reset, the signal may be blocked via the binary input >85-67N BlkEcho. If the conditions for an echo signal are met, a short delay Trip/Echo DELAY is initially activated. This delay is necessary to avoid transmission of the echo if the protection at the weak line end has a longer fault detection time during reverse faults or if it picks up a little later on unfavorable fault current distribution. If however the circuit breaker at the non-feeding line end is open, this delay of the echo signal is not required. The echo delay time may then be bypassed. The circuit breaker position is provided by the central information control functions. (refer to Subsection 2.20.1). The echo impulse is then transmitted (alarm output ECHO SIGNAL), the duration of which can be set with the parameter Trip EXTENSION. The ECHO SIGNAL must be allocated separately to the output relay for transmission, as it is not contained in the transmission signal 85-67N SEND. After output of the echo pulse or during the transmission signal of the ground fault protection, a new echo can not be sent for at least 50 ms (default setting). This prevents echo repetition after the line has been opened. The echo function is not required for the blocking scheme, and is therefore ineffective.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

191

2 Functions

Figure 2-85

Logic diagram of the echo function for the ground fault protection with pilot protection

2.8.7
General

Setting Notes
The pilot protection supplement for ground fault protection is only operational if it was set to one of the available modes during the configuration of the device (address 132). Depending on this configuration, only those parameters which are applicable to the selected mode appear here. If the pilot protection supplement is not required the address 132 is set to 85-67N PilotGnd = Disabled. If a protection interface is available, the additional setting text SIGNALv.ProtInt is displayed in address 132 85-67N PilotGnd.

Conventional Transmission

The following modes are possible with conventional transmission links (as described in Subsection 2.8): Dir.Comp.Pickup UNBLOCKING BLOCKING = Directional Comparison Pickup, = Directional Unblocking Scheme, = Directional Blocking Scheme.

At address 3201 FCT 85-67N the use of a pilot protection scheme can be switched ON or OFF. If the pilot protection has to be applied to a three terminal line the setting in address 3202 must be Line Config. = Three terminals, if not, the setting remains Two Terminals.

192

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.8 Pilot Protection for Ground Fault Protection 85-67N (optional)

Digital Transmission

The following mode is possible with digital transmission using the protection data interface: SIGNALv.ProtInt = Directional Comparison Pickup. At address 3201 FCT 85-67N the use of a pilot protection scheme can be switched ON or OFF. Address 147 NUMBER OF RELAY indicates the number of ends and must be set identically in all devices. The ground fault directional comparison pickup scheme via the protection interface is only active if parameter 132 85-67N PilotGnd was set to SIGNALv.ProtInt for all devices in a constellation.

Ground Fault Protection Prerequisites

In the application of the comparison schemes, diligent care must be taken that both line ends recognize an external ground fault (ground fault current flowing through) in order to avoid a faulty echo signal in the case of the permissive schemes, or in order to ensure the blocking signal in the case of the blocking scheme. If, during a ground fault according to Figure 2862-86, the protection at B does not recognize the fault, this would be interpreted as a fault with single-sided infeed from A (echo from B or no blocking signal from B), which would lead to unwanted tripping by the protection at A. Therefore, the ground fault protection features a ground fault element 3I0Min Pilot P. (address 3105). This element must be set more sensitive than the ground current element used for the pilot protection. The larger the capacitive ground current (IGC in Figure 2-86) is, the smaller this element must be set. On overhead lines a setting equal to 70 % to 80 % of the ground current element is usually adequate. On cables or very long lines where the capacitive currents in the event of an ground fault are of the same order of magnitude as the ground fault currents, the echo function should not be used or restricted to the case where the circuit breaker is open; the blocking scheme should not be used under these conditions at all.

Figure 2-86

Possible current distribution during external ground fault

On three terminal lines (teed feeders) it should further be noted that the ground fault current is not equally distributed on the line ends during an external fault. The most unfavorable case is shown in Figure 2-87. In this case, the ground current flowing in from A is distributed equally on the line ends B and C. The setting value 3I0Min Pilot P. (address 3105), which is decisive for the echo or the blocking signal, must therefore be set smaller than one half of the setting value for the ground current element used for pilot protection. In addition, the above comments regarding the capacitive ground current which is omitted in Figure 2-87 apply. If the ground current distribution is different from the distribution assumed here, the conditions are more favorable as one of the two ground currents IGB or IGC must then be larger than in the situation described previously.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

193

2 Functions

Figure 2-87

Possible unfavorable current distribution on a three terminal line during an external ground fault

Time Settings

The send signal prolongation Send Prolong.(address 3203) must ensure that the send signal reliably reaches the opposite line end, even if there is very fast tripping at the sending line end and/or the signal transmission time is relatively long. In the case of the permissive schemes Dir.Comp.Pickup and UNBLOCKING this signal prolongation time is only effective if the device has already issued a trip command. This ensures the release of the other line end even if the fault is cleared very rapidly by a different protection function or other element. In the case of the blocking scheme BLOCKING the transmit signal is always prolonged by this time. In this case it corresponds to a transient blocking following a reverse fault. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. In order to detect steady-state line faults such as open circuits, a monitoring time Delay for alarm is started when a fault is detected (address 3207). Upon expiration of this time the fault is considered a permanent failure. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. The release of the directional tripping can be delayed by means of the permissive signal delay Release Delay (address 3208). In general, this is only required for the blocking scheme BLOCKING to allow sufficient transmission time for the blocking signal during external faults. This delay only has an effect on the receive circuit of the pilot protection. Conversely, tripping by the comparison protection is not delayed by the set time delay of the directional element.

Transient Blocking

The setting parameters TrBlk Wait Time and TrBlk BlockTime are for the transient blocking with the comparison schemes. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. The time TrBlk Wait Time (address 3209) is a waiting time prior to transient blocking. In the case of the permissive schemes, only once the directional element of the ground fault protection has recognized a fault in the reverse direction, within this period of time after fault detection, will the transient blocking be activated. In the case of the blocking scheme, the waiting time prevents transient blocking in the event that the blocking signal reception from the opposite line end is very fast. With the setting there is no transient blocking. The transient blocking time TrBlk BlockTime (address 3210) must be set longer than the duration of severe transients resulting from the inception or clearance of external faults. The send signal is delayed by this time with the permissive overreach schemes Dir.Comp.Pickup and UNBLOCKING if the protection had initially detected a reverse fault. In the case of the blocking scheme BLOCKING the received (blocking) signal is prolonged by this time. The preset value should be sufficient in most cases.

194

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.8 Pilot Protection for Ground Fault Protection 85-67N (optional)

Echo Function

In the case of line ends with weak infeed, or lack of ground current, the echo function is sensible for the permissive scheme so that the infeeding line end can be released. The echo function at address 2501 FCT Weak Infeed can be activated (ECHO only) or deactivated (OFF). By means of this switch the weak infeed tripping function can also be activated (ECHO and TRIP, refer also to Subsection 2.9.1). Please read the comments regarding the setting of the current element 3I0Min Pilot P. (address 3105) in the above margin heading Ground Fault Protection Prerequisites. The echo delay time Trip/Echo DELAY (address 2502) must be set long enough to avoid incorrect echo signals resulting from the difference in fault detection pickup time of the ground fault protection functions at all line ends during external faults (throughfault current). Typical setting is approx. 40 ms (default setting). This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. The echo impulse duration Trip EXTENSION (address 2503) may be matched to the configuration data of the signal transmission equipment. It must be long enough to ensure that the receive signal is recognized even with different pickup times by the protection devices at the two line ends and different response times of the transmission equipment. In most cases approx. 50 ms (default) is sufficient. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. An endless echo signal between the line ends can be avoided (e.g. interference coupling in the signal path) by blocking after each output of an echo signal a new echo for a certain time Echo BLOCK Time (address 2504). The typical setting is approx. 50 ms. After the ground fault protection signal was sent, the echo is equally blocked for the time Echo BLOCK Time. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. If the distance protection and ground fault protection use a common transmission channel, spurious tripping may occur when the distance protection and the ground fault protection create an echo independently of each other. For this scenario, parameter Echo:1channel (address 2509) must be set to YES. The default setting is NO.

Note The ECHO SIGNAL (No. 4246) must be allocated separately to the output relays for the transmitter actuation, as it is not contained in the transmit signals of the transmission functions. On the digital protection data interface with permissive overreach transfer trip mode, the echo is transmitted as a separate signal without taking any special measures. The echo function settings are common to all weak infeed measures and summarized in tabular form in Subsection 2.9.1.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

195

2 Functions

2.8.8

Settings
Addresses which have an appended "A" can only be changed with DIGSI, under "Display Additional Settings".

Addr. 3201 3202 3203A 3207A 3208 3209A 3210A

Parameter FCT 85-67N Line Config. Send Prolong. Delay for alarm Release Delay TrBlk Wait Time TrBlk BlockTime ON OFF

Setting Options

Default Setting ON Two Terminals 0.05 sec 10.00 sec 0.000 sec 0.04 sec 0.05 sec

Comments 85-67N Pilot Prot. for Dir.Ground O/C Line Configuration Time for send signal prolongation Unblocking: Time Delay for Alarm Time Delay for release after pickup Transient Block.: Duration external flt. Transient Block.: Blk.T. after ext. flt.

Two Terminals Three terminals 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.000 .. 30.000 sec 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec

2.8.9
No. 1311 1312 1313 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1380 1381

Information List
Information >85-67N PilotON >85-67NPilotOFF >85-67NPilotBlk >85-67N Rec.Ch1 >85-67N Rec.Ch2 >85-67N UB ub 1 >85-67N UB bl 1 >85-67N UB ub 2 >85-67N UB bl 2 >85-67N BlkEcho >85-67N R.Ch1A >85-67N R.Ch1B >85-67N R.Ch1C >85-67N UB 1-A >85-67N UB 1-B >85-67N UB 1-C 85-67N SEND A 85-67N SEND B 85-67N SEND C 85-67N STOP A 85-67N STOP B 85-67N STOP C 85-67Non/offBIN 85-67N OFF Type of Information SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT IntSP OUT Comments >85-67N Pilot Prot. Gnd. O/C ON >85-67N Pilot Prot. Gnd. O/C OFF >85-67N Pilot Prot. Gnd. O/C BLOCK >85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Channel 1 >85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Channel 2 >85-67N Unblocking: UNBLOCK, Channel 1 >85-67N Unblocking: BLOCK, Channel 1 >85-67N Unblocking: UNBLOCK, Channel 2 >85-67N Unblocking: BLOCK, Channel 2 >85-67N BLOCK Echo Signal >85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Ch. 1, Ph.A >85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Ch. 1, Ph.B >85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Ch. 1, Ph.C >85-67N Unblocking: UNBLOCK Ch.1, Ph.A >85-67N Unblocking: UNBLOCK Ch.1, Ph.B >85-67N Unblocking: UNBLOCK Ch.1, Ph.C 85-67N Carrier SEND signal, Phase A 85-67N Carrier SEND signal, Phase B 85-67N Carrier SEND signal, Phase C 85-67N Blocking: carrier STOP signal PhA 85-67N Blocking: carrier STOP signal PhB 85-67N Blocking: carrier STOP signal PhC 85-67N Pilot Prot. ON/OFF via BI 85-67N Pilot Prot. is switched OFF

196

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.8 Pilot Protection for Ground Fault Protection 85-67N (optional)

No. 1384 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399

Information 85-67N SEND 85-67N TransBlk 85-67N UB Fail1 85-67N UB Fail2 85-67N BL STOP 85-67N BL Jump 85-67N Rx.A Dv1 85-67N Rx.B Dv1 85-67N Rx.C Dv1 85-67N Rx.A Dv2 85-67N Rx.B Dv2 85-67N Rx.C Dv2 85-67N Rx.A Dv3 85-67N Rx.B Dv3 85-67N Rx.C Dv3

Type of Information OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

Comments 85-67N Carrier SEND signal 85-67N Transient Blocking 85-67N Unblocking: FAILURE Channel 1 85-67N Unblocking: FAILURE Channel 2 85-67N Blocking: carrier STOP signal 85-67N Blocking: Send signal with jump 85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Ph A, Device1 85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Ph B, Device1 85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Ph C, Device1 85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Ph A, Device2 85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Ph B, Device2 85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Ph C, Device2 85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Ph A, Device3 85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Ph B, Device3 85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Ph C, Device3

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

197

2 Functions

2.9

Weak-Infeed Tripping
In cases, where there is no or only weak infeed present at one line end, the distance protection cannot pick up during a short-circuit on the line. The settings and information table at Weak Infeed applies for the following functions. If there is no or only a very small zero sequence current at one line end during a ground fault, the ground fault protection can not function also.

2.9.1
2.9.1.1

Classical Tripping
Method of Operation By coordinating the weak infeed function with the pilot protection in conjunction with distance protection and/or ground fault protection, fast tripping can also be achieved at both line ends in the above cases. At the strong infeed line end, the distance protection can always trip instantaneously for faults inside zone Z1. With permissive pilot protection schemes, fast tripping for faults on 100 % of the line length is achieved by activation of the echo function (refer to Subsection 2.6). This provides the permissive release of the trip signal at the strong infeed line end. The permissive pilot protection scheme in conjunction with the ground fault protection can also achieve release of the trip signal at the strong infeed line end by means of the echo function (refer to Subsection 2.8). In many cases tripping of the circuit breaker at the weak infeeding line end is also desired. For this purpose the device 7SA522 has a dedicated protection function with dedicated trip command.

Transmission Schemes

Pickup with Undervoltage

In Figure 2-88 the logic diagram of the weak-infeed tripping is shown. At address 2501 FCT Weak Infeed (Weak Infeed FunCTion) can be activated (ECHO and TRIP) or deactivated (OFF). If this switch is set to ECHO only, the tripping is also disabled; however the echo function to release the infeeding line end is activated (refer also to Subsection 2.6 and 2.8). The tripping function can be blocked at any time via the binary input >BLOCK Weak Inf. The logic for the detection of a weak-infeed condition is done per phase in conjunction with the distance protection and additionally for the ground fault protection. Since the undervoltage check is performed for each phase, single-pole tripping is also possible, provided the device version has the single-pole tripping option. In the event of a short circuit, it may be assumed that only a small voltage appears at the line end with the weak-infeed condition, as the small fault current only produces a small voltage drop in the short-circuit loop. In the event of zero-infeed, the loop voltage is approximately zero. The weak-infeed tripping is therefore dependent on the measured undervoltage UNDERVOLTAGE which is also used for the selection of the faulty phase. If a signal is received from the opposite line end without fault detection by the local protection, this indicates that there is a fault on the protected feeder. In the case of three terminal lines when using a permissive overreach scheme a receive signal from both ends may be present. In case of permissive underreach schemes one receive signal from at least one end is sufficient.

198

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.9 Weak-Infeed Tripping

After a security margin time of 40 ms following the start of the receive signal, the weakinfeed tripping is released if the remaining conditions are satisfied: undervoltage, circuit breaker closed and no pickup of the distance protection or of the ground fault protection. To avoid a faulty pickup of the weak infeed function following tripping of the line and reset of the fault detection, the function cannot pick up anymore once a fault detection in the affected phase was present (RS flip-flop in Figure 2-88). In the case of the ground fault protection, the release signal is routed via the phase segregated logic modules. Single-phase tripping is therefore also possible if both distance protection and ground fault protection or exclusively ground fault protection issues a release condition.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

199

2 Functions

Figure 2-88

Logic diagram of the weak infeed tripping

200

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.9 Weak-Infeed Tripping

2.9.1.2 General

Setting Notes It is a prerequisite for the operation of the weak infeed function that it was enabled during the configuration of the device at address 125 Weak Infeed = Enabled. With the parameter FCT Weak Infeed (address 2501) it is determined whether the device shall trip during a weak infeed condition or not. With the setting ECHO and TRIP both the echo function and the weak infeed tripping function are activated. With the setting ECHO only the echo function for provision of the release signal at the infeeding line end is activated. There is however no tripping at the line end with missing or weak infeed condition. As the weak-infeed measures are dependent on the signal reception from the opposite line end, they only make sense if the protection is coordinated with pilot protection (refer to Section 2.6 and/or 2.8). The receive signal is a functional component of the trip condition. Accordingly, the weak infeed tripping function must not be used with the blocking schemes. It is only permissible with the permissive schemes and the comparison schemes with release signals! In all other cases it should be switched OFF at address 2501. In such cases it is better to disable this function from the onset by setting address 125 to Disabled during the device configuration. The associated parameters are then not accessible. The undervoltage setting value UNDERVOLTAGE (address 2505) must in any event be set below the minimum expected operational phaseground voltage. The lower limit for this setting is given by the maximum expected voltage drop at the relay location on the weak-infeed side during a fault on the protected feeder for which the distance protection may no longer pick up.

2.9.2
2.9.2.1

Tripping According to French Specification

Method of Operation An alternative for detecting weak infeed is only available in the models 7SA522*-**D**.

Pickup with Relative Voltage Jump

In addition to the classical function of weak infeed the so-called Logic no. 2 (address 125) presents an alternative to the method used so far. This function operates independently of the pilot protection scheme by using its own receive signal and it is able to trip with delay and without delay.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

201

2 Functions

Trip without Delay

Figure 2-89

Logic diagram for non-delayed tripping

202

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.9 Weak-Infeed Tripping

Trip with Delay

Figure 2-90

Logic for delayed tripping

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

203

2 Functions

2.9.2.2

Setting Notes Applications with a transmission channel used by both the distance and the ground fault protection spurious trippings may occur, if distance protection and ground fault protection create an echo independently from each other. In this case parameter Echo:1channel (address 2509) has to be set to YES. The default setting is NO. Phase selection is accomplished via undervoltage detection. For this purpose no absolute voltage threshold in volts is parameterized but a factor (address 2510 Factor Vph-g<), which is multiplied with the measured phase-phase voltage, and yields the voltage threshold. This method accounts for operational deviations from the rated voltage in the undervoltage threshold and adjusts them to the prevailing conditions. Since a sound positive phasetophase voltage is not available in the event of a fault, the undervoltage threshold is delayed. Thus changes in the phaseto-phase voltage affect the threshold with a time delay. The time constant can be set at address 2511 Time const. . The undervoltage is determined for all 3 phases. If the measured phase-to-phase voltage falls below the threshold (address 1131 PoleOpenVoltage), undervoltage is no longer detected in this phase.

Echo Enable

Phase Selection

Figure 2-91

Undervoltage detection for VAG

Trip without Delay

An undelayed TRIP command is issued if a receive signal >WI reception is present and an undervoltage condition is detected simultaneously. If another protection function capable to detect faults has picked up in the relay, the corresponding phases in the weak-infeed function are blocked. The receive signal is prolonged at address 2512 Rec. Ext., so that a trip command is still possible in the event of a quick dropout of the transmitting line end. To avoid a faulty pickup of the weak infeed function following tripping of the line and reset of the fault detection, the function cannot pick up any more once an inverse-time overcurrent fault detection in the affected phase was present. If a receive signal applies and no undervoltage is detected but the zero sequence current threshold 3I0 Threshold is exceeded, (address 2514) a fault on the line can be assumed. If this state (receive signal, no undervoltage and zero sequence current) applies for longer than 500 ms, 3-pole tripping is initiated. The time delay of 3I0> exceeded is set at address 2513 T 3I0> Ext.. If the zero sequence current exceeds the threshold 3I0 Threshold for longer than the set time T 3I0> alarm (address 2520), the annunciation 3I0 detected is issued. The non-delayed element operates only if binary input >WI rec. OK reports the proper functioning of the transmission channel.

204

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.9 Weak-Infeed Tripping

Moreover, the phase-selective block signals BLOCK Weak Inf affect the non-delayed logic. Faulty pickups are thus prevented, especially after the dedicated line end was shut down. In address 2530 WI non delayed the element for instantaneous tripping is switched OFF or ON continuously. Trip with Delay The operation of the delayed tripping is determined by three parameters: Address 2517 1pol. Trip enables a single-pole trip command in case of singlepole faults if set to ON. If set to ON, address 2518 1pol. with 3I0 allows a single-pole trip command only if the threshold 3I0 Threshold for the zero current has been exceeded. If the threshold 3I0 Threshold is not exceeded, single-pole faults do not lead to tripping. Position OFF allows a single-pole trip command is issued even when 3I0 Threshold is not exceeded. The time delay for the signal 3I0> exceeded is set at address 2513 T 3I0> Ext.. If set to ON, address 2519 3pol. Trip allows also a three-pole trip command in the event of a multi-pole pickup. In position OFF the multi-pole pickup is only reported but a three-pole trip command is not issued (only report). But a single-pole or three-pole trip command can nevertheless be issued. A delayed tripping element is implemented to allow tripping the dedicated line end in case the transmission channel is faulted. When undervoltage conditions have been detected, this element picks up in one or more phases and after a configured time (address 2515 TM and address 2516 TT) has elapsed it trips without delay. Address 2531 WI delayed allows to set delayed tripping as operating mode. With ON this element is permanently active. With the setting by receive fail, this element will only be active if >WI rec. OK is not reported OFF. To avoid spurious pickup, phase selection via undervoltage is blocked entirely in the event of voltage failure (pickup of the fuse failure monitor or of the VT mcb). Moreover, the corresponding phases are equally blocked if another protection function, capable to detect faults, picks up.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

205

2 Functions

2.9.3

Settings
Addresses which have an appended "A" can only be changed with DIGSI, under "Display Additional Settings". The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding secondary nominal current of the current transformer.

Addr. 2501

Parameter FCT Weak Infeed

Setting Options OFF ECHO only ECHO and TRIP 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 2 .. 70 V NO YES 0.10 .. 1.00 1 .. 60 sec 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 .. 30.00 sec

Default Setting ECHO only

Comments Weak Infeed option is

2502A 2503A 2504A 2505 2509 2510 2511 2512A 2513A 2514

Trip/Echo DELAY Trip EXTENSION Echo BLOCK Time UNDERVOLTAGE Echo:1channel Factor Vph-g< Time const. Rec. Ext. T 3I0> Ext. 3I0 Threshold 1A 5A

0.04 sec 0.05 sec 0.05 sec 25 V NO 0.70 5 sec 0.65 sec 0.60 sec 0.50 A 2.50 A 0.40 sec 1.00 sec ON ON ON 10.00 sec ON by receive fail

Trip / Echo Delay after carrier receipt Trip Extension / Echo Impulse time Echo Block Time Undervoltage (ph-g) Echo logic: 21 and 67N on common channel Factor for undervoltage (ph-g) Time constant Tau Reception extension 3I0> exceeded extension 3I0 threshold for neutral current pickup WI delay single pole WI delay multi pole Single pole WI trip allowed Single pole WI trip with 3I0 Three pole WI trip allowed 3I0> exceeded delay for alarm WI non delayed WI delayed

0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.25 .. 5.00 A 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 .. 30.00 sec ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 0.00 .. 30.00 sec ON OFF ON by receive fail

2515 2516 2517 2518 2519 2520 2530 2531

TM TT 1pol. Trip 1pol. with 3I0 3pol. Trip T 3I0> alarm WI non delayed WI delayed

206

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.9 Weak-Infeed Tripping

2.9.3.1
No. 4203 4204 4205 4206 4221 4222 4223 4225 4226 4227 4228 4229 4231 4232 4233 4234 4241 4242 4243 4244 4245 4246

Information List
Information >BLOCK Weak Inf >BLOCK del. WI >WI rec. OK >WI reception WeakInf. OFF Weak Inf. BLOCK Weak Inf ACTIVE 3I0 detected WI V A< WI V B< WI V C< WI TRIP 3I0 WeakInf. PICKUP Weak Inf. PU A Weak Inf. PU B Weak Inf. PU C WeakInfeed TRIP Weak TRIP 1p.A Weak TRIP 1p.B Weak TRIP 1p.C Weak TRIP ABC ECHO SIGNAL Type of Information SP SP SP SP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT Comments >BLOCK Weak Infeed Trip option >BLOCK delayed Weak Infeed element >Reception (channel) for Weak Infeed OK >Receive signal for Weak Infeed Weak Infeed is switched OFF Weak Infeed is BLOCKED Weak Infeed is ACTIVE Weak Infeed Zero seq. current detected Weak Infeed Undervoltg. A Weak Infeed Undervoltg. B Weak Infeed Undervoltg. C WI TRIP with zero sequence current Weak Infeed PICKED UP Weak Infeed PICKUP Phase A Weak Infeed PICKUP Phase B Weak Infeed PICKUP Phase C Weak Infeed TRIP command Weak Infeed TRIP command - Only Phase A Weak Infeed TRIP command - Only Phase B Weak Infeed TRIP command - Only Phase C Weak Infeed TRIP command Phases ABC ECHO Send SIGNAL

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

207

2 Functions

2.10

External Direct and Remote Tripping

Any signal from an external protection or monitoring device can be connected to the signal processing of the 7SA522 by means of a binary input. This signal may be delayed, alarmed and routed to one or several output relays.

2.10.1 Method of Operation

External Trip of the Local Circuit Breaker Figure 2-92 shows the logic diagram. If the device and circuit breaker are capable of single-phase operation, it is also possible to trip single phase. The tripping logic of the device in this case ensures that the conditions for single-phase tripping are satisfied (e.g. single-phase tripping enabled, automatic reclosure ready). The external tripping can be switched on and off with a setting parameter and may be blocked via binary input.

Figure 2-92

Logic diagram of the local external tripping

Remote Trip of the Circuit Breaker at the Opposite Line End

On a digital communication link via protection interface, transmission of up to 4 remote commands is possible, as described in Section 2.5. On conventional transmission paths, one transmission channel per desired transmission direction is required for remote tripping at the remote end. For example, fibre optic connections or voice frequency modulated high frequency channels via pilot cables, power line carrier or microwave radio links can be used for this purpose in the following ways. If the trip command of the distance protection is to be transmitted, it is best to use the integrated pilot protection function for the transmission of the signal as this already incorporates the extension of the transmitted signal, as described in Subsection 2.6. Any of the commands can of course be used to trigger the transmitter to initiate the send signal. On the receiver side, the local external trip function is used. The receive signal is routed to a binary input which is assigned to the logical binary input function >DTT Trip ABC. If single-pole tripping is desired, you can also use binary inputs >DTT

208

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.10 External Direct and Remote Tripping

Trip A, >DTT Trip B and >DTT Trip C. Figure 2-92 therefore also applies in this case.

2.10.2 Setting Notes

General A prerequisite for the application of the direct and remote tripping functions is that during the configuration of the scope of functions in address 122 DTT Direct Trip = Enabled was applied. At address 2201 FCT Direct Trip it can also be switched ON or OFF. It is possible to set a trip delay for both the local external trip and the receive side of the remote trip in address 2202 Trip Time DELAY. This can be used as a security time margin, especially in the case of local trip. Once a trip command has been issued, it is maintained for at least as long as the set minimum trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD, which was set for the device in general in address 240 (Subsection 2.1.3). Reliable operation of the circuit breaker is therefore ensured, even if the initiating signal pulse is very short. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.

2.10.3 Settings
Addr. 2201 2202 Parameter FCT Direct Trip Trip Time DELAY ON OFF 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; Setting Options Default Setting OFF 0.01 sec Comments Direct Transfer Trip (DTT) Trip Time Delay

2.10.4 Information List

No. 4403 4412 4413 4414 4417 4421 4422 4432 4433 4434 4435 Information >BLOCK DTT >DTT Trip A >DTT Trip B >DTT Trip C >DTT Trip ABC DTT OFF DTT BLOCK DTT TRIP 1p. A DTT TRIP 1p. B DTT TRIP 1p. C DTT TRIP ABC Type of Information SP SP SP SP SP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT Comments >BLOCK Direct Transfer Trip option >Direct Transfer Trip INPUT Phase A >Direct Transfer Trip INPUT Phase B >Direct Transfer Trip INPUT Phase C >Direct Transfer Trip INPUT Phases ABC Direct Transfer Trip is switched OFF Direct Transfer Trip is BLOCKED DTT TRIP command - Only Phase A DTT TRIP command - Only Phase B DTT TRIP command - Only Phase C DTT TRIP command Phases ABC

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

209

2 Functions

2.11

Overcurrent Protection 50/51

The 7SA522 features a time overcurrent protection function which can be used as either a back-up or an emergency overcurrent protection. All elements may be configured independently of each other and combined according to the user's requirements.

2.11.1 General
Whereas the distance protection can only function correctly if the measured voltage signals are available to the device, the emergency overcurrent protection only requires the currents. The emergency overcurrent function is automatically activated when the measured voltage signal is lost, e.g. due to a fault or interruption of the voltage transformer secondary circuits (emergency operation). The emergency operation therefore replaces the distance protection as fault protection if loss of the measured voltage signal is recognized by one of the following conditions: Pickup of the internal measured voltage monitoring (FuseFailureMonitor, refer to Subsection 2.19.1) or If the signal Failure: Feeder VT (MCB tripped) is received via binary input, indicating that the measured voltage signal is lost. If one of these conditions arise, the distance protection is immediately blocked and the emergency operation is activated. If the overcurrent protection is set as a back-up overcurrent protection, it will work independently of other protection and monitoring functions, i.e. also independently of the distance protection. The back-up overcurrent protection could for instance be used as the only fault protection if the voltage transformers are not yet available when the feeder is initially commissioned. For the overcurrent protection there are in total four elements for the phase currents and four elements for the ground currents as follows: Two overcurrent elements with a definite time characteristic (50), One overcurrent element with inverse time characteristic (51), One further overcurrent element which is preferably used as a stub protection, but which can be applied as an additional normal definite time delayed element. These four elements are independent of each other and are fully combinable. Blocking by external criteria via binary input is possible as well as rapid (non delayed) tripping (e.g. by an external automatic reclose device). During energization of the protected feeder onto a fault it is possible to release any element, or also several, for nondelayed tripping. If some elements are not needed, those not needed can be deactivated by setting the pickup value to .

2.11.2 Method of Operation

Measured Values The phase currents are fed to the device via the input transformers of the measuring input. The ground current 3I0 is either measured directly or calculated from the phase currents, depending on the ordered device version and usage of the fourth current input I4 of the device. If I4 is connected to the neutral of the current transformer set, the ground current will be available directly as measured quantity.

210

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.11 Overcurrent Protection 50/51

If the device is fitted with the highly sensitive current input for I4, this current I4 is used with the factor I4/Iph CT (address 221, refer to Subsection 2.1.3 of the P.System Data 1). As the linear range of this measuring input is severely restricted in the high range, this current is only evaluated up to an amplitude of approx. 1.6A. In the event of larger currents, the device automatically switches over to the evaluation of the zero sequence current derived from the phase currents. Naturally, all three phase currents obtained from a set of three wye-connected current transformers must be available and connected to the device. The processing of the ground current is then also possible if very small as well as large ground fault currents may occur. If the fourth current input I4 is used e.g. for a power transformer neutral current or for the ground current of a parallel line, the device derives the ground current from the phase currents. Naturally in this case also all three phase currents derived from a set of three wyeconnected current transformers must be available and connected to the device. Definite Time High-Set Current Element 50(N)-B1 Each phase current is compared with the setting value 50-B1 PICKUP after numerical filtering; the ground current is compared with 50N-B1 PICKUP. Currents above the associated pickup value are detected and signalled. After expiry of the associated time delays 50-B1 DELAY or 50N-B1 DELAY a trip command is issued. The dropout value is approximately 5 % less than the pickup value, but at least 1.5 % of the rated current, below the pickup value. The figure below shows the logic diagram of the 50(N)-B1 elements. The elements can be blocked via a binary input >BLOCK 50-B1. Binary inputs >5X-B InstTRIP and the function block switch-onto-fault are common to all elements and described below. They may, however, separately affect the phase and/or ground current elements. This is accomplished with the following setting parameters: 50(N)-B1 Pil/BI (address 2614) determines whether a non-delayed trip of this element via binary input >5X-B InstTRIP is possible (YES) or impossible (NO) and 50(N)-B1 SOTFtr (address 2615) determines whether during switching onto a fault tripping shall be instantaneous(YES) or not (NO) with this element.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

211

2 Functions

Figure 2-93

Logic diagram of the 50(N)-B1 element

Definite Time Overcurrent Element 50(N)-B2

The logic of the overcurrent element 50(N)-B2 is the same as that of the 50(N)-B1 element. In all references 50-B1 PICKUP must merely be replaced with 50-B2 PICKUP or 50N-B1 PICKUP with 50N-B2 PICKUP. In all other respects Figure 2-93 applies. The logic of the inverse overcurrent element also in principal functions the same as the remaining elements. However, the time delay is calculated here based on the type of the set characteristic, the intensity of the current and a time multiplier (following figure). A pre-selection of the available characteristics was already done during the configuration of the protection functions. Furthermore, an additional constant time delay 51-B AddT-DELAY or 51N-B AddTdelay may be selected, which is added to the inverse time. The possible characteristics are shown in the Technical Data. The following figure shows the logic diagram. The setting parameter addresses of the ANSI characteristics are shown by way of an example. In the configuration notes (Subsection 2.11.3) the different setting addresses are described.

Inverse Time Overcurrent Element 51B

212

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.11 Overcurrent Protection 50/51

Figure 2-94

Logic diagram of the 51B element (inverse time overcurrent protection), example for ANSI characteristics

Stub Protection

A further overcurrent element is the stub protection. It can however also be used as a normal additional definite time overcurrent element, as it functions independent of the other elements. A stub fault is a short-circuit located between the current transformer set and the line isolation switch. It is of particular importance with the 11/2 circuit breaker arrangements.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

213

2 Functions

Figure 2-95

Stub fault at an 11/2 circuit breaker arrangement

If a short circuit current IA and/or IB flows while the line isolator 1 is open, this implies that a fault in the stub range between the current transformers IA, IB, and the line isolator exists. The circuit breakers CBA and CBC that carry the short-circuit current can be tripped without delay. The two sets of current transformers are connected in parallel such that the current sum IA + IB represents the current flowing towards the line isolator. The stub protection is an overcurrent protection which is only in service when the state of the line isolation switch indicates the open condition via a binary input >50-STUB ENABLE. The binary input must therefore be operated via an auxiliary contact of the isolation switch. In the case of a closed line isolation switch, the stub protection is out of service. For more information see the next logic diagram. If the stub protection element is to be used as a normal definite time overcurrent element, the binary input >BLOCK 50-STUB, should be left without allocation or routing (matrix). The enable input >50-STUB ENABLE, however, has to be constantly activated (either via a binary input or via integrated logic (CFC) functions which can be configured by the user.

214

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.11 Overcurrent Protection 50/51

Figure 2-96

Logic diagram of stub fault protection

Instantaneous Tripping before Automatic Reclosure

Automatic reclosure is applied in order to instantaneously clear the fault before automatic reclosure. A release signal from an external automatic reclosure device can be injected via binary input >5X-B InstTRIP. The internal automatic reclosure - if available - is also effected by this command. Any element of the overcurrent protection can thus perform an instantaneous trip before reclosure via the parameter Telep/BI .... To achieve fast tripping after manual closure of the circuit breaker onto a dead fault, the internal line energization detection feature can be used. The overcurrent protection can then trip three-pole without delay or with a reduced delay. It can be determined via parameter setting for which element(s) the rapid tripping following closure on to a dead fault applies. (Refer also to the logic diagrams in 2-93, 2-94 and 2-96). This function is independent of the high-current instantaneous tripping described in Subsection 2.12.

Switching onto a Fault

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

215

2 Functions

Fault Detection and Trip Logic

The pickup signals of the individual phases (or the ground) and of the elements are linked in such a way that both the phase information and the element which has picked up are output (Table 2-6). Also for the tripping signals the element is indicated which has initiated the tripping. If the device has the option to trip single-pole, and this option has been activated, the pole which has been tripped is also indicated during single-pole tripping (refer also to Subsection 2.20.1 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device).
Table 2-6 Pickup signals of the individual phases Figure 2-93 2-94 2-96 2-93 2-94 2-96 2-93 2-94 2-96 2-93 2-94 2-96 2-93 2-93 2-93 2-93 5X-B Pickup Gnd 7165 5X-B Pickup C 7164 5X-B Pickup B 7163 5X-B Pickup A 7162 Output Annunciation No.

Internal Annunciation 50(N)-B1 Pickup A 50(N)-B2 Pickup A 51-B Pickup A 50-STUB Pickup A 50(N)-B1 Pickup B 50(N)-B2 Pickup B 51-B Pickup B 50-STUB Pickup B 50(N)-B1 Pickup C 50(N)-B2 Pickup C 51-B Pickup C 50-STUB Pickup C 50(N)-B1 Pickup G 50(N)-B2 Pickup G 51-B Pickup G 50-STUB Pickup G 50(N)-B1 Pickup A 50(N)-B1 Pickup B 50(N)-B1 Pickup C 50(N)-B1 Pickup G 50(N)-B2 Pickup A 50(N)-B2 Pickup B 50(N)-B2 Pickup C 50(N)-B2 Pickup G 51-B Pickup A 51-B Pickup B 51-B Pickup C 51-B Pickup G 50-STUB Pickup A 50-STUB Pickup B 50-STUB Pickup C 50-STUB Pickup G (All pickups)

50(N)-B1 PICKUP

7191

50(N)-B2 PICKUP 2-94 2-94 2-94 2-94 2-96 2-96 2-96 2-96

7192

51(N)-B PICKUP

7193

50-STUB PICKUP 5X-B PICKUP

7201 7161

2.11.3 Setting Notes

General During the configuration of the device scope of functions (address 126) the available characteristics were determined. Only those parameters that apply to the available characteristics, according to the selected configuration and the version of the device, are accessible in the procedures described below. Address 2601 is set according to the desired mode of operation of the overcurrent protection: Operating Mode = ON:always activ means that the overcurrent protection works independently of other protection functions, i.e. as a backup overcurrent

216

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.11 Overcurrent Protection 50/51

protection. If it is to work only as an emergency function in case of a failure of the voltage transformers (Pt), ON:with VT loss must be set. Finally, it can also be set to OFF. If some elements are not required they can be deactivated by setting the pickup value to . But if you set only an associated time delay to this does not suppress the pickup signals but prevents the timers from running. The stub protection remains in service even if the overcurrent mode of operation setting is ON:with VT loss. One or several elements can be set as instantaneous tripping elements when switching onto a fault. This is chosen during the setting of the individual elements (see below). To avoid a spurious pickup due to transient overcurrents, the delay SOTF Time DELAY (address 2680) can be set. Typically, the default setting 0 is correct. A short delay can be useful in case of long cables for which high inrush currents can be expected, or for transformers. Changing the time delay depends on the severity and duration of the transient overcurrents as well as the element selected for the fast switch onto fault clearance. High-set Current Elements 50B1, 50N-B1 The elements 50-B1 PICKUP (address 2610) and 50N-B1 PICKUP (address 2612) together with the 50(N)-B2 elements or 51(N)-B elements result in a two-element characteristic. Of course, all three elements can be combined as well. If one element is not required, the pickup value has to be set to . The 50(N)-B1 element always operates with a defined delay time. If the 50(N)-B1 elements are used for instantaneous tripping before the automatic reclosure, the current setting corresponds to the 50(N)-B2 or 51(N)-B elements (see below). In this case only the different delay times are of interest. The times 50-B1 DELAY (address 2611) and 50N-B1 DELAY (address 2613) can than be set to 0 or a very low value, as the fast clearance of the fault takes priority over the selectivity before the automatic reclosure is initiated. These elements have to be blocked before final trip in order to achieve the selectivity. For very long lines with a small source impedance or on applications with large reactances (e.g. transformers, series reactors), the 50(N)-B1 elements can also be used for current grading. In this case they must be set in such a way that they do not pick up in case of a fault at the end of the line. The times can then be set to 0 or to a small value. When using a personal computer and DIGSI to apply the settings, these can be optionally entered as primary or secondary values. If secondary quantities are used, all currents must be converted to the secondary side of the current transformers. Calculation Example: 115 kV overhead line: s (length) R1/s X1/s S k' = 60 mile = 0.19 /mile = 0.42 /mile = 2.5 GVA 600 A / 5 A

Short-circuit power at the beginning of the line: Current Transformer

From that the line impedance ZL and the source impedance ZS are calculated: Z1/s = 0.192 + 0.422 /mile = 0.46 /mile

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

217

2 Functions

ZL = 0.46 /mile 60 mile = 27.66

The three-phase fault current at the line end is IF End:

With a safety factor of 10 %, the following primary setting value is calculated: Set value 50(N)-B1 = 1.1 2217 A = 2439 A or the secondary setting value:

i.e. in case of fault currents exceeding 2439 A (primary) or 20.3A (secondary) you can be sure that a fault has occurred on the protected line. This fault can immediately be cleared by the time overcurrent protection. Note: The calculation was carried out with absolute values, which is sufficiently precise for overhead lines. If the angles of the source impedance and the line impedance vary considerably, a complex calculation will have to be carried out. A similar calculation can be carried out for ground faults, with the maximum ground current occurring at the line end during a short-circuit being decisive. The set time delays are pure additional delays, which do not include the operating time (measuring time). The parameter 50(N)-B1 Pil/BI (address 2614) defines whether the delay times 50-B1 DELAY (address 2611) and 50N-B1 DELAY (address 2613) can be bypassed by the binary input >5X-B InstTRIP (No 7110) or by the operational automatic reclosure function. The binary input (if allocated) is applied to all elements of the timeovercurrent protection. With 50(N)-B1 Pil/BI = YES you can set the 50(N)-B1 elements to trip without delay after pickup if the binary input was activated. For 50(N)B1 Pil/BI = NO the set delays are always active. If the 50(N)-B1 element, when switching the line on to a fault, is to trip without delay or with a short delay, SOTF Time DELAY (address 2680, see above under margin heading General), the parameter 50(N)-B1 SOTFtr (address 2615) is set to YES. Any other element can be selected as well for this instantaneous tripping. Definite-Time Overcurrent Elements 50B2, 50N-B2 (O/C with DT) For the setting of the current pickup value, 50-B2 PICKUP (address 2620), the maximum operating current is most decisive. Pickup due to overload should never occur, since the device in this operating mode operates as fault protection with correspondingly short tripping times and not as overload protection. For this reason, a pickup value of about 10 % above the expected peak load is recommended for line protection, and a setting of about 20 % above the expected peak load is recommended for transformers and motors. When using a personal computer and DIGSI to apply the settings, these can be optionally entered as primary or secondary values. If secondary quantities are used, all currents must be converted to the secondary side of the current transformers. Calculation Example:

218

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.11 Overcurrent Protection 50/51

115 kV overhead line maximum transmittable power Pmax corresponding to Imax Current Transformer Safety factor = 630 A 600 A / 5 A 1.1 = 125.5 MVA

With settings in primary quantities the following setting value is calculated: Set value 50(N)-B2 = 1.1 630 A = 693 A With settings in secondary quantities the following setting value is calculated:

The ground current element 50N-B2 PICKUP (address 2622) should be set to detect the smallest ground fault current to be expected. For very small ground currents the ground fault protection is most suited (refer to Section 2.7). The time delay 50-B2 DELAY (address 2621) results from the time grading schedule designed for the network. If implemented as emergency overcurrent protection, shorter tripping times are advisable (one grading time step above the fast tripping element), as this function is only activated in the case of the loss of the local measured voltage. The time 50N-B2 DELAY (address 2623) can normally be set shorter, according to a separate time grading schedule for ground currents. The set times are mere additional delays for the independent elements, which do not include the inherent operating time of the protection. If only the phase currents are to be monitored, set the pickup value of the ground fault element to . The parameter 50(N)-B2 Pil/BI (address 2624) defines whether the time delays 50-B2 DELAY (address 2621) and 50N-B2 DELAY (address 2623) can be bypassed by the binary input >5X-B InstTRIP. The binary input (if allocated) is applied to all elements of the time-overcurrent protection. With 50(N)-B2 Pil/BI = YES you define that the I> elements trip without delay after pickup if the binary input was activated. With 50(N)-B2 Pil/BI = NO the set time delays always come into effect. If the 50(N)-B2 element, when switching the line on to a fault, is to trip without delay or with a short delay, SOTF Time DELAY (address 2680, see above under margin heading General), the parameter 50(N)-B2 SOTFtr (address 2625) is set to YES. We recommend, however, not to choose the sensitive setting for the switch on to a fault function as energizing of the line on to a fault should cause a large fault current. It is important to avoid that the selected element picking up on transients during line energization. InverseTime Overcurrent Elements 51B, 51N-B (IDMT protection with IEC characteristics) In the case of the inverse overcurrent elements, various characteristics can be selected, depending on the ordering version of the device and the configuration (address 126), With the IEC characteristics (address 126 50(N)/51(N) O/C = ) the following options are available at address 2660 IEC Curve: Normal Inverse (inverse, type A according to IEC 60255-3), Very Inverse (very inverse, type B according to IEC 60255-3),

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

219

2 Functions

Extremely Inv. (extremely inverse, type C according to IEC 60255-3), and LongTimeInverse (longtime, type B according to IEC 60255-3). For the setting of the current thresholds 51-B PICKUP (address 2640) and 51N-B PICKUP (address 2650) the same considerations as for the overcurrent elements of the definite time protection (see above) apply. In this case it must be noted that a safety margin between the pickup threshold and the set value has already been incorporated. Pickup only occurs at a current which is approximately 10 % above the set value. The above example shows that the maximum expected operating current may directly be applied as setting here. Primary: Set value 51B = 630 A, Secondary: Set value 51B = 5.25 A, i.e. (630 A / 600 A) 5 A. The time multiplier setting 51-B Time Dial (address 2642) is derived from the grading coordination plan applicable to the network. If implemented as emergency overcurrent protection, shorter tripping times are advisable (one grading time step above the fast tripping element), as this function is only activated in the case of the loss of the local measured voltage. The time multiplier setting 51N-B Time Dial (address 2652) can usually be set smaller according to a separate ground fault grading plan. If only the phase currents are to be monitored, set the pickup value of the ground fault element to . In addition to the current-dependent delays, a delay of constant length can be set, if necessary. The setting 51-B AddT-DELAY (address 2646 for phase currents) and 51N-B AddTdelay (address 2656 for ground currents) are in addition to the time delays resulting from the set curves. The parameter 51(N)-B PilotBI (address 2670) defines whether the time delays 51-B Time Dial (address 2642), including the additional delay 51-B AddT-DELAY (address 2646), and 51N-B Time Dial (address 2652), including the additional delay 51N-B AddTdelay (address 2656), can be bypassed by the binary input >5X-B InstTRIP (No. 7110). The binary input (if allocated) is applied to all elements of the time-overcurrent protection. With 51(N)-B PilotBI = YES you can set the 51B elements to trip immediately after the pickup, only if the binary input isactivated. With 51(N)-B PilotBI = NO the set time delays always come into effect. If the 51B element, when switching the line on to a fault, is to trip without delay or with a short delay, SOTF Time DELAY (address 2680, see above under margin heading General), the parameter 51(N)-B SOTF-Tr (address 2671) is set to YES. We recommend, however, not to choose the sensitive setting for the switch on to a fault function as energizing of the line on to a fault should cause a large fault current. It is important to avoid the selected element picking up on transients during line energization. Inverse-Time Overcurrent Elements 51B, 51N-B (IDMT protection with ANSI characteristics) In the case of the inverse overcurrent elements, various characteristics can be selected, depending on the ordering version and the configuration (address126). With the ANSI characteristics (address 126 50(N)/51(N) O/C = TOC ANSI) the following options are available at address 2661 ANSI Curve: Inverse, Short Inverse, Long Inverse, Moderately Inv., Very Inverse,

220

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.11 Overcurrent Protection 50/51

Extremely Inv. and Definite Inv.. For the setting of the current thresholds 51-B PICKUP (address 2640) and 51N-B PICKUP (address 2650) the same considerations as for the overcurrent elements of the definite time protection (see above) apply. In this case it must be noted that a safety margin between the pickup threshold and the set value has already been incorporated. Pickup only occurs at a current which is approximately 10 % above the set value. The above example shows that the maximum expected operating current may directly be applied as setting here. Primary: Set value 51B = 630, Secondary: Set value 51B = 5.25 A, i.e. (630 A / 600 A) 5 A. The time multiplier setting 51-B Time Dial (address 2643) is derived from the grading coordination plan applicable to the network. If implemented as emergency overcurrent protection, shorter tripping times are advisable (one grading time step above the fast tripping element), as this function is only activated in the case of the loss of the local measured voltage. The time multiplier setting 51N-B Time Dial (address 2653) can usually be set smaller according to a separate ground fault grading plan. If only the phase currents are to be monitored, set the pickup value of the ground fault element to . In addition to the current-dependent delays, a delay of constant length can be set, if necessary. The setting 51-B AddT-DELAY (address 2646 for phase currents) and 51N-B AddTdelay (address 2656 for ground currents) are in addition to the time delays resulting from the set curves. The parameter 51(N)-B PilotBI (address 2670) defines whether the time delays 51-B Time Dial (address 2643), including the additional delay 51-B AddT-DELAY (address 2646), and 51N-B Time Dial (address 2653), including the additional delay 51N-B AddTdelay (address 2656), can be bypassed by the binary input >5X-B InstTRIP (No. 7110). The binary input (if allocated) is applied to all elements of the time-overcurrent protection. With 51(N)-B PilotBI = YES you define that the 51B elements trip without delay after pickup if the binary input was activated. With 51(N)-B PilotBI = NO the set time delays always come into effect. If the 51B element, when switching the line on to a fault, is to trip without delay or with a short delay, SOTF Time DELAY (address 2680, see above under margin heading General), the parameter 51(N)-B SOTF-Tr (address 2671) is set to YES. We recommend, however, not to choose the sensitive setting for the switch on to a fault function as energizing of the line on to a fault should cause a large fault current. It is important to avoid the selected element picking up on transients during line energization. Additional Element 50(N)STUB When using the 50(N)STUB protection, the pick-up thresholds 50-STUB PICKUP (address 2630) and 50N-STUB PICKUP (address 2632) are usually not critical, as this protection function is only activated when the line isolator is open, which implies that every measured current should represent a fault current. With a 11/2 circuit breaker arrangement, however, it is possible that large fault currents flow from busbar A to busbar B or to feeder 2 via the current transformers. These currents could cause different transformation errors in the two current transformer sets IA and IB, especially in the saturation range. The protection should therefore not be set unnecessarily sensitive. If the minimum short circuit currents on the busbars are known, the pick-up threshold 50-STUB PICKUP is set somewhat (approx. 10 %) below the minimum two phase short circuit current, 50N-STUB PICKUP is set below the minimum single-

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

221

2 Functions

phase current. If only the phase currents are to be monitored, set the pickup value of the ground current element to . The times 50-STUB DELAY (address 2631) and 50N-STUB DELAY (address 2633) are set to 0 for this application to prevent the protection from operating while the line isolator is closed. If this element is applied differently, similar considerations as for the other overcurrent elements apply. The parameter 50STUB Pilot/BI (address 2634) defines whether the delay times 50-STUB DELAY (address 2631) and 50N-STUB DELAY (address 2633) can be bypassed by the binary input >5X-B InstTRIP. The binary input (if allocated) is applied to all elements of the time-overcurrent protection. With 50STUB Pilot/BI = YES you define that the 50(N)STUB elements trip without delay after pickup if the binary input was activated. For 50STUB Pilot/BI = NO the set delays are always active. If the 50(N)STUB element, when switching the line on to a fault, is to trip without delay or with a short delay, SOTF Time DELAY (address 2680, see above under margin heading General), the parameter 50STUB SOTFtrip (address 2635) is set to YES. If using the stub protection, then set to NO as the effect of this protection function only depends on the position of the isolator.

2.11.4 Settings
The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding secondary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. 2601 Parameter Operating Mode C Setting Options ON:with VT loss ON:always activ OFF 1A 5A 2611 2612 50-B1 DELAY 50N-B1 PICKUP 1A 5A 2613 2614 2615 2620 50N-B1 DELAY 50(N)-B1 Pil/BI 50(N)-B1 SOTFtr 50-B2 PICKUP 1A 5A 2621 2622 50-B2 DELAY 50N-B2 PICKUP 1A 5A 2623 50N-B2 DELAY 0.10 .. 25.00 A; 0.50 .. 125.00 A; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.05 .. 25.00 A; 0.25 .. 125.00 A; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; NO YES NO YES 0.10 .. 25.00 A; 0.50 .. 125.00 A; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.05 .. 25.00 A; 0.25 .. 125.00 A; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; Default Setting ON:with VT loss Comments Operating mode

2610

50-B1 PICKUP

2.00 A 10.00 A 0.30 sec 0.50 A 2.50 A 2.00 sec YES NO 1.50 A 7.50 A 0.50 sec 0.20 A 1.00 A 2.00 sec

50-B1 Pickup

50-B1 Delay 50N-B1 Pickup

50N-B1 Delay Instantaneous trip via Pilot Prot./BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault 50-B2 Pickup

50-B2 Delay 50N-B2 Pickup

50N-B2 Delay

222

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.11 Overcurrent Protection 50/51

Addr. 2624 2625 2630

Parameter 50(N)-B2 Pil/BI 50(N)-B2 SOTFtr 50-STUB PICKUP

C NO YES NO YES 1A 5A

Setting Options

Default Setting NO NO 1.50 A 7.50 A 0.30 sec 0.20 A 1.00 A 2.00 sec NO NO A A 0.50 sec 5.00 0.00 sec A A 0.50 sec 5.00 0.00 sec Normal Inverse

Comments Instantaneous trip via Pilot Prot./BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault 50-STUB Pickup

0.10 .. 25.00 A; 0.50 .. 125.00 A; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec;

2631 2632

50-STUB DELAY 50N-STUB PICKUP 1A 5A

50-STUB Delay 50N-STUB Pickup

0.05 .. 25.00 A; 0.25 .. 125.00 A; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; NO YES NO YES

2633 2634 2635 2640

50N-STUB DELAY 50STUB Pilot/BI 50STUB SOTFtrip 51-B PICKUP 1A 5A

50N-STUB Delay Instantaneous trip via Pilot Prot./BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault 51-B Pickup

0.10 .. 4.00 A; 0.50 .. 20.00 A; 0.05 .. 3.00 sec; 0.50 .. 15.00 ; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec

2642 2643 2646 2650

51-B Time Dial 51-B Time Dial 51-B AddT-DELAY 51N-B PICKUP 1A 5A

51-B Time Dial 51-B Time Dial 51-B Additional Time Delay 51N-B Pickup

0.05 .. 4.00 A; 0.25 .. 20.00 A; 0.05 .. 3.00 sec; 0.50 .. 15.00 ; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inv. LongTimeInverse Inverse Short Inverse Long Inverse Moderately Inv. Very Inverse Extremely Inv. Definite Inv. NO YES NO YES 0.00 .. 30.00 sec

2652 2653 2656 2660

51N-B Time Dial 51N-B Time Dial 51N-B AddTdelay IEC Curve

51N-B Time Dial 51N-B Time Dial 51N-B Additional Time Delay IEC Curve

2661

ANSI Curve

Inverse

ANSI Curve

2670 2671 2680

51(N)-B PilotBI 51(N)-B SOTF-Tr SOTF Time DELAY

NO NO 0.00 sec

Instantaneous trip via Pilot Prot./BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault Trip time delay after SOTF

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

223

2 Functions

2.11.5 Information List

No. 2054 7104 7105 7106 7110 7130 7131 7151 7152 7153 7161 7162 7163 7164 7165 7171 7172 7173 7174 7175 7176 7177 7178 7179 7180 7181 7182 7183 7184 7185 7191 7192 7193 7201 7211 7212 7213 7214 7215 7221 7222 7223 7235 Information Emer. mode >BLOCK 50-B1 >BLOCK 50-B2 >BLOCK 51-B >5X-B InstTRIP >BLOCK 50-STUB >50-STUB ENABLE 5X-B OFF 5X-B BLOCK 5X-B ACTIVE 5X-B PICKUP 5X-B Pickup A 5X-B Pickup B 5X-B Pickup C 5X-B Pickup Gnd 5X-B PU only G 5X-B PU 1p. A 5X-B Pickup AG 5X-B PU 1p. B 5X-B Pickup BG 5X-B Pickup AB 5X-B Pickup ABG 5X-B PU 1p. C 5X-B Pickup CG 5X-B Pickup CA 5X-B Pickup CAG 5X-B Pickup BC 5X-B Pickup BCG 5X-B Pickup ABC 5X-B PickupABCG 50(N)-B1 PICKUP 50(N)-B2 PICKUP 51(N)-B PICKUP 50-STUB PICKUP 5X-B TRIP 5X-B TRIP 1p.A 5X-B TRIP 1p.B 5X-B TRIP 1p.C 5X-B TRIP ABC 50(N)-B1 TRIP 50(N)-B2 TRIP 51(N)-B TRIP 50-STUB TRIP Type of Information OUT SP SP SP SP SP SP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT Emergency mode >BLOCK 50-B1 Backup OverCurrent >BLOCK 50-B2 Backup OverCurrent >BLOCK 51-B Backup OverCurrent >50(N)/51(N) BackupO/C InstantaneousTrip >BLOCK 50-STUB >50-STUB Enable STUB-Bus option 50(N)/51(N) Backup O/C is switched OFF 50(N)/51(N) Backup O/C is BLOCKED 50(N)/51(N) Backup O/C is ACTIVE 50(N)/51(N) Backup O/C PICKED UP 50(N)/51(N) Backup O/C PICKUP Phase A 50(N)/51(N) Backup O/C PICKUP Phase B 50(N)/51(N) Backup O/C PICKUP Phase C 50(N)/51(N) Backup O/C PICKUP GROUND 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup - Only GROUND 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup - Only Phase A 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup AG 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup - Only Phase B 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup BG 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup AB 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup ABG 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup - Only Phase C 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup CG 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup CA 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup CAG 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup BC 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup BCG 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup ABC 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup ABCG 50(N)-B1 Pickup 50(N)-B2 Pickup 51(N)-B Pickup 50-STUB Pickup 50(N)/51(N)-B General TRIP command 50(N)/51(N)-B TRIP - Only Phase A 50(N)/51(N)-B TRIP - Only Phase B 50(N)/51(N)-B TRIP - Only Phase C 50(N)/51(N)-B TRIP Phases ABC 50(N)-B1 TRIP 50(N)-B2 TRIP 51(N)-B TRIP 50-STUB TRIP Comments

224

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.12 Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection (SOTF) 50HS

2.12

Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection (SOTF) 50HS

The instantaneous high-current switch-onto-fault protection function is provided to disconnect immediately and without delay feeders that are switched onto a high-current fault. It is primarily used as fast protection in the event of energizing the feeder while the ground switch is closed, but can also be used every time the feeder is energized in other words also following automatic reclosure - (selectable). The energization of the feeder is reported to the protection by the circuit breaker state recognition function. This function is described in detail in Subsection 2.20.1.

2.12.1 Method of Operation

Pickup The high-current pickup function measures each phase current and compares it with the set value 50HS Pickup (address 2404). The currents are numerically filtered so that only the fundamental frequency is evaluated. If the measured current is more than twice the set value, the protection automatically reverts to the unfiltered measured values, thereby allowing extremely fast tripping. DC current components in the fault current and in the CT secondary circuit following the switching off of large currents virtually have no influence on the high-current pickup operation. The high-current switch-onto-fault function can be phase segregated or three-phase. In case of manual closure of the CB, it operates always in all three phases via the internal release signal SOTF O/C Release 3ph supplied by the central function control of the protective relay, provided that the manual closure can be detected there (see Subsection 2.20.1). If additional criteria were determined during configuration of the line energization detection (address 1134 Line Closure, refer to Subsection 2.1.5.1) the release signal SOTF-O/C Release. Lx can be initiated selectively for each phase. This only applies to devices that can trip single-pole, and is important in conjunction with single-pole automatic reclosure. Tripping is always three-pole. The phase selectivity only applies to the pickup due to the coupling of the high current criterion with the circuit breaker pole which is closed. In order to generate as quickly as possible a trip command after an energization, the fast switch-onto-fault protection is released selectively for each phase already when the line is open. The following figure shows the logic diagram.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

225

2 Functions

Figure 2-97

Logic diagram of the high current switch on to fault protection

2.12.2 Setting Notes

Requirement A prerequisite for the switch-onto-fault protection is that in address 124 50HS SOTF = Enabled was set during the configuration of the device scope of functions. At address 2401 FCT 50HS SOTF it can also be switched ON or OFF. The magnitude of the current which causes pickup of the switch onto fault function is set as 50HS Pickup in address 2404. The setting value should be selected large enough to ensure that the protection does not pick up on an overload condition or a current increase resulting from e.g. an automatic reclosure dead time on a parallel feeder. It is recommended to set at least 2.5 times the rated current of the feeder.

Pickup Threshold

2.12.3 Settings
The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding secondary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. 2401 2404 Parameter FCT 50HS SOTF 50HS Pickup 1A 5A C ON OFF 1.00 .. 25.00 A 5.00 .. 125.00 A Setting Options Default Setting ON 2.50 A 12.50 A Comments 50HS Inst. High Speed SOTF-O/C is 50HS High Speed SOTFO/C PICKUP

2.12.4 Information List

No. 4253 4271 Information >BLOCK 50HS 50HS OFF Type of Information SP OUT Comments >BLOCK 50HS Instantaneous SOTF O/C 50HS High Speed SOTF-O/C is switched OFF

226

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.12 Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection (SOTF) 50HS

No. 4272 4273 4281 4282 4283 4284 4295

Information 50HS BLOCK 50HS ACTIVE 50HS PICKUP 50HS Pickup A 50HS Pickup B 50HS Pickup C 50HS TRIP ABC

Type of Information OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

Comments 50HS High Speed SOTF-O/C is BLOCKED 50HS High Speed SOTF-O/C is ACTIVE 50HS PICKED UP 50HS Pickup Phase A 50HS Pickup Phase B 50HS Pickup Phase C 50HS High Speed SOTF-O/C TRIP command

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

227

2 Functions

2.13

Automatic Reclosure Function 79 (optional)

Experience shows that about 85% of the arc faults on overhead lines are extinguished automatically after being tripped by the protection. This means that the line can be reclosed. Reclosure is performed by an automatic reclosure function (AR). Automatic reclosure is only permitted on overhead lines because automatic extinguishing of a fault arc is only possible there. It should not be used in any other case. If the protected object consists of a mixture of overhead lines and other equipment (e.g. overhead line directly connected to a transformer or overhead line/cable), it must be ensured that reclosure can only be performed in the event of a fault on the overhead line. If the circuit-breaker poles can be operated individually, a single-phase auto-reclosure is usually initiated for single-phase faults and a three-pole auto-reclosure for multiplephase faults in the network with grounded system neutral. If the fault still exists after automatic reclosure (arc has not disappeared, there is a metallic fault), the protective elements will re-trip the circuit breaker. In some systems several reclosing attempts are performed. The 7SA522 version featuring single-pole tripping allows phase-selective, single-pole tripping. A single and three-pole, single and multiple shot automatic reclosure function is integrated, depending on the version. The 7SA522 can also operate in conjunction with an external automatic reclosure device. In this case the signal exchange between 7SA522 and the external reclosure device must be effected via the binary inputs and outputs. It is also possible to have the integrated automatic reclosure controlled by an external protection (e.g. backup protection). Another option is the use of two 7SA522 with automatic reclosure function or one 7SA522 with an automatic reclosure function and a second protection with its own automatic reclosure function.

2.13.1 Method of Operation

Reclosing is performed by an automatic reclosing function (AR). An example of the normal time sequence of a double reclosing is shown in the following Figure.

228

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.13 Automatic Reclosure Function 79 (optional)

Figure 2-98

Timing diagram of a double-shot reclosure with action time (2nd reclosure successful)

The integrated automatic reclosing circuit allows up to 8 reclosing attempts. The first four interrupt cycles may operate with different parameters (action and dead times, single/three-pole). The parameters of the fourth cycle also apply for the fifth cycle and onwards. Selectivity before Reclosing In order for the automatic reclosure to be successful, all faults on the entire overhead line must be cleared at all line ends simultaneously - as fast as possible. In the distance protection, for example, the overreach zone Z1B may be released before the first reclosure. This implies that faults up to the zone reach limit of Z1B are tripped without delay for the first cycle (Figure 2-99). A limited unselectivity in favour of fast simultaneous tripping is accepted here because a reclosure will be performed in any case. The normal elements of the distance protection (Z1, Z2, etc.) and the normal grading of the other short-circuit functions are independent of the automatic reclosure function.

Figure 2-99

Reach control before first reclosure, using distance protection

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

229

2 Functions

If the distance protection is operated with one of the signal transmission methods described in Section 2.6 the signal transmission logic controls the overreaching zone, i.e. it determines whether an undelayed trip (or delayed with T1B) is permitted in the event of faults in the overreaching zone (i.e. up to the reach limit of zone Z1B) at both line ends simultaneously. Whether the automatic reclosing device is ready for reclosing or not is irrelevant, because the pilot protection function ensures the selectivity over 100% of the line length and fast, simultaneous tripping. The same applies for the ground fault-direction comparison protection (Section 2.8). If, however, the signal transmission is switched off or the transmission path is disturbed, the internal automatic reclosing circuit can determine whether the overreaching zone (Z1B in the distance protection) is released for fast tripping. If no reclosing is expected (e.g. circuit-breaker not ready) the normal grading of the distance protection (i.e. fast tripping only for faults in zone Z1) must apply to retain selectivity. Fast tripping before reclosing is also possible with multiple reclosing. Appropriate links between the output signals (e.g. 2nd reclosure ready: 79 2.CycZoneRel) and the inputs for enabling/releasing undelayed tripping of the protection functions can be established via the binary inputs and outputs or the integrated user-definable logic functions (CFC). Mixed Lines Overhead Line/Cable In the distance protection, it is possible to use the distance zone signals to distinguish between cable and overhead line faults to a certain extent. The automatic reclosure circuit can then be blocked by appropriate signals generated by means of the userprogrammable logic functions (CFC) if there is a fault in the cable section. Starting the automatic reclosure function means storing the first trip signal of a system fault generated by a protection function operating with automatic reclosure. In the case of multiple reclosure, starting therefore only takes place once with the first trip command. The detection of the actual circuit breaker position is necessary for the correct functionality of the auto reclose function. Starting is important when the first trip command has not appeared before expiry of an action time (see below under Action times). Automatic reclosure is not started if the circuit breaker has not been ready for at least one TRIPCLOSETRIPcycle at the instant of the first trip command. This can be achieved by setting parameters. For further information, please refer to Interrogation of Circuit Breaker Ready State. Each fault protection function can be parameterized as to whether it should operate with the automatic reclose function or not i.e. whether it should start the reclose function or not. The same goes for external trip commands applied via binary input and/or the trip commands generated by the pilot protection via permissive or intertrip signals. Those protection and monitoring functions in the device which do not respond to shortcircuits or similar conditions (e.g. an overload protection) do not initiate the automatic reclosure function because a reclosure will be of no use here. The breaker failure protection must not start the auto-reclosure either. Action Times It is often desirable to neutralize the ready-for-reclosure-state if the fault condition was sustained for a certain time, e.g. because it is assumed that the arc has burned in to such an extent that there is no longer any chance of automatic arc extinction during the reclose dead time. Also for the sake of selectivity (see above), faults that are usually cleared after a time delay should not lead to reclosure. It is therefore recommended to use action times in conjunction with the distance protection.

Initiation

230

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.13 Automatic Reclosure Function 79 (optional)

The automatic reclosing function of the 7SA522 can be operated with or without action times (configuration parameter AR control mode, address 134, see Subsection 2.1.1.2). No starting signal is necessary from the protection functions or external protection devices that operate without action time. Starting takes place as soon as the first trip command appears. When operating with action time, it is available for each reclose cycle. The action times are always started by the general starting signal (with logic OR combination of all internal and external protection functions which can start the automatic reclosing function). If no trip command is present before the action time expires, the corresponding reclose cycle is not carried out. For each reclosing cycle, the user can set whether or not to allow the initiation. Following the first general pickup, only the action times of those cycles that are set such that they may start off the recloser are considered since the other cycles are not allowed to be the first cycle under any circumstances. By means of the action times and the permission to start the recloser (permission to be the first cycle that is executed) it is possible to determine which reclose cycles are executed depending on the time used by the protection function to trip. Example 1: 3 cycles are set. Starting of the auto-reclosing is allowed for at least the first cycle. The action times are set as follows: 1st Reclosure: T Action = 0.2 s; 2nd Reclosure: T Action = 0.8 s; 3rd Reclosure: T Action = 1.2 s; Since reclosing is ready before the fault occurs, the first trip of a time overcurrent protection following a fault is fast, i.e. before the end of any action time. The automatic reclosing function is therefore started (the first cycle is initiated). After unsuccessful reclosing the 2nd cycle would then become active; but the time overcurrent protection would not trip in this example until after 1s according to its grading time. Since the action time for the second cycle was exceeded here, it is blocked. The 3rd cycle with its parameters is therefore executed now. If the trip command only appeared more than 1.2s after the 1st reclosure, there would have been no further reclosure. Example 2: 3 cycles are set. Starting is only allowed for the first. The action times are set as in example 1. The first protection trip takes place 0.5s after starting. Since the action time for the 1st cycle has already expired at this time, this cannot start the automatic reclosing function. As the 2nd and 3rd cycles are not permitted to start the reclose function they will also not be initiated. Therefore no reclosing takes place as no starting took place. Example 3: 3 cycles are set. At least the first two cycles are set such that they can start the recloser. The action times are set as in example 1. The first protection trip takes place 0.5s after starting. Since the action time for the 1st cycle has already expired at this time, it cannot start the automatic reclosing function but the 2nd cycle, for which starting is allowed, is activated immediately. This 2nd cycle therefore starts the automatic reclosing circuit, the 1st cycle is practically skipped. Control Mode of Automatic Reclosing The dead times - these are the times from elimination of the fault (dropout of the trip command or signalling via auxiliary contacts) to the initiation of the automatic close command - may vary, depending on the automatic reclosing control mode selected when determining the functional scope and the resulting signals of the starting protective functions. In control mode TRIP... (With TRIP command) single-pole or single/three-pole reclose cycles are possible if the device and the circuit-breaker are suitable. In this case different dead times after single-pole tripping on the one hand and after three-

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

231

2 Functions

pole tripping on the other hand are possible (for every reclose cycle). The protective function that issues the trip command determines the type of trip: single-pole or threepole. Depending on the latter the dead time is selected. In control mode PICKUP ...(With PICKUP...) different dead times can be set for every reclosing cycle after single-phase, two-phase and three-phase faults. Selection of the dead time in this case depends on the type of fault determined by the initiating protection function at the instant that the trip commands reset. This operating mode allows the dead times to be dependent on the type of fault in the case of three-pole reclose cycles. Reclose Block Different conditions lead to blocking of the automatic reclosing. No reclosing is for example possible if it is blocked via a binary input. If the automatic reclosing has not yet been started, it cannot be started at all. If a reclose cycle is already in progress, dynamic blocking takes place (see below). Each individual cycle may also be blocked via binary input. In this case the cycle concerned is declared as invalid and will be skipped in the sequence of permissible cycles. If blocking takes place while the cycle concerned is already running, reclosing is cancelled, i.e. no reclosing takes place even if other valid cycles have been parameterized. Internal blocking signals, with a limited duration, arise during the course of the reclose cycles: The reclaim time T-RECLAIM begins with every automatic reclosing command. If the reclosure is successful, all the functions of the automatic reclosing return to the quiescent state at the end of the reclaim time; a fault after expiry of the reclaim time is treated as a new fault in the network. Re-tripping by a protection function during the reclaim time initiates the next reclose cycle in the case of multiple reclosure; if no further reclosure is permitted, the last reclosure cycle is declared as unsuccessful if re-tripping within the reclaim time takes place. The automatic reclosure is blocked dynamically. The dynamic lock-out locks the reclosure for the duration of the dynamic lock-out time (0.5s). This occurs for example after a final tripping or other events which block the automatic reclosure after it has been started. Restarting is locked out for this time. When this time expires, the automatic reclosure function returns to its quiescent state and is ready for a new fault in the power system. If the circuit breaker is closed manually (by the control discrepancy switch connected to a binary input, the local control functions or via one of the serial interfaces), the automatic reclosure is blocked for a manual-close-blocking time BLOCK MC Dur.. If a trip command is issued during this time, it can be assumed that a metallic fault is the cause (e.g. closed ground switch). Every trip command within this time is therefore a final trip. With the user definable logic functions (CFC) further control functions can be processed in the same way as a manualclose command. Interrogation of the Circuit Breaker Ready State A precondition for automatic reclosure following clearance of a fault is that the circuit breaker is ready for at least one TRIP-CLOSE-TRIP-cycle when the automatic reclosure circuit is started (i.e. at the time of the first trip command). The readiness of the circuit breaker is signalled to the device through the binary input >Bkr1 Ready (No. 371). If no such signal is available, the circuit breaker interrogation can be suppressed (default setting) as automatic reclosing would otherwise not be possible at all. In the event of a single cycle reclosure this interrogation is usually sufficient. Since, for example, the air pressure or the spring tension for the circuit breaker mechanism drops after the trip, no further interrogation should take place.

232

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.13 Automatic Reclosure Function 79 (optional)

Especially when multiple reclosing attempts are programmed, it is recommended to monitor the circuit breaker condition not only prior to the first but also before each following reclosing attempt. Reclosure will be blocked until the binary input indicates that the circuit breaker is ready to complete another CLOSE-TRIP cycle. The time needed by the circuit-breaker to regain the ready state can be monitored by the 7SA522. This monitoring time CB TIME OUT starts as soon as the CB indicates the not ready state. The dead time may be extended if the ready state is not indicated when it expires. However, if the circuit breaker does not indicate its ready status for a longer period than the monitoring time, reclosure is locked out dynamically (see also Reclose Block, above). Processing the Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contacts If the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are connected to the device, the reaction of the circuit-breaker is also checked for plausibility. In the case of single-pole tripping this applies to each individual breaker pole. This assumes that the auxiliary contacts are connected to the appropriate binary inputs for each pole (>52a Bkr1 A, No. 366; >52a Bkr1 B, No. 367; >52a Bkr1 C, No. 368). If, instead of the individual pole auxiliary contacts, the series connections of the normally open and normally closed contacts are used, the CB is assumed to have all three poles open when the series connection of the normally closed contacts is closed (binary input >52b Bkr1 3p Op, No.411). All three poles are assumed closed when the series connection of the normally open contacts is closed (binary input >52a Bkr1 3p Cl, No. 410). If neither of these conditions are present, it is assumed that the circuit breaker has one pole open (even if this condition also theoretically applies to the two-pole open state). The device continuously checks the switching state of the circuit-breaker: As long as the auxiliary contacts indicate that the CB is not closed (three-pole), the automatic reclosure function cannot be started. This guarantees that a close command can only be issued if the CB previously tripped (out of the closed state). The valid dead time begins when the trip command disappears or signals taken from the CB auxiliary contacts indicate that the CB (pole) has opened. If the CB opens three-pole after a single-pole trip command, this is considered as a three-pole tripping. If three-pole reclosure cycles are allowed, the dead time for threepole tripping is activated in the control mode with trip command (see margin heading Control Mode of the Automatic Reclosure) above; in control by pickup, the pickup configuration of the starting protective function(s) is still decisive. If three-pole cycles are not allowed, the reclosure is locked out dynamically. The trip command is final. The latter also applies if the CB trips two poles following a single-pole trip command. The device can only detect this if the auxiliary contacts of each pole are connected individually. The device immediately initiates three pole coupling thus resulting in a three-pole trip command. If the CB auxiliary contacts indicate that at least one further pole has opened during the dead time following a single-pole trip, a three-pole reclose cycle is initiated with the dead time for three-pole reclosure if this is allowed. If the auxiliary contacts are connected for each pole individually, the device can detect a two-pole open CB. In this case the device immediately sends a three-pole trip command provided the forced three-pole trip is activated (see Subsection 2.13.2 at margin heading Forced ThreePole Trip).

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

233

2 Functions

Sequence of a Three-Pole Reclose Cycle

If the automatic reclosure function is ready, the fault protection trips three pole for all faults inside the element selected for reclosure. The automatic reclosure function is then started. When the trip command resets or the circuit-breaker opens (auxiliary contact criterion) an (adjustable) dead time starts. At the end of this dead time the circuit-breaker receives a close command. At the same time the (adjustable) reclaim time is started. If during configuration of the protection functions address 134 AR control mode = PICKUP ... was set, different dead times can be parameterized depending on the type of protection pickup. If the fault is cleared (successful reclosure), the reclaim time expires and all functions return to their quiescent state. The fault is cleared. If the fault is not cleared (unsuccessful reclosure), the fault protection issues a final trip with the protection element that is selected to operate without reclosure. Any fault during the reclaim time leads to a final trip. After unsuccessful reclosure (final tripping), the automatic reclosure is blocked dynamically (see also margin heading Reclose Block, above). The sequence above applies for one reclosure cycle. In 7SA522 multiple reclosure (up to 8 cycles) is also possible (see below).

Sequence of a Single-Pole Reclose Cycle

Single-pole reclose cycles are only possible with the appropriate device version and if this was selected during the configuration of the protection functions (address 110 Trip mode, see also Subsection 2.1.1.2). Of course, the circuit-breaker must also be suited for single-pole tripping. If the automatic reclosure function is ready, the fault protection trips single pole for all single-phase faults inside the element selected for reclosure. Under the general settings (address 1156 Trip2phFlt, see also Subsection 2.1.5.1) it can also be selected that single-pole tripping takes place for two-phase faults without ground. Singlepole tripping is of course only possible with fault protection functions that can determine the faulty phase. If only single-pole reclosure is selected then the fault protection issues a final three pole trip with the element that is valid/selected without reclosure. Every three-pole trip is final. The automatic reclosure is blocked dynamically (see also margin heading Reclosure Block, above). The automatic reclosure function is started following a single-pole trip. The (adjustable) dead time for the single-pole reclose cycles starts with reset of the trip command or opening of the circuit-breaker pole (auxiliary contact criterion). After expiry of the dead time the circuit-breaker receives a close command. At the same time the (adjustable) reclaim time is started. If the reclosure is blocked during the dead time following a single-pole trip, immediate three-pole tripping can take place as an option (forced three-pole coupling). If the fault is cleared (successful reclosure), the reclaim time expires and all functions return to their quiescent state. The fault is cleared. If the fault is not cleared (unsuccessful reclosure), the fault protection issues a final trip with the protection element that is valid/selected without reclosure. All faults during the reclaim time also lead to the issue of a final three-pole trip. After unsuccessful reclosure (final tripping), the automatic reclosure is blocked dynamically (see also margin heading Reclose Block, above). The sequence above applies for single reclosure cycles. In 7SA522 multiple reclosure (up to 8 cycles) is also possible (see below).

234

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.13 Automatic Reclosure Function 79 (optional)

Sequence of a Single and ThreePole Reclose Cycle

This operating mode is only possible with the appropriate device version and if this was selected during configuration of the protection functions (address 110, see also Subsection 2.1.1.2). Of course, the circuit-breaker must also be suitable for singlepole tripping. If the automatic reclosure function is ready, the fault protection trips single- pole for single-phase faults and three-pole for multi-phase faults. Under the general settings (address 1156 Trip2phFlt, see also Section 2.1.5.1) it can also be selected that single-pole tripping takes place for two-phase faults without ground. Single-pole tripping is of course only possible with fault protection functions that can determine the faulty phase. The valid protection element selected for reclosure ready state applies for all fault types. The automatic reclosure function is started in the event of a trip. Depending on the type of fault the (adjustable) dead time for the single-pole reclose cycle or the (separately adjustable) dead time for the three-pole reclose cycle starts following the reset of the trip command or opening of the circuit-breaker (pole). After expiry of the dead time the circuit-breaker receives a close command. At the same time the (adjustable) reclaim time is started. If the reclosure is blocked during the dead time following a single-pole trip, immediate three-pole tripping can take place as an option (forced three-pole coupling). If the fault is cleared (successful reclosure), the reclaim time expires and all functions return to their quiescent state. The fault is cleared. If the fault is not cleared (unsuccessful reclosure), the fault protection initiates a final three-pole trip with the protection element that is valid/selected when reclosure is not ready. All faults during the reclaim time also lead to the issue of a final three-pole trip. After unsuccessful reclosure (final tripping), the automatic reclosure is blocked dynamically (see also margin heading Reclose Block, above). The sequence above applies for one reclosure cycle. In 7SA522 multiple reclosure (up to 8 cycles) is also possible (see below).

MultiShot Reclosing

If a fault still exists after a reclosure attempt, further reclosure attempts can be made. Up to 8 reclosure attempts are possible with the automatic reclosure function integrated in the 7SA522. The first four reclosure cycles are independent of each other. Each one has separate action and dead times, can operate single or three pole and can be blocked separately via binary inputs. The parameters and intervention possibilities of the fourth cycle also apply to the fifth cycle and onwards. The sequence is the same in principle as in the different reclosure programs described above. However, if the first reclosure attempt was unsuccessful, the reclosure function is not blocked, but instead the next reclose cycle is started. The appropriate dead time starts with the reset of the trip command or opening of the circuit-breaker (pole) (auxiliary contact criterion). The circuit-breaker receives a new close command after expiry of the dead time. At the same time the reclaim time is started. Until the set maximum number of permissible auto-reclose cycles has been reached, the reclaim time is reset with every new trip command after reclosure and started again with the next close command. If one of the reclosing attempts is successful, i.e. the fault disappeared after reclosure, the blocking time expires and the automatic reclosing system is reset. The fault is cleared. If none of the cycles is successful, the fault protection initiates a final three-pole trip after the last permissible reclosure, following a protection element active without auto-

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

235

2 Functions

reclosure. The automatic reclosure is blocked dynamically (see also margin heading Reclose Block, above). Handling Evolving Faults When single-pole and single and three-pole reclose cycles are executed in the network, particular attention must be paid to sequential faults. Sequential faults are faults which occur during the dead time after clearance of the first fault. There are various ways of handling sequential faults in the 7SA522 depending on the requirements of the network: For the Detection of an evolving fault you can select whether the trip command of a protective function during the dead time or every further pickup is the criterion for an evolving fault. There are also various selectable possibilities for the response of the internal autoreclose function to a detected evolving fault. EV. FLT. MODE Stops 79: The reclosure is blocked as soon as an evolving fault is detected. Tripping as a result of the sequential fault is three-pole. This applies irrespective of whether threepole cycles are permitted or not. There are no further reclosure attempts; the autoreclosure is blocked dynamically (see also margin heading Reclose Block, above). EV. FLT. MODE starts 3p AR: As soon as a sequential fault is detected the recloser switches over to a three-pole reclose cycle. All trip commands are now three-pole. The separately settable dead time for sequential faults starts with the clearance of the sequential fault; after the dead time the circuit-breaker receives a close command. The further sequence is the same as for single and three-pole cycles. The complete dead time in this case consists of the portion of the single pole dead time up to clearance of the sequential fault plus the dead time for the sequential fault. This makes sense because the duration of the three-pole dead time is most important for the stability of the network. If reclosure is blocked due to a sequential fault without the protection issuing a threepole trip command (e.g. for sequential fault detection with starting), the device can send a three pole trip command so that the circuit-breaker does not remain open with one pole (forced three-pole coupling). Dead Line Check (DLC) If the voltage of a disconnected phase does not disappear following a trip, reclosure can be prevented. A prerequisite for this function is that the voltage transformers are connected on the line side of the circuit breaker. To select this function the dead line check must be activated. The automatic reclosure function then checks the disconnected line for no-voltage: The line must have been without voltage for at least an adequate measuring time during the dead time. If this was not the case the reclosure is blocked dynamically. This no-voltage check on the line is of advantage if a small generator (e.g. wind generator) is connected along the line. Reduced Dead Time (RDT) If automatic reclosure is performed in connection with time-graded protection, non-selective tripping before reclosure is often unavoidable in order to achieve fast, simultaneous tripping at all line ends. The 7SA522 has a reduced dead time (RDT) procedure which reduces the effect of the fault on healthy line sections to a minimum. The

236

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.13 Automatic Reclosure Function 79 (optional)

three phase voltages are measured for the reduced dead time. The voltage transformers must be located on the line side of the circuit breaker. In the event of a fault close to one of the line ends, the surrounding lines can initially be tripped because, for example, a distance protection detects the fault in its overreaching zone Z1B (Figure 2-100, relay location III). If the network is meshed and there is at least one other infeed on the busbar B, the voltage there returns immediately after clearance of the fault. For single-pole tripping it is sufficient if there is a grounded transformer with delta winding connected at busbar B which ensures symmetry of the voltages and thus induces a return voltage in the open phase. This allows a distinction between the faulty line and the unfaulted line to be made as follows: Since line B - C is only tripped singled-ended at C, it receives a return voltage from the end B which is not tripped so that at C the open phase(s) also has (have) voltage. If the device detects this at position III, reclosure can take place immediately or in a shorter time (to ensure sufficient voltage measuring time). The healthy line B - C is then back in operation. Line AB is tripped at both ends. No voltage is therefore present identifying the line as the faulted one at both ends. The normal dead time comes into service here.

Figure 2-100

Example of a reduced dead time (RDT)

Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)

In all the previous alternatives it was assumed that defined and equal dead times were set at both line ends, if necessary for different fault types and/or reclose cycles. It is also possible to set the dead times (if necessary different for various fault types and/or reclose cycles) at one line end only and to configure the adaptive dead time at the other end (or ends). This can be done provided that the voltage transformers are located on the line side of the circuit breaker or that facilities for transfer of a close command to the remote line end exists. Figure 2-101 shows an example with voltage measurement. It is assumed that the device I is operating with defined dead times whereas the adaptive dead time is configured at position II. It is important that the line is at least fed from busbar A, i.e. the side with the defined dead times. With the adaptive dead time the automatic reclosure function at line end II decides independently if and when reclosure is sensible and allowed and when it is not. The criterion is the line voltage at end II, which was re-applied from end I following reclosure there. Reclosure therefore takes place at end II as soon as it is apparent that voltage has been re-applied to the line from end I. In the illustrated example, the lines are disconnected at positions I, II and III. At I reclosure takes place after the parameterized dead time. At III a reduced dead time can take place (see above) if there is also an infeed on busbar B.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

237

2 Functions

If the fault has been cleared (successful reclosure), line A - B is re-connected to the voltage at busbar A through position I. Device II detects this voltage and also recloses after a short delay (to ensure a sufficient voltage measuring time). The fault is cleared. If the fault has not been cleared after reclosure at I (unsuccessful reclosure), a switch on to fault occurs at I, no healthy voltage appears at II. The device there detects this and does not reclose. In the case of multiple reclosure the sequence may be repeated several times following an unsuccessful reclosure until one of the reclosures attempts is successful or a final trip takes place.

Figure 2-101

Example of adaptive dead time (ADT)

As is shown by the example, the adaptive dead time has the following advantages: The circuit-breaker at position II is not reclosed at all if the fault persists and is not unnecessarily stressed as a result. With non-selective tripping by overreach at position III no further trip and reclose cycles occur here because the fault path via busbar B and position II remains interrupted even in the event of several reclosure attempts. At position I overreach is allowed in the case of multiple reclosures and even in the event of final tripping because the line remains open at position II and therefore no actual overreach can occur at I. The adaptive dead time also includes the reduced dead time because the criteria are the same. There is no need to set the reduced dead time as well. CLOSE Command Transmission (Remote-CLOSE) With close command transmission via the digital connection paths the dead times are only set at one line end. The other line end (or line ends in lines with more than two ends) are set to Adaptive Dead Time (ADT). The latter just responds to the received close commands from the transmitting end. At the sending line end the transmission of the close command is delayed until it is sure that the local reclosure was successful. This means that following reclosure a short delay for detection of further local pickup is provided. This delay prevents unnecessary closing at the remote end on the one hand but also increases the time until reclosure takes place there. This is not critical for a single-pole interruption or in radial or meshed networks if no stability problems are expected under these conditions.

238

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.13 Automatic Reclosure Function 79 (optional)

Figure 2-102

AR Remote-Close function via protection data interface

The close command can be transmitted by a pilot protection scheme using the protection interfaces (ordering variant). When the annunciation 79 Remote Close is output, this information is transmitted at the same time to the remote end via the protection data interface. The information is OR-combined with the information of the binary input >79 RemoteClose and made available for the automatic reclosure. (Figure 2-102). Connecting an External AutoReclose Device If the 7SA522 has to work with an external reclosure device, the binary inputs and outputs provided for this purpose must be taken into consideration. The following inputs and outputs are recommended: Binary inputs: 383 >Enable ARzones With this binary input the external reclosure device controls the elements of the individual fault protection functions which are active before reclosure (e.g. overreaching zone in the distance protection). This input is not required if no overreaching element is used (e.g. differential protection or comparison mode with distance protection, see also above margin heading Selectivity before Reclosure). The external reclosure device is only programmed for one pole; the elements of the individual protection functions that are activated before reclosure via No. 383 only do so in the case of single-phase faults; in the event of multiple-phase faults these elements of the individual short-circuit functions do not operate. This input is not required if no overreaching element is used (e.g. differential protection or comparison mode with distance protection, see also above margin heading Selectivity before Reclosure). The external reclosure device allows 1-pole tripping (logic inversion or 3-pole coupling). If this input is not assigned or not routed (matrix), the protection functions trip 3-pole for all faults. If the external reclosure device cannot supply this signal but sends a 3-pole coupling signal instead, this must be taken into account in the routing of the binary inputs: The signal must be inverted in this case (L-active = active without voltage).

382 >Only 1ph AR

381 >1p Trip Perm

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

239

2 Functions

Binary outputs: 501 Relay PICKUP 512 Relay TRIP 1p.A 513 Relay TRIP 1p.B 514 Relay TRIP 1p.C 515 Relay TRIP 3ph. Start of protection device, general (if required by external recloser device). 1-pole device tripping phase A. 1-pole device tripping phase B. 1-pole device tripping phase C. Trip protective device 3-pole,

In order to obtain a phase-segregated trip indication, the respective single-pole trip commands must be combined with the three-pole trip command on one output. Figure 2-103 for example, shows the interconnection between a 7SA522 and an external reclosure device with a mode selector switch. Depending on what the external recloser device requires, the three single-pole outputs (No. 512, 513, 514) may also be combined to one single-pole tripping output; the No. 515 provides the three-pole tripping signal to the external device. For exclusively three-pole auto-reclosure cycles, the general pickup (No. 501, if required by the external reclosure device) and general trip signal (No. 511) from 7SA522 (see Figure 2-104) usually suffice.

Figure 2-103

Connection example with external auto-reclosure device for 1-/3-pole AR with mode selector switch

240

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.13 Automatic Reclosure Function 79 (optional)

Figure 2-104

Connection example with external reclosure device for 3-pole AR

Controlling the Internal Automatic Reclosure by an External Protection Device

If the 7SA522 is equipped with the internal automatic reclosure function, it may also be controlled by an external protection device. This is of use for example on line ends with redundant protection or additional back-up protection when the second protection is used for the same line end and has to work with the automatic reclosure function integrated in the 7SA522. The binary inputs and outputs provided for this functionality must be considered in this case. It must be decided whether the internal auto-reclosure is to be controlled by the starting (pickup) or by the trip command of the external protection (see also above under Control Mode of the Automatic Reclosure). If the auto-reclosure is controlled by the trip command, the following inputs and outputs are recommended to be used: The automatic reclosure function is started via the Binary inputs: 2711 >79 Start 2712 >79 Trip Ph. A 2713 >79 Trip Ph. B 2714 >79 Trip Ph. C General fault detection for the automatic reclosure circuit (only required for action time), Trip command Afor automatic reclosing, Trip command Bfor automatic reclosing, Trip command C for automatic reclosing.

The general fault detection determines the starting of the action times. It is also necessary if the automatic reclosure circuit is to detect sequential faults by fault detection. In other cases this input information is not necessary. The trip commands decide whether the dead time for single-pole or three-pole reclose cycles is activated or whether the reclosure is blocked in the event of a three-pole trip (depending on the set dead times). Figure 2-105 shows the interconnection between the internal automatic reclosure of 7SA522 and an external protection device, as a connection example for single-pole cycles.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

241

2 Functions

To achieve three pole coupling of the external protection and to release, if necessary, its accelerated elements before reclosure the following output functions are suitable: 2864 79 1p Trip Perm Internal automatic reclosure function ready for 1-pole reclose cycle, i.e. allows 1-pole tripping (logic inversion of the 3-pole coupling). Internal automatic reclosure function ready for the first reclose cycle, i.e. releases the element of the external protection device for reclosure, the corresponding outputs can be used for other cycles. This output can be omitted if the external protection does not require an overreaching element (e.g. differential protection or comparison mode with distance protection). Internal automatic reclosure function is programmed for one pole, i.e. only recloses after single-pole tripping. This output can be omitted if no overreaching element is required (e.g. differential protection or comparison mode with distance protection).

2889 79 1.CycZoneRel

2820 79 Program1pole

Instead of the three phase-segregated trip commands, the single-pole and three-pole tripping may also be signalled to the internal automatic reclosure function - provided that the external protection device is capable of this -, i.e. assign the following binary inputs of the 7SA522: 2711 >79 Start 2715 >79 TRIP 1p 2716 >79 TRIP 3p General fault detection for the internal automatic reclosure function (only required for action time), Trip command 1-pole for the internal automatic reclosure, Trip command 3-pole for the internal automatic reclosure function,

If only three-pole reclosure cycles are to be executed, it is sufficient to assign the binary input >79 TRIP 3p (No. 2716) for the trip signal. Figure 2-106 shows an example. Any overreaching elements of the external protection are enabled again by 79 1.CycZoneRel (No. 2889) and of further cycles, if applicable.

Figure 2-105

Connection example with external protection device for 1-/3-pole reclosure; AR control mode = with TRIP

242

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.13 Automatic Reclosure Function 79 (optional)

Figure 2-106

Connection example with external protection device for 3-pole reclosure; AR control mode = with TRIP

But if the internal automatic reclose function is controlled by the pickup (only possible for three-pole tripping: 110 Trip mode = 3pole only), the phase-dedicated pickup signals of the external protection must be connected if distinction shall be made between different types of fault. The general trip command then suffices for tripping (No. 2746). Figure 2-107 shows a connection example.

Figure 2-107

Connection example with external protection device for fault detection dependent dead time - dead time control by pickup signals of the protection device; AR control mode = with PICKUP

Two Protection Relays with Two Automatic Reclosure Circuits

If redundant protection is provided for a line and each protection operates with its own automatic reclosure function, a certain signal exchange between the two combinations is necessary. The connection example in Figure 2-108 shows the necessary crossconnections.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

243

2 Functions

If phase segregated auxiliary contacts of the circuit-breaker are connected, a threepole coupling by the 7SA522 is guaranteed when more than one CB pole is tripped. This requires activation of the forced three pole trip (see Subsection 2.13.2 at margin heading Forced Three-Pole Trip). An external automatic three-pole coupling is therefore not necessary when the above conditions are satisfied. This rules out two-pole tripping under all circumstances.

Figure 2-108

Connection example for 2 protection devices with 2 automatic reclosure functions

2.13.2 Setting Notes

General If no reclosure is required on the feeder to which the 7SA522 distance protection is applied (e.g. for cables, transformers, motors or similar), the automatic reclosure function must be inhibited during configuration of the device (see Subsection 2.1.1.2, address 133). The automatic reclosure is then totally disabled, i.e. the automatic reclosure is not processed in the 7SA522. No signals regarding the recloser function are generated and the binary inputs for the automatic reclosure function are ignored. All

244

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.13 Automatic Reclosure Function 79 (optional)

parameters for setting the automatic reclosure function are inaccessible and of no significance. Tripping is always three-pole for all faults. If, on the other hand, the internal automatic reclosure function is to be used, the type of reclosure must be selected during the configuration of the functions (see Section 2.1.1.2) in address 133 79 Auto Recl. the AR control mode and in address 134 the AR control mode. Up to 8 reclose attempts are allowed with the integrated automatic reclosure function in the 7SA522. Whereas the settings in the addresses 3401 to 3441 are common to all reclosure cycles, the individual settings of the cycles are made from address 3450 onwards. It is therefore possible to set different individual parameters for the first four reclose cycles. From the fifth cycle onwards the parameters for the fourth cycle apply. The automatic reclosing function can be turned ON or OFF under address 3401 FCT 79. A prerequisite for automatic reclosure taking place after a trip due to a short-circuit is that the circuit breaker is ready for at least one TRIP-CLOSE-TRIP cycle at the time the automatic reclosure circuit is started, i.e. at the time of the first trip command. The readiness of the circuit breaker is signalled to the device through the binary input >Bkr1 Ready (No. 371). If no such signal is available, leave the setting under address 3402 52? 1.TRIP = NO because no automatic reclosure would be possible at all otherwise. If circuit breaker interrogation is possible, you should set 52? 1.TRIP = YES. Furthermore the circuit-breaker ready state can also be interrogated prior to every reclosure. This is set when setting the individual reclose cycles (see below). To check the ready status of the circuit breaker is regained during the dead times, you can set a circuit breaker ready monitor time under address 3409 CB TIME OUT. The time is set slightly longer than the recovery time of the circuit breaker after a TRIP CLOSETRIPcycle. If the circuit-breaker is not ready again by the time this timer expires, no reclosure takes place, the automatic reclosure function is blocked dynamically. Waiting for the circuit-breaker to be ready can lead to an increase of the dead times. Interrogation of a sync. check (if used) can also delay reclosure. To avoid uncontrolled prolongation it is possible to set a maximum prolongation of the dead time in this case under address 3411 Max. DEAD EXT.. This prolongation is unlimited if the setting is applied. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. Remember that longer dead times are only permissible after three-pole tripping when no stability problems arise or when a sync. check takes place before reclosure. The reclaim time T-RECLAIM (address 3403) defines the time that must elapse, after a successful reclosing attempt, before the automatic reclosing function is reset. Retripping of a protection function within this time initiates the next reclose cycle in the event of multiple reclosure; if no further reclosure is permitted, the last reclosure is treated as unsuccessful. The reclaim time must therefore be longer than the longest response time of a protective function which can start the automatic reclosure circuit. A few seconds are generally sufficient. In areas with frequent thunderstorms or storms, a shorter blocking time may be necessary to avoid feeder lockout due to sequential lightning strikes or cable flashovers. A longer reclaim time should be chosen if there is no possibility to monitor the circuit breaker (see above) during multiple reclosing (e.g. because of auxiliary contacts missing and information on the circuit breaker ready status). Then the reclaim time must be longer than the recovery time of the circuit-breaker.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

245

2 Functions

The blocking duration following ManualClosedetection BLOCK MC Dur. (address 3404) must guarantee the circuit breaker to open and close reliably (0.5 s to 1 s). If a fault is detected by a protection function within this time after closing of the circuit breaker was detected, no reclosure takes place and a final three-pole trip command is issued. If this is not desired, set address 3404 to 0. The options for handling evolving faults are described in Subsection 2.13 under margin heading Handling Evolving Faults. The treatment of sequential faults is not necessary on line ends where the adaptive dead time is applied (address 133 79 Auto Recl. = ADT). The addresses 3406 and 3407 are then of no consequence and therefore not accessible. The detection of an evolving fault can be defined under address 3406 EV. FLT. RECOG..EV. FLT. RECOG. with PICKUP means that, during a dead time, every pickup of a protective function will be interpreted as an evolving fault. With EV. FLT. RECOG. with TRIP a fault during a dead time is only interpreted as a evolving fault if it has led to a trip command by a protection function. This may also include trip commands which are coupled in externally via a binary input or which have been transmitted from an opposite end of the protected object. If an external protection device operates together with the auto-reclosure, evolving fault detection with pickup presupposes that a pickup signal of the external device is also connected to the 7SA522; otherwise an evolving fault can only be detected with the external trip command even if with PICKUP was set here. The reaction in response to sequential faults can be selected under address 3407. EV. FLT. MODE Stops 79 means that no reclosure takes place after detection of a sequential fault. This is always useful when only single-pole reclosure is to take place or when stability problems are expected due to the subsequent three-pole dead time. If a three-pole reclose cycle is to be initiated by tripping of the evolving fault, set EV. FLT. MODE = starts 3p AR. In this case a separately adjustable three-pole dead time is started with the three-pole trip command due to the sequential fault. This is only useful if three-pole reclosure is also permitted. Address 3408 T-Start MONITOR monitors the reaction of the circuit-breaker after a trip command. If the CB has not opened during this time (from the beginning of the trip command), the automatic reclosure is blocked dynamically. The criterion for circuit breaker opening is the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact or the disappearance of the trip command. If a circuit-breaker failure protection (internal or external) is used on the feeder, this time should be shorter than the delay time of the circuitbreaker failure protection so that no reclosure takes place if the circuit-breaker fails. If the reclosure command is transmitted to the opposite end, this transmission can be delayed by the time setting in address 3410 RemoteCl. Delay. This transmission is only possible if the device operates with adaptive dead time at the remote end (address 133 79 Auto Recl. = ADT). This parameter is otherwise irrelevant. On the one hand, this delay serves to prevent the remote end device from reclosing unnecessarily when local reclosure is unsuccessful. On the other hand it should be noted that the line is not available for energy transport until the remote end has also closed. This delay must therefore be added to the dead time for consideration of the network stability. Configuration of Auto Reclosure This configuration concerns the interaction between the protection and supplementary functions of the device and the automatic reclosure function. The selection of functions of the device which are to start the automatic reclosure circuit and which are not to, is made here.

246

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.13 Automatic Reclosure Function 79 (optional)

Address 3420 AR w/ 21, i.e. with distance protection Address 3421 AR w/ 50HS-SOTF, i.e. with high-current fast tripping Address 3422 AR w/ Weak Inf., i.e. with weakinfeed trip function Address 3423 AR w/ 50N/51N, i.e. with transfer trip and remote trip Address 3424 AR w/ DTT, i.e. with externally fed trip command Address 3425 AR w/ 50(N)-B, i.e. with time overcurrent protection For the functions which are to start the auto-reclosure function, the corresponding address is set to YES, for the others to NO. The other functions cannot start the automatic reclosure because reclosure is of little use here. Forced Three-pole Trip If reclosure is blocked during the dead time of a single-pole cycle without a three-pole trip command having been initiated, the breaker remains open at one pole. With address 3430 AR TRIP 3pole it is possible to determine that the tripping logic of the device issues a three-pole trip command in this case (pole discrepancy prevention for the CB poles). Set this address to YES if the CB can be tripped single-pole and has no pole discrepancy protection itself. Nevertheless, the device pre-empts the pole discrepancy supervision of the CB because the forced three-pole trip of the device is immediately initiated as soon as the reclosure is blocked following a single-pole trip or if the CB auxiliary contacts report an implausible breaker state (see also Subsection 2.13 at margin heading Processing the Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contacts). The forced three-pole coupling is also activated when only three-pole cycles are allowed but a single-pole trip is signalled externally via a binary input. The forced three pole trip is unnecessary if only a common three-pole control of the CB is possible. Dead Line Check / Reduced Dead Time Under address 3431 the dead line check or the reduced dead time function can be activated. Either the one or the other can be used as the two options are contradictory. The voltage transformers must be connected to the line side of the circuit breaker if either of these modes is to be used. If this is not the case or if neither of the two functions is used, set DLC or RDT = WITHOUT. If the adaptive dead time is used (see below), the parameters mentioned here are omitted because the adaptive dead time implies the properties of the reduced dead time. DLC or RDT = DLC means that the dead line check of the line voltage is used. This only enables reclosure after it becomes apparent that the line is dead. In this case, the phase-ground voltage limit is set in address 3441 Dead Volt. Thr. below which the line is considered voltage-free (disconnected). The setting is applied in Volts secondary. This value can be entered as a primary value when parameterizing with a PC and DIGSI. Address 3438 Volt. Superv.-T determines the measuring time available for determining the no-voltage condition. Address 3440 is irrelevant here. DLC or RDT = RDT means that the reduced dead time is used. This is described in detail in Section 2.13 at margin heading Reduced Dead Time (RDT). In this case the setting under address 3440 Live Volt. Thr. determines the limit voltage, phase ground, above which the line is considered to be fault-free. The setting must be smaller than the lowest expected operating voltage. The setting is applied in Volts secondary. This value can be entered as a primary value when parameterizing with a PC and DIGSI. Address 3438 Volt. Superv.-T determines the measuring time used to determine that the line is fault free with this return voltage. It should be longer than any transient oscillations resulting from line energization. Address 3441 is irrelevant here.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

247

2 Functions

Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)

When operating with adaptive dead time, it must be ensured in advance that one end per line operates with defined dead times and has an infeed. The other (or the others in multi-branch lines) may operate with adaptive dead time. It is essential that the voltage transformers are located on the line side of the circuit breaker. Details about this function can be found in Section 2.13 at margin heading Adaptive Dead Time (ADT) and Close Command-transfer (Remote-CLOSE). For the line end with defined dead times the number of desired reclose cycles must be set during the configuration of the protective functions (Section 2.1.1) in address 133 79 Auto Recl.. For the devices operating with adaptive dead time 79 Auto Recl. = ADT must be set during the configuration of the protective functions under address 133. Only the parameters described below are interrogated in the latter case. No settings are then made for the individual reclosure cycles. The adaptive dead time implies functionality of reduced dead time. The adaptive dead time may be voltage-controlled or RemoteCLOSEcontrolled. Both is possible at the same time. In the first case reclosure takes place as soon as the return voltage, after reclosure at the remote end, is detected. For this purpose the device must be connected to voltage transformers located on the line side of the circuit breaker. In the case of remote-close, the device waits until the remoteclose command is received before issuing the reclose command. The action time ADT ACTION Time (address 3433) is the time after initiation (fault detection) by any protective function which can start the automatic reclosure function within which the trip command must appear. If the command does not appear until after the action time has expired, there is no reclosure. Depending on the configuration of the protective functions (see Subsection 2.1.1.2) the action time may also be omitted; this applies especially when an initiating protective function has no fault detection signal. The dead times are determined by the reclosure command of the device at the line end with the defined dead times. In cases where this reclosure command does not appear, e.g. because the reclosure was in the mean time blocked there, the readiness of the local device must return to the quiescent state at some time. This takes place after the maximum wait time ADT maxDEADTIME (address 3434). This must be long enough to include the last reclosure of the remote end. In the case of single cycle reclosure, the sum total of maximum dead time plus reclaim time of the other device is sufficient. In the case of multiple reclosure the worst case is that all reclosures of the other end except the last one are unsuccessful. The time of all these cycles must be taken into account. To avoid making exact calculations, it is possible to use the sum of all dead times and all protection operating times plus one reclaim time. Under address 3435 ADT 1p allowed it can be determined whether single-pole tripping is allowed (on condition that single-pole tripping is possible). If NO, the protection trips three-pole for all fault types. If YES the possible tripping situations of the starting protective functions are decisive. Under address 3436 ADT 52? CLOSE it can be determined whether circuit-breaker ready is interrogated before reclosure after an adaptive dead time. With the setting YES, the dead time may be extended if the circuit-breaker is not ready for a CLOSE OPENcycle when the dead time expires. The maximum extension that is possible is the circuit-breaker monitoring time; this was set for all reclosure cycles together under address 3409 (see above). Details about the circuit-breakermonitoring can be found in the function description, section 2.13, at margin heading Interrogation of the Circuit Breaker Ready State. If there is a danger of stability problems in the network during a three-pole reclosure cycle, set address 3437 ADT SynRequest to YES. In this case the voltage of the line and busbar are checked after a three pole trip and before reclosure to determine if suf-

248

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.13 Automatic Reclosure Function 79 (optional)

ficient synchronism exists. This is applicable on condition that either the internal synchronism and voltage check function is available or that an external device is available for synchronism check. If only single-pole reclose cycles are executed or no stability problems are expected during three-pole dead times (e.g. due to closely meshed networks or in radial networks), set address 3437 to NO. Addresses 3438 and 3440 are only significant if the voltage-controlled adaptive dead time is used. Set under address 3440 Live Volt. Thr. the limit voltage phase ground above which the line is considered to be fault-free. The setting must be smaller than the lowest expected operating voltage. The setting is applied in Volts secondary. This value can be entered as a primary value when parameterizing with a PC and DIGSI. Address 3438 Volt. Superv.-T determines the measuring time used to determine that the line is fault free with this return voltage. It should be longer than any transient oscillations resulting from line energization. 1st Reclosure Cycle If working on a line with adaptive dead time, no further parameters are needed for the individual reclose cycles here. All the following parameters assigned to the individual cycles are then irrelevant and inaccessible. Address 3450 1.AR:START is only available if the automatic reclosure is configured with action time in the operating mode, i. e. if during configuration of the protection functions (see Section 2.1.1.2) address 134 AR control mode = PU w/ActionTime or Trip w/ActionT. was set (the first setting only applies to threepole tripping). It determines whether automatic reclosure should be started at all with the first cycle. This address is included mainly for the sake of uniformity of the parameters for every reclosure attempt and is set to YES for the first cycle. If several cycles are performed, you can (at AR control mode = Pickup ...) set this parameter and different action times to control the effectiveness of the cycles. Notes and examples can be found in section 2.13 at margin heading Action Times. The action time 1.AR:ActionTime (address 3451) is the time after initiation (fault detection) by any protective function which can start the automatic reclosure function within which the trip command must appear. If the command does not appear until after the action time has expired, there is no reclosure. Depending on the configuration of the protective functions the action time may also be omitted; this applies especially when an initiating protective function has no fault detection signal. Depending on the configured operating mode of the automatic reclosure (address 134 AR control mode) only address 3456 and 3457 (if AR control mode = with TRIP...) are available or address 3453 to 3455 (if AR control mode = with PICKUP ...). If AR control mode = with TRIP ..., you can set different dead times for singlepole and three-pole reclose cycles. Whether single-pole or three-pole tripping takes place depends solely on the initiating protection functions. Single-pole tripping is only possible of course if the device and the corresponding protective function are also capable of single-pole tripping.
Table 2-7 AR control mode = with TRIP... is the dead time after 1-pole tripping, is the dead time after 3-pole tripping,

3456 1.AR:Dead 1Trip 3457 1.AR:Dead 3Trip

If only single-pole reclosure cycles are required, set the dead time for three-pole tripping to . If only three-pole reclosure cycles are required, set the dead time for singlepole tripping to ; the protection then trips three-pole for every fault type.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

249

2 Functions

The dead time after single-pole tripping (if set) 1.AR:Dead 1Trip (address 3456) should be long enough for the short-circuit arc to be extinguished and the surrounding air to be de-ionized so that the reclosure promises to be successful. The longer the line, the longer is this time due to the charging of the conductor capacitances. Conventional values are 0.9 s to 1.5 s. For three-pole tripping (address 3457 1.AR:Dead 3Trip) the stability of the network is the main concern. Since the de-energized line cannot develop synchronizing forces, only short dead times are allowed. The usual values are 0.3 s to 0.6 s. If the device is operating with a synchronism check (see Section 2.14), a longer time may be tolerated under certain circumstances. Longer three-pole dead times are also possible in radial networks. For AR control mode = with PICKUP ... it is possible to make the dead times dependent on the type of fault detected by the initiating protection function(s).
Table 2-8 AR control mode = with PICKUP ... is the dead time after 1-phase pickup, is the dead time after 2-phase pickup, is the dead time after 3-phase pickup,

3453 1.AR:DeadT.1Flt 3454 1.AR:DeadT.2Flt 3455 1.AR:DeadT.3Flt

If the dead time is to be the same for all types of faults, set all three parameters the same. Note that these settings only cause different dead times for different pickups. The tripping can only be three-pole. With the setting in address 3407 EV. FLT. MODE starts 3p AR, it is possible to apply a separate dead time 1.AR:DeadT.EV. (address 3458) for the three-pole dead time after clearance of the sequential fault (see above at heading General). Stability aspects are also decisive here. Normally the setting constraints are similar to address 3457 1.AR:Dead 3Trip. Under address 3459 1.AR:52? CLOSE it can be determined whether the readiness of the circuit-breaker (circuit breaker ready) is interrogated before this first reclosure. With the setting YES, the dead time may be extended if the circuit-breaker is not ready for a CLOSETRIPcycle when the dead time expires. The maximum extension that is possible is the circuit-breaker monitoring time; this time was set for all reclosure cycles together under address 3409 CB TIME OUT (see above). Details about the circuit-breaker monitoring can be found in the function description, Section 2.13, at margin heading Interrogation of circuit-breaker ready state. If there is a danger of stability problems in the network during a three-pole reclosure cycle, you should set address 3460 1.AR SynRequest to YES. In this case a check is made before every reclosure following three-pole tripping whether the voltages of the feeder and busbar are sufficiently synchronized. This is applicable on condition that either the internal synchronism and voltage check function is available or that an external device is available for synchronism check. If only single-pole reclose cycles are executed or no stability problems are expected during three-pole dead times (e.g. due to closely meshed networks or in radial networks), set address 3460 to NO. 2nd to 4th Reclosure Cycle If several cycles have been set in the configuration of the function scope, you can set individual reclosure parameters for the 2nd to 4th cycles. The same options are available as for the first cycle. Again only some of the parameters shown below will be available depending on the selections made during configuration of the scope of protection function. For the 2nd cycle:

250

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.13 Automatic Reclosure Function 79 (optional)

3461 2.AR:START 3462 2.AR:ActionTime 3464 2.AR:DeadT.1Flt 3465 2.AR:DeadT.2Flt 3466 2.AR:DeadT.3Flt 3467 2.AR:Dead 1Trip 3468 2.AR:Dead 3Trip 3469 2.AR:DeadT.EV. 3470 2.AR:52? CLOSE 3471 2.AR SynRequest

Start in 2nd cycle generally allowed Action time for the 2nd cycle Dead time after 1-phase pickup Dead time after 2-phase pickup Dead time after 3-phase pickup Dead time after 1-pole tripping Dead time after 3-pole tripping Dead time after evolving fault CB ready interrogation before reclosing Sync. check after 3-pole tripping

For the 3rd cycle:

3472 3.AR:START 3473 3.AR:ActionTime 3475 3.AR:DeadT.1Flt 3476 3.AR:DeadT.2Flt 3477 3.AR:DeadT.3Flt 3478 3.AR:Dead 1Trip 3479 3.AR:Dead 3Trip 3480 3.AR:DeadT.EV. 3481 3.AR:52? CLOSE 3482 3.AR SynRequest Start in 3rd cycle generally allowed Action time for the 3rd cycle Dead time after 1-phase pickup Dead time after 2-phase pickup Dead time after 3-phase pickup Dead time after 1-pole tripping Dead time after 3-pole tripping Dead time after evolving fault CB ready interrogation before reclosing Sync. check after 3-pole tripping

For the 4th cycle:

3483 4.AR:START 3484 4.AR:ActionTime 3486 4.AR:DeadT.1Flt 3487 4.AR:DeadT.2Flt 3488 4.AR:DeadT.3Flt 3489 4.AR:Dead 1Trip 3490 4.AR:Dead 3Trip 3491 4.AR:DeadT.EV. 3492 4.AR:52? CLOSE 3493 4.AR SynRequest Start in 4th cycle generally allowed Action time for the 4th cycle Dead time after 1-phase pickup Dead time after 2-phase pickup Dead time after 3-phase pickup Dead time after 1-pole tripping Dead time after 3-pole tripping Dead time after evolving fault CB ready interrogation before reclosing Sync. check after 3-pole tripping

5th To 8th Reclosure Cycle

If more than four cycles were set during configuration of the functional scope, the dead times preceding the fifth (5th) through the ninth (9th) reclosing attempts are equal to the open breaker time which precedes the fourth (4th) reclosing attempt. The most important information about automatic reclosure is briefly explained insofar as it was not mentioned in the following lists or described in detail in the preceding text. >BLK 1.AR-cycle (No. 2742) to >BLK 4.-n. AR (No. 2745) The respective auto-reclose cycle is blocked. If the blocking state already exists when the automatic reclosure function is initiated, the blocked cycle is not executed and may be skipped (if other cycles are permitted). The same applies if the automatic reclosure function is started (running) but not internally blocked. If the block signal of a cycle

Notes on the Information Overview

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

251

2 Functions

appears while this cycle is being executed (in progress) the automatic reclosure function is blocked dynamically; no further automatic reclosures cycles are then executed. 79 1.CycZoneRel (No. 2889) to 79 4.CycZoneRel (No. 2892) The automatic reclosure is ready for the respective reclosure cycle. This information indicates which cycle will be run next. For example, external protection functions can use this information to release accelerated or overreaching trip elements prior to the corresponding reclose cycle. 79 is blocked (No. 2783) The automatic reclosure is blocked (e.g. circuit breaker not ready). This information indicates to the operational information system that in the event of an upcoming system fault there will be a final trip, i.e. without reclosure. If the automatic reclosure has been started, this information does not appear. 79 not ready (No. 2784) The automatic reclosure is not ready for reclosure at the moment. In addition to the 79 is blocked (No. 2783) mentioned above there are also obstructions during the course of the auto-reclosure cycles such as action time run out or last reclaim time running. This information is particularly helpful during testing because no protection test cycle with reclosure may be initiated during this state. 79 in progress (No. 2801) This information appears following starting of the automatic reclosure function, i.e. with the first trip command that can start the automatic reclosure function. If this reclosure was successful (or any in the case of more than one), this information resets with the expiry of the last reclaim time. If no reclosure was successful or if reclosure was blocked, it ends with the last - the final - trip command. 79 Sync.Request (No. 2865) Measuring request to an external synchronism check device. The information appears at the end of a dead time subsequent to three-pole tripping if a synchronism request was parameterized for the corresponding cycle. Reclosure only takes place when the synchronism check device has provided release signal >Sync.release (No 2731). >Sync.release (No. 2731) Release of reclosure by an external synchronism check device if this was requested by the output information 79 Sync.Request (No. 2865).

252

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.13 Automatic Reclosure Function 79 (optional)

2.13.3 Settings
Addresses which have an appended "A" can only be changed with DIGSI, under "Display Additional Settings".
Addr. 3401 3402 3403 3404 3406 3407 3408 3409 3410 3411A 3420 3421 3422 3423 3424 3425 3430 3431 Parameter FCT 79 52? 1.TRIP T-RECLAIM BLOCK MC Dur. EV. FLT. RECOG. EV. FLT. MODE T-Start MONITOR CB TIME OUT RemoteCl. Delay Max. DEAD EXT. AR w/ 21 AR w/ 50HS-SOTF AR w/ Weak Inf. AR w/ 50N/51N AR w/ DTT AR w/ 50(N)-B AR TRIP 3pole DLC or RDT OFF ON YES NO 0.50 .. 300.00 sec 0.50 .. 300.00 sec; 0 with PICKUP with TRIP Stops 79 starts 3p AR 0.01 .. 300.00 sec 0.01 .. 300.00 sec 0.00 .. 300.00 sec; 0.50 .. 300.00 sec; YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO WITHOUT RDT DLC 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.50 .. 3000.00 sec YES NO YES NO Setting Options Default Setting ON NO 3.00 sec 1.00 sec with TRIP starts 3p AR 0.20 sec 3.00 sec sec sec YES YES YES YES YES YES YES WITHOUT Comments 79 Auto-Reclose Function 52-ready interrogation at 1st trip Reclaim time after successful AR cycle AR blocking duration after manual close Evolving fault recognition Evolving fault (during the dead time) AR start-signal monitoring time Circuit Breaker (CB) Supervision Time Send delay for remote close command Maximum dead time extension AR with 21 (distance protection) AR with 50HS-SOTF (switchonto-flt.o/c ) AR with weak infeed tripping AR with 50N/51N (ground fault o/c) AR with DTT (direct transfer trip) AR with 50(N)-B (back-up overcurrent) 3pole TRIP by AR Dead Line Check or Reduced Dead Time Action time Maximum dead time 1pole TRIP allowed 52-ready interrogation before reclosing

3433 3434 3435 3436

ADT ACTION Time ADT maxDEADTIME ADT 1p allowed ADT 52? CLOSE

0.20 sec 5.00 sec NO NO

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

253

2 Functions

Addr. 3437 3438 3440 3441 3450 3451 3453 3454 3455 3456 3457 3458 3459 3460 3461 3462 3464 3465 3466 3467 3468 3469 3470 3471 3472 3473 3475 3476 3477 3478 3479

Parameter ADT SynRequest Volt. Superv.-T Live Volt. Thr. Dead Volt. Thr. 1.AR:START 1.AR:ActionTime 1.AR:DeadT.1Flt 1.AR:DeadT.2Flt 1.AR:DeadT.3Flt 1.AR:Dead 1Trip 1.AR:Dead 3Trip 1.AR:DeadT.EV. 1.AR:52? CLOSE 1.AR SynRequest 2.AR:START 2.AR:ActionTime 2.AR:DeadT.1Flt 2.AR:DeadT.2Flt 2.AR:DeadT.3Flt 2.AR:Dead 1Trip 2.AR:Dead 3Trip 2.AR:DeadT.EV. 2.AR:52? CLOSE 2.AR SynRequest 3.AR:START 3.AR:ActionTime 3.AR:DeadT.1Flt 3.AR:DeadT.2Flt 3.AR:DeadT.3Flt 3.AR:Dead 1Trip 3.AR:Dead 3Trip YES NO

Setting Options

Default Setting NO 0.10 sec 48 V 30 V YES 0.20 sec 1.20 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec 1.20 sec NO NO NO 0.20 sec 1.20 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec sec 0.50 sec 1.20 sec NO NO NO 0.20 sec 1.20 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec sec 0.50 sec

Comments Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR Supervision time for dead/ live voltage Voltage threshold for live line or bus Voltage threshold for dead line or bus Start of AR allowed in this cycle Action time Dead time after 1phase faults Dead time after 2phase faults Dead time after 3phase faults Dead time after 1pole trip Dead time after 3pole trip Dead time after evolving fault 52-ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR AR start allowed in this cycle Action time Dead time after 1phase faults Dead time after 2phase faults Dead time after 3phase faults Dead time after 1pole trip Dead time after 3pole trip Dead time after evolving fault 52-ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR AR start allowed in this cycle Action time Dead time after 1phase faults Dead time after 2phase faults Dead time after 3phase faults Dead time after 1pole trip Dead time after 3pole trip

0.10 .. 30.00 sec 30 .. 90 V 2 .. 70 V YES NO 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec YES NO YES NO YES NO 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec YES NO YES NO YES NO 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec;

254

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.13 Automatic Reclosure Function 79 (optional)

Addr. 3480 3481 3482 3483 3484 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 3491 3492 3493

Parameter 3.AR:DeadT.EV. 3.AR:52? CLOSE 3.AR SynRequest 4.AR:START 4.AR:ActionTime 4.AR:DeadT.1Flt 4.AR:DeadT.2Flt 4.AR:DeadT.3Flt 4.AR:Dead 1Trip 4.AR:Dead 3Trip 4.AR:DeadT.EV. 4.AR:52? CLOSE 4.AR SynRequest

Setting Options 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec YES NO YES NO YES NO 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec YES NO YES NO

Default Setting 1.20 sec NO NO NO 0.20 sec 1.20 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec sec 0.50 sec 1.20 sec NO NO

Comments Dead time after evolving fault 52-ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR AR start allowed in this cycle Action time Dead time after 1phase faults Dead time after 2phase faults Dead time after 3phase faults Dead time after 1pole trip Dead time after 3pole trip Dead time after evolving fault 52-ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR

2.13.4 Information List

No. 2701 2702 2703 2711 2712 2713 2714 2715 2716 2727 2731 2737 2738 2739 2740 2741 2742 2743 2744 2745 2746 >79 ON >79 OFF >BLOCK 79 >79 Start >79 Trip Ph. A >79 Trip Ph. B >79 Trip Ph. C >79 TRIP 1p >79 TRIP 3p >79 RemoteClose >Sync.release >BLOCK 1pole AR >BLOCK 3pole AR >BLK 1phase AR >BLK 2phase AR >BLK 3phase AR >BLK 1.AR-cycle >BLK 2.AR-cycle >BLK 3.AR-cycle >BLK 4.-n. AR >Trip for AR Information Type of Information SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP >79 ON >79 OFF >BLOCK 79 >79 External start of internal A/R >79: External trip Ph. A for AR start >79: External trip Ph. B for AR start >79: External trip Ph. C for AR start >79: External 1pole trip for AR start >79: External 3pole trip for AR start >79: Remote Close signal >AR: Sync. release from ext. sync.-check >79: Block 1pole AR-cycle >79: Block 3pole AR-cycle >79: Block 1phase-fault AR-cycle >79: Block 2phase-fault AR-cycle >79: Block 3phase-fault AR-cycle >79: Block 1st AR-cycle >79: Block 2nd AR-cycle >79: Block 3rd AR-cycle >79: Block 4th and higher AR-cycles >79: External Trip for AR start Comments

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

255

2 Functions

No. 2747 2748 2749 2750 2751 2752 2781 2782 2783 2784 2787 2788 2796 2801 2809 2810 2818 2820 2821 2839 2840 2841 2842 2843 2844 2845 2846 2847 2848 2851 2852 2853 2854 2861 2862 2864 2865 2871 2889 2890 2891 2892 2893 2894

Information >A PickupStrtAR >B PickupStrtAR >C PickupStrtAR >Pickup 1ph AR >Pickup 2ph AR >Pickup 3ph AR 79 OFF 79 ON 79 is blocked 79 not ready CB not ready 79 T-CBreadyExp 79 on/off BI 79 in progress 79 T-Start Exp 79 TdeadMax Exp 79 Evolving Flt 79 Program1pole 79 Td. evol.Flt 79 Tdead 1pTrip 79 Tdead 3pTrip 79 Tdead 1pFlt 79 Tdead 2pFlt 79 Tdead 3pFlt 79 1stCyc. run. 79 2ndCyc. run. 79 3rdCyc. run. 79 4thCyc. run. 79 ADT run. 79 Close 79 Close1.Cyc1p 79 Close1.Cyc3p 79 Close 2.Cyc 79 T-Recl. run. 79 Successful 79 1p Trip Perm 79 Sync.Request 79 TRIP 3pole 79 1.CycZoneRel 79 2.CycZoneRel 79 3.CycZoneRel 79 4.CycZoneRel 79 Zone Release 79 Remote Close

Type of Information SP SP SP SP SP SP OUT IntSP OUT OUT OUT OUT IntSP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

Comments >79: External pickup Ph. A for AR start >79: External pickup Ph. B for AR start >79: External pickup Ph. C for AR start >79: External pickup 1phase for AR start >79: External pickup 2phase for AR start >79: External pickup 3phase for AR start 79 Auto recloser is switched OFF 79 Auto recloser is switched ON 79: Auto recloser is blocked 79: Auto recloser is not ready 79: Circuit breaker 1 not ready 79: CB ready monitoring window expired 79: Auto recloser ON/OFF via BI 79 - in progress 79: Start-signal monitoring time expired 79: Maximum dead time expired 79: Evolving fault recognition 79 is set to operate after 1p trip only 79 dead time after evolving fault 79 dead time after 1pole trip running 79 dead time after 3pole trip running 79 dead time after 1phase fault running 79 dead time after 2phase fault running 79 dead time after 3phase fault running 79 1st cycle running 79 2nd cycle running 79 3rd cycle running 79 4th or higher cycle running 79 cycle is running in ADT mode 79 - Close command 79: Close command after 1pole, 1st cycle 79: Close command after 3pole, 1st cycle 79: Close command 2nd cycle (and higher) 79: Reclaim time is running 79 - cycle successful 79: 1pole trip permitted by internal AR 79: Synchro-check request 79: TRIP command 3pole 79 1st cycle zone extension release 79 2nd cycle zone extension release 79 3rd cycle zone extension release 79 4th cycle zone extension release 79 zone extension (general) 79 Remote close signal send

256

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.14 Synchronism and Voltage Check 25 (optional)

2.14

Synchronism and Voltage Check 25 (optional)

The synchronism and voltage check function ensures, when switching a line onto a busbar, that the stability of the network is not endangered. The voltage of the feeder to be switched on is compared to that of the busbar to check conformances in terms of magnitude, phase angle and frequency within certain tolerances. Optionally, deenergization of the feeder can be checked before it is connected to an energized busbar (or vice versa). The synchronism check can either be conducted only for automatic reclosure, only for manual closure (this includes also closing via control command) or in both cases. Different close permission (release) criteria can also be programmed for automatic and manual closure. Synchronism check is also possible without external matching transformers if a power transformer is located between the measuring points. Closing is released for synchronous or asynchronous system conditions. In the latter case the device determines the time for issuing the close command such that the voltages are identical the instant the breaker poles make contact.

2.14.1 Method of Operation

General The synchronism and voltage check function uses the feeder voltage - designated with VLine - and the bus-bar voltage - designated with VBus - for comparison purposes. The latter may be any phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltage.

Figure 2-109

Synchronism check on closing

If a power transformer is located between the feeder voltage transformers and the bus-bar voltage transformers (Figure 2-110), its vector group can be compensated for by the 7SA522 relay, so that no external matching transformers are necessary.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

257

2 Functions

Figure 2-110

Synchronism check across a transformer

The synchronism check function in the 7SA522 usually operates together with the integrated automatic reclose, manual close, and the control functions of the relay. It is also possible to use an external automatic reclosing system. In such a case signal exchange between the devices is accomplished via binary inputs and outputs. When closing via the integrated control function, the configured interlocking conditions may have to be verified before checking the conditions for synchronism. After the synchronism check grants the release, the interlocking conditions are not checked a second time. Furthermore, closing is possible with synchronous or asynchronous system conditions or both. Synchronous closing means that the closing command is issued as soon as the critical values (voltage magnitude difference Max. Volt. Diff, angle difference Max. Angle Diff, and frequency difference Max. Freq. Diff) lie within the set tolerances. For closing with asynchronous system conditions, the device calculates the correct timing of the closing command from the angle difference Max. Angle Diff and the frequency difference Max. Freq. Diff such that the voltages on the busbar and the feeder circuit have exactly the same phase relationship at the instant that the circuit breaker primary contacts close. For this purpose the device must be informed on the operating time of the circuit breaker for closing. Different frequency limit thresholds apply to closing at synchronism and asynchronous conditions: If closing shall be permitted exclusively under synchronous system conditions, the frequency difference limit for this condition can be set. If closing is permitted under synchronous as well as under asynchronous system conditions, a frequency difference below 0.01 Hz is treated as a synchronous condition, a higher frequency difference value can then be set for closing under asynchronous system conditions. The synchronism check function only operates when it is requested to do so. Various possibilities exist to this end: Measuring request from the internal automatic reclosure device. If the internal automatic reclosing function is set accordingly (one or more reclosing attempts set to synchronism check, see also Subsection 2.13.2), the measuring request is accomplished internally. The release conditions for automatic reclosing apply. Request to execute a check synchronism measurement from an external automatic reclosure device. The measuring request must be activated via the binary input >25 SynStart AR (No. 2906). The release conditions for automatic reclosing apply.

258

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.14 Synchronism and Voltage Check 25 (optional)

Measuring request from the manual CLOSE detection. The manual CLOSE detection of the central function control (Section 2.20.1) issues a measuring request provided this was configured in the power system data 2 (Section 2.1.5.1, address 1151). This requires the device to be informed of the manual closing via binary input >Manual Close (No 356). The release conditions for manual reclosing apply. Request to execute a check synchronism measurement from an external closing command. Binary input >25 SynStart MC (No. 2905) fulfills this purpose. Unlike the >Manual Close (see previous paragraph), this merely affects the measuring request to the synchronism check function, but not other integrated manual CLOSE function such as instantaneous tripping when switching onto a fault (e.g. overreaching zone for distance protection or accelerated tripping of a time overcurrent element). The release conditions for manual reclosing apply. Measuring request from the integrated control function via control keys or via the serial interface using DIGSI on a PC or from a control center. The release conditions for manual reclosing apply. The synchronism check function gives permission for passage 25 Sync.Release (No. 2951) of the closing command to the required function. Furthermore, a separate closing command is available as output indication 25 Sy. CloseCmd (No. 2961). The check of the release conditions is limited by an adjustable synchronous monitoring time SYN. DURATION. The configured conditions must be fulfilled within this time. Otherwise synchronism will not be checked. A new synchronism check sequence requires a new request. The device outputs messages if, after a request to check synchronism, the conditions for release are not fulfilled, i.e. if the absolute voltage difference Max. Volt. Diff, the absolute frequency difference Max. Freq. Diff, or the absolute phase angle difference Max. Angle Diff lie outside the permissible limit values. A precondition for these messages is that voltages within the operating range of the relay are available. When a closing command is handled by the integrated control function and the conditions for synchronism are not fulfilled, the command is cancelled i.e., the control function outputs CO (refer also to Section 2.22.1). Operating Modes The closing check procedure can be selected from the following operating modes: SYNC-CHECK = Release at synchronism, that is, when the critical values Max. Volt. Diff, Max. Freq. Diff and Max. Angle Diff lie within the set limits. Release for energized busbar (VBus>) and de-energized line (VLine<). Release for de-energized busbar (UBus<) and energized line (VLine>). Release for de-energized bus-bar (VBus<) and de-energized line ((VLine). Release without any check.

Vsync> V-line< = Vsync< V-line> = Vsync< V-line< = OVERRIDE =

Each of these conditions can be enabled or disabled individually; combinations are also possible (e.g., release if Vsync> V-line< or Vsync< V-line> are fulfilled). Combination of OVERRIDE with other parameters is, of course, not reasonable. The release conditions can be configured individually either for automatic reclosing or for manual closing or for closing via control commands. For example, manual closing and control closing can be allowed in cases of synchronism or dead line, while, before

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

259

2 Functions

an automatic reclose attempt dead line conditions are only checked at one line end and after the automatic reclose attempt only synchronism at the other end. De-energized Switching For release of the closing command to energize a voltage overhead line from a live busbar, the following conditions are checked: Does the feeder voltage VLine lie below the set value Dead Volt. Thr.? Does the busbar voltage VBus lie above the set value Live Volt. Thr., but below the maximum operating voltage Vmax? Is the frequency fbus within the permitted operating range fN 3 Hz? After successful check the closing command is released. Corresponding conditions apply when switching a live line onto a dead busbar or a dead line onto a dead busbar. Closing at Synchronous System Conditions Before releasing a closing command at synchronous conditions, the following conditions are checked: Does the busbar voltage VBus lie above the set value Live Volt. Thr., but below the maximum operating voltage Vmax? Does the feeder voltage VLine lie above the set value Live Volt. Thr., but below the maximum operating voltage Vmax? Is the angle difference |VLine VBus| within the permissible tolerance Max. Volt. Diff? Are the two frequencies f1bus and fline within the permitted operating range fN 3 Hz? Does the frequency difference |fline fbus| lie within the permissible tolerance Max. Freq. Diff? Is the angle difference |line bus| within the permissible tolerance Max. Angle Diff? To check whether these conditions are observed for a certain minimum time, you can set this minimum time as SYNC-STAB. Checking the synchronism conditions can also be confined to a maximum monitoring time SYN. DURATION. This implies that the conditions must be fulfilled within the time SYN. DURATION for the duration of SYNCSTAB. If this is the case, the closing command is released. Closing at Asynchronous System Conditions Before releasing a closing command at asynchronous conditions, the following conditions are checked: Does the busbar voltage VBus lie above the set value Live Volt. Thr., but below the maximum operating voltage Vmax? Does the feeder voltage VLine lie above the set value Live Volt. Thr., but below the maximum operating voltage Vmax? Is the voltage difference |VLine VBus| within the permissible tolerance Max. Volt. Diff? Are the two frequencies fbus and fline within the permitted operating range fN 3 Hz? Does the frequency difference |fline fbus| lie within the permissible tolerance Max. Freq. Diff? When the check has been terminated successfully, the device determines the next synchronizing time from the angle difference and the frequency difference. The close command is issued at synchronization time minus the operating time of the circuit breaker.

260

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.14 Synchronism and Voltage Check 25 (optional)

2.14.2 Setting Notes

Preconditions When setting the general power system data (Power system data 1, refer to Section 2.1.3.1) a number of parameters regarding the measured quantities and the operating mode of the synchronism check function must be applied. This concerns the following parameters: 203 Vnom PRIMARY 204 Vnom SECONDARY 210 V4 transformer rated primary voltage of the feeder voltage transformers (phase-to-phase) in kV; rated secondary voltage of the feeder voltage transformers (phase-to-phase) in V; connection of the additional voltage transformer input V4; must be Vsync transf. and connected to a busbar voltage; type of voltage which is connected to the device from the busbar voltage transformer, phase angle displacement between the voltage of the busbar and that of the feeder in case a power transformer is installed inbetween; the ratio of the secondary feeder voltage to the secondary bus-bar voltage under nominal voltage conditions; the operating range of the synchronism check refers to the nominal frequency of the power system (fN 3 Hz); operational rated voltage of the primary power system (phase-phase) in kV; the closing time of the circuit breaker.

212 Vsync connect. 214 Angle VsynVline

215 V-line / Vsync

230 Rated Frequency 1103 FullScaleVolt.

and, if closing at asynchronous system conditions is allowed, 239 52 closing time

WARNING!
Closing at Asynchronous System Conditions! Closing at asynchronous system conditions requires the closing time of the circuit breaker to be set correctly in the Power system data 1 (address 239). Otherwise, faulty synchronization may occur.

General

The synchronism check function can only operate if it was configured as Enabled (address 135) and V4 transformer as Vsync transf. (address 210) during configuration of the functional scope. The measured values of the synchronism check (636 Vdiff =, 637 Vline = ,638 Vbus =, 647 F-diff=, 649 F-line=, 646 F-bus =, and 648 dif=)are only available or will be only calculated, if the synchronism check was set to Enabled and the parameter V4 transformer(address 210) has been set to Vsync transf..

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

261

2 Functions

Different interrogation conditions can be parameterized for automatic reclosure on the one hand and for manual closure on the other hand. Each closing command is considered a manual reclosure if it was initiated via the integrated control function or via a serial interface. The general limit values for synchronism check are set at address 3501 to 3508. Additionally, addresses 3510 to 3519 are relevant for automatic reclosure, addresses 3530 to 3539 are relevant for manual closure. Moreover, address 3509 is relevant for closure via the integrated control function. The complete synchronism check function is switched ON or OFF in address 3501 FCT 25 Sync.. If switched off, the synchronous check does not verify the synchronization conditions and no enabling occurs. You can also set ON:w/o CloseCmd: the CLOSE command is in this case not included in the common device alarm Relay CLOSE (No. 510), but the alarm 25 Sy. CloseCmd (No. 2961) is issued. Address 3502 Dead Volt. Thr. indicates the voltage threshold below which the feeder or the busbar can safely be considered dead (for checking a de-energized feeder or busbar). The setting is applied in Volts secondary. This value can be entered as a primary value when parameterizing with a PC and DIGSI. Depending on the connection of the voltages these are phase-to-ground voltages or phase-to-phase voltages. The voltage above which the feeder or busbar is considered definitely live, is set under address 3503 Live Volt. Thr. (for energized line or busbar check and for the lower limit of synchronism check). It must be set below the anticipated operational undervoltage. The setting is applied in Volts secondary. This value can be entered as a primary value when parameterizing with a PC and DIGSI. Depending on the connection of the voltages these are phase-to-ground voltages or phase-to-phase voltages. The maximum permissible voltage for the operating range of the synchronism check function is set under address 3504 Vmax. The setting is applied in Volts secondary. This value can be entered as a primary value when parameterizing with a PC and DIGSI. Depending on the connection of the voltages these are phase-to-ground voltages or phase-to-phase voltages. Verification of the release conditions via synchronism check can be limited to a configurable synchronous monitoring time SYN. DURATION (address 3507). The configured conditions must be fulfilled within this time. If not, closure will not be released. If this time is set to , the conditions will be checked until they are fulfilled or the measurement request is cancelled. If the conditions for synchronous operation must be checked to be maintained for a certain duration, this minimum duration SYNC-STAB can be set under address 3508 before closing is released. Synchronism Check Conditions before Automatic Reclosure Addresses 3510 to 3519 are relevant to the check conditions before automatic reclosure of the circuit breaker. When setting the parameters for the internal automatic reclosing function (Subsection 2.13.2) it is decided with which automatic reclosing cycle synchronism and voltage check should be carried out. Address 3510 Op.mode with AR determines whether closing under asynchronous system conditions is allowed for automatic reclosure. Set this parameter to with52closeTime to allow asynchronous closing; the relay will then consider the circuit breaker operating time before determining the correct instant for the close command. Remember that closing under asynchronous system conditions is allowed only if the circuit breaker closing time is set correctly (see above under Preconditions)! If you wish to permit automatic reclosure only under synchronous system conditions, set this address to w/o 52closeTime.

262

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.14 Synchronism and Voltage Check 25 (optional)

The permissible magnitude difference of the voltages is set at address 3511 Max. Volt. Diff. The setting is applied in Volts secondary. This value can be entered as a primary value when parameterizing with a PC and DIGSI. Depending on the connection of the voltages these are phase-to-ground voltages or phase-to-phase voltages. The permissible frequency difference between the voltages is set at address 3512 Max. Freq. Diff, the permissible phase angle difference at address 3513 Max. Angle Diff. The further release conditions for automatic reclosing are set at addresses 3515 to 3519. The following addresses mean: 3515 SYNC-CHECK The busbar (Vbus) and the feeder (Vline) must both be live (Live Volt. Thr., address 3503); the conditions for synchronism are checked, i.e. Max. Volt. Diff (address 3511), Max. Freq. Diff (address 3512) and Max. Angle Diff (address 3513). This parameter can only be altered with DIGSI under Additional Settings; The busbar (Vbus) must be live (Live Volt. Thr., address 3503), the feeder (Vline) must be dead (Dead Volt. Thr., address 3502); The busbar (Vbus) must be dead (Dead Volt. Thr., address 3502), the feeder (Vline) must be live (Live Volt. Thr., address 3503); The busbar (VBus) and the feeder (VLine) must both be dead (Dead Volt. Thr., address 3502); automatic reclosure is released without any check.

3516 Vsync> V-line<

3517 Vsync< V-line>

3518 Vsync< V-line< 3519 OVERRIDE

The five possible release conditions are independent of each other and can be combined. Synchronism Check Conditions before Manual Closing Addresses 3530 to 3539 are relevant to the check conditions before manual closure and closing via control command of the circuit breaker. When setting the general protection data (Power System Data 2, Subsection 2.1.5.1) it was already decided at address 1151 whether synchronism and voltage check should be carried out before manual closing. With the following setting in address Man. Close = w/o Synccheck, no checks are performed before manual closing. Address 3509 SyncCB determines for commands via the integrated control function (local, DIGSI, serial interface) whether synchronism check is carried out or not. This address also tells the device for which switching device of the control the synchronism check applies. You can select from the switching devices which are available for the integrated control. Choose the circuit breaker to be operated via the synchronism check. This is usually the circuit breaker which is operated in case of manual closing or automatic reclosure. If you set SyncCB = none here, a CLOSE command via the integrated control will be carried out without synchronism check. Address 3530 Op.mode with MC determines whether closing under asynchronous system conditions is allowed for manual closing or reclosure via control command. Set this parameter to with52closeTime to allow asynchronous closing; the relay will then consider the circuit breaker closing time before determining the correct instant for the close command. Remember that closing under asynchronous system conditions is allowed only if the circuit breaker closing time is set correctly (see above under Pre-

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

263

2 Functions

conditions)! If you wish to permit manual closure or closing via control command only under synchronous system conditions, set this address to w/o 52closeTime. The permissible magnitude difference of the voltages is set at address 3531 MC maxVolt.Diff. The setting is applied in Volts secondary. This value can be entered as a primary value when parameterizing with a PC and DIGSI. Depending on the connection of the voltages these are phase-to-ground voltages or phase-to-phase voltages. The permissible frequency difference between the voltages is set at address 3532 MC maxFreq.Diff, the permissible phase angle difference at address 3533 MC maxAngleDiff. The further release conditions for manual reclosing or reclosure via control command are set under addresses 3535 to 3539. The following addresses mean: 3535 MC SYNCHR the busbar (Vbus) and the feeder (Vline) must both be live (Live Volt. Thr., address 3503); the conditions for synchronism are checked i.e., MC maxVolt.Diff (address 3531), MC maxFreq.Diff (address 3532) and MC maxAngleDiff (address 3533). This parameter can only be altered with DIGSI under Additional Settings. the busbar (Vbus) must be live (Live Volt. Thr., address 3503), the feeder (Vline) must be dead (Dead Volt. Thr., address 3502); the busbar (Vbus) must be dead (Dead Volt. Thr., address 3502), the feeder (Vline) must be live (Live Volt. Thr., address 3503); the busbar (VBus) and the feeder (VLine) must both be dead (Dead Volt. Thr., address 3502); manual closing or closing via control command is released without any check.

3536 MC Vsyn> Vline<

3537 MC Vsyn< Vline>

3538 MC Vsyn< Vline< 3539 MC O/RIDE

The five possible release conditions are independent of each other and can be combined.

Note The closing functions of the device issue individual output indications for the corresponding close command. Be sure that the output indications are assigned to the correct output relays. No. 2851 79 Close for CLOSE via command of the automatic reclosure, No. 562 Man.Close Cmd for manual CLOSE via binary input, No. 2961 25 Sy. CloseCmd for CLOSE via synchronism check (not required if synchronism check releases the other CLOSE commands), No. 7329 CB1-TEST close for CLOSE via circuit breaker test, additionally CLOSE command via control e.g. 52 Close, No. 510 Relay CLOSE general CLOSE command for all CLOSE commands described above.

264

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.14 Synchronism and Voltage Check 25 (optional)

Notes on the Information List

The most important information of the device is briefly explained in so far as it cannot be interpreted in the following information lists or described in detail in the foregoing text. >25 SynStart MC (No. 2905) Binary input which enables direct tripping of the synchronism check with setting parameters for manual close. This tripping with setting parameter for manual close has always precedence if binary inputs >25 SynStart MC (No. 2905) and >25 SynStart AR (No. 2906, see below) are activated at the same time. >25 SynStart AR (No. 2906) Measuring request from an external automatic reclosure device. The parameters of synchronism check set for automatic reclosure are valid here. 25 Sy. req.CNTR (No. 2936) Measurement request of the control function; this request is evaluated on event-triggered basis and only generated if the control issues a measurement request. 25 Sync.Release (No. 2951) Release signal to an external automatic reclosure device.

2.14.3 Settings
Addresses which have an appended "A" can only be changed with DIGSI, under "Display Additional Settings".
Addr. 3501 Parameter FCT 25 Sync. Setting Options ON OFF ON:w/o CloseCmd 1 .. 60 V 20 .. 125 V 20 .. 140 V 0.01 .. 600.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec (Setting options depend on configuration) with52closeTime w/o 52closeTime 1.0 .. 40.0 V 0.03 .. 2.00 Hz 2 .. 80 Default Setting ON Comments 25 Synchronism and Voltage Check Voltage threshold dead line / bus Voltage threshold live line / bus Maximum permissible voltage Maximum duration of synchronism-check Synchronous condition stability timer Synchronizable circuit breaker Operating mode with AR Maximum voltage difference Maximum frequency difference Maximum angle difference

3502 3503 3504 3507 3508 3509 3510 3511 3512 3513

Dead Volt. Thr. Live Volt. Thr. Vmax SYN. DURATION SYNC-STAB SyncCB Op.mode with AR Max. Volt. Diff Max. Freq. Diff Max. Angle Diff

5V 90 V 110 V 1.00 sec 0.00 sec None w/o 52closeTime 2.0 V 0.10 Hz 10

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

265

2 Functions

Addr. 3515A 3516 3517 3518 3519 3530 3531 3532 3533 3535A 3536 3537 3538 3539

Parameter SYNC-CHECK Vsync> V-line< Vsync< V-line> Vsync< V-line< OVERRIDE Op.mode with MC MC maxVolt.Diff MC maxFreq.Diff MC maxAngleDiff MC SYNCHR MC Vsyn> Vline< MC Vsyn< Vline> MC Vsyn< Vline< MC O/RIDE YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO

Setting Options

Default Setting YES NO NO NO NO w/o 52closeTime 2.0 V 0.10 Hz 10 YES NO NO NO NO

Comments Live bus / live line and Sync before 79 Live bus / dead line check before 79 Dead bus / live line check before 79 Dead bus / dead line check before 79 Override of any check before 79 Operating mode with Man.Cl Maximum voltage difference Maximum frequency difference Maximum angle difference Live bus / live line and Sync before MC Live bus / dead line check before Man.Cl Dead bus / live line check before Man.Cl Dead bus / dead line check before Man.Cl Override of any check before Man.Cl

with52closeTime w/o 52closeTime 1.0 .. 40.0 V 0.03 .. 2.00 Hz 2 .. 80 YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO

2.14.4 Information List

No. 2901 2902 2903 2905 2906 2907 2908 2909 2910 2911 2930 2931 2932 2934 2935 Information >25 Sync. on >25 Sync. off >25 BLOCK Sync. >25 SynStart MC >25 SynStart AR >25 Sync. synch >25 Vsy< Vline> >25 Vsy> Vline< >25 Vsy< Vline< >25 Sync.o/ride 25 SyncOn/OffBI 25 Sync. OFF 25 Sync. BLOCK 25 Sync. faulty 25 Sy.Tsup.Exp Type of Information SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP IntSP OUT OUT OUT OUT Comments >25: Switch on synchro-check function >25: Switch off synchro-check function >25: BLOCK Synchronism check >25: Start synchro-check f. Manual Close >25: Start synchro-check for AR >25: Sync-Prog. Live bus/ live line/Sync >25: Sync-Prog. Dead bus / live line >25: Sync-Prog. Live bus / dead line >25: Sync-Prog. Dead bus / dead line >25: Sync-Prog. Override ( bypass ) 25: Synchro-check ON/OFF via BI 25 Synchronism check is switched OFF 25 Synchronism check is BLOCKED 25: Synchro-check function faulty 25: Synchro-check supervision time exp.

266

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.14 Synchronism and Voltage Check 25 (optional)

No. 2936 2941 2942 2943 2944 2945 2946 2947 2948 2949 2951 2961 2970 2971 2972 2973 2974 2975 2976 2977

Information 25 Sy. req.CNTR 25 Sy. running 25 Sy. Override 25 Synchronism 25 Vsyn< Vline> 25 Vsyn> Vline< 25 Vsyn< Vline< 25 Sync. Vdiff> 25 Sync. fdiff> 25 Sync.-diff> 25 Sync.Release 25 Sy. CloseCmd 25 Sy. f-bus>> 25 Sy. f-bus<< 25 Sy. f-line>> 25 Sy. f-line<< 25 Sy. V-syn>> 25 Sy. V-syn<< 25 Sy. V-line>> 25 Sy. V-line<<

Type of Information OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

Comments 25: Synchro-check request by control 25: Synchronization is running 25: Synchro-check override/bypass 25: Synchronism detected 25: Sync. dead bus / live line detected 25: Sync. live bus / dead line detected 25: Sync. dead bus / dead line detected 25: Sync. Volt. diff. greater than limit 25: Sync. Freq. diff. greater than limit 25: Sync. Angle diff. greater than limit 25: Synchronism release (to ext. AR) 25: Close command from synchro-check 25 Sync. Bus frequency > (fn + 3Hz) 25 Sync. Bus frequency < (fn - 3Hz) 25 Sync. Line frequency > (fn + 3Hz) 25 Sync. Line frequency < (fn - 3Hz) 25: Sync. Bus voltage > Vmax (P.3504) 25: Sync. Bus voltage < LiveV (P.3503) 25: Sync. Line voltage > Vmax (P.3504) 25: Sync. Line voltage < LiveV (P.3503)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

267

2 Functions

2.15

Undervoltage and Overvoltage Protection 27/59 (optional)

Voltage protection has the function to protect electrical equipment against undervoltage and overvoltage. Both operational states are unfavorable as for example undervoltage may cause stability problems or overvoltage may cause insulation problems. The overvoltage protection in the 7SA522 detects the phase voltages VA-G, VB-G and VC-G, the phase-to-phase voltages VA-B, VB-C and VC-A, as well as the displacement voltage 3V0. Instead of the displacement voltage any other voltage that is connected to the fourth voltage input V4 of the device can be detected. Furthermore, the device calculates the positive sequence system voltage and the negative sequence system voltage so that the symmetrical components are also monitored. Here compounding is also possible which calculates the voltage at the remote line end. The undervoltage protection can also use the phase voltages VA-G, VB-G and VC-G, the phase-to-phase voltages VA-B, VB-C and VC-A, as well as the positive sequence system. These voltage protection functions can be combined according to the user's requirements. They can be switched on or off separately, or used for alarm purposes only. In the latter case the respective trip commands do not appear. Each voltage protection function has two elements, i.e. it is provided with two threshold setting elements, each one with its respective time delay. Abnormally high voltages often occur e.g. in low loaded, long-distance transmission lines, in islanded systems when generator voltage regulation fails, or after full load shutdown of a generator from the system. Even if compensation reactors are used to avoid line overvoltages by compensation of the line capacitance and thus reduction of the overvoltage, the overvoltage will endanger the insulation if the reactors fail (e.g. due to fault clearance). The line must be deenergized within very short time. The undervoltage protection can be applied, for example, for disconnection or load shedding tasks in a system. Furthermore, this protection scheme can detect pending stability problems. With induction machines undervoltages have an effect on the stability and permissible torque thresholds.

2.15.1 Overvoltage Protection 59

Overvoltage PhaseGround Figure 2-111 depicts the logic diagram of the phase voltage elements. The fundamental frequency is numerically filtered from each of the three measuring voltages so that harmonics or transient voltage peaks are largely eliminated. Two threshold elements 59-1-Vph PICKUP and 59-2-Vph PICKUP are compared with the voltages. If a phase voltage exceeds these thresholds it is indicated phase-segregated. Furthermore, a general pick-up indication 59-1-Vpg Pickup 59-2-Vpg Pickup is given. The dropout to pickup ratio can be set (59-Vph RESET). Every element starts a time delay which is common to all phases. Expiry of the respective time delay 59-1-Vph DELAY or 59-2-Vph DELAY is signalled and usually results in the trip command 59-Vpg TRIP. The overvoltage protection phaseground can be blocked via a binary input >59Vphg BLOCK.

268

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.15 Undervoltage and Overvoltage Protection 27/59 (optional)

Figure 2-111

Logic diagram of the overvoltage protection for phase voltage

Overvoltage PhasePhase

The phasephase overvoltage protection operates just like the phaseground protection except that it detects phasetophase voltages. Accordingly, phasetophase voltages which have exceeded one of the element thresholds 59-1-Vpp PICKUP or 59-2-Vpp PICKUP are also indicated. Beyond this, Figure 2-111 applies in principle. The phasephase overvoltage protection can also be blocked via a binary input >59-Vphph BLOCK.

Overvoltage Positive Sequence System V1

The device calculates the positive sequence system according to its defining equation V1 = 1/3(VA + aVB + a2VC) where a = ej120. The resulting positive sequence voltage is fed to the two threshold elements 59-1V1 PICKUP and 59-2-V1 PICKUP (see Figure 2-112). Combined with the associated time delays 59-1-V1 DELAY and 59-2-V1 DELAY they form a two-element overvoltage protection for the positive sequence system. Here too, the dropout to pickup ratio can be set. The overvoltage protection for the positive sequence system can also be blocked via a binary input >59-V1 BLOCK.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

269

2 Functions

Figure 2-112

Logic diagram of the overvoltage protection for the positive sequence voltage system

Overvoltage V1 with Configurable Compounding

The overvoltage protection for the positive sequence system may optionally operate with compounding. The compounding calculates the positive sequence system of the voltages at the remote line end. This option is particularly well suited for detecting a steady-state voltage increase caused by long transmission lines operating at weak load or no load due to the capacitance per unit length (Ferranti effect). In this case the overvoltage condition exists at the other line end but it can only be removed by switching off the local line end. For calculating the voltage at the opposite line end the device requires the line data (inductance per unit length, capacitance per unit length, line angle, line length) which were entered in the Power System Data 2 (Subsection 2.1.5.1) during configuration. Compounding is only available if address 137 is set to Enabl. w. comp.. In this case the calculated voltage at the other line end is also indicated in the operational measured values.

Note Compounding is not suited for lines with series capacitors. The voltage at the remote line end is calculated from the voltage measured at the local line end and the flowing current by means of a PI equivalent circuit diagram (refer also to Figure 2-113).

with VEnd VMeasuring the calculated voltage at the remote line end, the measured voltage at the local line end,

270

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.15 Undervoltage and Overvoltage Protection 27/59 (optional)

IMeas CL RL LL

the measured current at the local line end, the line capacitance, the ohmic line resistance, the line inductance.

Figure 2-113

PI equivalent diagram for compounding

Overvoltage Negative Sequence System V2

The device calculates the negative sequence system voltages according to its defining equation: V2 = 1/3(VA + a2VB + aVC) where a = ej120. The resulting positive sequence voltage is fed to the two threshold elements 59-1V2 PICKUP and 59-2-V2 PICKUP. Figure 2-114 shows the logic diagram. By combining the associated time delays 59-1-V2 DELAY and 59-2-V2 DELAY a twoelement overvoltage protection for the negative sequence system is formed. Here too, the dropout to pickup ratio can be set.

Figure 2-114

Logic diagram of the overvoltage protection for the negative sequence voltage system V2

The overvoltage protection for the negative sequence system can also be blocked via a binary input >59-V2 BLOCK. The elements of the negative sequence voltage protection are automatically blocked as soon as an asymmetrical voltage failure was detected (FuseFailureMonitor, also see Section 2.19.1, margin heading Fuse Failure Monitor (Non-symmetrical Voltages)) or when the trip of the mcb for voltage transformers has been signalled via the binary input >FAIL:Feeder VT (internal indication internal blocking).

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

271

2 Functions

Even during single-pole dead time (with internal automatic reclosure function) the elements of the negative sequence overvoltage protection are automatically blocked since negative sequence values are only influenced by the asymmetrical power flow, not by the fault in the system. If the device cooperates with an external automatic reclosure function, or if a single-pole tripping can be triggered by a different protection system (working in parallel), the overvoltage protection for the negative sequence system must be blocked via a binary input during single-pole tripping. Overvoltage Zero Sequence System 3V0 Figure 2-115 depicts the logic diagram of the zero sequence voltage element. The fundamental frequency is numerically filtered from the measuring voltage so that the harmonics or transient voltage peaks remain largely harmless. The triple zero sequence voltage 3V0 is fed to the two threshold elements 59G-13V0PICKUP and 59G-2-3V0PICKUP. Combined with the associated time delays 59G-1-3V0 DELAY and 59G-2-3V0 DELAY these elements form a two-element overvoltage protection for the zero sequence system. Here too, the dropout to pickup ratio can be set (59G RESET). Furthermore, a restraint delay can be configured which is implemented by repeated measuring (approx. 2 periods). The overvoltage protection for the zero sequence system can also be blocked via a binary input >59-3V0 BLOCK. The elements of the zero sequence voltage protection are automatically blocked as soon as an asymmetrical voltage failure was detected (FuseFailureMonitor, also see Section 2.19.1, margin heading Fuse Failure Monitor (Non-symmetrical Voltages) or when the trip of the mcb for voltage transformers has been signalled via the binary input >FAIL:Feeder VT (internal indication internal blocking). The elements of the zero sequence voltage protection are automatically blocked (with the internal automatic reclosure function) during single-pole automatic reclose dead time to avoid pickup with the asymmetrical power flow arising during this state. If the device operates with an external automatic reclosure function or if single-pole tripping can be triggered by a different protection system (operating in parallel), the overvoltage protection for the zero sequence system must be blocked via a binary input during single-pole tripping. According to Figure 2-115 the device calculates the voltage to be monitored: 3V0 = VA + VB + VC. This applies if no suitable voltage is connected to the fourth measuring input V4. However, if the displacement voltage Vdelta of the voltage transformer set is directly connected to the fourth measuring input V4 of the device and this information was entered during configuration, the device will automatically use this voltage and calculate the triple zero sequence voltage. 3V0 = Vph / Vdelta V4 Since the voltage transformation ratio of the voltage transformer set is usually

the factor is set to Vph / Vdelta = 3/3 = 3 = 1.73. For more details, refer to Power System Data 1 in Section 2.1.5.1 at margin heading Voltage Connections via address 211.

272

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.15 Undervoltage and Overvoltage Protection 27/59 (optional)

Figure 2-115

Logic diagram of the overvoltage protection for zero sequence voltage

Freely Selectable Singlephase Voltage

As the zero sequence voltage elements operate separately and independent from the other protective overvoltage functions they can be used for any other singlephase voltage. Therefore the fourth voltage input V4 of the device must be assigned accordingly (also see Section 2.1.3, Voltage Transformer Connection). The elements can be blocked via a binary input >59-3V0 BLOCK. Internal blocking is not accomplished in this application case.

2.15.2 Undervoltage Protection (27)

Undervoltage PhaseGround Figure 2-116depicts the logic diagram of the phase voltage elements. The fundamental frequency is numerically filtered from each of the three measuring voltages so that harmonics or transient voltage peaks are largely harmless. Two threshold elements 27-1-Vph PICKUP and 27-2-Vph PICKUP are compared with the voltages. If phase voltage falls below a threshold it is indicated phase-segregated. Furthermore, a general pickup indication 27-1-Vpg Pickup 27-2-Vpg Pickup is given. The dropout to pickup ratio can be set (). Every element starts a time delay which is common to all phases. Expiry of the respective time delay 27-1-Vph DELAY or 27-2-Vph DELAY is signalled and results in the trip command 27-Vpg TRIP. Depending on the configuration of the substations the voltage transformers are located on the busbar side or on the outgoing feeder side. This results in a different

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

273

2 Functions

behavior of the undervoltage protection when the line is deenergized. While the voltage usually remains present or reappears at the busbar side after a trip command and opening of the circuit breaker, it is switched on at the outgoing side. For the undervoltage protection this results in a pickup state being present if the voltage transformers are on the outgoing side. If this pickup must be reset, the current can be used as an additional criterion (current supervision CURR.SUP 27-Vph) to achieve this result. Undervoltage will then only be detected if, together with the undervoltage condition, the minimum current PoleOpenCurrent of the corresponding phase is also exceeded. This condition is communicated by the central function control of the device. The undervoltage protection phaseelement can be blocked via a binary input 27Vphg BLK. The elements of the undervoltage protection are then automatically blocked if a voltage failure is detected (FuseFailureMonitor, also see Section 2.19.1) or if the trip of the mcb of the voltage transformers is indicated (internal blocking) via the binary input >FAIL:Feeder VT. Also during a single-pole automatic reclose dead time (using the internal autoreclosure function) the elements of the undervoltage protection are automatically blocked in the pole open state. If necessary, the current criterion will be considered, so that they do not respond to the undervoltage of the disconnected phase when voltage transformers are located on the outgoing side.

274

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.15 Undervoltage and Overvoltage Protection 27/59 (optional)

Figure 2-116

Logic diagram of the undervoltage protection for phase voltages

Undervoltage PhasePhase

Basically, the phasephase undervoltage protection operates like the phaseelement protection except that it detects phasetophase voltages. Accordingly, both phases are indicated during pickup of an undervoltage element if one of the element thresholds 27-1-Vpp PICKUP or 27-2-Vpp PICKUP was undershot. Beyond this, Figure 2-116 applies in principle. It is sufficient for the current criterion that current flow is detected in one of the involved phases. The phasephase undervoltage protection can also be blocked via a binary input >27-Vphph BLOCK. There is an automatic blocking if the measuring voltage failure was detected or voltage mcb tripping was indicated (internal blocking of the phases affected by the voltage failure). During single-pole dead time for automatic reclosure (using the internal automatic reclosure function) the elements of the undervoltage protection are automatically blocked in the disconnected phase so that it does not respond to the undervoltage of

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

275

2 Functions

the disconnected phase provided that the voltage transformers are located on the outgoing side. Undervoltage Positive Sequence System V1 The device calculates the positive sequence system according to its defining equation V1 = 1/3(VA + aVB + a2VC) where a = ej120. The resulting singlephase AC voltage is fed to the two threshold elements 27-1-V1 PICKUP and 27-2-V1 PICKUP (see Figure 2-117). Combined with the associated time delays 27-1-V1 DELAY and 27-2-V1 DELAY these elements form a twoelement undervoltage protection for the positive sequence system. Current can be used as an additional criterion for the undervoltage protection of the positive sequence system (current supervision CURR.SUP. 27-V1). An undervoltage is only detected if the current flow is detected in at least one phase together with the undervoltage criterion. The undervoltage protection for the positive sequence system can be blocked via the binary input >27-V1 BLOCK. The elements of the undervoltage protection are automatically blocked if voltage failure is detected (FuseFailureMonitor, also see Subsection 2.19.1) or, if the trip of the mcb for the voltage transformer is indicated via the binary input >FAIL:Feeder VT (internal blocking).

Figure 2-117

Logic diagram of the undervoltage protection for positive sequence voltage system

During single-pole dead time for automatic reclosure (using the internal automatic reclosure function) the elements of the undervoltage protection are automatically blocked in the positive sequence system so that they do not respond to the reduced voltage caused by the disconnected phase in case the voltage transformers are located on the outgoing side.

276

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.15 Undervoltage and Overvoltage Protection 27/59 (optional)

2.15.3 Setting Notes

General The voltage protection can only operate if it has been set to Enabled during the configuration of the device scope (address 137). Compounding is only available if address 137 is set to Enabl. w. comp.. The overvoltage and undervoltage elements can detect phase-to-ground voltages, phase-to-phase voltages or the symmetrical positive sequence system of the voltages; for overvoltage also the symmetrical negative sequence system, zero sequence voltage or a different single-phase voltage can be used. Any combination is possible. Detection procedures that are not required are switched OFF.

Note For overvoltage protection it is particularly important to observe the setting hints: NEVER set an overvoltage element (VPh-G, VPh-Ph, V1) lower than an undervoltage element. This would put the device immediately into a state of permanent pickup which cannot be reset by any measured value operation. As a result, the device would remain out of service!

Overvoltage PhaseGround

The phase voltage elements can be set in address 3701 59-Vph-g Mode ON or OFF. In addition to this, you can set Alarm Only, i.e. these elements operate and send alarms but do not generate any trip commands. With the setting , a trip command is additionally generated for these elements. The settings of the voltage threshold and the timer values depend on the type of application. If steady-state overvoltages are to be detected on long unloaded lines, the 59-1-Vph PICKUP element (address 3702) is set to at least 5 % above the maximum stationary phasetoground voltage that is to be expected in operation. Additionally, a high dropout to pickup ratio is required (address 3709 59-Vph RESET = 0.98 = presetting). This setting is only possible via DIGSI at "Display Additional Settings". The delay time 59-1-Vph DELAY (address 3703) should be a few seconds so that overvoltages with short duration may not result in tripping. The 59-2-Vph PICKUP element (address 3704) is provided for high overvoltages with short duration. Here, an adequately high pickup value is set, e.g. the 11/2-fold of the nominal phaseground voltage. 0.1 to 0.2 s are sufficient for the time delay 59-2Vph DELAY (address 3705).

Overvoltage PhasePhase

Basically, the same considerations apply as for the phase undervoltage elements. These elements may be used instead of the phase voltage elements or be used addionally. Accordingly set address 3711 59-Vph-ph Mode toON, OFF, Alarm Only or . As phasetophase voltages are monitored, the phasetophase values are used for the settings 59-1-Vpp PICKUP (address 3712) and 59-2-Vpp PICKUP (address 3714). For the delay times 59-1-Vpp DELAY (address 3713) and 59-2-Vpp DELAY (address 3715) the same considerations apply as above. The same is true for the dropout ratios (address 3719 59-Vpp RESET). This latter setting is only possible via DIGSI at "Display Additional Settings".

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

277

2 Functions

Overvoltage Positive Sequence System V1

The positive sequence voltage elements can be used instead of or in addition to previously mentioned overvoltage elements. Accordingly set address 3731 59-V1 Mode to ON, OFF, Alarm Only or . For symmetrical voltages an increase of the positive sequence system corresponds to a logical AND combination of the phase voltages. These elements are particularly suited to the detection of steady-state overvoltages on long, weak-loaded transmission lines (Ferranti effect). Here too, the 59-1-V1 PICKUP element (address 3732) with a longer delay time 59-1-V1 DELAY (address 3733) is used for the detection of steady-state overvoltages (some seconds), the 59-2-V1 PICKUP element (address 3734) with the short delay time 59-2-V1 DELAY (address 3735) is used for the detection of high overvoltages that may jeopardize insulation. Please note that the positive sequence system is established according to its defining equation V1 = 1/3|VA + aVB + a2VC|. For symmetrical voltages the amplitude equivalent to a phase-to-ground voltage. If you want the voltage at the remote line end to be decisive for overvoltage detection, use the compounding feature. To do so, you must have set during the configuration of the protective functions (Subsection 2.1.1.2) address 137 27/59 to Enabl. w. comp. (enabled with compounding). In addition, the compounding feature needs the line data set in the Power System Data 2 (Subsection 2.1.5.1): at address 1110 or 1112 x', address 1114 or 1115 c' and address 1111 or 1113 Line Length, and at address 1105 Line Angle. These data are vital for a correct compounding calculation. If the values provided here do not correspond to real conditions, the compounding may calculate a too high voltage at the remote end, which causes the protection to pick up immediately as soon as the measured values are applied. In such a case, the pickup state can only be reset by switching off the measuring voltage. Compounding can be switched ON or OFF separately for each of the V1 elements: for the 59-1-V1 PICKUP element at address 3736 V1> Compound and for the 59-2V1 PICKUP element at address 3737 V1>> Compound. The dropout to pickup ratio (address 3739 59-V1 RESET) is set as high as possible with regard to the detection of even small steady-state overvoltages. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at "Display Additional Settings".

Overvoltage Negative Sequence System V2

The negative sequence system voltage elements detect asymmetrical voltages. If such voltages shall cause tripping, set address 3741 59-V2 Mode to ON. If these states shall be signalled only, set address 3741 59-V2 Mode to Alarm Only. Activate the setting to generate a trip command in addition to the indications for these elements, in all other cases set OFF. This protective function also has two elements, one being 59-1-V2 PICKUP (address 3742) with a greater time delay 59-1-V2 DELAY (address 3743) for steady-state asymmetrical voltages and the other being 59-2-V2 PICKUP (address 3744) with a short delay time 59-2-V2 DELAY (address 3745) for high asymmetrical voltages. Please note that the negative sequence system is established according to its defining equation V2 = 1/3|VA + a2VB + aVC|. For symmetrical voltages and two swapped phases the amplitude is equivalent to the phasetoground voltage value. The dropout to pickup ratio 59-V2 RESET can be set in address 3749. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at "Display Additional Settings".

278

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.15 Undervoltage and Overvoltage Protection 27/59 (optional)

Zero Sequence System Overvoltage

The zero sequence voltage elements can be switched ON or OFF in address 3721 59G-3V0 (or Vx). They can also be set to Alarm Only, i.e. these elements operate and send alarms but do not generate any trip commands. Apply the setting to generate a trip command anyway. This protection function can be used for any other single-phase voltage which is connected to the fourth voltage measurement input V4. Also refer to Section 2.1.3.1 and see margin heading Voltage Transformer Connection. This protective function also has two elements. The settings of the voltage threshold and the timer values depend on the type of application. Here no general guidelines can be established. The element 59G-1-3V0PICKUP (address 3722) is usually set with a high sensitivity and a longer delay time 59G-1-3V0 DELAY (address 3723). The 59G-2-3V0PICKUP element (address 3724) and its delay time 59G-2-3V0 DELAY (address 3725) allow to implement a second element with less sensitivity and a shorter delay time. Similar considerations apply if this voltage element is used for a different voltage at the measuring input V4. Since the time delays of the zero sequence voltage elements are very stable due to the measurement repetition, the sensitivity can be set quite high. This stabilization can be deactivated at address 3728 59G-3Vo Stabil. if a shorter pickup time is required. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at "Display Additional Settings". Please keep in mind that it does not make sense to combine a sensitive setting with a short pickup time. The dropout to pickup ratio 59G RESET can be set in address 3729. This setting is only possible via DIGSI at "Display Additional Settings". When setting the voltage values please observe the following: If the Vdelta voltage of the set of voltage transformers is connected to V4 and if this was already set in the Power System Data 1 (refer also to Section 2.1.3.1 under margin heading Voltage Connection, address 210 V4 transformer = Vdelta transf.), the device multiplies this voltage by the matching ratio Vph / Vdelta (address 211), usually with 1.73. Therefore the voltage measured is 3Vdelta = 3V0. When the voltage triangle is fully displaced, the voltage will be 3 times the phase-to-phase voltage. If any other voltage is connected to V4, which is not used for voltage protection, and if this was already set in the power system data 1 (refer also to Section 2.1.3.1 under margin heading Voltage Connection, e.g. V4 transformer = Vsync transf. or V4 transformer = Not connected), the device calculates the zero sequence voltage from the phase voltages according to its definition 3V0 = |VA + VB + VC|. When the voltage triangle is fully displaced, the voltage will be 3 times the phase-to-phase voltage. If any other voltage is connected to V4 , which is used for voltage protection, and if this was already set in the power system data 1 (refer also to Section 2.1.3.1, under margin heading Voltage Connection, V4 transformer = Vx transformer), this voltage will be used for the voltage elements without any further factors. This zero sequence voltage protection then is, in reality, a single-phase voltage protection for any kind of voltage at V4. Note that with a sensitive setting, i.e. close to operational values that are to be expected, not only the time delay 59G-1-3V0 DELAY (address 3723) must be greater, but also the reset ratio 59G RESET (address 3729).

Undervoltage PhaseGround

The phase voltage elements can be switched ON or OFF in address 3751 27-Vph-g Mode. In addition to this, you can set Alarm Only, i.e. these elements operate and

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

279

2 Functions

send alarms but do not generate any trip commands. The setting allows in addition to generate a trip command. This undervoltage protection function has two elements. The 27-1-Vph PICKUP element (address 3752) with a longer setting of the time 27-1-Vph DELAY (address 3753) operates in the case of minor undervoltages. However, the value set here must not be higher than the undervoltage permissible in operation. In the presence of higher voltage dips, the 27-2-Vph PICKUP element (address 3754) with the delay 27-2Vph DELAY (address 3755) becomes active The dropout to pickup ratio can be set in address . This parameter can only be altered with DIGSI under Additional Settings. The settings of the voltages and times depend on the intended use; therefore no general recommendations for the settings can be given. For load shedding, for example, the values are often determined by a priority grading coordination chart. In case of stability problems, the permissible levels and durations of overvoltages must be observed. With induction machines undervoltages have an effect on the permissible torque thresholds. If the voltage transformers are located on the line side, the measuring voltages will be absent when the line is disconnected. To avoid the undervoltage levels picking up, the current criterion CURR.SUP 27-Vph (address 3758) is switched ON. With bus-sided voltage transformers it can be switched OFF. However, if the busbar is dead, the undervoltage protection will pick up and expire and then remain picked up. It must therefore be ensured that the protection is blocked by a binary input. Undervoltage PhasePhase Basically, the same considerations apply as for the phase undervoltage elements. These elements may replace the phase voltage elements or be used additionally. Accordingly set address 3761 27-Vph-ph Mode toON, OFF, Alarm Only or . As phasetophase voltages are monitored, the phasetophase values are used for the settings 27-1-Vpp PICKUP (address 3762) and 27-2-Vpp PICKUP (address 3764). The corresponding times delay are 27-1-Vpp DELAY (address 3763) and 27-2Vpp DELAY (address 3765). The dropout to pickup ratio can be set in address . This parameter can only be altered with DIGSI under Additional Settings. If the voltage transformers are located on the line side, the measuring voltages will be absent when the line is disconnected. To avoid that the undervoltage levels in these cases are or remain picked up, the current criterion CURR.SUP 27-Vpp (address 3768) is switched ON. With bus-sided voltage transformers it can be switched OFF. However, if the busbar is dead, the undervoltage protection will pick up and expire and then remain picked up. It must therefore be ensured that the protection is blocked by a binary input. Undervoltage Positive Sequence System V1 The positive sequence undervoltage elements can be used instead of or in addition to previously mentioned undervoltage elements. Accordingly set address 3771 27-V1 Mode toON, OFF, Alarm Only or . Basically, the same considerations apply as for the other undervoltage elements. Especially in case of stability problems, the positive sequence system is advantageous, since the positive sequence system is relevant for the limit of the stable energy transmission. To achieve the two-element condition, the 27-1-V1 PICKUP element (address 3772) is combined with a greater time delay 27-1-V1 DELAY (address 3773), and

280

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.15 Undervoltage and Overvoltage Protection 27/59 (optional)

the 27-2-V1 PICKUP element (address 3774) with a shorter time delay 27-2-V1 DELAY (address 3775). Note that the positive sequence system is established according to its defining equation V1 = 1/3|VA + aVB + a2VC|. For symmetrical voltages this is equivalent to a phase-ground voltage. The dropout to pickup ratio can be set in address . This parameter can only be altered with DIGSI under Additional Settings. If the voltage transformers are located on the line side, the measuring voltages will be missing when the line is disconnected. To avoid that the undervoltage levels in these cases are or remain picked up, the current criterion CURR.SUP. 27-V1 (address 3778) is switched ON. With bus-sided voltage transformers it can be switched OFF. However, if the busbar is dead, the undervoltage protection will pick up and expire and then remain in a picked-up state. It must therefore be ensured in such cases that the protection is blocked by a binary input.

2.15.4 Settings
Addresses which have an appended "A" can only be changed with DIGSI, under "Display Additional Settings".
Addr. 3701 Parameter 59-Vph-g Mode Setting Options OFF Alarm Only ON 1.0 .. 170.0 V; 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.0 .. 170.0 V; 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 0.30 .. 0.98 OFF Alarm Only ON 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 0.30 .. 0.98 OFF Alarm Only ON 1.0 .. 220.0 V; 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; Default Setting OFF Comments Operating mode Vph-g overvoltage prot. 59-1 Pickup Overvoltage (phaseground) 59-1 Time Delay 59-2 Pickup Overvoltage (phaseground) 59-2 Time Delay Reset ratio Operating mode Vph-ph overvoltage prot. 59-1 Pickup Overvoltage (phasephase) 59-1 Time Delay 59-2 Pickup Overvoltage (phasephase) 59-2 Time Delay Reset ratio Operating mode 3V0 (or Vx) overvoltage 59G-1 Pickup 3V0 (or Vx) (zero seq.) 59G-1 Time Delay

3702 3703 3704 3705 3709A 3711

59-1-Vph PICKUP 59-1-Vph DELAY 59-2-Vph PICKUP 59-2-Vph DELAY 59-Vph RESET 59-Vph-ph Mode

85.0 V 2.00 sec 100.0 V 1.00 sec 0.98 OFF

3712 3713 3714 3715 3719A 3721

59-1-Vpp PICKUP 59-1-Vpp DELAY 59-2-Vpp PICKUP 59-2-Vpp DELAY 59-Vpp RESET 59G-3V0 (or Vx)

150.0 V 2.00 sec 175.0 V 1.00 sec 0.98 OFF

3722 3723

59G-1-3V0PICKUP 59G-1-3V0 DELAY

30.0 V 2.00 sec

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

281

2 Functions

Addr. 3724 3725 3728A 3729A 3731

Parameter 59G-2-3V0PICKUP 59G-2-3V0 DELAY 59G-3Vo Stabil. 59G RESET 59-V1 Mode

Setting Options 1.0 .. 220.0 V; 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ON OFF 0.30 .. 0.98 OFF Alarm Only ON 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; OFF ON OFF ON 0.30 .. 0.98 OFF Alarm Only ON 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 0.30 .. 0.98 OFF Alarm Only ON 1.0 .. 100.0 V; 0 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.0 .. 100.0 V; 0 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ON OFF OFF Alarm Only ON

Default Setting 50.0 V 1.00 sec ON 0.95 OFF

Comments 59G-2 Pickup 3V0 (or Vx) (zero seq.) 59G-2 Time Delay 59G: Stabilization 3Vo-Measurement Reset ratio Operating mode V1 overvoltage prot. 59-1 Pickup Overvoltage (pos. seq.) 59-1 Time Delay 59-2 Pickup Overvoltage (pos. seq.) 59-2 Time Delay V1> with Compounding V1>> with Compounding Reset ratio Operating mode V2 overvoltage prot. 59-1 Pickup Overvoltage (neg. seq.) 59-1 Time Delay 59-2 Pickup Overvoltage (neg. seq.) 59-2 Time Delay Reset ratio Operating mode Vph-g undervoltage prot. 27-1 Pickup Undervoltage (phase-neutral) 27-1 Time Delay 27-2 Pickup Undervoltage (phase-neutral) 27-2 Time Delay Current supervision (Vph-g) Operating mode Vph-ph undervoltage prot.

3732 3733 3734 3735 3736 3737 3739A 3741

59-1-V1 PICKUP 59-1-V1 DELAY 59-2-V1 PICKUP 59-2-V1 DELAY V1> Compound V1>> Compound 59-V1 RESET 59-V2 Mode

150.0 V 2.00 sec 175.0 V 1.00 sec OFF OFF 0.98 OFF

3742 3743 3744 3745 3749A 3751

59-1-V2 PICKUP 59-1-V2 DELAY 59-2-V2 PICKUP 59-2-V2 DELAY 59-V2 RESET 27-Vph-g Mode

30.0 V 2.00 sec 50.0 V 1.00 sec 0.98 OFF

3752 3753 3754 3755 3758 3761

27-1-Vph PICKUP 27-1-Vph DELAY 27-2-Vph PICKUP 27-2-Vph DELAY CURR.SUP 27-Vph 27-Vph-ph Mode

30.0 V 2.00 sec 10.0 V 1.00 sec ON OFF

282

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.15 Undervoltage and Overvoltage Protection 27/59 (optional)

Addr. 3762 3763 3764 3765 3768 3771

Parameter 27-1-Vpp PICKUP 27-1-Vpp DELAY 27-2-Vpp PICKUP 27-2-Vpp DELAY CURR.SUP 27-Vpp 27-V1 Mode

Setting Options 1.0 .. 175.0 V; 0 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.0 .. 175.0 V; 0 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ON OFF OFF Alarm Only ON 1.0 .. 100.0 V; 0 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.0 .. 100.0 V; 0 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ON OFF

Default Setting 50.0 V 2.00 sec 17.0 V 1.00 sec ON OFF

Comments 27-1 Pickup Undervoltage (phase-phase) 27-1 Time Delay 27-2 Pickup Undervoltage (phase-phase) 27-2 Time Delay Current supervision (Vph-ph) Operating mode V1 Undervoltage prot. 27-1 Pickup Undervoltage (pos. seq.) 27-1 Time Delay 27-2 Pickup Undervoltage (pos. seq.) 27-2 Time Delay Current supervision (V1)

3772 3773 3774 3775 3778

27-1-V1 PICKUP 27-1-V1 DELAY 27-2-V1 PICKUP 27-2-V1 DELAY CURR.SUP. 27-V1

30.0 V 2.00 sec 10.0 V 1.00 sec ON

2.15.5 Information List

No. 10201 10202 10203 10204 10205 10206 10207 10208 10215 10216 10217 10218 10219 10220 10221 10222 10223 10224 10225 10226 10227 Information >59-Vphg BLOCK >59-Vphph BLOCK >59-3V0 BLOCK >59-V1 BLOCK >59-V2 BLOCK >27-Vphg BLOCK >27-Vphph BLOCK >27-V1 BLOCK 59-Vphg OFF 59-Vphg BLK 59-Vphph OFF 59-Vphph BLK 59-3V0 OFF 59-3V0 BLK 59-V1 OFF 59-V1 BLK 59-V2 OFF 59-V2 BLK 27-Vphg OFF 27-Vphg BLK 27-Vphph OFF Type of Information SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT Comments >BLOCK 59-Vphg Overvolt. (phase-ground) >BLOCK 59-Vphph Overvolt (phase-phase) >BLOCK 59-3V0 Overvolt. (zero sequence) >BLOCK 59-V1 Overvolt. (positive seq.) >BLOCK 59-V2 Overvolt. (negative seq.) >BLOCK 27-Vphg Undervolt. (phase-ground) >BLOCK 27-Vphph Undervolt (phase-phase) >BLOCK 27-V1 Undervolt (positive seq.) 59-Vphg Overvolt. is switched OFF 59-Vphg Overvolt. is BLOCKED 59-Vphph Overvolt. is switched OFF 59-Vphph Overvolt. is BLOCKED 59-3V0 Overvolt. is switched OFF 59-3V0 Overvolt. is BLOCKED 59-V1 Overvolt. is switched OFF 59-V1 Overvolt. is BLOCKED 59-V2 Overvolt. is switched OFF 59-V2 Overvolt. is BLOCKED 27-Vphg Undervolt. is switched OFF 27-Vphg Undervolt. is BLOCKED 27-Vphph Undervolt. is switched OFF

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

283

2 Functions

No. 10228 10229 10230 10231 10240 10241 10242 10243 10244 10245 10246 10247 10255 10256 10257 10258 10259 10260 10261 10262 10270 10271 10272 10273 10274 10280 10281 10282 10283 10284 10290 10291 10292 10293 10294 10300 10301 10302 10303 10304 10310 10311 10312 10313 10314 10315

Information 27-Vphph BLK 27-V1 OFF 27-V1 BLK 27/59 ACTIVE 59-1-Vpg Pickup 59-2-Vpg Pickup 59-Vpg PU A 59-Vpg PU B 59-Vpg PU C 59-1-VpgTimeOut 59-2-VpgTimeOut 59-Vpg TRIP 59-1-Vpp Pickup 59-2-Vpp Pickup 59-Vpp PickupAB 59-Vpp PickupBC 59-Vpp PickupCA 59-1-VppTimeOut 59-2-VppTimeOut 59-Vpp TRIP 59-1-3V0 Pickup 59-2-3V0 Pickup 59-1-3V0TimeOut 59-2-3V0TimeOut 59-3V0 TRIP 59-1-V1 Pickup 59-2-V1 Pickup 59-1-V1TimeOut 59-2-V1TimeOut 59-V1 TRIP 59-1-V2 Pickup 59-2-V2 Pickup 59-1-V2TimeOut 59-2-V2TimeOut 59-V2 TRIP 27-1-V1 Pickup 27-2-V1 Pickup 27-1-V1TimeOut 27-2-V1TimeOut 27-V1 TRIP 27-1-Vpg Pickup 27-2-Vpg Pickup 27-Vpg PU A 27-Vpg PU B 27-Vpg PU C 27-1-VpgTimeOut

Type of Information OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

Comments 27-Vphph Undervolt. is BLOCKED 27-V1 Undervolt. is switched OFF 27-V1 Undervolt. is BLOCKED 27/59 Voltage protection is ACTIVE 59-1-Vphg Pickup 59-2-Vphg Pickup 59-Vphg Pickup A 59-Vphg Pickup B 59-Vphg Pickup C 59-1-Vphg TimeOut 59-2-Vphg TimeOut 59-Vphg TRIP command 59-1-Vphph Pickup 59-2-Vphph Pickup 59-Vphph Pickup A-B 59-Vphph Pickup B-C 59-Vphph Pickup C-A 59-1-Vphph TimeOut 59-2-Vphph TimeOut 59-Vphph TRIP command 59-1-3V0 Pickup 59-2-3V0 Pickup 59-1-3V0 TimeOut 59-2-3V0 TimeOut 59-3V0 TRIP command 59-1-V1 Pickup 59-2-V1 Pickup 59-1-V1 TimeOut 59-2-V1 TimeOut 59-V1 TRIP command 59-1-V2 Pickup 59-2-V2 Pickup 59-1-V2 TimeOut 59-2-V2 TimeOut 59-V2 TRIP command 27-1-V1 Pickup 27-2-V1 Pickup 27-1-V1TimeOut 27-2-V1TimeOut 27-V1 TRIP command 27-1-Vphg Pickup 27-2-Vphg Pickup 27-Vphg Pickup A 27-Vphg Pickup B 27-Vphg Pickup C 27-1-Vphg TimeOut

284

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.15 Undervoltage and Overvoltage Protection 27/59 (optional)

No. 10316 10317 10325 10326 10327 10328 10329 10330 10331 10332

Information 27-2-VpgTimeOut 27-Vpg TRIP 27-1-Vpp Pickup 27-2-Vpp Pickup 27-Vpp PU AB 27-Vpp PU BC 27-Vpp PU CA 27-1-VppTimeOut 27-2-VppTimeOut 27-Vpp TRIP

Type of Information OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 27-2-Vphg TimeOut

Comments

27-Vphg TRIP command 27-1-Vphph Pickup 27-2-Vphph Pickup 27-Vphph Pickup A-B 27-Vphph Pickup B-C 27-Vphph Pickup C-A 27-1-Vphph TimeOut 27-2-Vphph TimeOut 27-Vphph TRIP command

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

285

2 Functions

2.16

Frequency Protection 81 (optional)

The frequency protection function detects abnormally high and low frequencies in the system or in electrical machines. If the frequency lies outside the allowable range, appropriate actions are initiated, such as load shedding or separating a generator from the system. Underfrequency is caused by increased real power demand or by a reduction of the generated power, e.g. in the event of disconnection from the network, generator failure or faulty operation of the power frequency control. Underfrequency protection is also applied for generators which operate (temporarily) to an island network. This is due to the fact that the reverse power protection cannot operate in case of a drive power failure. The generator can be disconnected from the power system by means of the underfrequency protection. Underfrequency results also in increased reactive power demand of inductive loads. Overfrequency is caused for instance in case of load shedding, system disconnection or malfunction of the power-frequency control. There is also a risk of self-excitation for generators feeding long lines under no-load conditions.

2.16.1 Method of Operation

Frequency Elements Frequency protection consists of the four frequency elements f1 to f4. Each element can be set as overfrequency element (f>) or as underfrequency element (f<) with individual thresholds and time delays. This ensures variable matching to the application purpose. If an element is set to a value above the rated frequency, it is automatically interpreted to be an overfrequency element f>. If an element is set to a value below the rated frequency, it is automatically interpreted to be an underfrequency element f<. If an element is set exactly to the rated frequency, it is inactive. Each element can be blocked via binary input and also the entire frequency protection function can be blocked. Frequency Measurement The largest of the 3 phase-ground currents is used for frequency measurement. This value must be at least 6 V (secondary). Below that value frequency measurement will not take place. Numerical filters are employed to calculate from the measured voltage a quantity that is proportional to the frequency which is virtually linear in the specified range (fN 10 %). Filters and repeated measurements ensure that the frequency evaluation is virtually free from harmonic influences and phase jumps. An accurate and quick measurement result is obtained by considering also the frequency change. When changing the frequency of the power system, the sign of the quotient f/dt remains unchanged during several repeated measurements. If, however, a phase jump in the measured voltage temporarily simulates a frequency deviation, the sign of f/dt will subsequently reverse. Thus the measurement results corrupted by a phase jump are quickly discarded. The dropout value of each frequency element is approximately 20 mHz below (for f>) or above (for f<) of the pickup value.

286

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.16 Frequency Protection 81 (optional)

Operating Ranges

Frequency evaluation requires a measured quantity that can be processed. This implies that at least a sufficiently high voltage is available and that the frequency of this voltage is within the working range of the frequency protection. The frequency protection selects automatically the largest of the phase-ground voltages. If all three voltages are below the operating range of approx. 6 V (secondary), the frequency cannot be determined. If the voltage sinks below this minimum value after a frequency element has picked up, the picked up element will drop out. This implies also that all frequency elements will drop out after a line has been switched off (with voltage transformers on line side). When connecting a measuring voltage with a frequency outside the configured threshold of a frequency elements, the frequency protection is immediately ready to operate. Since the filters of the frequency measurement must first go through a transient state, the command output time may increase slightly (approx. 1 period). This is because a frequency element picks up only if the frequency has been detected outside the configured threshold in five consecutive measurements. The frequency range is from 25 Hz to 70 Hz. If the frequency leaves this operating range, the frequency elements will drop out. If the frequency returns into the working range, the measurement can be resumed provided that the measuring voltage too is inside the working range. But if the measuring voltage is switched off, the picked up element will drop out immediately.

Power Swings

In interconnected networks, frequency deviations may also be caused by power swings. Depending on the power swing frequency, the mounting location of the device and the setting of the frequency elements, power swings may cause the frequency protection to pick up and even to trip. In such cases out-of-step trips can not be prevented by operating the distance protection with power swing blocking (see also Section 2.3). Rather it is suggested to block the frequency protection after power swings are detected. This can be accomplished via binary inputs and binary outputs or by corresponding logic operations using the user-defined logic (CFC). If, however, the power swing frequencies are known, tripping of the frequency protection function can also be avoided by adapting the delay times of the frequency protection correspondingly. Figure 2-118 shows the logic diagram for the frequency protection function. Once the frequency was reliably detected to be outside the configured thresholds of an element (above the setting value for f> elements or below for f< elements), a pickup signal of the corresponding element is generated. The decision is considered reliable if 5 measurements taken in intervals of 1/2 period yield one frequency outside the set threshold. After pickup a delay time per element can be started. When the associated time has elapsed, a trip command is issued. A picked up element drops out if the cause of the pickup is no longer valid after 5 measurements or if the measuring voltage was switched off or the frequency leaves the working range. When a frequency elements drops out, the tripping signal of the corresponding frequency element is immediately reset, but the trip command is maintained for at least the minimum command duration which was set for all tripping functions of the device. Each of the four frequency elements can be blocked individually by binary inputs. The blocking takes immediate effect. It is also possible to block the entire frequency protection function via binary input.

Pickup / Tripping

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

287

2 Functions

Figure 2-118

Logic diagram of frequency protection for 50 Hz rated frequency

2.16.2 Setting Notes

General Frequency protection is only in effect and accessible if address 136 81 O/U is set to Enabled during configuration of protective functions. If the function is not required, set Disabled. The frequency protection function features 4 frequency elements f1 to f4 each of which can function as overfrequency element or underfrequency element. Each zone can be set active or inactive. This is set in addresses: 3601 81 O/U FREQ. f1 for frequency element f1, 3611 81 O/U FREQ. f2 for frequency element f2, 3621 81 O/U FREQ. f3 for frequency element f3, 3631 81 O/U FREQ. f4 for frequency element f4,

288

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.16 Frequency Protection 81 (optional)

The following 3 options are available: Element OFF: The element is ineffective; Element ON: with Trip: The element is effective and issues an alarm and a trip command (after time has expired) following irregular frequency deviations; Element ON: Alarm only: The element is effective and issues an alarm but no trip command following irregular frequency deviations; Pickup Values, Delay Time The configured pickup value determines whether a frequency element is to respond to overfrequency or underfrequency. If a element is set to a value above the rated frequency, it is automatically interpreted to be an overfrequency element f>. If a element is set to a value below the rated frequency, it is automatically interpreted to be an underfrequency element f<. If a element is set exactly to the rated frequency, it is inactive. A pickup value can be set for each element according to above rules. The addresses and possible setting ranges are determined by the rated frequency as configured in the power system data 1 (Subsection 2.1.3.1) at Rated Frequency (address 230). Please note that none of the frequency elements is set to less than 30 mHz above (for f>) or below (for f<) of the nominal frequency. Since the frequency elements have a hysteresis of approx. 20 mHz, it may otherwise happen that the element does not drop out when returning to the nominal frequency. Only those addresses are accessible that match the configured nominal frequency. For each element, a trip delay time can be set: Address 3602 81-1 PICKUP pickup value for frequency element f1 at fN = 50 Hz, Address 3603 81-1 PICKUP pickup value for frequency element f1 at fN = 60 Hz, Address 3604 81-1 DELAY trip delay for frequency element f1; Address 3612 81-2 PICKUP pickup value for frequency element f2 at fN = 50 Hz, Address 3613 81-2 PICKUP pickup value for frequency element f2 at fN = 60 Hz, Address 3614 81-2 DELAY trip delay for frequency element f2; Address 3622 81-3 PICKUP pickup value for frequency element f3 at fN = 50 Hz, Address 3623 81-3 PICKUP pickup value for frequency element f3 at fN = 60 Hz, Address 3624 81-3 DELAY trip delay for frequency element f3; Address 3632 81-4 PICKUP pickup value for frequency element f4 at fN = 50 Hz, Address 3633 81-4 PICKUP pickup value for frequency element f4 at fN = 60 Hz, Address 3634 81-4 DELAY trip delay for frequency element f4; The set times are additional delay times not including the operating times (measuring time, dropout time) of the protective function. If underfrequency protection is used for load shedding purposes, then the frequency settings relative to other feeder relays are generally based on the priority of the customers served by the protective relay. Normally, load shedding requires a frequency / time grading that takes into account the importance of the consumers or consumer groups. In interconnected networks, frequency deviations may also be caused by power swings. Depending on the power swing frequency, the mounting location of the device and the setting of the frequency elements, it is recommended to block the entire frequency protection function or single elements once a power swing has been detected. The delay times must then be co-ordinated thus that a power swing is detected before the frequency protection trips.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

289

2 Functions

Further application examples exist in the field of power stations. The frequency values to be set mainly depend on the specifications of the power system/power station operator. In this context, the underfrequency protection also ensures the power stations own demand by disconnecting it from the power system in time. The turbo regulator regulates the machine set to the nominal speed. Consequently, the station's own demands can be continuously supplied at nominal frequency. Since the dropout threshold is 20 mHz below or above the trip frequency, the resulting minimum trip frequency is 30 mHz above or below the nominal frequency. A frequency increase can, for example, occur due to a load shedding or malfunction of the speed regulation (e.g. in a stand-alone system). In this way, the frequency protection can, for example, be used as overspeed protection.

2.16.3 Settings
Addr. 3601 Parameter 81 O/U FREQ. f1 Setting Options ON: Alarm only ON: with Trip OFF 45.50 .. 54.50 Hz 55.50 .. 64.50 Hz 0.00 .. 600.00 sec ON: Alarm only ON: with Trip OFF 45.50 .. 54.50 Hz 55.50 .. 64.50 Hz 0.00 .. 600.00 sec ON: Alarm only ON: with Trip OFF 45.50 .. 54.50 Hz 55.50 .. 64.50 Hz 0.00 .. 600.00 sec ON: Alarm only ON: with Trip OFF 45.50 .. 54.50 Hz 55.50 .. 64.50 Hz 0.00 .. 600.00 sec Default Setting ON: Alarm only Comments 81 Over/Under Frequency Prot. element f1 81-1 Pickup 81-1 Pickup 81-1 Time Delay 81 Over/Under Frequency Prot. element f2 81-2 Pickup 81-2 Pickup 81-2 Time Delay 81 Over/Under Frequency Prot. element f3 81-3 Pickup 81-3 Pickup 81-3 Time delay 81 Over/Under Frequency Prot. element f4 81-4 Pickup 81-4 Pickup 81-4 Time delay

3602 3603 3604 3611

81-1 PICKUP 81-1 PICKUP 81-1 DELAY 81 O/U FREQ. f2

49.50 Hz 59.50 Hz 60.00 sec ON: Alarm only

3612 3613 3614 3621

81-2 PICKUP 81-2 PICKUP 81-2 DELAY 81 O/U FREQ. f3

49.00 Hz 57.00 Hz 30.00 sec ON: Alarm only

3622 3623 3624 3631

81-3 PICKUP 81-3 PICKUP 81-3 DELAY 81 O/U FREQ. f4

47.50 Hz 59.50 Hz 3.00 sec ON: Alarm only

3632 3633 3634

81-4 PICKUP 81-4 PICKUP 81-4 DELAY

51.00 Hz 62.00 Hz 30.00 sec

290

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.16 Frequency Protection 81 (optional)

2.16.4 Information List

No. 5203 5206 5207 5208 5209 5211 5212 5213 5232 5233 5234 5235 5236 5237 5238 5239 5240 5241 5242 5243 Information >BLOCK 81O/U >BLOCK 81-1 >BLOCK 81-2 >BLOCK 81-3 >BLOCK 81-4 81 OFF 81 BLOCKED 81 ACTIVE 81-1 picked up 81-2 picked up 81-3 picked up 81-4 picked up 81-1 TRIP 81-2 TRIP 81-3 TRIP 81-4 TRIP 81-1 Time Out 81-2 Time Out 81-3 Time Out 81-4 Time Out Type of Information SP SP SP SP SP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT >BLOCK 81O/U >BLOCK 81-1 >BLOCK 81-2 >BLOCK 81-3 >BLOCK 81-4 81 OFF 81 BLOCKED 81 ACTIVE 81-1 picked up 81-2 picked up 81-3 picked up 81-4 picked up 81-1 TRIP 81-2 TRIP 81-3 TRIP 81-4 TRIP 81-1: Time Out 81-2: Time Out 81-3: Time Out 81-4: Time Out Comments

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

291

2 Functions

2.17

Fault Locator
The measurement of the distance to a fault is an important supplement to the protection functions. Availability of the line for power transmission within the system can be increased when the fault is located and cleared faster.

2.17.1 Functional Description

Initiation Conditions The fault location function in the 7SA522 distance protection is independent of the distance measurement. It has a separate measured value memory and dedicated filter algorithms. The fault protection only has to provide a start command to allow the selection of the valid measuring loop and the best suited time interval for the storage of the measured signals. The fault location function can be triggered by the trip command of the fault protection, or also by each fault detection. In the latter case, a fault location calculation is also possible if a different protection device clears the fault. For a fault outside the protected line, the fault location information is not always correct, as the measured values can be distorted by e.g. intermediate infeeds. Determination of the Fault Location The measured value pairs of fault currents and fault voltages (in intervals of 1/20 period) are stored in a cyclic buffer and frozen shortly after the trip command is issued before any distortion of the measured values occurs due to the opening of the circuit breaker even with very fast circuit breakers. Filtering of the measured values and the number of impedance calculations are automatically adapted to the number of stabilized measured value pairs in the determined data window. If a sufficient data window with stabilized values could not be determined, the alarm Flt.Loc.invalid is issued. The evaluation of the measured values in the short-circuit loops is carried out after the short-circuit has been cleared. Short-circuit loops are those which caused the trip. In the event of tripping by the ground fault protection, the three phaseground loops are evaluated. Output of the Fault Location The fault location function issues the following results: the fault loop which was used to determine the fault reactance, the reactance X in primary and secondary, the resistance R in primary and secondary, the distance to fault d in kilometres or miles of the line proportional to the reactance, converted on the basis of the set line reactance per unit line length, the distance to fault d in % of the line length, calculated on the basis of the set reactance per unit length and the set line length.

Note The distance can only be applicable in the form of kilometres, miles or percent if the relevant line section is homogeneous. If the line is made up of several sections with different reactances, e.g. overhead line - cable sections, then the reactance calculated by the fault location can be evaluated for a separate calculation of the fault distance.

292

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.17 Fault Locator

Parallel Line Measured Value Correction (optional)

In the case of ground faults on double circuit lines, the measured values obtained for calculation of the impedance are influenced by the mutual coupling of the ground impedance of the two parallel lines. This causes measuring errors in the result of the impedance computation unless special measures are taken. The device is therefore provided with a parallel line compensation function. This function takes the ground current of the parallel line into consideration when solving the line equation, thereby compensating for the coupling influence as was the case with the derivation of the distance by the distance protection (refer to Section 2.2.1 under Parallel Line Measured Value Correction). The ground current of the parallel line must, of course, be connected to the device and the current input I4 must be configured accordingly during the setting of the Power System Data 1 (Section 2.1.3.1 under Current Transformer Connection). The parallel line compensation only applies to faults on the protected feeder. For external faults, including those on the parallel line, compensation is impossible.

Correction of Measured Values for Load Current on Double-end Fed Lines

When faults occur on loaded lines fed from both ends (Figure 21192-119), the fault voltage VF1 is influenced not only by the source voltage E1, but also by the source voltage E2, when both voltages are applied to the common ground resistance RF. This causes measuring errors in the result of the impedance computation unless special measures are taken, since the current component IF2 cannot be seen at the measuring point M. For long heavily loaded lines, this can give a significant error in the Xcomponent of the fault impedance (the determining factor for the distance calculation). A load compensation feature in 7SA522 is provided for the fault location calculation which largely corrects this measurement inaccuracy for single-phase faults. Correction for the Rcomponent of the fault impedance is not possible; but the resultant inaccuracy is not critical, since only the Xcomponent is critical for the distance to fault indication. Load compensation is effective for singlephase faults. For singlephase to ground faults, positive and zero phase sequence components of the symmetrical components are used in the compensation. Load compensation can be switched on or off. Switching the function off is useful, for example, during relay testing, in order to avoid influences caused by the test quantities.

Figure 2-119

Fault currents and voltages on doubleend fed lines

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

293

2 Functions

2.17.2 Setting Notes

General The fault location function is only in service if it was selected to Enabled during the configuration of the device functions (Subsection 2.1.1.2, address 138). If the fault location calculation is to be started by the trip command of the protection, set address 3802 START = TRIP. In this case a fault location is only output if the device has also issued a trip. The fault location calculation can however also be started with each fault detection of the device (address 3802 START = Pickup). In this case the fault location is also calculated if for example a different protection device cleared the fault. For a fault outside the protected line, the fault location information is not always correct, as the measured values can be distorted by e.g. intermediate infeeds. To calculate the distance to fault in kilometers or miles, the device requires the reactance per unit length data in /km or /mile. For correct indication of the fault location in % of line length, the correct line length has also to be entered. These setting parameters were already applied with the Power System Data 2 (Subsection 2.1.5.1 at General Line Data. A prerequisite for the correct indication of the fault location furthermore is that the other parameters that influence the calculation of the distance to fault have also been set correctly. This concerns the following addresses 1116 RG/RL(Z1), 1117 XG/XL(Z1) or 1120 K0 (Z1), 1121 Angle K0(Z1). If the parallel line compensation is used, set address 3805 Paral.Line Comp to YES (presetting for devices with parallel line compensation). Further prerequisites are that The ground current of the parallel line has been connected to the fourth current input I4 with the correct polarity and The current transformer ratio I4/Iph CT (address 221) in the Power System Data 1 has been set correctly (refer also to Section 2.1.3.1 at Current Transformer Connection) and The parameter for the fourth current input I4 transformer has been set to In paral. line (address 220) in the Power System Data 1 (Section 2.1.3.1 at Current Transformer Connection) and The mutual impedances RM/RL ParalLine and XM/XL ParalLine (addresses 1126 and 1127) have been set correctly in the general protection data (Power System Data 2, Section 2.1.5.1). If load compensation is applied to single-phase faults in double-fed lines of a grounded system, set 3806 in address Load Compensat. YES. In case high fault resistances are expected for single-phase faults, e.g. at overhead lines without overhead ground wire or unfavorable footing of the towers, this will improve the accuracy of the distance calculation.

294

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.17 Fault Locator

2.17.3 Settings
Addr. 3802 3805 3806 Parameter START Paral.Line Comp Load Compensat. Setting Options Pickup TRIP NO YES NO YES Default Setting Pickup YES NO Comments Start fault locator with Mutual coupling parall.line compensation Load Compensation

2.17.4 Information List

No. 1114 1115 1117 1118 1119 1120 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1132 1133 Rpri = Xpri = Rsec = Xsec = dist = d[%] = dist = FL Loop AG FL Loop BG FL Loop CG FL Loop AB FL Loop BC FL Loop CA Flt.Loc.invalid Flt.Loc.ErrorK0 Information Type of Information OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT_Ev OUT_Ev OUT_Ev OUT_Ev OUT_Ev OUT_Ev OUT OUT Comments Flt Locator: primary RESISTANCE Flt Locator: primary REACTANCE Flt Locator: secondary RESISTANCE Flt Locator: secondary REACTANCE Flt Locator: Distance to fault Flt Locator: Distance [%] to fault Flt Locator: Distance to fault Fault Locator Loop AG Fault Locator Loop BG Fault Locator Loop CG Fault Locator Loop AB Fault Locator Loop BC Fault Locator Loop CA Fault location invalid Fault locator setting error K0,angle(K0)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

295

2 Functions

2.18

Breaker Failure Protection 50BF (optional)

The circuit breaker failure protection provides rapid back-up fault clearance, in the event that the circuit breaker fails to respond to a trip command from a protective function of the local circuit breaker.

2.18.1 Method of Operation

General Each time a fault protection relay of a feeder issues a trip command to the circuit breaker, it is repeated to the breaker failure protection (Figure 2-120). A timer TBF in the breaker failure protection is started. The timer runs as long as a trip command is present and current continues to flow through the breaker poles.

Figure 2-120

Simplified function diagram of circuit breaker failure protection with current flow monitoring

Normally, the breaker will open and interrupt the fault current. The current monitoring element quickly resets (typical 10 ms) and stops the timer TBF. If the trip command is not carried out (breaker failure case), current continues to flow and the timer runs to its set limit. The breaker failure protection then issues a command to trip the back-up breakers and interrupt the fault current. The reset time of the feeder protection is not relevant because the breaker failure protection itself recognizes the interruption of the current. For protection functions where the tripping criterion is not dependent on current (e.g. Buchholz protection), current flow is not a reliable criterion for proper operation of the breaker. In such cases, the circuit breaker position can be derived from the auxiliary contacts of the breaker. Therefore, instead of monitoring the current, the condition of the auxiliary contacts is monitored (see Figure 2-121). For this purpose, the outputs from the auxiliary contacts must be fed to binary inputs on the relay (refer also to Subsection 2.20.1).

296

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.18 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF (optional)

Figure 2-121

Simplified function diagram of circuit breaker failure protection controlled by circuit breaker auxiliary contact

Current Flow Monitoring

Each of the phase currents and an additional plausibility current (see below) are filtered by numerical filter algorithms so that only the fundamental component is used for further evaluation. Special measures are taken in order to detect a current interruption. In case of sinusoidal currents the current interruption is detected after approximately 10 ms. With aperiodic DC current components in the fault current and/or in the current transformer secondary circuit after interruption (e.g. current transformers with linearized core), or saturation of the current transformers caused by the DC component in the fault current, it can take one AC cycle before the interruption of the primary current is reliably detected. The currents are monitored and compared with the set threshold. Besides the three phase currents, two further current detectors are provided in order to allow a plausibility check (see Figure 2-122). As plausibility current, the ground current (residual current IE (3I0) is preferably used. If the residual current from the neutral of the current transformer set is connected to the device it is used. If the residual current is not available, the device calculates it with the formula: 3I0 = IA + IB + IC Additionally, the value calculated by 7SA522 of three times the negative sequence current 3I2 is used for plausibility check. This is calculated according to the equation: 3I2 = IA + a2IB + aIC where a = ej120. These plausibility currents do not have any direct influence on the basic functionality of the breaker failure protection but they allow a plausibility check in that at least two current thresholds must have been exceeded before any of the breaker failure delay times can be started, thus providing high security against false operation.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

297

2 Functions

Figure 2-122

Current flow monitoring with plausibility currents 3I0 and 3I2

Processing of the Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contacts

The central function control of the device informs the breaker failure protection on the position of the circuit breaker (refer also to Subsection 2.20.1). Evaluation of the breaker auxiliary contacts is carried out in the breaker failure protection function only when the current flow monitoring has not picked up. Once the current flow criterion has picked up during the trip signal from the feeder protection, the circuit breaker is assumed to be open as soon as the current disappears, even if the associated auxiliary contact does not (yet) indicate that the circuit breaker has opened (Figure 2-123). This gives preference to the more reliable current criterion and avoids overfunctioning due to a defect e.g. in the auxiliary contact mechanism or circuit. This interlock feature is provided for each individual phase as well as for three-pole trip. It is possible to disable the auxiliary contact criterion. If you set the parameter switch Chk BRK CONTACT (Figure 2-125 top) to NO, the breaker failure protection can only be started when current flow is detected. The position of the auxiliary contacts is then not evaluated even if the auxiliary contacts are connected to the device.

Figure 2-123

Interlock of the auxiliary contact criterion - example for phase A

On the other hand, current flow is not a reliable criterion for proper operation of the circuit breaker for faults which do not cause detectable current flow (e.g. Buchholz protection). Information regarding the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts is

298

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.18 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF (optional)

required in these cases to check the correct response of the circuit breaker. For this purpose, the binary input >50BF STARTw/oI No. 1439 is provided (Figure 2-125 left). This input initiates the breaker failure protection even if no current flow is detected. Common Phase Initiation Common phase initiation is used, for example, for lines without automatic reclosure, for lines with only three-pole automatic reclosure, for transformer feeders, or if the busbar protection trips. This is the only available initiation mode if the actual 7SA522 model is able to trip three-pole only. If the breaker failure protection is intended to be initiated by further external protection devices, it is recommended, for security reasons, to connect two starting criteria to the device. Besides the trip command of the external relay to the binary input >50BF Start 3p (No. 1415) it is recommended to connect also the general device pickup to binary input >50BF release (No. 1432). For Buchholz protection it is recommended that the trip command is connected to the device by two separate wire pairs. Nevertheless, it is possible to initiate the breaker failure protection in single-channel mode should a separate release criterion not be available. The binary input >50BF release (No. 1432) must then not be assigned to any physical input of the device during configuration. Figure 2-125 shows the operating principle. When the trip signal appears from any internal or external feeder protection and at least one current flow criterion (according to Figure 2-122) is present, the breaker failure protection is initiated and the corresponding delay time(s) is (are) started. If the current criterion is not fulfilled for any of the phases, the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact(s) is queried provided that this is available according to Figure 2-124. If the circuit breaker poles have individual auxiliary contacts, the series connection of the three normally closed (NC) auxiliary contacts is used. The circuit breaker has operated correctly after a three-pole trip command only when none of the phases carries current or when all three NC auxiliary contacts have closed. Figure 2-124 illustrates how the internal signal 52 1 pole Closed is created (see Figure 2-125 left) if at least one circuit breaker pole is closed.

Figure 2-124

Creation of signal "CB any pole closed"

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

299

2 Functions

If an internal protection function or an external protection device trips without current flow, the internal input Start internal w/o II or the external input >50BF STARTw/oI is used to initiate the breaker failure protection. In this case the start signal is maintained until the circuit breaker is reported to be open by the auxiliary contact criterion. Initiation can be blocked via the binary input >BLOCK 50BF (e.g. during test of the feeder protection relay).

Figure 2-125

Breaker failure protection with common phase initiation

Phase Segregated Initiation

Phase segregated initiation of the breaker failure protection is necessary if the circuit breaker poles can be operated individually, e.g. if single-pole automatic reclosure is used. This is possible if the device is able to trip single-pole. If the breaker failure protection is intended to be initiated by further external protection devices, it is recommended, for security reasons, to connect two starting criteria to the device. Besides the three trip commands of the external relay to the binary input >50BF Start A, >50BF Start B and >50BF Start C it is recommended to connect also for example the general device pickup to binary input >50BF release. Figure 2-126 shows the connections of this dual-channel initiation. Nevertheless, it is possible to initiate the breaker failure protection in single-channel mode should a separate release criterion not be available. The binary input >50BF release must then not be assigned to any physical input of the device during configuration. If the external protection device does not provide a general fault detection signal, a general trip signal can be used instead. Alternatively, the parallel connection of a separate set of trip contacts can produce such a release signal as shown in Figure 2-127. The starting condition logic for the delay times is shown in Figure 2-128. In principle, it is designed similar to that for the common phase initiation, but individually for each of the three phases. Thus, current flow and initiation conditions are processed for each

300

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.18 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF (optional)

phase. In case of single-pole interruption before an automatic reclose cycle, current disappearance is reliably monitored for the tripped breaker pole only.

Figure 2-126

Breaker failure protection with phase segregated initiation - example for initiation by an external protection device with release by a fault detection signal

Figure 2-127

Breaker failure protection with phase segregated initiation - example for initiation by an external protection device with release by a separate set of trip contacts

Initiation of a single-phase, e.g. Start A only is valid when the starting input (= trip command of any feeder protection) appears for only this phase and current flow is detected in at least this phase. If current flow is not detected, the auxiliary contact position can be interrogated according to Figure 2-123, dependent on the setting (Chk BRK CONTACT = YES). The auxiliary contact criterion is also processed for each individual breaker pole. If however the breaker auxiliary contacts are not available for each individual breaker pole, then a single-pole trip command is assumed to be executed only once the series connection of the normally open (NO) auxiliary contacts is interrupted. This information is provided to the breaker failure protection by the central function control of the device (refer to Subsection 2.20.1). The three-phase starting signal Start ABC is generated if trip signals appear in more than one pole (regardless of protection function). Phase segregated initiation is then blocked. The input "BF Start w/o I" (e.g. from Buchholz protection) operates in threephase mode as well. The function is the same as with common phase initiation.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

301

2 Functions

The additional release-signal >50BF release (if assigned to a binary input) affects all initiation conditions. Initiation can be blocked via the binary input >BLOCK 50BF (e.g. during test of the feeder protection relay).

Figure 2-128

Initiation conditions with single-pole trip command

Delay Times

When the initiate conditions are fulfilled, the associated timers are started. The circuit breaker pole(s) must open before the associated time has elapsed.

302

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.18 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF (optional)

Different delay timers are provided for operation after common phase initiation and phase segregated initiation. A third time element can be used for two-element breaker failure protection. With single-element breaker failure protection, the trip command is routed to the adjacent circuit breakers should the local feeder breaker fail (refer to Figure 2-120 or 2121). The adjacent circuit breakers are those which must trip in order to interrupt the fault current, i.e. the breakers which feed the busbar or the busbar section to which the feeder under consideration is connected. The possible initiation conditions for the breaker failure protection are those discussed above. Depending on the application of the feeder protection, common phase or phase segregated initiation conditions may occur. Tripping by the breaker failure protection is always three-pole. The simplest solution is to start the delay timer 50BF-2 Delay (Figure 2-129). The phase-segregated initiation signals are omitted if the feeder protection always trips three-pole or if the circuit breaker is not capable of single-pole tripping. If different delay times are required after a single-pole trip or three-pole trip it is possible to use the timer elements 50BF-1 Delay 1p and 50BF-1 Delay 3p according to Figure 2-130.

Figure 2-129

Single-element breaker failure protection with common phase initiation

Figure 2-130

Single-element breaker failure protection with different delay timers

With two-element breaker failure protection, the trip command of the feeder protection is usually repeated, after a first time element, to the feeder circuit breaker, often via a second trip coil or set of trip coils, if the breaker has not responded to the original trip command. A second time element monitors the response to this repeated trip command and trips the breakers of the relevant bus-bar section, if the fault has not yet been cleared after this second time. For the first time element, a different time delay 50BF-1 Delay 1p can be selected for a single-pole trip than for a three-pole trip by the feeder protection. Additionally, you can select (parameter 1p-RETRIP (T1)) whether this repeated trip should be singlepole or three-pole.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

303

2 Functions

Figure 2-131

Two-element breaker failure protection with phase segregated initiation

Circuit Breaker not Operational

There may be cases when it is already obvious that the circuit breaker associated with a feeder protection relay cannot clear a fault, e.g. when the tripping voltage or the tripping energy is not available. In such a case it is not necessary to wait for the response of the feeder circuit breaker. If provision has been made for the detection of such a condition (e.g. control voltage monitor or air pressure monitor), the monitor alarm signal can be fed to the binary input >52 faulty of the 7SA522. On occurrence of this alarm and a trip command by the feeder protection, a separate timer T3-BkrDefective, which is normally set to 0, is started (Figure 2-132). Thus, the adjacent circuit breakers (bus-bar) are tripped immediately in case the feeder circuit breaker is not operational.

Figure 2-132

Circuit breaker faulty

Transfer Trip to the Remote End Circuit Breaker

The device has the facility to provide an additional intertrip signal to the circuit breaker at the remote line end in the event that the local feeder circuit breaker fails. For this, a suitable protection signal transmission link is required (e.g. via communication cable, power line carrier transmission, radio transmission, or optical fibre transmission). With devices using digital transmission via protection interface, the remote commands can be applied (see also Section 2.5). To perform this intertrip, the desired command - usually the trip command which is intended to trip the adjacent breakers - is assigned to a binary output of the device. The contact of this output triggers the transmission device. When using digital signal transmission the command is connected to a remote command via the user-defined logic (CFC).

304

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.18 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF (optional)

End Fault Protection

An end fault is defined here as a fault which has occurred at the end of a line or protected object, between the circuit breaker and the current transformer set. This situation is shown in Figure 2-133. The fault is located - as seen from the current transformers (= measurement location) - on the busbar side, thus, it will not be considered a feeder fault by the feeder protection relay. It can only be detected by either a reverse element of the feeder protection or by a busbar protection. Nevertheless, a trip command given to the feeder circuit breaker cannot clear the fault since the opposite end continues to feed the fault. Thus, the fault current does not stop flowing even though the feeder circuit breaker has properly responded to the trip command.

Figure 2-133

End fault between circuit breaker and current transformers

The end fault protection has the task to recognize this situation and to transmit a trip signal to the remote end(s) of the protected object to clear the fault. For this purpose, the output command 50BF EndFltTrip is available to trigger a signal transmission device (e.g. power line carrier, radio wave, or optical fibre) - if applicable, together with other commands that need to be transferred or (when using digital signal transmission) as command via the protection interface. The end fault is recognized when the current continues flowing although the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts indicate that the breaker is open. An additional criterion is the presence of any breaker failure protection initiate signal. Figure 2-134 illustrates the functional principle. If the breaker failure protection is initiated and current flow is detected (current criteria A>, B>, C> according to Figure 2-122), but no circuit breaker pole is closed (auxiliary contact criterion 1 pole closed), then the timer EndFault Delay is started. At the end of this time an intertrip signal is transmitted to the opposite end(s) of the protected object.

Figure 2-134

Operation scheme of end fault protection

Pole Discrepancy Supervision

The pole discrepancy supervision has the task to detect discrepancies in the position of the three circuit breaker poles. Under steady-state operating conditions, either all three poles of the breaker must be closed, or all three poles must be open. Discrepancy is permitted only for a short time interval during a single-pole automatic reclose cycle.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

305

2 Functions

The scheme functionality is shown in Figure 2-135. The signals which are processed here are the same as those used for the breaker failure protection. The pole discrepancy condition is established when at least one pole is closed ( any pole closed) and at the same time not all three poles are closed ( any pole open). Additionally, the current criteria (from Figure 2-122) are processed. Pole discrepancy can only be detected when current is not flowing through all three poles (<3), i.e. through only one or two poles. When current is flowing through all three poles, all three poles must be closed even if the breaker auxiliary contacts indicate a different status. If pole discrepancy of the breaker poles is detected, this is indicated in each phase by a fault detection signal. This signal identifies the pole which was open before the trip command of the pole discrepancy supervision occurred.

Figure 2-135

Function diagram of pole discrepancy supervision

2.18.2 Setting Notes

General The breaker failure protection and its ancillary functions (end fault protection, pole discrepancy supervision) can only operate if they were configured as Enabled during configuration of the scope of functions (address 139 50BF). The breaker failure protection is switched ON or OFF at address 3901 FCT 50BF Break.. The current threshold 50BF PICKUP (address 3902) should be selected such that the protection will operate with the smallest expected fault current. A setting of 10 % below the minimum fault current for which breaker failure protection must operate is recommended. On the other hand, the value should not be set lower than necessary. Normally, the breaker failure protection evaluates the current flow criterion as well as the position of the breaker auxiliary contact(s). If the auxiliary contact(s) status is not available in the device, this criterion cannot be processed. In this case, set address 3909 Chk BRK CONTACT to NO. Two-element Breaker Failure Protection With two-element operation, the trip command is repeated after a time delay T1 to the local feeder breaker, normally to a different set of trip coils of this breaker. A choice can be made whether this trip repetition shall be single-pole or three-pole if the initial feeder protection trip was single-pole (provided single-pole trip is possible). This choice is made in address 3903 1p-RETRIP (T1). Set this parameter to YES if you wish single-pole trip for the first element, otherwise to NO.

Breaker Failure Protection

306

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.18 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF (optional)

If the breaker does not respond to this trip repetition, the adjacent circuit breakers are tripped after T2 i.e., the circuit breakers of the busbar or of the concerned busbar section and if necessary also the circuit breaker at the remote end unless the fault has been cleared. Separate delay times can be set for single- or three-pole trip repetition to the local feeder circuit breaker after a 1pole trip of the feeder protection 50BF-1 Delay 1p at address 3904, for three-pole trip repetition to the local feeder circuit breaker after 3-pole trip of the feeder protection 50BF-1 Delay 3p (address 3905), for trip of the adjacent circuit breakers (busbar zone and remote end if applicable) 50BF-2 Delay at address 3906. The delay times are set dependant on the maximum operating time of the feeder circuit breaker and the reset time of the current detectors of the breaker failure protection, plus a safety margin which allows for any tolerance of the delay timers. Figure 2136 illustrates the timing of a typical breaker failure scenario. The dropout time for sinusoidal currents is 15 ms. If current transformer saturation is anticipated, the time should be set to 25 ms.

Figure 2-136

Time sequence example for normal clearance of a fault, and with circuit breaker failure, using two-element breaker failure protection

Single-element Breaker Failure Protection

With single-element operation, the adjacent circuit breakers (i.e. the breakers of the busbar zone and, if applicable, the breaker at the remote end) are tripped after a delay time 50BF-2 Delay (address 3906) following initiation, should the fault not have been cleared within this time. The timers 50BF-1 Delay 1p (address 3904) and 50BF-1 Delay 3p (address 3905) are then set to since they are not needed. But you may use the T1-timers for single-element protection if you wish to use the facility of setting different delay times after single-pole trip and three-pole trip of the feeder protection. In this case set 50BF-1 Delay 1p (address 3904) and 50BF-1 Delay 3p (address 3905) separately but address 3903 1p-RETRIP (T1) to NO, to avoid a single-pole trip to the busbar. Set 50BF-2 Delay (address 3906) to or equal to 50BF-1 Delay 3p (address 3905) . Be sure that the correct trip commands are assigned to the desired trip relay(s).

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

307

2 Functions

The delay times are determined from the maximum operating time of the feeder circuit breaker, the reset time of the current detectors of the breaker failure protection, plus a safety margin which allows for any tolerance of the delay timers. Figure 2-137 illustrates the timing of a typical breaker failure scenario. The dropout time for sinusoidal currents is 15 ms. If current transformer saturation is anticipated, the time should be set to 25 ms.

Figure 2-137

Time sequence example for normal clearance of a fault, and with circuit breaker failure, using single-element breaker failure protection

Circuit Breaker not Operational

If the circuit breaker associated with the feeder is not operational (e.g. control voltage failure or air pressure failure), it is apparent that the local breaker cannot clear the fault. If the relay is informed about this disturbance (via the binary input >52 faulty, the adjacent circuit breakers (busbar and remote end if applicable) are tripped after the time T3-BkrDefective (address 3907) which is usually set to 0. Address 3908 Trip BkrDefect. determines to which output the trip command is routed in the event that the breaker is not operational when a feeder protection trip occurs. Select that output which is used to trip the adjacent breakers (busbar trip).

End Fault Protection

The end fault protection can be switched separately ON or OFF in address 3921 End Flt. elem.. An end fault is a fault between the circuit breaker and the current transformer set of the feeder. The end fault protection presumes that the device is informed about the circuit breaker position via breaker auxiliary contacts connected to binary inputs. If, during an end fault, the circuit breaker is tripped by a reverse element of the feeder protection or by the busbar protection (the fault is a busbar fault as determined from the location of the current transformers), the fault current will continue to flow, because the fault is fed from the remote end of the feeder circuit. The time EndFault Delay (address 3922) is started when, during the time of pickup condition of the feeder protection, the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts indicate open poles and, at the same time, current flow is still detected (address 3902). The trip command of the end fault protection is intended for the transmission of an intertrip signal to the remote end circuit breaker. Thus, the delay time must be set such that it can bridge out short transient apparent stub fault conditions which may occur during switching of the breaker.

308

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.18 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF (optional)

Pole Discrepancy Supervision

The pole discrepancy supervision can be switched ON or OFF independently at address 3931 PoleDiscrepancy. It is only useful if the breaker poles can be operated individually. It avoids that only one or two poles of the local breaker are open during steady state. It has to be provided that either the auxiliary contacts of each pole or the series connection of the NO auxiliary contacts and the series connection of the NC auxiliary contacts are connected to the device's binary inputs. If these conditions are not fulfilled, switch address 3931 OFF. The delay time T-PoleDiscrep. (address 3932) determines how long a breaker pole discrepancy condition of the feeder circuit breaker, i.e. only one or two poles open, may be present before the pole discrepancy supervision issues a three-pole trip command. This time must clearly be longer than the duration of a single-pole automatic reclose cycle. The time should be less than the permissible duration of an unbalanced load condition which is caused by the unsymmetrical position of the circuit breaker poles. Conventional values are 2 s to 5 s.

2.18.3 Settings
The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding secondary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. 3901 3902 Parameter FCT 50BF Break. 50BF PICKUP 1A 5A 3903 3904 3905 3906 3907 3908 1p-RETRIP (T1) 50BF-1 Delay 1p 50BF-1 Delay 3p 50BF-2 Delay T3-BkrDefective Trip BkrDefect. C ON OFF 0.05 .. 20.00 A 0.25 .. 100.00 A NO YES 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; NO with Local trip with Bus trip w/Local&Bustrip NO YES ON OFF 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; ON OFF 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; Setting Options Default Setting ON 0.10 A 0.50 A YES 0.00 sec 0.00 sec 0.15 sec 0.00 sec NO Comments 50BF Breaker Failure Protection 50BF Pickup current threshold 1pole retrip for local trip Delay after 1pole start for local trip Delay after 3pole start for local trip Delay of 2nd element for busbar trip Delay for start with defective bkr. Trip output selection with defective bkr

3909 3921 3922 3931 3932

Chk BRK CONTACT End Flt. elem. EndFault Delay PoleDiscrepancy T-PoleDiscrep.

YES OFF 2.00 sec OFF 2.00 sec

Check Breaker contacts End fault element is Trip delay of end fault element Pole Discrepancy supervision Trip delay with pole discrepancy

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

309

2 Functions

2.18.4 Information List

No. 1401 1402 1403 1415 1432 1435 1436 1437 1439 1440 1451 1452 1453 1461 1472 1473 1474 1476 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 >50BF on >50BF off >BLOCK 50BF >50BF Start 3p >50BF release >50BF Start A >50BF Start B >50BF Start C >50BF STARTw/oI BkrFailON/offBI 50BF OFF 50BF BLOCK 50BF ACTIVE 50BF Start 50BF LocTrip1pA 50BF LocTrip1pB 50BF LocTrip1pC 50BF LocTripABC 50BF TripCBdef. 50BF BusTrip 50BF EndFltTrip 50BF CBdiscr PU 50BF CBdiscr A 50BF CBdiscr B 50BF CBdiscr C 50BF CBdiscTrip Information Type of Information SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP IntSP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT Comments >50BF: Switch on breaker fail prot. >50BF: Switch off breaker fail prot. >BLOCK 50BF >50BF: External start 3pole >50BF: External release >50BF: External start A >50BF: External start B >50BF: External start C >50BF: External start 3p (w/o current) Breaker failure prot. ON/OFF via BI 50BF is switched OFF 50BF is BLOCKED 50BF is ACTIVE 50BF Breaker failure protection started 50BF Local trip - only phase A 50BF Local trip - only phase B 50BF Local trip - only phase C 50BF Local trip - ABC 50BF Trip in case of defective CB 50BF Busbar trip 50BF Trip End fault element 50BF Pole discrepancy pickup 50BF Pole discrepancy pickup A 50BF Pole discrepancy pickup B 50BF Pole discrepancy pickup C 50BF Pole discrepancy Trip

310

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.19 Monitoring Function

2.19

Monitoring Function
The device incorporates extensive monitoring functions of both the device hardware and software; the measured values are also continually checked to ensure their plausibility; the current and voltage transformer secondary circuits are thereby substantially covered by the monitoring function. It is also possible to implement trip circuit monitoring, using appropriate binary inputs as available.

2.19.1 Measurement Supervision

2.19.1.1 Hardware Monitoring The device is monitored from the measuring inputs up to the command relays. Monitoring checks the hardware for malfunctions and disallowed conditions. Auxiliary and Reference Voltages The processor voltage of 5 V is monitored by the hardware, and if the voltage decreases below the minimum value, the processor is no longer operative. If it falls below the minimum value, the device will be put out of service. When the normal voltage returns, the processor system is restarted. Failure of or switching off the supply voltage puts the device out of operation and a message is immediately generated by a normally closed contact. Brief voltage interruptions of up to 50 ms do not disturb the operational readiness of the device (see for the Technical Data). The processor monitors the offset and reference voltage of the ADC (analog-digital converter). The protection is suspended if the voltages deviate outside an allowable range, and lengthy deviations are reported. Battery The buffer battery, which ensures operation of the internal clock and storage of counters and messages if the auxiliary voltage fails, is periodically checked for charge status. On its undershooting a minimum admissible voltage, the indication Fail Battery (No. 177) is issued. If the device is not fed with auxiliary voltage for more than 1 to 2 days, the internal clock is switched off automatically, i.e. the time is not registered any more. The data of message buffers and fault record buffers however are kept stored. Memory Modules The working memory (RAM) is tested when the system starts up. If a malfunction occurs then, the starting sequence is interrupted, the error LED and LED1 flash while the other LEDs blink at same intervals. During operation, the memory is checked using its checksum. A checksum of the program memory (EPROM) is cyclically generated and compared with the stored program checksum. A checksum for the parameter memory (FLASH-EPROM) is cyclically generated and compared with the checksum which is computed after each change of the stored parameters. If a malfunction occurs, the processor system is restarted.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

311

2 Functions

Scanning Frequency

The sampling frequency and the synchronism of the analog-digital converters is continuously monitored. If any deviations cannot be removed by remedied synchronization, then the processor system is restarted. Up to four input currents are measured by the device. If the three phase currents and the ground fault current from the current transformer neutral or a separated ground current transformer of the line to be protected are connected to the device, their digitised sum must be zero. Faults in the current circuit are recognized if IF = |IA + IB + IC + kIIN| > I THRESHOLDIN + I FACTOR | I | Factor kI (address I4/Iph CT) takes into account a possible different ratio of a separate INtransformer (e.g. cable core balance current transformer). I THRESHOLD and I FACTOR are setting parameters. The component I FACTOR | I | takes into account the allowable current proportional ratio errors of the input transducers which are particularly prevalent during large fault currents (Figure 2-138). The dropout ratio is about 97 %. | I | is the sum of all currents: | I | = |IA| + |IB| + |IC| + |kIIN| This malfunction is signaled as Failure I (No. 162). Note Current sum monitoring can operate properly only when the residual current of the protected line is fed to the fourth current input (I4) of the relay.

Measured Value Acquisition Currents

Figure 2-138

Current sum monitoring

Measured Value Acquisition Voltages

Four measuring inputs are available in the voltage path: three for phaseground voltages as well as one input for the displacement voltage (voltage of a broken delta connection) or a busbar voltage. If the displacement voltage is connected to the device, the sum of the three digitized phase voltages must equal three times the zero sequence voltage. Errors in the voltage transformer circuits are detected when VF = |VA + VB + VC + kVVGN| > 25 V.

312

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.19 Monitoring Function

The factor kV allows for a difference of the transformation ratio between the displacement voltage input and the phase voltage inputs (parameter Vph / Vdelta). The dropout ratio is about 97%. This malfunction is signaled as Fail V Ph-G (No. 165). Note Voltage sum monitoring can operate properly only when an externally formed broken delta voltage is connected to the residual voltage input of the relay.

2.19.1.2 Software Monitoring Watchdog For continuous monitoring of the program sequences, a time monitor is provided in the hardware (watchdog for hardware) that expires upon failure of the processor or an internal program, and causes a reset of the processor system with complete restart. An additional software watchdog ensures that malfunctions during the processing of programs are discovered. This also initiates a restart of the processor system. To the extent such a malfunction is not cleared by the restart, an additional restart attempt is begun. Following three failed restarts within 30 s the protection takes itself out of service and the red LED ERROR is illuminated. The device ready relay resets and alarms the device failure state with its normally closed contact (life contact). 2.19.1.3 External Transformer Circuits Interruptions or faults in the secondary circuits of the current transformers or voltage transformers, as well as faults in the connections (important for commissioning!), are detected and reported by the device. The measured quantities are periodically checked in the background for this purpose, as long as no system fault is present. Current Symmetry During normal system operation (i.e. the absence of a fault), symmetry among the input currents is expected. The symmetry is monitored in the device with a magnitude comparison. The smallest phase current is compared to the largest phase current. Asymmetry is recognized if: | Imin | / | Imax | < BAL. FACTOR I as long as Imax / IN > BALANCE I LIMIT / IN Thereby Imax is the largest of the three phase currents and Imin the smallest. The symmetry factor BAL. FACTOR I represents the allowable asymmetry of the phase currents while the limit value BALANCE I LIMIT is the lower limit of the operating range of this monitoring (see Figure 2-139). Both parameters can be set. The dropout ratio is about 97%. After a settable time (5-100 s) this malfunction is signaled as Fail I balance (No. 163).

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

313

2 Functions

Figure 2-139

Current symmetry monitoring

Broken Conductor

A broken conductor of the protected line or in the current transformer secondary circuit can be detected, if the minimum current PoleOpenCurrent flows via the feeder. If the smallest phase currents is below this threshold while the other phase currents are above it, an interruption of a conductor may be assumed. If asymmetric current conditions are also present (see margin heading Current Symmetry), the device issues the indication Fail Conductor (No. 195). During normal system operation (i.e. the absence of a fault), symmetry among the input voltages is expected. The symmetry is monitored in the device with a magnitude comparison. The smallest phase-to-phase voltage is compared to the largest. Asymmetry is recognized if: | Vmin | / | Vmax | < BAL. FACTOR V as long as | Vmax | > BALANCE V-LIMIT Vmax is the highest, Vmin the lowest of the three phase-to-phase voltages. The symmetry factor BAL. FACTOR V is the measure for the asymmetry of the conductor voltages; the limit value BALANCE V-LIMIT is the lower limit of the operating range of this monitoring (see Figure 2-140). Both settings are adjustable. The dropout ratio is about 97%. After a settable time, this malfunction is signaled as Fail V balance (No. 167).

Voltage Symmetry

314

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.19 Monitoring Function

Figure 2-140

Voltage symmetry monitoring

Voltage Phase Sequence

The verification of the faulted phases and the phase preference, direction measurement and polarization with quadrature voltages usually demand clockwise rotation of the measured values. Phase rotation of measured voltages is checked by verifying the phase sequences of the voltages VA beforeVB beforeVC This check takes place if each measured voltage has a minimum magnitude of |VA|, |VB|, |VC| > 40 V/3 In case of negative phase rotation, the indication Fail Ph. Seq. (No. 171) is output. If the system has a negative phase rotation, this must have been set during the configuration of the power system data (Subsection 2.1.3.1, address 235). In such event, the phase rotation monitoring applies to the corresponding opposite phase sequence.

Asymmetrical Measuring Voltage Failure "Fuse Failure Monitor"

In the event of measured voltage failure due to a short circuit or broken conductor in the voltage transformer secondary circuit certain measuring loops may mistakenly see a voltage of zero, which due to the load current may result in an unwanted pick-up or even trip. If fuses are used instead of a secondary miniature circuit breaker (VT mcb) with connected auxiliary contacts, then the fuse failure monitoring can detect problems in the voltage transformer secondary circuit. Of course, the miniature circuit breaker and the fuse failure monitor can be used at the same time. The asymmetrical measured voltage failure is characterized by its voltage asymmetrical with simultaneous current symmetry. Figure 2-141 depicts the logic diagram of the fuse failure monitor during asymmetrical failure of the measured voltage. If there is substantial voltage asymmetry of the measured values, without asymmetry of the currents being registered at the same time, this indicates the presence of an asymmetrical failure in the voltage transformer secondary circuit.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

315

2 Functions

The asymmetry of the voltage is detected by the fact that either the zero sequence voltage or the negative sequence voltage exceed a settable value FFM V>(min). The current is assumed to be sufficiently symmetrical if both the zero sequence as well as the negative sequence current are below the settable threshold FFM I< (max). In non-grounded systems, the zero-sequence system quantities are no reliable criterion since a considerable zero-sequence voltage occurs also in case of a simple ground fault where a significant zero sequence current does not necessarily flow. Therefore, the zero-sequence voltage is not evaluated in such networks but only the negative-sequence voltage (parameter SystemStarpoint). As soon as this state is recognized, the distance protection and all other functions that operate on the basis of undervoltage (e.g. also weak infeed tripping) are blocked. The immediate blocking demands current flow in at least one of the phases. The distance protection may be switched over to definite time overcurrent emergency operation if the overcurrent protection was configured accordingly (refer to Section 2.11). The fast blocking may not occur as long as one phase is without voltage due to a single-pole dead time condition, as the non-symmetry of the measured values arising in this state is due to the switching state of the line and not due to a failure in the secondary circuits. Accordingly, the fast blocking is disabled when the line is tripped single-pole (internal information 1pole open in the logic diagram). If a zero sequence or negative sequence current is detected within approximately 10 s after recognition of this criterion, the protection assumes a fault and removes the blocking by the fuse failure monitor for the duration of the fault. If on the other hand the voltage failure criterion is present for longer than approx. 10 s, the blocking is permanently activated (latching of the voltage criterion after 10 s). Only 10 s after the voltage criterion has been removed by correction of the secondary circuit failure, will the blocking automatically reset, thereby releasing the blocked protection functions again.

316

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.19 Monitoring Function

Figure 2-141

Logic diagram of the Fuse-Failure-Monitor with zero and negative sequence system

Three-Phase Measuring Voltage Failure "Fuse Failure Monitor"

A three-phase failure of the secondary measured voltage can be distinguished from an actual system fault by the fact that the currents have no significant change in the event of a failure in the secondary measured voltage. For this reason, the sampled current values are routed to a buffer, so that the difference between the present and stored current values can be analyzed to recognize the magnitude of the current differential (current differential criterion). A three-pole voltage failure is detected if all three phaseground voltages are smaller than the threshold FFM V<max (3ph), the current differential in all three phases is smaller than the threshold FFM Idiff (3ph), and all three phase current amplitudes are greater than the minimum current 50-B2 PICKUP for impedance measurement by the distance protection. If no stored current values are present (yet), the current magnitude criterion is resorted to. A three-pole system voltage failure is detected in this case if all three phaseground voltages are smaller than the threshold FFM V<max (3ph), all three phase current amplitudes are smaller than the minimum current 50-B2 PICKUP for impedance measurement by the distance protection, and all three phase current amplitudes are greater than a fixed set noise threshold (40 mA).

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

317

2 Functions

If such a voltage failure is recognized, the distance protection and all other functions that operate on the basis of undervoltage (e.g. also weak infeed tripping) are blocked until the voltage failure is removed; thereafter the blocking is automatically removed. Definite time overcurrent emergency operation is possible during the voltage failure if the overcurrent protection was configured accordingly (refer to Section 2.11). Additional Measured Voltage Failure Monitoring If no measuring voltage is available after power-on of the device (e.g. because the voltage transformers are not connected), the absence of the voltage can be detected and reported by an additional monitoring function. Where circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are used, they should be used for monitoring as well. Figure 2-142 shows the logic diagram of the measured voltage failure monitoring. A failure of the measured voltage is detected if the following conditions are met at the same time: all three phase-to-ground voltages are smaller than FFM V<max (3ph), at least one phase current is larger than PoleOpenCurrent or at least one breaker pole is closed (can be set), no protection function has picked up, this condition persists for a settable time T V-Supervision (default setting: 3 s). This time T V-Supervision is required to prevent that a voltage failure is detected before the protection picks up. If a failure is detected by these criteria, the annunciation 168 Fail V absent is output, and the device switches to emergency operation (see Section 2.11).

Figure 2-142

Logic diagram of the additional measured voltage failure monitoring

318

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.19 Monitoring Function

2.19.1.4 Malfunction Responses Depending on the type of malfunction detected, an indication is sent, a restart of the processor system initiated, or the device is taken out of service. After three unsuccessful restart attempts, the device is also taken out of service. The operational readiness NC contact (life contact) operates to indicate the device is malfunctioning. The red ERROR LED on the device front lights up, provided that there is an internal auxiliary voltage, and the green RUN LED goes off. If the internal auxiliary voltage fails, then all LEDs are dark. Table 2-9 shows a summary of the monitoring functions and the malfunction responses of the relay.
Table 2-9 Monitoring Auxiliary Supply Voltage Loss Summary of Malfunction Responses by the Protection Relay Malfunction Response Alarm (No.) Output DOK2) drops out DOK2) drops out

Possible Causes

External (aux. voltage) inter- Device out of operation All LEDs dark nal (converter) or alarm Error 5V (144)

Measured Value Acqui- Internal (converter or refer- Protection out of opera- LED ERROR sition ence voltage) tion, alarm Error A/D-conv. (181) Battery Hardware Watchdog Software Watchdog ROM Internal (battery) Internal (processor failure) Internal (RAM) Message
1)

Fail Battery (177) LED ERROR

as allocated DOK2) drops out DOK2) drops out DOK2) drops out

Device not in operation LED ERROR Restart attempt 1)), LED flashes Restart abort Device not in operation Restart attempt 1) Restart attempt
1)

Internal (program sequence) Restart attempt

RAM Settings memory Scanning frequency 1 A/5 A setting

Internal (EPROM) internal (Flash-EPROM or RAM) Internal (clock generator) 1/5 A jumper wrong

LED ERROR LED ERROR LED ERROR

DOK2) drops out DOK2) drops out DOK2) drops out DOK2) drops out

Restart attempt 1)

Messages: Error1A/5Awrong Protection out of opera- (192) Error A/Dtion conv. (181) LED ERROR Alarm adjustm. (193)

Calibration data

Internal (EEPROM or RAM) Indication: Using default values

As allocated DOK2) drops out

Ground current trans- I/O module does not correformer sensitive/insen- spond to the order number sitive (MLFB) of the device. Modules Module does not comply with ordering number (MLFB).

Messages: Error neutralCT Protection out of opera- (194)Error A/Dtion conv. (181) LED ERROR Messages: Error Board 1...7 Protection out of opera- (No. 183 ... 189) tion and if applicable Error A/D-conv.. (181) Message Message Message Failure I (162)

DOK2) drops out

Current sum Current symmetry Broken Conductor Voltage sum

Internal (measured value acquisition) External (power system or current transformer) External (power system or current transformer)

As allocated

Fail I balance (163) as allocated Fail Conductor (195) Fail V Ph-G (165) As allocated As allocated

internal (measured value ac- Message quisition)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

319

2 Functions

Monitoring Voltage Symmetry Voltage phase sequence

Possible Causes External (power system or voltage transformer) External (power system or connection)

Malfunction Response Message Message

Alarm (No.) Fail V balance (167)

Output As allocated

Fail Ph. Seq. (171) as allocated as allocated

Measuring voltage fail- External (power system or ure, three-phase Fuse connection) Failure Monitor

Message VT FuseFail>10s Distance protection is (169) blocked Undervoltage protection is blocked

Voltage failure, one/two-phase Fuse Failure Monitor

External (voltage transform- Message VT FuseFail>10s ers) Distance protection is (169) blocked Undervoltage protection is blocked external (power system or connection)

As allocated

Voltage failure, threephase

Message Fail V absent (168) As allocated Distance protection is blocked Undervoltage protection is blocked Message 74TC Trip cir. (6865) as allocated

Trip Circuit Monitoring

External (trip circuit or control voltage)

1) 2)

after three unsuccessful restarts, the device is taken out of service. DOK = Device OK = NC contact of the operational readiness relay = life contact

2.19.1.5 Setting Notes General The sensitivity of measured value monitor can be modified. Default values are set at the factory, which are sufficient in most cases. If especially high operating asymmetry in the currents and/or voltages is to be expected for the application, or if it becomes apparent during operation that certain monitoring functions activate sporadically, then the setting should be less sensitive. The measurement supervision can be switched ON or OFF in address 2901 MEASURE. SUPERV.

320

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.19 Monitoring Function

2.19.1.6 Settings Addresses which have an appended "A" can only be changed with DIGSI, under "Display Additional Settings". The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding secondary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. 2901 2902A 2903A 2904A Parameter MEASURE. SUPERV BALANCE V-LIMIT BAL. FACTOR V BALANCE I LIMIT 1A 5A 2905A 2906A BAL. FACTOR I I THRESHOLD 1A 5A 2907A 2908A 2909A 2910 2911A 2912A I FACTOR T BAL. V LIMIT T BAL. I LIMIT FUSE FAIL MON. FFM V>(min) FFM I< (max) 1A 5A 2913A 2914A FFM V<max (3ph) FFM Idiff (3ph) 1A 5A 2915 V-Supervision C ON OFF 10 .. 100 V 0.58 .. 0.95 0.10 .. 1.00 A 0.50 .. 5.00 A 0.10 .. 0.95 0.05 .. 2.00 A 0.25 .. 10.00 A 0.00 .. 0.95 5 .. 100 sec 5 .. 100 sec ON OFF 10 .. 100 V 0.10 .. 1.00 A 0.50 .. 5.00 A 2 .. 100 V 0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.25 .. 5.00 A w/ CURR.SUP w/ I> & 52a OFF 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0 .. 30 ms Setting Options Default Setting ON 50 V 0.75 0.50 A 2.50 A 0.50 0.10 A 0.50 A 0.10 5 sec 5 sec ON 30 V 0.10 A 0.50 A 5V 0.10 A 0.50 A w/ CURR.SUP Comments Measurement Supervision Voltage Threshold for Balance Monitoring Balance Factor for Voltage Monitor Current Threshold for Balance Monitoring Balance Factor for Current Monitor Summated Current Monitoring Threshold Summated Current Monitoring Factor T Balance Factor for Voltage Monitor T Current Balance Monitor Fuse Failure Monitor Minimum Voltage Threshold V> Maximum Current Threshold I< Maximum Voltage Threshold V< (3phase) Differential Current Threshold (3phase) Voltage Failure Supervision Delay Voltage Failure Supervision VT mcb operating time

2916A 2921

T V-Supervision T mcb

3.00 sec 0 ms

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

321

2 Functions

2.19.1.7 Information List

No. 161 162 163 164 165 167 168 169 170 171 195 196 197 Information Fail I Superv. Failure I Fail I balance Fail V Superv. Fail V Ph-G Fail V balance Fail V absent VT FuseFail>10s VT FuseFail Fail Ph. Seq. Fail Conductor Fuse Fail M.OFF MeasSup OFF Type of Information OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT Comments Failure: General Current Supervision Failure: Current Summation Failure: Current Balance Failure: General Voltage Supervision Failure: Voltage summation Phase-Ground Failure: Voltage Balance Failure: Voltage absent VT Fuse Failure (alarm >10s) VT Fuse Failure (alarm instantaneous) Failure: Phase Sequence Failure: Broken Conductor Fuse Fail Monitor is switched OFF Measurement Supervision is switched OFF

2.19.2 Trip Circuit Supervision 74TC

2.19.2.1 Method of Operation Trip Circuit Monitoring The 7SA522 incorporates an integrated trip circuit supervision function. Depending on the number of available binary inputs (not connected to a common potential), monitoring with one or two binary inputs can be selected. If the routing of the required binary inputs does not comply with the selected monitoring mode, an alarm is issued (TripC ProgFAIL) with identification of the non-compliant circuit. When using two binary inputs, malfunctions in the trip circuit can be detected under all circuit breaker conditions. When only one binary input is used, malfunctions in the circuit breaker itself cannot be detected. If single-pole tripping is possible, a separate trip circuit supervision can be implemented for each circuit breaker pole provided the required binary inputs are available. When using two binary inputs, these are connected according to Figure 2-143, parallel to the associated trip contact on one side, and parallel to the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts on the other. A precondition for the use of the trip circuit supervision is that the control voltage for the circuit breaker is higher than the total of the minimum voltages drops at the two binary inputs (VCtrl > 2VBImin). Since at least 19 V are needed at each binary input, the supervision can only be used with a system control voltage higher than 38 V.

Monitoring with Two Binary Inputs

322

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.19 Monitoring Function

Figure 2-143

Principle of the trip circuit monitoring with two binary inputs

Monitoring with two binary inputs does not only detect interruptions in the trip circuit and loss of control voltage, it also monitors the response of the circuit breaker using the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts. Depending on the conditions of the trip contact and the circuit breaker, the binary inputs are activated (logical condition H in the following table), or faulted (logical condition L). A state in which both binary inputs are not activated (L) is only possible in intact trip circuits for a short transition period (trip relay contact closed but circuit breaker not yet open). A continuous state of this condition is only possible when the trip circuit has been interrupted, a fault exists in the trip circuit, a loss of battery voltage occurs, or malfunctions occur with the circuit breaker mechanism. Therefore, it is used as monitoring criterion.
Table 2-10 Condition Table for Binary Inputs, Depending on RTC and CB Position Circuit breaker ON OFF ON OFF AuxCont 1 Closed Open Closed Open AuxCont 2 Open Closed Open Closed BI 1 BI 2 H H L L L H L H

No Trip contact . 1 2 3 4 Open Open Closed Closed

The conditions of the two binary inputs are scanned periodically. A query takes place about every 500 ms. If three consecutive conditional checks detect an abnormality, an annunciation is reported (see Figure 2-144). The repeated measurements help to determine the delay of the alarm message and to avoid that an alarm is output during short-time transition periods. After the fault in the trip circuit is removed, the alarm is reset automatically after the same time.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

323

2 Functions

Figure 2-144

Logic diagram of the trip circuit monitoring with two binary inputs

Monitoring with One Binary Input

The binary input is connected in parallel to the respective command relay contact of the protection device according to Figure 2-145. The circuit breaker auxiliary contact is bridged with a high-ohm substitute resistor R. The control voltage for the circuit breaker should be at least twice as high as the minimum voltage drop at the binary input (VCtrl > 2VBImin). Since at least 19 V are necessary at the binary input, this supervision can be used with a system control voltage higher than 38 V. A calculation example for the resistance shunt R is shown in the configuration notes in Section Mounting and Connections, margin Trip Circuit Supervision.

Figure 2-145

Principle of the trip circuit monitoring with one binary input

During normal operation, the binary input is activated (logical condition H) when the trip contact is open and the trip circuit is intact, because the monitoring circuit is closed by either the circuit breaker auxiliary contact (if the circuit breaker is closed) or through the bypass resistor R. Only as long as the trip contact is closed, the binary input is faulted and thereby deactivated (logical condition L). If the binary input is permanently deactivated during operation, an interruption in the trip circuit or a failure of the (trip) control voltage can be assumed. The trip circuit monitor does not operate during system faults. A momentary closed tripping contact does not lead to a failure message. If however other trip relay contacts from different devices are connected in parallel in the trip circuit, the failure alarm must

324

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.19 Monitoring Function

be delayed by Alarm Delay (refer also to Figure 2-146). After the fault in the trip circuit is removed, the alarm is reset automatically after the same time.

Figure 2-146

Logic diagram for trip circuit monitoring with one binary input

2.19.2.2 Setting Notes General The number of circuits to be monitored was set during the configuration in address 140 74 Trip Ct Supv (Section 2.1.1.2). If the trip circuit supervision is not used at all, the setting Disabled must be applied there. The trip circuit supervision can be switched ON or OFF in address 4001 FCT 74TC. The number of binary inputs that shall be used in each of the monitored circuits is set in address 4002 No. of BI. If routing of the required binary inputs does not comply with the selected supervision mode, the alarm TripCx ProgFAIL... is given (with identification of the non-compliant circuit). Monitoring with One Binary Input The alarm for monitoring with two binary inputs is always delayed by approx. 1 s to 2 s, whereas the delay time of the alarm for monitoring with one binary input can be set in address 4003 Alarm Delay. 1s to 2s are sufficient if only the 7SA522 device is connected to the trip circuits as the trip circuit supervision does not operate during a system fault. If, however, trip contacts from other devices are connected in parallel in the trip circuit, the alarm must be delayed such that the longest trip command duration can be reliably bridged.

2.19.2.3 Settings
Addr. 4001 4002 4003 Parameter FCT 74TC No. of BI Alarm Delay ON OFF 1 .. 2 1 .. 30 sec Setting Options Default Setting OFF 2 2 sec Comments 74TC TRIP Circuit Supervision Number of Binary Inputs per trip circuit Delay Time for alarm

2.19.2.4 Information List

No. 6854 6855 6856 6857 Information >74TC-1 TripRel >74TC-1 Bkr.Rel >74TC-2 TripRel >74TC-2 Bkr.Rel Type of Information SP SP SP SP Comments >74TC-1 Trip circuit superv.:Trip Relay >74TC-1 Trip circuit superv.:Breaker Rel >74TC-2 Trip circuit superv.:Trip Relay >74TC-2 Trip circuit superv.:Breaker Rel

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

325

2 Functions

No. 6858 6859 6861 6865 6866 6867 6868

Information >74TC-3 TripRel >74TC-3 Bkr.Rel 74TC OFF 74TC Trip cir. 74TC-1 ProgFAIL 74TC-2 ProgFAIL 74TC-3 ProgFAIL

Type of Information SP SP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

Comments >74TC-3 Trip circuit superv.:Trip Relay >74TC-3 Trip circuit superv.:Breaker Rel 74TC Trip circuit supervision OFF 74TC Failure Trip Circuit 74TC-1 blocked. Binary input is not set 74TC-2 blocked. Binary input is not set 74TC-3 blocked. Binary input is not set

326

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.20 Function Control and Circuit Breaker Test

2.20

Function Control and Circuit Breaker Test

2.20.1 Function Control

The function control is the control centre of the device. It coordinates the sequence of the protection and ancillary functions, processes their decisions and the information coming from the power system. Applications Line energization recognition, Processing of the circuit breaker position, Open Pole Detector, Fault detection logic Tripping logic. 2.20.1.1 Line Energization Recognition During energization of the protected object, several measures may be required or desirable. Following manual closing onto a fault, immediate trip of the circuit breaker is usually required. In the distance protection for example, this is implemented by activation of the overreaching zone Z1B and the switch on to fault function for a short period following manual closure. In addition at least one element of each fault protection function can be selected to trip without time delay following manual closure as described in the corresponding sections. Also see Subsection 2.1.5.1 at margin heading Circuit Breaker Status. The manual closing command must be indicated to the device via a binary input. In order to be independent of the duration that the switch is closed, the command is set to a defined length in the device (adjustable with the address 1150 SI Time Man.Cl). Figure 2-147 shows the logic diagram.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

327

2 Functions

Figure 2-147

Logic diagram of the manual closing procedure

Reclosure via the integrated control functions such as - on-site control, control via DIGSI , control via serial interface - can have the same effect as manual reclosure, see parameter 1152. If the device has an integrated automatic reclosure, the integrated manual closure logic of the 7SA522 automatically distinguishes between an external control command via the binary input and an automatic reclosure by the internal automatic reclosure so that the binary input >Manual Close can be connected directly to the control circuit of the close coil of the circuit breaker (Figure 2-148). Each reclosure that is not initiated by the internal automatic reclosure function is interpreted as a manual reclosure, even it has been initiated by a control command from the device.

Figure 2-148

Manual closure with internal automatic reclosure

328

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.20 Function Control and Circuit Breaker Test

If, however, external close commands which should not activate the manual close function are possible (e.g. external reclosure device), the binary input >Manual Close must be triggered by a separate contact at the control discrepancy switch (Figure 2-149). If in that latter case a manual close command can also be given by means of an internal control command from the device, such a command must be combined with the manual CLOSE function via parameter 1152 Man.Clos. Imp. (Figure 2-147).

Figure 2-149

Manual closing with external automatic reclosure device

Besides the manual CLOSE detection the device records any energization of the line via the integrated line energization detection. This function processes a change-ofstate of the measured quantities as well as the position of the breaker auxiliary contacts. The present status of the circuit breaker is detected, as described in the following Section at Detection of the Circuit Breaker Position. The criteria for the line energization detection change according to the local conditions of the measuring points and the setting of the parameter address 1134 Line Closure (see Section 2.1.5 at margin heading Circuit Breaker Status). The phase-phase currents and the phase-ground voltages are available as measuring quantities. A flowing current excludes that the circuit breaker is open (exception: a fault between current transformer and circuit breaker). If the circuit breaker is closed, it may however still occur that no current is flowing. The voltages can only be used as a criterion for the de-energized line if the voltage transformers are installed on the feeder side. Therefore, the device only evaluates those measuring quantities that provide information on the status of the line according to address 1134. But a change-of-state, such as a voltage jump from zero to a considerable value (address 1131 PoleOpenVoltage) or the occurrence of a considerable current (address 1130 PoleOpenCurrent) without a line voltage appearing at the same time, can be a reliable indicator for line energization as such changes can neither occur during normal operation nor in case of a fault. The position of the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breakers indicate directly the position of the circuit breaker. If the circuit breaker is controlled single-pole, the criterion for energization is if at least one contact changes from open to closed. The detected energization is signalled through the message Line closure (No. 590). In order to be independent of the duration that the switch is closed, the signal is set to a defined length in the device (adjustable with the address 1132 SI Time all Cl.). Figure 2-150 shows the logic diagram.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

329

2 Functions

Figure 2-150

Generation of the energization signal

The line energization detection enables the distance protection, ground fault protection, time-overcurrent protection and high-current switch onto fault protection to trip without delay after energization of their line was detected. Depending on the configuration of the distance protection, an undelayed trip command can be generated after energization for each pickup or for pickup in zone Z1B. The elements of the ground fault protection and of the time-overcurrent protection together generate an undelayed TRIP command if this was provided for in the configuration. The switch onto fault protection is released phase-selectively and threepole in case of manual closure after energization detection. In order to generate as quickly as possible a trip command after an energization, the fast switch-on-to-fault protection is released selectively for each phase already when the line is open. In order to avoid that an energization is detected mistakenly, the state line open, which precedes any energization, must apply for at least 250 ms. 2.20.1.2 Detection of the Circuit Breaker Position For Protection Purposes Information regarding the circuit breaker position is required by various protection and supplementary functions to ensure their optimal functionality. This is for example of assistance for The echo function in conjunction with the distance protection with pilot protection (refer to Section 2.6), The echo function in conjunction with directional ground fault comparison scheme (refer to Section 2.8), Weak infeed tripping (refer to Section 2.9.1), The high-current instantaneous tripping (refer to Section 2.12), The circuit breaker failure protection (refer to Section 2.18), Verification of the dropout condition for the trip command (see margin heading Terminating the Trip Signal).

330

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.20 Function Control and Circuit Breaker Test

A circuit breaker position logic is incorporated in the device (Figure 2-151). Depending on the type of auxiliary contact(s) provided by the circuit breaker and the method in which these are connected to the device, there are several alternatives of implementing this logic. In most cases it is sufficient to furnish the status of the circuit breaker with its auxiliary contacts via a binary input to the device. This always applies if the circuit breaker is only switched three-pole. Then the NO auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker is connected to a binary input which must be configured to the input function >52a 3p Closed (No. 379). The other inputs are then not used and the logic is restricted in principle to simply passing of this input information on. If the circuit breaker poles can be switched individually, and only a parallel connection of the NO individual pole auxiliary contacts is available, the relevant binary input (BI) is allocated to the function >52b 3p Open (No. 380). The remaining inputs are again not used in this case. If the circuit breaker poles can be switched individually, and the individual auxiliary contacts are available, an individual binary input should be used for each auxiliary contact if this is possible and if the device can and should trip single-pole. With this configuration, the device can process the maximum amount of information. Three binary inputs are used for this purpose: >52-a A (No. 351) for the auxiliary contact of pole A, >52-a B (No. 352) for the auxiliary contact of pole B, >52-a C (No. 353) for the auxiliary contact of pole C, The inputs No. 379 and No. 380 are not used in this case. If the circuit breaker can be switched individually, two binary inputs are sufficient if both the parallel as well as series connection of the auxiliary contacts of the three poles are available. In this case, the parallel connection of the auxiliary contacts is routed to the input function >52a 3p Closed (No. 379) and the series connection is routed to the input function >52b 3p Open (No. 380). Please note that Figure 2-151 shows the complete logic for all connection alternatives. For each particular application, only a portion of the inputs is used as described above. The eight output signals of the circuit breaker position logic can be processed by the individual protection and supplementary functions. The output signals are blocked if the signals transmitted from the circuit breaker are not plausible: for example, the circuit breaker cannot be open and closed at the same time. Furthermore, no current can flow over an open breaker contact. The evaluation of the measuring quantities is according to the local conditions of the measuring points (see Subsection 2.1.5.1 at margin heading Circuit Breaker Status). The phase currents are available as measuring quantities. A flowing current excludes that the circuit breaker is open (exception: a fault between current transformer and circuit breaker). If the circuit breaker is closed, it may however still occur that no current is flowing. The decisive setting for the evaluation of the measuring quantities is PoleOpenCurrent (address 1130) for the presence of the currents.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

331

2 Functions

Figure 2-151

Circuit breaker position logic

For Automatic Reclosure and Circuit Breaker Test

Separate binary inputs comprising information on the position of the circuit breaker are available for the automatic reclosure and the circuit breaker test. This is important for The plausibility check before automatic reclosure (refer to Section 2.13), The trip circuit check with the help of the TRIPCLOSEtest cycle (cf. Subsection 2.20.2). When using 11/2 or 2 circuit breakers in each feeder, the automatic reclosure function and the circuit breaker test are referred to one circuit breaker. The feedback information of this circuit breaker can be connected separately to the device.

332

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.20 Function Control and Circuit Breaker Test

Separate binary inputs are available, which should be treated the same and configured additionally if necessary. These have a similar significance as the inputs described above for protection applications and are marked with Bkr1 ... to distinguish them, i.e.: >52a Bkr1 3p Cl (No. 410) for the series connection of the NO auxiliary contacts of the CB, >52b Bkr1 3p Op (No. 411) for the series connection of the NC auxiliary contacts of the CB, >52a Bkr1 A (No. 366) for the auxiliary contact of pole A, >52a Bkr1 B (No. 367) for the auxiliary contact of pole B, >52a Bkr1 C (No. 368) for the auxiliary contact of pole C. 2.20.1.3 Open Pole Detector Single-pole dead times can be detected and reported via the Open Pole Detector. The corresponding protection and monitoring functions can respond. The following figure shows the logic structure of an Open Pole Detector.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

333

2 Functions

Figure 2-152

Open pole detector logic

Single-pole Dead Time

During a single-pole dead time, the load current flowing in the two healthy phases forces a current flow via ground which may cause undesired pickup. The temporarily applying zero-sequence voltage may also prompt undesired responses of the protection functions. The alarms 1pole open A (No. 591), 1pole open B (No. 592) and 1pole open C (No. 593)are generated in addition if the Open Pole Detector recognizes that current and voltage are absent in one phase but neither in the other phases current is flowing. In this case, the message will be held up only for as long as the condition is fulfilled. This enables a single-pole automatic reclosure to be detected on an unloaded line.

2.20.1.4 Pickup Logic for the Entire Device Phase Segregated Fault Detection The fault detection logic combines the fault detection (pickup) signals of all protection functions. The protection functions that allow phase segregated pickup the output is done in a phase segregated manner. If a protection function detects a ground fault, this is also output as a common device alarm. Thus the alarms Relay PICKUP A,

334

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.20 Function Control and Circuit Breaker Test

Relay PICKUP B, Relay PICKUP C and Relay PICKUP G are available. The above alarms can be allocated to LEDs or output relays. For the local display of fault event messages and for the transmission of event messages to a personal computer or a centralized control system, several protection functions provide the possibility to display the faulted phase information in a single message, e.g. 21 Pickup ABG for the distance protection fault detection in A-B-G only one such message appears. It represents the complete definition of the fault detection. General Pickup The pickup signals are combined with OR and lead to a general pickup of the device. It is signaled with the alarm Relay PICKUP. If no protection function of the device has picked up any longer, Relay PICKUP disappears (message: OFF). General device pickup is a precondition for a series of internal and external functions that occur subsequently. The following internal functions are controlled by general device pickup: Opening of fault case: From general device pickup to general device drop out, all fault messages are entered in the trip log. Initialization of fault storage: The storage and maintenance of fault values can also be made dependent on the occurrence of a trip command. Generation of spontaneous annunciations: Certain fault messages can be displayed as so called spontaneous annunciations (see Spontaneous Displays below). These display messages can also be made dependent on the general device trip. Start action time of automatic reclosure (if available and used) External functions may be controlled by this indication via an output contact. Examples are: Automatic reclose devices, Channel boost in conjunction with signal transmission by PLC, Further additional devices or similar. Spontaneous Displays Spontaneous displays are fault messages which appear in the display automatically following a general fault detection or trip command of the device. For the 7SA522, these messages include: Relay PICKUP: PU Time: TRIP Time: dist =: protective function that picked up; the operating time from the general pickup to the dropout of the device, the time is given in ms; the operating time from general pickup to the first trip command of the device, in ms; the distance to fault in kilometers or miles derived by the distance to fault location function (if possible).

2.20.1.5 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device Three-pole Tripping In general, the device trips three-pole in the event of a fault. Depending on the version ordered (see Section A.1, Ordering Information), single-pole tripping is also possible. If, in general, single-pole tripping is not possible or desired, the output function Relay TRIP 3ph. is used for the trip command output to the circuit breaker. In these cases the following sections regarding single-pole tripping are not of interest.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

335

2 Functions

Single-Pole Tripping

Single-pole tripping only makes sense on overhead lines, on which automatic reclosure shall be carried out and where the circuit breakers at both ends of the line are capable of single-pole tripping. In such cases, the faulted phase may be tripped singlepole and subsequently reclosed; in the case of two-phase and three-phase faults with or without ground, three-pole tripping is usually carried out. Device prerequisites for phase segregated tripping are that: Phase segregated tripping is provided by the device (according to the ordering code); The tripping protection function is suitable for pole-segregated tripping (for example, not for frequency protection, overvoltage protection or overload protection), The binary input >1p Trip Perm is configured and activated or the internal automatic reclosure function is ready for reclosure after single-pole tripping. In all other cases tripping is always three-pole. The binary input >1p Trip Perm is the logic inversion of a three-pole coupling and is activated by an external auto-reclosure device as long as this is ready for a single-pole auto-reclosure cycle. With the 7SA522, it is also possible to trip three-pole when only one phase is subjected to the trip conditions, but more than one phase indicates a fault detection. With distance protection this is the case when two faults at different locations occur simultaneously but only one of them is within the range of the fast tripping zone (Z1 or Z1B). This is selected with the setting parameter 3pole coupling (address 1155), which is set to with PICKUP (every multiple-phase fault detection causes three-pole trip) or with TRIP (in the event of multiple-phase trip commands the tripping is threepole). The tripping logic combines the trip signals from all protection functions. The trip commands of those protection functions that allow single-pole tripping are phase segregated. The corresponding messages are named Relay TRIP A, Relay TRIP B and Relay TRIP C. These alarms can be allocated to LEDs or output relays. In the event of three-pole tripping all three alarms pick up. If single-pole tripping is possible, the protection functions generates a group signal for the local displaying of alarms and for the transmission of the alarms to a PC or a central control system, e.g. 21 TRIP 1p. A, 21 TRIP 1p. B, for singlepole tripping by the distance protection and 21 TRIP ABC for three-pole tripping. Only one of these alarms is displayed at a time. These alarms are also intended for the trip command output to the circuit breaker.

Single-pole Tripping after TwoPhase Fault

Single-pole tripping for two-phase faults is a special feature. If a phase-phase fault without ground occurs in a grounded system, this fault can be cleared by single-pole trip and automatic reclosure in one of the faulted phases, as the fault path is interrupted in this manner. The phase selected for tripping must be the same at both line ends (and should be the same for the entire system). The setting parameter Trip2phFlt (address 1156) allows to select whether this tripping should be 1pole leading , i.e. single-pole tripping of the leading phase, or 1pole lagging , i.e. single-pole tripping of the lagging phase. Standard setting is 3pole, i.e. three-pole tripping after two-phase faults (default setting).

336

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.20 Function Control and Circuit Breaker Test

Table 2-11 Type of Fault (from Protection Function) A B C A B C A A A B B B B B B A A A A A A A B B B B C C C C G G C C C C C C G G G G G G

One-pole and three-pole trip depending on fault type Output signals for trip TRIP 1p.A X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X TRIP 1p.B TRIP 1p.C Relay TRIP 3ph.

Parameter Trip2phFlt (any) (any) (any) (any) (any) (any) 3pole 1pole leading 1pole lagging 3pole 1pole leading 1pole lagging 3pole 1pole leading 1pole lagging (any) (any) (any) (any) (any) (any)

General Trip

All trip signals for the protective functions are connected by OR and generate the message Relay TRIP. This can be allocated to LED or output relay. Once a trip command is initiated, it is phase segregated latched (in the event of threepole tripping for each of the three poles) (refer to Figure 2-153). At the same time, the minimum trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD is started. This ensures that the command is transmitted to the circuit breaker for a sufficient amount of time, even if the function which issued the trip signal drops out quickly. The trip commands can only be terminated when the last protection function dropped out (i.e. functions no longer pick up) AND the minimum trip signal duration expired. A further condition for the reset of the trip command is that the circuit breaker has opened, in the event of single-pole tripping the relevant circuit-breaker pole. In the function control of the device this is checked by means of the circuit-breaker position feedback (margin heading Detection of the Circuit Breaker Position) and the flow of current. The residual current 1130 that is certainly undershot when the circuit breaker pole is open is set in address PoleOpenCurrent. Address 1135 Reset Trip CMD determines under which conditions a trip command is reset. If CurrentOpenPole is set, the trip command is reset as soon as the current disappears. It is important that the value set in address 1130 PoleOpenCurrent (see above) is undershot. If Current AND 52a is set, the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact must send a message that the circuit breaker is open. It is a prerequisite for this setting that the position of the auxiliary contacts is allocated via a binary input.

Terminating the Trip Signal

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

337

2 Functions

Figure 2-153

Storage and termination of the trip command

Reclosure Interlocking

When tripping the circuit breaker by a protection function the manual reclosure must often be blocked until the cause for the protection function operation is found. 7SA522 enables this via the integrated reclose interlocking. The interlocking state (LOCKOUT) will be realized by a RS flipflop which is protected against auxiliary voltage failure (see Figure 2-154). The RS flipflop is set via binary input >Lockout SET (No. 385). With the output alarm LOCKOUT (No. 530), if interconnected correspondingly, a reclosure of the circuit breaker (e.g. for automatic reclosure, manual close signal, synchronization, closing via control) can be blocked. Only once the cause for the protection operation is known, should the interlocking be reset by a manual reset via binary input >Lockout RESET (No. 386).

Figure 2-154

Reclosure interlocking

Conditions which cause reclosure interlocking and control commands which have to be interlocked can be set individually. The two inputs and the output can be wired via the correspondingly allocated binary inputs and outputs or be linked via user-defined logic functions (CFC). If, for example, each trip by the protection function has to cause a closing lock-out, then combine the tripping command Relay TRIP (No. 511) with the binary input >Lockout SET. If automatic reclosure is applied, only the final trip of the protection

338

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.20 Function Control and Circuit Breaker Test

function should activate reclosing lock-out. Please bear in mind that the message Definitive TRIP (No. 536) applies only for 500ms. Then combine the output alarm Definitive TRIP (No. 536) with the interlocking input >Lockout SET, so that the interlocking function is not established when an automatic reclosure is still expected to come. In the most simple case, the output alarm LOCKOUT (No. 530) can be allocated to the output which trips the circuit breaker without creating further links. Then the tripping command is maintained until the interlock is reset via the binary reset input. Naturally it has to be ensured in advance that the close coil at the circuit breaker - as is usually done - is blocked as long as a tripping command is maintained. The output alarm LOCKOUT can also be applied to interlock certain closing commands (externally or via CFC), e.g. by combining the output alarm with the binary input >Close Cmd. Blk (No. 357) or by connecting the inverted alarm with the bay interlocking of the feeder. The reset input >Lockout RESET (No. 386) resets the interlocking state. This input is initiated by an external device which is protected against unauthorized or unintentional operation. The interlocking state can also be controlled by internal sources using CFC, e.g. a function key, operation of the device or using DIGSI on a PC. For each case please make sure that the corresponding logical combinations, security measures, etc. are taken into account for the routing of the binary inputs and outputs and are also considered for the setting of user-defined logic functions, if necessary. See also the SIPROTEC 4 System Description, also available on the Internet. Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression While every trip command by a protection function is final on a feeder without automatic reclosure, it is desirable, when using automatic reclosure, to prevent the operation detector of the circuit-breaker (transient contact on the breaker) from sending an alarm if the trip of the breaker is not final (Figure 2-155). For this purpose, the signal from the circuit breaker is routed via a correspondingly allocated output contact of the 7SA522 (output alarm CB Alarm Supp, No. 563). In the idle state and when the device is turned off, this contact is closed. Therefore an output contact with a normally closed contact (NC contact) must be available. Which contact is to be allocated is dependent on the device version. Refer to the general views in the Appendix. Prior to the command, with the internal automatic reclosure in the ready state, the contact opens so that no signal from the circuit-breaker is forwarded. This is only the case if the device is equipped with internal automatic reclosure and if the latter was considered when configuring the protection functions (address 133). Also when closing the breaker via the binary input >Manual Close (No 356) or via the integrated automatic reclosure the contact is interrupted so that the breaker alarm is inhibited. Further optional closing commands which are not sent via the device cannot be considered. Closing commands for control can be linked to the alarm suppression via the user-defined logic functions (CFC).

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

339

2 Functions

Figure 2-155

Breaker tripping alarm suppression

If the device issues a final trip command, the contact remains closed. This is the case, during the reclaim time of the automatic reclosure cycle, when the automatic reclosure is blocked or switched off or, due to other reasons is not ready for automatic reclosure (e.g. tripping only occurred after the action time expired). Figure 2-156 shows time diagrams for manual trip and close as well as for fault tripping with a single, failed automatic reclosure cycle.

Figure 2-156

Breaker tripping alarm suppression - sequence examples

Trip Dependent Messages

The latching of messages allocated to local LEDs, and the storage of spontaneous messages can be made dependent on whether the device has issued a trip command. This information is then not output if during a system disturbance one or more protection functions have picked up, but no tripping by the 7SA522 resulted because the fault

340

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.20 Function Control and Circuit Breaker Test

was cleared by a different device (e.g. on another line). These messages are then limited to faults on the protected line.

Figure 2-157

Logic diagram of the notripnoflag feature (command-dependent alarms)

Statistics

The number of trips initiated by the device 7SA522 are counted. If the device is capable of single-pole tripping, a separate counter for each circuit breaker pole is provided. Following each trip command the device registers the value of each current phase that was switched off in each pole. This information is then provided in the trip log and summated in a register. The maximum current that was switched off is also stored. If the device is equipped with the integrated automatic reclosure, the automatic close commands are also counted, separately for reclosure after single-pole tripping, after three-pole tripping as well as separately for the first reclosure cycle and other reclosure cycles. The counter and memory levels are secured against loss of auxiliary voltage. They can be set to zero or to any other initial value. For more details, refer to the SIPROTEC 4 System Description, also available on the Internet.

2.20.1.6 Setting Notes Command Duration The setting of the minimum trip signal duration TMin TRIP CMD (address 240 was already discussed in Subsection 2.1.3. This setting applies to all protective functions that initiate tripping.

2.20.2 Circuit Breaker Trip Test

The 7SA522 distance protection relay allows for convenient testing of the trip circuits and the circuit breakers. 2.20.2.1 Function Description The test programs as shown in Table 2-12 are available. The single-pole tests are naturally only available if the device at hand allows for single-pole tripping. The output alarms mentioned must be allocated to the relevant command relays that are used for controlling the circuit breaker coils. The test is started using the operator panel on the front of the device or using the PC with DIGSI. The procedure is described in detail in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description. Figure 2-158 shows the chronological sequence of one TRIPCLOSE test

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

341

2 Functions

cycle. The set times are those stated in Section 2.1.3.1 for Trip command Duration and Circuit Breaker Test. Where the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts indicate the status of the circuit breaker or of its poles to the device via binary inputs, the test cycle can only be initiated if the circuit breaker is closed. The information regarding the position of the circuit breakers is not automatically derived from the position logic according to the above section. For the circuit breaker test function (auto recloser) there are separate binary inputs for the switching status feedback of the circuit breaker position. These must be taken into consideration when allocating the binary inputs as mentioned in the previous section. The alarms of the device show the respective state of the test sequence.
Table 2-12 Seria l No. 1 2 3 4 Circuit breaker test programs Test Programs 1-pole TRIP/CLOSE-cycle phase A 1-pole TRIP/CLOSE-cycle phase B 1-pole TRIP/CLOSE-cycle phase C CB1TEST TRIP/CLOSE- Phases ABC Associated close command CB 1 Circuit Breaker Output Indications (No.) CB1-TESTtrip L1 (7325) CB1-TESTtrip B (7326) CB1-TESTtrip C (7327) CB1-TESTtrip ABC (7328) CB1-TEST CLOSE (7329)

Figure 2-158

TRIP-CLOSE test cycle

342

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.20 Function Control and Circuit Breaker Test

2.20.2.2 Setting Notes The timer setting values are according to Subsection 2.1.3.1 for command duration and circuit breaker test. 2.20.2.3 Information List
No. 7325 7326 7327 7328 7329 7345 7346 7347 7348 7349 7350 CB1tst A CB1tst B CB1tst C CB1tst ABC CB1-TESTtrip A CB1-TESTtrip B CB1-TESTtrip C CB1-TESTtripABC CB1-TEST close CB-TEST running CB-TSTstop FLT. CB-TSTstop OPEN CB-TSTstop NOTr CB-TSTstop CLOS CB-TST .OK. Information Type of Information OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT_Ev OUT_Ev OUT_Ev OUT_Ev OUT_Ev Comments CB1-TEST trip/close - Only Phase A CB1-TEST trip/close - Only Phase B CB1-TEST trip/close - Only Phase C CB1-TEST trip/close Phases ABC CB1-TEST TRIP command - Only Phase A CB1-TEST TRIP command - Only Phase B CB1-TEST TRIP command - Only Phase C CB1-TEST TRIP command ABC CB1-TEST CLOSE command CB-TEST is in progress CB-TEST canceled due to Power Sys. Fault CB-TEST canceled due to CB already OPEN CB-TEST canceled due to CB was NOT READY CB-TEST canceled due to CB stayed CLOSED CB-TEST was succesful

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

343

2 Functions

2.21

Auxiliary Functions
The additional functions of the 7SA522 distance protection relay include: Processing of messages, Processing of operational measured values, Storage of fault record data.

2.21.1 Message Processing

After the occurrence of a system fault, data regarding the response of the protective relay and the measured quantities should be saved for future analysis. For this reason message processing is done in three ways: 2.21.1.1 Method of Operation Displays and Binary Outputs (output relays) Important events and states a displayed by LEDs on the front cover. The device furthermore has output relays for remote indication. Most indications and displays can be configured differently from the delivery default settings (for information on the delivery default setting see Appendix). The SIPROTEC 4 System Description gives a detailed description of the configuration procedure. The output relays and the LEDs may be operated in a latched or unlatched mode (each may be individually set). The latched conditions are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage. They are reset On site by pressing the LED key on the relay, Remotely using a binary input configured for that purpose, Using one of the serial interfaces, Automatically at the beginning of a new pickup. Status messages should not be latched. Also, they cannot be reset until the condition to be reported has been cancelled. This applies to e.g. messages from monitoring functions, or the like. A green LED displays operational readiness of the relay (RUN), and cannot be reset. It goes out if the self-check feature of the microprocessor recognizes an abnormal occurrence, or if the auxiliary voltage fails. When auxiliary voltage is present but the relay has an internal malfunction, the red LED (ERROR) lights up and the processor blocks the relay. DIGSI enables you to control selectively each output relay and LED of the device and, in doing so, check the correct connection to the system. In a dialog box you can, for instance, cause each output relay to pick up, and thus test the wiring between the 7SA522 and the station, without having to create the indications masked to it. Information on the Integrated Display (LCD) or to a PC Events and conditions can be read out on the display on the front cover of the relay. Using the front PC interface or the rear service interface, for instance, a personal computer can be connected, to which the information can be sent. In the quiescent state, i.e. as long as no system fault is present, the LCD can display selectable operational information (overview of the operational measured values) (de-

344

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.21 Auxiliary Functions

fault display). In the event of a system fault, information regarding the fault, the socalled spontaneous messages, are displayed instead. After the fault related indications have been acknowledged, the quiescent data are shown again. Acknowledgement can be performed by pressing the LED buttons on the front panel (see above). Figure 2-159 shows the default display in a 4-line display as preset. Various default displays can be selected via the arrow keys. Parameter 640 can be set to change the default setting for the default display page shown in idle state. Two examples of possible default display selections are given below.

Figure 2-159

Operational measured values in the default display

Default display 3 shows the measured values VA-B and IB.

Figure 2-160

Operational measured values in the default display

The device in addition has several event buffers for operational messages, switching statistics, etc., which are saved against loss of auxiliary supply by means of a battery buffer. These messages can be displayed on the LCD at any time by selection via the keypad or transferred to a personal computer via the serial service or PC interface. The retrieval of events/alarms during operation is extensively described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description, order no. E50417-H1176-C151) . After a fault on the system, for example, important information about the progression of the fault can be retrieved, such as the pickup or initiation of a trip signal. The time the initial occurrence of the short-circuit fault occurred is accurately provided via the system clock. The progress of the disturbance is output with a relative time referred to the instant of fault detection, so that the duration of the fault until tripping and up to reset of the trip command can be ascertained. The time resolution used for reporting is 1 ms. With a PC and the DIGSI protection data processing software it is also possible to retrieve and display the events with the convenience of visualization on a monitor and a menu-guided dialogue. The data may either be printed or stored for evaluation at a later time and place. The protection device stores the messages of the last eight system faults; in the event of a ninth fault, the oldest is erased. A system fault starts with the recognition of the fault by the fault detection of any protection function and ends with the reset of the fault detection of the last protection function or after the expiry of the auto-reclose reclaim time, so that several unsuccessful auto-reclose cycles are also stored cohesively. Accordingly a system fault may

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

345

2 Functions

contain several individual fault events (from fault detection up to reset of fault detection). Information to a Control Centre If the device has a serial system interface, stored information may additionally be transferred via this interface to a centralized control and storage device. Several communication protocols are available for the transfer of this information. You may test whether the information is transmitted correctly with DIGSI. Also, the information transmitted to the control centre can be influenced during operation or tests. The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol allows to identify all messages and measured values transferred to the central control system with an added message test operation- bit while the device is being tested on site (test mode). This identification prevents the messages from being incorrectly interpreted as resulting from an actual power system disturbance or event. Alternatively, you may disable the transmission of annunciations to the system interface during tests (transmission block). To influence information at the system interface during test mode (test mode and transmission block), a CFC logic is required. Default settings already include this logic (see Appendix). The SIPROTEC 4 System Description describes in detail how to activate and deactivate test mode and blocked data transmission. Classification of Messages Annunciations can be of one of the following types: Operational messages: messages generated while the device is in operation: They include information about the status of device functions, measurement data, system data, and similar information. Fault messages: messages from the last eight network faults that were processed by the device. Statistic messages: they include a counter for the switching actions of the circuit breakers initiated by the device, reclose commands as well as values of interrupted currents and accumulated fault currents. A complete list of all message and output functions that can be generated by the device with the maximum functional scope can be found in the Appendix. All functions are associated with an information number. It also indicates where each indication can be sent to. If functions are not present in the specific device version, or if they are configured to Disabled, then the associated indications cannot appear. Operational Messages (Buffer: Event Log The operational messages contain information that the device generates during operation and about operational conditions. Up to 200 operational messages are recorded in chronological order in the device. Newly generated annunciations are added to existing ones. If the maximum capacity of the memory is exhausted, the oldest respective indication will be erased. Operational annunciations arrive automatically and can be read out from the device display or a personal computer at any time. Faults in the power system are indicated with Network Fault and the present fault number. The fault messages contain detailed information on the behavior of the power system fault. Fault Annunciations Following a system fault, it is possible to retrieve important information regarding its progress, such as pickup and trip. The time the fault first occurred is accurately provided via the system clock. The progress of the disturbance is output with a relative time referred to the instant of fault detection, so that the duration of the fault until trip-

346

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.21 Auxiliary Functions

ping and up to reset of the trip command can be ascertained. The resolution of the time information is 1ms. A system fault starts with the recognition of the fault by the fault detection, i.e. first pickup of any protection function, and ends with the reset of the fault detection, i.e. dropout of the last protection function. When several protective functions pick up on a fault, it will include all events between pickup of the first protective function and dropout of the last protective function. Spontaneous Annunciations After a fault, the device displays automatically and without any operator action on its LCD display the most important fault data from the general device pickup in the sequence shown in Figure 2-161.

Figure 2-161

Display of spontaneous messages in the display - Example

Retrieved Annunciations

The annunciations for the last eight network faults can be retrieved. In total 600 indications can be recorded. Oldest data are erased for newest data when the buffer is full. Spontaneous annunciations contain information on new incoming annunciations. Each new incoming message appears immediately, i.e. the user does not have to wait for an update or initiate one. This can be a useful help during operation, testing and commissioning. Spontaneous annunciations can be read out via DIGSI. For more information see the SIPROTEC4 System Description.

Spontaneous Annunciations

General Interrogation

The general interrogation which can be retrieved via DIGSI enables the current status of the SIPROTEC device to be read out. It shows all annunciations that are subject to general interrogation with their present value.

2.21.2 Statistics
Counting includes the number of trips initiated by 7SA522, the accumulated breaking currents resulting from trips initiated by protection functions, the number of close commands initiated by the auto-reclosure function. 2.21.2.1 Function Description Counters and Memories The counters and memories of the statistics are saved by the device. Therefore, the information will not get lost in case the auxiliary voltage supply fails. The counters, however, can be reset to zero or to any value within the setting range. They can be viewed on the device front and read out using the DIGSI 4 software on a PC via the operator or service interface.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

347

2 Functions

A password is not required to read counter and stored values but it is necessary to change or delete them. You will find further details in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description (Order no. E50417-H1176-C151) Number of Trips The number of trips initiated by the device 7SA522 are counted. If the device is capable of single-pole tripping, a separate counter for each circuit breaker pole is provided. If the device is equipped with the integrated automatic reclosure, the automatic close commands are also counted, separately for reclosure after single-pole tripping, after three-pole tripping as well as separately for the first reclosure cycle and other reclosure cycles. Following each trip command the device registers the value of each current phase that was switched off in each pole. This information is then provided in the trip log and summated in a register. The maximum current that was switched off is also stored. Measured values are indicated in primary values. In 7SA522 the protection communication is registered in statistics. The delay times of the information between the devices via interfaces (transmit and receive) are measured continuously. The values are kept stored in the Statistic folder. The availability of the transmission media is also specified. The availability is indicated in % / min and % / h. This enables an evaluation of the transmission quality.

Number of Automatic Reclosing Commands

Breaking Currents

Transmission Statistics

2.21.2.2 Setting Notes Reading / Setting / Resetting The SIPROTEC 4 System Description describes how to read out the statistical counters via the device front panel or DIGSI. Setting or resetting of these statistical counters takes place under the menu item Annunciation -> STATISTIC by overwriting the counter values displayed.

2.21.2.3 Information List

No. 1000 1001 1002 1003 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 2895 2896 2897 # TRIPs= # TRIPs A = # TRIPs B = # TRIPs C = Ia = Ib = Ic = Ia max. = Ib max. = Ic max. = 79 #Close1./1p= 79 #Close1./3p= 79 #Close2./1p= Information Type of Information OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT Comments Number of breaker TRIP commands Number of breaker TRIP commands, Ph A Number of breaker TRIP commands, Ph B Number of breaker TRIP commands, Ph C Accumulation of interrupted current Ph A Accumulation of interrupted current Ph B Accumulation of interrupted current Ph C max. fault current Phase A max. fault current Phase B max. fault current Phase C No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE commands,1pole No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE commands,3pole No. of higher AR-cycle CLOSE commands,1p

348

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.21 Auxiliary Functions

No. 2898 7751 7752 7753 7754 7755 7756

Information 79 #Close2./3p= PI1 TD PI2 TD PI1A/m PI1A/h PI2A/m PI2A/h

Type of Information OUT MV MV MV MV MV MV

Comments No. of higher AR-cycle CLOSE commands,3p Prot Int 1: Transmission delay Prot Int 2: Transmission delay Prot Int 1: Availability per min. Prot Int 1: Availability per hour Prot Int 2: Availability per min. Prot Int 2: Availability per hour

2.21.3 Measurement
2.21.3.1 Method of Operation A series of measured values and the values derived from them are available for onsite retrieval or for data transfer. A precondition for a correct display of primary and percentage values is the complete and correct entry of the nominal values of the instrument transformers and the power system as well as the transformation ratio of the current and voltage transformers in the ground paths.

Display of Measured Values

Depending on the ordering code and the manner of connection to the device, only a portion of the listed operational measured values in Table 2-13 may be available. Of the current values INS, Ig and IP only the one which is connected to the current measuring input I4 can apply. Phase-to-ground voltages can only be measured if the phase-to-ground voltage inputs are connected. The displacement voltage 3V0 is delta voltage multiplied by 3 - if Vdelta is connected - or calculated from the phase-to-ground voltages 3V0 = |VA + VB + VC|. All three voltage inputs must be phase-ground connected for this. If the device features a synchronism and voltage check function, and provided that at address 135 it was set to Enabled during configuration of the functions and that parameter V4 transformer (address 210) was set to Vsync transf., the characteristic values (voltages, frequencies, differences) can be read out. The power and operating values upon delivery are set such that power in line direction is positive. Active components in line direction and inductive reactive components in line direction are also positive. The same applies for the power factor cos. The computation of the operational measured values is also executed during an existent system fault in intervals of approx. 0.5s.
Table 2-13 Measured Values Operational measured values of the local device primary secondary S S S A S mA S A % referred to Rated operational current 1) Rated operational current 3)1) Rated operational current 1) Rated operational current 3)1)

IA; IB; IC INS 3I0 - calculated 3I0 - measured

Phase currents Sensitive ground current Ground current Ground current

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

349

2 Functions

Measured Values I1, I2 Ig, IP VA-G, VB-G, VC-G VA-B, VB-C, VC-A 3V0 V0 V1, V2 VX V1compound

primary secondary S S V V V V V V kV

% referred to Rated operational current 1) Rated operational current 3)1) Operational rated voltage / 32) Operational rated voltage2) Operational rated voltage / 32) Operational rated voltage / 32) Operational rated voltage / 32) Operational rated voltage / 32) Operational rated voltage / 32)

Positive and negative sequence compo- S nent of currents Transformer Neutral Current or Ground S Current of the Parallel Line Phase-to-ground voltages Phase-to-phase voltages Displacement Voltage Zero-sequence voltage kV kV kV kV

Positive and negative sequence compo- kV nent of voltages Voltage at measuring input V4 kV Positive sequence component of voltag- kV es at the remote end (if compounding is active in voltage protection) Operational resistance of all loops

RA-G, RB-G, RC-G, RA-B, RA-B, RC-A, XA-G, XB-G, XC-G, XA-B, XB-C, XC-A, S, P, Q

Operational reactance of all loops

Apparent, active and reactive power

MVA, MW, MVAR Hz (abs) kV

3VNomINom Nominal operational quantities 1)2) Rated system frequency -

f cos VLine, VBus, VDiff

Frequency Power factor Line voltage, busbar voltage and voltage difference (for synchronism check) Line voltage, busbar frequency and voltage difference (for synchronism check) Amount of phase angle difference between line and busbar (for synchronism check)
1) 2) 3)

Hz (abs) -

fline, fbus, fdiff

Hz

diff

according to address 1104 according to address 1103 considering factor 221 I4/Iph CT

Remote Measured Values

During communication, the data of the other ends of the protected object can also be read out. For each of the devices, the currents and voltages involved as well as phase shifts between the local and transfer measured quantities can be displayed. This is especially helpful for checking the correct and coherent phase allocation at the different line ends. Furthermore, the device addresses of the other devices are transmitted so that all important data of all ends are available in the substation. All possible data are listed in Table 2-14.

350

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.21 Auxiliary Functions

Table 2-14

Operational measured values transmitted from the other ends and compared with the local values Data Primary value (absolute) Rated operational current 1) Device address of the remote device Phase currents of the remote device Phase angles between the remote and the local phase currents Voltages of the remote device Voltages of the local device Phase angles between the remote and the local voltages

Device ADR IA; IB; IC remote IA, IB, IC local (IA), (IB), (IC) VA, VB, VC remote VA, VB, VC local (VA), (VB) (VC)

Phase currents of the local device Rated operational current 1)

Operational rated voltage / 3 Operational rated voltage / 32)

1) 2)

for lines according to address 1104 according to address 1103

2.21.3.2 Information List

No. 601 602 603 610 611 612 613 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 641 642 Ia = Ib = Ic = 3I0 = 3I0sen= Ig = 3I0par= I1 I2 = = Information Type of Information MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV Ia Ib Ic 3I0 (zero sequence) 3I0sen (sensitive zero sequence) Ig (grounded transformer) 3I0par (parallel line neutral) I1 (positive sequence) I2 (negative sequence) Va Vb Vc Va-b Vb-c Vc-a VN 3V0 (zero sequence) Vsync (synchronism) Vx (separate VT) V1 (positive sequence) V2 (negative sequence) V-diff (line-bus) V-line V-bus P (active power) Q (reactive power) Comments

Va = Vb = Vc = Va-b= Vb-c= Vc-a= VN = 3V0 = Vsync = Vx V1 V2 = = =

Vdiff = Vline = Vbus = P = Q =

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

351

2 Functions

No. 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 679 684 966 967 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 PF = Freq= S = F-bus = F-diff= -diff= F-line= U1co= Vo = Ra-g = Rb-g = Rc-g = Ra-b = Rb-c = Rc-a = Xa-g = Xb-g = Xc-g = Xa-b = Xb-c = Xc-a =

Information

Type of Information MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV Power Factor Frequency S (apparent power) Frequency (busbar)

Comments

Frequency (difference line-bus) Angle (difference line-bus) Frequency (line) U1co (positive sequence, compounding) Vo (zero sequence) Ra-g Rb-g Rc-g Ra-b Rb-c Rc-a Xa-g Xb-g Xc-g Xa-b Xb-c Xc-a

2.21.4 Demand Measurement Setup

Long-term average values are calculated by 7SA522 and can be read out with the point of time (date and time of the last update). 2.21.4.1 Long-term Average Values The long-term averages of the three phase currents IABC, the positive sequence components I1 for the three phase currents, and the real power P, reactive power Q, and apparent power S are calculated within a set period of time and indicated in primary values. For the long-term average values mentioned above, the length of the time window for averaging and the frequency with which it is updated can be set. The associated minimum and maximum values can be reset, using binary inputs or by using the integrated control panel in the DIGSI operating program. 2.21.4.2 Setting Notes Averages The time interval for measured value averaging is set at address 2801 DMD Interval. The first number specifies the averaging time window in minutes while the second number gives the frequency of updates within the time window. 15 Min., 3 Subs, for example, means that time averaging occurs for all measured values that arrive within 15 minutes. The output is updated every 15/3 = 5 minutes.

352

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.21 Auxiliary Functions

At address 2802 DMD Sync.Time you can determine whether the averaging time, selected under address 2801, begins on the hour (full hour) or is to be synchronized with another point in time (a quarter past, half hour or a quarter to). If the settings for averaging are changed, then the measured values stored in the buffer are deleted, and new results for the average calculation are only available after the set time period has passed. 2.21.4.3 Settings
Addr. 2801 Parameter DMD Interval Setting Options 15 Min., 1 Sub 15 Min., 3 Subs 15 Min.,15 Subs 30 Min., 1 Sub 60 Min., 1 Sub On The Hour 15 After Hour 30 After Hour 45 After Hour Default Setting 60 Min., 1 Sub Comments Demand Calculation Intervals

2802

DMD Sync.Time

On The Hour

Demand Synchronization Time

2.21.4.4 Information List

No. 833 834 835 836 963 964 965 1052 1053 1054 1055 I1 dmd= P dmd = Q dmd = S dmd = Ia dmd= Ib dmd= Ic dmd= Pdmd Forw= Pdmd Rev = Qdmd Forw= Qdmd Rev = Information Type of Information MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV MV Active Power Demand Reactive Power Demand Apparent Power Demand I A demand I B demand I C demand Active Power Demand Forward Active Power Demand Reverse Reactive Power Demand Forward Reactive Power Demand Reverse Comments I1 (positive sequence) Demand

2.21.5 Min/Max Measurement Setup

Minimum and maximum values are calculated by the 7SA522 and can be read out with the point of time (date and time of the last update). 2.21.5.1 Reset The minimum and maximum values can be reset, using binary inputs or by using the integrated control panel in the DIGSI 4 operating program. In addition, the reset can also take place cyclically, beginning with a pre-selected point in time.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

353

2 Functions

2.21.5.2 Setting Notes The tracking of minimum and maximum values can be reset automatically at a predefined point in time. To select this feature, address 2811 MinMax cycRESET is set to YES (default setting). The point in time when reset is to take place (the minute of the day in which reset will take place) is set at address 2812 MiMa RESET TIME. The reset cycle in days is entered at address 2813 MiMa RESETCYCLE, and the beginning date of the cyclical process, from the time of the setting procedure (in days), is entered at address 2814 MinMaxRES.START. 2.21.5.3 Settings
Addr. 2811 2812 2813 2814 Parameter MinMax cycRESET MiMa RESET TIME MiMa RESETCYCLE MinMaxRES.START NO YES 0 .. 1439 min 1 .. 365 Days 1 .. 365 Days Setting Options Default Setting YES 0 min 7 Days 1 Days Comments Automatic Cyclic Reset Function MinMax Reset Timer MinMax Reset Cycle Period MinMax Start Reset Cycle in

2.21.5.4 Information List

No. 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 Information ResMinMax >I MinMax Reset >I1 MiMaReset >V MiMaReset >VphphMiMaRes >V1 MiMa Reset >P MiMa Reset >S MiMa Reset >Q MiMa Reset >Idmd MiMaReset >Pdmd MiMaReset >Qdmd MiMaReset >Sdmd MiMaReset >Frq MiMa Reset >PF MiMaReset IAdmdMin IAdmdMax IBdmdMin IBdmdMax ICdmdMin ICdmdMax I1dmdMin Type of Information IntSP_Ev SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT Comments Reset Minimum and Maximum counter >I MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >I1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >V MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >Vphph MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >V1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >P MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >S MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >Q MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >Idmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >Pdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >Qdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >Sdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >Frq. MIN/MAX Buffer Reset >Power Factor MIN/MAX Buffer Reset I A Demand Minimum I A Demand Maximum I B Demand Minimum I B Demand Maximum I C Demand Minimum I C Demand Maximum I1 (positive sequence) Demand Minimum

354

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.21 Auxiliary Functions

No. 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 867 868 869 870 871 874 875 880 881 882 883 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 I1dmdMax PdMin= PdMax= QdMin= QdMax= SdMin= SdMax= Ia Min= Ia Max= Ib Min= Ib Max= Ic Min= Ic Max= I1 Min= I1 Max= Va-nMin= Va-nMax= Vb-nMin= Vb-nMax= Vc-nMin= Vc-nMax= Va-bMin= Va-bMax= Vb-cMin= Vb-cMax= Vc-aMin= Vc-aMax= V1 Min = V1 Max = Smin= Smax= fmin= fmax=

Information

Type of Information MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT MVT

Comments I1 (positive sequence) Demand Maximum Active Power Demand Minimum Active Power Demand Maximum Reactive Power Demand Minimum Reactive Power Demand Maximum Apparent Power Demand Minimum Apparent Power Demand Maximum Ia Min Ia Max Ib Min Ib Max Ic Min Ic Max I1 (positive sequence) Minimum I1 (positive sequence) Maximum Va-n Min Va-n Max Vb-n Min Vb-n Max Vc-n Min Vc-n Max Va-b Min Va-b Max Vb-c Min Vb-c Max Vc-a Min Vc-a Max V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Minimum V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Maximum Apparent Power Minimum Apparent Power Maximum Frequency Minimum Frequency Maximum Active Power Minimum Forward Active Power Maximum Forward Active Power Minimum Reverse Active Power Maximum Reverse Reactive Power Minimum Forward Reactive Power Maximum Forward Reactive Power Minimum Reverse Reactive Power Maximum Reverse Power Factor Minimum Forward Power Factor Maximum Forward Power Factor Minimum Reverse Power Factor Maximum Reverse

Pmin Forw= Pmax Forw= Pmin Rev = Pmax Rev = Qmin Forw= Qmax Forw= Qmin Rev = Qmax Rev = PFminForw= PFmaxForw= PFmin Rev= PFmax Rev=

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

355

2 Functions

No. 10102 10103 3V0min = 3V0max =

Information

Type of Information MVT MVT

Comments Min. Zero Sequence Voltage 3V0 Max. Zero Sequence Voltage 3V0

2.21.6 Set Points (Measured Values)

SIPROTEC 4 devices allow limit points (set points) to be set for some measured and metered values. If during operation a value transgresses one of these limits, the device generates an alarm which is displayed as an operational indication. This can be configured to LEDs and/or binary outputs, transferred via the interfaces and interconnected in DIGSI CFC. In addition, you can use DIGSI CFC to configure set points for further measured and metered values and allocate these via the DIGSI configuration matrix. In contrast to the actual protection functions the limit value monitoring function operates in the background; therefore it may not pick up if measured values are changed spontaneously in the event of a fault and if protection functions are picked up. Furthermore, since a message is only issued when the set point limit is repeatedly exceeded, the set point monitoring functions do not react as fast as protection functions trip signals. 2.21.6.1 Limit Value Monitoring Set points can be set for the following measured and metered values: IAdmd>: Exceeding a preset maximum average value in Phase A. IBdmd>: Exceeding a preset maximum average value in Phase B. ICdmd>: Exceeding a preset maximum average value in Phase C. I1dmd>: Exceeding a preset maximum average value of the positive sequence system currents. |Pdmd|> : Exceeding a preset maximum average active power. |Qdmd|>: Exceeding a preset maximum average reactive power. |Sdmd|> : Exceeding a preset maximum average value of the apparent power. |cos|< Falling below a preset power factor. 2.21.6.2 Setting Notes Set Points for Measured Values The settings are entered under MEASUREMENT in the sub-menu SET POINTS (MV) (MV) by overwriting the existing values.

2.21.6.3 Information List

No. I Admd> I Bdmd> I Cdmd> Information Type of Information LV LV LV I A dmd> I B dmd> I C dmd> Comments

356

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.21 Auxiliary Functions

No. 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 285 I1dmd> |Pdmd|> |Qdmd|> |Sdmd|> |PF|<

Information

Type of Information LV LV LV LV LV OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT I1dmd> |Pdmd|> |Qdmd|> |Sdmd|> |Power Factor|<

Comments

SP. I A dmd> SP. I B dmd> SP. I C dmd> SP. I1dmd> SP. |Pdmd|> SP. |Qdmd|> SP. |Sdmd|> SP. PF(55)alarm

Set Point Phase A dmd> Set Point Phase B dmd> Set Point Phase C dmd> Set Point positive sequence I1dmd> Set Point |Pdmd|> Set Point |Qdmd|> Set Point |Sdmd|> Set Point 55 Power factor alarm

2.21.7 Energy
Metered values for real and reactive power are determined by the processor system in the background. They can be displayed at the front of the device, read out via the operating interface using a PC with DIGSI, or transferred to a central operational station via the system interface.

2.21.7.1 Power Metering 7SA522 integrates the calculated power which is then made available with the measured values. The components as listed in table 2-15 can be read out. The signs of the operating values depend on the setting at address 1107 P,Q sign (see Subsection 2.21.3 at margin heading Display of Measured Values). Please take into consideration that 7SA522 is, above all, a protection device. The accuracy of the measured values depends on the current transformer (normally protection core) and the tolerances of the device. The metering is therefore not suited for tariff purposes. The counters can be reset to zero or any initial value (see SIPROTEC 4 System Description, Order No. E50417-H1176-C151).
Table 2-15 Operational metered values Measured Values Wp+ Wp Wq+ Wq Real power, output Real power, input Reactive power, output Reactive power, input primary kWh, MWh, GWh kWh, MWh, GWh kVARh, MVARh, GVARh kVARh, MVARh, GVARh

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

357

2 Functions

2.21.7.2 Setting Notes Retrieving Parameters The SIPROTEC 4 System Description describes how to read out the statistical counters via the device front panel or DIGSI. The values are added up in direction of the protected object. Provided the direction was set to forward (address 201).

2.21.7.3 Information List

No. 888 888 889 889 924 924 925 925 928 928 929 929 Meter res Wp(puls) Wp(puls) Wq(puls) Wq(puls) Wp+= Wp+= Wq+= Wq+= Wp-= Wp-= Wq-= Wq-= Information Type of Information IntSP_Ev PMV PMV PMV PMV MVMV MVMV MVMV MVMV MVMV MVMV MVMV MVMV Reset meter Pulsed Energy Wp (active) Pulsed Energy Wp (active) Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive) Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive) Wp Forward Wp Forward Wq Forward Wq Forward Wp Reverse Wp Reverse Wq Reverse Wq Reverse Comments

358

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.22 Command Processing

2.22

Command Processing
A control command process is integrated in the SIPROTEC 4 7SA522 to coordinate the operation of circuit breakers and other equipment in the power system. Control commands can originate from four command sources: Local operation using the keypad on the local user interface of the device, Operation using DIGSI, Remote operation via network control center or substation controller (e.g. SICAM), Automatic functions (e.g. using a binary inputs, CFC). The number of switchgear devices that can be controlled is basically limited by the number of available and required binary inputs and outputs. For the output of control commands it has to be ensured that all the required binary inputs and outputs are configured and provided with the correct properties. If specific interlocking conditions are needed for the execution of commands, the user can program the device with bay interlocking by means of the user-defined logic functions (CFC). The interlocking conditions of the system can be injected via the system interface and must be allocated accordingly. The procedure for switching resources is described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description under Control of Switchgear.

2.22.1 Control Authorization

2.22.1.1 Command Types Commands to the System These command types are directly output to the switchgear to change their process state: Commands for the operation of circuit breakers (asynchronous or synchronous through integration of the synchronism check and closing control function) as well as commands for the control of isolators and ground switches, Step commands, e.g. for raising and lowering transformer taps, Setpoint commands with configurable time settings, e.g. to control Petersen coils Internal Device Commands These commands do not directly operate binary outputs. They serve for initiating internal functions, communicating the detection of status changes to the device or for acknowledging them. Manual override commands for manual update of information on process-dependent objects such as annunciations and switching states, e.g. if the communication with the process is interrupted. Manually overridden objects are marked as such in the information status and can be displayed accordingly. Flagging commands (for setting) the data value of internal objects, e.g. switching authority (remote/local), parameter switchover, transmission blockages and deletion and presetting of metered values.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

359

2 Functions

Acknowledgment and resetting commands for setting and resetting internal buffers or data stocks. Information status commands to set/delete the additional Information Status item of a process object, such as Acquisition blocking, Output blocking. 2.22.1.2 Sequence in the Command Path Security mechanisms in the command path ensure that a switch command can be carried out only if the test of previously established criteria has been successfully completed. Additionally, user-defined interlocking conditions can be configured separately for each device. The actual execution of the command is also monitored after its release. The entire sequence of a command is described briefly in the following. Checking a Command Please observe the following: Command entry (e.g. using the keypad on the local user interface of the device) Check password access rights; Check switching mode (interlocking activated/deactivated) selection of deactivated interlocking status. User configurable interlocking checks: Switching authority, Device position check (set vs. actual comparison); Zone controlled / bay interlocking (logic using CFC); System interlocking (centrally via SICAM); Double operation (interlocking against parallel switching operation); Protection blocking (blocking of switching operations by protective functions); Check (synchronism check before a close command). Fixed commands: Internal process time (software watch dog which checks the time for processing the control action between initiation of the control and final close of the relay contact); Configuration in process (if setting modification is in process, commands are rejected or delayed); Equipment not present at output (if controllable equipment is not assigned to a binary output, then the command is rejected); Output block (if an output block has been programmed for the circuit breaker, and is active at the moment the command is processed, then the command is rejected); Component hardware malfunction;

360

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.22 Command Processing

Command in progress (only one command can be processed at a time for each circuit breaker or switch); 1ofn check (for multiple allocations such as common contact relays it is checked if a command procedure was already initiated for the output relays concerned). Command Execution Monitoring The following is monitored: Interruption of a command because of a cancel command, Running Time Monitor (feedback message monitoring time) 2.22.1.3 Switchgear Interlocking Interlocking can be executed by the user-defined logic (CFC). System interlocking checks in a SICAM/SIPROTEC system are usually categorized as follows: System interlocking checked by a central control system (for interbay interlocking), Zone controlled/bay interlocking checked in the bay device (for the feeder). Zone controlled/bay interlocking relies on the object data base (feedbacks) of the bay unit (here the SIPROTEC 4 relay) as was determined during configuration (see SIPROTEC 4 System Description). The extent of the interlocking checks is determined by the configuration and interlocking logic of the relay. Switching objects that require system interlocking in a central control system are assigned to a specific parameter inside the bay unit (via configuration matrix). For all commands, operation with interlocking (normal mode) or without interlocking (test mode) can be selected: For local commands by reprogramming the settings with password check, For automatic commands, via command processing by CFC and Deactivated Interlocking Recognition, For local / remote commands, using an additional interlocking disable command, via Profibus. Interlocked/ Non-interlocked Switching The configurable command checks in the SIPROTEC 4 devices are also called standard interlocking. These checks can be activated via DIGSI (interlocked switching / tagging) or deactivated (non-interlocked). De-interlocked or non-interlocked switching means that the configured interlock conditions are not tested. Interlocked switching means that all configured interlocking conditions are checked within the command processing. If a condition could not be fulfilled, the command will be rejected by an indication with a minus added to it, e.g. CO, followed by an operation response information. The command is rejected if a synchronism check is carried out before closing and the conditions for synchronism are not fulfilled. Table 216 shows the types of possible commands to switchgear, and the associated annunciations. For the device the indications designated with *) are displayed in the event logs, for DIGSI they appear in spontaneous indications.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

361

2 Functions

Table 2-16 Control issued

Command types and corresponding messages Control Switching Manual tagging Cause CO MT ST ST CA Message CO+/ MT+/ ST+/ *) ST+/ *) CA+/

Type of command Manual tagging (positive / negative)

Information state command, Input Input blocking blocking Information state command, Output blocking Cancel Command Binary Output Blocking Cancel

The plus sign indicated in the message is a confirmation of the command execution: The command output has a positive result, as expected. A minus sign means a negative, i.e. an unexpected result; the command was rejected. Figure 2-162 shows an example in the operational annunciations command and feedback of a positively run switching action of the circuit breaker. The check of interlocking can be programmed separately for all switching devices and tags that were set with a tagging command. Other internal commands such as overriding or abort are not tested, i.e. are executed independently of the interlockings.

Figure 2-162

Example of an Operational Annunciation for Switching Circuit Breaker 52 (QO)

Standard Interlocking

The standard interlocking includes the checks for each switchgear which were set during the configuration of inputs and outputs, see SIPROTEC 4 System Description. An overview for processing the interlocking conditions in the relay is shown by Figure 2-163.

362

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.22 Command Processing

Figure 2-163 1) LOCAL

Standard interlockings

Source of Command REMOTE includes LOCAL. Command using substation controller

REMOTE Command via telecontrol station to and from power system management

The device display shows the configured interlocking reasons. The are marked by letters explained in Table 2-17.
Table 2-17 Interlocking Commands Command L S Z SI B Display L S Z PI B

Interlocking Commands Switching Authority System interlocking Bay Interlocking SET = ACTUAL (switch direction check) Protection Blockage

Figure 2-164 shows all interlocking conditions (which usually appear in the display of the device) for three switchgear items with the relevant abbreviations explained in Table 2-17. All parametrized interlocking conditions are shown.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

363

2 Functions

Figure 2-164

Example of configured interlocking conditions

Control Logic via CFC

For the bay interlocking an enabling logic can be structured using the CFC. Via specific release conditions the information released or bay interlocked are available (e.g. object 52 Close and 52 Open with the data values: ON / OFF).

2.22.1.4 Information List

No. Information ModeREMOTE CntrlDIGSI Cntrl Auth ModeLOCAL Type of Information IntSP LV IntSP IntSP Controlmode REMOTE Control DIGSI Control Authority Controlmode LOCAL Comments

2.22.2 Control Device

2.22.2.1 Information List
No. 52Breaker 52Breaker Disc.Swit. Disc.Swit. GndSwit. GndSwit. 52 Open 52 Close Disc.Open Disc.Close GndSw Open GndSw Cl. Q2 Op/Cl Q2 Op/Cl Q9 Op/Cl Q9 Op/Cl Fan ON/OFF Fan ON/OFF UnlockDT Information Type of Information CF_D12 DP CF_D2 DP CF_D2 DP IntSP IntSP IntSP IntSP IntSP IntSP CF_D2 DP CF_D2 DP CF_D2 DP IntSP 52 Breaker 52 Breaker Disconnect Switch Disconnect Switch Ground Switch Ground Switch Interlocking: 52 Open Interlocking: 52 Close Interlocking: Disconnect switch Open Interlocking: Disconnect switch Close Interlocking: Ground switch Open Interlocking: Ground switch Close Q2 Open/Close Q2 Open/Close Q9 Open/Close Q9 Open/Close Fan ON/OFF Fan ON/OFF Unlock data transmission via BI Comments

364

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

2.22 Command Processing

2.22.3 Process Data

During the processing of commands, independently of the further annunciation allocation and processing, command and process feedbacks are sent to the annunciation processing. These messages contain information on the cause. With the corresponding allocation (configuration) these messages are entered in the event log, thus serving as a report. A listing of possible operational annunciations and their meaning, as well as the command types needed for tripping and closing the switchgear or for raising and lowering of transformer taps and detailed information are described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description. 2.22.3.1 Method of Operation Acknowledgement of Commands to the Device Front Acknowledgement of Commands to Local/Remote/Digsi All messages with the source of command LOCAL are transformed into a corresponding response and shown in the display of the device.

The acknowledgement of messages which relate to commands with the origin "Command Issued = Local/ Remote/DIGSI" are sent back to the initiating point independent of the routing (configuration on the serial digital interface). The acknowledgement of commands is therefore not executed by a response indication as it is done with the local command but by ordinary command and feedback information recording.

Feedback Monitoring

Command processing time monitors all commands with feedback. Parallel to the command a monitoring time period (command runtime monitoring) is started which checks whether the switchgear has achieved the desired final state within this period. The monitoring time is stopped as soon as the feedback information arrives. If no feedback information arrives, a response Time Limit Expired appears and the process is terminated. Commands and their feedbacks are also recorded as operational annunciations. Normally the execution of a command is terminated as soon as the feedback information (FB+) of the relevant switchgear arrives or, in case of commands without process feedback information, the command output resets. In the feedback the plus sign means that a command has been positively completed. Accordingly the minus sign means a negative, unexpected, result.

Command Output / Switching Relays

The command types needed for tripping and closing of the switchgear or for raising and lowering of transformer taps have been defined during the configuration, see also SIPROTEC 4 System Description.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

365

2 Functions

2.22.3.2 Information List

No. Information >Door open >CB wait >Err Mot V >ErrCntrlV >SF6-Loss >Err Meter >Tx Temp. >Tx Danger Type of Information SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP >Cabinet door open >CB waiting for Spring charged >Error Motor Voltage >Error Control Voltage >SF6-Loss >Error Meter >Transformer Temperature >Transformer Danger Comments

2.22.4 Protocol
2.22.4.1 Information List
No. SysIntErr. Information Type of Information IntSP Error Systeminterface Comments

366

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Mounting and Commissioning

This chapter is intended for experienced commissioning staff. The staff must be familiar with the commissioning of protection and control systems, with power systems management and with the relevant safety rules and guidelines. Under certain circumstances, it may become necessary to adapt parts of the power system hardware. Some of the primary tests require the protected line or equipment to carry load.

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4

Mounting and Connections Checking Connections Commissioning Final Preparation of the Device

368 392 397 426

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

367

3 Mounting and Commissioning

3.1
General

Mounting and Connections

WARNING!
Warning of improper transport, storage, installation, and application of the device. Nonobservance can result in death, personal injury or substantial property damage. Trouble-free and safe use of this device depends on proper transport, storage, installation, and application of the device according to the warnings in this instruction manual. Of particular importance are the general installation and safety regulations for work in a high-voltage environment (for example, IEEE, ANSI, VDE, IEC, EN, DIN, or other national and international regulations). These regulations must be observed.

3.1.1

Configuration Information
For installation and connections the following conditions must be met: The rated device data is checked as recommended in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description. The compliance of these data is verified with the Power System Data.

Prerequisites

Connection Variants

General Diagrams are shown in Appendix A.2. Connection examples for current transformer and voltage transformer circuits are provided in Appendix A.3. It must be checked that the setting of the P.System Data 1, Subsection 2.1.3.1, was made in accordance with the device connections. In Appendix A.3 examples for the possibilities of the current transformer connections in dependence on network conditions are displayed. For normal connection, address 220 I4 transformer = In prot. line must be set and furthermore, address 221 I4/Iph CT = 1.000. When using separate ground current transformers, address 220 I4 transformer = In prot. line must be set. The factor 221 I4/Iph CT may deviate from 1. For calculation hints, please refer to Section 2.1.3.1 at Current Transformer Connection. Please observe that 2-CT-connection is permitted only for isolated or compensated networks. Furthermore, examples for the connection of the ground current of a parallel line (for parallel line compensation) are displayed. Address 220 I4 transformer must be set In paral. line here. The factor 221 I4/Iph CT may deviate from 1. For calculation hints, please refer to Section 2.1.3.1. The other figures show examples for the connection of the ground current of a source transformer. Address 220 I4 transformer must be set Ig starpoint here. Hints regarding the factor 221 I4/Iph CT can also be found in Section 2.1.3.1.

Currents

368

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.1 Mounting and Connections

Voltages

Connection examples for current and voltage transformer circuits are provided in Appendix A.3. For normal connection the 4th voltage measuring input is not used. Correspondingly, the following setting must be made in address 210 V4 transformer = Not connected. Nevertheless, the factor in address 211Vph / Vdelta must be set to 1.73 (this factor is used internally for the conversion of measured and fault recording values). For additional connection of an broken delta winding of a set of voltage transformers, address 210 must be set to V4 transformer = Vdelta transf.. The factor address 211 Vph / Vdelta depends on the transformation ratio of the broken delta winding. Instructions - see Section 2.1.3.1 at Voltage Transformer Connection. In further connection examples also the broken delta winding of a set of voltage transformers is connected, in this case, however of a central set of transformers at a busbar. For more information refer to the previous paragraph. Observe that 2-CT-connection is permitted only for isolated or compensated networks. Further figures show examples for the additional connection of a different voltage, in this case the busbar voltage (e.g. for the voltage protection or synchronism check). For voltage protection address 210 V4 transformer = Vx transformer must be set, for the synchronism check V4 transformer = Vsync transf.. The factor address 215 V-line / Vsync is unequal to 1, only if the feeder side VT and busbar side VT have a different transformation ratio. The factor in address 211 Vph / Vdelta must however be set to 1.73 (this factor is used internally for the conversion of measured and fault recording values). If there is a power transformer between the set of busbar and the feeder VT's, the phase displacement of the voltages caused by the transformer must be considered for the synchronism check (if used). In this case, also check the addresses 212 Vsync connect., 214 Angle VsynVline and 215 V-line / Vsync. You will find detailed hints and an example in Section 2.1.3.1 under Voltage Transformer Connection.

Binary Inputs and Outputs

The connections to the system depend on the possible allocation of the binary inputs and outputs, i.e. how they are assigned to the system. The default settings of the device are listed in Tables A.4 in the Appendix. Check also that the labelling on the front correspond to the allocated indication functions. If binary inputs are used to change setting groups, please observe the following: To enable the control of 4 possible setting groups 2 binary inputs have to be available. One binary input must be set for >Set Group Bit0, the other input for >Set Group Bit1. If either of these input functions is not assigned, then it is considered as not controlled. To control two setting groups, one binary input set for >Set Group Bit0 is sufficient since the binary input >Set Group Bit1, which is not assigned, is considered to be not controlled. The status of the signals controlling the binary inputs to activate a particular setting group must remain constant as long as that particular group is to remain active. The following Table shows the relationship between binary inputs and the setting groups A to D. Principal connection diagrams for the two binary inputs are illustrated in the following Figure 3-1. The Figure illustrates an example in which both Set Group Bits 0 and 1 are configured to be controlled (actuated) when the associated binary input is energized (high).

Changing Setting Groups with Binary Inputs

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

369

3 Mounting and Commissioning

Where: No Yes
Table 3-1

= not energized = energized

Changing Setting Groups with Binary Inputs Binary Input Active Group

>Set Group Bit >Set Group Bit 0 1 No Yes No Yes No No Yes Yes Group A Group B Group C Group D

Figure 3-1

Connection diagram (example) for setting group switching with binary inputs

Trip Circuit Supervision

It must be noted that two binary inputs or one binary input and one bypass resistor R must be connected in series. The pick-up threshold of the binary inputs must therefore be substantially below half the rated control DC voltage. If two binary inputs are used for the trip circuit supervision, these binary inputs must be isolated, i.o.w. not be communed with each other or with another binary input. If one binary input is used, a bypass resistor R must be used (refer to Figure 3-2). This resistor R is connected in series with the second circuit breaker auxiliary contact (Aux2), to also allow the detection of a trip circuit failure when the circuit breaker auxiliary contact 1 (Aux1) is open, and the command relay contact has reset. The value of this resistor must be such that in the circuit breaker open condition (therefore Aux1 is open and Aux2 is closed) the circuit breaker trip coil (TC) is no longer picked up and binary input (BI1) is still picked up if the command relay contact is open.

370

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.1 Mounting and Connections

Figure 3-2

Trip circuit supervision with one binary input - Example for trip circuit 1

This results in an upper limit for the resistance dimension, Rmax, and a lower limit Rmin, from which the optimal value of the arithmetic mean R should be selected:

In order that the minimum voltage for controlling the binary input is ensured, Rmax is derived as:

To keep the circuit breaker trip coil energized in the above case, Rmin is derived as:

IBI (HIGH) VBImin

Constant current with activated BI ( = 1.8 mA) Minimum control voltage for BI (19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltages of 24/48/60 V; 88 V for delivery setting for nominal voltages of 110/125/220/250 V, 176 V for delivery setting for nominal voltages of 220/250 V) Control voltage for trip circuit DC resistance of circuit breaker trip coil Maximum voltage on the circuit breaker trip coil that does not lead to tripping

VCTR RTC VTC (LOW)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

371

3 Mounting and Commissioning

If the calculation yields that Rmax Rmin, the calculation must be repeated using the next lowest switching threshold VBI min, and this threshold must be implemented in the relay using plug-in jumpers (see Section Hardware Modifications). For the power consumption of the resistance:

Example:

IBI (HIGH) VBImin

1.8 mA (SIPROTEC 4 7SA522) 19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltages of 24/48/60 V (from the 7SA522); 88 V for delivery setting for nominal voltages of 110/125/220/250 V (from 7SA522); 176 V for delivery setting for nominal voltages of 220/250 V (from the 7SA522) 110 V (system / trip circuit) 500 (system / trip circuit) 2 V (system / trip circuit)

VCTR RTC VTC (LOW)

The closest standard value of 39 k is selected; the power is:

3.1.2
3.1.2.1

Hardware Modifications
General A subsequent adaptation of the hardware to the power system conditions can, for example, become necessary with regard to the control voltage for binary inputs or the termination of bus-capable interfaces. Follow the procedure described in this section, whenever hardware modifications are done.

Auxiliary Voltage

There are different ranges of input voltage for the auxiliary voltage (refer to the Ordering Information in Appendix A.1). The power supplies of the variants for 60/110/125 VDC and 110/125/220 VDC, 250/115 VAC are largely interchangeable by modifying the position of the jumpers. The assignment of these jumpers to the nominal voltage

372

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.1 Mounting and Connections

ranges and the spatial layout on the PCB are described further below at Processor Board C-I/O-1 and C-I/O-10. When the device is delivered, these jumpers are set according to the name-plate sticker. Generally, they do not need to be altered. Life Contact The life contact of the device is a changeover contact from which either the NC contact or the NO contact can be connected to the device terminals via a plug-in jumper (X40). The assignments of the jumpers to the contact type and the spatial layout of the jumper are described in the following Section at margin heading Processor Board CI/O-1 and C-I/O-10. The input transformers of the device are set to a nominal current of 1 A or 5 A with jumpers. The position of jumpers is determined according to the name-plate sticker. The assignments of the jumpers to the nominal current and the spatial layout of the jumpers are described in the following section under the margin heading Board CI/O -2. All jumpers must be set for one nominal current, i.e. one jumper (X61 to X64) for each input transformer and additionally the common jumper X60.

Nominal Currents

Note If nominal current ratings are changed exceptionally, then the new ratings must be registered in addresses 206 CT SECONDARY in the Power System Data (see Subsection 2.1.3.1).

Control Voltage for Binary Inputs

When the device is delivered from the factory, the binary inputs are set to operate with a voltage that corresponds to the rated DC voltage of the power supply. If the rated values differ from the power system control voltage, it may be necessary to change the switching threshold of the binary inputs. A jumper position is changed to adjust the pickup voltage of a binary input. The assignment of the jumpers to the binary inputs and the spatial layout are described in the following sections at margin heading Processor Board C-I/O-1 and C-I/O-10.

Note If binary inputs are used for trip circuit supervision, note that two binary inputs (or a binary input and a replacement resistor) are connected in series. The switching threshold must lie clearly below one half of the rated control voltage.

Contact Mode for Binary Outputs

Input/output boards can have relays that are equipped with changeover contacts. For this it is necessary to alter a jumper. The following sections at Switching Elements on Printed Circuit Boards explain for which relays on which boards this applies. Only serial interfaces of devices for panel flush and cubicle mounting as well as of mounting devices with detached operator panel are replaceable. In the following section under margin heading Exchanging Interface Modules it is described which interfaces can be exchanged, and how this is done.

Exchanging Interfaces

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

373

3 Mounting and Commissioning

Matching Interfaces with Bus Capability

If the device is equipped with a serial RS485 interface or PROFIBUS, they must be terminated with resistors at the last device on the bus to ensure reliable data transmission. On the interface board, termination resistors are provided that can be connected via jumpers. The spatial arrangement of the jumpers on the PCB on the interface modules is described at margin headings RS485Interfaces. Both jumpers must always be plugged in identically. The termination resistors are disabled on delivery.

Spare Parts

Spare parts can be the buffer battery that provides for storage of the data in the battery-buffered RAM when the voltage supply fails, and the miniature fuse of the internal power supply. Their spatial arrangement is shown in the figure of the processor board. The ratings of the fuse are printed on the board next to the fuse itself. When exchanging the fuse, please observe the hints given in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description in the chapter Maintenance and Corrective Action / Repairs.

3.1.2.2

Disassembly

Work on the Printed Circuit Boards

Note It is assumed for the following steps that the device is not operative.

Caution!
Caution when changing jumper settings that affect nominal values of the device: As a consequence, the order number (MLFB) and the ratings that are stated on the nameplate do no longer match the actual device properties. If changes are necessary under exceptional circumstances, the changes should be clearly and fully noted on the device. Self-adhesive labels are provided for this which can be used as supplementary nameplates. To perform work on the printed circuit boards, such as checking or moving switching elements or exchanging modules, proceed as follows: Prepare your workplace: Prepare a suitable mat for Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESD). Also the following tools are required: screwdriver with a 5 to 6 mm (7/32 inch) wide tip, a crosstip Phillips screwdriver for Pz size 1, a nut driver with 4.5 mm socket. Unfasten the screw-posts of the D-subminiature connector on the back panel at location A. This is not necessary if the device is designed for surface mounting. If the device features interfaces next to the interfaces at location A, the screws located diagonally to the interfaces must be removed. This is not necessary if the device is designed for surface mounting.

374

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.1 Mounting and Connections

Remove the covers on the front panel and loosen the screws which can then be accessed. Remove the front panel and place it carefully to the side. Work on the Plug Connectors

Caution!
Mind electrostatic discharges: Nonobservance can result in minor personal injury or property damage. Prior to handling plug connectors, electrostatic discharges must be avoided by touching grounded metal parts. Do not plug or unplug interface connectors under voltage! The arrangement of the boards for housing size 1/2 is shown in Figure 3-3 and for housing size 1/1 in Figure 3-4. Disconnect the plug connector of the ribbon cable between the front cover and the processor board C-CPU-1 (No. 1 in Figure 3-3) at the front cover side. Press the top latch of the plug connector up and the bottom latch down so that the plug connector of the ribbon cable is pressed out. Disconnect the ribbon cables between the processor board C-CPU-1 (No. 1 in Figure 3-3) and the input/output board I/O (according to order variant No. 2 to No. 4 in Figure 3-3). Remove the boards and put them on the grounded mat to protect them from ESD damage. Surface-mounted devices require a certain amount of force to remove the C-CPU-1 board due to the existing plug connector. Check the jumpers according to Figures 3-5 to 3-7, 3-9 to3-11 and the following information. Change or remove the jumpers if necessary.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

375

3 Mounting and Commissioning

Figure 3-3

Front view with housing size 1/2 after removal of the front cover (simplified and scaled down)

Figure 3-4

Front view with housing size 1/1 after removal of the front cover (simplified and scaled down)

376

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.1 Mounting and Connections

3.1.2.3

Switching Elements on Printed Circuit Boards The layout of the PCB for the input/output board C-I/O-1 is shown in Figure 3-5, the PCB for the input/output board C-I/O-10 is shown in Figure 3-6. The power supply is situated On the input/output board C-I/O-1 (No. 2 in Figure 3-3, slot 19) for housing size 1/2, On the input/output board C-I/O-1 (No. 2 in Figure 3-4, slot 33 left) for housing size 1 /1, The preset nominal voltage of the integrated power supply is checked according to Table 3-2, the quiescent state of the life contact is checked according to Table 3-3.
Table 3-2 Jumper settings of the nominal voltage of the integrated Power Supply of the input/output module C-I/O-1. Nominal Voltage 60/110/125 VDC 1-2 1-2 and 3-4 1-2 interchangeable 110/125/220/250 VDC 115 VAC 2-3 2-3 2-3 cannot be changed 24/48 VDC Jumpers X51 to X53 are not used

Input/Output Board C-I/O-1 and C-I/O-10

Jumper X51 X52 X53

Table 3-3

Jumper position of the quiescent state of the Life contact on the C-I/O-1 input/output module Open in quiescent state Closed in quiescent state (NO) (NC) 1-2 2-3 Presetting 2-3

Jumper X40

Depending on the device version the contacts of some binary outputs can be changed from normally open to normally closed (see Appendix, under section A.2). In versions 7SA522*-*D/H/M (housing size 1/1 with 32 binary outputs) this is valid for the binary outputs BO16 and BO24 (Figure 3-4, slot 19 left and right); In versions 7SA522*-*C/G/L (housing size 1/1 with 24 binary outputs) this is valid for the binary output BO16 (Figure 3-4, slot 19 right); In versions 7SA522*-*P/R/T (housing size 1/1 with 32 binary outputs and command acceleration) this is valid for the binary output BO24 (Figure 3-4, slot 19 left). Table 3-4 shows the jumper settings for the contact mode.
Table 3-4 Relay 7SA522** D/H/M Module for Jumper settings for contact mode of the relays for BO16 and BO24 on the C I/O-1 input/output board Jumper X40 X40 X40 X40 Open in quiescent state (NO) 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 Closed in quiescent state (NC) 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 Presetting 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2

Slot 19 left side BO 16 Slot 19 right side BO 24 BO 16

C/G/L P/R/T

Slot 19 right side

Slot 19 left side BO 24

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

377

3 Mounting and Commissioning

Figure 3-5

Input/output board C-I/O-1 with representation of the jumper settings required for the board configuration

378

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.1 Mounting and Connections

Figure 3-6

Input/output board CI/O-10 with representation of the jumper settings required for the board configuration

Check of the control voltages of the binary inputs: BI1 to BI8 (with housing size 1/2) according to Table 3-5. BI1 to BI24 (with housing size 1/1 depending on the version) according to Table 3-6.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

379

3 Mounting and Commissioning

Table 3-5

Jumper settings of the Control Voltages of the binary inputs BI1 to BI8 on the input/output board C-I/O-1 with housing size 1/2 Jumper X21/X22 X23/X24 X25/X26 X27/X28 X29/X30 X31/X32 X33/X34 X35/X36 17 V Threshold 1) 73 V Threshold 2) 154 V Threshold 3) L L L L L L L L M M M M M M M M H H H H H H H H

Binary inputs slot 19 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8
1) 2)

3)

Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC Factory settings for devices with rated power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 250 VDC and 115 VAC Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 220 VDC to 250 VDC and 115 VAC

Table 3-6

Jumper settings of the Control Voltages of the binary inputs BI1 to BI24 on the input/output board C-I/O-1 or C-I/O-10 with housing size 1/1 Binary Inputs Jumper Slot 19 left side BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24 X21/X22 X23/X24 X25/X26 X27/X28 X29/X30 X31/X32 X33/X34 X35/X36 17 V Pickup
1)

Slot 33 left side BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8
1) 2)

Slot 19 right side BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16

73 V Pickup 2) M M M M M M M M

154 V Pickup 3) H H H H H H H H

L L L L L L L L

3)

Factory settings for devices with rated power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC Factory settings for devices with rated power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 250 VDC and 115 VAC Factory settings for devices with rated power supply voltages of 220 VDC to 250 VDC and 115 VAC

Table 3-7 Jumper X71 X72 X73

Jumper settings of the PCB Address of the input/output board C-I/O-1 or C-I/O10 with housing size 1/1 Mounting location Slot 19 left side H L H Slot 19 right side L L H

Board C-I/O-2

The layout of the PCB for the C-I/O-2 board is shown in Figure 3-7.

380

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.1 Mounting and Connections

Figure 3-7

Input/output board CI/O-2 with representation of jumper settings required for checking configuration settings

The contact type of binary output BO13 can be changed from normally open to normally closed (see also overview diagrams in section A.2 of the Appendix). with housing size 1/2: No. 3 in Figure 3-3, slot 33 with housing size 1/1: No. 3 in Figure 3-4, slot 33 right.
Table 3-8 Jumper X41 Jumper setting for contact type of binary output BO13 Open in quiescent state (NO) 1-2 Closed in quiescent state (NC) 2-3 Presetting 1-2

The set nominal current of the current input transformers are to be checked on the input/output board C-I/O-2. All jumpers must be set for one nominal current, i.e. respectively one jumper (X61 to X64) for each input transformer and additionally the common

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

381

3 Mounting and Commissioning

jumper X60. But: In the version with sensitive ground fault current input (input transformer T8) there is no jumper X64. Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the input/output board C-I/O-2 are used to set the bus address and must not be changed. The following Table lists the jumper presettings. Mounting location: with housing size 1/2: No. 3 in Figure 3-3, slot 33 with housing size 1/1: No. 3 in Figure 3-4, slot 33 right.
Table 3-9 Jumper X71 X72 X73 Jumper settings of PCB Address of the input/output board C-I/O-2 Presetting 1-2(H) 1-2(H) 2-3(L)

3.1.2.4

Interface Modules The interface modules are located on the C-CPU-1 board. Figure 3-8 shows the PCB with the arranged modules.

Exchanging Interface Modules

382

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.1 Mounting and Connections

Figure 3-8

C-CPU-1 board with interface modules

Please note the following: The interface modules can only be exchanged in devices in flush-mounted housing. Interface modules for devices with surface mounting housing must be retrofitted in our manufacturing centre. Use only interface modules that can be ordered ex-factory via the ordering code (see also Appendix, Section A.1). You may have to ensure the termination of the interfaces featuring bus capability according to the margin heading RS485 Interface.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

383

3 Mounting and Commissioning

Table 3-10

Exchange Interface Modules Mounting location / interface B C Exchange module Only interface modules that can be ordered in our facilities via the order key (see also Appendix, Section A.1). FO5 to FO8

Interface System Interface Service Interface

Protection Data Interface 1 Protection Data Interface 2

D E

The order numbers of the exchange modules can be found in the Appendix in Section A.1, Accessories. RS232 Interface Interface RS232 can be modified to interface RS485 and vice versa (see Figures 3-9 and 3-10). Figure 3-8 shows the C-CPU-1 PCB with the layout of the modules. The following figure shows the location of the jumpers of interface RS232 on the interface module. Devices in surface mounting housing with fibre optics connection have their fibre optics module housed in the console housing. The fibre optics module is controlled via a RS232 interface module at the associated CPU interface slot. For this application type the jumpers X12 and X13 on the RS232 module are plugged in position 2-3.

Figure 3-9

Location of the jumpers for configuration of RS232

Terminating resistors are not required for RS232. They are disconnected. With jumper X11, CTS (Clear-to-Send) is activated which is necessary for modem communication is enabled.
Table 3-11 Jumper X11
1)

Jumper setting for CTS (Clear To Send, flow control) on the interface module /CTS from Interface RS232 1-2 /CTS controlled by /RTS 2-3 1)

Default Setting

384

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.1 Mounting and Connections

Jumper Setting 2-3: The connection to the modem is usually done with star coupler or fibre-optic converter. Therefore the modem control signals according to RS232 standard DIN 66020 are not available. Modem signals are not required since the connection to SIPROTEC 4 devices is always carried out in the half duplex mode. Please use connection cable with order number 7XV5100-4. Jumper Setting 1-2: This setting makes the modem signals available, i. e. for a direct RS232-connection between the SIPROTEC 4 device and the modem this setting can be selected optionally. We recommend to use a standard RS232 modem connection cable (converter 9-pin to 25-pin).

Note For a direct connection to DIGSI with Interface RS232, jumper X11 must be plugged in position 2-3.

RS485 Interface

The following figure shows the location of the jumpers of interface RS485 on the interface module. Interface RS485 can be modified to interface RS232 and vice versa, according to Figure 3-9.

Figure 3-10

Position of terminating resistors and the plug-in jumpers for configuration of the RS485 interface

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

385

3 Mounting and Commissioning

Interface PROFIBUS

Figure 3-11

Position of the plug-in jumpers for the configuration of the terminating resistors at the interfaces Profibus (FMS and DP) and DNP 3.0 interface.

RS485 Termination

Busbar capable interfaces always require a termination at the last device to the bus, i.e. terminating resistors must be connected. With the 7SA522 device, this concerns the variants with RS485 or PROFIBUS interfaces. The terminating resistors are located on the RS485 or Profibus interface module that is mounted to the C-CPU-1 board (serial no. 1 in Figures 3-3 to 3-4). Figure 3-8 shows the C-CPU-1 PCB with the layout of the boards. The board with configuration as RS485 interface is shown in Figure 3-10, the module for the PROFIBUS interface in Figure 3-11. For the configuration of the terminating resistors both jumpers have to be plugged in the same way. On delivery the jumpers are set such that the termination resistors are disconnected. The terminating resistors can also be connected externally (e.g. to the terminal block), see Figure 3-12. In this case, the terminating resistors located on the RS485 or PROFIBUS interface module must be de energized.

Figure 3-12

Termination of the RS485 interface (external)

386

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.1 Mounting and Connections

3.1.2.5

Reassembly Device reassembly is done in the following steps: Insert the boards carefully in the housing. The mounting locations of the boards are shown in Figures 3-3 and 3-4. For surface-mounted devices, use the metal lever to insert the processor board C-CPU-1. Installation is easier with the lever. First plug in the plug connectors of the ribbon cable onto the input/output boards I/O and then onto the processor board C-CPU-1. Be careful that no connector pins are bent! Do not apply force! Connect the plug connectors of the ribbon cable between processor board C-CPU1 and the front panel to the front panel plug connector. Press plug connector interlocks together. Replace the front panel and screw it again tightly to the housing. Replace the covers again. Re-fasten the interfaces on the rear of the device housing. This activity is not necessary for surface-mounted devices.

3.1.3
3.1.3.1

Installation
Panel Flush Mounting Depending on the version, the device housing can be 1/2 or 1/1. For housing size 1/2 , there are 4 covers and 4 holes, as shown in Figure 3-13. There are 6 covers and 6 holes for the full housing size 1/1, as indicated in Figure 3-14. Remove the 4 covers at the corners of the front cover, for housing size 1/1 the two covers located centrally at the top and bottom also have to be removed. Thus the 4 respectively 6 elongated holes in the mounting bracket are revealed and can be accessed. Insert the device into the panel cut-out and fasten it with four or six screws. For dimensions refer to Section 4.23. Mount the four or six covers. Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the panel. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire must be equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. The cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm 2. Connect the plug terminals and/or the screwed terminals on the rear side of the device according to the wiring diagram of the panel. When using forked lugs for direct connections or screw terminal, the screws, before having inserted the lugs and wires, must be tightened in such a way that the screw heads are even with the terminal block. A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber, in such a way that the screw thread fits in the hole of the lug. Specifications regarding maximum cross sections, tightening torques, bending radii and tension relief as specified in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description (Order no. E50417-H1176-C151) must be observed. You will find hints in the short description included in the device.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

387

3 Mounting and Commissioning

Figure 3-13

Example of panel flush mounting of a device (housing size 1/2)

Figure 3-14

Example of panel flush mounting of a unit (housing size 1/1)

388

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.1 Mounting and Connections

3.1.3.2

Rack Mounting and Cubicle Mounting Two mounting rails are required for installing a device into a frame or cabinet. The ordering codes are stated in the Appendix, Section A.1 For the 1/2 housing size (Figure 3-15), there are 4 covers and 4 holes. For the 1/1 housing size (Figure 3-16) there are 6 covers and 6 holes. Screw on loosely the two angle brackets in the rack or cabinet, each with four screws. Remove the 4 covers at the corners of the front cover, for housing size 1/1 the 2 covers located centrally at the top and bottom also have to be removed. Thus the 4 respectively 6 elongated holes in the mounting bracket are revealed and can be accessed. Fasten the device to the mounting brackets with four or six screws. Mount the four or six covers. Tighten fast the eight screws of the angle brackets in the rack or cabinet. Screw down a robust low-ohmic protective ground or station ground to the rear of the device using at least an M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire must be equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. The cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm 2. Connections use the plug terminals or screw terminals on the rear side of the device in accordance the wiring diagram. For screw connections with forked lugs or direct connection, before inserting wires the screws must be tightened so that the screw heads are flush with the outer edge of the connection block. A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber so that the screw thread fits in the hole of the lug. Specifications regarding maximum cross sections, tightening torques, bending radii and tension relief as specified in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description (Order no. E50417-H1176-C151) must be observed. A short description on the device includes information on this matter.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

389

3 Mounting and Commissioning

Figure 3-15

Mounting device in a rack or cubicle (housing size 1/2), as an example

390

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.1 Mounting and Connections

Figure 3-16

Installation example of a unit in a rack or cubicle (housing size 1/1)

3.1.3.3

Panel Surface Mounting For mounting proceed as follows: Secure the device to the panel with four screws. For dimensions see the Technical Data in Section 4.23. Connect the ground of the device to the protective ground of the panel. The crosssectional area of the ground wire must be equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. The cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm 2. Connect solid, low-impedance operational grounding (cross-sectional area 2.5 mm2) to the grounding surface on the side. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. Connections according to the circuit diagram via screw terminals, connections for optical fibres and electrical communication modules via the inclined housings. Specifications regarding maximum cross sections, tightening torques, bending radii and tension relief as specified in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description (Order no. E50417-H1176-C151) must be observed. You will find hints in the short description included in the device.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

391

3 Mounting and Commissioning

3.2
3.2.1

Checking Connections
Checking Data Connections of Serial Interfaces
The tables of the following margin headings list the pin-assignments for the different serial interfaces of the device and the time synchronization interface. The position of the connections can be seen in the following Figure.

Figure 3-17

9-pin D-subminiature female connectors

Operator Interface

When using the recommended communication cable (see order no. in the Appendix A.1), the correct connection between the SIPROTEC 4 device and the PC or Laptop is automatically ensured. Check the data connection if the service interface (Interface C) for communication with the device via fix wiring or a modem. For versions equipped with a serial interface to a control center, the user must check the data connection. The visual check of the assignment of the transmission and reception channels is of particular importance. With RS232 and fibre optic interfaces, each connection is dedicated to one transmission direction. Therefore the output of one device must be connected to the input of the other device and vice versa. With data cables, the connections are designated according to DIN 66020 and ISO 2110: TxD = Data Transmit RxD = Data Receive RTS = Request to Send CTS = Clear to Send GND = Signal / Chassis Ground The cable shield is to be grounded at both line ends. For extremely EMC-prone environments, the ground may be connected via a separate individually shielded wire pair to improve immunity to interference.

Service Interface

System Interface

392

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.2 Checking Connections

Table 3-12 Pin No. Operator interface 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RxD TxD GROUND RTS CTS 1)

The assignments of the subminiature connector for the various interfaces RS 485 PROFIBUS FMS Slave, RS 485 PROFIBUS DP Slave, RS 485 Shield (with shield ends electrically connected) DNP3.0 RS485

RS232

RxD TxD GROUND RTS CTS -

A/A' (RxD/TxD-N) C/C (GROUND) - 1) B/B' (RxD/TxD-P) -

B/B' (RxD/TxD-P) CNTR-A (TTL) C/C (GROUND) +5 V (max. load 100 mA) A/A' (RxD/TxD-N) -

A RTS (TTL level) GROUND1 VCC1 B -

Pin 7 also carries the RTS signal with RS232 level when operated as RS485 Interface. Pin 7 must therefore not be connected!

Termination

The RS485 interface is capable of half-duplex service with the signals A/A' and B/B' with a common relative potential C/C' (GND). It is necessary to check that the terminating resistors are connected to the bus only at the last unit, and not at all the other devices on the bus. The jumpers for the terminating resistors are located on the interface module RS485 (see Figure 3-9) or on the Profibus module RS485 (see Figure 310). The terminating resistors can also be connected externally (e.g. to the connection module) as illustrated in Figure 3-12. In this case, the terminating resistors located on the module must be disconnected. If the bus is extended, make sure again that only terminating resistors at the last device to the bus are switched in. The remaining terminating resistors at the bus must not be connected to the system.

Time Synchronization Interface

It is optionally possible to process 5-V-, 12-V- or 24-V-time synchronization signals, provided that these are connected to the inputs named in the following Table.
Table 3-13 Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1)

D-subminiature connector assignment of the time synchronization interface Designation P24_TSIG P5_TSIG M_TSIG - 1) SHIELD P12_TSIG P_TSYNC 1) SHIELD Signal meaning Input 24 V Input 5 V Return line - 1) Shield potential Input 12 V Input 24 V 1) Shield potential

Assigned, but cannot be used

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

393

3 Mounting and Commissioning

Optical Fibres

WARNING!
Warning of laser rays! Non-observance of the following measure can result in death, personal injury or substantial property damage. Do not look directly into the fibre-optic elements, not even with optical devices! Laser Class 3A according to IEC 60825-1. For the protection data communication, refer to the following section. Signals transmitted via optical fibres are unaffected by interference. The fibres guarantee electrical isolation between the connections. Transmit and receive connections are identified with the symbols for transmit and for receive. The idle state for the optical fiber interface is Light off. If the idle state is to be changed, use the operating program DIGSI, as described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description, Order No. E50417-H1176-C151, also available on the Internet.

3.2.2

Checking the Protection Data Communication

If the device features protection data interfaces for digital communication links, the transmission way must be checked. The protection data communication is conducted either directly from device to device via optical fibres or via communication converters and a communication network or a dedicated transmission medium.

Optical Fibres, Directly

WARNING!
Warning of laser rays! Non-observance of the following measure can result in death, personal injury or substantial property damage. Do not look directly into the fibre-optic elements, not even with optical devices! Laser Class 3A according to IEC 60825-1. The direct optical fibre connection is visually controlled by means of an optical fibre connector. There is one connection for each direction. Therefore the output of the one device must be connected to the input of the other device and vice versa. Transmission and receiving connections are identified with the symbols for transmit and for receive. Important is the visual check of assignment of the transmitter and reception channels. If using more than one device, the connections of all protection data interfaces are checked according to the topology selected.

394

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.2 Checking Connections

Communication Converter

Optical fibres are usually used for the connections between the devices and communication converters. The optical fibres are checked in the same manner as the optical fibre direct connection which means for every protection data interface. Make sure that under address 4502 CONNEC. 1 VIA or 4602 CONNEC. 2 VIA the correct connection type is parameterized.

Further Connections

For further connections a visual control is sufficient for the time being. Electrical and functional controls are performed during commissioning (see the following main section).

3.2.3

Checking System Connections

WARNING!
Warning of dangerous voltages Non-observance of the following measures can result in death, personal injury or substantial property damage. Therefore, only qualified people who are familiar with and adhere to the safety procedures and precautionary measures shall perform the inspection steps.

Caution!
Be careful when operating the device on a battery charger without a battery Non-observance of the following measure can lead to unusually high voltages and consequently, the destruction of the device. Do not operate the device on a battery charger without a connected battery. (For limit values see also Technical Data, Section 4.1). Before the device is energized for the first time, the device should be in the final operating environment for at least 2 hours to equalize the temperature, to minimize humidity and avoid condensation. Connections are checked with the device at its final location. The plant must first be switched off and grounded. Proceed as follows in order to check the system connections: Protective switches for the power supply and the measured voltages must be opened. Check the continuity of all current and voltage transformer connections against the system and connection diagrams: Are the current transformers grounded properly? Are the polarities of the current transformers the same? Is the phase relationship of the current transformers correct? Are the voltage transformers grounded properly? Are the polarities of the voltage transformers correct? Is the phase relationship of the voltage transformers correct?

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

395

3 Mounting and Commissioning

Is the polarity for current input I4 correct (if used)? Is the polarity for voltage input V4 correct (if used, e.g. with broken delta winding or busbar voltage)? Check the functions of all test switches that are installed for the purposes of secondary testing and isolation of the device. Of particular importance are test switches in current transformer circuits. Be sure these switches short-circuit the current transformers when they are in the test mode. The short-circuit feature of the current circuits of the device are to be checked. This may be performed with an ohmmeter or other test equipment for checking continuity. Make sure that terminal continuity is not wrongly simulated in reverse direction via current transformers or their short circuit links. Remove the front panel of the device (see also Figures 3-3 to 3-4). Remove the ribbon cable connected to the input/output board with the measured current inputs (on the front side it is the right PCB, for housing size1/2 see Figure 3-3 slot 33, for housing size 1/1 see Figure 3-4 slot 33 right). Furthermore, remove the PCB so that there is no more contact with the plug-in terminal. At the terminals of the device, check continuity for each pair of terminals that receives current from the CTs. Firmly re-insert the I/O board. Carefully connect the ribbon cable. Be careful that no connector pins are bent! Don't apply force! At the terminals of the device, again check continuity for each pair of terminals that receives current from the CTs. Attach the front panel and tighten the screws. Connect an ammeter in the supply circuit of the power supply. A range of about 2.5 A to 5 A for the meter is appropriate. Switch on m.c.b. for auxiliary voltage (supply protection), check the voltage level and, if applicable, the polarity of the voltage at the device terminals or at the connection modules. The measured steady-state current should correspond to the quiescent power consumption of the device. Transient movement of the ammeter merely indicates the charging current of capacitors. Remove the voltage from the power supply by opening the protective switches. Disconnect the measuring test equipment; restore the normal power supply connections. Apply voltage to the power supply. Close the protective switches for the voltage transformers. Verify that the voltage phase rotation at the device terminals is correct. Open the miniature circuit breakers for the transformer voltage (VT mcb) and the power supply. Check tripping circuits to the circuit breakers. Check the close circuits to the power system circuit breakers Verify that the control wiring to and from other devices is correct. Check the signalling connections. Close the protective switches.

396

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.3 Commissioning

3.3

Commissioning WARNING!
Warning of dangerous voltages when operating an electrical device Non-observance of the following measures can result in death, personal injury or substantial property damage. Only qualified people shall work on and around this device. They must be thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices in this instruction manual as well as with the applicable safety steps, safety regulations, and precautionary measures. Before making any connections, the device must be grounded at the protective conductor terminal. Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the connections to current transformers, voltage transformers, and test circuits. Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after the power supply voltage has been removed (capacitors can still be charged). After removing voltage from the power supply, wait a minimum of 10 seconds before re-energizing the power supply. This wait allows the initial conditions to be firmly established before the device is re-energized. The limit values given in Technical Data must not be exceeded, neither during testing nor during commissioning. For tests with a secondary test equipment ensure that no other measurement voltages are connected and the trip and close commands to the circuit breakers are blocked, unless otherwise specified.

DANGER!
Hazardous voltages during interruptions in secondary circuits of current transformers Non-observance of the following measure will result in death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage. Short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits before current connections to the device are opened. During the commissioning procedure, switching operations must be carried out. The tests described require that they can be done without danger. They are accordingly not meant for operational checks.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

397

3 Mounting and Commissioning

WARNING!
Warning of dangers evolving from improper primary tests Non-observance of the following measure can result in death, personal injury or substantial property damage. Primary tests may only be carried out by qualified persons who are familiar with commissioning protection systems, with managing power systems and the relevant safety rules and guidelines (switching, grounding etc.).

3.3.1

Test Mode / Transmission Block

If the device is connected to a central control system or a server via the SCADA interface, then the information that is transmitted can be modified with some of the protocols available (see Table Protocol-dependent functions in the Appendix A.5). If Test mode is set ON, then a message sent by a SIPROTEC 4 device to the main control system has an additional test bit. This bit allows the message to be recognized as resulting from testing and not an actual fault or power system event. Furthermore, it can be determined by activating the Transmission block that no annunciations at all are transmitted via the system interface during a test mode. The SIPROTEC 4 System Description describes in detail how to activate and deactivate test mode and blocked data transmission (Order no. E50417-H1176-C151). Note that when DIGSI is being used, the program must be Online for the test features to be used.

Activation and Deactivation

3.3.2

Checking Time Synchronization

If external time synchronization sources are used, the data of the time source (antenna system, time generator) are checked (see Subsection 4.1.4 under Time Synchronization). A correct function (IRIG B, DCF77) is recognized in such a way that 3 minutes after the startup of the device the clock status is displayed as synchronized, accompanied by the message Alarm Clock OFF.
Table 3-14 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Legend: NS ER ST Time status Status text ST ER ER ST NS ER NS time invalid time fault summertime not synchronized synchronized Status

398

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.3 Commissioning

3.3.3

Testing the System Interface

If the device features a system interface and uses it to communicate with the control centre, the DIGSI device operation can be used to test if annunciations are transmitted correctly. This test option should however definitely not be used while the device is in service on a live system.

Prefacing Remarks

DANGER!
Sending or receiving annunciations via the system interface by means of the test function is a real information exchange between the SIPROTEC device and the control centre. Connected operating equipment such as circuit breakers or disconnectors can be operated in this way! Non-observance of the following measure will result in death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage. Equipment used to allow switching such as circuit breakers or disconnectors is to be checked only during commissioning. Do not under any circumstances check them by means of the testing mode during real operation performing transmission and reception of messages via the system interface.

Note After termination of this test, the device will reboot. Thereby, all indication buffers are erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI prior to the test. The system interface test is carried out Online using DIGSI Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device appear. Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the window. Double-click in the list view on Generate indications. The dialog box Generate Indications opens (refer to the following figure). Structure of the Dialog Box In the column Indication, all message texts that were configured for the system interface in the matrix will then appear. In the column Setpoint you determine a value for the indications that shall be tested. Depending on the type of message different entering fields are available (e.g. message ON / message OFF). By clicking on one of the buttons you can select the desired value from the pull-down menu.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

399

3 Mounting and Commissioning

Figure 3-18

System interface test with dialog box: Generate annunciations - example

Changing the Operating State

By clicking one of the buttons in the column Action you will be asked for the password No. 6 (for hardware test menus). After you have entered the password correctly you now can send the indications individually. To do so, click on the button Send on the corresponding line. The corresponding message is issued and can now be read out from the event log of the SIPROTEC 4 device and from the control centre. Further tests remain enabled, until the dialog box is closed.

Test in Message Direction

For all information that is transmitted to the central station test in Setpoint the desired options in the list which appears: Make sure that each checking process is carried out carefully without causing any danger (see above and refer to DANGER!) Click Send in the function to be tested and check whether the corresponding information reaches the control center and possibly shows the expected effect. Data which are normally linked via binary inputs (first character >) are likewise indicated to the control center with this procedure. The function of the binary inputs itself is tested separately.

Exiting the Test Mode Test in Command Direction

To end the system interface test, click on Close. The dialog box is closed, the device is not ready for operation during the following startup The information transmitted in command direction must be indicated by the central station. Check whether the reaction is correct.

400

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.3 Commissioning

3.3.4

Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs

The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC 4 device can be individually and precisely controlled in DIGSI 4. This feature is used, for example, to verify control wiring from the device to plant equipment during commissioning. This test option should however definitely not be used while the device is in service on a live system.

Prefacing Remarks

DANGER!
Sending or receiving annunciations via the system interface by means of the test function is a real information exchange between the SIPROTEC device and the control center. Connected operating equipment such as circuit breakers or disconnectors can be switched in this way! Non-observance of the following measure will result in death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage. Equipment used to allow switching such as circuit breakers or disconnectors is to be checked only during commissioning. Do not under any circumstances check them by means of the testing mode during real operation performing transmission and reception of messages via the system interface.

Note After termination of the hardware test, the device will reboot. Thereby, all annunciation buffers are erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI prior to the test. The hardware test can be done using DIGSI in the Online operating mode: Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device appear. Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the window. Double-click in the list view on Hardware Test. The dialog box of the same name opens (see the following Figure). Structure of the Dialog Box The dialog box is classified into three groups: BI for binary inputs, REL for output relays, and LED for light-emitting diodes. On the left of each group is an accordingly labelled panel. By double-clicking these panels you can show or hide the individual information of the selected group. In the column Status the present (physical) state of the hardware component is displayed. It is displayed symbolically. The physical scheduled states of the binary inputs and outputs are indicated by an open or closed switch symbol, the LEDs by a dark or illuminated LED symbol. The opposite state of each element is displayed in the column Scheduled. The display is in plain text. The right-most column indicates the commands or messages that are configured (masked) to the hardware components.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

401

3 Mounting and Commissioning

Figure 3-19

Test of the Binary Inputs and Outputs - Example

Changing the Operating State

To change the operating state of a hardware component, click on the associated switching field in the Scheduled column. Before executing the first change of the operating state the password No. 6 will be requested (if activated during configuration). After entry of the correct password a condition change will be executed. Further state changes remain enabled until the dialog box is closed.

Test of the Binary Outputs

Each individual output relay can be energized allowing a check of the wiring between the output relays of the 7SA522 and the plant, without having to generate the message that is assigned to the relay. As soon as the first change of state for any of the output relays is initiated, all output relays are separated from the internal device functions, and can only be operated by the hardware test function. This means, that e.g. a TRIP command coming from a protection function or a control command from the operator panel to an output relay cannot be executed. Proceed as follows in order to check the output relay : Make sure that the switching operations caused by the output relays, can be executed without any danger (see above under DANGER!). Each output relay must be tested via the corresponding Scheduled-cell in the dialog box. Finish the testing (see margin title below Exiting the Procedure), so that during further testing no unwanted switching is initiated.

Test of the Binary Inputs

To test the wiring between the plant and the binary inputs of the 7SA522 the condition in the system which initiates the binary input must be generated and the response of the device checked. To do so, open the dialog box Hardware Test again to view the physical position of the binary input. The password is not yet required.

402

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.3 Commissioning

Proceed as follows in order to check the binary inputs: Activate in the system each of the functions which cause the binary inputs. Check the reaction in the Status column of the dialog box. To do this, the dialogue box must be updated. The options may be found below under the margin heading Updating the Display. Finish the testing (see margin heading below Exiting the Procedure). If you want to check for the effects a binary input can have, you can do so by controlling individual binary inputs with the hardware test. As soon as the first state change of any binary input is triggered and the password no. 6 has been entered, all binary inputs are separated from the plant and can only be activated via the hardware test function. Test of the LEDs The LEDs may be tested in a similar manner to the other input/output components. As soon as the first state change of any LED has been triggered, all LEDs are separated from the internal device functionality and can only be controlled via the hardware test function. This means e.g. that no LED is illuminated anymore by a protection function or by pressing the LED reset button. When the dialog box Hardware Test is opened, the present conditions of the hardware components at that moment are read in and displayed. An update is made: For the particular hardware component, if a command for change to another state was successful, For all hardware components if the Update button is clicked, For all hardware components with cyclical updating (cycle time is 20 sec) if the Automatic Update (20sec) field is marked. Exiting the Procedure To finish the hardware test, click on Close. The dialog box closes. The hardware components are again reset to the original operating state determined by the plant conditions. The device is not ready for operation for a short time during the following startup.

Updating the Display

3.3.5
General

Checking the Communication Topology

The communication topology can be checked from the PC using DIGSI. You can either connect the PC to the device locally using the operator interface at the front, or the service interface at the back of the PC (Figure 3-20). Or you can log into the device using a modem via the service interface (example in Figure 3-21).

Figure 3-20

PC interfacing directly to the device - example

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

403

3 Mounting and Commissioning

Figure 3-21

PC interfacing via modem - schematic example

Checking a Connection Using Direct Link

For two devices linked with fibre optical cables (as in Figure 3-20 or 3-21), this connection is checked as follows. If two or more devices are linked or, if two devices have been (double-) linked with a ring topology, first check only one link. Both devices at the link ends have to be switched on. Check in the event log or in the spontaneous annunciations: If the message PI1 conn. w/ ID (protection data interface 1 connected with No. 3243) is provided with the device index of the other device, a link has been established and one device has recognized the other. If the protection data interface 2 has also been connected, a corresponding message will appear PI2 conn. w/ ID (No. 3244). In case of an incorrect communication link, you see the message PI1 Data fault (No. 3229) or PI2 Data fault (No. 3231). In this case, check the fibre optical cable link again. Have the devices been linked correctly and no cables been mixed up? Are the cables free from mechanical damage, intact and the connectors locked? Otherwise repeat check. Continue with the margin title Consistency of Topology and Configuration.

Checking a Link with a Communication Converter

If a communication converter is used, please note the instructions enclosed with the device. The communication converter has a test setting where its outputs are looped back to the inputs. Links via the communication converter are tested by means of local loop-back (Figure 3-22, left).

Figure 3-22

Distance protection communication via communication converter and communication network - example

404

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.3 Commissioning

DANGER!
Opening the communication converter There is danger to life by energized parts. Before opening the communication converter, it is absolutely necessary to isolate it from the auxiliary supply voltage at all poles!

Both devices at the link ends have to be switched on. First configure the communication converter CC-1: Open the communication converter. Set the jumpers to the matching position for the correct interface type and transmission rate; they must be identical with the parameterization of the 7SA522 (address 4502 CONNEC. 1 VIA for protection data interface 1 and 4602 CONNEC. 2 VIA for protection data interface 2, see also Subsection 2.4.2). Move the communication converter into test position (jumper X32 in position 2-3). Close the communication converter housing. Reconnect the auxiliary supply voltage for the communication converter. The system interface (X.21 or G703.1) must be active and connected to the communication converter. Check this by means of the "device ready"-contact of the communication converter (continuity at the NO contact). If the "device ready"-contact of the communication converter doesn't close, check the connection between the communication converter and the net (communication device). The communication device must emit the correct transmitter clock to the communication converter. Change the interface parameters at the 7SA522 (at the device front or via DIGSI): Address 4502 CONNEC. 1 VIA = F.optic direct when you are testing protection data interface 1, Address 4602 CONNEC. 2 VIA = F.optic direct when you are testing protection data interface 2.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

405

3 Mounting and Commissioning

Check the operating indications or in the spontaneous annunciations: Message 3217 PI1 Data reflec (Protection interface 1 data reflection ON) when you test protection data interface 1, Message 3218 PI2 Data reflec (Protection interface 2 data reflection ON) when you test protection data interface 2. When working with both interfaces, note that the current interface of the 7SA522 relay is connected to its associated communication converter. If the indication is not transmitted check for the following: Has the 7SA522 fibre optical transmitting terminal output been correctly linked with the fibre optical receiving terminal input of the communication converter and vice versa (No erroneous interchanging)? Does the 7SA522 device have the correct interface module and is it working correctly? Are the fibre optic cables intact? Are the parameter settings for interface type and transmission rate at the communication converter correct (see above; note the DANGER instruction!)? Repeat the check after correction, if necessary. Reset the interface parameters at the 7SA522 correctly: Address 4502 CONNEC. 1 VIA = required setting, when you have tested protection data interface 1, Address 4602 CONNEC. 2 VIA = required setting, when you have tested protection data interface 2. Disconnect the auxiliary supply voltage of the communication converter at both poles. Note the above DANGER instruction! Reset the communication converter to normal position (X32 in position 1-2) and close the housing again. Reconnect the supply voltage of the communication converter. Perform the above check at the other end with the device being connected there and its corresponding communication converter. Continue with the margin title Consistency of Topology and Parameterization. Consistency of Topology and Configuration Having performed the above checks, the linking of a device pair, including their communication converters, has been completely tested and connected to auxiliary supply voltage. Now the devices communicate by themselves. Check now the Event Log or in the spontaneous annunciations of the device where you are working: Message No. 3243 PI1 conn. w/ ID (protection data interface 1 linked with) followed by the device index of the other device, if interface 1 is applying. For protection data interface 2 the message is FNo 3244 PI2 conn. w/ ID. If the devices are at least connected once, the message No. 3458 Chaintopology will appear. If no other devices are involved in the topology as an entity, the message No. 3464 Topol complete will then be displayed, too.

406

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.3 Commissioning

And if the device configuration is also consistent, i.e. the prerequisites for setting the function scope (Section 2.1.1), Power System Data 1 (2.1.3.1), Power System Data 2 (2.1.5.1) topology and protection data interface parameters (Section 2.4.2) have been considered, the fault message, i.e. No. 3229 PI1 Data fault or No. 3231 PI2 Data fault for the interface just checked will disappear. The communication and consistency test has now been completed. If the fault message of the interface being checked does not disappear, however, the fault must be found and eliminated. Table 3-15 lists messages that indicate such faults.
Table 3-15 No. 3233 Messages on Inconsistencies LCD Text DT inconsistent Meaning / Measures Device table inconsistent: The indexing of the devices is inconsistent (missing numbers or one number used twice, see Section 2.4.2) Device table unequal: the ID-numbers of the devices are unequal (see Section 2.4.2 ) Parameterization different: Different functional parameters were set for the devices. They have to be equal at both ends:

3234 3235

DT unequal Par. different

Checking Further Links

If more than two devices have been linked, that is if the object to be protected has more than two ends, or, if two devices have been linked via both protection data interfaces to create redundancy, repeat all checks for every possible link as described above including the consistency check. If all devices involved in the topology communicate properly and all parameters are consistent, the message No.3464 Topol complete appears. If there is a ring topology (only in connection with a 7SA522), the message No. 3457 Ringtopology must also appear after closing the ring. However, if you are employing a ring topology, which only issues the indication Chaintopology instead of Ringtopology, the protection data communication is functional, but the ring has not yet been closed. Check the missing links as described above including the consistency test until all links to the ring have been made. Finally, there should be no more fault messages of the protection data interfaces.

3.3.6
General

Testing the Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

If the device is equipped with the breaker failure protection and this function is used, the integration of this protection function into the system must be tested under practical conditions. Because of the manifold application facilities and various configuration possibilities of the power plant it is not possible to give detailed description of the necessary test steps. It is important to observe local conditions and protection and system drawings. Before starting the circuit breaker tests it is recommended to insulate at both ends the feeder which is to be tested, i.e. line disconnectors and busbar disconnectors should be open so that the breaker can be operated without risk.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

407

3 Mounting and Commissioning

Caution!
Also for tests on the local circuit breaker of the feeder a trip command to the surrounding circuit breakers can be issued for the busbar. Non-observance of the following measure can result in minor personal injury or property damage. Therefore, primarily it is recommended to interrupt the tripping commands to the adjacent (busbar) breakers e.g. by interrupting the corresponding pickup voltage supply. Before the breaker is closed again for normal operation the trip command of the feeder protection routed to the circuit breaker must be disconnected so that the trip command can only be initiated by the breaker failure protection. Although the following lists do not claim to be complete, they may also contain points which are to be ignored in the current application. Auxiliary Contacts of the CB The circuit breaker auxiliary contact(s) form an essential part of the breaker failure protection system in case they have been connected to the device. Make sure the correct assignment has been checked. If the breaker failure protection is intended to be initiated by external protection devices, each of the external initiation conditions must be checked. Single-pole or threepole tripping is possible depending on the setting of the breaker failure protection. Note that the pole discrepancy supervision of the device or the breaker may lead to a later three-pole trip. Therefore check first how the parameters of the breaker failure protection are set. See Subsection 2.18.2, addresses 3901 onwards. In order for the breaker failure protection to be started, a current must flow at least via the monitored phase and ground. This may be a secondary injected current. After every start, the message 50BF Start (FNo 1461) must appear in the spontaneous or fault annunciations. Only if single-pole starting possible: Start by single-pole trip command of the external protection: A Binary input functions >50BF Start A and, if necessary, >50BF release (in or spontaneous or fault messages). Trip command (dependent on settings). Start by single-pole trip command of the external protection: B Binary input functions >50BF Start B and if necessary >50BF release (in spontaneous or fault messages). Trip command (dependent on settings). Start by single-pole trip command of the external protection: C Binary input functions >50BF Start C and, if necessary,>50BF release (in spontaneous or fault messages). Trip command (dependent on settings). Starting by trip command of the external protection via all three binary inputs A, B and C: Binary input functions >50BF Start A, >50BF Start B and >50BF Start C and, if necessary, >50BF release (in spontaneous or fault messages). Trip command three-pole. For three-pole starting: Three-pole starting by trip command of the external protection: Binary input functions >50BF Start 3p and, if necessary, >50BF release (in or spontaneous or fault messages). Trip command (dependent on settings).

External Initiation Conditions

408

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.3 Commissioning

Switch off test current. If start is possible without current flow: Starting by trip command of the external protection without current flow: Binary input functions >50BF STARTw/oI and, if necessary, >50BF release (in or spontaneous or fault messages). Trip command (dependent on settings). Busbar Tripping Major importance must be attached to checking the correct distribution of the trip commands to the adjacent circuit breakers in case of breaker failure. The adjacent circuit breakers are those of all feeders which must be tripped in order to ensure interruption of the fault current should the local breaker fail. These are therefore the circuit breakers of all feeders which feed the busbar or busbar section to which the feeder with the fault is connected. A general detailed test guide cannot be specified, because the layout of the surrounding circuit breakers largely depends on the system topology. In particular with multiple busbars the trip distribution logic for the surrounding circuit breakers must be checked. Here check for every busbar section that all circuit breakers which are connected to the same busbar section as the feeder circuit breaker under observation are tripped, and no other breakers. Tripping of the Remote End If the trip command of the circuit breaker failure protection must also trip the circuit breaker at the remote end of the feeder under observation, the transmission channel for this remote trip must also be checked. This is done together with transmission of other signals according to Sections Testing of the Pilot Protection Scheme with ... further below. All temporary measures taken for testing must be undone, e.g. especially switching states, interrupted trip commands, changes to setting values or individually switched off protection functions.

Termination of the Checks

3.3.7

Current, Voltage, and Phase Rotation Testing

The connections of the current and voltage transformers are tested using primary quantities. Secondary load current of at least 10 % of the nominal current of the device is necessary. The line is energized and will remain in this state during the measurements. With proper connections of the measuring circuits, none of the measured-values supervision elements in the device should pick up. If an element detects a problem, the causes which provoked it may be viewed in the Event Log. If current or voltage summation errors occur, then check the matching factors (see Section 2.1.3.1). Messages from the symmetry monitoring could occur because there actually are asymmetrical conditions in the network. If these asymmetrical conditions are normal service conditions, the corresponding monitoring functions should be made less sensitive (see Section 2.19.1.5) .

10 % of Load Current

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

409

3 Mounting and Commissioning

Quantities

Currents and voltages can be viewed in the display field on the front of the device or the operator interface via a PC. They can be compared to the actual measured values, as primary and secondary quantities. If the measured values are not plausible, the connection must be checked and corrected after the line has been isolated and the current transformer circuits have been short-circuited. The measurements must then be repeated.

Phase Rotation

The phase rotation must correspond to the configured phase rotation, in general a clockwise phase rotation. If the system has a counterclockwise phase sequence, this must have been considered when the power system data was set (address 235 PHASE SEQ.). If the phase rotation is incorrect, the alarm Fail Ph. Seq. (FNo 171) is generated. The measured value phase allocation must be checked and corrected, if required, after the line has been isolated and current transformers have been short-circuited. The measurement must then be repeated. Open the miniature circuit breaker of the feeder voltage transformers. The measured voltages in the operational measured values appear with a value close to zero (small measured voltages are of no consequence). Check in the spontaneous annunciations that the VT mcb trip was entered (message >FAIL:Feeder VT ON in the spontaneous annunciations). Beforehand it has to be assured that the position of the VT mcb is connected to the device via a binary input. Close the VT mcb again: The above messages appear in the spontaneous messages as OFF, i.e. >FAIL:Feeder VT OFF. If one of the annunciations does not appear, check the connection and allocation of these signals. If the ON state and OFF state are swapped, the contact type (Hactive or Lactive) must be checked and remedied. If a busbar voltage is used (for voltage or synchronism check) and the assigned VT mcb is connected to the device, the following function must also be checked: If the VT mcb is open the message >FAIL:Bus VT ON appears, if it is closed the message >FAIL:Bus VT OFF is displayed. Switch off the protected power line.

Voltage Transformer Miniature Circuit Breaker (VT mcb)

3.3.8

Direction Check with Load Current

The correct connection of the current and voltage transformers is checked via the protected line using the load current. For this purpose, connect the line. The load current the line carries must be at least 0.1 INom. The load current should be in-phase or lagging the voltage (resistive or resistive-inductive load). The direction of the load current must be known. If there is a doubt, network or ring loops should be opened. The line remains energized during the test. The direction can be derived directly from the operational measured values. Initially the correlation of the measured load direction with the actual direction of load flow is checked. In this case the normal situation is assumed whereby the forward direction (measuring direction) extends from the busbar towards the line (see the following Figure). P positive, if active power flows into the line,

10 % of Load Current

410

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.3 Commissioning

P negative, if active power flows towards the busbar, Q positive, if reactive power flows into the line, Q negative, if reactive power flows toward the busbar.

Figure 3-23

Apparent Load Power

The power measurement provides an initial indication as to whether the measured values have the correct polarity. If both the active power as well as the reactive power have the wrong sign, the polarity in address 201 CT Starpoint must be checked and rectified. However, power measurement itself is not able to detect all connection errors. Accordingly, the impedances of all six measuring loops are evaluated. These can also be found as primary and secondary quantities in the operational measured values. All six measured loops must have the same impedance components (R and X). Small variations may result due to the non-symmetry of the measured values. In addition, the following applies for all impedances when the load is in the first quadrant: R, X both positive, when power flows into the line, R, X both negative, when power flows towards the busbar. In this case the normal situation is assumed whereby the forward direction (measuring direction) extends from the busbar towards the line In the case of capacitive load, caused by e.g. underexcited generators or charging currents, the X-components may all have the opposite sign. If significant differences in the values of the various loops are present, or if the individual signs are different, then individual phases in the current or voltage transformer circuits are swapped, not connected correctly, or the phase allocation is incorrect. After isolation of the line and short-circuiting of the current transformers the connections must be checked and corrected. The measurements must then be repeated. Finally, switch off the protected power line.

3.3.9

Polarity Check for the Voltage Input V4

Depending on the application of the voltage measuring input V4, a polarity check may be necessary. If no measuring voltage is connected to this input, this subsection can be skipped.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

411

3 Mounting and Commissioning

If the input V4 is used for measuring a voltage for overvoltage protection (P.System Data 1 Address 210 V4 transformer = Vx transformer), no polarity check is necessary because the polarity is irrelevant here. The voltage magnitude was checked before. If the input V4 is used for the measurement of the voltage Vdelta (P.System Data 1 Address 210 V4 transformer = Vdelta transf.), the polarity together with the current measurement is checked (see in the following). If the input V4 is used for measuring a busbar voltage for synchronism check (P.System Data 1 Address 210 V4 transformer = Vsync transf.), the polarity must be checked as follows using the synchronism check function. Only for Synchronism Check The device must be equipped with the synchronism and voltage check function which must be configured under address 135 Enabled (see Subsection 2.1.1.2). The voltage Vbus connected to the busbar must be specified correctly under address 212 Vsync connect. (see Subsection 2.1.3.1). If there is no transformer between the two measuring points, address 214 Angle VsynVline must be set to 0 (see Subsection 2.1.3.1). If the measurement is made across a transformer, this angle setting must correspond to the phase rotation through which the vector group of the transformer as seen from the feeder in the direction of the busbar rotates the voltage. An example is shown in Subsection 2.1.3.1. If necessary, different transformation ratios of the transformers on the busbar and the feeder may have to be considered under address 215 V-line / Vsync. The synchronism and voltage check must be switched ON under address 3501 FCT 25 Sync. . An additional help for the connection control are the messages 2947 25 Sync. Vdiff> and 2949 25 Sync.-diff> in the spontaneous annunciations. Circuit breaker is open. The feeder is isolated (zero voltage). The VTmcb's of both voltage transformer circuits must be closed. For the synchronism check the program OVERRIDE = YES (Address 3519) is set; the other programs (addresses 3515 to 3518) are set to NO. Via binary input (No. 2906 >25 SynStart AR) initiate the measuring request. The synchronism check must release closing (message 25 Sync.Release, No. 2951). If not, check all relevant parameters again (synchrocheck configured and enabled correctly, see Subsections 2.1.1.2, 2.1.3.1 and 2.14.2). Set address 3519 OVERRIDE to NO. Then the circuit breaker is closed while the line isolator is open (see following Figure). Both voltage transformers therefore measure the same voltage. The program SYNC-CHECK = YES (Address 3515) is set for synchronism check. Via binary input (No. 2906>25 SynStart AR) initiate the measuring request. The synchronism check must release closing (message 25 Sync.Release, No. 2951).

412

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.3 Commissioning

Figure 3-24

Measuring voltages for the synchronism check

If not, first check whether one of the before named messages 2947 25 Sync. Vdiff> or 2949 25 Sync.-diff> is available in the spontaneous messages. The message 25 Sync. Vdiff> indicates that the magnitude (ratio) adaptation is incorrect. Check address 215 V-line / Vsync and recalculate the adaptation factor, if necessary. The message 25 Sync.-diff> indicates that the phase relation of the busbar voltage does not match the setting under address 212 Vsync connect. (see Subsection 2.1.3.1). When measuring across a transformer, address 214 Angle VsynVline must also be checked; this must adapt the vector group (see Subsection 2.1.3.1). If these are correct, there is probably a reverse polarity of the voltage transformer terminals for Vbus. The program Vsync< V-line> = YES (Address 3517) and SYNC-CHECK = YES (Address 3515) is set for synchronism check. Open the VT mcb of the busbar voltage. Via binary input (No.2906 >25 SynStart AR ) initiate the measuring request. There is no close release. If there is, the VT mcb for the busbar voltage is not allocated. Check whether this is the required state, alternatively check the binary input >FAIL:Bus VT (No. 362). The VT mcb of the busbar voltage is to be closed again. Open the circuit breaker. The program Vsync> V-line< = YES (Address 3516) and Vsync> V-line< = NO (Address 3517) is set for synchronism check. Via binary input (No. 2906>25 SynStart AR) initiate the measuring request. The synchronism check must release closing (message 25 Sync.Release, No. 2951). Otherwise check all voltage connections and the corresponding parameters again carefully as described in Subsection 2.1.3.1. Open the VT mcb of the feeder voltage. Via binary input (No.2906 >25 SynStart AR ) initiate the measuring request. No close release is given. Open the VT mcb of the feeder voltage again. Addresses 3515 to 3519 must be restored as they were changed for the test. If the allocation of the LEDs or signal relays was changed for the test, this must also be restored.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

413

3 Mounting and Commissioning

3.3.10 Polarity Check for the Current Measuring Input I4

If the standard connection of the device is used whereby current input I4 is connected in the neutral of the set of current transformers (refer also to the connection circuit diagram in the Appendix A.3), then the correct polarity of the ground current path in general automatically results. If, however, the current I4 is derived from a separate summation CT or from a different point of measurement, e.g. transformer neutral current or ground current of a parallel line, an additional polarity check with this current is necessary. If the device is provided with the sensitive current input I4 and it is connected to an isolated or resonant-grounded system, the polarity check for I4 was already carried out with the ground fault check according to the previous section. Then this section can be ignored. Otherwise the test is done with a disconnected trip circuit and primary load current. It must be noted that during all simulations that do not exactly correspond with situations that may occur in practice, the non-symmetry of measured values may cause the measured value monitoring to pick up. This must therefore be ignored during such tests.

DANGER!
Hazardous voltages during interruptions in secondary circuits of current transformers Non-observance of the following measure will result in death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage. Short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits before current connections to the device are opened.

I4 from Own Line

To generate a delta voltage, the broken delta winding of one phase in the voltage transformer set (e.g. A) is bypassed (refer to Figure 3-25). If no connection on the g n windings of the voltage transformer is available, the corresponding phase is open circuited on the secondary side. Via the current path only the current from the current transformer in the phase from which the voltage in the voltage path is missing, is connected; the other CTs are short-circuited. If the line carries resistive-inductive load, the protection is in principle subjected to the same conditions that exist during an ground fault in the direction of the line. At least one element of the ground fault protection must be set to be directional (address 31x0 of the ground fault protection). The pick-up threshold of this element must be below the load current flowing on the line; if necessary the pick-up threshold must be reduced. The parameters that have been changed, must be noted. After switching the line on and off again, the direction indication must be checked: In the fault log the messages 50N/51N Pickup and 67N PU forward must at least be present. If the directional pickup is not present, either the ground current connection or the delta voltage connection is incorrect. If the wrong direction is indicated, either the direction of load flow is from the line toward the busbar or the ground current path has a swapped polarity. In the latter case, the connection must be rectified after the line has been isolated and the current transformers short-circuited. In the event that the pick-up alarms were not even generated, the measured ground (residual) current may be too small.

414

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.3 Commissioning

Figure 3-25

Polarity testing for I4, example with current transformers configured in a Holmgreen-connection

Note If parameters were changed for this test, they must be returned to their original state after completion of the test !

I4 from Parallel Line

If I4 is the current measured on a parallel line, the above procedure is done with the set of current transformers on the parallel line (Figure 3-26). The same method as above is used here, except that a single phase current from the parallel feeder is measured. The parallel line must carry load while the protected line should carry load. The line remains switched on for the duration of the measurement. If the polarity of the parallel line ground current measurement is correct, the impedance measured in the tested loop (in the example of Figure 3-26 this is A-G) should be reduced by the influence of the parallel line. The impedances can be read out as primary or secondary quantities in the list of operational measured values. If, on the other hand, the measured impedance increases when compared to the value without parallel line compensation, the current measuring input I4 has a swapped polarity. After isolation of both lines and short-circuiting of the current transformer secondary circuits, the connections must be checked and rectified. Subsequently the measurement must be repeated.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

415

3 Mounting and Commissioning

Figure 3-26

Polarity testing for I4, example with ground current of a parallel line

I4 from a Power Transformer Neutral

If I4 is the ground current measured in the neutral of a power transformer and intended for the ground fault protection direction determination (for grounded networks), then the polarity check can only be carried out with a zero sequence current flowing through the transformer. A test voltage source is required for this purpose (single-phase low voltage source).

Caution!
Feeding of zero sequence currents via a transformer without broken delta winding Inadmissible heating of the transformer is possible! Zero sequence current should only be routed via a transformer if it has a delta winding, therefore e.g. Yd, Dy or Yy with a compensating winding.

416

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.3 Commissioning

DANGER!
Energized equipment of the power system! Capacitive coupled voltages at disconnected equipment of the power system ! Non-observance of the following measure will result in death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage. Primary measurements must only be carried out on disconnected and grounded equipment of the power system! The configuration shown in Figure 3-27 corresponds to an ground current flowing through the line, in other words an ground fault in the forward direction. At least one element of the ground fault protection must be set to be directional (address 31xx of the ground fault protection). The test current on the line must exceed the pickup threshold setting of these elements; if necessary the pick-up threshold must be reduced. The parameters that have been changed, must be noted.

Figure 3-27

Polarity testing for I4, example with ground current from transformer neutral

After switching the test source on and off again, the direction indication must be checked: In the fault log the messages 50N/51N Pickup and 67N PU forward must at least be present. If the directional pick-up alarm is missing, a connection error of the ground current connectionI4 is present. If the wrong direction is indicated, the ground current connection I4 has a swapped polarity. In the previous case the connection must be rectified after the test source has been switched off. The measurement must then be repeated. If the pick-up alarm is missing altogether, this may be due to the fact that the test current is too small.

Note If parameters were changed for this test, they must be returned to their original state after completion of the test !

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

417

3 Mounting and Commissioning

3.3.11 Measuring the Operating Time of the Circuit Breaker

Only for Synchronism Check If the device is equipped with the function for synchronism and voltage check and it is applied, it is necessary - under asynchronous system conditions - that the operating time of the circuit breaker is measured and set correctly when closing. If the synchronism check function is not used or only for closing under synchronous system conditions, this subsection can be skipped. For measuring the operating time a setup as shown in Figure 3-28 is recommended. The timer is set to a range of 1 s and a graduation of 1 ms. The circuit breaker is closed manually. At the same time the timer is started. After closing the poles of the circuit breaker, the voltage VLine appears and the timer is stopped. The time displayed by the timer is the real circuit breaker closing time. If the timer is not stopped due to an unfavorable closing moment, the attempt will be repeated. It is particularly favorable to calculate the mean value from several (3 to 5) successful switching attempts. Set the calculated time under address 239 as 52 closing time (under P.System Data 1). Select the next lower settable value.

Note The operating time of the accelerated output relays for command tripping is taken into consideration by the device itself. The tripping command is to be allocated to a such relay. If this is not the case, add 3 ms to the measured circuit-breaker operating time for achieving a greater response time of the normal output relay. Subtract 4 ms from the circuit-breaker operating time if high-speed-relays are in service.

Figure 3-28

Measuring the circuit breaker closing time

418

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.3 Commissioning

3.3.12 Testing the Pilot Protection for Distance Protection 8521

Note If the device is intended to operate with pilot protection, all devices used for the transmission of the signals must initially be commissioned according to the corresponding instructions. The following section applies only for the conventional transmission procedures. It is not relevant for usage with protection data interfaces. For the functional check of the signal transmission, the ground fault protection should be disabled, to avoid signals from this protection influencing the tests: address 3101 FCT 50N/51N Gnd = OFF. Checking at Permissive Scheme Requirements: 85-21 PilotDist is set in address 121 to one of the comparison schemes using a permissive signal, i.e. POTT or UNBLOCKING. Furthermore, 2101 is switched FCT 85-21 at address ON. Naturally, the corresponding send and receive signals must also be assigned to the corresponding binary output and input. For the echo function, the echo signal must be assigned separately to the transmit output. Detailed information on the function of permissive scheme is available in Section 2.6. A simple check of the signal transmission path from one line end is possible via the echo function if these release techniques are used. The echo function must be activated at both line ends i.e. address 2501 FCT Weak Infeed = ECHO only; with the setting ECHO and TRIP a trip command may occur at the remote end of the check! A short-circuit is simulated outside Z1, with POTT or UNBLOCKING inside Z1B. This may be done with secondary injection test equipment. As the device at the opposite line end does not pick up, the echo function comes into effect there, and consequently a trip command is issued at the line end being tested. If no trip command appears, the signal transmission path must be checked again, especially also the assignment of the echo signals to the transmit outputs. In case of a phase-segregated transmission the above-mentioned checks are carried out for each phase. The correct phase allocation is also to be checked. This test must be performed at both line ends, in the case of three terminal lines at each end for each signal transmission path. The functioning of the echo delay time and the derivation of the circuit breaker switching status should also be tested at this time (the functioning of the protection at the opposite line end is tested): The circuit breaker on the protected feeder must be opened, as must be the circuit breaker at the opposite line end. As described above, a fault is again simulated. A receive signal impulse delayed by somewhat more than twice the signal transmission time appears via the echo function at the opposite line end, and the device issues a trip command. The circuit breaker at the opposite line end is now closed (while the isolators remain open). After simulation of the same fault, the receive and trip command appear again. In this case however, they are additionally delayed by the echo delay time of the device at the opposite line end (0.04 s presetting, address 2502 Trip/Echo DELAY).

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

419

3 Mounting and Commissioning

If the response of the echo delay is opposite to the sequence described here, the operating mode of the corresponding binary input (Hactive/Lactive) at the opposite line end must be rectified. The circuit breaker must be opened again. This test must be performed at both line ends, on a three terminal line at each line end for each transmission path. Finally, please observe the last margin heading Important for All Schemes! Checking at Blocking Scheme Requirements: 85-21 PilotDist is configured in address 121 to one of the comparison schemes with blocking signal, i.e. BLOCKING. Furthermore, address FCT 8521 is switched ON at address 2101. Naturally, the corresponding send and receive signals must also be assigned to the corresponding binary output and input. For more details about the function of the blocking scheme refer to Subsection 2.6. In the case of the blocking scheme, communication between the line ends is necessary. On the transmitting end, a fault in the reverse direction is simulated, while at the receiving end a fault in Z1B but beyond Z1 is simulated. This can be achieved with a set of secondary injection test equipment at each end of the line. As long as the transmitting end is transmitting, the receiving end may not generate a trip signal, unless this results from a higher distance stage. After the simulated fault at the transmitting line end is switched off, the receiving line end remains blocked for the duration of the transmit prolongation time of the transmitting line end (Send Prolong., address 2103). If applicable, the transient blocking time of the receiving line end (TrBlk BlockTime, address 2110) appears additionally if a finite delay time TrBlk Wait Time(address 2109) has been set and exceeded. In case of a phase-segregated transmission the above-mentioned checks are performed for each phase. The correct phase allocation is also to be checked. This test must be performed at both line ends, on a three terminal line at each line end for each transmission path. Finally, please observe the last margin heading Important for All Schemes! Checking at Permissive Underreach Transfer Requirements: 85-21 PilotDist is configured in address 121 to a permissive underreach transfer trip scheme , i.e. PUTT (Z1B). Furthermore, 2101 is switched FCT 85-21 at address ON. Naturally, the corresponding send and receive signals must also be assigned to the corresponding binary output and input. Detailed information on the function of permissive underreach transfer is available in Subsection 2.6. Communication between the line ends is necessary. On the transmitting end, a fault in zone Z1 must be simulated. This may be done with secondary injection test equipment. Subsequently, on the receiving end at PUTT (Z1B), a fault inside Z1B, but outside Z1 is simulated. Tripping takes place immediately, (or in T1B), without signal transmission only in a higher distance element. In case of direct transfer trip an immediate trip is always executed at the receiving end. In case of a phase-segregated transmission the above-mentioned checks are performed for each phase. The correct phase allocation is also to be checked. This test must be performed at both line ends, on a three terminal line at each line end for each transmission path. Finally, please finally observe the last margin heading Important for All Schemes!

420

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.3 Commissioning

Important for all Schemes

If the ground fault protection was disabled for the signal transmission tests, it may be re-enabled now. If setting parameters were changed for the test (e.g. mode of the echo function or timers for unambiguous observation of sequences), these must now be reset to the prescribed values.

3.3.13 Testing the Pilot Protection for Ground Fault Protection 8567N
This section is only relevant if the device is connected to an grounded system and ground fault protection is applied. The device must therefore be provided with the ground fault protection function according to its ordering code (16th MLFB position = 4 or 5 or 6 or 7). Which group of characteristics are to be available must have been preset during configuration to 50N/51N Gnd.O/C (address 131). Furthermore, the pilot protection must be used for the ground fault protection (address 132 85-67N PilotGnd configured to one of the optional methods). If none of this is the case, this subsection is not relevant. If the signal transmission path for the ground fault protection is the same path that was already tested in conjunction with the distance protection according to the previous Subsection, then this Subsection is of no consequence and may be omitted. For the functional check of the pilot protection for ground fault protection, the distance protection should be disabled, to avoid interference of the tests by signals from the distance protection: address 1201 FCT 21 = OFF. Checking for Permissive Release Requirements: 85-67N PilotGnd is configured in address 132 to one of the comparison schemes using permissive signal, i.e. Dir.Comp.Pickup or UNBLOCKING. Furthermore, FCT 85-67N is switched ON at address 3201. Naturally, the corresponding send and receive signals must also be assigned to the corresponding binary output and input. For the echo function, the echo signal must be assigned separately to the transmission output. Detailed information on the function of permissive release is available in Subsection 2.8. A simple check of the signal transmission path from one line end is possible via the echo circuit if these release techniques are used. The echo function must be activated at both line ends i.e. address 2501 FCT Weak Infeed = ECHO only; with the setting ECHO and TRIP at the remote end of the check a tripping command may result! A ground fault is simulated in the direction of the line. This may be done with secondary injection test equipment. As the device at the opposite line end does not pick up, the echo function comes into effect there, and consequently a trip command is issued at the line end being tested. If no trip command appears, the signal transmission path must be checked again, especially also the assignment of the echo signals to the transmit outputs. This test must be carried out at both line ends, in the case of three terminal lines at each end for each signal transmission path. The functioning of the echo delay time and monitoring of the circuit breaker switching status must also be tested at this time if this has not already been done in the previous section (the operation of the protection at the opposite line end is checked): The circuit breaker on the protected feeder must be opened, as must be the circuit breaker at the opposite line end. A fault is again simulated as before. A receive signal impulse delayed by somewhat more than twice the signal transmission time appears via the echo function at the opposite line end, and the device issues a trip command.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

421

3 Mounting and Commissioning

The circuit breaker at the opposite line end is now closed (while the isolators remain open). After simulation of the same fault, the receive and trip command appear again. In this case however, they are additionally delayed by the echo delay time of the device at the opposite line end (0.04 s presetting, address 2502 Trip/Echo DELAY). If the response of the echo delay is opposite to the sequence described here, the operating mode of the corresponding binary input (Hactive/Lactive) at the opposite line end must be rectified. The circuit breaker must be opened again. This test must also be carried out at both line ends, in the case of three terminal lines at each line end and for each signal transmission path. Finally, please observe the last margin heading Important for All Schemes! Checking for Blocking Scheme Requirements: 85-67N PilotGnd is configured in address 132 to one of the comparison schemes using blocking signal, i.e. BLOCKING. Furthermore, FCT 85-67N is switched ON at address 3201. Naturally, the corresponding send and receive signals must also be assigned to the corresponding binary output and input. For more details about the function of the blocking scheme refer to Subsection 2.8. In the case of the blocking scheme, communication between the line ends is necessary. A ground fault in the reverse direction is simulated at the transmitting line end. Subsequently, a fault at the receiving end in the direction of the line is simulated. This can be achieved with a set of secondary injection test equipment at each end of the line. As long as the transmitting end is transmitting, no trip signal must appear at the receiving line end, except in a higher time set as backup element. After the simulated fault at the transmitting line end has been cleared, the receiving line end remains blocked for the duration of the transmit prolongation time of the transmitting line end (Send Prolong., address 3203). If applicable, the transient blocking time of the receiving line end (TrBlk BlockTime, address 3210) appears additionally if a finite delay time TrBlk Wait Time (address 3209) has been set and exceeded.) has been set and exceeded. This test must be executed at both line ends, in the case of three terminal lines at each line end and for each transmission path. Finally, please observe the last margin heading Important for All Schemes! Important for all Schemes If the distance protection was switched off for the signal transmission tests, it may be switched on now. If setting parameters were changed for the test (e.g. mode of the echo function or timers for unambiguous observation of sequences), these must now be re-set to the prescribed values.

3.3.14 Checking the Pilot Protection for Breaker Failure Protection and/or End Fault Protection
If the transfer trip command for breaker failure protection or stub fault protection is to be transmitted to the remote end, this transmission must also be checked. To check the transmission the breaker failure protection function is initiated by a test current (secondary) with the circuit breaker in the open position. Make sure that the correct circuit breaker reaction takes place at the remote end. Each transmission path must be checked on lines with more than two ends.

422

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.3 Commissioning

3.3.15 Checking the Pilot Protection for Internal and External Remote Tripping
The 7SA522 provides the possibility to transmit a remote trip signal to the opposite line end if a signal transmission path is available for this purpose. This remote trip signal may be derived from both an internally generated trip signal as well as from any signal coming from an external protection or control device. If an internal signal is used, the initiation of the transmitter must be checked. If the signal transmission path is the same and has already been checked as part of the previous sections, it need not be checked again here. Otherwise the initiating event is simulated and the response of the circuit breaker at the opposite line end is verified. In the case of the distance protection, the permissive underreach scheme may be used to trip the remote line end. In this case, the procedure is the same as for permissive underreach (see Check at Permissive Underreach Scheme); however the received signal causes a direct trip. For remote transmission, the external command input is employed on the receiving line end; it is therefore a prerequisite that: DTT Direct Trip is set to Enabled in address 122 and FCT Direct Trip to ON at address 2201. If the signal transmission path is the same and has already been checked as part of the previous subsections, it need not be checked again here. A function check is sufficient, whereby the externally derived command is executed. For this purpose the external tripping event is simulated and the response of the circuit breaker at the opposite line end is verified.

3.3.16 Testing User-defined Functions

The device has a vast capability for allowing functions to be defined by the user, especially with the CFC logic. Any special function or logic added to the device must be checked. Naturally, general test procedures cannot be given. Rather, the configuration of these user defined functions and the necessary associated conditions must be known and verified. Of particular importance are possible interlocking conditions of the switchgear (circuit breakers, isolators, etc.).

3.3.17 Trip and Close Test with the Circuit Breaker

The circuit breaker and tripping circuits can be conveniently tested by the device 7SA522. The procedure is described in detail in the SIPROTEC System Description. If the check does not produce the expected results, the cause may be established from the text in the display of the device or the PC. If necessary, the connections of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts must be checked: It must be noted that the binary inputs used for the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts must be assigned separately for the CB test. This means it is not sufficient that the auxiliary contacts are allocated to the binary inputs No. 351 to 353, 379 and 380 (according to the possibilities of the auxiliary contacts); additionally, the corresponding No. 366 to 368 or 410 and/or 411 must be allocated (according to the possibilities of the auxiliary contacts. In the CB test only the latter ones are analysed. See also

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

423

3 Mounting and Commissioning

Section 2.20.1.6. Furthermore, the ready state of the circuit breaker for the CB test must be indicated to the binary input with No. 371.

3.3.18 Trip/Close Tests for the Configured Operating Devices

Switching by Local Command If the configured operating devices were not switched sufficiently in the hardware test already described, all configured switching devices must be switched on and off from the device via the integrated control element. The feedback information of the CB position injected via binary inputs should be read out and compared with the actual breaker position. For devices with graphic display this is easy to do with the control display. The switching procedure is described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description (Order no. E50417-H1176-C151) The switching authority must be set in correspondence with the source of commands used. With the switch mode it is possible to select between interlocked and non-interlocked switching. Note that non-interlocked switching constitutes a safety risk. Switching from a Remote Control Centre If the device is connected to a remote substation via a system (SCADA) interface, the corresponding switching tests may also be checked from the substation. Please also take into consideration that the switching authority is set in correspondence with the source of commands used.

3.3.19 Triggering Oscillographic Recording for Test

In order to test the stability of the protection during switchon procedures also, switchon trials can also be carried out at the end. Oscillographic records obtain the maximum information about the behavior of the protection. Prerequisite Along with the capability of storing fault recordings via pickup of the protection function, the 7SA522 also has the capability of capturing the same data when commands are given to the device via the service program DIGSI, the serial interface, or a binary input. For the latter, event >Trig.Wave.Cap. must be allocated to a binary input. Triggering of the recording is done e.g. via the binary input on switch-on of the protection object. An oscillographic recording that is externally triggered (that is, without a protective element pickup or device trip) is processed by the device as a normal oscillographic recording, and has a number for establishing a sequence. However, these recordings are not displayed in the fault indication buffer, as they are not fault events. Trigger Oscillograhpic Recording In order to start a test measurement recording via DIGSI, select in the left of the window the operator function Test. Double-click in the list view the entry Test Wave Form (see Figure 3-29).

424

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

3.3 Commissioning

Figure 3-29

Triggering oscillographic recording with DIGSI - Example

Oscillographic recording is immediately started. During the recording, an annunciation is output in the left area of the status line. Bar segments additionally indicate the progress of the procedure. The SIGRA or the Comtrade Viewer program is required to view and analyze the oscillographic data.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

425

3 Mounting and Commissioning

3.4

Final Preparation of the Device

Firmly tighten all screws. Tighten all terminal screws, including those that are not used.

Caution!
Inadmissible Tightening Torques Non-observance of the following measure can result in minor personal injury or property damage: The tightening torques must not be exceeded as the threads and terminal chambers may otherwise be damaged! The setting values should be checked again, if they were modified during the tests. Check if protection, control and auxiliary functions to be found with the configuration parameters are set correctly (Section 2.1.1, Functional Scope). All desired elements and functions must be set ON. Ensure that a copy of the setting values is stored on the PC. The user should check the device-internal clock and set/synchronize it if necessary, provided that it is not synchronized automatically. Refer to the SIPROTEC 4 System Description for more information on this. The indication buffers are deleted under Main Menu Annunciation Set/Reset, so that in the future they only contain information on actual events and states. The counters in the switching statistics should be reset to the values that were existing prior to the testing (see also SIPROTEC 4 System Description). The counters of the operational measured values (e.g. operation counter, if available) are reset under Main Menu Measurement Reset (see also SIPROTEC 4 System Description). Press the ESC key, several times if necessary, to return to the default display. The default display appears in the display (e.g. display of operational measured values). Clear the LEDs on the front panel by pressing the LED key, so that they only show real events and states. In this context, saved output relays are reset, too. Pressing the LED key also serves as a test for the LEDs on the front panel because they should all light when the button is pushed. If the LEDs display states relevant by that moment, these LEDs, of course, stay lit. The green RUN LED must light up, whereas the red ERROR must not light up. Close the protective switches. If test switches are available, then these must be in the operating position. The device is now ready for operation.

426

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Technical Data

This chapter provides the technical data of SIPROTEC 4 device 7SA522 and its individual functions, including the limiting values that under no circumstances may be exceeded. The electrical and functional data for the maximum functional scope are followed by the mechanical specifications with dimension diagrams.

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15 4.16 4.17 4.18 4.19 4.20 4.21 4.22 4.23

General Device Data Distance Protection 21 Power Swing Detection 68 (optional) Pilot Protection for Distance Protection 85-21

428 439 442 443

Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N (optional) 444 Pilot Protection for Ground Fault Protection 8567N (optional) Weak-Infeed Tripping (classic) 27WI Weak-Infeed Tripping (French specification) 27WI Protection Data Interfaces and Communication Topology (optional) External Direct and Remote Tripping Time Overcurrent Protection 50(N) / 51(N) Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection 50HS Automatic Reclosure Function 79 (optional) Synchronism and Voltage Check 25 (optional) Voltage Protection 27/59 (optional) Frequency Protection 81 (optional) Fault Locator Circuit Breaker Failure Protection 50BF (optional) Monitoring Function Transmission of Binary Information (optional) User Defined Functions (CFC) Auxiliary Functions Dimensions 453 454 455 456 457 458 461 462 463 465 468 469 470 471 473 474 477 479

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

427

4 Technical Data

4.1
4.1.1

General Device Data

Analog Inputs and Outputs

Nominal Frequency

fNom

50 Hz or 60 Hz

(adjustable)

Current Inputs
Rated current Power Consumption per Phase and Ground Path - at INom = 1 A - at INom = 5 A - for sensitive ground fault detection at 1A Current Overload Capability per Current Input - thermal (rms) 100 INom for 1 s 30 INom for 10 s 4 INom continuous 250 INom (Half-cycle) 300 A for 1 s 100 A for 10 s 15 A continuous - dynamic (pulse current) 750 A (Half-cycle) Approx. 0.05 VA Approx. 0.3 VA Approx. 0.05 VA INom 1 A or 5 A

- dynamic (pulse current) Current Overload Capability for Sensitive Ground Current Input - thermal (rms)

Voltage Inputs
Rated Voltage Power consumption per phase - thermal (rms) VNom at 100 V 80 V to 125 V 0.1 VA 230 V continuous (adjustable)

Voltage Overload Capability in Voltage Path per Input

4.1.2

Auxiliary Voltage

DC Voltage
Voltage Supply via Integrated Converter Rated auxiliary voltage VauxPermissible voltage ranges Superimposed AC ripple voltage, Peak to peak Power input - quiescent - energized 7SA522*-*A/E/J Approx. 5 W Approx. 12 W 24/48 VDC 60/110/125 V DC 110/125/ 220/250 VDC 220/250 VDC

19 to 58 VDC 48 to 150 VDC 88 to 300 VDC 176 to 300 VDC 15 % of the auxiliary nominal voltage

428

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.1 General Device Data

7SA522*-*C/G/L/N/Q/S 7SA522*-*D/H/M/P/R/T Plus approx. 1.5 W per interface module

Approx. 15 W Approx. 18 W

Bridging time for power supply failure/short circuit of 50 ms at Vaux = 48 V and Vaux 110 V 20 ms at Vaux = 24 V and Vaux = 60 V

AC Voltage
Voltage Supply via Integrated Converter Nominal power supply alternating voltage VauxAC Permissible voltage ranges Power Input - quiescent - energized 7SA522*-*A/E/J 7SA522*-*C/G/L/N/Q/S 7SA522*-*D/H/M/P/R/T Plus approx. 1.5 W per Interface Module Bridging time for failure/short circuit of alternating auxiliary voltage 50 ms Approx. 7 VA Approx. 17 VA Approx. 20 VA Approx. 23 VA 115 VAC 92 to 132 VAC

4.1.3

Binary Inputs and Outputs

Binary Inputs
Variant 7SA522*-*A/E/J 7SA522*-*C/G/L/N/Q/S 7SA522*-*D/H/M/P/R/T Rated voltage range Switching Thresholds - for rated voltages Quantity 8 (configurable) 16 (configurable) 24 (configurable) 24 VDC to 250 VDC, in 3 ranges, bipolar Switching Thresholds, adjustable voltage range with jumpers 24/48 VDC 60/110/125 VDC Vpu 19 VDC (pu = pickup) Vdo 14 VDC (do = dropout) Vpu 88 VDC Vdo 66 VDC Vpu 176 VDC Vdo 117 VDC

- for rated voltages - for rated voltages Current consumption, energized Maximum admissible voltage Impulse filter on input

110/125/220/250 VDC 220/250 VDC Approx. 1.8 mA independent of the control voltage 300 VDC

220 nF coupling capacitance at 220 V with recovery time > 60 ms

Binary Outputs

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

429

4 Technical Data

Signalling / Command Relays (see also terminal assignments in Appendix A) Quantity and Data Order Variant 7SA522-*A/E/J 7SA522-*C/G/L 7SA522-*N/Q/S 7SA522-*D/H/M 7SA522-*P/R/T Switching capability ON OFF UL listed x x x x x According to the Order Variant (allocatable) NO Contact (normal)1) 7 14 7 21 14 NO Contact (fast)1) 7 7 10 7 10 1000 W/VA 30 VA 40 W resistive 25 W/VA at L/R 50 ms 250 V 250 V 5A 30 A for 0.5 s (NO contact) 5 A continuous 30 A for 0.5 s 8 ms 5 ms 8 ms 1 ms 200 V (max.) NO/NC (selectable)1) 1 2 1 3 2 NO contact (high-speed)1) 5 5 1000 W/VA 1000 W/VA

Switching voltage DC AC Permissible current per contact ( continuous) Permissible current per contact (close and hold) / pulse current Total current on common path Operating time, approx. Alarm relay 1) Switching capability ON OFF

With 1 NC contact or 1 NO contact (switchable) 1000 W/VA 30 VA 40 W resistive 25 W at L/R 50 ms 250 V 5 A continuous 30 A for 0.5 s 120 VAC 240 VAC 240 VAC 24 VDC 48 VDC 240 VDC 120 VAC 240 VAC Pilot duty, B300 Pilot duty, B300 5 A General Purpose 5 A General Purpose 0.8 A General Purpose 0.1 A General Purpose 1/6 hp (4.4 FLA) 1/2 hp (4.9 FLA)

Switching voltage Permissible current per contact

1)

UL-listed with the following nominal values:

430

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.1 General Device Data

4.1.4

Communication Interfaces

Protection Data Interface

See Section 4.9 Protection Data Interfaces and Communication Topology

Operator Interface
Connection Operation Transmission speed Transmission distance Front side, non-isolated, RS232, 9-pin D-subminiature female connector for connection of a PC With DIGSI Min. 4,800 Baud; max. 115,200 Baud; Factory Setting: 38400 Baud; Parity: 8E1 15 m / 50 feet

Service / Modem Interface (optional)

RS232/RS485/Optical fibre Acc. to ordered version Operation RS232/RS485 Connection for panel flush mounting housing Connection for panel surface mounting housing Isolated interface for data transfer With DIGSI RS232/RS485 according to the ordering variant Rear panel, mounting location C, 9-pin D-subminiature female connector Shielded data cable Shielded data cable

Up to release .../DD At the terminal on the case bottom Release ../EE and higher In the housing at the case bottom; 9-pin D-subminiature female connector Test voltage Transmission speed RS232 Transmission distance RS485 Transmission distance Fibre optics (FO) FO connector type Connection for panel flush-mounted housing Connection for panel surface mounting housing Optical wavelength ST connector Rear panel, slot C In console housing at device bottom = 820 nm 1.000 m / 0.6 miles 15 m / 50 feet 500 V; 50 Hz Min. 4800 Baud; max. 115200 Baud; Factory setting 38400 Baud

Laser Class I according to EN 60825-1/-2 Using glass fibre 50/125 m or For use of FO 62.5/125 m Permissible optical signal attenuation Transmission distance Character idle state Max. 8 dB, with glass fibre 62.5/125 m Max. 1.5 km / 1 mile Selectable: factory setting Light off

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

431

4 Technical Data

System Interface (optional)

RS232/RS485/Optical fibre/ Profibus RS485 / Profibus optical fibre DNP3.0/RS485 DNP3.0/Optical Fibre Acc. to ordered version RS232 Connection for panel flush mounting housing Rear panel, mounting location B, 9-pin D-subminiature female connector Isolated interface for data transfer to a control terminal

Connection for panel surface mounting housing Up to /DD At the terminal on the case bottom /EE and higher In console housing at case bottom 9-pin D-subminiature female connector Test voltage Transmission speed Transmission distance RS485 Connection for panel flush mounting housing Rear panel, mounting location B, 9-pin D-subminiature female connector 500 V; 50 Hz Min. 4800 Baud; max. 38400 Baud Factory setting 19200 Baud Max. 15 m / 50 feet

Connection for panel surface mounting housing Up to /DD At the terminal on the case bottom /EE and higher In console housing at case bottom 9-pin D-subminiature female connector Test voltage Transmission Speed Transmission distance Fibre optics (FO) FO connector type Connection for panel flush mounting housing For Panel Surface-Mounted Housing Optical wavelength ST connector Rear panel, mounting location B In console housing at case bottom = 820 nm 500 V; 50 Hz Min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Bd Factory setting 19200 Bd Max. 1 km / 0.6 miles

Laser Class I according to EN 60825-1/-2 Using glass fibre 50/125 m or For use of FO 62.5/125 m Permissible optical signal attenuation Transmission distance Character idle state Max. 8 dB, with glass fibre 62.5/125 m Max. 1.5 km / 1 mile Selectable: factory setting Light off

432

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.1 General Device Data

Profibus RS 485 (FMS and DP) Connection for panel flush mounting housing Rear panel, mounting location B, 9-pin D-subminiature female connector

Connection for panel surface mounting housing Up to /DD At the terminal on the case bottom /EE and higher In console housing at case bottom 9-pin D-subminiature female connector Test voltage Transmission speed Transmission distance 500 V; 50 Hz Up to 12 MBaud 1000 m/0.6 miles at 93.75 kBaud 500 m/0.3 miles at 187.5 kBaud 200 m/656 feet at 1.5 MBaud 100 m/328 feet at 12 MBaud ST connector single ring / double ring FMS: depending on ordered version; DP: only double ring available Rear panel, mounting location B Please use version with Profibus RS485 in the console housing at the housing bottom as well as separate electrical/optical converter. Conversion by means of external OLM 1) up to 1.5 MBaud 500 MBaud for normal version 57600 Baud with detached operator panel > 500 kBaud = 820 nm

Profibus Optical (FMS and DP) FO connector type

Connection for panel flush mounting housing Connection for panel surface mounting housing

Transmission speed

Recommended speed: Optical wavelength

Laser Class 1 according to EN 60825-1/-2 Using glass fibre 50/125 m or For use of FO 62.5/125 m Permissible optical signal attenuation Max. 8 dB, with glass fibre 62.5/125 m Transmission distance between two 2 m with plastic fibre modules at redundant optical ring topolo- 500 kB/s max. 1.6 km / 1 mile gy and optical fiber 62.5/125 m 1500 kB/s 530 m / 0.33 miles Neutral light position (status for "No char- Light OFF acter") Max. number of modules in optical rings at 41 500 kB/s or 1500 kB/s DNP3.0/RS485 Connection for panel flush mounting housing Connection for panel surface mounting housing Test voltage Transmission speed Transmission distance Rear panel; mounting location B; 9-pin D-subminiature female connector In console housing 500 V; 50 Hz Up to 19200 bauds Max. 1 km / 0.6 miles

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

433

4 Technical Data

DNP3.0/Optical Fibre FO connector type Connection for panel flush mounting housing Connection for panel surface mounting housing Transmission speed Optical wavelength STConnector Receiver/Transmitter Rear panel, slot B In console housing Up to 19200 bauds = 820 nm

Laser Class 1 according to EN60825-1/-2 Using glass fibre 50/125 m or Using glass fibre 62.5/125 m Permissible optical signal attenuation Transmission distance
1)

Max. 8 dB, with glass fibre 62.5/125 m Max. 1.5 km / 1 mile

If the optical interface is required you must order the following: 11. Position 4 (FMS) or L0A (DP) and additionally: For single ring: SIEMENS OLM 6GK1502-3AB10, for double ring: SIEMENS OLM 6GK1502-4AB10 The OLM converter requires an operating voltage of 24 V VDC. If the operating voltage is > 24 V DC the additional power supply 7XV5810-0BA00 is required.

Time Synchronization Interface

Time synchronization Connection for panel flush mounting housing DCF 77/IRIG B-Signal (message format IRIG-B000) Rear panel, slot A 9-pin D-subminiature female connector Selectable 5 V, 12 V or 24 V Signal Levels and Burdens: Nominal Signal Voltage 5V VIHigh VILow IIHigh RI 6.0 V 1.0 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 4.5 mA to 9.4 mA 890 at VI = 4 V 640 at VI = 6 V 15.8 V 1.4 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 4.5 mA to 9.3 mA 1930 at VI = 8.7 V 1700 at VI = 15.8 V 12 V 31 V 1.9 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 4.5 mA to 8.7 mA 3780 at I = 17 V 3560 at VI = 31 V 24 V

Connection for Panel Surface-Mounted Housing At the double-deck terminal on the case bottom Signal nominal voltages

4.1.5

Electrical Tests

Specifications
Standards: IEC 60255 (product standards) IEEE Std C37.90.0/.1/.2 UL 508 VDE 0435 For more standards see also individual functions

434

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.1 General Device Data

Insulation Test
Standards: IEC 60255-5 and IEC 60870-2-1

High voltage test (routine test) 2.5 kV (rms), 50 Hz All circuits except power supply, Binary Inputs, High Speed Outputs, Communication Interface and Time Synchronization Interfaces High voltage test (routine test) Auxiliary voltage, binary inputs and high speed outputs High voltage test (routine test) only isolated communication and time synchronisation interfaces 3.5 kV500 V (rms), 50 Hz

Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak), 1.2/50 s, 0.5 Ws, 3 positive and 3 negative imAll Circuits Except Communication and Time Synchroni- pulses in intervals of 5 s zation Interfaces, Class III

EMC Tests for Interference Immunity (type tests)

Standards: IEC 60255-6 and -22 (product standards) EN 61000-6-2 (generic standard) VDE 0435 Teil 301DIN VDE 0435-110 2.5 kV (Peak); 1 MHz; = 15 s; 400 surges per s; Test Duration 2 s; Ri = 200 8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air discharge, both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330 10 V/m; 80 MHz to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz

High frequency test IEC 60255-22-1, Class III and VDE 0435 Section 303, Class III Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255-22-2, Class IV and IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV Irradiation with HF field, frequency sweep IEC 60255-22-3, Class III IEC 61000-4-3, Class III Irradiation with HF field, single frequencies IEC 60255-22-3, IEC 61000-4-3 amplitude-modulated pulse-modulated Fast transient disturbances Burst IEC 60255-22-4 and IEC 61000-4-4, Class IV High energy surge voltages (SURGE), IEC 61000-4-5 installation Class 3 Auxiliary voltage

Class III: 10 V/m 80; 160; 450; 900 MHz; 80 % AM 1kHz; duty cycle > 10 s 900 MHz; 50 % PM, repetition frequency 200 Hz 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length = 15 ms; repetition rate 300 ms; both polarities: R i = 50 ; Test Duration 1 min Impulse: 1.2/50 s Common mode: 2 kV; 12 ; 9 F diff. mode: 1 kV; 2 ; 18 F

Analog measuring inputs, binary inputs, relay outputs Common mode: 2 kV; 42; 0. 5 F diff. mode: 1 kV; 42; 0. 5 F Line conducted HF, amplitude modulated IEC 61000-4-6, Class III Power system frequency magnetic field IEC 60255-6 IEC 61000-4-8 Oscillatory surge withstand capability IEEE Std C37.90.1 Fast transient surge withstand cap. IEEE Std C37.90.1 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz

0.5 mT; 50 Hz Class IV: 30 A/m; continuous; 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz 2.5 kV (Peak); 1 MHz; = 15 s; 400 Surges per s; Test Duration 2 s; Ri = 200 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length = 15 ms; repetition rate 300 ms; both polarities: R i = 50 ; Test duration 1 min

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

435

4 Technical Data

Radiated electromagnetic interference IEEE Std C37.90.2 Damped oscillations IEC 60694, IEC 61000-4-12

35 V/m; 25 MHz to 1000 MHz 2.5 kV (Peak Value), polarity alternating 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 MHz and 50 MHz, Ri = 200

EMC Tests for Noise Emission (type test)

Standard: EN 50081-* (technical generic standard)

Radio noise voltage to lines, only auxiliary voltage IEC- 150 kHz to 30 MHz CISPR 22 Limit class B Interference field strength IEC-CISPR 22 Harmonic currents on the network lead at 230 VAC IEC 61000-3-2 30 MHz to 1000 MHz Limit class B Class A limits are observed.

Voltage fluctuations and flicker on the network incoming Limits are observed feeder at 230 V AC IEC 61000-3-3

4.1.6

Mechanical Stress Tests

Vibration and Shock Stress during Stationary Operation

Standards: Oscillation IEC 60255-21-1, Class 2 IEC 60068-2-6 IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068 Sinusoidal 10 Hz to 60 Hz: 0.075 mm amplitude; 60 Hz to 150 Hz: 1g acceleration Frequency sweep 1 octave/min 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes Semi-sinusoidal 5 g acceleration, duration 11 ms, each 3 shocks (in both directions of the 3 axes) Sinusoidal 1 Hz to 8 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude (horizontal axis) 1 Hz to 8 Hz: 1.5 mm amplitude (vertical axis) 8 Hz to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration (horizontal axis) 8 Hz to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration (vertical axis) Frequency sweep 1 octave/min 1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes

Shock IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1 IEC 60068-2-27 Seismic vibration IEC 60255-21-3, Class 1 IEC 60068-3-3

Vibration and Shock Stress During Transport

Standards: Oscillation IEC 60255-21-1, Class 2 IEC 60068-2-6 IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068 Sinusoidal 5 Hz to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm Amplitude; 8 Hz to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration frequency sweep 1 octave/min 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes Semi-sinusoidal 15 g acceleration, duration 11 ms, each 3 shocks (in both directions of the 3 axes) Semi-sinusoidal 10 g acceleration, duration 16 ms, each 1000 shocks (in both directions of the 3 axes)

Shock IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1 IEC 60068-2-27 Continuous shock IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1 IEC 60068-2-29

436

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.1 General Device Data

4.1.7

Climatic Stress Tests

Temperatures
Standards: IEC 60255-6

Type tested (acc. IEC 60086-2-1 and -2, Test Bd, for 16 25 C to +85 C h) Admissible temporary operating temperature (tested for 96 h) 20 C to +70 C or 4 F to +158 F (legibility of display may be restricted from +55 C or 131 F)

Recommended for permanent operation (according to 5 C to +55 C or 23 F to +131 F IEC 60255-6) If max. half of the inputs and outputs are subjected to the max. permissible values Limit temperatures for storage Limit temperatures during transport 25 C to +55 C or 13 F to +131 F 25 C to +70 C or 13 F to +158 F

Storage and transport of the device with factory packaging!

1)

Limit temperatures for normal operation (i.e. output relays not energized)
1)

25 C to +55 C or 13 F to +131 F

Limit temperatures under maximum load (max. cont. 5 C to +40 C for 1/2 and 1/1 housing admissible input and output values)
1)

ULcertified according to Standard 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)

Humidity
Admissible humidity Annual average 75 % relative humidity; on 56 days of the year up to 93% relative humidity. Condensation is to be avoided during operation !

It is recommended that all devices be installed so that they are not exposed to direct sunlight nor subject to large fluctuations in temperature that may cause condensation to occur.

4.1.8

Service Conditions

The protection device is designed for installation in normal relay rooms and plants, so that electromagnetic immunity is ensured if installation is done properly. In addition the following is recommended: Contacts and relays operating within the same cabinet or on the same relay board with digital protection equipment, should be in principle provided with suitable surge suppression components. For substations with operating voltages of 100 kV and above, all external cables shall be shielded with a conductive shield earthed at both ends. For substations with lower operating voltages, no special measures are normally required. Do not withdraw or insert individual modules/boards while the protective device is energized. In withdrawn condition, some components are electrostatically endangered; during handling the ESD standards (for Electrostatic Sensitive Devices) must be observed. They are not endangered when inserted into the case.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

437

4 Technical Data

4.1.9

Certifications
UL listing UL recognition 7SA522-*J***-**** Models with plugin terminals

7SA522-*A***-**** 7SA522-*C***-**** 7SA522-*D***-****

Models with threaded termi7SA522-*L***-**** nals 7SA522-*M***-****

4.1.10 Construction
Housing Dimensions Device (for maximum number of components) For panel flush mounting For panel surface mounting 7XP20 See dimensional drawings, Section 4.23 Size
1/ 1 2

Weight 6 kg / 13.2 Ib 10 kg / 22.04 Ib 11 kg / 24.3 Ib 19 kg / 41.9 Ib

/1
2 1

1/ 1/

Degree of protection according to IEC 60529 For equipment of the panel surface mounting housing For equipment of the panel flush-mounting housing Front Rear For human safety UL-certification conditions IP 51 IP 50 IP 2x with cover For use on a Flat Surface of a Type 1 Enclosure IP 51

438

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.2 Distance Protection 21

4.2

Distance Protection 21

Ground Impedance Ratio

RG/RL XG/XL K0 PHI (K0) -0.33 to 7.00 -0.33 to 7.00 Separate for first and higher zones 0.000 to 4.000 -135.00 to +135.00 Separate for first and higher zones Increments 0.001 Increments 0.01 Increments 0.01

Mutual Impedance Ratio

RM/RL XM/XL 0.00 to 8.00 0.00 to 8.00 Increments 0.01 Increments 0.01

The matching factors for ground impedance and mutual impedance are valid also for fault location.

Phase Preferences
For double ground fault in grounded systems Block leading phaseground Block lagging phaseground Release all associated loops Release only phase-to-ground loops Release of phase-to-phase loops C(A) acyclic A(C) acyclic B(A) acyclic A(B) acyclic C(B) acyclic B(C) acyclic C(A) cyclic A(C) cyclic All associated loops

For double ground fault in isolated or resonantgrounded systems

Ground Fault Detection

Ground current 3I0 Threshold for INom = 1 A for INom = 5 A Ground voltage 3V0 Threshold Dropout to pickup ratio 0.05 A to 4.00 A 0.25 A to 20.00 A 1 V to 100 V; Approx. 0.95 Increments 1 V Increments 0.01 A

Measuring tolerances for sinusoidal measured values 5 %

Distance Measurement
Characteristic Setting ranges polygon: Minimum Iph = min. current, phases for INom = 1A for INom = 5A 0.05 A to 4.00 A 0.25 A to 20.00 A Increments 0.01 A Polygonal or MHO circle; 5 independent and 1 controlled zone

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

439

4 Technical Data

X = reactance reach

for INom = 1A for INom = 5A

0.050 up to 600.000 0.010 up to 120.000 0.050 up to 600.000 0.010 up to 120.000 0.050 up to 600.000 0.010 up to 120.000 30 to 89 30 to 90 0 to 30

Increments 0.001

R = resistance tolerance phase-phase

for INom = 1A for INom = 5A

Increments 0.001

RE = resistance tolerance phase-ground for INom = 1A for INom = 5A Line = line angle Dist = angle of distance protection characteristic Pol = tilt angle for 1st zone Direction determination for polygonal characteristic: For all types of faults Directional sensitivity

Increments 0.001

In increments of 1 In increments of 1 In increments of 1

With phase-true, memorized or cross-polarized voltages Dynamically unlimited stationary approx. 1V

Each zone can be set to operate in forward or reverse direction, non-directional or ineffective. Setting ranges MHOcircle: IPh> = min. current, phases for INom = 1A for INom = 5A Zr = impedance range for INom = 1A for INom = 5A Line = line angle Dist = angle of distance protection characteristic Polarization Load trapezoid: Rload = minimum load resistance for INom = 1A for INom = 5A load = maximum load angle Drop-off to pick-up ratio currents impedances Measured value correction Measuring tolerances for sinusoidal measured values Approx. 0.95 approx. 1.06 Mutual impedance matching for parallel lines 0.050 to 600.000 ; 0.010 to 120.000 ; 20 to 60 In increments of 1 Increments 0.001 0.05 A to 4.00 A 0.25 A to 20.00 A 0.050 up to 200.000 0.010 up to 40.000 30 to 89 30 to 90 In increments of 1 Increments 1 Increments 0.001 Increments 0.01 A

With memorized or cross-polarized voltages

Each zone can be set to operate in forward or reverse direction, non-directional or ineffective.

440

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.2 Distance Protection 21

Times
Shortest trip time Drop-off time Stage timers Approx. 17 ms (50 Hz) / 15 ms (60 Hz) with fast relay and approx. 11 ms (50 Hz) / 10 ms (60 Hz) with high-speed relay Approx. 30 ms 0.00 s to 30.00 s; for all zones; separate time setting possibilities for single-phase and multi-phase faults for the zones Z1, Z2, and Z1B 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.01 s

Time expiry tolerances The set time is a pure delay time.

Emergency Operation
In case of measured voltage failure, e.g. voltage transformer mcb trip see Subsection 4.11 Time Overcurrent Protection

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

441

4 Technical Data

4.3

Power Swing Detection 68 (optional)

Rate of the impedance vector and observation of the path curve Approx. 7 Hz Block 1st zone only Block higher zones Block 1st and 2nd zone Block all zones

Power swing detection Maximum power swing frequency Power swing blocking programs

Power swing trip Trip time delay after power swing block

Trip following instable power swings (out-of-step) 0.08 to 5.00 s Increments 0.01 s

442

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.4 Pilot Protection for Distance Protection 85-21

4.4
Mode

Pilot Protection for Distance Protection 85-21

For two line ends

With one channel for each direction or with three channels for each direction for phase segregated transmission With one channel for each direction or connection

For three line ends

Underreach Transfer Trip Schemes

Method Send signal prolongation Transfer trip with overreaching zone Z1B Direct transfer trip 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s

Underreach Schemes via Protection Data Interface (optional)

Phase-segregated for two or three line ends Method Send signal prolongation Transfer trip with overreaching zone Z1B 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s

Overreach Schemes
Method Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip (POTT) (with overreaching zone Z1B) Unblocking (with overreaching zone Z1B) Blocking (with overreaching zone Z1B) 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0.00 s to 30.00 s; 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0.00 to 30.00 s 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.001 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s

Send signal prolongation Enable delay Transient blocking time Wait time for transient blocking Echo delay time Echo impulse duration Time expiry tolerances The set times are pure delay times

Overreach Schemes via Protection Data Interface (optional)

Phase-segregated for two or three line ends Method Send signal prolongation Enable delay Transient blocking time Wait time for transient blocking Echo delay time Echo impulse duration Time expiry tolerances The set time is a pure delay time. Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip (POTT) (with overreaching zone Z1B) 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0.000 s to 30.000 s 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0.00 s to 30.00 s; 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0.00 s to 30.00 s 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.00 s Increments 0.001 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

443

4 Technical Data

4.5

Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N (optional)

Definite time elements Inverse time element (IDMT)

50N-1, 50N-2, 50N-3 51N one of the characteristics according to Figure 4-1 to Figure 4-4 can be selected Characteristics according to Figure 4-4 Characteristics according to Figure 4-6

Voltage-dependent element (V0-inverse) Zero-sequence power protection

Definite Time Very High Set Current Element 50N-1

50N-1 Pickup for INom = 1 0.05 A to 25.00 A A for INom = 5 0.25 A to 125.00 A A 50N-1 Time Delay Dropout/pickup ratio Pickup time Dropout time Tolerances The set times are pure delay times Current Time 0.00 s to 30.00 s or (ineffective) Approx. 0.95 for I/INom 0.5 Approx. 35 ms Approx. 30 ms 3 % of setting value or 1 % nominal current 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 A

Definite Time High Set Current Element 50N-2

50N-2 Pickup for INom = 1A for INom = 5A 50N-2 Time Delay Dropout Ratio Pickup time Dropout time Tolerances The set times are pure delay times Current Time 0.05 A to 25.00 A 0.25 A to 125.00 A 0.00 s to 30.00 s or (ineffective) Approx. 0.95 for I/INom 0.5 Approx. 35 ms Approx. 30 ms 3 % of setting value or 1 % nominal current 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 A

Definite Time Overcurrent Element 50N-3

50N-3 Pickup for INom = 1A for INom = 5A 0.05 A to 25.00 A or 0.003 A to 25.000 A 0.25 A to 125.00 A or 0.015 A to 125.000 A Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.001 A Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.001 A

444

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.5 Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N (optional)

50N-3 Time Delay Dropout Ratio Pickup time (1.5 set value) (2.5 set value) Dropout time Tolerances The set times are pure delay times Current Time

0.00 s to 30.00 s or (ineffective) Approx. 0.95 for I/INom 0.5 Approx. 45 ms Approx. 35 ms Approx. 30 ms

Increments 0.01 s

3 % of setting value or 1 % nominal current 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

Inverse Time Overcurrent Element (IEC) 51N

51N Pickup for INom = 1A for INom = 5A 51N Time Dial 51N Additional time delay Characteristics Tolerances Current Time 0.05 A to 25.00 A or 0.003 A to 25.000 A 0.25 A to 125.00 A or 0.015 A to 125.000 A 0.05 s to 3.00 s or (ineffective) 0.00 s to 30.00 s or (ineffective) See Figure 4-1 Pickup at 1.05 I/3I0P 1.15 5 % 15 ms for 2 I/51N 20 and 51N Time Dial/s 1 Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.001 A Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.001 A Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s

Inverse Time Overcurrent Element (ANSI) 51N

51N Pickup for INom = 1A for INom = 5A 51N Time Dial 51N Additional time delay Characteristics Tolerances Current Time 0.05 A to 25.00 A or 0.003 A to 25.000 A 0.25 A to 125.00 A or 0.015 A to 125.000 A 0.50 s to 15.00 s or (ineffective) 0.00 s to 30.00 s or (ineffective) See Figure 4-2 and 4-3 Pickup at 1.05 I/3I0P 1.15 5 % 15 ms for 2 I/51N 20 and 51N Time Dial/s 1 Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.001 A Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.001 A Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s

Inverse Time Overcurrent Element with Logarithmic-inverse Characteristic 51N

51N Pickup for INom = 1A for INom = 5A 51N Startpoint 0.05 A to 25.00 A or 0.003 A to 25.000 A 0.25 A to 125.00 A or 0.015 A to 125.000 A 1.0 to 4.0 Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.001 A Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.001 A Increments 0.1

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

445

4 Technical Data

51N Time Dial 51N Max. T-Delay 51N Min. T-Delay 51N Additional time delay Characteristics Tolerances Times inv. def.

0.05 s to 15.00 s; 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0.00 s to 30.00 s or (ineffective) See Figure 4-4

Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s

5 % 15 ms for 2 I/51N 20 and 51N Time Dial/s 1 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

Zero Sequence Voltage Time Protection Element (V0-inverse)

51N Pickup for INom = 1 A 0.05 A to 25.00 A or 0.003 A to 25.000 A for INom = 5 A 0.25 A to 125.00 A or 0.015 A to 125.000 A 59G-V0inv 3V0 Pickup Voltage factor V0 inv. minimum Additional time delay Characteristics Tolerances times Dropout Ratio The set times are pure delay times Current Voltage Tforw (V0inv) Trev. (V0inv) 1.0 V to 10.0 V 0.1 V to 5.0 V 0.00 s to 32.00 s 0.00 s to 32.00 s See Figure 4-5 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Approx. 0.95 for I/INom 0.5 Approx. 0.95 for 3V0 1 V Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.001 A Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.001 A Increments 0.1 V Increments 0.1 V Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s

Zero Sequence Power Protection Element

51N Pickup for INom = 1A for INom = 5A Pickup value S FORWARD 51N Additional time delay Characteristics Tolerances pick-up values Tolerances times 0.05 A to 25.00 A 0.003 A to 25.000 A 0.25 A to 125.00 A 0.015 A to 125.000 A 0.1 VA to 10.0 VA 0.00 s to 30.00 s See Figure 4-6 1 % of set value at sensitive ground current transformer 5 % of set value or 15 ms at sensitive ground current transformer 6 % of set value or 15 ms at normal ground current transformer / without ground current transformer Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.001 A Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.001 A Increments 0.1 VA Increments 0.01 s

Inrush Stabilization
Second harmonic content for inrush Inrush blocking is cancelled above 10 % to 45 % Referred to fundamental wave for INom = 1 0.50 A to 25.00 A A for INom = 5 2.50 A to 125.00 A A Inrush stabilization may be switched effective or ineffective for each individual stage. Increments 0.01 A Increments 1 %

446

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.5 Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N (optional)

Determination of Direction
Each zone can be set to operate in forward or reverse direction, non-directional or ineffective. Direction measurement With INom (= 3 I0) and 3 V0 and Ig or I2 and V2 With INom (= 3 I0) and 3 V0 and Ig With INom (= 3 I0) and Ig (transformer neutral current) With I2 and V2 (negative sequence quantities) With zero-sequence power Limit values Displacement voltage 67N(3V0) Neutral current of a power transformer 67N(Ig) for INom = 1A for INom = 5A Negative sequence current 67N(3I2) for INom = 1A for INom = 5A Negative sequence voltage 67N(3V2) "Forward" angle Capacitive alpha Inductive beta Tolerances pick-up values Tolerance forward angle Re-orientation time after direction change 0 to 360 0 to 360 5 Approx. 30 ms Increments 1 Increments 1 0.5 V to 10.0 V 0.05 A to 1.00 A 0.25 A to 5.00 A 0.05 A to 1.00 A 0.25 A to 5.00 A 0.5 V to 10.0 V Increments 0.1 V Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.1 V Increments 0.01 A

10 % of set value or 5 % of nominal current or 0.5 V

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

447

4 Technical Data

Figure 4-1

Trip time characteristics of inverse time overcurrent elements, acc. IEC (phases and ground)

448

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.5 Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N (optional)

Figure 4-2

Trip time characteristics of inverse time overcurrent element, acc. ANSI/IEEE (phases and ground)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

449

4 Technical Data

Figure 4-3

Trip time characteristics of inverse time overcurrent element, acc. ANSI/IEEE (phases and ground)

450

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.5 Ground Fault Protection in Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N (optional)

Figure 4-4

Trip time caracteristic of the inverse time overcurrent element with logarithmicinverse characteristic t = 51N Max.T-Delay - 51N Time Dialln(I/51N PICKUP)

Logarithmic inverse Note:

For I/51N PICKUP > 35 the time applies for I/51N PICKUP = 35

Figure 4-5

Trip time characteristics of the zero sequence voltage protection V0 inv.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

451

4 Technical Data

Figure 4-6

Tripping characteristics of the zero-sequence power protection

This characteristic applies for: Sref = 10 VA and 51N Add.T-Delay = 0 s.

452

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.6 Pilot Protection for Ground Fault Protection 8567N (optional)

4.6
Mode

Pilot Protection for Ground Fault Protection 8567N (optional)

For two line ends For three line ends

One channel for each direction or three channels each direction for phase-segregated transmission With one channel for each direction or connection

Comparison Schemes
Method Dir. comp. pickup Directional unblocking scheme Directional blocking scheme Send signal prolongation Enable delay Transient blocking time Wait time for transient blocking Echo delay time Echo impulse duration Time expiry tolerances The set times are pure delay times 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0.000 s to 30.000 s 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0.00 s to 30.00 s; 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0.00 s to 30.00 s 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.001 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s

Comparison Schemes via Protection Data Interface (optional)

Phase-segregated for two or three line ends Method Send signal prolongation Enable delay Transient blocking time Wait time for transient blocking Echo delay time Echo impulse duration Time expiry tolerances The set times are pure delay times Dir. comp. pickup 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0 s to 30,000 s 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0.00 s to 30.00 s; 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0.00 s to 30.00 s 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.001 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

453

4 Technical Data

4.7

Weak-Infeed Tripping (classic) 27WI

Operating Mode
Phase segregated undervoltage detection after reception of a carrier signal from the remote end

Undervoltage
Set value VPhG< Drop-off to pickup ratio Pickup tolerance 2 V to 70 V Approx. 1.1 5 % of setting value, or 0.5 V Increments 1 V

Times
Enable delay Enable delay Echo blocking duration after echo Pick-up tolerance 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0.00 s to 30.00 s 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s

454

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.8 Weak-Infeed Tripping (French specification) 27WI

4.8

Weak-Infeed Tripping (French specification) 27WI

Operating Mode
Phase segregated undervoltage detection after reception of a carrier signal from the remote end

Undervoltage
Set value VPhG< (factor) Dropout/pickup ratio Pickup tolerance 0.10 to 1.00 Approx. 1.1 5% Increments 0.01

Times
Receive prolongation Enable delay Alarm time Pickup tolerance 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0.00 s to 30.00 s 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s

Stage timers
Delay (single-pole) Delay (multi-pole) Pick-up tolerance 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0.00 s to 30.00 s 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

455

4 Technical Data

4.9

Protection Data Interfaces and Communication Topology (optional)

Protection Data Interfaces

Quantity - Connection optical fibre For flush-mounted housing For surface-mounted housing 1 or 2 Mounting location D for one connection or D and E for two connections On the rear side At the inclined housing at the case bottom

Connection modules for protection data interface, depending on the ordering version: Module in device Connector type FO5 1) FO6 2) FO7 2) FO8 2)
1

Fibre type Multimode 62.5/125m Multimode 62.5/125m Monomode 9/125 m Monomode 9/125 m

Optical wavelength 820 nm 820 nm 1300 nm 1300 nm

Perm. path attenua- Distance, maximum tion 8 dB 16 dB 7 dB 18 dB 1.5 km 0.95 miles 3.5 km 2.2 miles 10 km 6.25 miles 35 km 22 miles

ST ST ST FC

) Laser class I according to EN 60825-1/ -2 using glass fibre 62.5/125 m Laser class 3A according to EN 60825-1/ -2 Light Off

2)

- Character idle state

Protection Data Communication

Direct connection: Transmission rate Fibre type Optical wavelength Permissible link signal attenuation Transmission distance Connection via communication networks: Communication converter Supported network interfaces Connection to communication converter Transmission rate Max. runtime time Max. runtime difference Transmission accuracy See Appendix A.1, Subsection Accessories G703.1 with 64 kbit/s; X.21 with 64 or 128 or 512 kbit/s See table above under module FO 5 64 kbit/s with G703.1 512 kbit/s or 128 kBit/s or 64 kbit/s with X.21 0.1 ms to 30 ms 0.000 ms to 3.000 ms CRC 32 according to CCITT or ITU Increments 0.1 ms Increments 0.001 ms Refer to table above 512 kbit/s

456

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.10 External Direct and Remote Tripping

4.10

External Direct and Remote Tripping

External Trip of the Local Breaker

Operating time, total Trip time delay Time expiry tolerances The set times are pure delay times Approx. 11 ms 0.00 s to 30.00 s or (ineffective) 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.01 s

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

457

4 Technical Data

4.11

Time Overcurrent Protection 50(N) / 51(N)

Operating Modes
As Emergency Overcurrent Protection or Back-up Overcurrent Protection: Emergency overcurrent protection Operates on failure of the measured voltage, On trip of a voltage transformer mcb (via binary input) For pickup of the Fuse Failure Monitor Back-up overcurrent protection Operates independent of any events

Characteristics
Definite tiime elements (definite) Inverse time elements (IDMT) 50B1, 50N-B1, 50B2, 50N-B2 51B, 51N-B PICKUP; one of the characteristics according to Figure 4-1 to 4-3 (see Section 4.5) can be selected

Definite Time High Set Current Element 50(N)-B1

50B1 Pickup (phases) For INom = 1A For INom = 5A 50NB1 Pickup (ground) For INom = 1A For INom = 5A 50B1 delay (phases) 50NB1 delay (ground) Dropout Ratio Pickup times Dropout times Tolerances The set times are pure delay times Currents Times 0.10 A to 25.00 A or (ineffective) 0.50 A to 125.00 A or (ineffective) 0.05 A to 25.00 A Or (ineffective) 0.25 A to 125.00 A Or (ineffective) 0.00 s to 30.00 s Or (ineffective) 0.00 s to 30.00 s Or (ineffective) Approx. 0.95 for I/INom 0.5 Approx. 25 ms Approx. 30 ms 3 % of setting value or 1 % nominal current 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.01 A

Definite Time Overcurrent Element 50(N)-B2

50B2 Pickup (phases) For INom = 1A For INom = 5A 50N-B2 Pickup (ground) For INom = 1A For INom = 5A 50B2 delay (phases) 0.10 A to 25.00 A Or (ineffective) 0.50 A to 125.00 A Or (ineffective) 0.05 A to 25.00 A Or (ineffective) 0.25 A to 125.00 A Or (ineffective) 0.00 s to 30.00 s Or (ineffective) Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.01 A

458

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.11 Time Overcurrent Protection 50(N) / 51(N)

50NB2 delay (ground) Dropout Ratio Pickup times Dropout times Tolerances The set times are pure delay times Currents Times

0.00 s to 30.00 s Or (ineffective) Approx. 0.95 for I/INom 0.5 Approx. 25 ms Approx. 30 ms

Increments 0.01 s

3 % of setting value or 1 % nominal current 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

Inverse Time Overcurrent Element (IEC) 51(N)-B

51B Pickup (phases) for INom = 1 0.10 A to 4.00 A A or (ineffective) for INom = 5 0.50 A to 20.00 A A or (ineffective) 51N-B Pickup (ground) for INom = 1 0.05 A to 4.00 A A or (ineffective) for INom = 5 0.25 A to 20.00 A A or (ineffective) Time factors 51B Time 0.05 s to 3.00 s Dial (phas- or (ineffective) es) 51N-B Time Dial (ground) Additional time delays 51B Add.TDelay (phases) 0.05 s to 3.00 s or (ineffective) 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.01 A

Increments 0.01 s

Increments 0.01 s

51N-B Add. 0.00 s to 30.00 s T-Delay (ground) Characteristics Tolerances currents Tolerances times See Figure 4-1 Pick-up at 1.05 I/51B 1.15 or 1.05 I/51N-B 1.15

Increments 0.01 s

5 % 15 ms for 2 I/51N-B Pickup 20 and 51N-B Time Dial/s 1 or 2 I/51N-B Pickup 20 and 51N-B Time Dial/s 1 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

Defined times

Inverse Time Overcurrent Element (ANSI) 51(N)-B

51B Pickup (phases) for INom = 1 0.10 A to 4.00 A A or (ineffective) for INom = 5 0.50 A to 20.00 A A or (ineffective) 51N-B Pickup (ground) for INom = 1 0.05 A to 4.00 A A or (ineffective) for INom = 5 0.25 A to 20.00 A A or (ineffective) Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.01 A

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

459

4 Technical Data

Time factors

51B Time 0.50 s to 15.00 s Dial (phas- or (ineffective) es) 51N-B Time Dial (ground) 0.50 s to 15.00 s or (ineffective)

Increments 0.01 s

Increments 0.01 s

Additional time delays

51B Add. 0.00 s to 30.00 s T-Delay (phases) 51N-B Add. 0.00 s to 30.00 s T-Delay (ground)

Increments 0.01 s

Increments 0.01 s

Characteristics Tolerances currents Tolerances times

See Figure 4-2 and 4-3 Pick-up at 1.05 I/51B Pickup 1.15 or 1.05 I/51N-B Pickup 1.15 5 % 15 ms for 2 I/51N-B Pickup 20 and 51N-B Time Dial/s 1 or 2 I/51N-B Pickup 20 and 51N-B Time Dial/s 1 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

Defined times

Stub Fault Protection 50(N) STUB

50STUB Pickup (phases) for INom = 1A for INom = 5A 50NSTUB Pickup (ground) for INom = 1A for INom = 5A Delays 50-STUB Delay 0.10 A to 25.00 A or (ineffective) 0.50 A to 125.00 A or (ineffective) 0.05 A to 25.00 A or (ineffective) 0.25 A to 125.00 A or (ineffective) 0.00 s to 30.00 s or (ineffective) Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.01 A

50N-STUB 0.00 s to 30.00 s Delay or (ineffective) Drop-off to pickup ratio Pickup times Dropout times Tolerances currents The set times are pure delay times. Currents Times Approx. 0.95 for I/INom 0.5 Approx. 25 ms Approx. 30 ms

3 % of setting value or 1 % nominal current 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

460

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.12 Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection 50HS

4.12
Pickup

Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection 50HS

50HS Pickup

for INom = 1 1.00 A to 25.00 A A for INom = 5 5.00 A to 125.00 A A

Increments 0.01 A

Drop-off to pickup ratio Pickup tolerance

Approx. 90 % 3 % of set value or 1 % of INom

Times
Shortest trip time Approx. 13 ms for fast relays and Approx 8 ms for high-speed relays

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

461

4 Technical Data

4.13

Automatic Reclosure Function 79 (optional)

Automatic Reclosures
Number of reclosures Type (depending on ordered version) Control Action times Initiation possible without pick-up and action time Different dead times before reclosure can be set for all operating modes and cycles Dead times after evolving fault recognition Reclaim time after reclosure Blocking time after dynamic blocking Blocking time after manual closing Start signal monitoring time Circuit-breaker monitoring time Max. 8, first 4 with individual settings 1-pole, 3-pole or 1-/3-pole With pickup or trip command 0.01 s to 300.00 s; 0.01 s to 1800.00 s; Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s

0.01 s to 1800.00 s 0.50 s to 300.00 s 0.5 sec 0.50 s to 300.00 s; 0 0.01 s to 300.00 s 0.01 s to 300.00 s

Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s

Adaptive Dead Time (ADT) / Reduced Dead Time (RDT) / Dead Line Check
Adaptive dead time Action times Initiation possible without pickup and action time Maximum dead time Voltage measurement dead line or bus Voltage measurement live or bus Voltage measuring time Time delay for close command transmission With voltage measurement or with close command transmission 0.01 s to 300.00 s; 0.50 s to 3000.00 s 2 V to 70 V (Ph-G) 30 V to 90 V (Ph-G) 0.10 s to 30.00 s 0.00 to 300.00; Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 1 V Increments 1 V Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 s

462

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.14 Synchronism and Voltage Check 25 (optional)

4.14

Synchronism and Voltage Check 25 (optional)

Operating Modes
Operating modes with automatic reclosure Synchronism check Live bus - dead line Dead bus - live line Dead bus and dead line Bypassing Or combination of the above Synchronism Operating modes for manual closure Closing the circuit breaker under asynchronous power conditions possible (with circuit breaker action time) As for automatic reclosure, independently selectable

Voltages
Maximum operating voltage Dead voltage threshold Live voltage threshold Tolerances Drop-off to pick-up ratio 20 V to 140 V (phase-to-phase) 1 V to 60 V (phase-to-phase) 20 V to 125 V (phase-to-phase) 2 % of pickup value or 1 V Approx. 0.9 (V>) or 1.1 (V<) Increments 1 V Increments 1 V Increments 1 V

U-Measurement
Voltage difference Tolerance Drop-off to pick-up ratio 1.0 V to 40.0 V (phase-to-phase) 1V Approx. 1.05 Increments 0.1V

Synchronous Power Conditions

-measurement Tolerance f-measurement Tolerance Enable delay 2 to 80 2 0.03 Hz to 2.00 Hz 15 mHz 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 Hz Increments 1

Asynchronous Power Conditions

f-measurement Tolerance Max. angle error Synchronous/asynchronous limits Circuit breaker operating time 0.03 Hz to 2.00 Hz 15 mHz 5 for f 1 Hz 10 for f > 1 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.01 s to 0.60 s Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01 Hz

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

463

4 Technical Data

Times
Minimum measuring time Maximum measuring time Tolerance of all timers Approx. 80 ms 0.01 s to 600.00 s; 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.01 s

464

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.15 Voltage Protection 27/59 (optional)

4.15

Voltage Protection 27/59 (optional)

Overvoltage Phase-Ground
592Vph Pickup 592VphDelay 591Vph Pickup 591Vph Delay Drop-off to pickup ratio Pickup time Drop-off time Tolerances Voltages Times 1.0 V to 170.0 V; 0.00 s to 100.00 s; 1.0 V to 170.0 V; 0.00 s to 100.00 s; 0.30 to 0.98 Approx. 30 ms 3 % of setting value or 1 V 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.1V Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.1V Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01

Approx. 35 ms (50 Hz) / approx. 30 ms (60 Hz)

Overvoltage PhasePhase
592Vpp Pickup 592Vpp Delay 591Vpp Pickup 591Vpp Delay Drop-off to pick-up ratio Pickup time Drop-off time Tolerances Voltages Times 2.0 V to 220.0 V; 0.00 s to 100.00 s; 2.0 V to 220.0 V; 0.00 s to 100.00 s; 0.30 to 0.98 30 ms 3 % of setting value or 1 V 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.1V Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.1V Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01

Approx. 35 ms (50 Hz) / approx. 30 ms (60 Hz)

Overvoltage Positive Sequence System V1

592V1 Pickup 592V1 Delay 591V1 Pickup 591V1 Delay Drop-off to pick-up ratio Compounding Pickup time Drop-off time Tolerances Voltages Times 2.0 V to 220.0 V; 0.00 s to 100.00 s; 2.0 V to 220.0 V; 0.00 s to 100.00 s; 0.30 to 0.98 Can be switched on/off Approx. 35 ms (50 Hz) / approx. 30 ms (60 Hz) Approx. 30 ms 3 % of setting value or 1 V 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.1V Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.1V Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01

Overvoltage Negative Sequence System V2

592V2 Pickup 592V2 Delay 591V2 Pickup 591V2 Delay Drop-off to pickup ratio Pickup time Drop-off time 2.0 V to 220.0 V; 0.00 s to 100.00 s; 2.0 V to 220.0 V; 0.00 s to 100.00 s; 0.30 to 0.98 Approx. 30 ms Increments 0.1V Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.1V Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01

Approx. 35 ms (50 Hz) / approx. 30 ms (60 Hz)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

465

4 Technical Data

Tolerances

Voltages Times

3 % of setting value or 1 V 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

Overvoltage Zero Sequence System 3V0 or any Single-Phase Voltage V

59G-23V0 Pickup 59G-23V0 Delay 59G-13V0 Pickup 59G-13V0 Delay Drop-off to pick-up ratio Pickup time With repeated measurement Without repeated measurement Drop-off time Tolerances Voltages Times Approx. 75 ms (50 Hz) / approx. 65 ms (60 Hz) Approx. 35 ms (50 Hz) / approx. 30 ms (60 Hz) 30 ms 3 % of setting value or 1 V 1 % of setting value or 10 ms 1.0 V to 220.0 V; 0.00 s to 100.00 s; 1.0 V to 220.0 V; 0.00 s to 100.00 s; 0.30 to 0.98 Increments 0.1V Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.1V Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.01

Undervoltage PhaseGround
272Vph Pickup 272Vph Delay 271Vph Pickup 271Vph Delay Drop-off to pick-up ratio Current criterion Pickup time Drop-off time Tolerances Voltages Times 1.0 V to 100.0 V 0.00 s to 100.00 s; 1.0 V to 100.0 V 0.00 s to 100.00 s; Approx. 1.05 Can be switched on/off Approx. 35 ms (50 Hz) / approx. 30 ms (60 Hz) Approx. 30 ms 3 % of setting value or 1 V 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.1V Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.1V Increments 0.01 s

Undervoltage PhasePhase
272Vpp Pickup 272Vpp Delay 271Vpp Pickup 271Vpp Delay Drop-off to pick-up ratio Current criterion Pickup time Drop-off time Tolerances Voltages Times 1.0 V to 175.0 V 0.00 s to 100.00 s; 1.0 V to 175.0 V 0.00 s to 100.00 s; Approx. 1.05 Can be switched on/off Approx. 35 ms (50 Hz) / approx. 30 ms (60 Hz) 30 ms 3 % of setting value or 1 V 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.1V Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.1V Increments 0.01 s

Undervoltage Positive Sequence System V1

272V1 Pickup 272V1 Delay 271V1 Pickup 271V1 Delay 1.0 V to 100.0 V 0.00 s to 100.00 s; 1.0 V to 100.0 V 0.00 s to 100.00 s; Increments 0.1V Increments 0.01 s Increments 0.1V Increments 0.01 s

466

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.15 Voltage Protection 27/59 (optional)

Drop-off to pick-up ratio Current criterion Pickup time Drop-off time Tolerances Voltages Times

Approx. 1.05 Can be switched on/off Approx. 35 ms (50 Hz) / approx. 30 ms (60 Hz) 30 ms 3 % of setting value or 1 V 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

467

4 Technical Data

4.16

Frequency Protection 81 (optional)

Frequency Elements
Quantity 4, depending on setting effective on f< or f>

Pickup Values
f> or f< adjustable for each element For fNom = 50 Hz For fNom = 60 Hz 45.50 Hz to 54.50 Hz 55.50 Hz to 64.50 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz

Times
Pickup times f>, f< Dropout times f>, f< Delay times T Approx. 85 ms Approx. 80 ms 0.00 s to 600.00 s Increments 0.01 s

The set times are pure delay times. Note on drop-off times: Drop-off was enforced by current = 0 A and voltage = 0 V. Enforcing the drop-off by means of a frequency change below the drop-off threshold extends the drop-off times.

Dropout Frequency
f = | pickup value dropout value | Approx. 20 mHz

Operating Ranges
In voltage range In frequency range Approx. 6 V to 230 V (phase-ground) 25 Hz to 70 Hz

Tolerances
Frequencies f>, f< in specific range (fNom 10 %) Time delays T(f<, f>) 15 mHz in range VPhG: 29 to 230 V 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

468

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.17 Fault Locator

4.17
General
Start

Fault Locator

With trip command or drop-off for INom = 1A for INom = 5A for INom = 1A for INom = 5A 0.0050 /km to 9.5000 /km 0.0010 /km up to 1.9000 /km 0.0050 /mile up to 15.0000 /mile Increments 0.001 /mile 0.0010 /mile up to 3.0000 /mile Can be switched on/off The setting values are the same as for distance protection (see Section 4.2) Correction of the X-value, In primary and secondary, In km or miles line 1) In % line length 1) 2.5 % of the line length at 30 k 90 and Vk/VNom 0.1 Increments 0.001 /km

Setting range reactance (secondary), miles or km

Parallel line compensation (optional)

Taking into consideration the load current in case of single-phase ground faults Output of the fault distance

Measuring tolerances with sinusoidal quantities

1)

Output of the fault distance in km, miles, and % requires homogeneous lines.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

469

4 Technical Data

4.18

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection 50BF (optional)

Circuit Breaker Monitoring

Current flow monitoring for INom = 1 0.05 A to 20.00 A A for INom = 5 0.25 A to 100.00 A A Drop-off to pick-up ratio Tolerance Monitoring of circuit-breaker auxiliary contact position - for three-pole tripping - for single-pole tripping Binary input for circuit breaker auxiliary contact 1 binary input for auxiliary contact per pole or 1 binary input for series connection NO contact and NC contact Approx. 0.95 5 % of setting value or 1 % of nominal current Increments 0.01 A

Note: The circuit breaker failure protection can also operate without the indicated circuit breaker auxiliary contacts, but the function range is then reduced. Auxiliary contacts are necessary for the circuit breaker failure protection for tripping without or with a very low current flow (e.g. Buchholz protection, stub fault protection, circuit breaker pole discrepancy monitoring).

Initiation Conditions
For circuit breaker failure protection Single-pole tripping internal Three-pole tripping internal Single-pole tripping external 1) Three-pole tripping external 1) Three-pole tripping without current 1)

1)

via binary inputs

Times
Pickup time Drop-off time, internal (overshoot time) Delay times for all elements Tolerance Approx. 5 ms with measured quantities present Approx. 20 ms after switch-on of measured quantities 15 ms at sinusoidal measured values, 25 ms maximal 0.00 s to 30.00 s; 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.01 s

End Fault Protection

With signal transmission to the opposite line end Time delay Tolerance 0.00 s to 30.00 s; 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.01 s

Pole Discrepancy Supervision

Initiation criterion Monitoring time Tolerance Not all poles are closed or open 0.00 s to 30.00 s; 1 % of setting value or 10 ms Increments 0.01 s

470

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.19 Monitoring Function

4.19

Monitoring Function

Measured Values
Current sum - SUM I THRESHOLD IF = | IA + IB + IC + kI INom | > SUM.I Threshold INom + SUM.I factor | I | for INom = 1 0.05 A to 2.00 A A for INom = 5 0.25 A to 10.00 A A - SUM.I factor Voltage sum Current Symmetry - BAL.FACTOR I - BAL.I LIMIT 0.00 to 0.95 Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.01

VF = | VA + VB + VC + kV VGN | > 25 V | Imin | / | Imax | < BAL.FACTOR.I as long as Imax / INom > BAL.I LIMIT / INom 0.10 to 0.95 for INom = 1 0.10 A to 1.00 A A for INom = 5 0.50 A to 5.00 A A Increments 0.01 Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.01 A Increments 1 s

- T BAL.I LIMIT Broken conductor Voltage Symmetry - BAL.FACTOR V - BAL.V LIMIT - T BAL.V LIMIT Voltage phase sequence Non-symmetrical voltages (Fuse failure monitoring) - FFM V> - FFM I<

5 s to 100 s | Vmin | / | Vmax | < BAL.FACTOR.V as long as| Vmax | > BAL.V LIMIT 0.58 to 0.95 10 V to 100 V 5 s to 100 s

One conductor without current, the others with current

Increments 0.01 Increments 1 V Increments 1 s

VA beforeVB beforeVC as long as | VA|, | VB| , | VC| > 40 V/3 3 V0 > FFM V> OR 3 V2 > FFM V> AND at the same time 3 I0 < FFM I< AND 3 I2 < FFM I< 10 V to 100 V for INom = 1 0.10 A to 1.00 A A for INom = 5 0.50 A to 5.00 A A Increments 1 V Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.01 A

Three-phase measuring voltage failure (fuse failure monitoring)

All VPh-G < FFM VMEAS< AND at the same time All IPh < FFM Idelta AND All IPh > (IPh> (Dist.)) OR All VPh-G < FFM VMEAS< AND at the same time All IPh < (IPh> (Dist.)) AND All IPh > 40 mA

- FFM V<max

2 V to 100 V

Increments 1 V

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

471

4 Technical Data

- FFM Idelta

for INom = 1 0.05 A to 1.00 A A for INom = 5 0.25 A to 5.00 A A

Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.01 A Increments 0.01 s Increments 1 ms

- T V-Supervision (wait time for additional measured voltage failure monitoring) - T VT mcb

0.00 s to 30.00 s 0 ms to 30 ms

Trip Circuit Monitoring

Number of monitored circuits Operation per circuit Pickup and Dropout Time Settable delay time for operation with 1 binary input 1 to 3 With 1 binary input or with 2 binary inputs Approx. 1 to 2 s 1 s to 30 s Increments 1 s

472

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.20 Transmission of Binary Information (optional)

4.20
General

Transmission of Binary Information (optional)

Note: The setting for remote signal reset delay for communication failure may be 0 s to 300 s or . With setting annunciations are maintained indefinitely.

Remote Commands
Number of possible remote commands Operating times, total approx. Transmission speed 2 ends, minimum, typical 3 ends, minimum, typical Drop-off times, total approx. Transmission speed 2 ends, minimum, typical 3 ends, minimum, typical 512 kbit/s 10 ms 12 ms 10 ms 12 ms 128 kbit/s 12 ms 14 ms 13 ms 16 ms 64 kbit/s 13 ms 16 ms 18 ms 21 ms 512 kbit/s 12 ms 14 ms 13 ms 15 ms 128 kbit/s 14 ms 16 ms 16 ms 19 ms 64 kbit/s 16 ms 18 ms 21 ms 24 ms 4

The operating times refer to the entire signal path from entry via binary inputs until output of commands via fast output relays. For high-speed relays (7SA522*-*N/P/Q/R/S/T) approx. 5 ms can be subtracted from the time values.

Remote Signals
Number of possible remote signals Operating times, total approx. Transmission speed 2 ends, minimum, typical 3 ends, minimum, typical Drop-off times, total approx. Transmission speed 2 ends, minimum, typical 3 ends, minimum, typical 512 kbit/s 10 ms 12 ms 10 ms 12 ms 128 kbit/s 12 ms 14 ms 13 ms 16 ms 64 kbit/s 13 ms 16 ms 18 ms 21 ms 512 kbit/s 12 ms 14 ms 13 ms 15 ms 128 kbit/s 14 ms 16 ms 16 ms 19 ms 64 kbit/s 16 ms 18 ms 21 ms 24 ms 24

The operating times refer to the entire signal path from entry via binary inputs until output of commands via fast output relays. For high-speed relays (7SA522*-*N/P/Q/R/S/T) approx. 5 ms can be subtracted from the time values.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

473

4 Technical Data

4.21

User Defined Functions (CFC)

Function Modules and Possible Assignments to Task Levels

Function Module Explanation Task Level MW_BEARB PLC1_BEAR PLC_BEARB B ABSVALUE ADD AND BOOL_TO_CO BOOL_TO_DL BOOL_TO_IC BUILD_DI CMD_CHAIN CMD_INF CONNECT D_FF D_FF_MEMO DI_TO_BOOL DIV DM_DECODE DYN_OR LIVE_ZERO LONG_TIMER LOOP LOWER_SETPOINT MUL NAND NEG NOR OR RS_FF SQUARE_ROOT SR_FF SUB TIMER UPPER_SETPOINT X_OR ZERO_POINT Magnitude calculation addition AND - Gate Boolean to Control (conversion) Boolean to Double Point (conversion) Bool to internal SI, conversion Create Double Point annunciation Switching sequence Command information Connection D- Flipflop status memory for restart Double Point to Boolean (conversion) division Decode double point indication dynamic or Live-zero, non linear Curve Timer (max.1193h) Feedback loop Lower limit multiplication NAND - Gate Negator NOR - Gate OR - Gate RS- Flipflop root extractor SR- Flipflop substraction Timer Upper limit XOR - Gate Zero supression X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X SFS_BEARB X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X -

474

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.21 User Defined Functions (CFC)

General Limits
Description Maximum number of all CFC charts considering all task levels 32 Limit Comments When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by the device. Consequently, the device starts monitoring. The red ERROR-LED lights up. Only Error Message (evolving fault in processing procedure) When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by the device. Consequently, the device starts monitoring. The red ERROR-LED lights up. Only fault annunciation; here the number of elements of the left border per task level is counted. Since the same information is indicated at the border several times, only unequal information is to be counted. When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by the device. Consequently, the device is put into monitoring mode. The red ERROR-LED lights up.

Maximum number of all CFC charts considering one task level Maximum number of all CFC inputs considering all charts

16 400

Maximum number of inputs of one chart for each task level 400 (number of unequal information items of the left border per task level)

Maximum number of reset-resistant flipflops D_FF_MEMO

50

Device-specific Limits
Description Maximum number of synchronous changes of chart inputs per task level Maximum number of chart outputs per task level 50 150 Limit Comments When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by the device. Consequently, the device is put into monitoring mode. The red ERROR-LED lights up.

Additional Limits
Additional limits 1) for the following 4 CFC blocks: Task Level LONG_TIMER MW_BEARB PLC1_BEARB PLC_BEARB SFS_BEARB
1)

Maximum Number of Modules in the Task Levels TIMER CMD_CHAIN D_FF_MEMO

18

20

50

When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by the device. Consequently, the device is put into monitoring mode. The red ERROR-LED lights up.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

475

4 Technical Data

Maximum Number of TICKS in the Task Levels

Task Level MW_BEARB (Measured Value Processing) PLC1_BEARB (Slow PLC Processing) PLC_BEARB (Fast PLC Processing) SFS_BEARB (switchgear interlocking)
1)

Limit in TICKS 1) 10 000 1 900 200 10 000

When the sum of TICKS of all blocks exceeds the limits before-mentioned, an error message is output by CFC.

Processing Times in TICKS required by the Individual Elements

Individual Element Block, basic requirement Each input more than 3 inputs for generic modules Connection to an input signal Connection to an output signal Additional for each chart Operating sequence module Flipflop Loop module Decoder Dynamic OR Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Square root CMD_CHAIN D_FF_MEMO LOOP DM_DECODE DYN_OR ADD SUB MUL DIV SQUARE_ROOT Number of TICKS 5 1 6 7 1 34 6 8 8 6 26 26 26 54 83

476

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.22 Auxiliary Functions

4.22

Auxiliary Functions

Measured Values
Operational measured values for currents Tolerance Operational measured values for voltages Tolerance Operational measured values for voltages Tolerance Operational measured values for voltages Tolerance Operational measured values of impedances IA; IB; IC; 3I0; I1; I2; Ig; IP in A primary and secondary and in % INom 1 % of measured value, or 0.5 % of INom VA-G, VB-G, VC-G; VX in kV primary, in V secondary or in % of VNom/3 0.5 % of measured value, or 0.5 % of VNom 3V0 in kV primary, in V secondary or in % of VNom/3 0.5 % of measured value, or 0.5 % of VNom VAB, VBC, VC-A, VX, V1; V2; V1Co in kV primary, in V secondary or in % of VNom 0.5 % of measured value, or 0.5 % of VNom RA-B, RB-C, RC-A, RA-G, RB-G, RC-G, XA-B, XB-C, XC-A, XA-G, XB-G, XC-G in primary and secondary S; P; Q (apparent, active and reactive power) in MVA; MW; Mvar primary and % SNom (operational nominal power) = 3 VNom INom 1 % of SNom at I/INom and V/VNom from 50 to 120% 1 % of PNom at I/INom and V/VNom from 50 to 120% and ABS (cos) from 0.7 to 1 1 % of QNom at I/INom and V/VNom from 50 to 120% and ABS (cos) from 0.7 to 1 Operating measured value for power factor Tolerance Counter values for energy cos 0,02 Wp, Wq (real and reactive energy) In kWh (MWh or GWh) and In kVARh (MVARh or GVARh) 5 % for I > 0.5 INom, V > 0.5 VNom and | cos | 0.707 f in Hz and % fNom 94 % to 106 % of fNom 10 mHz and 0.2 % Vline, Vsync, Vdiff fline, fsync, fdiff in Hz; diff in IAdmd; IBdmd; ICdmd; I1dmd; Pdmd; Pdmd Forw, Pdmd Rev; Qdmd; Qdmd Forw; Qdmd Rev; Sdmd In primary values IA; IB; IC; I1; IAd; IBd; ICd; I1d; VA-G; VB-G; VC-G; V1; VA-B; VB-C; VC-A;3V0; P Forw; P Rev; Q Forw; Q Rev; S; Pd; Qd; Sd; cos Pos; cos Neg; f In primary values

Operational measured values for power

Tolerance

Tolerance 1) Operating measured values for frequency Range Tolerance Operational measured values for synchro check

Long-term mean value

Minimum and maximum values

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

477

4 Technical Data

Remote measured values for currents Remote measured values for voltages

IA, IB, IC of remote end (IA); (IB); (IC) (remote versus local) in VA; VB; VC of remote end (VA); (VB); (VC) (remote versVs local) in

1)

At nominal frequency

Operational Event Log Buffer

Capacity 200 records

Fault Protocol
Capacity 8 faults with a total of max. 600 messages

Fault Recording
Number of stored fault records Storage time Sampling rate at fNom = 50 Hz Sampling rate at f Nom = 60 Hz Max. 8 Max. 5s for each fault approx. 15 s in total 1 ms 0.83 ms

Statistics (serial protection data interface)

Availability of transmission for applications with protection data interface Delay time of transmission Availability in %/min and %/h Resolution 0.01 ms

Statistics
Number of trip events caused by the device Number of automatic reclosures initiated by the device Total of interrupted currents Maximum interrupted current Separately for each breaker pole (if single-pole tripping is possible) Separate for 1-pole and 3-pole AR; separate for 1st AR cycle and for all further cyles Pole segregated Pole segregated

Real Time Clock and Buffer Battery

Resolution for operational events Resolution for fault events Buffer battery 1 ms 1 ms Type: 3 V/1 Ah, Type CR 1/2 AA self-discharging time approx. 10 years

478

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.23 Dimensions

4.23

Dimensions

4.23.1 Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size 1/2)

Figure 4-7

Dimensions of a device for panel flush or cubicle mounting (size 1/2)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

479

4 Technical Data

4.23.2 Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size 1/1)

Figure 4-8

Dimensions of a device for panel flush or cubicle mounting (size 1/1)

480

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

4.23 Dimensions

4.23.3 Panel Surface Mounting (Housing Size 1/2)

Figure 4-9

Dimensions of a device for panel surface mounting (size 1/2)

4.23.4 Panel Surface Mounting (Housing Size 1/1)

Figure 4-10

Dimensions of a device for panel surface mounting (size 1/1)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

481

4 Technical Data

482

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Appendix

A
This appendix is primarily a reference for the experienced user. This section provides ordering information for the models of this device. Connection diagrams indicating the terminal connections of the models of this device are included. Following the general diagrams are diagrams that show the proper connections of the devices to primary equipment in many typical power system configurations. Tables with all settings and all information available in this device equipped with all options are provided. Default settings are also given.

A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6 A.7 A.8 A.9 A.10

Ordering Information and Accessories Terminal Assignments Connection Examples Default Settings Protocol-dependent Functions Functional Scope Settings Information List Group Alarms Measured Values

484 491 505 512 520 521 523 539 570 571

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

483

A Appendix

A.1
A.1.1
A.1.1.1

Ordering Information and Accessories

Ordering Information
Ordering Code (MLFB)
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 + 17 18 19

Numerical Distance Protection (position 1 to 9 3))

Measuring Inputs (4 x V, 4 x I) Iph = 1 A, In = 1 A (min. = 0.05 A) Iph = 1 A, In = sensitive (min. = 0.005 A) Iph = 5 A, In = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A) Iph = 5 A, In = sensitive (min. = 0.005 A) Auxiliary Voltage (Power Supply, Pickup Threshold of Binary Inputs) 24 to 48 VDC, binary input threshold 17 V 110 to 250 VDC
1), 2)

Pos. 7 1 2 5 6 Pos. 8 2 4

60 to 125 VDC 1), binary input threshold 17 V 2) 115 VAC, binary input threshold 73 VDC
2)

5 6 Pos. 9 A C D E G H J L M N P Q R S

220 to 250 VDC, 115 VAC, binary input threshold 154 VDC 2) Housing / Number of Binary Inputs (BI) and Outputs (BO) Flush mounting housing with screwed terminals /2 x 19'', 8 BI, 16 BO Flush mounting housing with screwed terminals 1/1 x 19'', 16 BI, 24 BO Flush mounting housing with screwed terminals
1/ 1 1

x 19'', 24 BI, 32 BO

Surface mounting housing with two-tier terminals 1/2 x 19'', 8 BI, 16 BO Surface mounting housing with two-tier terminals 1/1 x 19'', 16 BI, 24 BO Surface mounting housing with two-tier terminals 1/1 x 19'', 24 BI, 32 BO Flush mounting housing with plug-in terminals /2 x 19'', 8 BI, 16 BO Flush mounting housing with plug-in terminals 1/1 x 19'', 16 BI, 24 BO Flush mounting housing with plug-in terminals /1 x 19'', 24 BI, 32 BO Flush mounting housing with screwed terminals, 1/1 x 19, 16 BI, 24 BO (incl. 5 BO with high-speed relay) Flush mounting housing with screwed terminals, 1/1 x 19, 24 BI, 32 BO (incl. 5 BO with high-speed relay) Surface mounting housing with two-tier terminals, 1/1 x 19, 16 BI, 24 BO (incl. 5 BO with high-speed relay) Surface mounting housing with two-tier terminals, /1 x 19, 24 BI, 32 BO (incl. 5 BO with high-speed relay) Flush mounting housing with plug-in terminals, 1/1 x 19, 16 BI, 24 BO (incl. 5 BO with high-speed relay)
1 1 1

Flush mounting housing with plug-in terminals, 1/1 x 19, 24 BI, 32 BO (incl. 5 BO with high-speed relay), 1 live T status contact
1) 2) 3)

with plug-in jumper one of the 2 voltage ranges can be selected for each binary input one of 2 pick-up threshold ranges can be selected with plug-in jumper for details on positions 10 to 19 see beneath

484

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories

7 Numerical Distance Protection (position 1 to 9 3)) 7 S A 5 2 2

10 11 12

13 14 15 16 +

17 18 19

Region-specific Default/Language Settings and Function Versions 1) Region DE, German language (can be changed) Region World, English language (GB) (language can be changed) Region US, English language (US) (can be changed) Region FR, French language (on request) Region World, Spanish language (on request) Region World, Italian language (on request)
1)

Pos. 10 A B C D E F

Regulations for Region-specific Default and Function Settings: Region World: Default setting f = 50 Hz and line length in km, ground fault direction detection: no direction decision with zero sequence power protection, no logarithmic inverse characteristic available. Region US: Default setting f = 60 Hz and line length in miles, only ANSI-inverse characteristic available, ground fault direction detection: no direction decision with zero sequence power protection, no logarithmic inverse characteristic available. Region FR:Default setting f = 50 Hz and line length in km, ground fault direction detection: no logarithmic inverse characteristic available, with zero sequence power protection and weak infeed logic according to the French Specification. Region DE: Default setting f = 50 Hz and line length in km, only IEC-inverse characteristic available, no STUB-Bus stage available, no logarithmic inverse characteristic for ground fault protection, no direction decision with zero sequence power protection. 7 Numerical Distance Protection (position 1 to 9 3)) 7 S A 5 2 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 + 17 18 19

Port B None System port, IEC protocol 60870-5-103, electrical RS232 System port, IEC protocol 60870-5-103, electrical RS485 System port, IEC protocol 60870-5-103, optical 820 nm, ST connector System port, Profibus FMS slave, electrical RS485 System port, Profibus FMS slave, optical, double ring, ST-connector For further protocols see additional information L (position 17 to 19) Port C and D None DIGSI/Modem, electrical RS232, port C DIGSI/Modem, electrical RS485, port C DIGSI/Modem, optical 820 nm, ST connector, port C With port C and D see additional information M (position 17 to 19) 7 Numerical Distance Protection (position 17 to 19 ) 7 S A 5 2 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 +

Pos. 11 0 1 2 3 4 6 9 Pos. 12 0 1 2 3 9 17 18 19 L

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

485

A Appendix

Additional information L, further protocols port B System port, Profibus DP slave, electrical RS485 System port, Profibus DP slave, optical 820nm, double ring, ST-connector System port, DNP3.0, electrical RS485 System port, DNP3.0, optical 820 nm, ST-connector 7 Numerical Distance Protection (position 17 to 19 ) 7 S A 5 2 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 +

Position 18, 19 0, A 0, B 0, G 0, H 17 18 19 M

Additional information M, port C None DIGSI/Modem, electrical RS232 DIGSI/Modem, electrical RS485 DIGSI/Modem, Optical 820 nm, ST-Connector Additional Information M, Port D; for A) Direct Connection, B) Communication Networks Optical 820 nm, 2-ST-connector, length of optical fibre up to 0.95 miles for multimode-fibre (FO5); A) or B) Optical 820 nm, 2-ST-connector, length of optical fibre up to 2.2 miles for multimode-fibre (FO6); A) Optical 1300 nm, 2-ST-connector, length of optical fibre up to 6.25 miles for monomode-fibre (FO7); A) Optical 1300 nm, 2-FC-connector, length of optical fibre up to 22 miles for monomode-fibre (FO8); A) 7 Numerical Distance Protection (position 10 to 16 ) 7 S A 5 2 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 +

Pos. 18 0 1 2 3 Pos. 19 A B C D 17 18 19

Functions 1 Only 3-pole tripping Only 1-/3-pole tripping with Functions 1 and Port E see additional information N Functions 2 21 Distance pickup Z<, Polygon, without power swing option, without parallel line compensation 21 Distance pickup Z<, MHO, without power swing option, without parallel line compensation 21 Distance pickup Z<, Polygon, with power swing option, without parallel line compensation 21 Distance pickup Z<, MHO, with power swing option, without parallel line compensation 21 Distance pickup Z<, Polygon, without power swing option, with parallel line compensation 1) 21 Distance pickup Z<, MHO, without power swing option, with parallel line compensation 21 Distance pickup Z<, MHO, with power swing option, with parallel line compensation
1) 1) 1)

Pos. 13 0 4 9 Pos. 14 C E Z H K M N Q

21 Distance pickup Z<, Polygon, with power swing option, with parallel line compensation 1)

only available with 1 or 5 on position 7

486

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories

Functions 3 Automatic Reclo- SynchroBreaker Failure Protection 50 BF sure 79 nism Check 25 without without without without without without without without with with with with with with with with without without without without with with with with without without without without with with with with without without with with without without with with without without with with without without with with Voltage Protection, Frequency Protection 59/27, 81O/U without with without with without with without with without with without with without with without with Functions 4 Ground Fault Protection / Directional for Grounded Systems 50N/51N/67N without without with with
1) 2) 3)

Pos. 15

A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R Pos. 16

Measured Values, Extended, Min / Max Values

without with without with

0 1 4 5

only available with 2 or 6 on position 7 only available with 1 or 5 on position 7 not available with surface mounting housing

7 Numerical Distance Protection (position 17 to 19 ) 7 S A 5 2 2

10 11 12

13 14 15 16 +

17 18 19 N

Additional Specification N, Functions 1 Only 3-pole tripping Only 1-/3-pole tripping Additional Information Port E; for 1) Direct Connection; 2) Communication Networks

Pos. 18 0 4 Pos. 19

Optical 820 nm, 2-ST-connector, length of optical fibre up to 1.5 km/0.93 miles for multimode-fibre (FO5); 1) or A 2) Optical 820 nm, 2-ST-connector, length of optical fibre up to 3.5 km/1.86 miles for multimode-fibre (FO6); 1) B

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

487

A Appendix

Additional Information Port E; for 1) Direct Connection; 2) Communication Networks Optical 1300 nm, 2-ST-connector, length of optical fibre up to 10 km/6.2 miles for monomode-fibre (FO7); 1)

Pos. 19 C

Optical 1300 nm, 2-FC-connector, length of optical fibre up to 35 km/21.7 miles for monomode-fibre (FO8); 1) D

A.1.2

Accessories
Nominal Values Thermal 1.6 A; magnetic 6 A Order No. 3RV1611-1AG14

Voltage Transformer Miniature Circuit Breaker Communication Converter

Converter for the serial connection of the distance protection system 7SA522 to the synchronous communication interfaces X.21 or G703 (KU-X/G), or for pilot wire pairs (KuKu). Name Order No. Optoelectrical communication converter X/G Optoelectrical communication converter CC-CC 7XV5662-0AA00 7XV5662-0AC00

Interface Modules

Exchange modules for interfaces RS232 RS485 FO 820 nm Profibus FMS RS485 Profibus FMS double ring Profibus DP RS485 Profibus DP double ring DNP 3.0 RS 485 DNP 3.0 820 nm AN20

Order No. C53207-A351-D641-1 C53207-A351-D642-1 C53207-A351-D643-1 C53207-A351-D603-1 C53207-A351-D606-1 C53207-A351-D611-1 C53207-A351-D613-1 C53207-A351-D631-1 C53207-A351-D633-1 C53207-A351-D661-1

FO5 with STconnector; 820nm; multimode optical fibre maximum length: 0.95 miles 1) C53207-A351-D651-1 FO6 with STconnector; 820nm; multimode optical fibre maximum length: 2.2 miles C53207-A351-D652-1 FO7 with ST-connector; 1300 nm; monomode optical fibre - maximum length: 6.25 miles C53207-A351-D653-1 FO8 with FC-connector; 1300 nm; monomode optical fibre - maximum length: 22 miles C53207-A351-D654-1 1) also used for connection to optical-electrical communication converter

488

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories

Terminal Block Covering Caps

Terminal Block Covering Cap for Block Type 18 terminal voltage, 12 terminal current block 12 terminal voltage, 8 terminal current block

Order No. C73334-A1-C31-1 C73334-A1-C32-1

Short-Circuit Links

Short Circuit Links for Purpose / Terminal Type Voltage connections (18 terminal or 12 terminal) Current connections (12 terminal or 8 terminal)

Order No. C73334-A1-C34-1 C73334-A1-C33-1

Plug-in Connector

Plug-in Connector 2-pin 3-pin

Order No. C73334-A1-C35-1 C73334-A1-C36-1

Mounting Rail for 19"- Racks

Name Angle Strip (Mounting Rail)

Order No. C73165-A63-C200-3

Battery

Lithium battery 3 V/1 Ah, type CR 1/2 AA VARTA

Order No. 6127 101 501

Interface Cable

An interface cable and the DIGSI software is necessary for communication between the SIPROTEC 4 device and a PC or Laptop: Requirements for the computer are Windows 95 or Windows NT4. Order No. Interface cable between PC and SIPROTEC, Cable with 9pin male/female connectors 7XV5100-4

DIGSI Operating Software

Software for Configuration and Operation of SIPROTEC 4 devices Order No. DIGSI software for configuration and operation DIGSI, basic version with licenses for 10 computers DIGSI, complete version with all option packages 7XS5400-0AA00 7XS5402-0AA0

Graphical Analysis Program SIGRA

Software for graphical visualization, analysis, and evaluation of fault data. Option package of the complete version of DIGSI Order No. Graphical Analysis Program SIGRA, Full version with license for 10 computers 7XS5410-0AA0

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

489

A Appendix

Display Editor

Software for creating basic and power system control pictures (option package of the complete version of DIGSI) Order No. Display Editor 4; Full version with license for 10 PCs 7XS5420-0AA0

Graphic Tools

Graphical Software to aid in the setting of characteristic curves and provide zone diagrams for overcurrent and distance protective devices. Option package of the complete version of DIGSI . Order No. Graphic Tools 4; Full version with license for 10 PCs 7XS5430-0AA0

DIGSI REMOTE 4

Software for remotely operating protective devices via a modem (and possibly a star connector) using DIGSI (option package of the complete version of DIGSI 4) Order No. DIGSI REMOTE 4; Full version with license for 10 PCs; Language: German 7XS5440-1AA0

SIMATIC CFC 4

Graphical software for setting interlocking (latching) control conditions and creating additional functions (option package of the complete version of DIGSI) Order No. SIMATIC CFC 4; Full version with license for 10 PCs 7XS5450-0AA0

490

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.2 Terminal Assignments

A.2
A.2.1

Terminal Assignments
Housing for panel surface and cubicle mounting

7SA522*-*A/J

Figure A-1

General diagram 7SA522*-*A/J (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting; size 1 /2)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

491

A Appendix

7SA522*-*C/L

Figure A-2

General diagram 7SA522*-*C/L (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting; size 1/1)

492

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.2 Terminal Assignments

7SA522*-*N/S

Figure A-3

General diagram 7SA522*-*N/S (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting; size 1/1)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

493

A Appendix

7SA522*-*D/M

Figure A-4

General diagram 7SA522*-*D/M (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting; size 1/1)

494

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.2 Terminal Assignments

7SA522*-*P/T

Figure A-5

General diagram 7SA522*-*P/T (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting; size 1/1)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

495

A Appendix

A.2.2

Housing for Panel Surface Mounting

7SA522*-*E

Figure A-6

General diagram 7SA522*-*E (panel surface mounting; size 1/2)

496

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.2 Terminal Assignments

7SA522*-*E (up to release .../DD)

Figure A-7

General diagram 7SA522*-*E up to release .../DD (panel surface mounting; size 1/2)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

497

A Appendix

7SA522*-*E (release .../EE and higher)

Figure A-8

General diagram 7SA522*-*E release .../EE and higher (panel surface mounting; size 1/2)

498

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.2 Terminal Assignments

7SA522*-*G

Figure A-9

General diagram 7SA522*-*G (panel surface mounting; size 1/1)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

499

A Appendix

7SA522*-*Q

Figure A-10

General diagram 7SA522*-*Q (panel surface mounting; size 1/1)

500

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.2 Terminal Assignments

7SA522*-*H

Figure A-11

General diagram 7SA522*-*H (panel surface mounting; size 1/1)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

501

A Appendix

7SA522*-*R

Figure A-12

General diagram 7SA522*-*R (panel surface mounting; size 1/1)

502

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.2 Terminal Assignments

7SA522*-*G/H/Q/R (up to release .../DD)

Figure A-13

General diagram 7SA522*-*G/H/Q/R up to release .../DD (panel surface mounting; size 1/1)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

503

A Appendix

7SA522*-*G/H/Q/R (release .../EE and higher)

Figure A-14

General diagram 7SA522*-*G/H/Q/R release .../EE and higher (panel surface mounting; size 1/1)

504

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.3 Connection Examples

A.3
A.3.1

Connection Examples
Current Transformer Examples

Figure A-15

Current connections to three current transformers and neutral current (normal circuit layout)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

505

A Appendix

Figure A-16

Current connections to three current transformers with separate earth current transformer (summation current transformer) preferably for low-resistance grounded systems.

506

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.3 Connection Examples

Figure A-17

Current connections to three current transformers and ground current from the neutral connection of a parallel line (for parallel line compensation)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

507

A Appendix

Figure A-18

Current connections to three current transformers and ground current from the neutral current of a grounded power transformer (for directional ground fault protection)

508

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.3 Connection Examples

A.3.2

Voltage Transformer Examples

Figure A-19

Voltage connections to three wye-connected voltage transformers (normal circuit layout)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

509

A Appendix

Figure A-20

Voltage connections to three wye-connected voltage transformers with additional broken-delta windings

510

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.3 Connection Examples

Figure A-21

Voltage connections to three wye-connected voltage transformers and additionally to a busbar voltage (for overvoltage protection or synchronism check)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

511

A Appendix

A.4

Default Settings
When the device leaves the factory, many LED indications, binary inputs, binary outputs and function keys are already preset. They are summarized in the following table.

A.4.1

LEDs
Table A-1 LEDs LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6 LED7 LED Indication Presettings Short Text Relay PICKUP A Relay PICKUP B Relay PICKUP C Relay PICKUP G 67N PU reverse 21 PU reverse Relay TRIP Relay TRIP 3ph. Relay TRIP 1p.A Relay TRIP 1p.B Relay TRIP 1p.C LED8 21 TRIP 1p. Z1 21 TRIP3p. Z1sf 21 TRIP3p. Z1mf LED9 21 TRIP 1p. Z1B 21 TRIP3p.Z1Bsf 21 TRIP3p Z1Bmf LED10 LED11 21 TRIP 1p. Z2 21 TRIP 3p. Z2 21 TRIP 3p. Z3 21 TRIP 3p. Z4 21 TRIP 3p. Z5 79 not ready Emer. mode Alarm Sum Event Function No. 503 504 505 506 1359 3720 511 515 512 513 514 3811 3823 3824 3813 3825 3826 3816 3817 3818 3821 3822 2784 2054 160 Description Relay PICKUP Phase A Relay PICKUP Phase B Relay PICKUP Phase C Relay PICKUP GROUND 67N picked up REVERSE 21 Picked up REVERSE Relay GENERAL TRIP command Relay TRIP command Phases ABC Relay TRIP command - Only Phase A Relay TRIP command - Only Phase B Relay TRIP command - Only Phase C 21 TRIP single-phase Z1 21 TRIP 3phase in Z1 with single-ph Flt. 21 TRIP 3phase in Z1 with multi-ph Flt. 21 TRIP single-phase Z1B 21 TRIP 3phase in Z1B with singleph Flt 21 TRIP 3phase in Z1B with multi-ph Flt. 21 TRIP single-phase Z2 21 TRIP 3phase in Z2 21 TRIP 3phase in Z3 21 TRIP 3phase in Z4 21 TRIP 3phase in Z5 79: Auto recloser is not ready Emergency mode Alarm Summary Event

LED12 LED13 LED14

A.4.2

Binary Input
Table A-2 Binary Input BI1 BI2 BI3 Binary input presettings for all devices and ordering variants Short Text >Reset LED >Manual Close >FAIL:Feeder VT Function No. 5 356 361 Description >Reset LED >Manual close signal >Failure: Feeder VT (MCB tripped)

512

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.4 Default Settings

Binary Input BI4 BI5

Short Text >85-21 Rec.Ch1 >1p Trip Perm

Function No. 4006 381

Description >85-21 Carrier RECEPTION, Channel 1 >Single-phase trip permitted from ext.AR

A.4.3

Binary Output
Table A-3 Output Relay Presettings for All Devices and Ordering Variants Function No. 501 4056 511 512 515 511 513 515 514 515 2851 3823 3825 3811 3813 3824 3826 3823 3824 3825 3826 3823 3825 3824 3826 160 Description Relay PICKUP 85-21 Carrier SEND signal Relay GENERAL TRIP command Relay TRIP command - Only Phase A Relay TRIP command Phases ABC Relay GENERAL TRIP command Relay TRIP command - Only Phase B Relay TRIP command Phases ABC Relay TRIP command - Only Phase C Relay TRIP command Phases ABC 79 - Close command 21 TRIP 3phase in Z1 with single-ph Flt. 21 TRIP 3phase in Z1B with singleph Flt 21 TRIP single-phase Z1 21 TRIP single-phase Z1B 21 TRIP 3phase in Z1 with multi-ph Flt. 21 TRIP 3phase in Z1B with multi-ph Flt. 21 TRIP 3phase in Z1 with single-ph Flt. 21 TRIP 3phase in Z1 with multi-ph Flt. 21 TRIP 3phase in Z1B with singleph Flt 21 TRIP 3phase in Z1B with multi-ph Flt. 21 TRIP 3phase in Z1 with single-ph Flt. 21 TRIP 3phase in Z1B with singleph Flt 21 TRIP 3phase in Z1 with multi-ph Flt. 21 TRIP 3phase in Z1B with multi-ph Flt. Alarm Summary Event

Binary Output Short Text BO1 Relay PICKUP BO2 85-21 SEND BO3 BO4 Relay TRIP Relay TRIP 1p.A Relay TRIP 3ph. Relay TRIP Relay TRIP 1p.B Relay TRIP 3ph. Relay TRIP 1p.C Relay TRIP 3ph. 79 Close 21 TRIP3p. Z1sf 21 TRIP3p.Z1Bsf 21 TRIP 1p. Z1 21 TRIP 1p. Z1B 21 TRIP3p. Z1mf 21 TRIP3p Z1Bmf 21 TRIP3p. Z1sf 21 TRIP3p. Z1mf 21 TRIP3p.Z1Bsf 21 TRIP3p Z1Bmf BO10 21 TRIP3p. Z1sf 21 TRIP3p.Z1Bsf BO11 21 TRIP3p. Z1mf 21 TRIP3p Z1Bmf BO12 Alarm Sum Event

BO5

BO6

BO7 BO8

BO9

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

513

A Appendix

Binary Output Short Text BO13 Relay TRIP Relay TRIP 1p.A Relay TRIP 3ph. Relay TRIP Relay TRIP 1p.B Relay TRIP 3ph. Relay TRIP 1p.C Relay TRIP 3ph.

Function No. 511 512 515 511 513 515 514 515

BO14

BO15

Description Relay GENERAL TRIP command Relay TRIP command - Only Phase A Relay TRIP command Phases ABC Relay GENERAL TRIP command Relay TRIP command - Only Phase B Relay TRIP command Phases ABC Relay TRIP command - Only Phase C Relay TRIP command Phases ABC

A.4.4

Function Keys
Table A-4 Applies to All Devices and Ordered Variants Function No. Description

Function Keys Short Text F1 Display of operational indications F2 Display of the primary operational measured values F3 An overview of the last eight network faults F4 Not assigned

A.4.5

Default Display

4-line Display

Table A-5 Page 1

This selection is available as start page which may be configured.

Page 2

Page 3

514

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.4 Default Settings

Page 4

Page 5

Spontaneous Fault Indication of the 4-Line Display

The spontaneous annunciations on devices with 4-line display serve to display the most important data about a fault. They appear automatically in the display after general interrogation of the device, in the sequence shown in the following Figure.

Figure A-22

Spontaneous Fault Annunciation Display

A.4.6

Pre-defined CFC Charts

Some CFC charts already come with the SIPROTEC device. Depending on the variant, the following charts may be implemented:

Device and System Logic

Some of the event-controlled logical allocations are created with blocks of the slow logic (PLC1_BEARB = slow PLC processing). This way, the binary input Data Stop is modified from a single point indication (SP) into an internal single point indication (IntSP) by means of a negator block. With the double point indication GndSwit. = CLOSE an indication saying Feeder GND ON, and with GndSwit. = OPEN or F the indication Feeder gnd OFF is generated. From the output indication final TRIP the internal indication Brk OPENEDis generated. As indication final TRIP only queued for 500ms, also indication Device Brk OPENED is reset after this time period.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

515

A Appendix

Figure A-23

Allocation of input and output with blocks of priority class System Logic

Interlocking

With blocks of level Interlocking (SFS_BEARB = interlocking), standard interlocking for three switchgears (circuit breaker, disconnector switch and ground switch) is predefined. Due to the large functional scope of the logic you will find this level on two worksheets. The circuit breaker can only be opened, if the circuit breaker is set to OPEN or CLOSE and the disconnector switch is set to OPEN or CLOSE and the ground switch is set to OPEN or CLOSE and the disconnector switch and the ground switch are not set to CLOSE at the same time and the input indication CB wait is OFF and the input indication Door open is OFF. The disconnector switch can only be closed, if: the circuit breaker is set to OPEN and the ground switch is set to OPEN and the disconnector switch is set to OPEN or CLOSE and the input indication Door open is OFF. The disconnector switch can only be closed, if: the circuit breaker is set to OPEN and the disconnector switch is set to OPEN or CLOSE and the ground switch is set to OPEN or CLOSE and the input indication Door open is OFF.

516

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.4 Default Settings

The ground switch can only be closed, if: the circuit breaker is set to OPEN and the disconnector switch is set to OPEN and the ground switch is set to OPEN or CLOSE and the input indication Door open is OFF. If the above requirements are not fulfilled, the actions of the switch commands will be blocked with error messages by DIGSI.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

517

A Appendix

Figure A-24

Standard interlocking for circuit breaker, disconnector switch and ground switch

518

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.4 Default Settings

Limit Value Handling (Set Points)

On two worksheets, blocks of level Processing of Measured Values are used to implement set point supervision of the sum of power factor |cos| <, and in the maximum functional scope, additional set point supervisions of currents (demand meter of phase currents and positive-sequence component) and supervisions of power (apparent power, active power and reactive power). A dropout ratio of 0.95, or at least 0.5% applies for each dropout.

Figure A-25

Set point configuration with blocks of priority class Processing of Measured Values (MW_BEARB)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

519

A Appendix

A.5

Protocol-dependent Functions
IEC 60870-5-103 PROFIBUS FMS PROFIBUS DP DNP3.0 Additional Interface (optional) Yes Yes

Protocol Function Operational Measured Values Metered Values Fault Recording

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes No. Only via additional service interface No. Only via additional service interface Pre-defined userdefined messages in CFC

Yes Yes

No. Only via ad- Yes ditional service interface No. Only via ad- Yes ditional service interface Pre-defined User-defined messages in CFC Yes

Remote Relay Setting

No. Only via additional service interface

Yes

User-defined Yes Alarms and Switching Objects Time Synchronisation

Yes

Via protocol; Via protocol; Via DCF77/IRIG B; DCF77/IRIG B; In- DCF77/IRIG B; In- Interface; Binary terface; Binary input terface; Binary input input Yes No

Via protocol; DCF77/IRIG B; Interface; Binary input Yes Yes

Messages with Time Yes Stamp Commissioning Tools Alarm and Measured Value Transmission Blocking Generate Test Alarms Physical Mode Baud Rate Type Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Asynchronous 4800 to 38400 RS 232 RS 485 Optical fibre

Asynchronous Cyclic/Event Up to 1.5 MBaud

Asynchronous Cyclic Up to 1.5 MBaud

Asynchronous Cyclic/Event 2400 to 19200

2400 to 115200 RS232/RS48 5

Transmission Mode Cyclic/Event

RS 485 Optical fibre RS 485 Optical fibre RS 485 Optical Double ring Double ring fibre

520

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.6 Functional Scope

A.6
Addr. 103 110 112

Functional Scope
Parameter Grp Chge OPTION Trip mode 21 Phase Dist. Setting Options Disabled Enabled 3pole only 1-/3pole Quadrilateral MHO Disabled Quadrilateral MHO Disabled Disabled Enabled PUTT (Z1B) POTT UNBLOCKING BLOCKING SIGNALv.ProtInt Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Logic no. 2 Disabled TOC ANSI Disabled TOC ANSI Definite Time Dir.Comp.Pickup SIGNALv.ProtInt UNBLOCKING BLOCKING Disabled 1 AR-cycle 2 AR-cycles 3 AR-cycles 4 AR-cycles 5 AR-cycles 6 AR-cycles 7 AR-cycles 8 AR-cycles ADT Disabled PU w/ActionTime PU w/o ActionT. Trip w/ActionT. Trip w/oActionT Disabled Enabled Default Setting Disabled 3pole only Quadrilateral Comments Setting Group Change Option Trip mode 21 Phase Distance

113

21G Ground Dist

Quadrilateral

21G Ground Distance

120 121

68 Power Swing 85-21 PilotDist

Disabled Disabled

68 Power Swing detection 85-21 Pilot Protection for Distance prot

122 124 125

DTT Direct Trip 50HS SOTF Weak Infeed

Disabled Disabled Disabled

DTT Direct Transfer Trip 50HS Instantaneous High Speed SOTF Weak Infeed (Trip and/or Echo)

126 131

50(N)/51(N) O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C

TOC ANSI Disabled

50(N)/51(N) Backup OverCurrent 50N/51N Ground OverCurrent

132

85-67N PilotGnd

Disabled

85-67N Pilot Protection Gnd. OverCurrent

133

79 Auto Recl.

Disabled

79 Auto-Reclose Function

134

AR control mode

Trip w/ActionT.

Auto-Reclose control mode

135

25 Sync. Check

Disabled

25 Synchronism and Voltage Check

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

521

A Appendix

Addr. 136 137 81 O/U 27/59

Parameter

Setting Options Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabl. w. comp. Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled 1 trip circuit 2 trip circuits 3 trip circuits Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled 2 relays 3 relays

Default Setting Disabled Disabled

Comments 81 Over/Underfrequency Protection 27, 59 Under/Overvoltage Protection Fault Locator 50BF Breaker Failure Protection 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision

138 139 140

Fault Locator 50BF 74 Trip Ct Supv

Enabled Disabled Disabled

145 146 147

P. INTERFACE 1 P. INTERFACE 2 NUMBER OF RELAY

Enabled Disabled 2 relays

Protection Interface 1 (Port D) Protection Interface 2 (Port E) Number of relays

522

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.7 Settings

A.7

Settings
Addresses which have an appended "A" can only be changed with DIGSI, under "Display Additional Settings". The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding secondary nominal current of the current transformer.

Addr. 201 203 204 205 206 207

Parameter CT Starpoint Vnom PRIMARY Vnom SECONDARY CT PRIMARY CT SECONDARY SystemStarpoint

Function P.System Data 1 P.System Data 1 P.System Data 1 P.System Data 1 P.System Data 1 P.System Data 1

Setting Options towards Line towards Busbar 1.0 .. 1200.0 kV 80 .. 125 V 10 .. 5000 A 1A 5A Solid Grounded Peterson-C.Gnd. Isolated Not connected Vdelta transf. Vsync transf. Vx transformer 0.10 .. 9.99 A-G B-G C-G A-B B-C C-A 0 .. 360 0.50 .. 2.00 Not connected In prot. line In paral. line Ig starpoint 0.010 .. 5.000 50 Hz 60 Hz ABC ACB km Miles RG/RL, XG/XL K0 0.01 .. 0.60 sec 0.02 .. 30.00 sec 0.01 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 .. 30.00 sec Group A Group B Group C Group D Binary Input Protocol Save w. Pickup Save w. TRIP Start w. TRIP Fault event Pow.Sys.Flt.

Default Setting towards Line 400.0 kV 115 V 1000 A 5A Solid Grounded

Comments CT Starpoint Rated Primary Voltage Rated Secondary Voltage (PhPh) CT Rated Primary Current CT Rated Secondary Current System Starpoint is

210

V4 transformer

P.System Data 1

Not connected

V4 voltage transformer is

211 212

Vph / Vdelta Vsync connect.

P.System Data 1 P.System Data 1

1.73 A-B

Matching ratio Phase-VT To Open-Delta-VT VT connection for sync. voltage

214A 215 220

Angle VsynVline V-line / Vsync I4 transformer

P.System Data 1 P.System Data 1 P.System Data 1

0 1.00 In prot. line

Angle adjustment Vsync-Vline Matching ratio U-line / Usync I4 current transformer is

221 230 235 236 237 239 240A 241A 242 302

I4/Iph CT Rated Frequency PHASE SEQ. Distance Unit Format Z0/Z1 52 closing time TMin TRIP CMD TMax CLOSE CMD T-CBtest-dead CHANGE

P.System Data 1 P.System Data 1 P.System Data 1 P.System Data 1 P.System Data 1 P.System Data 1 P.System Data 1 P.System Data 1 P.System Data 1 Change Group

1.000 60 Hz ABC Miles RG/RL, XG/XL 0.06 sec 0.10 sec 0.10 sec 0.10 sec Group A

Matching ratio I4/Iph for CT's Rated Frequency Phase Sequence Distance measurement unit Setting format for zero seq.comp. format Closing (operating) time of 52 (CB) Minimum TRIP Command Duration Maximum Close Command Duration Dead Time for CB test-autoreclosure Change to Another Setting Group

402A

WAVEFORMTRIGGER

Osc. Fault Rec.

Save w. Pickup

Waveform Capture

403A

WAVEFORM DATA

Osc. Fault Rec.

Fault event

Scope of Waveform Data

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

523

A Appendix

Addr. 410 411 412 415 610 615 640

Parameter MAX. LENGTH PRE. TRIG. TIME POST REC. TIME BinIn CAPT.TIME FltDisp.LED/LCD Spont. FltDisp. Start image DD

Function Osc. Fault Rec. Osc. Fault Rec. Osc. Fault Rec. Osc. Fault Rec. Device, General Device, General Device, General

Setting Options 0.30 .. 5.00 sec 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.10 .. 5.00 sec; Target on PU Target on TRIP NO YES image 1 image 2 image 3 image 4 image 5 1.0 .. 1200.0 kV 10 .. 5000 A 30 .. 89 not reversed reversed

Default Setting 2.00 sec 0.25 sec 0.10 sec 0.50 sec Target on PU NO image 1

Comments Max. length of a Waveform Capture Record Captured Waveform Prior to Trigger Captured Waveform after Event Capture Time via Binary Input Fault Display on LED / LCD Spontaneous display of flt.annunciations Start image Default Display

1103 1104 1105 1107 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1126 1127 1128 1130A 1131A 1132A 1134

FullScaleVolt. FullScaleCurr. Line Angle P,Q sign x' Line Length x' Line Length c' c' RG/RL(Z1) XG/XL(Z1) RG/RL(Z1B...Z5) XG/XL(Z1B...Z5) K0 (Z1) Angle K0(Z1) K0 (> Z1) AngleI K0(> Z1) RM/RL ParalLine XM/XL ParalLine RATIO Par. Comp PoleOpenCurrent PoleOpenVoltage SI Time all Cl. Line Closure

P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A

400.0 kV 1000 A 85 not reversed 0.1500 /km 0.0300 /km 100.0 km 0.2420 /mi 0.0484 /mi 62.1 Miles 0.010 F/km 0.050 F/km 0.016 F/mi 0.080 F/mi 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.000 0.00 1.000 0.00 0.00 0.00 85 % 0.10 A 0.50 A 30 V 0.05 sec only with ManCl

Measurement: Full Scale Voltage (100%) Measurement: Full Scale Current (100%) Line Angle P,Q operational measured values sign x' - Line Reactance per length unit Line Length x' - Line Reactance per length unit Line Length c' - capacit. per unit line len. F/km c' - capacit. per unit line len. F/mile Zero seq. comp. factor RG/RL for Z1 Zero seq. comp. factor XG/XL for Z1 Zero seq. comp.factor RG/RL for Z1B...Z5 Zero seq. comp.factor XG/XL for Z1B...Z5 Zero seq. comp. factor K0 for zone Z1 Zero seq. comp. angle for zone Z1 Zero seq.comp.factor K0,higher zones >Z1 Zero seq. comp. angle, higher zones >Z1 Mutual Parallel Line comp. ratio RM/RL Mutual Parallel Line comp. ratio XM/XL Neutral current RATIO Parallel Line Comp Pole Open Current Threshold Pole Open Voltage Threshold Seal-in Time after ALL closures Recognition of Line Closures with

0.0050 .. 9.5000 /km 0.0010 .. 1.9000 /km 0.1 .. 1000.0 km 0.0050 .. 15.0000 /mi 0.0010 .. 3.0000 /mi 0.1 .. 650.0 Miles 0.000 .. 100.000 F/km 0.000 .. 500.000 F/km 0.000 .. 160.000 F/mi 0.000 .. 800.000 F/mi -0.33 .. 7.00 -0.33 .. 7.00 -0.33 .. 7.00 -0.33 .. 7.00 0.000 .. 4.000 -135.00 .. 135.00 0.000 .. 4.000 -135.00 .. 135.00 0.00 .. 8.00 0.00 .. 8.00 50 .. 95 % 0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.25 .. 5.00 A 2 .. 70 V 0.01 .. 30.00 sec only with ManCl I OR V or ManCl 52a OR I or M/C I or Man.Close

524

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.7 Settings

Addr. 1135 1140A 1150A 1151

Parameter Reset Trip CMD I-CTsat. Thres. SI Time Man.Cl Man. Close

Function P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2

Setting Options CurrentOpenPole Current AND 52a

Default Setting CurrentOpenPole 20.0 A 100.0 A 0.30 sec NO

Comments RESET of Trip Command CT Saturation Threshold Seal-in Time after MANUAL closures Manual CLOSE COMMAND generation MANUAL Closure Impulse after CONTROL 3 pole coupling Trip type with 2phase faults

1A 5A

0.2 .. 50.0 A; 1.0 .. 250.0 A; 0.01 .. 30.00 sec with Sync-check w/o Sync-check NO (Setting options depend on configuration) with PICKUP with TRIP 3pole 1pole leading 1pole lagging ON OFF

1152 1155 1156A

Man.Clos. Imp. 3pole coupling Trip2phFlt

P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2

None with TRIP 3pole

1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207A 1208 1209A 1210 1211 1215 1220

FCT 21 Minimum Iph 3I0 Threshold 3V0 Threshold 3V0> COMP/ISOL. T3I0 1PHAS 3I0>/ Iphmax SER-COMP. Gnd fault recog 21 Start Timers Distance Angle Paral.Line Comp PHASE PREF.2phg

21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General P.System Data 2 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 1A 5A 1A 5A

ON 0.10 A 0.50 A 0.10 A 0.50 A 5V 40 V 0.04 sec 0.10 NO 3I0> OR 3V0> on Dis. Pickup 85 YES C (A) ACYCLIC

21 Distance protection is Phase Current threshold for dist. meas. 3I0 threshold for neutral current pickup 3V0 threshold zero seq. voltage pickup Pickup 3V0 (comp/ isol. starpoint) Delay 1ph-faults (comp/isol. starpoint) 3I0>-pickup-stabilisation (3I0>/ Iphmax) Series compensated line Criterion of ground fault recognition 21 Condition for zone timer start Angle of inclination, distance charact. Mutual coupling parall.line compensation Phase preference for 2ph-g faults

0.05 .. 4.00 A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 1 .. 100 V; 10 .. 200 V 0.00 .. 0.50 sec; 0.05 .. 0.30 NO YES 3I0> OR 3V0> 3I0> AND 3V0> on Dis. Pickup on Zone Pickup 30 .. 90 NO YES C (A) ACYCLIC A (C) ACYCLIC B (A) ACYCLIC A (B) ACYCLIC C (B) ACYCLIC B (C) ACYCLIC C (A) CYCLIC A (C) CYCLIC All loops Block leading Block lagging All loops - loops only -G loops only PICKUP Zone Z1B Inactive Z1B undirect.

1221A

2Ph-G faults

21 Dis.General

Block leading

Loop selection with 2Ph-G faults

1232

SOTF zone

21 Dis.General

Inactive

Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault

1241 1242 1243 1244

R load (-G) load (-G) R load (-) load (-)

21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General

1A 5A

0.100 .. 600.000 ; 0.020 .. 120.000 ; 20 .. 60

45 45

R load, minimum Load Impedance (ph-g) PHI load, maximum Load Angle (ph-g) R load, minimum Load Impedance (ph-ph) PHI load, maximum Load Angle (ph-ph)

1A 5A

0.100 .. 600.000 ; 0.020 .. 120.000 ; 20 .. 60

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

525

A Appendix

Addr. 1301

Parameter Op. mode Z1

Function 21 Dis.ZoneQuad

Setting Options Forward Reverse Non-Directional Inactive

Default Setting Forward

Comments Operating mode Z1

1302 1303 1304 1305

R(Z1) - X(Z1) RG(Z1) -G T1-1phase

21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneMHO 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneMHO 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneQuad

1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A

0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.00 .. 30.00 sec;

1.250 0.250 2.500 0.500 2.500 0.500 0.00 sec

R(Z1), Resistance for ph-phfaults X(Z1), Reactance RG(Z1), Resistance for ph-gnd faults T1-1phase, delay for single phase faults T1multi-ph, delay for multi phase faults Zone Reduction Angle (load compensation) Operating mode Z2

1306

T1-multi-phase

0.00 .. 30.00 sec;

0.00 sec

1307 1311

Zone Reduction Op. mode Z2

0 .. 45 Forward Reverse Non-Directional Inactive 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.00 .. 30.00 sec;

0 Forward

1312 1313 1314 1315

R(Z2) - X(Z2) RG(Z2) -G T2-1phase

21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneMHO 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneMHO 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneMHO 21 Dis.ZoneQuad

2.500 0.500 5.000 1.000 5.000 1.000 0.30 sec

R(Z2), Resistance for ph-phfaults X(Z2), Reactance RG(Z2), Resistance for ph-gnd faults T2-1phase, delay for single phase faults T2multi-ph, delay for multi phase faults Single pole trip for faults in Z2

1316

T2-multi-phase

0.00 .. 30.00 sec;

0.30 sec

1317A

Trip 1pole Z2

NO YES Forward Reverse Non-Directional Inactive 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.00 .. 30.00 sec;

NO

1321

Op. mode Z3

Reverse

Operating mode Z3

1322 1323 1324 1325

R(Z3) - X(Z3) RG(Z3) -G T3 DELAY

21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneMHO 21 Dis.ZoneQuad

5.000 1.000 10.000 2.000 10.000 2.000 0.60 sec

R(Z3), Resistance for ph-phfaults X(Z3), Reactance RG(Z3), Resistance for ph-gnd faults T3 delay

1331

Op. mode Z4

Forward Reverse Non-Directional Inactive 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.00 .. 30.00 sec;

Non-Directional

Operating mode Z4

1332 1333 1334 1335

R(Z4) - X(Z4) RG(Z4) -G T4 DELAY

21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneMHO

12.000 2.400 12.000 2.400 12.000 2.400 0.90 sec

R(Z4), Resistance for ph-phfaults X(Z4), Reactance RG(Z4), Resistance for ph-gnd faults T4 delay

526

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.7 Settings

Addr. 1341

Parameter Op. mode Z5

Function 21 Dis.ZoneQuad

Setting Options Forward Reverse Non-Directional Inactive

Default Setting Inactive

Comments Operating mode Z5

1342 1343 1344 1345

R(Z5) - X(Z5)+ RG(Z5) -G T5 DELAY

21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneMHO 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneQuad

1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A

0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.00 .. 30.00 sec;

12.000 2.400 12.000 2.400 12.000 2.400 0.90 sec

R(Z5), Resistance for ph-phfaults X(Z5)+, Reactance for Forward direction RG(Z5), Resistance for ph-gnd faults T5 delay

1346 1351

X(Z5)Op. mode Z1B

1A 5A

0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 Forward Reverse Non-Directional Inactive

4.000 0.800 Forward

X(Z5)-, Reactance for Reverse direction Operating mode Z1B (overrreach zone)

1352 1353 1354 1355

R(Z1B) - X(Z1B) RG(Z1B) -G T1B-1phase

21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneMHO 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneMHO 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.ZoneQuad 21 Dis.ZoneMHO 21 Dis.ZoneMHO

1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A

0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.050 .. 600.000 0.010 .. 120.000 0.00 .. 30.00 sec;

1.500 0.300 3.000 0.600 3.000 0.600 0.00 sec

R(Z1B), Resistance for ph-phfaults X(Z1B), Reactance RG(Z1B), Resistance for ph-gnd faults T1B-1phase, delay for single ph. faults T1B-multi-ph, delay for multi ph. faults Z1B enabled before 1st AR (int. or ext.) Operating mode Z1

1356

T1B-multi-phase

0.00 .. 30.00 sec;

0.00 sec

1357

1st AR -> Z1B

NO YES Forward Reverse Inactive 1A 5A 0.050 .. 200.000 0.010 .. 40.000 Forward Reverse Inactive 1A 5A 0.050 .. 200.000 0.010 .. 40.000 Forward Reverse Inactive 1A 5A 0.050 .. 200.000 0.010 .. 40.000 Forward Reverse Inactive 1A 5A 0.050 .. 200.000 0.010 .. 40.000 Forward Reverse Inactive 1A 5A 0.050 .. 200.000 0.010 .. 40.000 Forward Reverse Inactive

YES

1401

Op. mode Z1

Forward

1402 1411

ZR(Z1) Op. mode Z2

21 Dis.ZoneMHO 21 Dis.ZoneMHO

2.500 0.500 Forward

ZR(Z1), Impedance Reach Operating mode Z2

1412 1421

ZR(Z2) Op. mode Z3

21 Dis.ZoneMHO 21 Dis.ZoneMHO

5.000 1.000 Reverse

ZR(Z2), Impedance Reach Operating mode Z3

1422 1431

ZR(Z3) Op. mode Z4

21 Dis.ZoneMHO 21 Dis.ZoneMHO

5.000 1.000 Forward

ZR(Z3), Impedance Reach Operating mode Z4

1432 1441

ZR(Z4) Op. mode Z5

21 Dis.ZoneMHO 21 Dis.ZoneMHO

10.000 2.000 Inactive

ZR(Z4), Impedance Reach Operating mode Z5

1442 1451

ZR(Z5) Op. mode Z1B

21 Dis.ZoneMHO 21 Dis.ZoneMHO

10.000 2.000 Forward

ZR(Z5), Impedance Reach Operating mode Z1B (extended zone)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

527

A Appendix

Addr. 1452 1471A 1472A 1473A 1474A 2002

Parameter ZR(Z1B) Mem.Polariz.PhG CrossPolarizPhG Mem.Polariz.P-P CrossPolarizP-P P/S Op. mode

Function 21 Dis.ZoneMHO 21 Dis.ZoneMHO 21 Dis.ZoneMHO 21 Dis.ZoneMHO 21 Dis.ZoneMHO 68 Power Swing

C 1A 5A

Setting Options 0.050 .. 200.000 0.010 .. 40.000 0.0 .. 100.0 % 0.0 .. 100.0 % 0.0 .. 100.0 % 0.0 .. 100.0 % All zones block Z1/Z1B block Z2 to Z5 block Z1,Z1B,Z2 block NO YES 0.08 .. 5.00 sec; 0 ON PUTT (Z1B) POTT OFF Two Terminals Three terminals 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.000 .. 30.000 sec 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec ON OFF 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; ON OFF

Default Setting 3.000 0.600 15.0 % 15.0 % 15.0 % 15.0 % All zones block

Comments ZR(Z1B), Impedance Reach Voltagememory polarization (phase-gnd) Cross polarization (phase-gnd) Voltagememory polarization (phase-phase) Cross polarization (phasephase) Power Swing Operating mode

2006 2007 2101

68T P/S trip 68 Trip DELAY FCT 85-21

68 Power Swing 68 Power Swing 85-21 PilotDist

NO 0.08 sec ON

68T Power swing trip 68 Trip delay after Power Swing Blocking 85-21 Pilot Prot. for Distance prot.

2102 2103A 2107A 2108 2109A 2110A 2201 2202 2401 2404 2501

Type of Line Send Prolong. Delay for alarm Release Delay TrBlk Wait Time TrBlk BlockTime FCT Direct Trip Trip Time DELAY FCT 50HS SOTF 50HS Pickup FCT Weak Infeed

85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist DTT Direct Trip DTT Direct Trip 50HS SOTF 50HS SOTF Weak Infeed 1A 5A

Two Terminals 0.05 sec 10.00 sec 0.000 sec 0.04 sec 0.05 sec OFF 0.01 sec ON 2.50 A 12.50 A ECHO only

Type of Line Time for send signal prolongation Time Delay for Alarm Time Delay for release after pickup Transient Block.: Duration external flt. Transient Block.: Blk.T. after ext. flt. Direct Transfer Trip (DTT) Trip Time Delay 50HS Inst. High Speed SOTFO/C is 50HS High Speed SOTF-O/C PICKUP Weak Infeed option is

1.00 .. 25.00 A 5.00 .. 125.00 A OFF ECHO only ECHO and TRIP 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 2 .. 70 V NO YES 0.10 .. 1.00 1 .. 60 sec 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 .. 30.00 sec

2502A 2503A 2504A 2505 2509 2510 2511 2512A 2513A 2514 2515 2516 2517 2518 2519

Trip/Echo DELAY Trip EXTENSION Echo BLOCK Time UNDERVOLTAGE Echo:1channel Factor Vph-g< Time const. Rec. Ext. T 3I0> Ext. 3I0 Threshold TM TT 1pol. Trip 1pol. with 3I0 3pol. Trip

Weak Infeed Weak Infeed Weak Infeed Weak Infeed Weak Infeed Weak Infeed Weak Infeed Weak Infeed Weak Infeed Weak Infeed Weak Infeed Weak Infeed Weak Infeed Weak Infeed Weak Infeed 1A 5A

0.04 sec 0.05 sec 0.05 sec 25 V NO 0.70 5 sec 0.65 sec 0.60 sec 0.50 A 2.50 A 0.40 sec 1.00 sec ON ON ON

Trip / Echo Delay after carrier receipt Trip Extension / Echo Impulse time Echo Block Time Undervoltage (ph-g) Echo logic: 21 and 67N on common channel Factor for undervoltage (ph-g) Time constant Tau Reception extension 3I0> exceeded extension 3I0 threshold for neutral current pickup WI delay single pole WI delay multi pole Single pole WI trip allowed Single pole WI trip with 3I0 Three pole WI trip allowed

0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.25 .. 5.00 A 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 .. 30.00 sec ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

528

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.7 Settings

Addr. 2520 2530 2531 2601

Parameter T 3I0> alarm WI non delayed WI delayed Operating Mode

Function Weak Infeed Weak Infeed Weak Infeed 50(N)/51(N) O/C

Setting Options 0.00 .. 30.00 sec ON OFF ON by receive fail ON:with VT loss ON:always activ OFF ON

Default Setting 10.00 sec

Comments 3I0> exceeded delay for alarm WI non delayed WI delayed Operating mode

by receive fail ON:with VT loss

2610 2611 2612 2613 2614 2615 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624 2625 2630 2631 2632 2633 2634 2635 2640 2642 2643 2646 2650 2652 2653 2656 2660

50-B1 PICKUP 50-B1 DELAY 50N-B1 PICKUP 50N-B1 DELAY 50(N)-B1 Pil/BI 50(N)-B1 SOTFtr 50-B2 PICKUP 50-B2 DELAY 50N-B2 PICKUP 50N-B2 DELAY 50(N)-B2 Pil/BI 50(N)-B2 SOTFtr 50-STUB PICKUP 50-STUB DELAY 50N-STUB PICKUP 50N-STUB DELAY 50STUB Pilot/BI 50STUB SOTFtrip 51-B PICKUP 51-B Time Dial 51-B Time Dial 51-B AddT-DELAY 51N-B PICKUP 51N-B Time Dial 51N-B Time Dial 51N-B AddTdelay IEC Curve

50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C

1A 5A 1A 5A

0.10 .. 25.00 A; 0.50 .. 125.00 A; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.05 .. 25.00 A; 0.25 .. 125.00 A; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; NO YES NO YES

2.00 A 10.00 A 0.30 sec 0.50 A 2.50 A 2.00 sec YES NO 1.50 A 7.50 A 0.50 sec 0.20 A 1.00 A 2.00 sec NO NO 1.50 A 7.50 A 0.30 sec 0.20 A 1.00 A 2.00 sec NO NO A A 0.50 sec 5.00 0.00 sec A A 0.50 sec 5.00 0.00 sec Normal Inverse

50-B1 Pickup 50-B1 Delay 50N-B1 Pickup 50N-B1 Delay Instantaneous trip via Pilot Prot./BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault 50-B2 Pickup 50-B2 Delay 50N-B2 Pickup 50N-B2 Delay Instantaneous trip via Pilot Prot./BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault 50-STUB Pickup 50-STUB Delay 50N-STUB Pickup 50N-STUB Delay Instantaneous trip via Pilot Prot./BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault 51-B Pickup 51-B Time Dial 51-B Time Dial 51-B Additional Time Delay 51N-B Pickup 51N-B Time Dial 51N-B Time Dial 51N-B Additional Time Delay IEC Curve

1A 5A 1A 5A

0.10 .. 25.00 A; 0.50 .. 125.00 A; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.05 .. 25.00 A; 0.25 .. 125.00 A; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; NO YES NO YES

1A 5A 1A 5A

0.10 .. 25.00 A; 0.50 .. 125.00 A; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.05 .. 25.00 A; 0.25 .. 125.00 A; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; NO YES NO YES

1A 5A

0.10 .. 4.00 A; 0.50 .. 20.00 A; 0.05 .. 3.00 sec; 0.50 .. 15.00 ; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec

1A 5A

0.05 .. 4.00 A; 0.25 .. 20.00 A; 0.05 .. 3.00 sec; 0.50 .. 15.00 ; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inv. LongTimeInverse Inverse Short Inverse Long Inverse Moderately Inv. Very Inverse Extremely Inv. Definite Inv. NO YES

2661

ANSI Curve

50(N)/51(N) O/C

Inverse

ANSI Curve

2670

51(N)-B PilotBI

50(N)/51(N) O/C

NO

Instantaneous trip via Pilot Prot./BI

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

529

A Appendix

Addr. 2671 2680 2801

Parameter 51(N)-B SOTF-Tr SOTF Time DELAY DMD Interval

Function 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C Demand meter

Setting Options NO YES 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 15 Min., 1 Sub 15 Min., 3 Subs 15 Min.,15 Subs 30 Min., 1 Sub 60 Min., 1 Sub On The Hour 15 After Hour 30 After Hour 45 After Hour NO YES 0 .. 1439 min 1 .. 365 Days 1 .. 365 Days ON OFF 10 .. 100 V 0.58 .. 0.95 NO

Default Setting

Comments Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault Trip time delay after SOTF Demand Calculation Intervals

0.00 sec 60 Min., 1 Sub

2802

DMD Sync.Time

Demand meter

On The Hour

Demand Synchronization Time

2811 2812 2813 2814 2901 2902A 2903A 2904A 2905A 2906A 2907A 2908A 2909A 2910 2911A 2912A 2913A 2914A 2915

MinMax cycRESET MiMa RESET TIME MiMa RESETCYCLE MinMaxRES.START MEASURE. SUPERV BALANCE V-LIMIT BAL. FACTOR V BALANCE I LIMIT BAL. FACTOR I I THRESHOLD I FACTOR T BAL. V LIMIT T BAL. I LIMIT FUSE FAIL MON. FFM V>(min) FFM I< (max) FFM V<max (3ph) FFM Idiff (3ph) V-Supervision

Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Measurem.Superv Measurem.Superv Measurem.Superv Measurem.Superv Measurem.Superv Measurem.Superv Measurem.Superv Measurem.Superv Measurem.Superv Measurem.Superv Measurem.Superv Measurem.Superv Measurem.Superv Measurem.Superv Measurem.Superv 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A

YES 0 min 7 Days 1 Days ON 50 V 0.75 0.50 A 2.50 A 0.50 0.10 A 0.50 A 0.10 5 sec 5 sec ON 30 V 0.10 A 0.50 A 5V 0.10 A 0.50 A w/ CURR.SUP

Automatic Cyclic Reset Function MinMax Reset Timer MinMax Reset Cycle Period MinMax Start Reset Cycle in Measurement Supervision Voltage Threshold for Balance Monitoring Balance Factor for Voltage Monitor Current Threshold for Balance Monitoring Balance Factor for Current Monitor Summated Current Monitoring Threshold Summated Current Monitoring Factor T Balance Factor for Voltage Monitor T Current Balance Monitor Fuse Failure Monitor Minimum Voltage Threshold V> Maximum Current Threshold I< Maximum Voltage Threshold V< (3phase) Differential Current Threshold (3phase) Voltage Failure Supervision

0.10 .. 1.00 A 0.50 .. 5.00 A 0.10 .. 0.95 0.05 .. 2.00 A 0.25 .. 10.00 A 0.00 .. 0.95 5 .. 100 sec 5 .. 100 sec ON OFF 10 .. 100 V 0.10 .. 1.00 A 0.50 .. 5.00 A 2 .. 100 V 0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.25 .. 5.00 A w/ CURR.SUP w/ I> & 52a OFF 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0 .. 30 ms ON OFF every PICKUP 1phase PICKUP multiph. PICKUP NO YES NO 0 .. 30 %

2916A 2921 3101 3102

T V-Supervision T mcb FCT 50N/51N Gnd BLOCK for Dist.

Measurem.Superv Measurem.Superv 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C

3.00 sec 0 ms ON every PICKUP

Delay Voltage Failure Supervision VT mcb operating time 50N/51N Ground Overcurrent is Block 50N/51N for Distance protection

3103 3104A 3105 3105

BLOCK 1pDeadTim Iph-STAB. Slope 3I0Min Pilot P. 3I0Min Pilot P.

50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 1A 5A 1A 5A

YES 10 % 0.50 A 2.50 A 0.500 A 2.500 A

Block 50N/51N for 1pole Dead time Stabilisation Slope with Iphase 3I0-Min threshold for Pilot Prot.schemes 3I0-Min threshold for PilotProt. schemes

0.01 .. 1.00 A 0.05 .. 5.00 A 0.003 .. 1.000 A 0.015 .. 5.000 A

530

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.7 Settings

Addr. 3109 3110

Parameter 50N/51N Trip 1p 50N-1 Op. Mode

Function 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C

Setting Options YES NO Forward Reverse Non-Directional Inactive YES

Default Setting

Comments Single pole trip with ground flt.prot. Operating mode

Inactive

3111 3112 3113 3114 3115 3120

50N-1 PICKUP 50N-1 TimeDELAY 50N-1 Pilot/BI 50N-1 SOTF-Trip 50N-1 InrushBlk 50N-2 Op. Mode

50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C

1A 5A

0.05 .. 25.00 A 0.25 .. 125.00 A 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; NO YES NO YES NO YES Forward Reverse Non-Directional Inactive

4.00 A 20.00 A 0.30 sec NO NO NO Inactive

Pickup Time Delay Instantaneous trip via Pilot Prot./BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault Inrush Blocking Operating mode

3121 3122 3123 3124 3125 3130

50N-2 PICKUP 50N-2 TimeDELAY 50N-2 Pilot/BI 50N-2 SOTF-Trip 50N-2 InrushBlk 50N-3 Op. Mode

50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C

1A 5A

0.05 .. 25.00 A 0.25 .. 125.00 A 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; NO YES NO YES NO YES Forward Reverse Non-Directional Inactive

2.00 A 10.00 A 0.60 sec NO NO NO Inactive

Pickup Time Delay Instantaneous trip via Pilot Prot./BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault Inrush Blocking Operating mode

3131 3131 3132 3133 3134 3135 3140

50N-3 PICKUP 50N-3 PICKUP 50N-3 TimeDELAY 50N-3 Pilot/BI 50N-3 SOTF-Trip 50N-3 InrushBlk 51N Op. Mode

50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C

1A 5A 1A 5A

0.05 .. 25.00 A 0.25 .. 125.00 A 0.003 .. 25.000 A 0.015 .. 125.000 A 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; NO YES NO YES NO YES Forward Reverse Non-Directional Inactive

1.00 A 5.00 A 1.000 A 5.000 A 0.90 sec NO NO NO Inactive

Pickup Pickup Time Delay Instantaneous trip via Pilot Prot./BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault Inrush Blocking Operating mode

3141 3141 3142 3143 3144 3145 3146 3147

51N PICKUP 51N PICKUP 51N Min.T-DELAY 51N Time Dial 51N Time Dial 51N Time Dial 51N Max.T-DELAY Add.T-DELAY

50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C

1A 5A 1A 5A

0.05 .. 25.00 A 0.25 .. 125.00 A 0.003 .. 25.000 A 0.015 .. 125.000 A 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.05 .. 3.00 sec; 0.50 .. 15.00 ; 0.05 .. 15.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 .. 30.00 sec;

1.00 A 5.00 A 1.000 A 5.000 A 1.20 sec 0.50 sec 5.00 1.35 sec 5.80 sec 1.20 sec

Pickup Pickup Minimum Time Delay Time Dial Time Dial Time Dial Maximum Time Delay Additional Time Delay

3148

51N Pilot/BI

NO YES

NO

Instantaneous trip via Pilot Prot./BI

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

531

A Appendix

Addr. 3149 3150 3151

Parameter 51N SOTF-Trip 51N InrushBlk IEC Curve

Function 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C

Setting Options NO YES NO YES Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inv. LongTimeInverse Inverse Short Inverse Long Inverse Moderately Inv. Very Inverse Extremely Inv. Definite Inv. Log. inverse 1.0 .. 4.0 0.00 .. 3.00 sec NO NO

Default Setting

Comments Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault Inrush Blocking IEC Curve

Normal Inverse

3152

ANSI Curve

50N/51N Gnd.O/C

Inverse

ANSI Curve

3153 3154 3155 3156 3160

LOG Curve 51N Startpoint k S ref 67N POLARIZAT.

50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 1A 5A

Log. inverse 1.1 0.50 sec 10 VA 50 VA Vo + Ig or V2

LOGARITHMIC Curve 51N Start point of inverse charact. k-factor for Sr-characteristic S ref for Sr-characteristic Polarization

1 .. 100 VA 5 .. 500 VA Vo + Ig or V2 Vo + Ig with Ig only with V2 and I2 zero seq. power 0 .. 360 0 .. 360 0.5 .. 10.0 V

3162A 3163A 3164 3165 3166 3167 3168 3169 3170 3171 3172 3173 3174

67N ALPHA 67N BETA 67N (3Vo) 67N (Ig) 67N (3V2) 67N (3I2) PHI comp S forward 2nd InrushRest Imax InrushRest SOTF Op. Mode SOTF Time DELAY BLK for DisZone

50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A

338 122 0.5 V 0.05 A 0.25 A 0.5 V 0.05 A 0.25 A 255 0.3 VA 1.5 VA 15 % 7.50 A 37.50 A PICKUP+DIRECT. 0.00 sec in each zone

ALPHA, lower angle for forward direction BETA, upper angle for forward direction Min. zero seq.voltage 3Vo for polarizing Min. ground current Ig for polarizing Min. neg. seq. polarizing voltage 3V2 Min. neg. seq. polarizing current 3I2 Compensation angle PHI comp. for Sr Forward direction power treshold 2nd harmonic ratio for inrush restraint Max.Current, overriding inrush restraint Instantaneous mode after SwitchOnToFault Trip time delay after SOTF Block 50N/51N for Pickup 21

0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.25 .. 5.00 A 0.5 .. 10.0 V 0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.25 .. 5.00 A 0 .. 360 0.1 .. 10.0 VA 0.5 .. 50.0 VA 10 .. 45 % 0.50 .. 25.00 A 2.50 .. 125.00 A PICKUP PICKUP+DIRECT. 0.00 .. 30.00 sec in zone Z1 in zone Z1/Z1B in each zone 1.0 .. 10.0 V 0.1 .. 5.0 V 0.00 .. 32.00 sec 0.00 .. 32.00 sec ON OFF Two Terminals Three terminals 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 .. 30.00 sec

3182 3183 3184 3185 3201 3202 3203A 3207A

59G-V0inv 3V0> V0inv. minimum T forw. (V0inv) T rev. (V0inv) FCT 85-67N Line Config. Send Prolong. Delay for alarm

50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 85-67N PilotGnd 85-67N PilotGnd 85-67N PilotGnd 85-67N PilotGnd

5.0 V 0.2 V 0.90 sec 1.20 sec ON Two Terminals 0.05 sec 10.00 sec

Setpoint 3V0> Minimum voltage V0min for T>oo Forward Time delay (V0inv) Reverse Time delay (V0inv) 85-67N Pilot Prot. for Dir.Ground O/C Line Configuration Time for send signal prolongation Unblocking: Time Delay for Alarm

532

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.7 Settings

Addr. 3208 3209A 3210A 3401 3402 3403 3404 3406 3407 3408 3409 3410 3411A 3420 3421 3422 3423 3424 3425 3430 3431

Parameter Release Delay TrBlk Wait Time TrBlk BlockTime FCT 79 52? 1.TRIP T-RECLAIM BLOCK MC Dur. EV. FLT. RECOG. EV. FLT. MODE T-Start MONITOR CB TIME OUT RemoteCl. Delay Max. DEAD EXT. AR w/ 21 AR w/ 50HS-SOTF AR w/ Weak Inf. AR w/ 50N/51N AR w/ DTT AR w/ 50(N)-B AR TRIP 3pole DLC or RDT

Function 85-67N PilotGnd 85-67N PilotGnd 85-67N PilotGnd 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl.

Setting Options 0.000 .. 30.000 sec 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec OFF ON YES NO 0.50 .. 300.00 sec 0.50 .. 300.00 sec; 0 with PICKUP with TRIP Stops 79 starts 3p AR 0.01 .. 300.00 sec 0.01 .. 300.00 sec 0.00 .. 300.00 sec; 0.50 .. 300.00 sec; YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO WITHOUT RDT DLC 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.50 .. 3000.00 sec YES NO YES NO YES NO 0.10 .. 30.00 sec 30 .. 90 V 2 .. 70 V YES NO 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec;

Default Setting 0.000 sec 0.04 sec 0.05 sec ON NO 3.00 sec 1.00 sec with TRIP starts 3p AR 0.20 sec 3.00 sec sec sec YES YES YES YES YES YES YES WITHOUT

Comments Time Delay for release after pickup Transient Block.: Duration external flt. Transient Block.: Blk.T. after ext. flt. 79 Auto-Reclose Function 52-ready interrogation at 1st trip Reclaim time after successful AR cycle AR blocking duration after manual close Evolving fault recognition Evolving fault (during the dead time) AR start-signal monitoring time Circuit Breaker (CB) Supervision Time Send delay for remote close command Maximum dead time extension AR with 21 (distance protection) AR with 50HS-SOTF (switchonto-flt.o/c ) AR with weak infeed tripping AR with 50N/51N (ground fault o/c) AR with DTT (direct transfer trip) AR with 50(N)-B (back-up overcurrent) 3pole TRIP by AR Dead Line Check or Reduced Dead Time Action time Maximum dead time 1pole TRIP allowed 52-ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR Supervision time for dead/ live voltage Voltage threshold for live line or bus Voltage threshold for dead line or bus Start of AR allowed in this cycle Action time Dead time after 1phase faults Dead time after 2phase faults Dead time after 3phase faults Dead time after 1pole trip Dead time after 3pole trip

3433 3434 3435 3436 3437 3438 3440 3441 3450 3451 3453 3454 3455 3456 3457

ADT ACTION Time ADT maxDEADTIME ADT 1p allowed ADT 52? CLOSE ADT SynRequest Volt. Superv.-T Live Volt. Thr. Dead Volt. Thr. 1.AR:START 1.AR:ActionTime 1.AR:DeadT.1Flt 1.AR:DeadT.2Flt 1.AR:DeadT.3Flt 1.AR:Dead 1Trip 1.AR:Dead 3Trip

79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl.

0.20 sec 5.00 sec NO NO NO 0.10 sec 48 V 30 V YES 0.20 sec 1.20 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

533

A Appendix

Addr. 3458 3459 3460 3461 3462 3464 3465 3466 3467 3468 3469 3470 3471 3472 3473 3475 3476 3477 3478 3479 3480 3481 3482 3483 3484 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 3491 3492 3493 3501

Parameter 1.AR:DeadT.EV. 1.AR:52? CLOSE 1.AR SynRequest 2.AR:START 2.AR:ActionTime 2.AR:DeadT.1Flt 2.AR:DeadT.2Flt 2.AR:DeadT.3Flt 2.AR:Dead 1Trip 2.AR:Dead 3Trip 2.AR:DeadT.EV. 2.AR:52? CLOSE 2.AR SynRequest 3.AR:START 3.AR:ActionTime 3.AR:DeadT.1Flt 3.AR:DeadT.2Flt 3.AR:DeadT.3Flt 3.AR:Dead 1Trip 3.AR:Dead 3Trip 3.AR:DeadT.EV. 3.AR:52? CLOSE 3.AR SynRequest 4.AR:START 4.AR:ActionTime 4.AR:DeadT.1Flt 4.AR:DeadT.2Flt 4.AR:DeadT.3Flt 4.AR:Dead 1Trip 4.AR:Dead 3Trip 4.AR:DeadT.EV. 4.AR:52? CLOSE 4.AR SynRequest FCT 25 Sync.

Function 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 25 Sync. Check

Setting Options 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec YES NO YES NO YES NO 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec YES NO YES NO YES NO 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec YES NO YES NO YES NO 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec YES NO YES NO ON OFF ON:w/o CloseCmd 1 .. 60 V 20 .. 125 V 20 .. 140 V 0.01 .. 600.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec (Setting options depend on configuration) with52closeTime w/o 52closeTime 1.0 .. 40.0 V 0.03 .. 2.00 Hz NO NO NO

Default Setting 1.20 sec

Comments Dead time after evolving fault 52-ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR AR start allowed in this cycle Action time Dead time after 1phase faults Dead time after 2phase faults Dead time after 3phase faults Dead time after 1pole trip Dead time after 3pole trip Dead time after evolving fault 52-ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR AR start allowed in this cycle Action time Dead time after 1phase faults Dead time after 2phase faults Dead time after 3phase faults Dead time after 1pole trip Dead time after 3pole trip Dead time after evolving fault 52-ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR AR start allowed in this cycle Action time Dead time after 1phase faults Dead time after 2phase faults Dead time after 3phase faults Dead time after 1pole trip Dead time after 3pole trip Dead time after evolving fault 52-ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR 25 Synchronism and Voltage Check Voltage threshold dead line / bus Voltage threshold live line / bus Maximum permissible voltage Maximum duration of synchronism-check Synchronous condition stability timer Synchronizable circuit breaker Operating mode with AR Maximum voltage difference Maximum frequency difference

0.20 sec 1.20 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec sec 0.50 sec 1.20 sec NO NO NO 0.20 sec 1.20 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec sec 0.50 sec 1.20 sec NO NO NO 0.20 sec 1.20 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec sec 0.50 sec 1.20 sec NO NO ON

3502 3503 3504 3507 3508 3509 3510 3511 3512

Dead Volt. Thr. Live Volt. Thr. Vmax SYN. DURATION SYNC-STAB SyncCB Op.mode with AR Max. Volt. Diff Max. Freq. Diff

25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check

5V 90 V 110 V 1.00 sec 0.00 sec None w/o 52closeTime 2.0 V 0.10 Hz

534

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.7 Settings

Addr. 3513 3515A 3516 3517 3518 3519 3530 3531 3532 3533 3535A 3536 3537 3538 3539 3601

Parameter Max. Angle Diff SYNC-CHECK Vsync> V-line< Vsync< V-line> Vsync< V-line< OVERRIDE Op.mode with MC MC maxVolt.Diff MC maxFreq.Diff MC maxAngleDiff MC SYNCHR MC Vsyn> Vline< MC Vsyn< Vline> MC Vsyn< Vline< MC O/RIDE 81 O/U FREQ. f1

Function 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 81 O/U Freq.

Setting Options 2 .. 80 YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO with52closeTime w/o 52closeTime 1.0 .. 40.0 V 0.03 .. 2.00 Hz 2 .. 80 YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO ON: Alarm only ON: with Trip OFF 45.50 .. 54.50 Hz 55.50 .. 64.50 Hz 0.00 .. 600.00 sec ON: Alarm only ON: with Trip OFF 45.50 .. 54.50 Hz 55.50 .. 64.50 Hz 0.00 .. 600.00 sec ON: Alarm only ON: with Trip OFF 45.50 .. 54.50 Hz 55.50 .. 64.50 Hz 0.00 .. 600.00 sec ON: Alarm only ON: with Trip OFF 45.50 .. 54.50 Hz 55.50 .. 64.50 Hz 0.00 .. 600.00 sec OFF Alarm Only ON 1.0 .. 170.0 V; 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.0 .. 170.0 V; 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 0.30 .. 0.98 OFF Alarm Only ON 10 YES NO NO NO NO

Default Setting

Comments Maximum angle difference Live bus / live line and Sync before 79 Live bus / dead line check before 79 Dead bus / live line check before 79 Dead bus / dead line check before 79 Override of any check before 79 Operating mode with Man.Cl Maximum voltage difference Maximum frequency difference Maximum angle difference Live bus / live line and Sync before MC Live bus / dead line check before Man.Cl Dead bus / live line check before Man.Cl Dead bus / dead line check before Man.Cl Override of any check before Man.Cl 81 Over/Under Frequency Prot. element f1 81-1 Pickup 81-1 Pickup 81-1 Time Delay 81 Over/Under Frequency Prot. element f2 81-2 Pickup 81-2 Pickup 81-2 Time Delay 81 Over/Under Frequency Prot. element f3 81-3 Pickup 81-3 Pickup 81-3 Time delay 81 Over/Under Frequency Prot. element f4 81-4 Pickup 81-4 Pickup 81-4 Time delay Operating mode Vph-g overvoltage prot. 59-1 Pickup Overvoltage (phaseground) 59-1 Time Delay 59-2 Pickup Overvoltage (phaseground) 59-2 Time Delay Reset ratio Operating mode Vph-ph overvoltage prot.

w/o 52closeTime 2.0 V 0.10 Hz 10 YES NO NO NO NO ON: Alarm only

3602 3603 3604 3611

81-1 PICKUP 81-1 PICKUP 81-1 DELAY 81 O/U FREQ. f2

81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq.

49.50 Hz 59.50 Hz 60.00 sec ON: Alarm only

3612 3613 3614 3621

81-2 PICKUP 81-2 PICKUP 81-2 DELAY 81 O/U FREQ. f3

81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq.

49.00 Hz 57.00 Hz 30.00 sec ON: Alarm only

3622 3623 3624 3631

81-3 PICKUP 81-3 PICKUP 81-3 DELAY 81 O/U FREQ. f4

81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq.

47.50 Hz 59.50 Hz 3.00 sec ON: Alarm only

3632 3633 3634 3701

81-4 PICKUP 81-4 PICKUP 81-4 DELAY 59-Vph-g Mode

81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 27/59 O/U Volt.

51.00 Hz 62.00 Hz 30.00 sec OFF

3702 3703 3704 3705 3709A 3711

59-1-Vph PICKUP 59-1-Vph DELAY 59-2-Vph PICKUP 59-2-Vph DELAY 59-Vph RESET 59-Vph-ph Mode

27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt.

85.0 V 2.00 sec 100.0 V 1.00 sec 0.98 OFF

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

535

A Appendix

Addr. 3712 3713 3714 3715 3719A 3721

Parameter 59-1-Vpp PICKUP 59-1-Vpp DELAY 59-2-Vpp PICKUP 59-2-Vpp DELAY 59-Vpp RESET 59G-3V0 (or Vx)

Function 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt.

Setting Options 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 0.30 .. 0.98 OFF Alarm Only ON 1.0 .. 220.0 V; 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.0 .. 220.0 V; 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ON OFF 0.30 .. 0.98 OFF Alarm Only ON 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; OFF ON OFF ON 0.30 .. 0.98 OFF Alarm Only ON 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 0.30 .. 0.98 OFF Alarm Only ON 1.0 .. 100.0 V; 0 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.0 .. 100.0 V; 0 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ON OFF OFF Alarm Only ON 1.0 .. 175.0 V; 0 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.0 .. 175.0 V; 0 0.00 .. 100.00 sec;

Default Setting 150.0 V 2.00 sec 175.0 V 1.00 sec 0.98 OFF

Comments 59-1 Pickup Overvoltage (phasephase) 59-1 Time Delay 59-2 Pickup Overvoltage (phasephase) 59-2 Time Delay Reset ratio Operating mode 3V0 (or Vx) overvoltage 59G-1 Pickup 3V0 (or Vx) (zero seq.) 59G-1 Time Delay 59G-2 Pickup 3V0 (or Vx) (zero seq.) 59G-2 Time Delay 59G: Stabilization 3Vo-Measurement Reset ratio Operating mode V1 overvoltage prot. 59-1 Pickup Overvoltage (pos. seq.) 59-1 Time Delay 59-2 Pickup Overvoltage (pos. seq.) 59-2 Time Delay V1> with Compounding V1>> with Compounding Reset ratio Operating mode V2 overvoltage prot. 59-1 Pickup Overvoltage (neg. seq.) 59-1 Time Delay 59-2 Pickup Overvoltage (neg. seq.) 59-2 Time Delay Reset ratio Operating mode Vph-g undervoltage prot. 27-1 Pickup Undervoltage (phase-neutral) 27-1 Time Delay 27-2 Pickup Undervoltage (phase-neutral) 27-2 Time Delay Current supervision (Vph-g) Operating mode Vph-ph undervoltage prot. 27-1 Pickup Undervoltage (phase-phase) 27-1 Time Delay 27-2 Pickup Undervoltage (phase-phase) 27-2 Time Delay

3722 3723 3724 3725 3728A 3729A 3731

59G-1-3V0PICKUP 59G-1-3V0 DELAY 59G-2-3V0PICKUP 59G-2-3V0 DELAY 59G-3Vo Stabil. 59G RESET 59-V1 Mode

27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt.

30.0 V 2.00 sec 50.0 V 1.00 sec ON 0.95 OFF

3732 3733 3734 3735 3736 3737 3739A 3741

59-1-V1 PICKUP 59-1-V1 DELAY 59-2-V1 PICKUP 59-2-V1 DELAY V1> Compound V1>> Compound 59-V1 RESET 59-V2 Mode

27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt.

150.0 V 2.00 sec 175.0 V 1.00 sec OFF OFF 0.98 OFF

3742 3743 3744 3745 3749A 3751

59-1-V2 PICKUP 59-1-V2 DELAY 59-2-V2 PICKUP 59-2-V2 DELAY 59-V2 RESET 27-Vph-g Mode

27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt.

30.0 V 2.00 sec 50.0 V 1.00 sec 0.98 OFF

3752 3753 3754 3755 3758 3761

27-1-Vph PICKUP 27-1-Vph DELAY 27-2-Vph PICKUP 27-2-Vph DELAY CURR.SUP 27-Vph 27-Vph-ph Mode

27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt.

30.0 V 2.00 sec 10.0 V 1.00 sec ON OFF

3762 3763 3764 3765

27-1-Vpp PICKUP 27-1-Vpp DELAY 27-2-Vpp PICKUP 27-2-Vpp DELAY

27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt.

50.0 V 2.00 sec 17.0 V 1.00 sec

536

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.7 Settings

Addr. 3768 3771

Parameter CURR.SUP 27-Vpp 27-V1 Mode

Function 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt.

Setting Options ON OFF OFF Alarm Only ON 1.0 .. 100.0 V; 0 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.0 .. 100.0 V; 0 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ON OFF Pickup TRIP NO YES NO YES ON OFF ON OFF

Default Setting

Comments Current supervision (Vph-ph) Operating mode V1 Undervoltage prot. 27-1 Pickup Undervoltage (pos. seq.) 27-1 Time Delay 27-2 Pickup Undervoltage (pos. seq.) 27-2 Time Delay Current supervision (V1) Start fault locator with Mutual coupling parall.line compensation Load Compensation 50BF Breaker Failure Protection 50BF Pickup current threshold 1pole retrip for local trip Delay after 1pole start for local trip Delay after 3pole start for local trip Delay of 2nd element for busbar trip Delay for start with defective bkr. Trip output selection with defective bkr

3772 3773 3774 3775 3778 3802 3805 3806 3901 3902 3903 3904 3905 3906 3907 3908

27-1-V1 PICKUP 27-1-V1 DELAY 27-2-V1 PICKUP 27-2-V1 DELAY CURR.SUP. 27-V1 START Paral.Line Comp Load Compensat. FCT 50BF Break. 50BF PICKUP 1p-RETRIP (T1) 50BF-1 Delay 1p 50BF-1 Delay 3p 50BF-2 Delay T3-BkrDefective Trip BkrDefect.

27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. Fault Locator Fault Locator Fault Locator 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure 1A 5A

30.0 V 2.00 sec 10.0 V 1.00 sec ON Pickup YES NO ON 0.10 A 0.50 A YES 0.00 sec 0.00 sec 0.15 sec 0.00 sec NO

0.05 .. 20.00 A 0.25 .. 100.00 A NO YES 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; NO with Local trip with Bus trip w/Local&Bustrip NO YES ON OFF 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; ON OFF 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; ON OFF 1 .. 2 1 .. 30 sec ON OFF F.optic direct Com conv 64 kB Com conv 128 kB Com conv 512 kB 0.1 .. 30.0 ms 0.05 .. 2.00 sec 0.0 .. 60.0 sec 0.00 .. 300.00 sec; ON OFF

3909 3921 3922 3931 3932 4001 4002 4003 4501 4502

Chk BRK CONTACT End Flt. elem. EndFault Delay PoleDiscrepancy T-PoleDiscrep. FCT 74TC No. of BI Alarm Delay STATE PROT I 1 CONNEC. 1 VIA

50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure 74TC TripCirc. 74TC TripCirc. 74TC TripCirc. Prot. Interface Prot. Interface

YES OFF 2.00 sec OFF 2.00 sec OFF 2 2 sec ON F.optic direct

Check Breaker contacts End fault element is Trip delay of end fault element Pole Discrepancy supervision Trip delay with pole discrepancy 74TC TRIP Circuit Supervision Number of Binary Inputs per trip circuit Delay Time for alarm State of protection interface 1 Connection 1 via

4505A 4509 4510 4511 4601

PROT 1 T-DELAY TD-DATA DISTURB TD-DATAFAIL Td ResetRemote STATE PROT I 2

Prot. Interface Prot. Interface Prot. Interface Prot. Interface Prot. Interface

30.0 ms 0.10 sec 6.0 sec 0.00 sec ON

Prot 1: Maximal permissible delay time Time delay for data disturbance alarm Time delay for transmiss. failure alarm Remote signal RESET DELAY for comm.fail State of protection interface 2

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

537

A Appendix

Addr. 4602

Parameter CONNEC. 2 VIA

Function Prot. Interface

Setting Options F.optic direct Com conv 64 kB Com conv 128 kB Com conv 512 kB 0.1 .. 30.0 ms 1 .. 65534 1 .. 65534 1 .. 65534 relay 1 relay 2 relay 3

Default Setting F.optic direct

Comments Connection 2 via

4605A 4701 4702 4703 4710

PROT 2 T-DELAY ID OF RELAY 1 ID OF RELAY 2 ID OF RELAY 3 LOCAL RELAY

Prot. Interface Prot. Interface Prot. Interface Prot. Interface Prot. Interface

30.0 ms 1 2 3 relay 1

Prot 2: Maximal permissible delay time Identification number of relay 1 Identification number of relay 2 Identification number of relay 3 Local relay is

538

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.8 Information List

A.8

Information List
Indications for IEC 60 870-5-103 are always reported ON / OFF if they are subject to general interrogation for IEC 60 870-5-103. If not, they are reported only as ON. New user-defined indications or such reassigned to IEC 60 870-5-103 are set to ON / OFF and subjected to general interrogation if the information type is not a spontaneous event (.._Ev). Further information on messages can be found in detail in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description, Order No. E50417-H1176-C151. In columns Event Log, Trip Log and Ground Fault Log the following applies: UPPER CASE NOTATION ON/OFF: lower case notation on/off: *: <blank>: definitely set, not allocatable preset, allocatable not preset, allocatable neither preset nor allocatable definitely set, not allocatable

In column Marked in Oscill.Record the following applies: UPPER CASE NOTATION M: lower case notation m: *: <blank>:
No. Description Function Type of Informatio n

preset, allocatable not preset, allocatable neither preset nor allocatable

Log Buffers Ground Fault Log ON/OFF Marked in Oscill. Record Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF Event Log ON/OFF Configurable in Matrix Chatter Suppression IEC 60870-5-103 General Interrogation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Information Number 21 20 23 24 25 26

Function Key

Binary Input

Test mode (Test mode) Stop data transmission (DataStop) Clock Synchronization (SynchClock) >Back Light on (>Light on) Hardware Test Mode (HWTestMod) Error FMS FO 1 (Error FMS1) Error FMS FO 2 (Error FMS2) Breaker OPENED (Brk OPENED) Feeder GROUNDED (Feeder gnd) Group A (Group A) Group B (Group B) Group C (Group C) Group D (Group D)

Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General Change Group Change Group Change Group Change Group

IntSP IntSP IntSP _Ev SP IntSP OUT OUT IntSP IntSP IntSP IntSP IntSP IntSP

ON * OFF ON * OFF * *

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED BI LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO

128 128

ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF * * * *

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO 128 128 128 128 1 1 1 1

ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF

Data Unit 1 1

Relay

Type

LED

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

539

A Appendix

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

Fault Recording Start (FltRecSta) Osc. Fault Rec. Reset Minimum and Maximum counter (ResMinMax) CB1-TEST trip/close - Only Phase A (CB1tst A) CB1-TEST trip/close - Only Phase B (CB1tst B) CB1-TEST trip/close - Only Phase C (CB1tst C) CB1-TEST trip/close Phases ABC (CB1tst ABC) Min/Max meter Testing Testing Testing Testing

IntSP IntSP _Ev IntSP IntSP IntSP CF_D 12 DP CF_D 2 DP CF_D 2 DP IntSP IntSP IntSP IntSP IntSP IntSP CF_D 2 DP CF_D 2 DP CF_D 2 DP IntSP SP

ON * OFF ON * * * * * * * * *

LED

BO

Controlmode REMOTE (ModeR- Cntrl Authority EMOTE) Control Authority (Cntrl Auth) Controlmode LOCAL (ModeLOCAL) 52 Breaker (52Breaker) 52 Breaker (52Breaker) Disconnect Switch (Disc.Swit.) Disconnect Switch (Disc.Swit.) Ground Switch (GndSwit.) Ground Switch (GndSwit.) Interlocking: 52 Open (52 Open) Interlocking: Disconnect switch Open (Disc.Open) Interlocking: Disconnect switch Close (Disc.Close) Cntrl Authority Cntrl Authority Control Device Control Device Control Device Control Device Control Device Control Device Control Device Control Device Control Device

ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF on off on off on off on off on off on off * * * * * * on off on off on off on off on off on off * on off * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED BO BI BO BI BO BI CB CB CB 101 101 240 240 240 240 240 240 85 86 160 160 161 161 164 164 1 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Interlocking: 52 Close (52 Close) Control Device

Interlocking: Ground switch Open Control Device (GndSw Open) Interlocking: Ground switch Close Control Device (GndSw Cl.) Q2 Open/Close (Q2 Op/Cl) Q2 Open/Close (Q2 Op/Cl) Q9 Open/Close (Q9 Op/Cl) Q9 Open/Close (Q9 Op/Cl) Fan ON/OFF (Fan ON/OFF) Fan ON/OFF (Fan ON/OFF) Unlock data transmission via BI (UnlockDT) >Cabinet door open (>Door open) Control Device Control Device Control Device Control Device Control Device Control Device Control Device Process Data

BO BI BO BI BO BI CB CB CB

240 240 240 240 240 240

162 162 163 163 175 175

20 1 20 1 20 1 Yes Yes Yes

LED BI

BO

CB

101

540

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation Yes

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

A.8 Information List

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

1 2 3 4 5 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 51 52 55 56 60 67

>CB waiting for Spring charged (>CB wait)

Process Data

SP SP SP SP SP SP SP IntSP _Ev IntSP IntSP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP OUT IntSP OUT OUT

on off on off on off on off on off on off on off ON on off

* * * * * * * *

* * * * * * *

LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO

CB CB CB CB CB CB CB

101 240 240 240 240 240 240

2 181 182 183 184 185 186

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

>Error Motor Voltage (>Err Mot V) Process Data >Error Control Voltage (>ErrCntr- Process Data lV) >SF6-Loss (>SF6-Loss) >Error Meter (>Err Meter) >Transformer Temperature (>Tx Temp.) >Transformer Danger (>Tx Danger) Reset meter (Meter res) Error Systeminterface (SysIntErr.) Threshold Value 1 (ThreshVal1) Process Data Process Data Process Data Process Data Energy Protocol Thresh.-Switch

LED * LED BI FC TN

BO BO CB

ON * OFF

No Function configured (Not con- Device, General figured) Function Not Available (Non Exis- Device, General tent) >Synchronize Internal Real Time Device, General Clock (>Time Synch) >Trigger Waveform Capture (>Trig.Wave.Cap.) >Reset LED (>Reset LED) Osc. Fault Rec. Device, General

* ON * * * * * * *

* * * * * * * * * * * * *

* m * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO 128 128 128 128 135 135 135 128 128 128 128 135 27 28 29 30 53 54 81 18 4 5 19 97 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No

>Setting Group Select Bit 0 (>Set Change Group Group Bit0) >Setting Group Select Bit 1 (>Set Change Group Group Bit1) >User defined annunciation 1 (>Annunc. 1) >User defined annunciation 2 (>Annunc. 2) >User defined annunciation 3 (>Annunc. 3) >User defined annunciation 4 (>Annunc. 4) >Test mode (>Test mode) >Stop data transmission (>DataStop) Device is Operational and Protecting (Device OK) At Least 1 Protection Funct. is Active (ProtActive) Reset Device (Reset Device) Reset LED (Reset LED) Resume (Resume) Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General

ON * OFF * *

ON * OFF ON * OFF * ON * * * *

Initial Start of Device (Initial Start) Device, General

OUT_ ON Ev OUT ON

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

541

A Appendix

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

68 69 70 71 72 73 110 113 125 126 127 128 140 144 160 161 162 163 164 165 167 168 169 170 171 177 181 182 183

Clock Synchronization Error (Clock SyncError) Daylight Saving Time (DayLightSavTime) Setting calculation is running (Settings Calc.) Settings Check (Settings Check)

Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

on off

* * * * * * * m * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO 128 22 1 Yes

ON * OFF ON * OFF * * ON * OFF * * * *

Level-2 change (Level-2 change) Device, General Local setting change (Local change) Event lost (Event Lost) Flag Lost (Flag Lost) Chatter ON (Chatter ON) Protection ON/OFF (via system port) (ProtON/OFF) Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General

OUT_ ON Ev OUT OUT IntSP IntSP IntSP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT ON

LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO

135 135 135

130 136 145

1 1 1

ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF * * * *

79 ON/OFF (via system port) (79 Device, General ON/OFF) Pilot Prot. ON/OFF (via system port) (PilotONoff) Error with a summary alarm (Error Sum Alarm) Error 5V (Error 5V) Alarm Summary Event (Alarm Sum Event) Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General

128 135 128 128 135 135 128 135 135 135 135

47 164 46 32 182 183 33 184 186 187 188

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Failure: General Current Supervi- Measurem.Superv sion (Fail I Superv.) Failure: Current Summation (Fail- Measurem.Superv ure I) Failure: Current Balance (Fail I balance) Measurem.Superv

ON * OFF ON * OFF * *

Failure: General Voltage Supervi- Measurem.Superv sion (Fail V Superv.) Failure: Voltage summation Phase-Ground (Fail V Ph-G) Failure: Voltage Balance (Fail V balance) Failure: Voltage absent (Fail V absent) Measurem.Superv Measurem.Superv Measurem.Superv

ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF

VT Fuse Failure (alarm >10s) (VT Measurem.Superv FuseFail>10s) VT Fuse Failure (alarm instantaneous) (VT FuseFail) Failure: Phase Sequence (Fail Ph. Seq.) Failure: Battery empty (Fail Battery) Error: A/D converter (Error A/Dconv.) Alarm: Real Time Clock (Alarm Clock) Error Board 1 (Error Board 1) Measurem.Superv Measurem.Superv Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General

128 135 135 135 135

35 193 178 194 171

1 1 1 1 1

542

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

A.8 Information List

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 203 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 285 301 302 303 351 352

Error Board 2 (Error Board 2) Error Board 3 (Error Board 3) Error Board 4 (Error Board 4) Error Board 5 (Error Board 5) Error Board 6 (Error Board 6) Error Board 7 (Error Board 7) Error Board 0 (Error Board 0) Error: Offset (Error Offset)

Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General Device, General

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF * * * * * * * * *

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ON * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO

135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135

172 173 174 175 176 177 210 191 169 181 180 195 196 197 203 230 234 235 236 237 238 239 245 231 232 233 1 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1

Error:1A/5Ajumper different from Device, General setting (Error1A/5Awrong) Alarm: Analog input adjustment invalid (Alarm adjustm.) Error: Neutral CT different from MLFB (Error neutralCT) Failure: Broken Conductor (Fail Conductor) Fuse Fail Monitor is switched OFF (Fuse Fail M.OFF) Measurement Supervision is switched OFF (MeasSup OFF) Waveform data deleted (Wave. deleted) Device, General Device, General Measurem.Superv Measurem.Superv Measurem.Superv Osc. Fault Rec.

OUT_ ON Ev OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT SP SP on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off

Set Point Phase A dmd> (SP. I A Set Points(MV) dmd>) Set Point Phase B dmd> (SP. I B Set Points(MV) dmd>) Set Point Phase C dmd> (SP. I C Set Points(MV) dmd>) Set Point positive sequence I1dmd> (SP. I1dmd>) Set Points(MV)

Set Point |Pdmd|> (SP. |Pdmd|>) Set Points(MV) Set Point |Qdmd|> (SP. |Qdmd|>) Set Points(MV) Set Point |Sdmd|> (SP. |Sdmd|>) Set Points(MV) Set Point 55 Power factor alarm (SP. PF(55)alarm) Power System fault (Pow.Sys.Flt.) Fault Event (Fault Event) Set Points(MV) P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2

ON ON OFF * ON ON * OFF * * * *

Sensitive Ground fault (Sens Gnd P.System Data 2 flt) >52-a Phase A (Position Contact=Breaker) (>52-a A) >52-a Phase B (Position Contact=Breaker) (>52-a B) P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2

LED BI LED BI

BO BO

150 150

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

543

A Appendix

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

353 356 357 361 362 366 367 368 371 378 379 380 381 382 383 385 386 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405

>52-a Phase C (Position Contact=Breaker) (>52-a C) >Manual close signal (>Manual Close)

P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2

SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP

* *

* *

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO

150 150 150 128 150 150 150 150 150

3 6 7 38 12 66 67 68 71

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

>Block all Close commands from P.System Data 2 external (>Close Cmd. Blk) >Failure: Feeder VT (MCB tripped) (>FAIL:Feeder VT) >Failure: Busbar side VT MCB tripped (>FAIL:Bus VT) >52-a Bkr.1 Ph A (for AR,CBTest) (>52a Bkr1 A) >52-a Bkr.1 Ph B (for AR,CBTest) (>52a Bkr1 B) >52-a Bkr.1 Ph C (for AR,CBTest) (>52a Bkr1 C) >Breaker 1 READY (for AR,CBTest) (>Bkr1 Ready) >52 Breaker faulty (for 50BF) (>52 faulty) >52a Bkr. aux. contact (3pole closed) (>52a 3p Closed) >52b Bkr. aux. contact (3pole open) (>52b 3p Open) P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2

ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

150 150

78 79

1 1

>Single-phase trip permitted from P.System Data 2 ext.AR (>1p Trip Perm) >External AR programmed for 1phase only (>Only 1ph AR) P.System Data 2

ON * OFF ON * OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON * * * * * * * * * * *

>Enable all AR Zones / Elements P.System Data 2 (>Enable ARzones) >Lockout SET (>Lockout SET) >Lockout RESET (>Lockout RESET) >I MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>I MinMax Reset) >I1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>I1 MiMaReset) >V MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>V MiMaReset) >Vphph MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>VphphMiMaRes) P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter

150 150

35 36

1 1

>V1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>V1 Min/Max meter MiMa Reset) >P MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>P MiMa Reset) >S MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>S MiMa Reset) >Q MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Q MiMa Reset) >Idmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Idmd MiMaReset) >Pdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Pdmd MiMaReset) >Qdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Qdmd MiMaReset) Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter

544

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

A.8 Information List

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

406 407 408 410 411 501 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 530 533 534 535 536 545 546 560 561

>Sdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Sdmd MiMaReset) >Frq. MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Frq MiMa Reset) >Power Factor MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>PF MiMaReset) >52a Bkr1 aux. 3pClosed (for AR,CB-Test) (>52a Bkr1 3p Cl) >52b Bkr1 aux. 3p Open (for AR,CB-Test) (>52b Bkr1 3p Op) Relay PICKUP (Relay PICKUP) Relay PICKUP Phase A (Relay PICKUP A) Relay PICKUP Phase B (Relay PICKUP B) Relay PICKUP Phase C (Relay PICKUP C)

Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2

SP SP SP SP SP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT IntSP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

ON ON ON * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * OFF * * * * *

* * * * * m m m m m m m m * m * * * * *

LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO 150 150 150 150 170 177 178 179 180 1 4 4 4 2 Yes No No No No 128 68 2 No 150 150 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 80 81 84 64 65 66 67 69 70 71 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No

Relay PICKUP GROUND (Relay P.System Data 2 PICKUP G) Relay TRIP command Phase A (Relay TRIP A) Relay TRIP command Phase B (Relay TRIP B) Relay TRIP command Phase C (Relay TRIP C) Relay GENERAL CLOSE command (Relay CLOSE) P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2

Relay GENERAL TRIP command P.System Data 2 (Relay TRIP) Relay TRIP command - Only Phase A (Relay TRIP 1p.A) Relay TRIP command - Only Phase B (Relay TRIP 1p.B) Relay TRIP command - Only Phase C (Relay TRIP 1p.C) Relay TRIP command Phases ABC (Relay TRIP 3ph.) P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2

LOCKOUT is active (LOCKOUT) P.System Data 2 Primary fault current Ia (Ia =) Primary fault current Ib (Ib =) Primary fault current Ic (Ic =) Relay Definitive TRIP (Definitive TRIP) P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2

ON ON OFF OFF * * * ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON *

LED

BO

150

Time from Pickup to drop out (PU P.System Data 2 Time) Time from Pickup to TRIP (TRIP Time) Single-phase trip was coupled 3phase (Trip Coupled 3p) Manual close signal detected (Man.Clos.Detect) P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2

* ON

ON *

* *

LED LED

BO BO

150 150

210 211

2 1

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation No No

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

545

A Appendix

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

562 563 590 591 592 593 1000 1001 1002 1003 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1114 1115 1117 1118 1119 1120 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127

CB CLOSE command for manual P.System Data 2 closing (Man.Close Cmd) CB alarm suppressed (CB Alarm P.System Data 2 Supp) Line closure detected (Line closure) Single pole open detected in Phase A (1pole open A) Single pole open detected in Phase B (1pole open B) Single pole open detected in Phase C (1pole open C) Number of breaker TRIP commands (# TRIPs=) Number of breaker TRIP commands, Ph A (# TRIPs A =) Number of breaker TRIP commands, Ph B (# TRIPs B =) Number of breaker TRIP commands, Ph C (# TRIPs C =) Accumulation of interrupted current Ph A ( Ia =) Accumulation of interrupted current Ph B ( Ib =) Accumulation of interrupted current Ph C ( Ic =) max. fault current Phase A (Ia max. =) max. fault current Phase B (Ib max. =) max. fault current Phase C (Ic max. =) Flt Locator: primary RESISTANCE (Rpri =) Flt Locator: primary REACTANCE (Xpri =) Flt Locator: secondary RESISTANCE (Rsec =) Flt Locator: secondary REACTANCE (Xsec =) P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 P.System Data 2 Statistics Statistics Statistics Statistics Statistics Statistics Statistics Statistics Statistics Statistics Fault Locator Fault Locator Fault Locator Fault Locator

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT_ Ev OUT_ Ev OUT_ Ev OUT_ Ev OUT_ Ev

* *

* * *

LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO

150

212

ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

m m m m

LED LED LED LED

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON

151 128 151 151 151 151 151

14 73 17 18 19 20 22

4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Flt Locator: Distance to fault (dist Fault Locator =) Flt Locator: Distance [%] to fault (d[%] =) Fault Locator

Flt Locator: Distance to fault (dist Fault Locator =) Fault Locator Loop AG (FL Loop AG) Fault Locator Loop BG (FL Loop BG) Fault Locator Loop CG (FL Loop CG) Fault Locator Loop AB (FL Loop AB) Fault Locator Loop BC (FL Loop BC) Fault Locator Fault Locator Fault Locator Fault Locator Fault Locator

546

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation No No No No No No No No

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

A.8 Information List

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

1128 1132 1133 1305 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1335

Fault Locator Loop CA (FL Loop CA) Fault location invalid (Flt.Loc.invalid) Fault locator setting error K0,angle(K0) (Flt.Loc.ErrorK0) >BLOCK 50N-1 Ground O/C (>BLOCK 50N-1) >BLOCK 50N-2 Ground O/C (>BLOCK 50N-2) >BLOCK 50N-3 Ground O/C (>BLOCK 50N-3) >BLOCK 51N Ground O/C (>BLOCK 51N) >50N/51N Instantaneous trip (>50/1N InstTRIP)

Fault Locator Fault Locator Fault Locator 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C

OUT_ Ev OUT OUT SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP OUT OUT OUT OUT * *

ON ON ON * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * LED LED LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED LED LED LED BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 13 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 166 166 166 166 166 5 7 8 9 10 1 1 1 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON ON OFF OFF * * * *

>85-67N Pilot Prot. Gnd. O/C ON 85-67N PilotGnd (>85-67N PilotON) >85-67N Pilot Prot. Gnd. O/C OFF (>85-67NPilotOFF) >85-67N Pilot Prot. Gnd. O/C BLOCK (>85-67NPilotBlk) >85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Channel 1 (>85-67N Rec.Ch1) >85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Channel 2 (>85-67N Rec.Ch2) 85-67N PilotGnd 85-67N PilotGnd 85-67N PilotGnd 85-67N PilotGnd

ON * OFF on off on off on on

>85-67N Unblocking: UNBLOCK, 85-67N PilotGnd Channel 1 (>85-67N UB ub 1) >85-67N Unblocking: BLOCK, Channel 1 (>85-67N UB bl 1) 85-67N PilotGnd

ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF on off on off on off on on on

>85-67N Unblocking: UNBLOCK, 85-67N PilotGnd Channel 2 (>85-67N UB ub 2) >85-67N Unblocking: BLOCK, Channel 2 (>85-67N UB bl 2) >85-67N BLOCK Echo Signal (>85-67N BlkEcho) 85-67N PilotGnd 85-67N PilotGnd

>85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, 85-67N PilotGnd Ch. 1, Ph.A (>85-67N R.Ch1A) >85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, 85-67N PilotGnd Ch. 1, Ph.B (>85-67N R.Ch1B) >85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, 85-67N PilotGnd Ch. 1, Ph.C (>85-67N R.Ch1C) >85-67N Unblocking: UNBLOCK 85-67N PilotGnd Ch.1, Ph.A (>85-67N UB 1-A) >85-67N Unblocking: UNBLOCK 85-67N PilotGnd Ch.1, Ph.B (>85-67N UB 1-B) >85-67N Unblocking: UNBLOCK 85-67N PilotGnd Ch.1, Ph.C (>85-67N UB 1-C) 50N / 51N Ground O/C is switched OFF (50N/51N OFF) 50N / 51N Ground O/C is BLOCKED (50N/51N BLOCK) 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C

ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON * OFF ON ON OFF OFF * *

50N / 51N Ground O/C is ACTIVE 50N/51N Gnd.O/C (50N/51N ACTIVE) 50N / 51N Ground O/C trip is BLOCKED (50N/51N TripBLK) 50N/51N Gnd.O/C

ON ON OFF OFF

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

547

A Appendix

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

1336 1337 1338 1345 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1380 1381 1384 1386

50N / 51N phase selector Ph.A selected (50N/51N A sel.) 50N / 51N phase selector Ph.B selected (50N/51N B sel.) 50N / 51N phase selector Ph.C selected (50N/51N C sel.)

50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT IntSP OUT OUT OUT

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * on on on * * *

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF off ON ON ON ON ON ON * ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF on on on on on on

* * * m * * * * * * * m m m m * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO 166 166 166 81 84 86 1 2 2 Yes No No 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 58 59 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No 166 45 2 Yes

50N / 51N PICKED UP (50N/51N 50N/51N Gnd.O/C Pickup) 50N-1 PICKED UP (50N-1 Pickup) 50N-2 PICKED UP (50N-2 Pickup) 50N-3 PICKED UP (50N-3 Pickup) 51N PICKED UP (51N Pickup) 67N picked up FORWARD (67N PU forward) 67N picked up REVERSE (67N PU reverse) 50N / 51N General TRIP command (50N/51N TRIP) 50N / 51N: Trip 1pole Ph.A (50N/51N Trip A) 50N / 51N: Trip 1pole Ph.B (50N/51N Trip B) 50N / 51N: Trip 1pole Ph.C (50N/51N Trip C) 50N / 51N: Trip 3pole (50N/51N Trip 3p) 50N-1 TRIP (50N-1 TRIP) 50N-2 TRIP (50N-2 TRIP) 50N-3 TRIP (50N-3 TRIP) 51N TRIP (51N TRIP) 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C 50N/51N Gnd.O/C

50N/51N Inrush picked up (50/1N 50N/51N Gnd.O/C InrushPU) 85-67N Carrier SEND signal, Phase A (85-67N SEND A) 85-67N Carrier SEND signal, Phase B (85-67N SEND B) 85-67N Carrier SEND signal, Phase C (85-67N SEND C) 85-67N Blocking: carrier STOP signal PhA (85-67N STOP A) 85-67N Blocking: carrier STOP signal PhB (85-67N STOP B) 85-67N Blocking: carrier STOP signal PhC (85-67N STOP C) 85-67N PilotGnd 85-67N PilotGnd 85-67N PilotGnd 85-67N PilotGnd 85-67N PilotGnd 85-67N PilotGnd

85-67N Pilot Prot. ON/OFF via BI 85-67N PilotGnd (85-67Non/offBIN) 85-67N Pilot Prot. is switched OFF (85-67N OFF) 85-67N PilotGnd

ON * OFF ON * OFF on * on ON

85-67N Carrier SEND signal (85- 85-67N PilotGnd 67N SEND) 85-67N Transient Blocking (8567N TransBlk) 85-67N PilotGnd

548

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

A.8 Information List

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1401 1402 1403 1415 1432 1435 1436 1437 1439 1440 1451 1452 1453 1461 1472

85-67N Unblocking: FAILURE Channel 1 (85-67N UB Fail1) 85-67N Unblocking: FAILURE Channel 2 (85-67N UB Fail2) 85-67N Blocking: carrier STOP signal (85-67N BL STOP) 85-67N Blocking: Send signal with jump (85-67N BL Jump)

85-67N PilotGnd 85-67N PilotGnd 85-67N PilotGnd 85-67N PilotGnd

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP IntSP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

ON * OFF ON * OFF * * on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off * * on * on on on on on on on on on * *

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO

166 166 166 166

87 88 89 90

1 1 2 2

85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Ph 85-67N PilotGnd A, Device1 (85-67N Rx.A Dv1) 85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Ph 85-67N PilotGnd B, Device1 (85-67N Rx.B Dv1) 85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Ph 85-67N PilotGnd C, Device1 (85-67N Rx.C Dv1) 85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Ph 85-67N PilotGnd A, Device2 (85-67N Rx.A Dv2) 85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Ph 85-67N PilotGnd B, Device2 (85-67N Rx.B Dv2) 85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Ph 85-67N PilotGnd C, Device2 (85-67N Rx.C Dv2) 85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Ph 85-67N PilotGnd A, Device3 (85-67N Rx.A Dv3) 85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Ph 85-67N PilotGnd B, Device3 (85-67N Rx.B Dv3) 85-67N Carrier RECEPTION, Ph 85-67N PilotGnd C, Device3 (85-67N Rx.C Dv3) >50BF: Switch on breaker fail prot. (>50BF on) >50BF: Switch off breaker fail prot. (>50BF off) >BLOCK 50BF (>BLOCK 50BF) >50BF: External start 3pole (>50BF Start 3p) >50BF: External release (>50BF release) >50BF: External start A (>50BF Start A) >50BF: External start B (>50BF Start B) >50BF: External start C (>50BF Start C) 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure

ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON ON OFF OFF * * * * ON OFF ON

166

103

>50BF: External start 3p (w/o cur- 50BF BkrFailure rent) (>50BF STARTw/oI) Breaker failure prot. ON/OFF via BI (BkrFailON/offBI) 50BF is switched OFF (50BF OFF) 50BF is BLOCKED (50BF BLOCK) 50BF Breaker failure protection started (50BF Start) 50BF Local trip - only phase A (50BF LocTrip1pA) 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure

166 166 166 166

151 152 153 161

1 1 1 1

50BF is ACTIVE (50BF ACTIVE) 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

549

A Appendix

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

1473 1474 1476 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 2054 2701 2702 2703 2711 2712 2713 2714 2715 2716 2727 2731 2737 2738 2739 2740 2741 2742

50BF Local trip - only phase B (50BF LocTrip1pB) 50BF Local trip - only phase C (50BF LocTrip1pC)

50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP

* * * * * * * * * * *

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO 128 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 37 1 2 3 11 12 13 14 15 16 22 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 128 85 2 No

50BF Local trip - ABC (50BF Loc- 50BF BkrFailure TripABC) 50BF Trip in case of defective CB 50BF BkrFailure (50BF TripCBdef.) 50BF Busbar trip (50BF BusTrip) 50BF BkrFailure 50BF Trip End fault element (50BF EndFltTrip) 50BF Pole discrepancy pickup (50BF CBdiscr PU) 50BF Pole discrepancy pickup A (50BF CBdiscr A) 50BF Pole discrepancy pickup B (50BF CBdiscr B) 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure 50BF BkrFailure

50BF Pole discrepancy pickup C 50BF BkrFailure (50BF CBdiscr C) 50BF Pole discrepancy Trip (50BF CBdiscTrip) Emergency mode (Emer. mode) >79 ON (>79 ON) >79 OFF (>79 OFF) >BLOCK 79 (>BLOCK 79) 50BF BkrFailure 50(N)/51(N) O/C 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl.

ON ON OFF OFF * * * *

ON * OFF * * * * * * * * ON ON ON ON ON ON ON *

>79 External start of internal A/R 79 Auto Recl. (>79 Start) >79: External trip Ph. A for AR start (>79 Trip Ph. A) >79: External trip Ph. B for AR start (>79 Trip Ph. B) >79: External trip Ph. C for AR start (>79 Trip Ph. C) >79: External 1pole trip for AR start (>79 TRIP 1p) >79: External 3pole trip for AR start (>79 TRIP 3p) >79: Remote Close signal (>79 RemoteClose) >AR: Sync. release from ext. sync.-check (>Sync.release) >79: Block 1pole AR-cycle (>BLOCK 1pole AR) >79: Block 3pole AR-cycle (>BLOCK 3pole AR) 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl.

ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF

>79: Block 1phase-fault AR-cycle 79 Auto Recl. (>BLK 1phase AR) >79: Block 2phase-fault AR-cycle 79 Auto Recl. (>BLK 2phase AR) >79: Block 3phase-fault AR-cycle 79 Auto Recl. (>BLK 3phase AR) >79: Block 1st AR-cycle (>BLK 1.AR-cycle) 79 Auto Recl.

550

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

A.8 Information List

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

2743 2744 2745 2746 2747 2748 2749 2750 2751 2752 2781 2782 2783 2784 2787 2788 2796 2801 2809 2810 2818 2820 2821 2839 2840 2841 2842 2843

>79: Block 2nd AR-cycle (>BLK 2.AR-cycle) >79: Block 3rd AR-cycle (>BLK 3.AR-cycle) >79: Block 4th and higher ARcycles (>BLK 4.-n. AR) >79: External Trip for AR start (>Trip for AR)

79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl.

SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP OUT IntSP OUT OUT OUT OUT IntSP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF * * * * * * * ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO

40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 128 40 128 40 40

38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 81 16 83 130 87 88

1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2

>79: External pickup Ph. A for AR 79 Auto Recl. start (>A PickupStrtAR) >79: External pickup Ph. B for AR 79 Auto Recl. start (>B PickupStrtAR) >79: External pickup Ph. C for AR 79 Auto Recl. start (>C PickupStrtAR) >79: External pickup 1phase for AR start (>Pickup 1ph AR) >79: External pickup 2phase for AR start (>Pickup 2ph AR) >79: External pickup 3phase for AR start (>Pickup 3ph AR) 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl.

79 Auto recloser is switched OFF 79 Auto Recl. (79 OFF) 79 Auto recloser is switched ON (79 ON) 79 Auto Recl.

ON * OFF * *

79: Auto recloser is blocked (79 is 79 Auto Recl. blocked) 79: Auto recloser is not ready (79 79 Auto Recl. not ready) 79: Circuit breaker 1 not ready (CB not ready) 79: CB ready monitoring window expired (79 T-CBreadyExp) 79: Auto recloser ON/OFF via BI (79 on/off BI) 79 - in progress (79 in progress) 79: Start-signal monitoring time expired (79 T-Start Exp) 79: Maximum dead time expired (79 TdeadMax Exp) 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl.

ON * OFF * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ON * ON * ON ON ON ON * ON ON ON ON ON ON

40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40

101 174 175 118 143 197 148 149 150 151 154

2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2

79: Evolving fault recognition (79 79 Auto Recl. Evolving Flt) 79 is set to operate after 1p trip only (79 Program1pole) 79 dead time after evolving fault (79 Td. evol.Flt) 79 dead time after 1pole trip running (79 Tdead 1pTrip) 79 dead time after 3pole trip running (79 Tdead 3pTrip) 79 dead time after 1phase fault running (79 Tdead 1pFlt) 79 dead time after 2phase fault running (79 Tdead 2pFlt) 79 dead time after 3phase fault running (79 Tdead 3pFlt) 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

551

A Appendix

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

2844 2845 2846 2847 2848 2851 2852 2853 2854 2861 2862 2864 2865 2871 2889 2890 2891 2892 2893 2894 2895 2896 2897 2898 2901 2902 2903 2905

79 1st cycle running (79 1stCyc. run.)

79 Auto Recl.

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT SP SP SP SP

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

ON ON ON ON ON ON * * * * * * * ON * * * * * ON

* * * * * m * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO

40 40 40 40 40 128 40 40 128 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40

155 157 158 159 130 128 152 153 129 161 162 164 165 171 160 169 170 172 173 129

2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1

79 2nd cycle running (79 2ndCyc. 79 Auto Recl. run.) 79 3rd cycle running (79 3rdCyc. 79 Auto Recl. run.) 79 4th or higher cycle running (79 79 Auto Recl. 4thCyc. run.) 79 cycle is running in ADT mode (79 ADT run.) 79 - Close command (79 Close) 79: Close command after 1pole, 1st cycle (79 Close1.Cyc1p) 79: Close command after 3pole, 1st cycle (79 Close1.Cyc3p) 79: Close command 2nd cycle (and higher) (79 Close 2.Cyc) 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl.

79: Reclaim time is running (79 T- 79 Auto Recl. Recl. run.) 79 - cycle successful (79 Successful) 79: 1pole trip permitted by internal AR (79 1p Trip Perm) 79: Synchro-check request (79 Sync.Request) 79: TRIP command 3pole (79 TRIP 3pole) 79 1st cycle zone extension release (79 1.CycZoneRel) 79 2nd cycle zone extension release (79 2.CycZoneRel) 79 3rd cycle zone extension release (79 3.CycZoneRel) 79 4th cycle zone extension release (79 4.CycZoneRel) 79 zone extension (general) (79 Zone Release) 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl. 79 Auto Recl.

79 Remote close signal send (79 79 Auto Recl. Remote Close) No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE com- Statistics mands,1pole (79 #Close1./1p=) No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE com- Statistics mands,3pole (79 #Close1./3p=) No. of higher AR-cycle CLOSE Statistics commands,1p (79 #Close2./1p=) No. of higher AR-cycle CLOSE Statistics commands,3p (79 #Close2./3p=) >25: Switch on synchro-check function (>25 Sync. on) >25: Switch off synchro-check function (>25 Sync. off) 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check

* * * on off

* * * *

* * * *

LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI

BO BO BO BO

>25: BLOCK Synchronism check 25 Sync. Check (>25 BLOCK Sync.) >25: Start synchro-check f. 25 Sync. Check Manual Close (>25 SynStart MC)

552

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes No

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

A.8 Information List

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

2906 2907 2908 2909 2910 2911 2930 2931 2932 2934 2935 2936 2941 2942 2943 2944 2945 2946 2947 2948 2949 2951 2961

>25: Start synchro-check for AR (>25 SynStart AR) >25: Sync-Prog. Live bus/ live line/Sync (>25 Sync. synch) >25: Sync-Prog. Dead bus / live line (>25 Vsy< Vline>) >25: Sync-Prog. Live bus / dead line (>25 Vsy> Vline<)

25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check

SP SP SP SP SP SP IntSP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

on off * * * * *

* * * * * *

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 31 32 34 35 36 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 51 61 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

>25: Sync-Prog. Dead bus / dead 25 Sync. Check line (>25 Vsy< Vline<) >25: Sync-Prog. Override ( bypass ) (>25 Sync.o/ride) 25: Synchro-check ON/OFF via BI (25 SyncOn/OffBI) 25 Synchronism check is switched OFF (25 Sync. OFF) 25 Synchronism check is BLOCKED (25 Sync. BLOCK) 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check

ON * OFF ON * OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON * OFF ON ON ON ON

25: Synchro-check function faulty 25 Sync. Check (25 Sync. faulty) 25: Synchro-check supervision time exp. (25 Sy.Tsup.Exp) 25: Synchro-check request by control (25 Sy. req.CNTR) 25: Synchronization is running (25 Sy. running) 25: Synchro-check override/bypass (25 Sy. Override) 25: Synchronism detected (25 Synchronism) 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check

ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF * * * *

25: Sync. dead bus / live line de- 25 Sync. Check tected (25 Vsyn< Vline>) 25: Sync. live bus / dead line de- 25 Sync. Check tected (25 Vsyn> Vline<) 25: Sync. dead bus / dead line de- 25 Sync. Check tected (25 Vsyn< Vline<) 25: Sync. Volt. diff. greater than limit (25 Sync. Vdiff>) 25: Sync. Freq. diff. greater than limit (25 Sync. fdiff>) 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check

25: Sync. Angle diff. greater than 25 Sync. Check limit (25 Sync.-diff>) 25: Synchronism release (to ext. AR) (25 Sync.Release) 25: Close command from synchro-check (25 Sy. CloseCmd) 25 Sync. Bus frequency > (fn + 3Hz) (25 Sy. f-bus>>) 25 Sync. Bus frequency < (fn 3Hz) (25 Sy. f-bus<<) 25 Sync. Line frequency > (fn + 3Hz) (25 Sy. f-line>>) 25 Sync. Line frequency < (fn 3Hz) (25 Sy. f-line<<) 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check

2970 2971 2972 2973

25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check

OUT OUT OUT OUT

ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

* * * *

LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

553

A Appendix

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

2974 2975 2976 2977 3196 3215 3217 3218 3227 3228 3229 3230 3231 3232 3233 3234 3235 3236 3239 3240 3243 3244 3457 3458 3464 3475 3476 3477

25: Sync. Bus voltage > Vmax (P.3504) (25 Sy. V-syn>>) 25: Sync. Bus voltage < LiveV (P.3503) (25 Sy. V-syn<<) 25: Sync. Line voltage > Vmax (P.3504) (25 Sy. V-line>>) 25: Sync. Line voltage < LiveV (P.3503) (25 Sy. V-line<<) Local relay in Teststate (local Teststate) Incompatible Firmware Version (Wrong Firmware) Prot Int 1: Own Data received (PI1 Data reflec) Prot Int 2: Own Data received (PI2 Data reflec) >Prot Int 1: Tx is switched off (>PI1 Tx off) >Prot Int 2: Transmitter is switched off (>PI2 Tx off)

25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check 25 Sync. Check Prot. Interface Prot. Interface Prot. Interface Prot. Interface Prot. Interface Prot. Interface

OUT OUT OUT OUT IntSP OUT OUT OUT SP SP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT IntSP IntSP IntSP

ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON *

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED BI LED BI LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED FC TN

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO 93 93 139 140 1 1 Yes Yes 93 93 93 93 135 136 137 138 1 1 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes

ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF

Prot Int 1: Reception of faulty data Prot. Interface (PI1 Data fault) Prot Int 1: Total receiption failure (PI1 Datafailure) Prot. Interface

Prot Int 2: Reception of faulty data Prot. Interface (PI2 Data fault) Prot Int 2: Total receiption failure (PI2 Datafailure) Device table has inconsistent numbers (DT inconsistent) Device tables are unequal (DT unequal) Differences between common parameters (Par. different) Different PI for transmit and receive (PI1<->PI2 error) Prot. Interface Prot. Interface Prot. Interface Prot. Interface Prot. Interface

Prot Int 1: Transmission delay too Prot. Interface high (PI1 TD alarm) Prot Int 2: Transmission delay too Prot. Interface high (PI2 TD alarm) Prot Int 1: Connected with relay ID (PI1 conn. w/ ID) Prot Int 2: Connected with relay ID (PI2 conn. w/ ID) System operates in closed ring topology (Ringtopology) System operates in open chain topology (Chaintopology) Prot. Interface Prot. Interface Prot. Interface Prot. Interface

LED LED LED LED LED LED FC TN FC TN FC TN

BO BO BO BO BO BO

93 93

141 142

1 1

Communication topology is com- Prot. Interface plete (Topol complete) Relay 1 in Logout state (Rel1Logout) Relay 2 in Logout state (Rel2Logout) Relay 3 in Logout state (Rel3Logout) Prot. Interface Prot. Interface Prot. Interface

93 93 93

143 144 145

1 1 1

554

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

A.8 Information List

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

3484 3487 3491 3492 3493 3541 3542 3543 3544 3545 3546 3547 3548 3549 3550 3551 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 3557 3558 3559 3560 3561 3562 3563

Local activation of Logout state (Logout) Equal IDs in constellation (Equal IDs) Relay 1 in Login state (Rel1 Login) Relay 2 in Login state (Rel2 Login) Relay 3 in Login state (Rel3 Login)

Prot. Interface Prot. Interface Prot. Interface Prot. Interface Prot. Interface

IntSP OUT OUT OUT OUT SP SP SP SP OUT OUT OUT OUT SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP

ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED LED LED LED LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI

FC TN

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO

93

149

93 93 93

191 192 193

1 1 1

>Remote Trip 1 signal input (>Re- Remote Signals mote Trip1) >Remote Trip 2 signal input (>Re- Remote Signals mote Trip2) >Remote Trip 3 signal input (>Re- Remote Signals mote Trip3) >Remote Trip 4 signal input (>Re- Remote Signals mote Trip4) Remote Trip 1 received (RemoteTrip1 Rx) Remote Trip 2 received (RemoteTrip2 Rx) Remote Trip 3 received (RemoteTrip3 Rx) Remote Trip 4 received (RemoteTrip4 Rx) >Remote Signal 1 input (>Rem. Signal 1) >Remote Signal 2 input (>Rem.Signal 2) >Remote Signal 3 input (>Rem.Signal 3) >Remote Signal 4 input (>Rem.Signal 4) >Remote Signal 5 input (>Rem.Signal 5) >Remote Signal 6 input (>Rem.Signal 6) >Remote Signal 7 input (>Rem.Signal 7) >Remote Signal 8 input (>Rem.Signal 8) >Remote Signal 9 input (>Rem.Signal 9) >Remote Signal 10 input (>Rem.Signal10) >Remote Signal 11 input (>Rem.Signal11) >Remote Signal 12 input (>Rem.Signal12) >Remote Signal 13 input (>Rem.Signal13) >Remote Signal 14 input (>Rem.Signal14) >Remote Signal 15 input (>Rem.Signal15) Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals

93 93 93 93

154 155 156 157

1 1 1 1

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

555

A Appendix

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

3564 3565 3566 3567 3568 3569 3570 3571 3572 3573 3574 3575 3576 3577 3578 3579 3580 3581 3582 3583 3584 3585 3586 3587 3588 3589 3590 3591

>Remote Signal 16 input (>Rem.Signal16) >Remote Signal 17 input (>Rem.Signal17) >Remote Signal 18 input (>Rem.Signal18) >Remote Signal 19 input (>Rem.Signal19) >Remote Signal 20 input (>Rem.Signal20) >Remote Signal 21 input (>Rem.Signal21) >Remote Signal 22 input (>Rem.Signal22) >Remote Signal 23 input (>Rem.Signal23) >Remote Signal 24 input (>Rem.Signal24) Remote signal 1 received (Rem.Sig 1 Rx) Remote signal 2 received (Rem.Sig 2 Rx) Remote signal 3 received (Rem.Sig 3 Rx) Remote signal 4 received (Rem.Sig 4 Rx) Remote signal 5 received (Rem.Sig 5 Rx) Remote signal 6 received (Rem.Sig 6 Rx) Remote signal 7 received (Rem.Sig 7 Rx) Remote signal 8 received (Rem.Sig 8 Rx) Remote signal 9 received (Rem.Sig 9 Rx) Remote signal 10 received (Rem.Sig 10 Rx) Remote signal 11 received (Rem.Sig 11 Rx) Remote signal 12 received (Rem.Sig 12 Rx) Remote signal 13 received (Rem.Sig 13 Rx) Remote signal 14 received (Rem.Sig 14 Rx) Remote signal 15 received (Rem.Sig 15 Rx) Remote signal 16 received (Rem.Sig 16 Rx) Remote signal 17 received (Rem.Sig 17 Rx) Remote signal 18 received (Rem.Sig 18 Rx) Remote signal 19 received (Rem.Sig 19 Rx)

Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals

SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

556

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

A.8 Information List

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

3592 3593 3594 3595 3596 3603 3611 3613 3617 3618 3619 3620 3651 3652 3653 3654 3655 3671 3672 3673 3674 3675 3681 3682 3683 3684 3685 3686 3687 3688 3689

Remote signal 20 received (Rem.Sig 20 Rx) Remote signal 21 received (Rem.Sig 21 Rx) Remote signal 22 received (Rem.Sig 22 Rx) Remote signal 23 received (Rem.Sig 23 Rx) Remote signal 24 received (Rem.Sig 24 Rx) >BLOCK 21 Distance (>BLOCK 21 Dist.)

Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals Remote Signals 21 Dis.General

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT SP SP SP SP SP SP SP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

on off on off on off on off on off *

* * * * * *

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * m m m m * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO

93 93 93 93 93

177 178 179 180 181

1 1 1 1 1

>ENABLE Z1B (with setted Time 21 Dis.General Delay) (>ENABLE Z1B) >ENABLE Z1B instantanous (w/o 21 Dis.General T-Delay) (>ENABLE Z1Binst) >BLOCK Z4-Trip (>BLOCK Z4Trip) >BLOCK Z5-Trip (>BLOCK Z5Trip) >BLOCK Z4 for ph-g loops (>BLOCK Z4 Ph-G) >BLOCK Z5 for ph-g loops (>BLOCK Z5 Ph-G) 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General

ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON ON OFF OFF * *

28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28

11 13 17 18 19 20 51 52 53

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

21 Distance is switched OFF (21 21 Dis.General Dist. OFF) 21 Distance is BLOCKED (21 Dist. BLOCK) 21 Distance is ACTIVE (21 Dist. ACTIVE) 21 Setting error K0(Z1) or Angle K0(Z1) (21 Error K0(Z1)) 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General

ON * OFF ON * OFF * * * * * * * * * * * * * * OFF * * * * ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

21 Setting error K0(>Z1)or Angle 21 Dis.General K0(>Z1) (21 ErrorK0(>Z1)) 21 PICKED UP (21 PICKUP) 21 PICKUP Phase A (21 Pickup A) 21 PICKUP Phase B (21 Pickup B) 21 PICKUP Phase C (21 Pickup C) 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General

28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28

71 72 73 74 75 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

21 PICKUP GROUND (21 Pickup 21 Dis.General G) 21 Pickup Phase A (only) (21 Pickup 1p.A) 21 Pickup AG (21 Pickup AG) 21 Pickup Phase B (only) (21 Pickup 1p.B) 21 Pickup BG (21 Pickup BG) 21 Pickup AB (21 Pickup AB) 21 Pickup Phase C (only) (21 Pickup 1p.C) 21 Pickup CG (21 Pickup CG) 21 Pickup CA (21 Pickup CA) 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General

21 Pickup ABG (21 Pickup ABG) 21 Dis.General

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

557

A Appendix

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

3690 3691 3692 3693 3694 3701 3702 3703 3704 3705 3706 3707 3708 3709 3710 3711 3712 3713 3714 3715 3716 3717 3718 3719 3720 3741 3742 3743 3744

21 Pickup CAG (21 Pickup CAG) 21 Dis.General 21 Pickup BC (21 Pickup BC) 21 Pickup ABC (21 Pickup ABC) 21 Pickup ABCG (21 Pickup ABCG) 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Pickup BCG (21 Pickup BCG) 21 Dis.General

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF * * * * * *

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * m m * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO

28 28 28 28 28

90 91 92 93 94

2 2 2 2 2

21 Selected Loop AG forward (21 21 Dis.General Loop AG forw) 21 Selected Loop BG forward (21 21 Dis.General Loop BG forw) 21 Selected Loop CG forward (21 21 Dis.General Loop CG forw) 21 Selected Loop AB forward (21 21 Dis.General Loop AB forw) 21 Selected Loop BC forward (21 21 Dis.General Loop BC forw) 21 Selected Loop CA forward (21 21 Dis.General Loop CA forw) 21 Selected Loop AG reverse (21 21 Dis.General Loop AG rev.) 21 Selected Loop BG reverse (21 21 Dis.General Loop BG rev.) 21 Selected Loop CG reverse (21 21 Dis.General Loop CG rev.) 21 Selected Loop AB reverse (21 21 Dis.General Loop AB rev.) 21 Selected Loop BC reverse (21 21 Dis.General Loop BC rev.) 21 Selected Loop CA reverse (21 21 Dis.General Loop CA rev.) 21 Selected Loop AG non-directional (21 Loop AG <->) 21 Selected Loop BG non-directional (21 Loop BG <->) 21 Selected Loop CG non-directional (21 Loop CG <->) 21 Selected Loop AB non-directional (21 Loop AB <->) 21 Selected Loop BC non-directional (21 Loop BC <->) 21 Selected Loop CA non-directional (21 Loop CA <->) 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General

21 Picked up FORWARD (21 PU 21 Dis.General forward) 21 Picked up REVERSE (21 PU reverse) 21 Dis.General

128 128

74 75

2 2

21 Pickup Z1, Loop AG (21 PU Z1 21 Dis.General AG) 21 Pickup Z1, Loop BG (21 PU Z1 21 Dis.General BG) 21 Pickup Z1, Loop CG (21 PU Z1 CG) 21 Dis.General

21 Pickup Z1, Loop AB (21 PU Z1 21 Dis.General AB)

558

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation No No No No No No No

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

A.8 Information List

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

3745 3746 3747 3748 3749 3750 3751 3752 3755 3758 3759 3760 3771 3774 3777 3778 3779 3780 3801 3802 3803 3804 3805 3811 3813 3816 3817 3818 3821 3822 3823

21 Pickup Z1, Loop BC (21 PU Z1 21 Dis.General BC) 21 Pickup Z1, Loop CA (21 PU Z1 21 Dis.General CA) 21 Pickup Z1B, Loop AG (21 PU Z1B AG) 21 Pickup Z1B, Loop BG (21 PU Z1B BG) 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ON ON ON ON * * * * * * * *

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO 128 128 128 128 128 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 78 79 80 81 82 180 201 202 203 204 205 211 213 216 217 218 209 210 224 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

21 Pickup Z1B, Loop CG (21 PU 21 Dis.General Z1B CG) 21 Pickup Z1B, Loop AB (21 PU Z1B AB) 21 Pickup Z1B, Loop BC (21 PU Z1B BC) 21 Pickup Z1B, Loop CA (21 PU Z1B CA) 21 Pickup Z2 (21 PU Z2) 21 Pickup Z3 (21 PU Z3) 21 Pickup Z4 (21 PU Z4) 21 Pickup Z5 (21 PU Z5) 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General

21 Time Out T1 (21 Time Out T1) 21 Dis.General 21 Time Out T2 (21 Time Out T2) 21 Dis.General 21 Time Out T3 (21 Time Out T3) 21 Dis.General 21 Time Out T4 (21 Time Out T4) 21 Dis.General 21 Time Out T5 (21 Time Out T5) 21 Dis.General 21 Time Out T1B (21 Time Out T1B) 21 Distance General TRIP command (21 TRIP) 21 TRIP command - Only Phase A (21 TRIP 1p. A) 21 TRIP command - Only Phase B (21 TRIP 1p. B) 21 TRIP command - Only Phase C (21 TRIP 1p. C) 21 TRIP command Phases ABC (21 TRIP ABC) 21 TRIP single-phase Z1 (21 TRIP 1p. Z1) 21 TRIP single-phase Z1B (21 TRIP 1p. Z1B) 21 TRIP single-phase Z2 (21 TRIP 1p. Z2) 21 TRIP 3phase in Z2 (21 TRIP 3p. Z2) 21 TRIP 3phase in Z3 (21 TRIP 3p. Z3) 21 TRIP 3phase in Z4 (21 TRIP 3p. Z4) 21 TRIP 3phase in Z5 (21 TRIP 3p. Z5) 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General

21 TRIP 3phase in Z1 with single- 21 Dis.General ph Flt. (21 TRIP3p. Z1sf)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

559

A Appendix

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

3824 3825 3826 3850 4001 4002 4003 4005 4006 4007

21 TRIP 3phase in Z1 with multi- 21 Dis.General ph Flt. (21 TRIP3p. Z1mf) 21 TRIP 3phase in Z1B with single-ph Flt (21 TRIP3p.Z1Bsf) 21 TRIP 3phase in Z1B with multi-ph Flt. (21 TRIP3p Z1Bmf) 21 Dis.General 21 Dis.General

OUT OUT OUT OUT SP SP SP SP SP SP

* * * * * *

* * * * * *

* * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO

28 28 28 28

225 244 245 251

2 2 2 2

21 TRIP Z1B with Pilot Protection 21 Dis.General scheme (21 TRIP Z1B Pil) >85-21 Pilot Prot. Distance ON (>85-21 Pilot ON) >85-21 Pilot Prot. Distance OFF (>85-21 PilotOFF) >85-21 Pilot Prot. Distance BLOCK (>85-21 PilotBlk) >85-21 Carrier faulty (>85-21 RecFail) >85-21 Carrier RECEPTION, Channel 1 (>85-21 Rec.Ch1) >85-21 Carrier RECEPTION, Channel 1,Ph A (>85-21 RecCh1A) >85-21 Carrier RECEPTION, Channel 1,Ph B (>85-21 RecCh1B) >85-21 Carrier RECEPTION, Channel 1,Ph C (>85-21 RecCh1C) >85-21 Carrier RECEPTION, Channel 2 (>85-21 Rec.Ch2) >85-21 Unblocking: UNBLOCK, Channel 1 (>85-21 UB ub 1) >85-21 Unblocking: BLOCK, Channel 1 (>85-21 UB bl 1) >85-21 Unblocking: UNBLOCK, Ch. 1, Ph A (>85-21 UB ub1A) >85-21 Unblocking: UNBLOCK, Ch. 1, Ph B (>85-21 UB ub1B) >85-21 Unblocking: UNBLOCK, Ch. 1, Ph C (>85-21 UB ub1C) >85-21 Unblocking: UNBLOCK, Channel 2 (>85-21 UB ub 2) >85-21 Unblocking: BLOCK, Channel 2 (>85-21 UB bl 2) >85-21 BLOCK Echo Signal (>85-21 BlkEcho) 85-21 Pilot Prot. ON/OFF via BI (85-21on/off BIN) Pilot Prot. is switched ON (Pilot ON) 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist

ON ON OFF OFF on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off * on on

29

29 29

6 7

1 1

4008

85-21 PilotDist

SP

on

LED BI

BO

29

4009

85-21 PilotDist

SP

on

LED BI

BO

29

4010 4030 4031 4032 4033 4034 4035 4036 4040 4050 4051 4052 4054 4055 4056

85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist Device, General

SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP IntSP IntSP OUT OUT OUT OUT

on on on on on on on on on

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO

29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29

10 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 40

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ON * OFF * *

128

17

85-21 Pilot Prot. is switched OFF 85-21 PilotDist (85-21 Pilot OFF) 85-21 Carrier signal received (85- 85-21 PilotDist 21 Carr.rec.) 85-21 Carrier CHANNEL FAILURE (85-21 Carr.Fail) 85-21 Carrier SEND signal (8521 SEND) 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist

ON * OFF * * on * * on

128 128 128

77 39 76

2 1 2

560

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

A.8 Information List

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

4057 4058 4059 4060 4068 4070 4080 4081 4082 4083 4084 4085 4086 4087 4088 4089 4090 4091 4092 4093 4160 4163 4164 4166 4167 4168 4169 4203

85-21 Carrier SEND signal, Phase A (85-21 SEND A) 85-21 Carrier SEND signal, Phase B (85-21 SEND B) 85-21 Carrier SEND signal, Phase C (85-21 SEND C)

85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT SP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT SP

* * * * * * on off on off * * * on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off

* * * * ON ON * * * * * on on on on on on on on on

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED BI LED LED LED LED LED LED LED BI

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO 29 29 164 166 1 1 Yes No 29 29 29 29 29 60 68 70 80 81 2 2 2 1 1 No No No Yes Yes

85-21 Blocking: Send signal with 85-21 PilotDist jump (85-21 JumpBlock) 85-21 Transient Blocking (85-21 Trans.Blk) 85-21 Blocking: carrier STOP signal (85-21 BL STOP) 85-21 Unblocking: FAILURE Channel 1 (85-21 UB Fail1) 85-21 Unblocking: FAILURE Channel 2 (85-21 UB Fail2) 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist

85-21 Blocking: carrier STOP sig- 85-21 PilotDist nal,Ph A (85-21 BL STOPA) 85-21 Blocking: carrier STOP sig- 85-21 PilotDist nal,Ph B (85-21 BL STOPB) 85-21 Blocking: carrier STOP sig- 85-21 PilotDist nal,Ph C (85-21 BL STOPC) 85-21 RECEPTION, Ph A, Device1 (85-21 Rx.A Dev1) 85-21 RECEPTION, Ph B, Device1 (85-21 Rx.B Dev1) 85-21 RECEPTION, Ph C, Device1 (85-21 Rx.C Dev1) 85-21 RECEPTION, Ph A, Device2 (85-21 Rx.A Dev2) 85-21 RECEPTION, Ph B, Device2 (85-21 Rx.B Dev2) 85-21 RECEPTION, Ph C, Device2 (85-21 Rx.C Dev2) 85-21 RECEPTION, Ph A, Device3 (85-21 Rx.A Dev3) 85-21 RECEPTION, Ph B, Device3 (85-21 Rx.B Dev3) 85-21 RECEPTION, Ph C, Device3 (85-21 Rx.C Dev3) 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist 85-21 PilotDist

>BLOCK 68 Power Swing detec- 68 Power Swing tion (>68 P/Swing BLK) 68 Power Swing unstable (68 P/Swing unst) 68 Power Swing detected (68 Power Swing) 68T Power Swing TRIP command (68T Pswing TRIP) 68 Power Swing 68 Power Swing 68 Power Swing

ON ON OFF OFF ON ON

ON ON OFF OFF ON ON

68 Power Swing detected, Phase 68 Power Swing A (68 P/Swing A) 68 Power Swing detected, Phase 68 Power Swing B (68 P/Swing B) 68 Power Swing detected, Phase 68 Power Swing C (68 P/Swing C) >BLOCK Weak Infeed Trip option Weak Infeed (>BLOCK Weak Inf)

ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF * *

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

561

A Appendix

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

4204 4205 4206 4221 4222 4223 4225 4226 4227 4228 4229 4231 4232 4233 4234 4241 4242

>BLOCK delayed Weak Infeed stage (>BLOCK del. WI) >Reception (channel) for Weak Infeed OK (>WI rec. OK) >Receive signal for Weak Infeed (>WI reception) Weak Infeed is switched OFF (WeakInf. OFF)

Weak Infeed Weak Infeed Weak Infeed Weak Infeed

SP SP SP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON * OFF ON ON OFF OFF * *

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED BI LED BI LED BI LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO 25 25 41 42 2 2 No No 25 31 2 Yes 25 25 25 21 22 23 1 1 1 Yes Yes Yes

Weak Infeed is BLOCKED (Weak Weak Infeed Inf. BLOCK) Weak Infeed is ACTIVE (Weak Inf Weak Infeed ACTIVE) Weak Infeed Zero seq. current detected (3I0 detected) Weak Infeed

ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF * * * * * * * * OFF ON ON ON * ON

Weak Infeed Undervoltg. A (WI V Weak Infeed A<) Weak Infeed Undervoltg. B (WI V Weak Infeed B<) Weak Infeed Undervoltg. C (WI V Weak Infeed C<) WI TRIP with zero sequence current (WI TRIP 3I0) Weak Infeed

Weak Infeed PICKED UP (Weak- Weak Infeed Inf. PICKUP) Weak Infeed PICKUP Phase A (Weak Inf. PU A) Weak Infeed PICKUP Phase B (Weak Inf. PU B) Weak Infeed PICKUP Phase C (Weak Inf. PU C) Weak Infeed TRIP command (WeakInfeed TRIP) Weak Infeed TRIP command Only Phase A (Weak TRIP 1p.A) Weak Infeed TRIP command Only Phase B (Weak TRIP 1p.B) Weak Infeed TRIP command Only Phase C (Weak TRIP 1p.C) Weak Infeed Weak Infeed Weak Infeed Weak Infeed Weak Infeed

4243

Weak Infeed

OUT

ON

LED

BO

25

43

4244

Weak Infeed

OUT

ON

LED

BO

25

44

4245 4246 4247 4248 4249 4253 4271 4272

Weak Infeed TRIP command Weak Infeed Phases ABC (Weak TRIP ABC) ECHO Send SIGNAL (ECHO SIGNAL) Weak Infeed

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT SP OUT OUT

* ON

ON ON

* * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED BI LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO

25 25

45 46

2 2

ECHO Tele.Carrier RECEPTION, Echo Rec. ov.PI Device1 (ECHO Rec. Dev1) ECHO Tele.Carrier RECEPTION, Echo Rec. ov.PI Device2 (ECHO Rec. Dev2) ECHO Tele.Carrier RECEPTION, Echo Rec. ov.PI Device3 (ECHO Rec. Dev3) >BLOCK 50HS Instantaneous SOTF O/C (>BLOCK 50HS) 50HS High Speed SOTF-O/C is switched OFF (50HS OFF) 50HS High Speed SOTF-O/C is BLOCKED (50HS BLOCK) 50HS SOTF 50HS SOTF 50HS SOTF

ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF * *

ON * OFF ON ON OFF OFF

25 25

71 72

1 1

562

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation No No No Yes Yes Yes

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

A.8 Information List

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

4273 4281 4282 4283 4284 4295

50HS High Speed SOTF-O/C is ACTIVE (50HS ACTIVE) 50HS PICKED UP (50HS PICKUP) 50HS Pickup Phase A (50HS Pickup A) 50HS Pickup Phase B (50HS Pickup B) 50HS Pickup Phase C (50HS Pickup C) 50HS High Speed SOTF-O/C TRIP command (50HS TRIP ABC) >BLOCK Direct Transfer Trip option (>BLOCK DTT) >Direct Transfer Trip INPUT Phase A (>DTT Trip A) >Direct Transfer Trip INPUT Phase B (>DTT Trip B) >Direct Transfer Trip INPUT Phase C (>DTT Trip C) >Direct Transfer Trip INPUT Phases ABC (>DTT Trip ABC) Direct Transfer Trip is switched OFF (DTT OFF)

50HS SOTF 50HS SOTF 50HS SOTF 50HS SOTF 50HS SOTF 50HS SOTF

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

* * * * * *

* OFF ON ON ON ON

* * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO

25 25 25 25 25 25

73 81 82 83 84 95

1 2 2 2 2 2

4403 4412 4413 4414 4417 4421 4422 4432 4433 4434 4435 5203 5206 5207 5208 5209 5211 5212 5213 5232 5233

DTT Direct Trip DTT Direct Trip DTT Direct Trip DTT Direct Trip DTT Direct Trip DTT Direct Trip

SP SP SP SP SP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT SP SP SP SP SP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED LED LED LED LED LED LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO 51 51 51 51 51 51 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 21 22 32 33 34 35 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 230 231 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 Yes Yes No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON ON OFF OFF * * * * ON ON ON ON

Direct Transfer Trip is BLOCKED DTT Direct Trip (DTT BLOCK) DTT TRIP command - Only Phase A (DTT TRIP 1p. A) DTT TRIP command - Only Phase B (DTT TRIP 1p. B) DTT TRIP command - Only Phase C (DTT TRIP 1p. C) DTT TRIP command Phases ABC (DTT TRIP ABC) >BLOCK 81O/U (>BLOCK 81O/U) >BLOCK 81-1 (>BLOCK 81-1) >BLOCK 81-2 (>BLOCK 81-2) >BLOCK 81-3 (>BLOCK 81-3) >BLOCK 81-4 (>BLOCK 81-4) 81 OFF (81 OFF) 81 BLOCKED (81 BLOCKED) 81 ACTIVE (81 ACTIVE) 81-1 picked up (81-1 picked up) 81-2 picked up (81-2 picked up) DTT Direct Trip DTT Direct Trip DTT Direct Trip DTT Direct Trip 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq.

ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON * OFF * * ON OFF ON OFF

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

563

A Appendix

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

5234 5235 5236 5237 5238 5239 5240 5241 5242 5243 6854 6855

81-3 picked up (81-3 picked up) 81-4 picked up (81-4 picked up) 81-1 TRIP (81-1 TRIP) 81-2 TRIP (81-2 TRIP) 81-3 TRIP (81-3 TRIP) 81-4 TRIP (81-4 TRIP) 81-1: Time Out (81-1 Time Out) 81-2: Time Out (81-2 Time Out) 81-3: Time Out (81-3 Time Out) 81-4: Time Out (81-4 Time Out) >74TC-1 Trip circuit superv.:Trip Relay (>74TC-1 TripRel) >74TC-1 Trip circuit superv.:Breaker Rel (>74TC-1 Bkr.Rel) >74TC-2 Trip circuit superv.:Trip Relay (>74TC-2 TripRel) >74TC-2 Trip circuit superv.:Breaker Rel (>74TC-2 Bkr.Rel) >74TC-3 Trip circuit superv.:Trip Relay (>74TC-3 TripRel) >74TC-3 Trip circuit superv.:Breaker Rel (>74TC-3 Bkr.Rel)

81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 81 O/U Freq. 74TC TripCirc. 74TC TripCirc.

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT SP SP

* * * * * * * * * *

ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON * * * *

* * * * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED BI LED BI

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO

70 70 70 70 70 70

232 233 234 235 236 237

2 2 2 2 2 2

ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON * OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON * OFF ON ON OFF OFF * *

6856 6857

74TC TripCirc. 74TC TripCirc.

SP SP

* *

LED BI LED BI

BO BO

6858 6859

74TC TripCirc. 74TC TripCirc.

SP SP

* *

LED BI LED BI

BO BO

6861 6865 6866 6867 6868 7104 7105 7106 7110 7130 7131 7151 7152 7153

74TC Trip circuit supervision OFF 74TC TripCirc. (74TC OFF) 74TC Failure Trip Circuit (74TC Trip cir.) 74TC-1 blocked. Binary input is not set (74TC-1 ProgFAIL) 74TC-2 blocked. Binary input is not set (74TC-2 ProgFAIL) 74TC-3 blocked. Binary input is not set (74TC-3 ProgFAIL) >BLOCK 50-B1 Backup OverCurrent (>BLOCK 50-B1) >BLOCK 50-B2 Backup OverCurrent (>BLOCK 50-B2) >BLOCK 51-B Backup OverCurrent (>BLOCK 51-B) 74TC TripCirc. 74TC TripCirc. 74TC TripCirc. 74TC TripCirc. 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT SP SP SP SP SP SP OUT OUT OUT

* * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 4 5 6 10 30 31 51 52 53 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 128 36 1 Yes

>50(N)/51(N) BackupO/C Instan- 50(N)/51(N) O/C taneousTrip (>5X-B InstTRIP) >BLOCK 50-STUB (>BLOCK 50- 50(N)/51(N) O/C STUB) >50-STUB Enable STUB-Bus option (>50-STUB ENABLE) 50(N)/51(N) Backup O/C is switched OFF (5X-B OFF) 50(N)/51(N) Backup O/C is BLOCKED (5X-B BLOCK) 50(N)/51(N) Backup O/C is ACTIVE (5X-B ACTIVE) 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C

564

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

A.8 Information List

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

7161 7162

50(N)/51(N) Backup O/C PICKED UP (5X-B PICKUP) 50(N)/51(N) Backup O/C PICKUP Phase A (5X-B Pickup A) 50(N)/51(N) Backup O/C PICKUP Phase B (5X-B Pickup B) 50(N)/51(N) Backup O/C PICKUP Phase C (5X-B Pickup C)

50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C

OUT OUT

* *

OFF ON

m *

LED LED

BO BO

64 64

61 62

2 2

7163

50(N)/51(N) O/C

OUT

ON

LED

BO

64

63

7164

50(N)/51(N) O/C

OUT

ON

LED

BO

64

64

7165

50(N)/51(N) Backup O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C PICKUP GROUND (5X-B Pickup Gnd) 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup - Only GROUND (5X-B PU only G) 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup - Only Phase A (5X-B PU 1p. A) 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup AG (5X-B Pickup AG) 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup - Only Phase B (5X-B PU 1p. B) 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup BG (5X-B Pickup BG) 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup AB (5X-B Pickup AB) 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C

OUT

ON

LED

BO

64

65

7171 7172 7173 7174 7175 7176 7177 7178 7179 7180 7181 7182 7183 7184 7185 7191 7192 7193 7201 7211 7212

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF * ON

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO

64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 128 64

71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 91 92 93 101 72 112

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup ABG (5X-B 50(N)/51(N) O/C Pickup ABG) 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup - Only Phase C (5X-B PU 1p. C) 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup CG (5X-B Pickup CG) 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup CA (5X-B Pickup CA) 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C

50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup CAG (5X-B 50(N)/51(N) O/C Pickup CAG) 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup BC (5X-B Pickup BC) 50(N)/51(N) O/C

50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup BCG (5X-B 50(N)/51(N) O/C Pickup BCG) 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup ABC (5X-B 50(N)/51(N) O/C Pickup ABC) 50(N)/51(N)-B Pickup ABCG (5X- 50(N)/51(N) O/C B PickupABCG) 50(N)-B1 Pickup (50(N)-B1 PICKUP) 50(N)-B2 Pickup (50(N)-B2 PICKUP) 51(N)-B Pickup (51(N)-B PICKUP) 50-STUB Pickup (50-STUB PICKUP) 50(N)/51(N)-B General TRIP command (5X-B TRIP) 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C

50(N)/51(N)-B TRIP - Only Phase 50(N)/51(N) O/C A (5X-B TRIP 1p.A)

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

565

A Appendix

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

7213 7214 7215 7221 7222 7223 7235 7325

50(N)/51(N)-B TRIP - Only Phase 50(N)/51(N) O/C B (5X-B TRIP 1p.B) 50(N)/51(N)-B TRIP - Only Phase 50(N)/51(N) O/C C (5X-B TRIP 1p.C) 50(N)/51(N)-B TRIP Phases ABC 50(N)/51(N) O/C (5X-B TRIP ABC) 50(N)-B1 TRIP (50(N)-B1 TRIP) 50(N)-B2 TRIP (50(N)-B2 TRIP) 51(N)-B TRIP (51(N)-B TRIP) 50-STUB TRIP (50-STUB TRIP) CB1-TEST TRIP command Only Phase A (CB1-TESTtrip A) CB1-TEST TRIP command Only Phase B (CB1-TESTtrip B) CB1-TEST TRIP command Only Phase C (CB1-TESTtrip C) CB1-TEST TRIP command ABC (CB1-TESTtripABC) CB1-TEST CLOSE command (CB1-TEST close) CB-TEST is in progress (CBTEST running) 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C 50(N)/51(N) O/C Testing

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

* * * * * * *

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

* * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO

64 64 64 64 64 64 64 153

113 114 115 121 122 123 135 25

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF ON * OFF * *

7326

Testing

OUT

LED

BO

153

26

7327

Testing

OUT

LED

BO

153

27

7328 7329 7345 7346 7347

Testing Testing Testing

OUT OUT OUT

* * *

LED LED LED

BO BO BO

153 153 153

28 29 45

2 2 2

CB-TEST canceled due to Power Testing Sys. Fault (CB-TSTstop FLT.) CB-TEST canceled due to CB already OPEN (CB-TSTstop OPEN) CB-TEST canceled due to CB was NOT READY (CB-TSTstop NOTr) CB-TEST canceled due to CB stayed CLOSED (CB-TSTstop CLOS) CB-TEST was succesful (CBTST .OK.) >BLOCK 59-Vphg Overvolt. (phase-ground) (>59-Vphg BLOCK) >BLOCK 59-Vphph Overvolt (phase-phase) (>59-Vphph BLOCK) >BLOCK 59-3V0 Overvolt. (zero sequence) (>59-3V0 BLOCK) >BLOCK 59-V1 Overvolt. (positive seq.) (>59-V1 BLOCK) >BLOCK 59-V2 Overvolt. (negative seq.) (>59-V2 BLOCK) >BLOCK 27-Vphg Undervolt. (phase-ground) (>27-Vphg BLOCK) >BLOCK 27-Vphph Undervolt (phase-phase) (>27-Vphph BLOCK) Testing

OUT_ ON Ev OUT_ ON Ev OUT_ ON Ev OUT_ ON Ev OUT_ ON Ev SP *

7348

Testing

7349

Testing

7350 10201

Testing 27/59 O/U Volt.

* * * LED BI BO

10202

27/59 O/U Volt.

SP

LED BI

BO

10203 10204 10205 10206

27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt.

SP SP SP SP

* * * *

* * * *

* * * *

LED BI LED BI LED BI LED BI

BO BO BO BO

10207

27/59 O/U Volt.

SP

LED BI

BO

566

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

A.8 Information List

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

10208 10215 10216 10217 10218 10219 10220 10221 10222 10223 10224 10225 10226 10227 10228 10229 10230 10231 10240 10241 10242 10243 10244 10245 10246 10247 10255 10256

>BLOCK 27-V1 Undervolt (positive seq.) (>27-V1 BLOCK) 59-Vphg Overvolt. is switched OFF (59-Vphg OFF) 59-Vphg Overvolt. is BLOCKED (59-Vphg BLK) 59-Vphph Overvolt. is switched OFF (59-Vphph OFF)

27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt.

SP OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED BI LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO 73 73 73 47 55 56 2 2 2 Yes Yes Yes 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 40 41 42 43 44 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

ON * OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON * OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON * OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON * OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON * OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON * OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON * OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON * OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON * OFF * * * * * * * * * * ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF * * ON ON OFF ON OFF

59-Vphph Overvolt. is BLOCKED 27/59 O/U Volt. (59-Vphph BLK) 59-3V0 Overvolt. is switched OFF 27/59 O/U Volt. (59-3V0 OFF) 59-3V0 Overvolt. is BLOCKED (59-3V0 BLK) 59-V1 Overvolt. is switched OFF (59-V1 OFF) 59-V1 Overvolt. is BLOCKED (59-V1 BLK) 59-V2 Overvolt. is switched OFF (59-V2 OFF) 59-V2 Overvolt. is BLOCKED (59-V2 BLK) 27-Vphg Undervolt. is switched OFF (27-Vphg OFF) 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt.

27-Vphg Undervolt. is BLOCKED 27/59 O/U Volt. (27-Vphg BLK) 27-Vphph Undervolt. is switched OFF (27-Vphph OFF) 27-Vphph Undervolt. is BLOCKED (27-Vphph BLK) 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt.

27-V1 Undervolt. is switched OFF 27/59 O/U Volt. (27-V1 OFF) 27-V1 Undervolt. is BLOCKED (27-V1 BLK) 27/59 Voltage protection is ACTIVE (27/59 ACTIVE) 59-1-Vphg Pickup (59-1-Vpg Pickup) 59-2-Vphg Pickup (59-2-Vpg Pickup) 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt.

59-Vphg Pickup A (59-Vpg PU A) 27/59 O/U Volt. 59-Vphg Pickup B (59-Vpg PU B) 27/59 O/U Volt. 59-Vphg Pickup C (59-Vpg PU C) 27/59 O/U Volt. 59-1-Vphg TimeOut (59-1-VpgTimeOut) 59-2-Vphg TimeOut (59-2-VpgTimeOut) 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt.

59-Vphg TRIP command (59-Vpg 27/59 O/U Volt. TRIP) 59-1-Vphph Pickup (59-1-Vpp Pickup) 59-2-Vphph Pickup (59-2-Vpp Pickup) 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt.

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

567

A Appendix

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

10257 10258 10259 10260 10261 10262 10270 10271 10272 10273 10274 10280 10281 10282 10283 10284 10290 10291 10292 10293 10294 10300 10301 10302 10303 10304 10310 10311

59-Vphph Pickup A-B (59-Vpp PickupAB) 59-Vphph Pickup B-C (59-Vpp PickupBC) 59-Vphph Pickup C-A (59-Vpp PickupCA) 59-1-Vphph TimeOut (59-1-VppTimeOut) 59-2-Vphph TimeOut (59-2-VppTimeOut) 59-Vphph TRIP command (59Vpp TRIP) 59-1-3V0 Pickup (59-1-3V0 Pickup) 59-2-3V0 Pickup (59-2-3V0 Pickup) 59-1-3V0 TimeOut (59-13V0TimeOut) 59-2-3V0 TimeOut (59-23V0TimeOut) 59-3V0 TRIP command (59-3V0 TRIP)

27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt.

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF * * ON ON OFF ON OFF * * ON ON OFF ON OFF * * ON ON OFF ON OFF * * ON ON OFF ON OFF * * ON ON OFF ON OFF

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO

73 73 73

57 58 59

2 2 2

73 73 73

62 70 71

2 2 2

73 73 73

74 80 81

2 2 2

59-1-V1 Pickup (59-1-V1 Pickup) 27/59 O/U Volt. 59-2-V1 Pickup (59-2-V1 Pickup) 27/59 O/U Volt. 59-1-V1 TimeOut (59-1V1TimeOut) 59-2-V1 TimeOut (59-2V1TimeOut) 59-V1 TRIP command (59-V1 TRIP) 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt.

73 73 73

84 90 91

2 2 2

59-1-V2 Pickup (59-1-V2 Pickup) 27/59 O/U Volt. 59-2-V2 Pickup (59-2-V2 Pickup) 27/59 O/U Volt. 59-1-V2 TimeOut (59-1V2TimeOut) 59-2-V2 TimeOut (59-2V2TimeOut) 59-V2 TRIP command (59-V2 TRIP) 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt.

73 73 73

94 100 101

2 2 2

27-1-V1 Pickup (27-1-V1 Pickup) 27/59 O/U Volt. 27-2-V1 Pickup (27-2-V1 Pickup) 27/59 O/U Volt. 27-1-V1TimeOut (27-1V1TimeOut) 27-2-V1TimeOut (27-2V1TimeOut) 27-V1 TRIP command (27-V1 TRIP) 27-1-Vphg Pickup (27-1-Vpg Pickup) 27-2-Vphg Pickup (27-2-Vpg Pickup) 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt.

73 73 73

104 110 111

2 2 2

568

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

A.8 Information List

No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log ON/OFF

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF

10312 10313 10314 10315 10316 10317 10325 10326 10327 10328 10329 10330 10331 10332

27-Vphg Pickup A (27-Vpg PU A) 27/59 O/U Volt. 27-Vphg Pickup B (27-Vpg PU B) 27/59 O/U Volt. 27-Vphg Pickup C (27-Vpg PU C) 27/59 O/U Volt. 27-1-Vphg TimeOut (27-1-VpgTimeOut) 27-2-Vphg TimeOut (27-2-VpgTimeOut) 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt.

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

* * * * * * * * * * * * * *

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF * * ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF * * ON

* * * * * * * * * * * * * *

LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED

BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO BO

73 73 73

112 113 114

2 2 2

27-Vphg TRIP command (27-Vpg 27/59 O/U Volt. TRIP) 27-1-Vphph Pickup (27-1-Vpp Pickup) 27-2-Vphph Pickup (27-2-Vpp Pickup) 27-Vphph Pickup A-B (27-Vpp PU AB) 27-Vphph Pickup B-C (27-Vpp PU BC) 27-Vphph Pickup C-A (27-Vpp PU CA) 27-1-Vphph TimeOut (27-1-VppTimeOut) 27-2-Vphph TimeOut (27-2-VppTimeOut) 27-Vphph TRIP command (27Vpp TRIP) 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt. 27/59 O/U Volt.

73 73 73 73 73 73

117 125 126 127 128 129

2 2 2 2 2 2

73

132

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

General Interrogation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Chatter Suppression

Information Number

Event Log ON/OFF

Function Key

Binary Input

Type of Informatio n

Log Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Data Unit

Relay

Type

LED

569

A Appendix

A.9

Group Alarms
No. Description Error Sum Alarm 144 181 192 194 162 163 165 167 168 169 170 171 177 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 193 361 162 163 165 167 168 Function No. Description Error 5V Error A/D-conv. Error1A/5Awrong Error neutralCT Failure I Fail I balance Fail V Ph-G Fail V balance Fail V absent VT FuseFail>10s VT FuseFail Fail Ph. Seq. Fail Battery Error Board 1 Error Board 2 Error Board 3 Error Board 4 Error Board 5 Error Board 6 Error Board 7 Error Board 0 Alarm adjustm. >FAIL:Feeder VT Failure I Fail I balance Fail V Ph-G Fail V balance Fail V absent

140

160

Alarm Sum Event

161 164

Fail I Superv. Fail V Superv.

570

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.10 Measured Values

A.10 Measured Values

No.

Description

Function Information Number

IEC 60870-5-103 Compatibility

Configurable in Matrix Control Display Default Display DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD

Data Unit

Position

Type

601 602 603 610 611 612 613 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 641 642 643

Control DIGSI (CntrlDIGSI) I A dmd> (I Admd>) I B dmd> (I Bdmd>) I C dmd> (I Cdmd>) I1dmd> (I1dmd>) |Pdmd|> (|Pdmd|>) |Qdmd|> (|Qdmd|>) |Sdmd|> (|Sdmd|>) |Power Factor|< (|PF|<) Ia (Ia =) Ib (Ib =) Ic (Ic =) 3I0 (zero sequence) (3I0 =) 3I0sen (sensitive zero sequence) (3I0sen=) Ig (grounded transformer) (Ig =) 3I0par (parallel line neutral) (3I0par=) I1 (positive sequence) (I1 I2 (negative sequence) (I2 Va (Va =) Vb (Vb =) Vc (Vc =) Va-b (Va-b=) Vb-c (Vb-c=) Vc-a (Vc-a=) VN (VN =) 3V0 (zero sequence) (3V0 =) Vsync (synchronism) (Vsync =) Vx (separate VT) (Vx =) =) =) V1 (positive sequence) (V1 V2 (negative sequence) (V2 V-diff (line-bus) (Vdiff =) V-line (Vline =) V-bus (Vbus =) P (active power) (P =) Q (reactive power) (Q =) Power Factor (PF =) =) =)

Cntrl Authority Set Points(MV) Set Points(MV) Set Points(MV) Set Points(MV) Set Points(MV) Set Points(MV) Set Points(MV) Set Points(MV) Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement

128 134 128 134 128 134 128 134 128 134 128 134 134 134 134 130 130 130 128 134 128 134 -

148 129 148 129 148 129 148 129 148 129 148 129 129 129 129 1 1 1 148 129 148 129 -

Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No No No No No No No Yes No Yes No -

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 -

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 10 11 12 2 3 1 7 7 8 8 -

CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC

CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

571

A Appendix

No.

Description

Function Information Number

IEC 60870-5-103 Compatibility

Configurable in Matrix Control Display Default Display DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD

Data Unit

Position

Type

644 645 646 647 648 649 679 684 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 867 868 869

Frequency (Freq=) S (apparent power) (S =) Frequency (busbar) (F-bus =) Frequency (difference line-bus) (F-diff=) Angle (difference line-bus) (-diff=) Frequency (line) (F-line=) U1co (positive sequence, compounding) (U1co=) Vo (zero sequence) (Vo =) I1 (positive sequence) Demand (I1 dmd=) Active Power Demand (P dmd =) Reactive Power Demand (Q dmd =) Apparent Power Demand (S dmd =) I A Demand Minimum (IAdmdMin) I A Demand Maximum (IAdmdMax) I B Demand Minimum (IBdmdMin) I B Demand Maximum (IBdmdMax) I C Demand Minimum (ICdmdMin) I C Demand Maximum (ICdmdMax) I1 (positive sequence) Demand Minimum (I1dmdMin) I1 (positive sequence) Demand Maximum (I1dmdMax) Active Power Demand Minimum (PdMin=) Active Power Demand Maximum (PdMax=) Reactive Power Demand Maximum (QdMax=) Apparent Power Demand Maximum (SdMax=) Ia Min (Ia Min=) Ia Max (Ia Max=) Ib Min (Ib Min=) Ib Max (Ib Max=) Ic Min (Ic Min=) Ic Max (Ic Max=) I1 (positive sequence) Minimum (I1 Min=) I1 (positive sequence) Maximum (I1 Max=) Va-n Min (Va-nMin=) Va-n Max (Va-nMax=) Vb-n Min (Vb-nMin=) Vb-n Max (Vb-nMax=) Vc-n Min (Vc-nMin=) Vc-n Max (Vc-nMax=) Va-b Min (Va-bMin=) Va-b Max (Va-bMax=) Vb-c Min (Vb-cMin=) Vb-c Max (Vb-cMax=)

Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Demand meter Demand meter Demand meter Demand meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter

128 134 130 130 130 130 -

148 129 1 1 1 1 -

Yes No No No No No -

9 9 9 9 9 9 -

9 9 4 5 6 7 -

CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC

CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD

Reactive Power Demand Minimum (QdMin=) Min/Max meter

Apparent Power Demand Minimum (SdMin=) Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter

572

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.10 Measured Values

No.

Description

Function Information Number

IEC 60870-5-103 Compatibility

Configurable in Matrix Control Display Default Display DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD

Data Unit

Position

Type

870 871 874 875 880 881 882 883 888 888 889 889 924 924 925 925 928 928 929 929 963 964 965 966 967 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046

Vc-a Min (Vc-aMin=) Vc-a Max (Vc-aMax=)

Min/Max meter Min/Max meter

133 133 133 133 133 133 -

55 56 51 52 53 54 -

No No No No No No -

205 205 205 205 205 205 -

CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC

CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD

V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Minimum (V1 Min/Max meter Min =) V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Maximum (V1 Max =) Apparent Power Minimum (Smin=) Apparent Power Maximum (Smax=) Frequency Minimum (fmin=) Frequency Maximum (fmax=) Pulsed Energy Wp (active) (Wp(puls)) Pulsed Energy Wp (active) (Wp(puls)) Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive) (Wq(puls)) Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive) (Wq(puls)) Wp Forward (Wp+=) Wp Forward (Wp+=) Wq Forward (Wq+=) Wq Forward (Wq+=) Wp Reverse (Wp-=) Wp Reverse (Wp-=) Wq Reverse (Wq-=) Wq Reverse (Wq-=) I A demand (Ia dmd=) I B demand (Ib dmd=) I C demand (Ic dmd=) Ra-g (Ra-g =) Rb-g (Rb-g =) Rc-g (Rc-g =) Ra-b (Ra-b =) Rb-c (Rb-c =) Rc-a (Rc-a =) Xa-g (Xa-g =) Xb-g (Xb-g =) Xc-g (Xc-g =) Xa-b (Xa-b =) Xb-c (Xb-c =) Xc-a (Xc-a =) Active Power Minimum Forward (Pmin Forw=) Active Power Maximum Forward (Pmax Forw=) Active Power Minimum Reverse (Pmin Rev =) Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Energy Energy Energy Energy Energy Energy Energy Energy Energy Energy Energy Energy Demand meter Demand meter Demand meter Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter

CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC

CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD

Active Power Maximum Reverse (Pmax Rev Min/Max meter =) Reactive Power Minimum Forward (Qmin Forw=) Reactive Power Maximum Forward (Qmax Forw=) Reactive Power Minimum Reverse (Qmin Rev =) Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

573

A Appendix

No.

Description

Function Information Number

IEC 60870-5-103 Compatibility

Configurable in Matrix Control Display Default Display DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD

Data Unit

Position

Type

1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 7751 7752 7753 7754 7755 7756 7761 7781 7801 10102 10103 14000 14001 14002 14003 14004 14005 14010 14011 14012 14013 14014 14015 14020 14021 14022 14023 14024 14025 14030 14031 14032 14033

Reactive Power Maximum Reverse (Qmax Rev =) Power Factor Minimum Forward (PFminForw=) Power Factor Maximum Forward (PFmaxForw=) Power Factor Minimum Reverse (PFmin Rev=) Power Factor Maximum Reverse (PFmax Rev=) Active Power Demand Forward (Pdmd Forw=) Active Power Demand Reverse (Pdmd Rev =) Reactive Power Demand Forward (Qdmd Forw=) Reactive Power Demand Reverse (Qdmd Rev =) Prot Int 1: Transmission delay (PI1 TD) Prot Int 2: Transmission delay (PI2 TD) Prot Int 1: Availability per min. (PI1A/m) Prot Int 1: Availability per hour (PI1A/h) Prot Int 2: Availability per min. (PI2A/m) Prot Int 2: Availability per hour (PI2A/h) Relay ID of 1st. relay (Relay ID) Relay ID of 2nd. relay (Relay ID) Relay ID of 3rd. relay (Relay ID) Max. Zero Sequence Voltage 3V0 (3V0max =) Ia (primary) (Ia Angle Ia (Ia =) Ib (primary) (Ib Angle Ib (Ib =) Ic (primary) (Ic Angle Ic (Ic =) Va (primary) (Va Angle Va (Va =) Vb (primary) (Vb Angle Vb (Vb =) Vc (primary) (Vc Angle Vc (Vc =) Ia (primary) (Ia Angle Ia (Ia =) Ib (primary) (Ib Angle Ib (Ic =) Ic (primary) (Ic Angle Ic (Ic =) Va (primary) (Va Angle Va (Va =) Vb (primary) (Vb Angle Vb (Vb =) =) =) =) =) =) =) =) =) =) =) =)

Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Min/Max meter Demand meter Demand meter Demand meter Demand meter Statistics Statistics Statistics Statistics Statistics Statistics Measure relay1 Measure relay2 Measure relay3 Min/Max meter Measure relay1 Measure relay1 Measure relay1 Measure relay1 Measure relay1 Measure relay1 Measure relay1 Measure relay1 Measure relay1 Measure relay1 Measure relay1 Measure relay1 Measure relay2 Measure relay2 Measure relay2 Measure relay2 Measure relay2 Measure relay2 Measure relay2 Measure relay2 Measure relay2 Measure relay2

CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC

CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD

Min. Zero Sequence Voltage 3V0 (3V0min =) Min/Max meter

574

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

A.10 Measured Values

No.

Description

Function Information Number

IEC 60870-5-103 Compatibility

Configurable in Matrix Control Display Default Display DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD

Data Unit

Position

Type

14034 14035 14040 14041 14042 14043 14044 14045 14050 14051 14052 14053 14054 14055

Vc (primary) (Vc Angle Vc (Vc =) Ia (primary) (Ia Angle Ia (Ia =) Ib (primary) (Ib Angle Ib (Ic =) Ic (primary) (Ic Angle Ic (Ic =) Va (primary) (Va Angle Va (Va =) Vb (primary) (Vb Angle Vb (Vb =) Vc (primary) (Vc Angle Vc (Vc =)

=) =) =) =) =) =) =)

Measure relay2 Measure relay2 Measure relay3 Measure relay3 Measure relay3 Measure relay3 Measure relay3 Measure relay3 Measure relay3 Measure relay3 Measure relay3 Measure relay3 Measure relay3 Measure relay3

CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC

CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

575

A Appendix

576

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Literature
/1/ /2/ /3/ /4/ SIPROTEC 4 System Description; E50417-H1176-C151-A2 SIPROTEC DIGSI, Start UP; E50417-G1176-C152-A2 DIGSI CFC, Manual; E50417-H1176-C098-A4 SIPROTEC SIGRA 4, Manual; E50417-H1176-C070-A2

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

577

Literature

578

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Glossary
Battery The buffer battery ensures that specified data areas, flags, timers and counters are retained retentively. Bay controllers are devices with control and monitoring functions without protective functions. Bit pattern indication is a processing function by means of which items of digital process information applying across several inputs can be detected together in parallel and processed further. The bit pattern length can be specified as 1, 2, 3 or 4 bytes. Bit pattern indication (Bitstring Of x Bit), x designates the length in bits (8, 16, 24 or 32 bits). Command without feedback Command with feedback Continuous Function Chart. CFC is a graphics editor with which a program can be created and configured by using ready-made blocks. Blocks are parts of the user program delimited by their function, their structure or their purpose. A rapidly intermittent input (for example, due to a relay contact fault) is switched off after a configurable monitoring time and can thus not generate any further signal changes. The function prevents overloading of the system when a fault arises. Combination devices are bay devices with protection functions and a control display.

Bay controllers

Bit pattern indication

BP_xx

C_xx CF_xx CFC

CFC blocks

Chatter blocking

Combination devices Combination matrix

DIGSI V4.6 and higher allows up to 32 compatible SIPROTEC 4 devices to communicate with each other in an inter-relay communication network (IRC). The combination matrix defines which devices exchange which information. A communications branch corresponds to the configuration of 1 to n users which communicate by means of a common bus. The communication reference describes the type and version of a station in communication by PROFIBUS.

Communication branch Communication reference CR

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

579

Glossary

Component view

In addition to a topological view, SIMATIC Manager offers you a component view. The component view does not offer any overview of the hierarchy of a project. It does, however, provide an overview of all the SIPROTEC 4 devices within a project. Common Format for Transient Data Exchange, format for fault records. If an object can contain other objects, it is called a container. The object Folder is an example of such a container. The image which is displayed on devices with a large (graphic) display after pressing the control key is called control display. It contains the switchgear that can be controlled in the feeder with status display. It is used to perform switching operations. Defining this diagram is part of the configuration. The right-hand area of the project window displays the contents of the area selected in the navigation window, for example indications, measured values, etc. of the information lists or the function selection for the device configuration. The extremely precise official time is determined in Germany by the "PhysikalischTechnischen-Bundesanstalt PTB" in Braunschweig. The atomic clock unit of the PTB transmits this time via the long-wave time-signal transmitter in Mainflingen near Frankfurt/Main. The emitted time signal can be received within a radius of approx. 1,500 km from Frankfurt/Main. In the Component View, all SIPROTEC 4 devices are assigned to an object of type Device container. This object is a special object of DIGSI Manager. However, since there is no component view in DIGSI Manager, this object only becomes visible in conjunction with STEP 7. Double commands are process outputs which indicate 4 process states at 2 outputs: 2 defined (for example ON/OFF) and 2 undefined states (for example intermediate positions) Double-point indications are items of process information which indicate 4 process states at 2 inputs: 2 defined (for example ON/OFF) and 2 undefined states (for example intermediate positions). Double-point indication Double point indication, intermediate position 00 Copying, moving and linking function, used at graphics user interfaces. Objects are selected with the mouse, held and moved from one data area to another. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical apparatus to function fault-free in a specified environment without influencing the environment unduly. Electromagnetic compatibility

COMTRADE Container

Control display

Data pane

DCF77

Device container

Double command

Double-point indication

DP DP_I Drag & Drop

Electromagnetic compatibility EMC

580

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Glossary

ESD protection

ESD protection is the total of all the means and measures used to protect electrostatic sensitive devices. External bit pattern indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific Bit pattern indication External command without feedback via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific External command with feedback via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific External double point indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific Double-point indication External double-point indication via an ETHERNET connection, intermediate position 00, Double-point indication External metered value via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific External single point indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific, Single-point indication External single point indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific, Fleeting indication, Single-point indication Generic term for all devices assigned to the field level: Protection devices, combination devices, bay controllers. Without electrical connection to the ground. Within an FMS communication branch the users communicate on the basis of the PROFIBUS FMS protocol via a PROFIBUS FMS network. This object type is used to create the hierarchical structure of a project. During the system start-up the state of all the process inputs, of the status and of the fault image is sampled. This information is used to update the system-end process image. The current process state can also be sampled after a data loss by means of a GI. GOOSE messages (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) are data packages which are transferred event-controlled via the Ethernet communication system. They serve for direct information exchange among the relays. This mechanism implements cross-communication between bay units. Global Positioning System. Satellites with atomic clocks on board orbit the earth twice a day in different parts in approx. 20,000 km. They transmit signals which also contain the GPS universal time. The GPS receiver determines its own position from the

ExBPxx

ExC ExCF ExDP

ExDP_I

ExMV ExSI

ExSI_F

Field devices

Floating FMS communication branch Folder General interrogation (GI)

GOOSE message

GPS

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

581

Glossary

signals received. From its position it can derive the running time of a satellite and thus correct the transmitted GPS universal time. Ground The conductive ground whose electric potential can be set equal to zero in any point. In the area of ground electrodes the ground can have a potential deviating from zero. The term "Ground reference plane" is often used for this state. Grounding means that a conductive part is to connect via a grounding system to ground. Grounding is the total of all means and measured used for grounding. Within a structure with higher-level and lower-level objects a hierarchy level is a container of equivalent objects. The HV project description file contains details of fields which exist in a ModPara project. The actual field information of each field is memorized in a HV field description file. Within the HV project description file, each field is allocated such a HV field description file by a reference to the file name. All the data is exported once the configuration and parameterization of PCUs and submodules using ModPara has been completed. This data is split up into several files. One file contains details about the fundamental project structure. This also includes, for example, information detailing which fields exist in this project. This file is called a HV project description file. Internal double point indication Double-point indication Internal double point indication intermediate position 00, Double-point indication International Electrotechnical Commission Within an IEC bus a unique IEC address has to be assigned to each SIPROTEC 4 device. A total of 254 IEC addresses are available for each IEC bus. Within an IEC communication branch the users communicate on the basis of the IEC60-870-5-103 protocol via an IEC bus. Worldwide communication standard for communication in substations. This standard allows devices from different manufacturers to interoperate on the station bus. Data transfer is accomplished through an Ethernet network. An initialization string comprises a range of modem-specific commands. These are transmitted to the modem within the framework of modem initialization. The commands can, for example, force specific settings for the modem. IRC combination

Grounding

Grounding Hierarchy level

HV field description

HV project description

ID ID_S IEC IEC address

IEC communication branch IEC61850

Initialization string

Inter relay communication

582

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Glossary

IRC combination

Inter Relay Communication, IRC, is used for directly exchanging process information between SIPROTEC 4 devices. You require an object of type IRC combination to configure an Inter Relay Communication. Each user of the combination and all the necessary communication parameters are defined in this object. The type and scope of the information exchanged among the users is also stored in this object. Time signal code of the Inter-Range Instrumentation Group Internal single-point indication Single-point indication Single-point indication fleeting Transient information, Single point indication The ISO 9000 ff range of standards defines measures used to ensure the quality of a product from the development stage to the manufacturing stage. The link address gives the address of a V3/V2 device. The right pane of the project window displays the names and icons of objects which represent the contents of a container selected in the tree view. Because they are displayed in the form of a list, this area is called the list view. Limit value Limit value user-defined Masters may send data to other users and request data from other users. DIGSI operates as a master. Metered values are a processing function with which the total number of discrete similar events (counting pulses) is determined for a period, usually as an integrated value. In power supply companies the electrical work is usually recorded as a metered value (energy purchase/supply, energy transportation). MLFB is the acronym of "MaschinenLesbare FabrikateBezeichnung" (machine-readable product designation). It is equivalent to the order number. The type and version of a SIPROTEC 4 device are coded in the order number. This object type contains information on both partners of a modem connection, the local modem and the remote modem. A modem profile consists of the name of the profile, a modem driver and may also comprise several initialization commands and a user address. You can create several modem profiles for one physical modem. To do so you need to link various initialization commands or user addresses to a modem driver and its properties and save them under different names. Modem profiles for a modem connection are saved in this object type.

IRIG-B IS IS_F ISO 9001

Link address List view

LV LVU Master

Metered value

MLFB

Modem connection

Modem profile

Modems

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

583

Glossary

MV MVMV MVT MVU Navigation pane

Measured value Metered value which is formed from the measured value Measured value with time Measured value, user-defined The left pane of the project window displays the names and symbols of all containers of a project in the form of a folder tree. Each element of a project structure is called an object in DIGSI. Each object has properties. These might be general properties that are common to several objects. An object can also have specific properties. In Offline mode a link with the SIPROTEC 4 device is not necessary. You work with data which are stored in files. Output indication fleeting Transient information When working in On-line mode, there is a physical link to a SIPROTEC 4 device which can be implemented in various ways. This link can be implemented as a direct connection, as a modem connection or as a PROFIBUS FMS connection. Output indication The parameter set is the set of all parameters that can be set for a SIPROTEC 4 device. User addresses for a modem connection are saved in this object type. Pulse metered value It is possible a direct communication with the SICAM HV-modules with devices featuring a process bus interface. The process bus interface is equipped with an Ethernet module. PROcess FIeld BUS, the German process and field bus standard, as specified in the standard EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS. It defines the functional, electrical, and mechanical properties for a bit-serial field bus. Within a PROFIBUS network a unique PROFIBUS address has to be assigned to each SIPROTEC 4 device. A total of 254 PROFIBUS addresses are available for each PROFIBUS network.

Object Object properties

Offline

OI_F Online

OUT Parameter set

Phone book PMV Process bus

PROFIBUS

PROFIBUS address

584

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Glossary

Project

Content-wise, a project is the image of a real power supply system. Graphically, a project is represented by a number of objects which are integrated in a hierarchical structure. Physically, a project consists of a series of folders and files containing project data. All devices with a protective function and no control display. Frequent addition and deletion of objects gives rise to memory areas that can no longer be used. By cleaning up projects, you can release these memory areas again. However, a clean up also reassigns the VD addresses. The consequence of that is that all SIPROTEC 4 devices have to be reinitialised. Relay data Interchange format by Omicron. Serial interfaces RS232, RS422/485 Rear serial interface on the devices for connecting to a control system via IEC or PROFIBUS. Rear serial interface on the devices for connecting DIGSI (for example, via modem). General term for all adjustments made to the device. Parameterization jobs are executed by means of DIGSI or, in some cases, directly on the device. Single point indication Single-point indication fleeting Transient information, Single point indication Modularly structured station control system, based on the substation controller SICAM SC and the SICAM WinCC operator control and monitoring system. Substation Controller. Modularly structured substation control system, based on the SIMATIC M7 automation system. The SICAM WinCC operator control and monitoring system displays the state of your network graphically, visualizes alarms, interrupts and indications, archives the network data, offers the possibility of intervening manually in the process and manages the system rights of the individual employee. Single commands are process outputs which indicate 2 process states (for example, ON/OFF) at one output. Single indications are items of process information which indicate 2 process states (for example, ON/OFF) at one output. The registered trademark SIPROTEC is used for devices implemented on system base V4.

Protection devices Reorganizing

RIO file RSxxx interface SCADA interface

Service port Setting parameters

SI SI_F SICAM SAS

SICAM SC

SICAM WinCC

Single command

Single point indication SIPROTEC

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

585

Glossary

SIPROTEC 4 variant

This object type represents a variant of an object of type SIPROTEC 4 device. The device data of this variant may well differ from the device data of the source object. However, all variants derived from the source object have the same VD address as the source object. For this reason they always correspond to the same real SIPROTEC 4 device as the source object. Objects of type SIPROTEC 4 variant have a variety of uses, such as documenting different operating states when entering parameter settings of a SIPROTEC 4 device. This object type represents a real SIPROTEC 4 device with all the setting values and process data it contains. A slave may only exchange data with a master after being prompted to do so by the master. SIPROTEC 4 devices operate as slaves. Time stamp is the assignment of the real time to a process event. DIGSI Manager always displays a project in the topological view. This shows the hierarchical structure of a project with all available objects. Transformer tap indication is a processing function on the DI by means of which the tap of the transformer tap changer can be detected together in parallel and processed further. A transient information is a brief transient single-point indication at which only the coming of the process signal is detected and processed immediately. The left pane of the project window displays the names and symbols of all containers of a project in the form of a folder tree. This area is called the tree view. Transformer Tap Indication A user address comprises the name of the station, the national code, the area code and the user-specific phone number. Up to 16 compatible SIPROTEC 4 devices can communicate with one another in an Inter Relay Communication combination. The individual participating devices are called users. A VD (Virtual Device) includes all communication objects and their properties and states that are used by a communication user through services. A VD can be a physical device, a module of a device or a software module. The VD address is assigned automatically by DIGSI Manager. It exists only once in the entire project and thus serves to identify unambiguously a real SIPROTEC 4 device. The VD address assigned by DIGSI Manager must be transferred to the SIPROTEC 4 device in order to allow communication with DIGSI Device Editor. A VFD (Virtual Field Device) includes all communication objects and their properties and states that are used by a communication user through services.

SIPROTEC 4 device

Slave

Time stamp Topological view Transformer tap indication

Transient information Tree view

TxTap User address

Users

VD

VD address

VFD

586

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Index

Index
A
AC Voltage 429 Acknowledgement of Commands 365 Adaptive Dead Time (ADT) 248 Additional Measured Voltage Failure Monitoring 318 Analog Inputs 428 Angle of Inclination of the Tripping Characteristic 75 Annunciation for General Interrogation 347 Annunciations 346 Automatic reclosing Action times 230 Blocking 232 CB auxiliary contacts 233 Control 241 External automatic reclosing device 240 Initiation 230 Operating modes 231 Repeatedly 235 Single-/three-pole reclose cycle 235 Single-pole reclose cycle 234 Three-pole reclose cycle 234 Automatic Reclosing Commands 348 Automatic reclosing function 228 Automatic reclosure Circuit breaker test 332 Automatic Reclosure 79 462 Auxiliary contacts of the CB 298 Auxiliary Functions 344, 477 Auxiliary Voltage 372, 428 Averages 352 Check: Phase Rotation 410 Check: Termination 393 Checking System Connections 395 Checking Time Synchronization 398 Checking: Binary Inputs and Outputs 401 Checking: Circuit Breaker Failure Protection 407 Checking: Current and Voltage Connection 409 Checking: Direction 410 Checking: Operator Interface 392 Checking: Service Interface 392 Checking: System Interface 392 Checking: Time Synchronization Interface 393 Checking: Tripping/Closing for the configured Operating Devices 424 Checking: User-defined Functions 423 Checks: Polarity for the Current Measuring Input I4 414 Checks: Polarity for Voltage Input V4 411 Checks: Voltage Transformer Miniature Circuit Breaker (VT mcb) 410 Circuit Breaker Closing Time 46 Malfunction 304 Position Detection 330 Circuit breaker External local trip 208 Position logic 331 Test 46 Test programs 341 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection 470 Circuit breaker failure protection 296 Circuit Breaker not Operational 308 Circuit Breaker Status 55 Climatic Stress Tests 437 Closing at Asynchronous System Conditions 260 Closing at Synchronous System Conditions 260 Closing Check Operating Modes 259 Command 360 Command Duration 341 Command Durations 46 Command Execution 361 Command Output 365 Command Path 360 Command Processing 359 Command Types 359 Communication 24 Communication Converter 404 Communication Failure 120 Communication Interfaces 431 Communication Media 118 Communication Topology 117

B
Battery 311 Binary Inputs 429 Binary Outputs 344 Blocking 164 Blocking 165 Breaker Failure Protection 306 Breaking Currents 348 Broken Conductor 314

C
Calculation of the Impedances 67 Certifications 438

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

587

Index

Comparison Schemes Ground Fault Protection 179 Configuration of Auto-reclosure 246 Configuration of Function Scope 35 Construction 438 Contact Mode for Binary Outputs 373 Control Logic 364 Control Voltage for Binary Inputs 373 Controlled Zone 91, 102 Conventional Transmission 148 Conventional Transmission (E/F) 192 Counters and Memories 347 Cross polarization 97 Cubicle Mounting 389 Current Flow Monitoring 297 Current Inputs 428 Current Symmetry 313 Current Transformer Saturation 55

Distance protection Ground impedance ratio 46 Distance Protection 21 64 Double Earth Faults in Non-earthed Systems 70 Double Faults in Effectively Grounded Systems 70 Double Ground Faults in Effectively Grounded Systems 75 Double Ground Faults in Non-grounded Systems 76

E
Echo Function 146 Echo Function (E/F) 195 Electrical Tests 434 Element 50(N) STUB 221 EMC Tests for Interference Immunity (type tests) 435 EMC Tests for Noise Emission (type test) 436 End Fault Protection 305 Exchanging Interfaces 373 External Direct and Remote Tripping 457

D
DC Voltage 428 De-energized Switching 260 Dead Line Check 247 Default displays 345 Definite Time Elements 166 Definite Time High Set Current Element 50N-2 155 Definite Time Overcurrent Element 50N-3 155 Definite Time Very High Set Current Element 50N1 154 Delay times for single-stage/two-stage circuit breaker protection 302 Dependent zone 87 Determination of Direction 82 Series-compensated Lines 85 Determination of direction MHO characteristic 94 Negative sequence system 162 Zero sequence system power (compensated) 162 Device and System Logic 515 Device Logout (Functional Logout) 123 Digital Transmission 149 Digital Transmission (E/F) 193 Direct Transfer Trip 133 Direction Check with Load Current 410 Direction determination Zero sequence system 161 Directional Blocking Scheme 142, 187 Directional characteristic 84 Directional comparison pickup 179 Directional Unblocking Scheme 138, 183 Display of Measured Values 349 Display panel 344 Distance Protection 26, 443

F
Failure of the Measuring Voltage 317 Fast tripping zone (MHO) 99 Fast tripping zone (polygon) 87 Fault Annunciations 39 Fault Annunciations (Buffer: Trip Log) 346 Fault direction 82 Fault location Ground impedance ratio 46 Fault Locator 469 Fault loops 82 Fault Protocol 478 Fault Recording 24, 62, 478 Fault recording 345 Feedback Monitoring 365 Final Preparation of the Device 426 Flush Mounting 479, 480 Forced Three-pole Trip 247 Frequency Measurement 286 Frequency Protection 468 Frequency protection Delay 289 Frequency elements 286 Operating ranges 287 Overfrequency protection 286 Pickup / tripping 287 Pickup values 289 Power Swings 287

588

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Index

Underfrequency protection 286 Frequency Protection (81) 286 Function Control 327 Function Modules 474 Functional Logout 120 Functional Scope 34 Fuse Failure Monitor 315

L
Life Contact 373 Limit Value Handling 519 Limit Value Monitoring 356 Limit values 356 Limits for CFC Blocks 475 Limits for User-defined Functions 475 Line Data 49 Line Energization Recognition 327 Long-term Average Values 352

G
General 34 Grading Coordination Chart 87 Ground Fault Detection 64, 74 Ground Fault Protection 444 Ground fault protection Determination of direction 171 Zero sequence power element 170 Ground Impedance (Residual) Compensation 51

M
Malfunction Responses 319 Measured Value Acquisition 312, 312 Measured Value Correction 293 Measured Values 471 Measured values 210 Measures for Weak and Zero Infeed 146 Measuring the Operating Time of the Circuit Breaker 418 Mechanical Tests 436 Memory Modules 311 MHO Circle 94 Pickup 99 Minimum Current 74 Monitoring Function 311 Monitoring with Binary Input 325 Mounting: Panel Surface Mounting 391

H
High-set current element 50(N)-B1 211 High-set stages 50B1, 50N-B1 217 Humidity 437

I
Independent Zones 87, 99 Independent zones 90, 101 Indications 346 Information to a Control Centre 346 Initiation breaker failure protection 299 Input/Output Board C-I/O-1 Input/Output Board C-I/O-10 377 Inrush Stabilization 161 Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection 50HS 461 Instantaneous tripping Before automatic reclosure 215 Insulation Test 435 Interlocking 516 Inverse Time Overcurrent Element 157 Inverse time overcurrent element (ground fault protection) IEC characteristic 167 Logarithmic inverse characteristic 168 Inverse Time Overcurrent Element 51N 155 Inverse time overcurrent stage (earth fault protection) ANSI characteristic 167

N
Nominal Currents 373 Nominal Frequency 45 Non-delayed Tripping 204

O
Open Pole Detector 333 Operating Interface 431 Operating Polygons 81 Operating Time of the Circuit Breaker 418 Operational Annunciations (Buffer: Event Log) 346 Operational Event Log Buffer 478 Operational measured values 349 Optical Fibres 394 Ordering Information 484 Oscillographic Recordings for Test 424 Output Relay 344 Output Relays Binary Outputs 429 Overcurrent element 50NB2 (Definite-time O/C protection) 218

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

589

Index

50B2 (Definite-time O/C protection) 218 51NB (Inverse-time O/C protection with IEC characteristics) 219 51B (inverse-time) 212 Overcurrent element 51N-B (Inverse-time O/C protection with ANSI characteristics) 220 Overcurrent element 51B (Inverse-time O/C protection with ANSI characteristics) 220 (Inverse-time O/C protection with IEC characteristics) 219 Overcurrent elements 50(N)-B2 (definite-time) 212 Overvoltage protection Compounding 270 Negative sequence system V2 271, 278 Phase-ground 277 Phase-phase 269, 277 Positive sequence system V1 269, 278 Zero sequence system 279 Zero sequence system 3V0 272 Overvoltage Protection 59 268

Power system data 2 49 Protection Data Interfaces and Communication Topology 456

R
Rack Mounting 389 Reading / Setting / Resetting 348 Real Time Clock and Buffer Battery 478 Reclosing Cycle 250, 251 Reclosure Cycle 249 Reduced Dead Time 247 Reference Voltages 311 Release Characteristic 94 Remote Annunciations 126 Remote Command 126 Remote Measured Values 350 Remote measured values 350 Remote tripping 208 Reset 353 Resistance Tolerance 88 Retrieved Annunciations 347 Retrieving Parameters 358

P
Parallel Line Measured Value Correction 72, 75 Parallel Line Mutual Impedance 54 Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip (POTT) 134 Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip with Zone Acceleration Z1B (PUTT) 130 Phase Current Stabilization 160 Phase Rotation Field Check 409 Phase Selection 204 Phase Selector 163 Phase-segregated initiation of the circuit breaker failure protection 300 Pickup and tripping logic 216 Pickup Logic for the Entire Device 334 Pickup value (SOTF-O/C)) 226 Pilot protection 129 Pilot Protection Schemes 129 Pilot protection w ith ground fault protection 172 Polarity Setting for the Current Measuring Input I4 414 Polarized MHO Circle 95 Pole Discrepancy Supervision 305 Polygonal characteristic 81 Power Metering 357 Power Supply 428 Power Swing Detection 442 Power system data 1 41

S
Scanning Frequency 312 Series-compensated lines 75 Service / Modem Interface 431 Service Conditions 437 Setting group switching 47 Setting groups 47 Setting Groups: Changing; Changing Setting Groups 369 Signal Transmission 126 Single-element Breaker Failure Protection 307 Single-pole Dead Time 334 Specifications 434 Spontaneous Annunciations 347 Spontaneous Fault Display 39 Standard Interlocking 362 Start Triggering Oscillographic Recording 424 Statistics 478, 478 Stub Protection 213 Supply Voltage 428 Switchgear Interlocking 361 Switching Onto a Fault 76, 215 Onto a fault 73 Onto a Ground Fault 165 Switching (Interlocked/Non-Interlocked) 361 Synchro-check 257 Synchronism Check 463

590

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Index

Synchronism Check Conditions before Automatic Reclosure 262 Synchronism Check Conditions before Manual Closing 263 System Interface 432

Voltage measuring inputs 43 Voltage Phase Sequence 315 Voltage Protection 465 Voltage protection 268 Voltage Symmetry 314

T
Temperatures 437 Terminating Interfaces with Bus Capability 374 Termination 393 Test Mode 398 Test: System Interface 399 Three-pole Coupling 57 Time Overcurrent Protection 50/51 458 Time Synchronization Interface 393 Transfer Trip to the Remote End Circuit Breaker 304 Transient Blocking 145, 150, 190 Transient Blocking (E/F) 194 Transmission Block 398 Transmission Channels 129 Transmission of Binary Information 473 Transmission Statistics 348 Trip Circuit Supervision 370 Trip Dependent Messages 39 Trip with Delay 205 Trip/Close Tests for the Configured Operating Devices 424 Tripping Logic 109 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device 335 Tripping Test with Circuit Breaker 423 Tripping zones 98 Trips 348 Two-element Breaker Failure Protection 306

W
Watchdog 313 Weak Infeed 455 Weak infeed 191 Weak Infeed 27WI 454 WI Transmission Scheme 198 WI Undervoltage 198

Z
Zero infeed 191 Zero Sequence Power Protection 159 Zero sequence voltage stages for single-phase voltage 273 Zero Voltage Time Protection 158 Zone Logic 104 Zone pickup 98 Inrush Stabilization 173 Phase Current Stabilization 173 Switching onto a Fault 173 Zero Sequence Voltage Element with Inverse Characteristic 169

U
Undervoltage protection Phase-earth 273 Phase-ground 279 Phase-phase 275, 280 Positive sequence system V1 276, 280 User Defined Functions 474

V
Vibration and Shock Stress during Stationary Operation 436 Vibration and Shock Stress During Transport 436 Voltage Inputs 428 Voltage Jump 201

591

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3

Index

592

7SA522 Manual C53000-G1140-C155-3